Encardio Combined Manuals

ONE STOP MONITORING SOLUTIONS | HYDROLOGY | GEOTECHNICAL | STRUCTURAL | GEODETIC
Over 50 years of excellence through ingenuity
USERS’ MANUAL
DIGITAL INCLINOMETER SYSTEM

OVERVIEW AND INSTALLATION
MODEL EAN-26
Doc. # WI 6002.104 R02 | Nov 2018
ENCARDIO-RITE ELECTRONICS PVT. LTD.

A-7, Industrial Estate, Talkatora Road Lucknow, UP - 226011, India | P: +91 522 2661039-42 | Email: geotech@encardio.com | www.encardio.com
International: UAE | Qatar | Bahrain | Bhutan | Europe | USA
India: Lucknow | Delhi | Kolkata | Mumbai | Chennai | Bangalore | Hyderabad | J&K
Users’ Manual EAN-26 Digital inclinometer overview and casing installation
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Displacement measurement 1
1.2 Casing storage 1
1.3 Conventions used in this manual 1
1.4 General information 1
1.5 How to use this manual 2
2 INCLINOMETER SYSTEM 3
2.1 Operating principle 3
2.2 General description - EAN-26 digital inclinometer system 3
2.2.1 Access casing and fittings 3
2.2.2 Digital inclinometer probe 5
2.2.3 Interconnecting cable with reel and cable holder 5
2.2.4 EAN-26CCJ Calibration check jig 6
2.2.5 Mobile phone datalogger 6
3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 7
3.1 Probe 7
3.2 Cable reel 7
3.3 Mobile phone datalogger (minimum requirements) 7
3.4 Accessories (to be ordered separately) 7
4 TOOLS & ACCESSORIES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION 9
5 INSTALLATION OF CASING 10
5.1 Preparation of casing before installation 10
5.1.1 Fixed coupling 10
5.1.2 Telescopic coupling 11
5.2 Installation in borehole 13
5.2.1 Borehole drilling 13
5.2.2 Installation of inclinometer casing in borehole 13
5.2.3 Grouting in borehole 14
5.2.4 Top cover 16
5.2.5 After installation check 17
5.2.6 Marking of grooves (sign convention) 17
5.3 Installation in diaphragm wall or pile 17
5.3.1 Preparation for installation in D-wall – MS casing 17
5.3.2 Installation of inclinometer casing in MS casing (D-wall) 18
5.3.3 Grouting in MS casing (D-wall) 19
5.3.4 Top cover 19
5.3.5 After installation checks 19
5.4 Installation in dam embankment (fill) – core section 20
5.4.1 Precaution for installation in embankment fill (core) 20
5.4.2 Protection of installation in embankment fill (core) 20
5.4.3 Installation of casing in embankment fill (core) 20
5.4.5 Top protection 21
5.5 Installation in dam embankment (fill) – crest 21
5.5.1 Precaution for installation in crest/rockfill section 21
5.5.2 Protection of installation in crest/rockfill section 21
5.5.3 Installation of casing in crest/rockfill section 21
www.encardio.com
5.5.5 Top protection 23
6 PREPARATION FOR AND OBTAINING READINGS 25

6.1 Sign convention 25
6.2 Determine as-built elevation using prism target 25
6.3 Connecting probe to cable reel 25
6.4 Taking readings 26
6.5 Guidelines for correct readings 27
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
The EAN-26 inclinometer system is used for reliable measurement of lateral movement in applications like:
 Earth movement in landslide zone.

 Detecting shear planes in hydraulic structures.
 Measuring stability during construction.
 Deflection of diaphragm/retaining walls and piles under load.
The inclinometer system provides significant quantitative data on magnitude of inclination and its variation
with time. It gives information on pattern of deformation and effectiveness of construction control measures.
It helps in monitoring behaviour after construction and indicates potentially dangerous conditions that may
adversely affect stability of the structure, its foundation and surrounding area. It also provides basic data
for design improvement that will promote safer and economical design and construction.
The EAN-26 digital inclinometer system is an accurate instrumentation system. Its readout has built-in data
storage facilities and capability of transferring stored data to a computer. The inclinometer probe operates
in a plastic grooved casing which may be “built-up” with embankment fill, inserted into boreholes or
attached externally to structures or hillsides. The inclinometer casing may be installed with telescopic
couplings as construction progresses providing opportunity for settlement measurements, or it may be
installed with butt joints in drill holes in abutments or completed embankments if no significant settlement
is anticipated.
1.1 Displacement measurement
For measurement of vertical displacement, magnetic targets may be fixed to access casing at selected
points. Measuring settlement by using inclinometer casing has largely replaced the earlier method using
separate settlement devices like the cross arm. The same installation is now used to measure settlement
as well as lateral movement. For details refer to data sheet 1098 “Magnetic Extensometer System”.
1.2 Casing storage
 Do not apply too much load or force on casing.
 Store all items in a proper place in a ventilated building under shade of a roof
 Do not warp or bend during storage.
 Avoid direct sunlight on plastic casing and accessories as it can cause deformation of casing.
1.3 Conventions used in this manual
WARNING! Warning messages calls attention to a procedure or practice, that if not properly followed
could possibly cause personal injury.
CAUTION: Caution messages calls attention to a procedure or practice, that if not properly followed may
result in loss of data or damage to equipment.
NOTE: Note contains important information and is set off from regular text to draw the users’ attention.
1.4 General information
This users’ manual is intended to provide you with sufficient information for installing and making optimum
use of ABS inclinometer casing. The manual also contains instructions on how to set-up for lowering
inclinometer probe into gage well for purpose of taking inclination readings.
NOTE: Installation personnel must have a background of good installation practices and knowledge
of the fundamentals of geotechnics. Novices may find it very difficult to carry on the installation
work. The intricacies involved in installation are such that even if a single essential but
Page | 1
apparently minor requirement is ignored or overlooked, the most reliable of instruments will
be rendered useless.
A lot of effort has been made in preparing this instruction manual. However the best of instruction manuals
cannot provide for each and every condition in the field, which may affect performance of the sensor. Also,
blindly following the instruction manual will not guarantee success. Sometimes, depending upon field
conditions, installation personnel will have to consciously depart from the written text and use their
knowledge and common sense to find the solution to a particular problem.
This equipment should be installed, maintained and operated by qualified personnel. Any errors or
omissions in installation, data or data interpretation are not the responsibility of Encardio-Rite Electronics
Pvt. Ltd.
For details on how to operate the inclinometer readout unit (mobile phone), please refer to operating
manual # WI 6002.103.
To make this manual more useful we invite your valuable comments and suggestions regarding any
additions or enhancements. We request you to please let us know of any errors that are found while going
through the manual.
1.5 How to use this manual
The manual is divided into a number of sections. Each section contains a specific type of information. The
list given below tells you where to look for in this manual if you need some specific information.
For principle of operation: See § 2.1 ‘Operating principle’.
For inclinometer system manufactured by Encardio-rite: See § 2.2 ‘General description’.
For specifications of the probe and data logger: See § 3 ‘system specifications’.
For essential tools and accessories: See § 4 ‘Tools and accessories required for installation’.
For installation of PVC casing: See § 5 ‘Installation of casing’.

For taking readings: See § 6 ‘Preparation for and obtaining readings’
Page | 2
2 INCLINOMETER SYSTEM
2.1 Operating principle

The first step is to make a near vertical gage well by installing casing Vertical
in a borehole, embedding in an earth/rock fill or concrete structure
Deviation
during construction or fixing to face of a completed structure. The
inclinometer probe is then passed through entire length of gage well,
taking readings at fixed pre-determined depths from bottom to top. A
dual accelerometer probe senses inclination of casing in two planes
at right angles to each other. Voltage output from probe is directly
proportional to sine of angle of inclination of long axis of probe from
the vertical. A positive output voltage indicates a negative angle of Ø
inclination.
A set of initial base reading is taken at given depths within the gage
L
well. This forms the reference datum. Subsequent reading sets are
ngth
compared with this reference datum. All subsequent readings are
e le
taken over a period of time at identical depths, thereby indicating rate,
Gag
magnitude, and direction of lateral deformation. The inclination is
displayed in terms of angular or horizontal displacement (deviation)
on the electronic readout equipment at ground level with the operator.
Deviation = L Sin Ø
Provided that one end of access casing is known to be fixed, it is
possible to obtain a complete profile of the gage well by taking a
succession of readings. By comparing these profiles, the horizontal
displacement of gage well at different depths over a period of time is
Figure 2.1
determined.
2.2 General description - EAN-26 digital inclinometer system
The EAN-26 digital inclinometer system basically consists of:
 Access casing and fittings

 Tilt sensing probe
 Interconnecting cable with reel and cable holder
 Mobile phone datalogger

2.2.1 Access casing and fittings
2.2.1.1 EAN-AT70 ABS access casing (70 mm)
ABS access casing has longitudinal keyways,
specially produced to close tolerances. Wheels of tilt
sensing probe can run smoothly inside these
keyways. It is self aligning ABS tubing, 70 mm o.d., 58
mm i.d., 3 m in length.
Two kinds of couplings are available to rapidly join
access casing. Fixed couplings are normal and
telescopic couplings are available in case settlement Figure 2.2 Inclinometer ABS
is expected to take place. The design of these casing
couplings ensures that correct alignment of keyways
is maintained throughout the depth of gage well.
Page | 3
2.2.1.2 EAN-FC70 ABS fixed coupling (70 mm)

77 mm o.d. ABS fixed coupling, 160 mm long, with four internal keyways at 90o to each other.
Figure 2.3 ABS casing with fixed coupling
2.2.1.3 EAN-TC70 ABS telescopic coupling (70 mm)

77 mm o.d. ABS telescopic coupling, 300 mm long, with four internal keyways at 90o to each other.
Displacement 150 mm.
Figure 2.4 ABS casing with telescopic coupling
2.2.1.4 EAN-EC70 ABS end cap for access casing (70 mm)
ABS cap to fit 70 mm o.d. casing at top or bottom.
2.2.1.5 EAN-TT70 ABS top cap for access casing (70 mm)
ABS top cap with locking arrangement to fit 70 mm casing at top.
2.2.1.6 Pop rivets and self-taping screws for ABS casing
Pop rivets packets of 100 numbers for fixed coupling. Self-tapping screws packets of 100 numbers for
telescopic coupling.
Page | 4
2.2.1.7 Pop rivet gun

Hand held manually operated.
2.2.1.8 Drill machine
Hand operated drill machine with two 3.2 mm diameter drill bits. Optionally a 230 V, 50 Hz operation power
drill can also be used.
2.2.1.9 Mastic tape
50/100 mm wide x 10/5 m long
2.2.1.10 BOPP tape
50 mm wide x 65 m long BOPP waterproof sealing tape.
2.2.1.11 EAN-PC Protective cover unit
A lockable protective cover unit made of MS sheet and angle is available with extended
Torr steel anchors for grouting at top of hole. The 150 x150 mm protective cover is
provided with a hinged cover with lock with an interchangeable key. The cover is painted
bright red in colour.
2.2.2 Digital inclinometer probe
2.2.2.1 EAN-26MV digital tilt sensing probe
The digital inclinometer (tilt sensig) probe measures angles of inclination from the vertical
in two planes oriented at 90° (orthogonal) to each other. The inclinometer probe of
stainless steel construction is fitted with two pairs of pivoted sprung wheels that can rotate
freely. The standard gage length between the wheels is 500 mm (or 2 feet). The spring-
loaded wheels help to accurately position the probe centrally inside the gage well at any
required depth. The precision grooved casing forms an integral part of the gage well. The
cylindrical portion of the probe has a diameter of 25.4 mm and a length of 685 mm.
The probe consists of two integral precision accelerometers, one with its axis in plane of
the wheels and other at 90o to it. The probe senses horizontal deviation between the probe
axis and the vertical plane, simultaneously in the ‘X’ and ‘Y’ directions.
A four pin connector is provided for connection to the cable.
2.2.2.2 EAN-DP Dummy probe
It has same dimensions as the actual
Figure 2.5
probe. It is used for checking the gage inclinometer
well. Cord length is same as cable probe
length in the actual probe.
2.2.3 Interconnecting cable with reel and
cable holder
2.2.3.1 EAN-26R Cable reel with probe
cable
A cable reel is available for the specified
length of cable. Figure 2.6 cable reel with read-out
A PU sheathed two core cable is clamped at
every 0.5m (or 2 feet) with copper ferrules. The ferrules are number engraved at every meter.
A four pin connector is provided for connecting read-out to probe.

2.2.3.2 EAN-26CB Cable suspension bracket
It is directly placed on casing at top of gage well to lower probe into borehole. It has a slot to hold the cable
Page | 5
at the graduated marks (ferrules) for convenience in taking the readings (refer to figure 2.7).
2.2.4 EAN-26CCJ Calibration check jig
Calibration check jig enables verification of calibration of the inclinometer probe at known angles of tilt.
Please refer to Users manual # WI 6002.107 R01 on how to mount and use calibration check jig.
2.2.5 Mobile phone datalogger
The Digital Inclinometer system uses Mobile Phone as
a datalogger. Any mobile phone with minimum
required features can be used for this application.
Figure 2.7 is showing an example of Digital
inclinometer application running on HTC Desire mobile
phone. Phone is running on Android operating system
for providing powerful platform to manage applications
efficiently. It has so many features like phone calls,
SMS, MMS, GPRS/3G, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, USB and
high resolution Camera. User can use it as mobile
phone for making calls.
It has GPRS/3G which enables user to access internet

from site to upload/download files and checking E-
mails. Wireless Bluetooth can be used to send files to
PC or any other Bluetooth device. High resolution
camera can be helpful to take site conditions
photographs and send them to the back office by
sending MMS. It has higher capacity external memory
card of 8GB which can store lots of data. Data backup
can be taken on regular basis by connecting phone
Figure 2.7 Read-out
with PC through USB cable.
The inclinometer software running on phone can take borehole readings and store them into memory.
Inclinometer software has ability to show borehole logs in tabular format and create plots of borehole data
instantly after borehole reading is complete. Borehole data files are created automatically while saving
borehole log. These files can be recreated from software database when needed. Borehole files can be
uploaded to remote server through GPRS/3G/Wi-Fi.
Page | 6
3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 Probe
Metric Imperial
Sensor Dual accelerometer Dual accelerometer
Distance between wheels 500 mm 24 inches
Probe Material stainless steel stainless steel
Probe Length 685 mm 31.3 inches
Probe Diameter 25.4 mm 1.0 inch
Measuring range ± 30 degrees ± 30 degrees
Data Resolution 0.007 mm per 500 mm 0.0004 inch per 24 inch
Axis Alignment Digitally Nullified Digitally Nullified
Operating temperature -20 to 70°C -20 to 70°C
Probe weight 1.4 kg 3.3 lbs
3.2 Cable reel
Outer sheath Polyurethane Polyurethane

Cable Diameter 6 mm 0.24 inches
Marking interval 0.5 meters 2.0 feet
Cable length 30 m, 50 m, 100 m, 150 m, 200 m, 100 ft, 150 ft, 200 ft, 300 ft
300 m
Battery 7.2V / 3000 mAh Li-ion 7.2V / 3000 mAh Li-ion
Weight 5.5 kg @ 30m cable 12 lbs @ 100 ft cable
Cable Weight 0.034 kg per meter 0.024 lbs per feet
3.3 Mobile phone datalogger (minimum requirements)
Due to continuous improvements and change in availability of models no specific recommendations can
be made about manufacturer and model number. However, any mobile phone that is intended for use as
readout unit for the digital inclinometer should have the following minimum features. If a mobile phone is
ordered and supplied with the system it shall have the following minimum features.
OS Android OS, v2.2 (Froyo) or above
Display 4.0 inches, LCD touch screen, 480x800 pixels
Bluetooth v2.1 with A2DP

Memory 512 MB RAM,8 GB or above expandable memory with microSD card
Mobile Network 2G Network: GSM850/900/1800/190

3G Network: HSDPA900/2100
(If the mobile phone readout will be used in an area covered by CDMA network
services only, then a mobile phone suitable for CDMA should be used or ordered)
3.4 Accessories (to be ordered separately)
 Dummy Probe
 Casing and fittings
 Installation accessories
Page | 7
 Probe calibration check frame
 Magnet assembly for inclinometer casing (if settlement measurement is also required)
 Magnetic settlement probe (if settlement measurement is also required)
Page | 8
4 TOOLS & ACCESSORIES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION
It should be ensured that following tools and accessories required for proper installation of the inclinometer
PVC casing and for taking readings are available:
1 Tool box
2 50 mm wide water proof sealing tape
3 Spanner 16/18
4 Screw driver 100 mm
5 Voltage tester
6 Pliers 150 mm
7 Flat file 150 mm
8 Safety line or tension cable in case hole is very deep
9 Clean water supply to clean casing

10 Hand saw with three 30 cm blades
11 Casing collar protection if required
12 Grout tube - requisite length
13 Acetone
14 Aluminium pop rivets - four per joint plus some extra
15 Pop rivet gun
16 Drill with a 3.15 mm spare drill bit.
17 Casing clamps - 2 sets
18 Plumb bob with 5 m chord

19 Casing cap with guy ropes (for embankment installations)
20 Casing ‘U’ clamps and grout bolts (For installation on concrete structures)
Page | 9
5 INSTALLATION OF CASING
Following general instructions for installing ABS casing are typical

practices in the field and may require modification to suit specific
conditions and applications at site.
Inspect casing to ensure that damage in transit or storage has not

occurred. See that ends and interior of casing are clean. Cracked
by axial load
Store casing horizontally, fully supported and out of sunlight. This will
prevent it from getting damaged or distorted. Number each length and
assemble numerically to avoid errors and confirm correct depth. Cracked by
dropping load
CAUTION: Do not apply too much axial load on casing as it may
damage casing by cracking. Also do not drop casing.
Casing may be installed in a borehole, embedded in an earth/rock fill
or concrete structure during construction or fixed to vertical face of a
completed structure. Installation on completed structure is not being
described in this manual, as it is easy with help of casing clamps that
Figure 5.1 Checking of
may be separately procured. casing
5.1 Preparation of casing before installation
NOTE: Pre-assembly and storage of inclinometer

casings should be done in shade as
prolonged exposure to direct sun light might
distort the tubes.
a. Clean inside of bottom cap and outside of lower
end of a casing with moist cloth (use isopropyl
alcohol if greasy).
b. Push bottom end cap over casing. Fix it to

casing with four pop rivets using 3.2 mm
diameter drill bit. Riveting should be done at
diametrically opposite points 90° apart.
c. Seal joint between bottom cap and casing with

mastic waterproof tape. One round of this tape
with 10 mm overlap is sufficient. Press tape
firmly after applying, to remove any air pocket.
d. Additionally wrap three to four rounds of BOPP
tape with a little force over mastic tape for extra
protection (refer to figure 5.2). Proper sealing is
necessary to prevent intrusion of backfill
materials inside casing.
5.1.1 Fixed coupling
a. Attach a fixed coupling each to one end of all
other casings to be installed. Clean mating
surfaces with moist cloth (use isopropyl alcohol
Figure 5.2 Preparation of casing
if greasy).
Page | 10
b. Push 160 mm long fixed coupling over end of casing up to maximum allowable depth of around 80
mm. Drill holes with 3.2 mm bit and pop rivet coupling to casing at four places (position for two pop
rivet holes are marked on coupling; other two holes should be symmetrically drilled).
c. Seal joint between fixed coupling and casing with mastic waterproof tape and BOPP tape as
described above in § 5.1 (c) and 5.1 (d).
5.1.2 Telescopic coupling
Telescopic couplings are mostly installed in embankments where settlement takes place during
construction. They are sometimes installed in boreholes also where settlement or heave may take
place. Telescopic coupling has two sets of diametrically opposite longitudinal grooves which
facilitate a total movement upto 150 mm (refer to figures 5.3 and 5.6). Coupling is secured to
adjacent casings with a set of four screws and nylon washers.
Casing
160 mm Fixed coupling
Casing
Casing
400 mm Telescopic Coupling
Casing
Figure 5.3 Fixed & telescopic couplings
a. Attach a telescopic coupling each to one end of all other casings to be installed excepting the one
with the bottom cap. Clean mating surfaces with moist cloth (use isopropyl alcohol if greasy).
b. For applications in which only settlement takes place push 400 mm long telescopic coupling over
end of casing upto maximum allowable depth of around 195 mm. Drill two holes with 2.5 mm bit at
end of slot of coupling as shown in figures 5.4 and 5.5. Fix coupling to casing with self-tapping
screws and washers at position A. (Position B is location where the other casing will be drilled
during installation at site).
c. Pull casing out so that screw comes to position C as shown in figure 5.6. Tighten screws. Do not
over tighten. When the other casing is finally assembled at site, a space of 150 mm will be left
between the casing ends to take care of settlement.
d. In case settlement/ heave are both possible at location where casing is to be installed, adjust
position of screws in groove for an appropriate length of travel as shown in figure 5.6. If such a
casing is required to be lowered from top into a borehole, aluminium pop rivets may have to be
used to keep coupling in position (refer to figure 5.7). Seal joint between telescopic coupling and
casing with mastic waterproof tape and BOPP tape as described in § 5.1 (c) and 5.1 (d).
e. The casing assemblies are now ready for installation. Carefully transport them to site when
required.
Page | 11
Screw
Washer
400 mm coupling
200
mm
Figure 5.4 Do not over tighten screw

Casing
Casing Screw
Washer
B
400 mm coupling
Figure 5.5 For settlement monitoring 2.5 mm holes

will be required to be drilled at A and B Casing
Pull
150
mm
C Pull
Casing
Screw with washer
D
400 mm coupling
Figure 5.6 Installation positions of casing ends & Casing

telescopic coupling for settlement monitoring
Rivet
Figure 5.7 Telescopic casing preassembly for

heave/settlement applications
Page | 12
5.2 Installation in borehole

5.2.1 Borehole drilling
a. Drill 125 mm diameter hole as vertical as
possible around 0.5 m more than planned
depth of inclinometer casing. The drill hole
diameter should facilitate grouting around
outside of casing. A mobile rotary drilling
rig using rotary wash boring technique may
be used to perform the drilling. Wash
borehole clean and verify that it is not
blocked anywhere upto bottom. To prevent
sidewalls of borehole from collapsing,
casing along with bentonite slurry may be
used.
NOTE: If necessary, use suitable steel casing

to prevent sidewalls of borehole from
collapsing. In such a case, steel
casing will have to be gradually
withdrawn as grout is pumped into
borehole.
NOTE: In case spider magnets are used
around casing for settlement
monitoring, drill hole diameter should
preferably be 150 mm.
5.2.2 Installation of inclinometer casing in
borehole
a. Lower casing with bottom cap into borehole
gripping it with safety clamp secured
around 500 mm from top.
NOTE: Maintain one pair of casing grooves

perpendicular to direction in which
lateral movement is to be measured.
If no such direction is known, maintain
one set of grooves parallel to N-S
direction.
b. Take a casing pre-assembled with fixed
coupling. Secure a safety clamp around
500 mm from its top end and mate coupling
end with casing already lowered. Pop-rivet
fixed coupling to casing at four places.
c. Seal joint with mastic waterproof tape and

BOPP tape, as described in § 5.1 (c) and
5.1 (d).
Figure 5.8 checking of casing
d. Remove safety clamp from first casing and
lower jointed casings into guide
pipe/borehole.
Page | 13
e. To counteract buoyancy, if required fill casing

with clean water to lower it into guide
pipe/borehole.
f. Repeat above procedure for all casings to be

installed in borehole.
NOTE: Casing will be buoyant if borehole is water

or mud filled and must be filled with water
to install it in borehole. When grout is
pumped into borehole, water-filled casing
becomes buoyant again, because grout is
denser than water: To counter this
buoyancy, a down force should be applied
at bottom of casing by lowering a steel pipe
to bottom of casing or suspending a non-
retrievable weight from bottom of the
casing.
Down force applied at the top of the
casing is likely to distort the casing
profile. Do not park a drill rig over the
casing or apply any other top-down
method of counteracting buoyancy.
CAUTION: Do not accidentally drop casing into

borehole. During insertion of casing
sections, clamps should be used at top of
hole to prevent lower casing sections
from falling to bottom of hole. For very
deep installations, a tension cable may
be attached to bottom of casing to relieve
tension on upper casing couplings.
During process of lowering, casing
grooves should be kept aligned to final
configuration desired so that later turning
of casing is minimized.
CAUTION: When casing reaches correct depth;
check proper installation with dummy
probe. If probe will not pass or jumps
track, pull casing out and rectify problem.
5.2.3 Grouting in borehole
a. Grout casings as directed by project authorities.
Ideally, grout should be mixed to match strength
and deformation characteristics of material around
borehole. In practice, main consideration is to use Figure 5.9 Casing installation
a grout that allows casing to move with
surrounding material. For information, grout mixes
used by some authorities are as follows:
Page | 14
Hard and medium soils

Cement 50 kg
Bentonite 15 kg
Water 125 litres
28-day compressive strength was about 350 kPa.

Soft soil
Cement 50 kg
Bentonite 20 kg
Water 325 litres
NOTE: Please verify above values yourself in actual

conditions before use. Encardio-rite takes
no responsibility for correctness of above
information at your site as the compressive
strength values are dependent upon
geology of site and environmental
conditions.
b. For mixing grout use a grout mixer or circulation
method (figure 5.10), in case a mixer is not available.
In the circulation method, a rig pump or a trash
pump coupled to a gasoline engine (refer to figure
5.10) is used for mixing the grout components i.e.
water, cement and bentonite. Subsequently, the
same pump can be used for pumping the grout to the
bottom of the borehole. It is to be noted that pressure
grouting is not required as the grout flows down under
gravity.
c. Add cement to water first and mix/circulate. Add

bentonite in small quantities slowly during the
mixing/circulation process such that lumps of
bentonite are not formed. Adjust amount of bentonite
to produce a grout within consistency of heavy Figure 5.10 Circulation method of
cream. If grout is too thin, the solids and water will pumping grout
separate. If the grout is too thick, it will be difficult to
pump.
d. Pull out and dismantle grout pipes one by one as the hole is being filled with grout.
NOTE: Use a mixer, a grout pump, a pipe or hose for delivering grout. Do not mix grout by hand. Also
do not use a water pump to place grout, since pumping grout would damage it.
Properly mixed grout should be free of lumps. It has to be thin enough to pump but thick
enough to set in a reasonable length of time. If mixture is too watery, it will shrink excessively,
leaving upper portion of the borehole un-grouted. Avoid use of admixtures and grouts that
cure at high temperature since these may damage the casing.
The use of hydrated lime rather than cement is sometimes recommended to provide for a
more responsive, somewhat weaker backfill.
Page | 15
For plastic casing, heat of Grout Pump

Coupling Mixer
hydration of grout or excess grout Water
pressure can deform the plastic.
This problem can be eliminated
by maintaining casing full of water
until grout has set or by grouting
hole in stages.
Casing
CAUTION: Experience shows that sand or
pea gravel should not be used as
backfill material unless it is
Bentonite
absolutely necessary. These Bottom cement
backfill tend to mask movement, cap grout
not allowing a rigid shear plane to

reach the casing.
e. For grouting the inclinometer casing in the
borehole use of tremie method is
recommended (figure 5.11). Lower 20 mm
nominal diameter rigid PVC pipe lengths
jointed using threaded sockets to around
0.5 m above the bottom of the borehole.
Figure 5.13 Installation of casing in
NOTE: To overcome buoyancy due to diaphragm wall
grout which is having a density of
1280 kg per cubic meter, a two
stage grouting process should be
carried out. In the first stage, 1 2 3 4
bottom 10 m should be grouted
and left for at least 12 hours to
set. During this stage a clamp has
to be installed at the topmost
casing of the installation and tied
to a firm object to overcome the
uplift force of around 14 kg due to
the first stage grouting. Rest of
the hole to be grouted using
tremie method.
NOTE: Pre-grouting is sometimes done
in case of a shallow borehole. It is
also useful when there is not Figure 5.11 Grouting by tremie method
enough space for the grout pipe
in the annulus between the casing and the borehole wall.
f. Flush inside of casing with clean water after grouting to prevent any leaked in grout from sticking to
inside of casing and impairing movement of probe.
5.2.4 Top cover
a. Fix protective cover in concrete platform on top of borehole. Protective covers feature a universal key
and dust protection for lock (always put back dust protection after locking to avoid lock jamming).
Typical dimensions for concrete platform are given in figure 5.8. These may vary depending on local site
conditions.
Page | 16
Top of upper most casing should be kept below final ground level and protected by top cap and lockable
manhole cover. Cut top of pipe suitably by a hacksaw. Use flat file to make pipe end smooth.
5.2.5 After installation check
a. Check installed access tubing by dummy probe (EAN-26/2.2) for smooth movement upto bottom
of borehole.
NOTE: Top of uppermost casing should be 125 mm above base of niche as shown in figure 5.8. The
niche is around 200 mm deep. This is necessary for fixing pipe extension jig over casing for
taking readings.
b. When not taking readings, gage well should be protected by top cap and manhole cover should
be kept locked.
c. Mark tag no. of the installation with paint on inner side
of hinged cover.
NOTE: Plying of heavy machinery such as cranes,

loaded trucks etc. near protective cover should
not be allowed and if required proper fencing
with warning flags should be provided. In case it
is not possible to avoid movement of heavy
machinery over protective cover, specially Figure 5.12 Protection for inclinometer
procure heavy duty covers from factory and
embed in a heavy concrete platform.
NOTE: If telescopic coupling is used, settlement sections must be inserted appropriately extended or
collapsed. Grease telescopic joint and use mastic and BOPP tape to keep telescopic section at
required opening and also to prevent intrusion of grout or backfill materials inside casing.
5.2.6 Marking of grooves (sign convention)
a. Mark casing grooves as ‘A+’, ’B+’ ,’A-’ and ‘B-’ with permanent ink marker pen. If uppermost probe
wheel is pointed in direction of major principle plane of movement, casing groove pointing in this
direction is marked as ‘A+’. Looking down the well, directions ‘B+’, ’A-’ and ‘B-’ are clockwise from
‘A+’.
5.3 Installation in diaphragm wall or pile

5.3.1 Preparation for installation in D-wall – MS casing
Direct installation of inclinometer casing in diaphragm wall or a pile is problematic. It should be
avoided. Inclinometer casing will get distorted and stressed when firmly tied to steel structure from
bottom to top.
It is also not good to directly expose the casing to heat of hydration and stresses generated during
the concreting process. Casing may distort and even get cracked.
Page | 17
a. Fix a 150 mm nominal bore diameter steel guide pipe vertically within reinforced bar cage as shown
in figure 5.13. The pipe length to be installed should be worked out in such a way that its top
remains around 0.5 m above the existing ground level after cage is fully lowered to bottom of the
slurry trench. Bottom of guide pipe should be around 0.5 m above bottom level of cage. It should
be sealed at bottom with a concrete plug/plastic cap.
Make sure that jointing of tube lengths is water proof to prevent any grout/concrete from entering into it,
while cage is being concreted. Use of dented or distorted pipes shall not be done as this will make
installation of inclinometer access tube difficult or even impossible.
Inclinometer
casing in D-wall
MS casing in D-
wall cage
Figure 5.14 Installation of MS casing Figure 5.15 Inclinometer casing installed in

in diaphragm wall cage diaphragm wall
NOTE: It is recommended that an auxiliary guide pipe be installed adjacent to the main guide pipe at
1.25 m approx. centre to centre distance at critical monitoring locations. This auxiliary pipe
can be used in case main pipe gets choked and becomes useless due to any reason.
b. Weld guide pipe firmly to cage. Ensure that it remains vertical and is least distorted during lowering
of cage.
c. Concrete cage after covering mouth of guide pipe.
d. Flush guide pipe clean with water and verify depth with help of a suitable depth measuring device
(e.g. a sounding chain) that it is fully open up to the bottom.
NOTE: Ensure that heat of hydration of mass concrete has dissipated before installing access casing
in guide pipe. Use a temperature probe for this purpose. Temperature should not exceed
40oC. The heat of hydration, if present may warp access casing and render installation
useless.
5.3.2 Installation of inclinometer casing in MS casing (D-wall)
a. Lower casing with bottom cap into guide pipe gripping it with the safety clamp secured around 500
mm from top.
NOTE: Maintain one pair of casing grooves parallel to the direction in which lateral movement is to
be measured i.e. perpendicular to the diaphragm wall.
Page | 18
b. Take a casing pre-assembled with a fixed Cover

coupling, having a safety clamp secured Top cap Allen head bolt
around 500 mm from its top end and mate
100
it with the pipe already lowered through the
Guide pipe
coupling end. Pop-rivet the fixed coupling
500
-150 NB
to lowered casing at four places.
Top level of D-wall
BOPP tape, as described in § 5.1 (c) and
5.1 (d).
Grout
d. Remove safety clamp from first casing and Casing Diaphragm wall
lower jointed casings into guide pipe.

Figure 5.16 protection of casing in
NOTE: Always use safety clamp such that diaphragm wall
casing does not accidentally fall into
guide pipe while installing.
e. To counteract buoyancy, if required fill casing with clean water to lower it into the guide pipe.
f. Repeat above procedure for all the casings to be installed in the guide pipe.
NOTE: It is preferable to use 20 mm nominal diameter rigid PVC pipe lengths jointed using threaded
sockets for grouting. Lower above tubes say up to 0.5 m above bottom of guide pipe.
5.3.3 Grouting in MS casing (D-wall)
a. Prepare a grout mix to be filled in the annular space between the guide pipe and casings as
directed by project authorities. If no instructions are available, suggested grout mix is as follows:
Cement 50 kg
Bentonite 10 kg
Water 75 litres
b. It is recommended to flush inside of casing with water after grouting. This is to prevent any leaked
in grout from sticking in the casing and impairing the movement of the probe.
5.3.4 Top cover
a. Top of uppermost casing should be 25 mm above top of steel pipe. Cut top of pipe suitably by a
hacksaw. Use flat file to make the pipe end smooth.
NOTE: Depth of top of grout face from top of steel casing should be at least 100 mm (125 mm from
ABS casing top) as shown in figure 5.16. This is necessary for fixing pipe extension jig over
casing for taking readings.
b. Clean exposed portion of casing top and fix top cap.
c. When not taking readings, the gage well should be protected with cover fixed to top of steel casing
by four M6 Allen head bolts (figure 5.16).
5.3.5 After installation checks
a. Check installed guide pipe for proper installation before installation of access tubing. Ensure that
it is sufficiently vertical and is least distorted.
b. Check installed access tubing by dummy probe (EAN-26/2.2) before lowering inclinometer probe.
c. Ensure fixing protection cover and placing top cap after installation of inclinometer casing.
a. Mark tag no. of installation in paint on inner side of steel guide pipe. Also mark casing grooves as
Page | 19
‘A+’,’A-’,’B+’ and ‘B-’ with permanent ink marker pen. If uppermost probe wheel is pointed in
direction of the major principle plane of movement, the casing groove pointing in this direction is
marked as ‘A+’. Looking down the well, directions ‘B+’,’A-’ and ‘B-’ are clockwise from ‘A’.
NOTE: Plying of heavy machinery such as cranes, loaded trucks etc. over the installation should not
be allowed and if required proper fencing with warning flags should be provided. If necessary,
the guide pipe with inclinometer casing be cut short to just above the diaphragm wall top level
and a lockable hinged cover be provided. Readings can be taken using an extension jig.
5.4 Installation in dam embankment (fill) – core section
5.4.1 Precaution for installation in embankment fill (core)
a. In an embankment installation like in a dam, settlement will take place and coupling selected should
be long enough to provide for anticipated settlement. Encardio-rite ABS telescopic coupling provides
for a displacement of 150 mm.
b. Telescopic type slip joints are usually used only in embankment, but if settlement is anticipated below
a dam, they may be used in foundation also.
c. While installation, maintain one groove of inclinometer casing orientated in the direction in which
maximum deflection is expected. If the deflection direction cannot be determined, orient north/south.
d. Alignment of grooves (of casing) must be maintained throughout the installation process, to avoid
inducing torsion to the casing thereby causing spiral of the grooves.
5.4.2 Protection of installation in embankment fill (core)
a. As the installation progresses in stages over a few months, it is essential that the inclinometer
casings be properly protected against damage. The followings precautionary steps are
recommended.
• The contractor has to fabricate a circular fencing of G.I. wire with top & bottom end open (2 m
dia.) duly flagged, for protection of plastic casing from accidental damage due to nearby
construction work. This fencing can be manually raised, as and when the embankment height
is raised.
• The exposed top end of the inclinometer casing shall always be kept covered with the help of
top cap to prevent any loose soil or rock debris from entering the inclinometer casing.
b. Inclinometer casing in embankment installation can warp from extended exposure to hot sunlight.
The exposed part of the inclinometer casing should therefore be properly shielded from sunlight.
Suitably cover exposed part of inclinometer casing with tarpaulin or thick black plastic sheet to protect
plastic casings from unnecessary exposure to strong sunlight. Ultra violet radiation in sun rays cause
faster weathering of the plastic material. Once casings are fully embedded in soil they are safe.
c. A settlement marker should be provided adjacent to top of inclinometer casing that will serve as
survey reference point. This will allow inclinometer as well as settlement profile to be referenced to
an absolute reference (elevation above sea level) should bottom reference be lost due to any reason.
5.4.3 Installation of casing in embankment fill (core)
a. The first casing to be installed is the one with the bottom cap. Orient casing vertically with help of
casing top cap and guy ropes. Use plumb bob for this purpose. Ensure that one groove is oriented
in direction of maximum deflection.
b. It is good practice to grout fix lower end of casing. Effort should be made to install casing plumb
within 1° from vertical.
c. Remove casing cap and guy ropes as soon as possible because these will have to be re-used as
Page | 20
installation continues.
d. Compact soil carefully around casing and let level rise to around 20 cm below top of casing.
NOTE: An inclinometer installation in embankment requires no special backfill. The soil used for
embankment is compacted carefully around the casing.
e. Assemble telescopic coupling using acetone for cleaning and pop rivets, mastic & BOPP tape for
jointing suitably extending telescopic coupling to accommodate the expected settlement/rebound
as described in § 5.1.2. Grease telescopic joint as a bond breaker for the back fill. Properly seal
by mastic and BOPP tape to prevent intrusion of backfill materials inside casing.
f. Assemble next casing to telescopic coupling using procedure described above.
g. Repeat procedure till all casings and telescopic couplings are assembled. This of course will have
to go along with the filling of the embankment.
NOTE: In case settlement has also to be monitored, install plate magnets as the required level is
reached.
h. Flush inside of casing with water during assembly and after it is fully assembled. This is to prevent
any back fill or dirt from sticking on to grooves in casing and impairing movement of probe. Always
keep top of casing well plugged with top plug.
a. Mark the casing grooves as ‘A’,’B’,’C’ and ‘D’ with a permanent ink marker pen. If the uppermost
torpedo wheel is pointed in the direction of the principal plane of movement, the casing groove
pointing in this direction is marked as ‘A’. Looking down the well, directions ‘C’,’B’ and ‘D’ are
clockwise from ‘A’.
5.4.5 Top protection
a. The top of the upper most casing should project around 150 mm above the ground level. Fix the
protective top cap and lock it. When not taking readings, the gage well should be protected with
the top cap and locked.
5.5 Installation in dam embankment (fill) – crest

5.5.1 Precaution for installation in crest/rockfill section
a. Procedure for installation of casing in core and crest is different as crest area principally consists of
rock aggregates varying in size. This type of rock fill may show considerable lateral shift with large
localized variation along the depth. Localized lateral movement in rock fill is often beyond allowed
deformation limits of standard inclinometer casings causing casings to either shear off or crush.
b. Surrounding inclinometer casings with graded fine sand or clay up to some distance may not help
as it has been observed that due to piping effect, fine fill material can easily drain off through voids
in surrounding large rock aggregate fill matrix. Loss of fill material around inclinometer casings may
give rise to cavities that cause rock pieces from surrounding rock fill matrix to come loose and strike
inclinometer casing causing catastrophic damage to the casings.
5.5.2 Protection of installation in crest/rockfill section
Same as mentioned in section 5.4.2 above (protection of installation in embankment fill-core).

5.5.3 Installation of casing in crest/rockfill section
a. Before installation the location of the inclinometer casing (northing & easting) should be properly
marked by surveying.
b. Generally following installation instructions in § 5.4 wherever applicable, it is best to surround the
Page | 21
inclinometer casing in crest with graded material as per procedure described below. A typical
installation is illustrated in figure 5.17.
Zone 2 material Inclinometer casing

(<76 mm)
Fine aggregate (<10 mm)
Zone 3A material
(<200 mm) Cylindrical casing Ø750x300 high
with lifting rings.
Embankment fill Plate magnet with arms
(600 to 800 mm) at specified elevation
750
2000
3000
All dimensions are in mm.

Figure 5.17 Typical details of fill around
c. Because of graded fill requirement around inclinometer casings, the installation will have to
proceed after every 1.2 metres of main fill is in place and compacted. A pit of approximately 3
metres diameter at the bottom shall be left during the fill procedure.
d. Place a mild steel cylinder (typically 750 mm diameter x 300 mm high) formwork centred on the
inclinometer location mark. Locate bottom cap of casing at the location mark and centre the
cylinder around the casing.
e. Stand the bottom casing vertically on the capped end with the help of guy ropes to be held by three
persons each.
f. Orient casing vertically with help of guy ropes. Use plumb bob for this purpose. It is good practice
to grout fix lower end of casing. Effort should be made to install casing within 1º from the vertical.
g. Carry on fill operation in lifts of approximately 300 mm height. Build next layer only when preceding
layer has been properly compacted. Only use hand held compactors for compaction around
casings (figure 5.18). Four fill layers will raise fill height by around 1.2 m that is just sufficient to
hold the inclinometer tubing vertically in place.
Page | 22
h. The sheet steel cylinder is used to place and compact the sand and fine aggregate fill immediately
around the inclinometer casing. After the layer is compacted the cylinder is raised up and out of
the finished layer in preparation for the next layer. The other two graded zones shown in the figure
5.17 outside the 750 mm diameter cylinder can be carefully hand placed and compacted. It is
easier if the outer layer of fill material is placed first followed by the inner layer of fill material.
i. Remove guy ropes only after casing is two-thirds embedded in fill.
j. Once fill level reaches top of casing, add another length of casing using a telescopic coupling.
k. Suitably extended telescopic coupling to accommodate expected settlement/rebound. Hold casing
in extended condition with help of two pop rivets riveted diametrically opposite telescopic joints.
Grease the telescopic joint or cover with plastic as a bond breaker for the back fill. Waterproof
sealing tape is used to extend and keep the telescopic section to the required opening. Proper
sealing by the waterproof tape is also necessary to prevent intrusion of backfill materials inside the
casing.
l. Repeat above steps till all the plastic casings and telescopic couplings are assembled. This of
course will have to go along with the filling of the embankment. Insure that joints are riveted and
waterproof sealing tape is properly applied.
CAUTION: Groove alignment must be maintained throughout the installation process, to avoid inducing
torsion in the casing thereby causing spiralling of the grooves.
m. Flush the inside of the casing with water during assembly and after it is fully assembled. This is to
prevent any back fill or dirt from sticking on to the grooves in the casing and impairing the
movement of the probe. Always keep the top end of the casing covered with the top cap.
Mark the casing grooves as ‘A’,’B’,’C’ and ‘D’ with a permanent ink marker pen. If the uppermost torpedo
wheel is pointed in the direction of the principal plane of movement, the casing groove pointing in this
direction is marked as ‘A’. Looking down the well, directions ‘C’,’B’ and ‘D’ are clockwise from ‘A’.
5.5.5 Top protection
The top of the upper most casing should project around 150 mm above the ground level. Fix the protective
Figure 5.18 Casing with telescopic coupling Figure 5.19 Casing with telescopic coupling
being installed in rockfill section of dam, installed in rockfill section of dam,
using hand help compactor supported by guy ropes.
Page | 23
top cap and lock it. When not taking readings, the gage well should be protected with the top cap and locked.
NOTE: A settlement marker should be provided adjacent to top of inclinometer casing that will serve
as survey reference point. This will allow inclinometer as well as settlement profile to be
referenced to an absolute reference (elevation above sea level) should bottom reference be
lost due to any reason.
Page | 24
6 PREPARATION FOR AND OBTAINING READINGS
For detailed instructions, refer to EAN-26 Digital

A+ (A)
inclinometer system operation manual # WI
6002.103.
6.1 Sign convention B- (D) B+ (B)
The inclinometer readout uses a sign convention for

casing orientation. Follow sign convention strictly. A- (C)
Mark casing groove orientation with a permanent ink
marker pen on outside of casing and inside of Figure 6.1
lockable cover.
Mark ‘A+’ in direction in which maximum deflection is

expected. Looking down the well, mark other grooves
clockwise as ’B+’, ’A-’ and ‘B-’. While inserting probe
into casing, the uppermost probe wheel near
connector should be pointed in direction of major
principle plane of movement i.e. in direction marked Prism assembly
A+. (In some dataloggers, direction is marked as A,
B, C and D). Refer to figure 6.1. Bracket
6.2 Determine as-built elevation using prism

target
Holder pin
a. Determine initial Northing (X) and Easting (Y)
positions of casing top by surveying after the Suspension
casing is set. For this purpose use a prism bracket
assembly with holder pin (to be ordered
separately) for inclinometer casing EAN-AT-70
with ERT-10P2 prism target. Readings should be Inclinometer
casing
taken with an accurate and precise total station.
This data should be treated as a reference during
verification of deflection at a later date.
b. Determine the elevation of the pipe top using a
digital level with precise levelling method.
6.3 Connecting probe to cable reel
a. Open lock on protective cover and remove

top cap from casing.
b. Take out probe from transport case. Remove

protective cap from top of probe. You will find
an Ó’ ring on face of probe. Inspect condition
of “O” ring. Replace if damaged or
permanently flattened.
c. Carefully push connector part of connector
assembly at end of cable on to inclinometer
probe connector after ensuring that keying
slots and splines of probe and cable Figure 6.2 Prism adapter for
connectors are properly aligned (otherwise inclinometer casing
Page | 25
the connector assembly will not fit). Operating cable reel
d. Do not apply unnecessary force. Screw Lockable protective cover

on (not forcibly) with supplied spanner
the threaded retaining shell of cable
connector assembly to inclinometer
probe to make a water tight connection. Top cap
G.L.
6.4 Taking readings
Suspension
NOTE: Reference ‘§’ numbers given below bracket
are from EAN-26 digital Cavity
500
inclinometer system operation (250 cube)
manual # WI 6002.103.
Concrete
NOTE: Depth to bottom of casing should
already be known so that probe can
be eased on to bottom without Ferrule
jolting it or damaging it.
Coupling
a. Section 4 "Readout Unit" of Digital
Inclinometer System Operation Manual #
WI 6002.103 describes the procedure for
setting up a bore hole and logging the
borehole. Follow the instructions given Bi-axial probe
the operation manual to log the borehole. Spider magnet
b. When the logging is complete remove
the cable grip from the access tubing and
take out the inclinometer probe. Inclinometer casing
c. Disassemble cable from probe. Wipe

clean the probe and replace protective
Grout
caps on the cable and the probe. Oil the
wheel, springs and axle pivots with the
supplied oil (or any other locally available
500
light duty machine oil).

Bottom cap
d. Rewind cable onto cable reel, clean it
and fix the connectors in place.
Borehole Ø150 mm.
e. Replace the top plug on the casing and
lock it. In case any additional protection
is provided, install it.
NOTE: Not properly cleaning probe,

associated cable, connectors and
datalogger after use is the most
frequent cause of failure of the
inclinometer system. Not oiling the
wheel, springs and axle pivots will
invariably result in costly repairs
and equipment downtime.
Figure 6.3 Taking readings
Page | 26
6.5 Guidelines for correct readings
Do’s
If large deformations are expected to take place,

use dummy probe to check condition of gage
7
Ferrule
well before lowering the actual probe.
Check if directions ‘A+’, ‘B+’, ‘A-’ and ‘B-’ are clearly
marked on casing top. In case the marks are Operating cable
fading away, re-mark them.
Cable suspension
Always allow enough time for the accelerometers bracket
6
(inside the probe) to “settle down” before taking
any reading.
When raising probe during a set of readings, take
extreme care in duplicating depths A+ and the
A- reading runs such that errors contributed by
casing irregularities are minimized.
Replace the discharged cable reel battery with a

fully charged battery if battery voltage goes
below 6 V. The inclinometer system is supplied
with two Lithium batteries for the reel unit.
Inclinometer
Keep all electrical connections clean - use alcohol casing
or a spray cleaner suitable for electronics that
will not damage the outer cable covering or
panel finish.
Replace probe wheels and axles if they become Figure 6.3

wobbly or sticky.
Constantly check conditions of “O” ring on probe face to maintain a watertight seal.
Keep protective plugs in place on all electric outlets to prevent physical damage or liquids spilling into
them.
Do not’s:
Hard bumps to probe can misalign and/or break the accelerometers or break internal electrical
connections.
Hard bumps to indicator can dislodge internal batteries, break electrical connections, shift LCD readouts
or rupture the watertight case seals.
Bending connecting cable over sharp objects or walking on it can sever internal conductors or puncture
the outer waterproof coating.
NOTE: The inclinometer system is like other delicate equipment and its use requires common sense
and reasonable care!
Page | 27
Over 50 years of Excellence through ingenuity
DATASHEET
DIGITAL INCLINOMETER
MODEL EAN-26M
INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite model EAN-26M is one of the most advanced MEMS digital
inclinometer system being produced anywhere in the world. It utilizes the
capability of high computational power and large high resolution colour
display of today’s Android OS based mobile phones as a readout and data
storage unit.
FEATURES
 Data can be compared instantly
 Advanced, light weight, shock after logging with previously
resistant digital MEMS bi-axial logged data using different
inclinometer system. graph types.
 Uses easily available Android  Data can be sent instantly to
OS based GSM/GPRS capable central server over GSM/GPRS
mobile phones as hand held connection.
readout unit.
 Phone provides high resolution APPLICATION
vivid colour display of readings
and graphs.  Determination of lateral
movement and deformation of
 Wireless Bluetooth connection
earth works or structure.
eliminates cable between
rotating reel and mobile phone  Measurement of magnitude of
readout. inclination or tilt and its
variation with time in structures
 Mobile phone memory capacity
like retaining/diaphragm walls,
allows local storage of more
piles etc.
than 1 million data points.
www.encardio.com
The mobile phone uses wireless Bluetooth connection The current memory
to communicate with the inclinometer reel unit. Gone capacity available in mobile
are the days of frayed cable and unreliable slip ring phones allows storage of
connection between the reel and the hand held borehole data of all the
readout units. The EAN-26M Inclinometer system is boreholes in a site for a
much lighter in weight and is very much liked by field number of months.
personnel who have to carry the system from
Use of an off the shelf
borehole to borehole for logging.
available mobile phone
allows a faulty hand held
OVERVIEW readout to be serviced or
replaced with another unit
The digital inclinometer system consists of a
locally very easily eliminating
traversing type digital tilt sensing probe that is
delays associated with
connected to a reel unit kept at borehole top. The
servicing a custom readout
reel unit consists of a winding reel that holds the
unit or a proprietary palm
cable and a wireless Bluetooth relay unit that sends
top computer.
the digital probe data to the mobile phone. A
rechargeable battery in the reel unit supplies power The mobile phone can also Graphical display
to the whole system. be loaded with application of data over a
software for other types of period of time
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION sensor and data loggers
equipped with Bluetooth interface that are being
The digital inclinometer probe has a measuring made available by select manufacturers now a days.
range of ± 30 degrees with a resolution of ± 10 arc This will free the field operator from carrying
seconds. The probe uses a 24 bit ADC that measures different readout units for different types of
the MEMS sensor output with a resolution of over 1 sensors/data loggers.
million counts. An embedded processor in the probe
A choice of mobile phones can also provide the
provides a digital output that gives the horizontal
functions of camera to record photos or video clips
displacement value directly in desired engineering
of site conditions, view tutorial videos on site, or fix
units.
its geographic location using the inbuilt GPS
The probe data is transferred to the reel over a thin receiver besides all the functions available in a
high strength two core cable with a central high mobile phone.
strength Kevlar core that makes the cable essentially
stretch proof even with intensive use. The twin core OPTIONAL SETTLEMENT MEASUREMENT
cable carries both data and power supply to the
probe from the reel unit. Transmitting data digitally If settlement monitoring is also desired, annular
to the reel allows any length of cable to be used magnetic targets can be fixed to the inclinometer
without affecting the accuracy of the measurement. casing at different depths and a magnetic sensor
probe can be used to plot the change in depth of the
A standard commercially available Android OS based magnetic targets over time.
mobile phone is used as a hand held unit. The
Encardio-rite Digital Inclinometer application is For more information please refer to Encardio-rite
loaded on the mobile phone to enable it to configure Model EDS-91 Magnetic Probe Extensometer
and collect data from the digital inclinometer system. datasheet.
The mobile phone communicates with the reel unit of SYSTEM COMPONENTS
the Inclinometer system through its in-built
Bluetooth wireless interface. The wireless link The Encardio-rite model EAN-26M Inclinometer
eliminates the traditional slip ring and cable system basically consists of four components:
connection between the reel unit and the handheld
readout that often became unreliable due to frayed  Access tube and fittings
cable and slip ring problem.  Digital tilt sensing probe
 Interconnecting cable on a portable reel
Encardio-rite Android Digital Inclinometer  Mobile phone as a readout/datalogger unit
application exploits the huge computational and
image processing power of today’s mobile phone to ACCESS TUBE AND FITTINGS
display the logged borehole data as tables or various
types of graphs commonly used at back end ABS access tubes have longitudinal keyways,
computers to visualize the data. This allows the specially produced to close tolerances. Wheels of tilt
operator to verify the logged data and investigate sensing probe can run smoothly inside these
any anomaly immediately at site. keyways.
www.encardio.com
Access tubes are 3 m (~9.85 ft) in length. Different DIGITAL TILT SENSING PROBE
kinds of couplings are available to rapidly join access
tubes. Telescopic couplings are available in case EAN-26MV Inclinometer probe
settlement is expected to take place. Design of these
Digital probe of stainless steel
couplings ensure that correct alignment of keyways
construction is fitted with two pairs
is maintained throughout depth of gage well.
of pivoted sprung wheels which can
rotate freely. Standard gage length
between the wheels is 500 mm. An
option of 2 ft gage length (Imperial
unit) is also available. The spring
loaded wheel arms help to position
the probe centrally inside the access
casing at any required depth.
The probe is designed for use in all
standard inclinometer access tubing
with o.d 70 mm (~ 2.75 in) and with
o.d. 85 mm (~ 3.35 in)
EAN-AT70 self aligning access tube Probe consists of two precision
Self aligning ABS tubing, 70 mm o.d. (~ 2.75 in), 58 MEMS accelerometers. One
mm i.d., 3 m length. accelerometer has its axis in the
plane of the wheels and other at 90°
EAN-FC70 ABS fixed coupling (70 mm) to it. The probe senses horizontal
ABS fixed coupling for 70 mm o.d. access tube; 77 deviation between the probe axis
mm o.d. x 160 mm length. and the vertical plane,
simultaneously in both the
EAN-TC70 ABS telescopic coupling (70 mm)
orthogonal axis. A four pin
ABS telescopic coupling for 70 mm o.d. access tube; 77 connector is provided for connection
mm o.d. x 300 mm length, displacement up to 150 mm. to the cable.
EAN-EC70 End cap for ABS tubing (70 mm) EAN-26DP Dummy probe
ABS end cap for 70 mm o.d. access tube to fit at top It has the same dimension as the
or bottom. actual probe. It is used for checking
EAN-TT70 Top cap for ABS tubing (70 mm) the gage well. Cord length is same
as cable length in the actual probe.
ABS lockable top cap for 70 mm o.d. access tube.
EAN-26CCJ Calibration check jig
Pop rivets for ABS tubing
It enables verification of calibration
Pop rivets packets of 100 numbers for fixed of the inclinometer probe at known
coupling. angles of tilt.
Self tapping screws for ABS tubing
Self tapping screws packets of 100 numbers for INTERCONNECTING CABLE
EAN-26R Operating cable and
Pop rivet gun cable reel
Hand held manually operated. Two core abrasion resistant polyurethane sheathed,
Power drill weather proof signal cable with high tensile straining
member, graduated at every 0.5 m (or 2 ft Imperial).
230 V 50 Hz operation power drill with two 3.2 mm This is available in different lengths.
dia drill bits.
A four pin connector is provided for connecting to
Mastic tape the probe. The cable reel comprises of a plastic
50 mm width x 10 m long mastic tape. winding reel on suitable frame to hold the specified
length of the cable.
ABS casing sealing accessories
BOPP tape 50 mm width x 30 m long. EAN-26CB Cable suspension bracket
EAN-PC It can be directly placed on the ABS

tubing at the top of gage well. It has
Protective cover a slot to hold the cable at the
Note: ABS casing with 85 mm o.d. (~ 3.35 in), 77 graduated marks for convenience in
mm i.d., available on request. taking the readings.
www.encardio.com
SPECIFICATION
Probe specification
Probe-reel Measuring range ± 30° of vertical

connector
Resolution (Metric) ± 0.008 mm/500 mm
Resolution (Imperial) ± 0.0004 in/2 ft
500 mm Metric (standard)

Distance between wheels 2 ft Imperial (on request)
EAN-26R Operating cable
and cable reel Operating temperature -20°C to 70°C
Overall 25.4 mm (~ 1 in)

Mobile Phone dia (excluding wheel arm)
Probe dimensions x 675 mm (~30.9 in) length
Any GSM/GPRS mobile phone running Android 2.1
(or later) Operating System with at least 480 x 800 Probe weight 1.4 kg (~3.1 lb)
pixel bright color display, at least 1 GB memory and Probe casing AISI 316L Stainless steel
Bluetooth connection can be used as a hand held
readout/datalogger unit. Mobile phone should be Total system accuracy1 ± 2 mm/30 m (readings at
compatible with local cellular standards. Internet (Metric) every 500 mm)
connectivity is required if data is to be transferred Total system accuracy1 ± 0.1 in/100 ft (readings
to remote server. A local cellular connection (SIM) is (Imperial) at every 2 ft)
required for operation.
Cable specification
2 core polyurethane
Details sheathed
Diameter 6 mm (~ 0.24 in)
1.9 kg/50 m (3.8 lb/150

Weight ft); including ferrules
Cable reel specifications
Upto 100 m (330 ft) 300 mm (~ 12 in) diameter

cable reel (flange)
100 - 200 m (330-650 380 mm (~ 15 in) diameter

Encardio-rite Digital Inclinometer application ft) cable reel (flange)
software for Android needs to be installed in the
phone. Application software is supplied free to For 50 m (150 ft) cable
length 4.5 kg (9.5 lb) weight
owners of Encardio-rite EAN-26M Digital
Inclinometer System. For 150 m (500 ft) cable
length 9.5 kg (20.3 lb) weight
A suitable mobile phone installed with Digital
Inclinometer application software is generally 1 Differencebetween cumulated displacements while taking
supplied with the EAN-26M Digital Inclinometer readings in similar conditions repeatedly
System. However, obtaining local cellular connection
with internet connectivity is in user scope.
*All specifications are subject to change without prior notice DATASHEET | 1212-11 R04

International: India | UAE | Qatar | Bahrain | Bhutan | Morocco| Europe | UK | USA
www.encardio.com
USERS’ MANUAL
DIGITAL INCLINOMETER
OPERATION
MODEL EAN-26M
Doc. # WI 6002.103 R03 | Aug 2020

International: UAE | Qatar | Bahrain | Bhutan | Morocco | Europe | UK | USA
Users’ Manual EAN-26M Digital inclinometer operation
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 2
1.1 Displacement measurement 2
1.2 EAN-26M Digital Inclinometer Overview 2
1.6 List of Abbreviations 3
2 EAN-26M DIGITAL INCLINOMETER SYSTEM 5

1.2 EAN-26M digital inclinometer system 5
2.1 Access tubes and fitting 5
2.2 EAN-26MV digital tilt sensing probe 6
2.3 EAN-26MR Digital Inclinometer cable and reel 7
2.4 Mobile phone datalogger 7
2.4.1 Mobile phone datalogger (minimum requirements) 7
2.5 Accessories 8
2.5.1 EAN-DP Dummy probe 8
2.5.2 EAN-26CB Cable suspension bracket 8
2.5.3 EAN-26CCJ Calibration check jig 8
3 MANDATORY CHECKS AFTER INSTALLATION OF INCLINOMETER CASING 9

3.1 With Encardio-rite model EAN-26DP dummy probe 9
3.2 X-Y coordinates with Prism target 9
3.3 Elevation by settlement point 9
4 PREPARATIONS FOR TAKING READINGS 11

4.1 Connecting probe to cable reel 11
4.2 Precautions while making connections 12
4.3 Preparing to log a borehole 13
5 TAKING READINGS 14
5.1 Taking readings with Digital inclinometer system 14
5.2 Guidelines and maintenance for correct readings 15
5.2.1 Maintenance Inclinometer Probe 15
5.2.2 Guidelines for correct readings 15
6 MOBILE READOUT UNIT 17

6.1 Overview 17
6.2 Inclinometer software for phone 17
6.3 Establishing Bluetooth connection 17
7 INCLINOMETER APPLICATION SOFTWARE FOR MOBILE 19

7.1 Application Installation 19
7.2 Main Menu 20
7.2.1 ‘Connection’ function for connecting mobile readout to cable reel 21
7.2.2 ‘System Information’ function for system information 22
7.2.3 Editing Reel and Probe ID 24
www.encardio.com
7.2.4 ‘Create Site/Borehole’ function for creating a site 25

7.2.5 ‘Edit Borehole” function to edit borehole parameters 26
7.2.6 Taking readings 27
7.2.7 EDIT readings 28
7.2.8 Reading option settings 29
7.2.9 Advanced options 29
7.2.10 Saving borehole log 30
7.2.11 Probe Mismatch Warning 30
7.2.12 Resume Borehole Log 31
7.3 Viewing data 31
7.3.1 Viewing data in table 32
7.3.2 Viewing data on graph 33
7.4 Borehole files storage 34
7.5 Borehole log database manager 34
7.5.1 Selecting multiple log files 35
7.5.2 Deleting borehole log 35
7.5.3 Creating files from borehole database 36
7.6 Setting database deletion password 37
7.6.1 Change password 37
7.6.2 Forgot password 37
7.7 Uploading files 37
7.7.1 URL settings 38
7.7.2 Uploading multiple files to server 38
7.8 Help menu 38
8 CALCULATING DATA 39
8.1 Face error 39
8.2 Mean displacement 39
8.3 Absolute displacement 39
8.4 Deviation displacement 39
9 FILE FORMATS 40
9.1 Digital inclinometer standard data format (*.CSV) 40
9.2 Digital inclinometer extended data format (*.CSV) 40
9.3 Digital inclinometer webview data format (*.DI1) 41
10 INCLINOMETER DATA BACKUP 42

10.1 Connecting Phone to the PC 42
10.2 Backing up the inclinometer database 42
10.3 Backing up the borehole logs 43
11 RESTORING INCLINOMETER DATA 45

11.1 Restoring the inclinometer database 45
11.2 Restoring borehole logs 45
12 INSTALLING NEW DI SOFTWARE IN PHONE 47

12.1 Downloading application software 47
12.2 Installing the application software 48
13 UNINSTALLING THE DI SOFTWARE 49

13.1 Clearing application data 49
13.2 Uninstalling the application 50
www.encardio.com
14 TROUBLESHOOTING 51
14.1 Unable to connect Bluetooth 51
14.2 Unable to connect to the probe 51
14.3 Files not uploading on FTP server 51
14.4 Inserting new SD card 51
15 PUSH BUTTON AND STATUS LED INDICATOR 52
16 INCLINOVIEW APPLICATION SOFTWARE FOR PC 53
www.encardio.com
Battery charging and care of rechargeable battery
CAUTION !
Always maintain cable reel’s battery in charged condition. Failure to do so will cause premature battery
failure. A battery which gets damaged due to non-compliance with the instructions given below is not
covered by our standard warranty and is also not eligible for free servicing.
Cable reel’s battery
The EAN-26R Digital Inclinometer Reel uses a removable sealed rechargeable Li-ion maintenance free
battery as a power source. A separate battery charger unit operating from universal AC mains supply is
supplied with each Inclinometer system. This battery charger operates from 90 to 260 V AC, 50 or 60 Hz
which makes it suitable for operation from AC mains available throughout the world.
A fully discharged battery needs 4 hours of charge to get fully charged. A partially discharged battery will
require proportionately less time but the time is difficult to calculate. As soon as the battery is fully charged
the charging current gets automatically reduced to a safe value.
On receiving the Inclinometer system for the first time recharge the battery for 4 hours using the supplied
mains powered battery charger.
If the DI Reel is not going to be used for more than 30 days, fully charge the battery before storing the DI
Reel. Also fully charge the battery before use if the DI Reel has not been used for more than 30 days.
If the data logger is not going to be used for more than 30 days, recharge the battery at least once every
30 days or so.
When battery voltage is showing 7.3 V in system information screen (at Readout unit) it means
approximately 10 percent of battery capacity is left. Fully recharge the battery at the first opportunity.
Turn off mains AC supply to the charger before connecting to or disconnecting battery from the battery
charger. A fully charged battery will not get damaged but the battery life gets reduced if a fully charged
battery is kept connected to the charger for very long duration. It is recommended that the charger be
disconnected after 4 hours charging period is over.
The rechargeable battery needs replacement every 3 to 5 years (irrespective of hours of use). Replace
battery with Camcorder Battery BP522 or an equivalent from another manufacturer.
Phone’s (readout unit) battery
The EAN-26DI Readout unit uses an internal sealed rechargeable Li-ion maintenance free battery as a
power source. A separate battery charger/adaptor unit operating from universal AC mains supply is
supplied with each DI Readout unit. This battery charger operates from 90 to 260 V AC, 50 or 60 Hz which
makes it suitable for operation from AC mains available throughout the world.
On receiving the Readout unit for the first time discharge the battery fully and then recharge the battery for
2 hours using the supplied mains powered battery charger.
If the DI Readout unit is not going to be used for more than 30 days, fully charge the battery and switch
OFF the phone before storing the DI Readout unit. Also fully charge the battery before use if the DI Readout
unit has not been used for more than 30 days.
Page | 1
1 INTRODUCTION
The EAN-26M digital inclinometer system is used for reliable measurement of lateral movement in
applications like:
 Earth movement in landslide zone.
 Detecting shear planes in hydraulic structures.
 Measuring stability during construction.
 Deflection of diaphragm/retaining walls and piles under load.
The EAN-26M digital inclinometer system is an accurate instrumentation system. Its readout has built-in
data storage facilities and capability of transferring stored data to a computer. The inclinometer probe
operates in a plastic grooved casing which may be “built-up” with embankment fill, inserted into boreholes
or attached externally to structures or hillsides. The inclinometer casing may be installed with telescopic
couplings as construction progresses providing opportunity for settlement measurements, or it may be
installed with butt joints in drill holes in abutments or completed embankments if no significant settlement
is anticipated.
1.1 Displacement measurement
For measurement of vertical displacement, magnetic targets may be fixed to access casing at selected
points. Measuring settlement by using inclinometer casing has largely replaced the earlier method using
separate settlement devices like the cross arm. The same installation is now used to measure settlement
as well as lateral movement. For details refer to data sheet 1098 “Magnetic Extensometer System”.
1.2 EAN-26M Digital Inclinometer Overview
The Encardio-rite model EAN-26M Digital Inclinometer uses an Android OS based mobile phone with a
Bluetooth wireless interface as a readout device. The recommended phone types have a large pixel with
colour display and a capacitive touch screen that makes it easy to read the display while logging bore holes
using Encardio-rite’s range of traversing type vertical and horizontal borehole inclinometers.
EAN-26M digital inclinometer’s readout unit can be used to log bore hole profiles of boreholes up to 300 m
deep in 0.5 / 1.0 meters increment or up to 999 feet deep in 2.0/4.0 feet increment using either biaxial or
uniaxial inclinometers.
Few functional advantages can be listed as follows:
• The readout unit can store readings from up to more than 1000 bore holes. The readings are not lost
even if the power is turned off.
• Four readings are required for a biaxial inclinometer survey for each depth level in a bore hole (as will
be explained in the manual). In case of any error during logging, the probe can be lowered back to the
depth with problem and logging can be continued without having to start afresh, thus saving time.
• A quick probe check mode allows verifying probe operation or calibration without having to configure
a dummy bore hole log as is required by most other commercially available inclinometer data loggers.
• The stored readings can be uploaded to a remote FTP server using GPRS/3G cellular network. The
uploaded data is in a format that allows the data to be easily imported in spread sheet program like
Microsoft Excel.
Page | 2
Since readout unit is a mobile phone, most of the people are familiar with its operation. Working with a
mobile phone readout unit is very easy and user friendly.
 (TRADEMARKS): Microsoft Excel is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation, USA.
index tells you where to look for in this manual if you need some specific information.
This users’ manual is intended to provide you with sufficient information on operation of model EAN-26M
digital inclinometer and its mobile readout unit. The manual also contains instructions on how to set-up for
lowering inclinometer probe into gage well for purpose of taking inclination readings.
omissions in installation, data or data interpretation are not the responsibility of Encardio-rite Electronics
Pvt. Ltd.
For details on how to install inclinometer casing, please refer to operating manual # WI 6002.104.
1.6 List of Abbreviations
3G 3rd Generation of wireless mobile telecommunications technology
4G 4rth Generation of wireless mobile telecommunications technology
CSV Comma Separated Values

DI Digital Inclinometer
EAN-26 Digital Inclinometer System
FTP File Transfer Protocol

GPRS General Packet Radio Service
GSM Global System for Mobile Communications
Page | 3
LED Light Emitting Diode
PC Personal Computer
SIM Subscriber Identity Module
URL Uniform Resource Locator
USB Universal Serial Bus
WDMS Web based Data Monitoring Service
Wi-Fi Wireless Fidelity
Page | 4
2 EAN-26M DIGITAL INCLINOMETER SYSTEM
The first step is to make a near vertical gage well by installing Vertical
casing in a borehole, embedding in an earth/rock fill or concrete
Deviation
structure during construction or fixing to face of a completed
structure.
NOTE: For details on how to install inclinometer casing,
please refer to operating manual # WI 6002.104
The inclinometer probe is then passed through entire length of

gage well, taking readings at fixed pre-determined depths from
bottom to top. A dual accelerometer probe senses inclination of Ø
casing in two planes at right angles to each other. Voltage output
from probe is directly proportional to sine of angle of inclination of
L
long axis of probe from the vertical. A positive output voltage
ngth
indicates a negative angle of inclination.
e le
A set of initial base reading is taken at given depths within the
Gag
gage well. This forms the reference datum. Subsequent reading
sets are compared with this reference datum. All subsequent
readings are taken over a period of time at identical depths,
thereby indicating rate, magnitude, and direction of lateral Deviation = L Sin Ø
deformation. The inclination is displayed in terms of angular or
horizontal displacement (deviation) on the electronic readout
equipment at ground level with the operator. Figure 2-1
Provided that one end of access casing is known to be fixed, it is

possible to obtain a complete profile of the gage well by taking a succession of readings. By comparing
these profiles, the horizontal displacement of gage well at different depths over a period of time is
determined.
1.2 EAN-26M digital inclinometer system
The EAN-26M digital inclinometer system basically consists of:
 Access casing and fittings

 Tilt sensing probe
 Interconnecting cable with reel and cable holder
 Mobile phone datalogger
 Accessories including:
 Dummy probe
 Suspension bracket
 Calibration check jig
 Pop rivet gun
2.1 Access tubes and fitting
Inclinometer ABS access tubes have longitudinal keyways, specially produced to close tolerances to allow
inclinometer probe wheels run smoothly inside them.
Access tubes are 3 m (~9.85 ft) in length. Different kinds of couplings are available to rapidly join access
tubes. Telescopic couplings are available in case settlement is expected to take place. Design of these
couplings ensure that correct alignment of keyways is maintained throughout depth of gage well.
Page | 5
Figure 2-2 ABS access tubes with fixed and telescopic coupling and end cap
2.2 EAN-26MV digital tilt sensing probe
Encardio-rite model EAN-26MV inclinometer probe uses accelerometers as the

basic tilt sensor. In addition some kind of signal conditioning is given to boost
the signal voltage. Analog to digital signal conversion is done to make the
signal noise free, suitable for transmission over long cables.
The digital inclinometer (tilt sensing) probe measures angles of inclination from
the vertical in two planes oriented at 90° (orthogonal) to each other. The
inclinometer probe of stainless steel construction is fitted with two pairs of
pivoted sprung wheels that can rotate freely.
The standard gage length between the wheels is 500 mm (or 2 feet). The
spring-loaded wheels help to accurately position the probe centrally inside the
gage well at any required depth. The precision grooved casing forms an
integral part of the gage well. The cylindrical portion of the probe has a diameter
of 25.4 mm and a length of 685 mm.
The probe consists of two integral precision accelerometers, one with its axis
in plane of the wheels and other at 90o to it. The probe senses horizontal
deviation between the probe axis and the vertical plane, simultaneously in the
‘X’ and ‘Y’ directions.
The EAN-26MV digital probe however gives the output in digital form (in a
numeric form). The output value is the distance between the two wheels
multiplied by the sine of the angle of tilt in that plane. So essentially the output
of the probe is the horizontal displacement of the top wheel arm centre from an
axis passing through the centre of the bottom wheel arm assembly along the
plane of rotation or tilt.
As the accelerometer rotates about a horizontal axis along a vertical plane its
output changes proportionally to the sine of the angle its sensitive axis makes
from the true vertical. So an inclinometer’s output is generally proportional to
the sine of the angle of tilt (or inclination) rather than the tilt angle of the
Figure 2-3
inclinometer probe itself. However, this sine law variation of the inclinometer Inclinometer
probe output is more useful, as the subsequent calculations determining the probe
ground profile uses the sine of the tilt angle rather than the tilt angle itself.
Inclinometer probe has a significant current consumption and thus introduce a drop in excitation voltage
across the connecting cable. The EAN-26R cable reel supplies an excitation voltage of +29 V. The cable
length, connected to inclinometer probe, should not cause the excitation voltage to drop less than +12 V
at the inclinometer probe terminals.
Page | 6
A four pin connector is provided in inclinometer probe for connection to the cable.
2.3 EAN-26MR Digital Inclinometer cable and reel
The inclinometer probe is connected used with

EAN-26R cable reel. The cable reel comprises of a
plastic winding reel on suitable frame to hold the
specified length of the cable.
A PU sheathed two core cable is clamped at every

0.5 m (or 2 feet) with copper ferrules. The ferrules
are number engraved at every meter. A four pin
connector is provided for connecting read-out to
probe.
The cable reel has a Bluetooth interface unit inside
the reel and a long cable to interface with digital
Figure 2-4 Cable reel assembly (with probe)
inclinometer probe. The cable reel is powered with
7.2 V compact size rechargeable battery. Battery is accessible from outside. Battery can be removed for
charging by opening battery holder. Power ON/OFF pushbutton is provided on reel’s disk near battery holder.
2.4 Mobile phone datalogger
The Digital Inclinometer system uses an Android OS based

mobile phone as a hand held datalogger. Any mobile phone
with minimum features (as listed below) can be used for this
application. The Android operating system of phone for
providing powerful platform to manage applications efficiently.
It has additional useful features like phone calls, SMS, MMS,
GPRS/3G, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, USB, high resolution camera and
high capacity external memory card.
The Encardio-rite inclinometer application software on the

phone enables it to configure and collect data from the digital
inclinometer system. The application is very friendly and has
ability to show borehole logs in tabular format and create plots
of borehole data instantly after borehole reading is complete.
Figure 2-5 Mobile
This allows the operator to verify the logged data and
readout unit
investigate any anomaly immediately at site.
2.4.1 Mobile phone datalogger (minimum

requirements)
A mobile phone that is intended for use as readout unit for the digital inclinometer should have the following
minimum features. If a mobile phone is ordered and supplied with the system it shall have the following
minimum features.
Mobile OS Android version 2.2 or above
RAM 512MB (recommended 1 GB).
External memory 2 GB or above
Display size 480 x 800 pixels or above
Display Type Touch screen
CPU Speed 1 GHz or above
Blue tooth Version 3.0 with A2DP or above
Page | 7
Mobile Network 2G Network: GSM850/900/1800/190

3G Network: HSDPA900/2100
(If the mobile phone readout will be used in an area covered by CDMA network
services only, then a mobile phone suitable for CDMA should be used or ordered)
NOTE: Due to continuous improvements and change in availability of models no specific

recommendations can be made about manufacturer and model number. Also the above
features may change, if the application is upgraded. Please contact factory for latest update
on minimum features requirement for mobile phone.
2.5 Accessories
2.5.1 EAN-DP Dummy probe
It has same dimensions as the actual probe. It is used for checking the gage well. Cord length is same as
cable length in the actual probe.
2.5.2 EAN-26CB Cable suspension bracket
It is directly placed on casing at top of gage well to lower probe into borehole. It has a slot to hold the cable
at the graduated marks (ferrules) for convenience in taking the readings.
Figure 2-6 cable suspension bracket
2.5.3 EAN-26CCJ Calibration check jig
Calibration check jig enables verification of calibration of the inclinometer probe

at known angles of tilt. Please refer to Users’ manual # WI 6002.107 on how to
mount and use calibration check jig.
Figure 2-7
Calibration check jig
Page | 8
3 MANDATORY CHECKS AFTER INSTALLATION OF INCLINOMETER CASING
NOTE: For installation of inclinometer casing, refer to Users’ manual # WI 6002.104 giving details on
installation inclinometer casing in different applications.
3.1 With Encardio-rite model EAN-26DP dummy probe
Lower dummy probe inside the inclinometer casing, first in grooves in one direction and then in the
perpendicular direction to verify that the grooves are smooth with no concrete or foreign material stuck in
them. Clean if necessary.
The monitoring instruments described in the introduction should never be lowered down in the gage well
unless the latter is checked by the dummy probe. The monitoring instrument may get stuck in the gage
well and you may permanently lose it in case this instruction is not followed.
NOTE: The model EAN-26DP dummy probe is not a part of the supply and has to be ordered
separately.
3.2 X-Y coordinates with Prism target

a. Determine initial Northing (X) and Easting (Y) positions of casing top by surveying after the casing is
set. An aluminium adaptor with holder pin (suitable for inclinometer casing EAN-AT-70) with ERT-10P2
prism target is available for taking X-Y coordinates. Refer to figure 3-1 for details.
b. Readings should be taken with an accurate and precise total station. This data should be treated as a
reference during verification of deflection at a later date.
Aluminium
adaptor
Precision holding
pin
Prism target with

Prism target adaptor placed
mounted on on access casing
holding pin
Figure 3-1 Prism adapter for inclinometer casing
3.3 Elevation by settlement point
Additionally, determine the elevation of the pipe top using a

precision digital level. For this purpose a settlement survey marker Figure 3-2 Survey
target to be
should be mounted adjacent to top of inclinometer casing that will mounted on top
serve as survey reference point. The survey marker is illustrated in concrete platform
figure 3-2. to determine
elevation of
casing top
Page | 9
This will allow inclinometer as well as settlement profile to be referenced to an absolute reference (elevation
above sea level) should datum reference at the bottom be required to be verified due to any reason.
NOTE: The aluminium adaptor with holder pin, model ERT-10P2 prism target and the settlement
point are not a part of the supply and have to be ordered separately.
CAUTION: The Northing (X), Easting (Y) and Elevation (Z) of the casing top taken by the precision total
station and digital level is a reference for future use. It should be carefully stored and never
be lost till the borewell is used for monitoring.
3.4 Sign convention
The inclinometer readout uses a sign convention for casing

A+ (A)
orientation. Follow sign convention strictly. Mark casing groove
orientation with a permanent ink marker pen on outside of casing and
inside of lockable cover.
B- (D) B+ (B)
Mark ‘A+’ in direction in which maximum deflection is expected.
Looking down the well, mark other grooves clockwise as ’B+’, ’A-’ and
‘B-’. While inserting probe into casing, the uppermost probe wheel
A- (C)
near connector should be pointed in direction of major principle plane
of movement i.e. in direction marked A+. (In some dataloggers, Figure 3-3
direction is marked as A, B, C and D). Refer to figure 3-3.
NOTE: While installation, one pair of inclinometer casing grooves are always maintained
perpendicular to direction in which lateral movement is to be measured. If no such direction
is known, one set of grooves are mainlined parallel to N-S direction.
Page | 10
4 PREPARATIONS FOR TAKING READINGS
4.1 Connecting probe to cable reel

a. Open lock on protective cover and remove top cap from casing.
b. Take out probe from transport case. Remove protective cap from top of probe. You will find an
Ó’ ring on face of probe. Inspect condition of “O” ring. Replace if damaged or permanently
flattened.
CAUTION: Please ensure that the “O” ring is in proper form and correctly placed. Extra “O” rings are
always provided with the supply in inclinometer probe carrying case.
Figure 4-1 Connecting probe to cable reel
c. Carefully push connector part

of connector assembly at end of
cable on to inclinometer probe
connector after ensuring that
keying slots and splines of
probe and cable connectors are
properly aligned (otherwise the
connector assembly will not fit).
d. While connecting the probe to

the cable reel, ensure that the
red dot marks on the connector
and probe are aligned properly.
Refer to the figure 4-1 and 4-2. Figure 4-2
A caution sticker is also
provided on the probe for the
same.
e. Once aligned, thread in the probe and connector together securely.

f. Ensure that the knurl nut over connector is not over-tightened. Do not apply unnecessary force. Screw
on (not forcibly) with supplied spanner the threaded retaining shell of cable connector assembly to
inclinometer probe to make a water tight connection.
Page | 11
4.2 Precautions while making connections
It is very important to take proper precaution while connecting probe to the reel to have correct and trouble
free readings from the digital inclinometer system. Guidelines on taking care of probe and cable reel
connector are given below. These should be followed stringently to avoid untimely wear and tear or failure
of the connector.
1. While connecting probe to cable reel, ensure that the red dot marks on the connector and probe are
aligned properly
2. Ensure that while connecting, only the coupling (on the connector) is twisted, and not the cable.
3. Ensure that the connector end of probe and cable reel are always clean; there should not be any debris
or dust inside, while connecting. Soap and water can be used to clean it on a regular basis. One can
also use alcohol for cleaning; rinse connector with alcohol and then allow it to air dry.
4. The ‘O ring of probe and elastomer/compound in the probe connector can degrade when exposed to
heat/sunlight or any solvent. To prevent this, always use the protective plug over connectors, when not
in use.
5. Ensure that both connectors and the protective plug are clean and dry, before fixing cap on connectors,
during transport and storage.
6. It is recommended to use a silicone spray to lubricate the connector ends for smooth connection. Never
use grease or solvent based lubricants as these can damage the connectors.
Knurl nut
Red dots to align

the connectors
Figure 4-3 Connector alignment
Probe-reel
connector
Figure 4-4 probe connected to cable reel
Page | 12
4.3 Preparing to log a borehole
NOTE: Section 6 and 7 "Mobile Readout Unit" and “Inclinometer application software for mobile”
describes the procedure for setting up a bore hole and logging the borehole. Follow the
instructions given to log the borehole.
Site and borehole names must be created in readout unit before logging a borehole. Edit borehole
parameters be providing required information. Then the inclinometer probe is lowered in the borehole down
to the deepest level to be logged and gradually pulled up in 0.5 or 1.0 m (2 or 4 ft) intervals and readings
stored. The interval by which the probe is raised after each reading is known as the depth interval.
For the first run the face A+ of the inclinometer is kept pointing towards the reference groove of the
inclinometer casing in the borehole. The reference groove is one of the four grooves in an inclinometer
casing that has been chosen to be the reference groove. After the first run is over the inclinometer probe
is taken out of the casing and rotated 180 degrees and reinserted in the inclinometer casing. Conventionally
this traverse is known as A- face. For a biaxial probe the second axis is labelled as B+ during the first
traverse and B- during the second traverse.
Borehole files (logs) uses face conventions as face A+ is referred as face A, face A- is referred as face B,
face B+ is referred as face C and face B- is referred as face D.
For Encardio rite vertical inclinometer probes the side with the topmost wheel is labelled as face A+. When
the inclinometer probe tilts towards the topmost wheel, i.e. towards face A+, the output of A axis increases
in the positive direction. If the tilt is in reverse direction the sign of the output voltage is negative.
Page | 13
5 TAKING READINGS
5.1 Taking readings with Digital inclinometer Operating cable reel

system
Lockable protective cover
NOTE: Depth up to bottom of casing should
already be known so that probe can be
eased on to bottom without jolting it or
damaging it. Top cap
G.L.
NOTE: Section 6 and 7 "Mobile Readout Unit" Suspension
and “Inclinometer application software bracket
for mobile” describes the procedure for Cavity
500
setting up a bore hole and logging the (250 cube)
borehole. Follow the instructions given
Concrete
to log the borehole.
a. Before taking the first reading make sure that
Ferrule
the grout filled in the annular space between the
borehole and inclinometer access casing is set.
Coupling
It is recommended to take the first reading at
least one week after the grouting
b. Put the pipe extension jig over the pipe top, if

required. Secure cable suspension bracket over
Bi-axial probe
the casing or the extension jig.
Spider magnet
c. Lower inclinometer probe EAN-26MV to bottom
of gage well with uppermost torpedo wheel
pointing in direction marked 'A+'. Inclination of Inclinometer casing
the probe is displayed in terms of horizontal
displacement on the smartphone datalogger at
the ground level with the operator. Grout
d. Raise probe along entire length of gage well

from bottom to top, resting the ferrule (at 0.5 m
500
interval on inclinometer cable) over the

suspension bracket. Refer to figure 5-1. This will Bottom cap
give readings at intervals of 0.5 m. The two

sensors inside the probe will sense the Borehole Ø150 mm.
inclination of the casing in two planes at right

angles to each other.
e. Again lower probe to bottom of gage well with

uppermost torpedo wheel pointing in direction
‘A-’. Raise probe along entire length of gage
well from bottom to top, taking readings at
intervals of 0.5 m.
f. Provided one end of the casing is known to be

fixed, complete profile of gage well may be
obtained by taking a succession of readings. By
comparing the profiles, horizontal displacement
of gage well at different depths over a period of
Figure 5-1 Taking readings
time is determined.
Page | 14
g. The base or initial reading is formed after taking at least three sets of readings. Choose one out of the
most repeatable readings of the set and make it the base. All subsequent readings are compared with
this base reading thereby indicating rate, magnitude and direction of lateral deformation.
h. When the logging is complete remove the cable grip from the access tubing and take out the
inclinometer probe.
i. Disassemble cable from probe. Wipe clean the probe and replace protective caps on the cable and
the probe. Oil the wheel, springs and axle pivots with the supplied oil (or any other locally available
light duty machine oil).
j. Rewind cable onto cable reel, clean it and fix the connectors in place.
k. Replace the top plug on the casing and lock it. In case any additional protection is provided, install it.
NOTE: Not properly cleaning probe, associated cable, connectors and datalogger after use is the
most frequent cause of failure of the inclinometer system. Not oiling the wheel, springs and
axle pivots will invariably result in costly repairs and equipment downtime.
5.2 Guidelines and maintenance for correct readings
5.2.1 Maintenance Inclinometer Probe
1. Before connecting inclinometer probe to cable reel, remove the protective cap and check for the Ó' ring
on face of probe. Ensure that the "O" ring is in proper form and correctly placed. Replace if damaged or
permanently flattened. Extra "O" rings are always provided with the supply in inclinometer probe carrying
case.
2. Constantly check conditions of “O” ring on probe face to maintain a watertight seal.
3. After taking reading, always ensure to wipe clean the probe and replace protective caps on the cable and
the probe.
4. Ensure to oil the wheel, springs and axle pivots with the supplied oil (or any other locally available light
duty machine oil). If piling is not done on regular basis, it will invariably result in untimely failure and costly
repairs.
5. Replace probe wheels and axles if they become wobbly or sticky.
6. Keep protective plugs in place on all electric outlets to prevent physical damage or liquids spilling into
them.
7. Keep all electrical connections clean - use alcohol or a spray cleaner suitable for electronics that will not
damage the outer cable covering or panel finish.
5.2.2 Guidelines for correct readings

Do’s
• If large deformations are expected to take place, use dummy probe to check condition of gage well before
lowering the actual probe.
• Check if directions ‘A+’, ‘B+’, ‘A-’ and ‘B-’ are clearly marked on casing top. In case the marks are fading
away, re-mark them.
• Always allow enough time for the accelerometers (inside the probe) to “settle down” before taking any
reading.
• When raising probe during a set of readings, take extreme care in duplicating depths A+ and the A-
reading runs such that errors contributed by casing irregularities are minimized.
Page | 15
• Replace the discharged cable reel battery with a fully charged battery if battery voltage goes below 6 V.
The inclinometer system is supplied with two Lithium batteries for the reel unit.
Do not’s:
• Hard bumps to probe can misalign and/or break the accelerometers or break internal electrical
connections.
• Hard bumps to indicator can dislodge internal batteries, break electrical connections, shift LCD readouts
or rupture the watertight case seals.
• Bending connecting cable over sharp objects or walking on it can sever internal conductors or puncture
the outer waterproof coating.
NOTE: The inclinometer system is like other delicate equipment and its use requires common sense
and reasonable care!
Page | 16
6 MOBILE READOUT UNIT
6.1 Overview
The Digital Inclinometer system uses an Android OS

based smart-phone as a readout unit. The Android
operating system of the phone provides powerful platform
to manage applications efficiently.
The mobile phone communicates with the inclinometer
cable reel through its in-built Bluetooth wireless interface.
The wireless link eliminates the traditional slip ring and
cable connection between the reel unit and the hand-held
readout that often became unreliable due to frayed cable
and slip ring problem.
The phone readout has a number of additional useful

features like:
• The huge computational and image processing power

allows to display the logged borehole data as tables
or various types of graphs commonly used at back end Mobile readout
computers to visualize the data. This allows the Incline casing
operator to verify the logged data and investigate any
anomaly immediately at site. Ferrule (at every 0.5 m)
• User can use the phone at site to make calls, to Suspension bracket
upload/download files or check e-mails.
Figure 6-1 Mobile readout
• Wireless Bluetooth can be used to send files to PC or
any other Bluetooth device.
• High resolution camera can be helpful to take photographs of site conditions and send them back to
office from site itself for immediate attention.
• A higher capacity external memory card can be used to store large amount of data.
• Data backup can be taken on regular basis by connecting phone with PC through USB cable.
6.2 Inclinometer software for phone
The Encardio-rite in-house developed inclinometer software running on phone can take borehole readings
and store them into memory.
Inclinometer software has ability to show borehole logs in tabular format and create plots of borehole data
instantly after borehole reading is complete.
Borehole data files are created automatically while saving borehole log. These files can be recreated from
software database when needed. Borehole files can be uploaded to remote server through mobile phone
internet connection via GPRS/3G/4G/Wi-Fi.
6.3 Establishing Bluetooth connection
Inclinometer system uses Bluetooth connection for communicating phone readout with the cable reel. For
making connection follow the steps given below:
 Connect the inclinometer probe with cable reel.
 Turn ON the cable reel by pressing push button provided on reel’s disk near battery holder. Once push
button is pressed reel becomes ON.
Page | 17
 The indicator will glow in bright RED colour to ensure that reel is ON.
 Power ON the phone and go to settings and then Bluetooth settings. Turn ON the Bluetooth and click
on “scan” button showing on phone’s screen. Phone will show the list of Bluetooth devices found. Find
the reel’s serial number on phone screen and click for pairing the phone with cable reel.
 Once pairing button is pressed it will ask to enter passkey for authentication. Enter pairing code
“6965785054” and press OK.
 On successful authentication it will show that device is paired. Now phone is paired with reel.
The above activity is required for first time connection of phone with cable reel.
Page | 18
7 INCLINOMETER APPLICATION SOFTWARE FOR MOBILE
7.1 Application Installation
It is strongly recommended to exit all programs before installation. Follow the steps below for installing the
application for the first time.
NOTE: Please make sure that option for Unknown sources (allow installation of non-Market apps) in
Setting-> Security must be checked.
• Copy the “EAN26R1_xx.apk” into the mobile via Bluetooth or USB cable.
• Go to copied location and tap on EAN-26R1_xx.apk. Tap on install. Refer to Figure 7-1.
Figure 7-1 Digital Inclinometer Android Application Software Installation
• After installing press ‘Done’ or application can be opened directly by pressing ‘Open’. User can open
the application through application launcher also. Refer to figure 7-2
 Click on Digital Inclinometer (DI) application icon as shown in figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2 Application launcher
 The app will show the name of the application and its version (refer to left screenshot in figure 7-3).
This screen will splash for few seconds and then option menu appears.
Page | 19
 Figure 7-3 (right screenshot) shows different function buttons. With ‘Change Password’ button, the
password for database deletion can be changed or it can be regenerated with ‘Forgot Password?’
button. Help information can be accessed by pressing ‘Help’ button. ‘Main Menu’ button is used to
proceed further.
Figure 7-3 Splash Screen & Home Screen
7.2 Main Menu
‘Main Menu’ option allows numerous functions as given below. Refer to figure 7-4
1. ‘Device Connection’ button – For connecting phone with a reel using Bluetooth.
2. ‘System Information’ button – To view system information. It will show the information about reel,
probe, Bluetooth and phone.
3. ‘Create Borehole’ button – To create new site and borehole.
4. ‘Edit Borehole’ button – To modify borehole parameters.
5. ‘Take Reading’ button – To view borehole readings.

6. ‘View Data’ button - Borehole data can be viewed in tabular form or can be plotted on graph.
7. ‘Upload Files’ button - Borehole files can be uploaded to a remote server.
8. ‘Database Manager’ button - Borehole logged database can be managed.

9. ‘Select Site’ function - Shows the list of total sites created in the readout unit.
10. ‘Select Borehole ‘ function – Shows the list of boreholes created under a site name which is selected
in ‘Select Site ‘ from site list.
Page | 20
11. ‘Instrument information’ function – Shows instrument IDs of currently connected Digital
Inclinometer Reel and Probe.
12. ‘Borehole Information’ function - Shows the borehole information of selected borehole from ‘Select
Borehole’.
Figure 7-4 Main Menu
7.2.1 ‘Connection’ function for connecting mobile readout to cable reel
 Turn ON the cable reel. Pair the phone with reel. Now connect the phone with reel using ‘Connection’
button from ‘Main Menu’.
 It will show a list of paired Digital inclinometers as shown in figure 7-5(a). List will show serial numbers
and Bluetooth addresses of the reels. Click on desired reel to connect. Once clicked on a reel, it will
try to connect and a message window will appear to acknowledge that phone is connecting to the reel.
Figure 7-5 (b) shows an example of Bluetooth connection screen. Phone gets connected to the reel
after few seconds.
 Bluetooth connection status can be seen on top right corner of the screen as shown in figure 7-5 (c).
Now we can check system information to see Reel, Probe, Bluetooth and Phone information.
Application checks the Reel’s Battery Voltage while making connection. A Low Battery message pop ups
when application founds Reel battery low. Refer to figure 7-5 (c).
Page | 21
(a) Device list (b) Device connectivity (c) Battery low

Figure 7-5
7.2.2 ‘System Information’ function for system information
‘System Information’ button provides system information

about reel, probe, Calibration, Bluetooth and phone as
can be seen in figure 7-6. On pressing this button, the
‘Digital Inclinometer’ screen appears from where desired
information can be selected through related tabs. Details
are given below.
A. Reel and Probe Information
Pressing on ‘Reel Information’ button will open reel

Information screen. Figure 7-7 (a) shows an example of
reel Information screen of a reel. It displays reel’s model,
serial number, reel ID, firmware version of reel’s
processor, firmware revision date, reel’s battery type,
battery voltage, calibration date, cable ferrule marking
unit, interval, reel’s connection time and connectivity.
Battery voltage can be useful for Reel’s health monitoring.
It is recommended to get battery full charged before going
to the site.
Pressing on ‘Probe Information’ button will open Probe

Information screen. Figure 7-7 (b) shows an example of
probe information screen of a probe. It displays the
probe’s model, serial number, probe ID, firmware version
of probe’s processor, firmware revision date, probe type
(vertical or horizontal), tilt sensor type, calibration date, Figure 7-6 System information Menu
probe measurement unit, probe length (pitch between two
wheels), reel’s connection time and connectivity.
Page | 22
a) Reel information b) Probe information

Figure 7-7
B. Calibration information
Calibration information of the probe. Figure 7-8 (left screenshot) shows the calibration screen of a probe.
It shows the Probe type vertical or horizontal, sensor type, probe measurement units, probe length, probe
calibration date, calibration factor for axis-A, calibration factor for axis-B, offset value for axis-A and offset
value for axis-B. These information is useful for data verification.
C. Reel Bluetooth Information
Bluetooth Information screen shows the Bluetooth connection information. Figure7-8 (center screenshot)
shows the Bluetooth screen of a Reel. It shows the Reel’s Bluetooth Identification, Bluetooth address, run
time and connectivity.
D. Phone information
Phone Information screen shows the phone information as shown in figure7-8 (right screenshot). It shows
Mobile phone’s brand, model, android version, LCD touch screen display resolution, phone’s battery type,
battery voltage, battery charge, battery temperature, IMEI number and the network service provider. It also
shows the Digital Inclinometer application software’s version.
Page | 23
a) Reel/Probe Calibration b) Reel Bluetooth Information c) Phone Information Screen

Information
Figure 7-8
7.2.3 Editing Reel and Probe ID
Though, reel and probe have their unique serial number but user may want to assign a tag for reel and
probe for identifying reel or probe assigned to any specific person or site or project. Reel and probe ID can
be used for this purpose.
Pressing on Edit ‘Reel/Probe ID’ button will open a screen as shown in figure 7-9 where we can read or
edit Reel/Probe ID. Press ‘Read Reel ID’ button to read reel ID of connected reel. Type the new reel ID in
provided text field. Now press the ‘Update Reel ID’ button to update the new reel ID.
Similarly, press ‘Read Probe ID’ button to read probe ID of connected probe. Type the new probe ID in
provided text field. Now press the ‘Update Probe ID’ button to update the new probe ID.
Figure 7-9 Updating Reel ID / Probe ID
Page | 24
7.2.4 ‘Create Site/Borehole’ function for creating a site
From ‘Create site/borehole’ button from main menu, screen as shown in figure 7-10 (left screenshot).
A. Create Site
• ‘Create’ button under ‘Site List’ open site creation menu as shown in figure 7-10 (right screenshot).
• ‘Enter Site Name’ button - Enter site code in edit box. Site code cannot be of more than 7 letters.
• ‘Site Description’ edit box – Enter site details here.
• Press on ‘Save’ button to create this site.
• Site and its description can be seen under ‘Site List’ in site and borehole menu screen (figure 7-10, left
screenshot).
• Any site can be deleted by selecting a site name from site list and then pressing ‘Delete’ button.
b) Site creation list

a) Site list
Figure 7-10
B. Create borehole
• Select site name from ‘Site List’ under which new borehole is to be created.
• Clicking on ‘Create’ button under ‘Borehole List’ will open borehole creation menu as shown in figure
7-11 (c).
• Enter Borehole code in edit box under ‘Borehole Name’ (figure 7-11 (a). Borehole code cannot be of
more than 7 letters.
• ‘Default Site/Default Borehole’ function: Default settings for this borehole can be imported from
previously created boreholes. Press on ‘Edit’ button to reset default borehole to import settings. On
pressing ‘Edit’ button, it will open default borehole selection menu. Choose desired borehole to import
parameters from. Figure 7-11 (b) shows an example of default borehole selection menu.
Page | 25
• Any borehole can be deleted by selecting a borehole name from borehole list (figure 7-11 (c)) and then
pressing ‘Delete’ button.
C. Default Site and Default Borehole
Default Site and Default Borehole are given only for reference. No borehole can be created under Default
Site. Default Site and Default Borehole cannot be deleted. Default Borehole readings can’t be stored in
database while borehole readings can be taken.
a) Borehole Creation b) Import Borehole c) Borehole List

Screen
Figure 7-11
7.2.5 ‘Edit Borehole” function to edit borehole parameters
Borehole parameter can be edited using ‘Edit Borehole’ option.

• Select site and borehole from main menu (figure 7-4) and then
press on ‘Edit Borehole’ to edit parameters of selected
borehole.
• Figure 7-12 shows an example of edit borehole screen. Site
and borehole names are displayed at top of the screen.
• Select probe unit in meters or feet from drop down menu

under units.
• Set depth of the borehole and select reading interval using
drop down menu. It is recommended to enter interval equal to
the length of the probe.
• Enter operator name and borehole comments in edit box
provided under operator and comments heading.
• File name prefix for borehole log is displayed under file name
prefix heading.
Figure 7-12 Editing Borehole
• Press OK to save borehole settings. Parameters
Page | 26
• Pressing on cancel button will exit from this menu and borehole settings will not be updated into
database.
• Borehole comments can be seen under site list in site and borehole menu (refer to figure 7-11 (c).
7.2.6 Taking readings
• Select the desired site and borehole from main menu after phone is connected with reel. System is
ready for taking readings.
• Press ‘Take Reading’ button from main menu (figure 7-4). Screen as shown in figure 7-13 (a) will
appear.
• Lower the probe into borehole at depth showing on phone’s screen.
• A, B - Axis-A and Axis-B displacement values are displayed in meters/feet (as selected by user).
• Noise bar - Noise bar at right side of the screen represents the present noise level in the readings
received from probe. In figure 7-13 (a), the noise level in terms of micro Volts shows the noise contents
in electrical signal in probe.
• Noise bar limit is shown in terms of displacement unit (0.26 mm in figure 7-13 (a)), on top of the noise
bar, to correlate the noise level in terms of displacement units.
• Noise bar limit represents the 100% noise level in the noise bar. Red arrow above noise bar, in figure
7-13 (b), indicates that noise level is exceeding the noise bar limit.
• Stable - Solid green circle near Stable represents that present reading is stable while red circle against
Stable represents that present reading is not stable.
• Noise window must be set from advanced menu to check readings are stable or not. It is recommended
to accept readings only when readings are stable.
a) Reading Screen b) Reading Screen when

reading is unstable
Figure 7-13
Page | 27
• Avg - Readings seen on screen are calculated by taking average of displacement readings. Number
of readings considered for averaging is shown on top left side of the screen against Avg (‘2’ in figure
7-11). This can be set from ‘Option’ menu at the bottom of the screen.
NOTE: It is good to take average of large number of readings but run-time become slower.
• Direction - Borehole data log are taken in two sets. First set of readings are taken when probe direction
is normal while second set of readings are taken when probe direction is rotated to 180 degree i.e.
probe direction is reversed. Probe direction is displayed on top centre of the screen under ‘direction’.
• GO UP and GO DN buttons near depth are used to go up or to go down the probe position into the
borehole. This button is useful in EDIT mode.
Let us take an example to understand how to take readings.

Borehole depth is set to 28.5 m and interval is 0.5 m in this
example.
• Lower the Probe into borehole at depth showing on

phone’s screen (depth is 28.5 m for this example) and wait
until noise level in noise bar becomes low.
• Press Accept button (when readings are stable) to save

reading for the depth showing (28.5 m) on screen. Once
accept button is pressed it will save the reading and the
depth and moved to next interval (28 m in this case).
• Pull the Probe and fix it at 28.0 m marking. Wait until

readings are stable and then press accept button to store
readings for 28.0 m.
• Repeat the process again and again to take readings for

each interval until top of the hole is reached.
• On accepting reading for 0.0 depths, first set of reading

gets completed and a message will appear on screen to
reverse the Probe and repeat the readings again.
• Press OK button to proceed further.

Figure 7-14 Reading
• Probe direction showing on top of the screen will now show Screen in Edit Mode
‘Reverse’. Rotate the Probe direction to 180 degree and
lower the Probe again into borehole at depth (28.5 m) showing on the screen.
• Small digits in yellow colour below axis-A and axis-B readings depict run time face error. Figure 7-14
shows an example of reading screen. Face error is the difference in reading from normal to reverse
Probe direction for same interval. Face error should be zero in ideal case. It should be approximately
same for a Probe at each interval. Wrong readings can be identified with the help of face error.
• Progress bar at the right-bottom on screen (circle) indicates that Probe is connected.
• Stored borehole logs can be viewed any time by pressing view data button to compare readings..
7.2.7 EDIT readings

Readings can be verified or retaken using EDIT mode. Pressing Down button once enters application in
EDIT mode. Once DN button is pressed, Accept button becomes Edit button and small digits in green
colour below axis-A and axis-B will appear for showing stored log for the interval showing on screen (see
Figure 7-14). Lower the Probe into borehole and press DN button corresponding to Probe position into
borehole. Monitor stored log and present log to verify the reading log. If any stored log found wrong, new
Page | 28
reading can be stored by pressing EDIT button. UP and DN button can be used to reach the desired Probe
position. Verify all readings at different intervals up to which readings are doubtful. Application automatically
exits from EDIT mode when highest logged interval is reached. This feature saves lots of time and efforts..
7.2.8 Reading option settings

Pressing option button from readings screen (Figure 7-13 (a)) opens options screen. Figure 7-15 (a) shows
the reading options screen. Number of readings for averaging data for axis-A/B can be set using UP/DN
arrows. Taking average for displacement can be disabled by un-checking the tick box. Borehole log file
name contains pre-fix as site code and borehole code while suffix having reading start date and time stamp.
Comments can be entered for borehole log file. Advanced options menu can be opened by pressing
advanced button.
a) Reading Option Screen b) Advanced Options Screen
Figure 7-15
7.2.9 Advanced options

Figure 7-15 (b) shows advanced options menu. Single set of readings can be set by checking the tick box.
Beep on accept reading can be enabled/disabled by checking/un-checking the corresponding tick box.
Similarly vibration on accept readings can be enabled/disabled by checking/un-checking the corresponding
tick box.
Stable window is showing the noise window for detection of stable readings. It is the window of standard
deviation for readings received from Probe. Set noise limit can be seen in terms measurement units. Stable
window can be adjusted depending on how noisy the readings are in the field. It is recommended to keep
stable window minimum.
.
Page | 29
7.2.10 Saving borehole log
Once borehole readings are taken at each interval and Probe reached at 0.0 (top of the hole), after
accepting last reading application will show reading complete message as shown in figure 7-16 (a). Press
OK to complete the reading process.
On pressing OK button application opens ‘Save File Formats’ screen as shown in figure 7-16 (b). Standard
or extended file format can be selected for generating CSV file. Additional file can be generated in web
view data format (DI1) for analyzing data at server. Refer to section §9 for more details about file formats.
Operator name can be entered in text box. Pressing on save button will save reading log into borehole
database and files will be generated at external memory (SD card). Refer to section §7-5 for viewing
created borehole files..
a) Reading Log Complete b) File Format Options

Figure 7-16
7.2.11 Probe Mismatch Warning
Inclinometer Probe after long use may have some offset error introduced due to wheels wear and tear.
Probe offset error should be checked with the calibration test jig on regular basis. Probe having significant
offset error than specified should send for re-calibration. It is recommended to use the same Probe each
time for taking a Borehole log so that the Probe offset error will be almost same for base file log and the
latest reading log and it has no effect on cumulative deviation plot.
When we take a log for a Borehole, the Readout software remembers the Probe serial number used for
logging that Borehole. There may be the case that the same Probe used for a logging a Borehole is not
available. When we go to reading screen for taking a Borehole log, the Readout software checks the serial
number of the current Probe and compares it with old probe’s serial number for the Borehole. A “Probe
mismatch” warning dialog pops up on screen if a different Probe is used.
Page | 30
7.2.12 Resume Borehole Log
Taking reading may get interrupted from reading screen due to any reason like reel’s battery become very
low or user exits from reading screen by mistake or due to any breakdown occur at site. User may resume
his borehole log from last position. ‘Borehole Resume’ option will be available for taking borehole log again
within 1 hour for the same Borehole. When a borehole log interrupted and user again goes to reading
screen it will ask user to resume the last borehole log or a fresh reading to be logged. Refer to figure 7-17
(b).
a) Probe mismatch warning b) Resume Borehole Log
Figure 7-17
WARNING: Please do not connect or disconnect the Probe if Reel is power ON. Always turn OFF the
Reel and then connect or disconnect the Probe.
7.3 Viewing data
Reading log can be viewed using view data option. Go to main menu (figure 7-4) and select site and
borehole for which borehole data to be viewed. Pressing view data button will open view data menu as
shown in figure 7-18 (a). Borehole Base file can be set on pressing reset base file button. Figure 7-18 (b)
shows reset base file menu. Choose a borehole file to set it base file and press OK. View data menu (figure
7-18 (a)) will show a list of borehole logs which are taken later to base file. Select only those borehole logs
for which we want to see data. Borehole data can be viewed in tabular form by pressing view table button.
Data can be plotted on graph by pressing view graph button.
Page | 31
Figure 5.25
a) View Data Screen b) Selecting Base File
Figure 7-18
7.3.1 Viewing data in table
On pressing view table button from view data menu (figure 7-18 (a)) application will show data in tabular
format. Figures 7-19 (a, b, c) show examples of a borehole log in table form. Drop down list at top of the
screen showing list of borehole files. Since site/borehole are same for all files of this borehole so only file
name suffix is displayed in file list. B: before file name represents base file while S: represents selected
file. Select a file from drop down list to view its data.
Drop down list below file list is showing reading parameters list. Different data options can be selected from
this drop down list. These options are Raw data A, Raw data B, mean A/B, Face error A/B cumulative A/B
and deviation A/B.
Measurement unit is showing at left bottom side on the screen. We can plot data on graph on pressing
view graph button. Use phone’s back key to exit from this menu..
Page | 32
a) Raw Data b) Mean Data c) Absolute Data

Figure 7-19
7.3.2 Viewing data on graph

On pressing view graph button from view data menu (figure 7-18 (a)) application will plot data on a graph.
Figures 7-20 (a, b, c) show examples of a borehole data on a graph. Drop down list at bottom left of the
screen showing axis of measurement. Axis-A or Axis-B can be chosen with this drop down list. Borehole
log file name suffix is displayed under graph in various colours. File name colours are displaying
corresponding to their data on graph area.
a) Raw Data b) Face Error c) Cumulative Deviation

Figure 7-20
Page | 33
Drop down list at right bottom of the screen is showing reading parameters option. Different data options
can be selected from this drop down list. These options are Mean, Face error Cumulative and Deviation.
Axis of measurement is showing on top of the graph. X-axis represents borehole parameter while Y-axis
represents borehole depth. Buttons given near right bottom side on the screen can be used for
manipulating the zoom in, zoom out and pan. Since phone’s screen is a touch screen so user can scale
and move the graph using finger tips also.
7.4 Borehole files storage
Borehole files are stored at external memory (SD card). Open phone’s File manager and explore phone’s
external memory. Explore root directory and find folder Inclino Files at path /mnt/sdcard/. This folder will
be having two sub folders CSV files and Web view files.
Figure 7-21 shows contents of CSV files folder. It is having one archive folder and different CSV files.
These CSV files are borehole log files generated while saving borehole log after taking readings (refer to
section § 7.2.10). Archive folder is used to keep uploaded files (refer to section § 7.8.2).
Figure 4.29 showing contents of Web view files folder. It is having one archive folder and different DI1 files.
These DI1 files are borehole log files generated while saving borehole log after taking readings (refer to
section § 7.2.10). Archive folder is used to keep uploaded files (refer to section § 7.8.2).
Figure 7-21 Data File Storage Path
7.5 Borehole log database manager
Borehole database can be managed using Database Manager. It can be opened by pressing database
manager button from main menu (figure 7-4). Figure 7022 (a) shows an example of database manager
screen. Borehole logs are listed on centre of the screen. Borehole log list can be filtered using Filter list
button. Selected logs can be deleted using delete record button. Borehole files (CSV / DI1) can be re-
created using create files button. Once a log is clicked, its information will show under log information
heading irrespective of whether log is selected or not.
Page | 34
a) Database Manager Screen b) Filter Data Log Options
Figure 7-22
7.5.1 Selecting multiple log files
Borehole log list can be filtered based upon site, borehole or date. Filter menu can be opened on pressing
filter list button from database manager menu (figure 7-22 (a)). Figure 7-22 (b) shows an example of filter
log list menu.
To filter log list based on site, select option “by site name” and choose a site using drop down menu.
To filter log list based on borehole, select option “by site and borehole” and choose a site using drop down
menu and then select borehole for which we want to see the logs.
To filter log list based on dates, select option “by date” and choose “from” date and then choose “to” date
to filter all borehole logs generated between specified dates irrespective of site/borehole.
Press OK button to filter the logs list. Now database manager screen (figure 7-22 (a)) will show the filtered
list of borehole logs. Select borehole logs by checking the tick boxes corresponding to borehole logs.
7.5.2 Deleting borehole log
Selected borehole logs can be deleted by pressing delete record button from database manager. On
pressing delete record button application asks for confirmation as shown in Figure 3-42. On pressing YES
button it will ask to enter deletion password for authentication. On providing correct password it will delete
those records from database permanently. Once a borehole log deleted from database it cannot be
recovered. So use this button when actually required.
Page | 35
Figure 7-23 Borehole Log Deletion from Database
7.5.3 Creating files from borehole database
Borehole files (CSV, DI1) can be created using create files button from database manager menu (figure 7-
22 (a)). Select borehole logs whose files are to be created. Pressing on create files button will open save
file formats menu. Figure 7-24 shows an example of save file formats menu. Choose file format options
and then press on save button. On pressing save button application will create borehole files of specified
file formats at external memory. Created files can be seen by exploring SD card from phone’s file manager.
Refer to section § 7.5 to find created files in memory card.
Figure 7-24 Extracting Borehole Log from Database
Page | 36
7.6 Setting database deletion password
Database deletion password is required when deleting borehole logs from database manager (refer to
section § 7.6.2). This password can be set from option menu (refer to figure 7-25 (a)).
a) Changing Database b) Resetting Database

Deletion Password Deletion Password
Figure 7-25
7.6.1 Change password
Database deletion password can be changed using change password menu. This menu can be opened by
pressing change password button from option menu (see figure 7-3). Type old password, new password
and retype new password. Password should be typed carefully. Letters are case sensitive. Press save
button to save new password. Remember this password for use in future.
7.6.2 Forgot password
If user forgets database deletion password then it can be reset and new password can be created using
forgot password option from option menu (see figure 7-3). On pressing forgot password option application
will open new password generation menu (figure 7-25 (b)). Master password for generating new password
is X7q9ZfT4. Letters are case sensitive. Type master password carefully and then press generate deletion
password button. New password message will pop up on screen. Remember this password and change
deletion password using change password option (refer to section § 7.7.1)
7.7 Uploading files
Digital inclinometer system has one excellent feature that Borehole data files can be uploaded to back end
server instantly after completing borehole log. This can be done from site. Upload files menu can be opened
on pressing upload files button from main menu (figure 7-4). Figure 7-25 (b) shows an example of upload
files menu.
Page | 37
a) FTP Settings b) Uploading Borehole Log c) Help Menu

Files to FTP Server
Figure 7-26
7.7.1 URL settings
On pressing FTP settings button from upload files menu (figure 7-26 (b)) application will open URL settings
menu. Figure 7-26 (a) shows an example of URL setting. Type FTP server URL address. Provide port
number of the FTP server. Enter user name and password for authentication. After providing all credentials
press on save button to update URL settings. Make sure that mobile phone have internet access. Once
save button is pressed, application will try to connect to the server. URL setting will be updated on
successful connection to the server. URL settings will not be changed in case of connection failure. Old
URL settings will be restored in this case.URL settings once saved it will be stored in application’s database
7.7.2 Uploading multiple files to server

Upload files menu can be opened on pressing upload files button from main menu (figure7-4). Figure 7-26
(b) shows an example of upload files menu. Back end FTP server URL address showing on top of the
screen.
Borehole log files showing list of files which are not uploaded on FTP server. CSV files list or DI1 files list
can be chosen using drop down menu for showing file types in list view. Files can be selected by ticking
on check boxes. Select files which are to be uploaded. Now press ‘upload’ button to upload selected files
to FTP server. Uploaded files will be moved to archive folder on successful completion of upload process.
Press ‘Cancel’ button to exit from this menu. Refer to section § 10 to view archive folders.
7.8 Help menu
Help information can be seen by pressing Help button from option menu (refer to figure 7-3). Help
information is very useful while working on site. It may be helpful while troubleshooting. Figure 7-26 (c)
shows an example of Help information screen.
Page | 38
8 CALCULATING DATA
Inclinometer Probe is passed through the inclinometer casing. The Digital Inclinometer system uses MEMS
sensors at Probe to measure inclination of the tube in two axes (Axis A & B). Sensors readings are taken
at every 0.5 m (or 2.0 ft). Displacement is calculated from inclination and interval. Readout unit displays
the angular displacement in terms of meters / feet at each depth. It is recorded for particular depth by
accepting reading from readout unit. Following terms are using for data calculation.
A+ = Face A+ displacement = Raw data of axis-A in Face A+
A- = Face A- displacement = Raw data of axis-A in Face A-
B+ = Face B+ displacement = Raw data of axis-B in Face B+

B- = Face B- displacement = Raw data of axis-B in Face B-
8.1 Face error
Face error is calculated using expression given below. Face error should be almost constant with very
small variations at every interval. Ideally it should be zero. Large and inconsistent face error indicates that
there is some problem.
Face error A = (Raw data A+) + (Raw data A-)
Face error B = (Raw data B+) + (Raw data B-)
8.2 Mean displacement
The Mean displacement represents the actual displacement at each depth. It is calculated using expression
given below.
Mean Displacement A = ((Raw data A+) - (Raw data A-))/2
Mean Displacement B = ((Raw data B+) - (Raw data B-))/2
8.3 Absolute displacement
The absolute displacement at a particular depth can be calculated by taking summation of mean
displacements starting from the bottom up to that particular depth. It represents the profile of the borehole.
8.4 Deviation displacement
It is the difference values of absolute displacement between base file and the selected file. The profile
represents the actual movement at all depths with respect to base file.
Page | 39
9 FILE FORMATS
The borehole data files used for transferring digital inclinometer data to other software have the following
formats. All data is in standard ASCII text format (7 bit). Variables are separated with commas (,). Text
strings are always enclosed within double quotes (" "). Numeric values are recorded as it is. Numeric values
may or may not have a leading plus (+) sign but a minus (-) sign is always explicitly included. The contents
of the data file are printed in Courier mono space font below.
9.1 Digital inclinometer standard data format (*.CSV)
This format is suitable for direct import in Microsoft Excel (All versions) or other commercially available
spread sheet programs for formatted printing and graphical plotting. It can also be imported in GTilt®.
"INCLINOMETER DATA"
"SITE CODE : Lucknow"
"BOREHOLE CODE : Charbag"
"FACES LOGGED : ABCD"
"TIME/DATE TAKEN : 10:54 ON 11/08/11"
"DEPTH OF TUBE : -15.0"
"READING INTERVAL : 0.5"
"OPERATING UNITS : meters"
"DEPTH","FACE A+","FACE A-","FACE B+","FACE B-"

"meters","meters","meters","meters","meters"
-0.0,-0.0061,-0.1625,-0.0059,-0.1610
-0.5,-0.0058,-0.1618,-0.0053,-0.1614
-1.0,-0.0056,-0.1614,-0.0055,-0.1628
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
……………………………
-9.0,-0.0059,-0.1620,-0.0047,-0.1619
-9.5,-0.0061,-0.1622,-0.0050,-0.1612
-10.0,0.0058,0.1620,-0.0057,-0.1617
-10.5,0.0056,0.1622,-0.0054,-0.1622
-11.0,0.0059,0.1621,-0.0058,-0.1621
-11.5,0.0061,0.1625,-0.0059,-0.1625
-12.0,0.0065,0.1624,-0.0063,-0.1623
-12.5,0.0064,0.1623,-0.0062,-0.1621
-13.0,0.0061,0.1626,-0.0060,-0.1626
-13.5,0.0058,0.1630,-0.0057,-0.1622
-14.0,0.0056,0.1632,-0.0055,-0.1620
-14.5,0.0057,0.1630,-0.0056,-0.1623
-15.0,0.0056,0.1628,-0.0054,-0.1625
9.2 Digital inclinometer extended data format (*.CSV)
This format is same as above except that the serial number of the Probe used for logging borehole data
and operator name are also kept on record for conformance with statutory record keeping requirements.
Page | 40
"INCLINOMETER DATA"
"SITE CODE : Lucknow"
"BOREHOLE CODE : Charbag"
"FACES LOGGED : ABCD"
"TIME/DATE TAKEN : 10:54 ON 11/08/11"
"PROBE SERIAL NO : 0123456789"
"OPERATOR NAME : Rajesh"
"DEPTH OF TUBE : -12.0"
"READING INTERVAL : 0.5"
"OPERATING UNITS : meters"
"DEPTH","FACE A+","FACE A-","FACE B+","FACE B-"

"meters","meters","meters","meters","meters"
-0.0,-0.0061,-0.1625,-0.0059,-0.1610
-0.5,-0.0058,-0.1618,-0.0053,-0.1614
-1.0,-0.0056,-0.1614,-0.0055,-0.1628
……………………………
……………………………
-9.0,-0.0059,-0.1620,-0.0047,-0.1619
-9.5,-0.0061,-0.1622,-0.0050,-0.1612
-10.0,0.0058,0.1620,-0.0057,-0.1617
-10.5,0.0056,0.1622,-0.0054,-0.1622
-11.0,0.0059,0.1621,-0.0058,-0.1621
-11.5,0.0061,0.1625,-0.0059,-0.1625
-12.0,0.0065,0.1624,-0.0063,-0.1623
9.3 Digital inclinometer webview data format (*.DI1)
This file format will be utilized for transferring data to Encardio-rite web based data monitoring software
(WDMS). This file only transfers the logged borehole data points. Each header line or record shall appear
on an individual line and shall be terminated with a <CR> <LF> character.
"ER DIV1.0 Borehole Data File"
"SITECODE","BOREHOLEID","MAXDEPTH","DATE","TIME","A -0.0","A -0.5","A
-1.0",
"A -1.5",……,"A -9.5","A -10.0","B -0.0","B -0.5",……,"B -9.5","B -
10.0"
"Lucknow","Talktra","-10.0","2011-08-11","10:46:07",-0.0008,-0.0008,-
0.0007,
-0.0007,……,-0.0001,-0.0000,0.0011,0.0013,……,0.0011,-0.0004
NOTE: As some of the above record lines are wider than print margins the lines have wrapped around
to the next line in print. The ellipsis (....) represents data points that have been edited out of
this print record to reduce space. The data contained in the above data format is different
from the data in formats number 1 and 2 above. In formats 1 and 2, the raw data contains 2
readings for each of the axes A and B for each depth level as taken by the Inclinometer. In
format 3 only one data reading for each axis at each depth is included. The single data point
is calculated by taking the average of A+ and A- for the A axis and B+ and B- for the B axis
for that particular depth.
Page | 41
10 INCLINOMETER DATA BACKUP
The inclinometer data can be backs up to the PC. After taking borehole readings in the field it is a good
practice to backup up borehole files at a safer location or multiple locations.
It is recommended to take inclinometer data backup on regular basis.
10.1 Connecting Phone to the PC
Connect the Phone with PC through USB data cable. On connecting data cable phone will ask for
connection type. Choose connection type to “Disk Drive” and then click on “Done”. A popup screen will
appear on Desktop/laptop’s screen (see figure 10-1 (a)). Select “open folders to view files” option and the
click on “OK”. Explorer will open the contents of phone’s SD card. Figure 10-1 (b) shows an example of
phone’s SD card contents.
a)
b)
Figure 10-1
10.2 Backing up the inclinometer database
Open folder “DB_Inclino” to view database folder contents. Figure 10-2 shows an example of database
folder contents. Select the database file (named Inclinometer) and copy this file to a safe location (i.e.
network servers etc..).
Page | 42
Figure 10-2
10.3 Backing up the borehole logs
Open folder “Inclino Files” to view folder contents. This folder contains two sub folders “CSV files” and “web
view files” (see figure 10-3).
Figure 10-3
Page | 43
Open folder “CSV files” to view CSV files folder contents. Figure 10-4 is showing an example of CSV files
folder contents. Select the files which backups are to be taken. Copy these files to a safe location (i.e.
network servers etc.).
Figure 10-4
Open folder “Web view files” to view Web view files folder contents. Figure 10-5 shows an example of Web
view files folder contents. Select the files which backups are to be taken. Copy these files to a safe location
(i.e. network servers etc.).
Figure 10-5
Page | 44
11 RESTORING INCLINOMETER DATA
Clear Digital Inclinometer application data from phone’s application manager. Connect the phone through
USB cable and explore SD card as explained in section § 14.
11.1 Restoring the inclinometer database
Copy the preserved inclinometer database from safe location (i.e. network servers etc.). Open folder
“DB_Inclino” to view database folder contents. Paste the database here and overwrite the existing
database as shown in figure 11-1.
Figure 11-1
11.2 Restoring borehole logs
Copy the preserved inclinometer CSV files from safe location (i.e. network servers etc.). Open folder “CSV
files” to view CSV files folder contents. Paste the selected CSV files here as shown in figure 11-2.
Figure 11-2
Page | 45
Copy the preserved inclinometer Web view files from safe location (i.e. network servers etc..). Open folder
“Web view files” to view Web view files folder contents. Paste the selected Web view files here as shown
in figure 11-3.
Figure 11-3
Page | 46
12 INSTALLING NEW DI SOFTWARE IN PHONE
Encardio-rite’s Digital Inclinometer software can be installed in any compatible mobile phone device. Mobile
phone must meet basic requirements for use.
12.1 Downloading application software
Connect mobile phone with Desktop PC (or laptop) via Bluetooth. Explore the CD shipped with EAN-26
Digital inclinometer system and find digital inclinometer application (DI.apk) file (see figure 12-1). Send
“DI.apk” file to the mobile phone through Bluetooth (see figure 12-2).
Figure 12-1
Figure 12-2
Page | 47
NOTE: Alternate method for downloading DI.apk file is through USB data cable. USB data cable is
shipped with mobile phone (readout unit). Connect the mobile phone with PC through USB
data cable. Explore the CD and copy DI.apk file to a folder in memory card of mobile phone.
12.2 Installing the application software
Open the Encardio-rite’s Digital Inclinometer application file “DI.apk” from memory card of mobile phone.
Click on DI.apk to open software installation wizard. Figure 12-3 shows the software installation wizard.
Click on install button to install the application. Once install button is pressed application installation starts
and will complete within 2-3 seconds. Figure 12-3 shows an example of application installation progress
screen. Press on Done button to complete the installation.
Figure 12-3 Digital Inclinometer Android Application Software Installation
Page | 48
13 UNINSTALLING THE DI SOFTWARE
Encardio-rite’s Digital inclinometer application software must be uninstalled before installing new software
(same or upgraded). Software must be uninstalled if it gets corrupted for any reason and then install a fresh
copy of the application.
13.1 Clearing application data
Application data must be cleared before uninstalling DI application. Open the mobile applications menu
and go to “Settings” menu (refer to figure 13-1). Press “applications” button from settings menu. Press
“manage applications” button to manage the application we want.
Figure 13-1 Clearing Data settings for Digital Inclinometer Android Application
Page | 49
Figure 13-1 shows an example of manage applications menu. Pressing on Digital Inclinometer button will
open application info menu. Now press on clear data button to clear application data. Delete confirmation
window will appear on phone’s screen. Press OK button to clear application data.
13.2 Uninstalling the application
Follow the steps explained in section § 13.1 to reach following screen as shown in figure 13-2. Pressing
on Uninstall button will open application uninstall wizard. Press on OK button to confirm un- installation.
Now application has been uninstalled from mobile phone.
Figure 13-2 Uninstalling the Digital Inclinometer Android Application Software
Page | 50
14 TROUBLESHOOTING
14.1 Unable to connect Bluetooth
 Phone’s Bluetooth may not be enabled.

 Reel may not be turned ON.
 Reel may be out of Bluetooth range from phone.
 Reel may not be paired with phone.
 Reel’s battery may be discharged.
14.2 Unable to connect to the probe
 Probe connector may be loose. Turn OFF the Reel and reconnect the probe with reel cable and then turn
ON the Reel.
 Check the probe’s connector for damage.
 Reel’s cable may be broken.
 Reel’s battery may be discharged.
14.3 Files not uploading on FTP server
 Mobile network may be disabled.
 Mobile network may not be available.
 URL or port setting may be incorrect.
14.4 Inserting new SD card
 Always clear data from phone’s application manager when inserting new SD card.
Page | 51
15 PUSH BUTTON AND STATUS LED INDICATOR
There is a push button with LED indicator given on Reel’s disk. Main function of push button is to turn ON
and turn OFF the Reel. By pressing once it will change Reel’s power state ON to OFF or OFF to ON.
Reel power become auto OFF if it is kept idle (not connected to readout) for more than 5 minutes. This
feature is given to save battery power.
LED indicator is given to show the various status indications for diagnostic purpose. Status indicator modes
are given below.
LED continuous OFF : Reel power is OFF
LED continuous ON : Reel power is ON but Reel is not connected to Readout (mobile)
LED blinking at 1 Hz : Reel is connected to Readout
LED blinking at 2 Hz : Readout is taking Reading from Probe
LED double blinks : Probe is not connected / Probe is not responding
Page | 52
16 INCLINOVIEW APPLICATION SOFTWARE FOR PC
Encardio-rite’s InclinoView software has been designed to process and analyses borehole data from
Encardio-rite's EAN-26M Digital Inclinometer. It is suitable for plotting mean deviations, absolute borehole
profile, cumulative deviation against depth and time vs deviation and vector plots at each depth.
InclinoView can also plot checksums for assessment of quality of data. Plots can be easily switched
between top or bottom reference. The plots can be viewed along inclinometer casing grooves or along a
skew angle. Spiral correction can also be applied if such data is available.
InclinoView allows inclinometer data for the same borehole to be automatically correlated for excavation
or fills and benchmark elevation or fill levels with date can be annotated on the plots.
Sub soil stratigraphy layers can also be marked on the plots together with user comments.
InclinoView allows data from a large number of boreholes from different sites to be organized and stored
on the users' PC.
InclinoView can run on both Microsoft Windows (XP and later operating systems) and Linux platforms.
Figure 16-1 Data Represented in Tabular Form
Page | 53
Figure 16-2 Data Represented in Graphical Form
Page | 54
USERS’ MANUAL
VERTICAL IN-PLACE INCLINOMETER

SYSTEM (SDI-12 INTERFACE)
MODEL EAN-52MV
Doc # WI 6002.113 R04 | July 2019

Document # MS1001 R03 Page |1
Users’ Manual EAN-52MV Vertical in-place inclinometer system (SDI-12 Interface)
Contents
1 PURPOSE 1
2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2
3 IN-PLACE INCLINOMETER SENSOR COMPONENTS 3
4 PREPARATION BEFORE INSTALLATION 4

4.1 Civil works 4
4.2 Pre-installation checks 4
4.3 Pre-assembly 5
4.3.1 Bottom assembly: 5
4.3.2 Sensor assembly: 5
4.3.3 Top assembly/Suspension bracket: 5
5 INSTALLATION 6
6 TAKING READINGS 7
6.1 Wiring details 7
6.3 Maintenance of IPI Sensors 8
7 CONNECTING SENSOR TO DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM 9

7.1 With EDAS-10 data acquisition system 9
7.1.1 Program for SDI-12 sensor 11
7.1.2 Typical programming for reading one SDI-12 sensor using CRBasic 12
7.1.3 Typical programming for reading one SDI-12 sensor using Terminal Emulator 13
7.2 With ESDL-30 Data acquisition system 13
7.2.1 Sensor Configuration with ESDL-30 14
8 SAMPLE TEST CERTIFICATES 30
www.encardio.com
1 PURPOSE
This method statement defines the procedure for long-term monitoring of lateral movement using Encardio-
rite model EAN-52M vertical in-place inclinometer system in the soil, earthworks, slopes or structures like
retaining/diaphragm wall, embankment or dam etc. An array of inclination measurement probes (tilt
sensors) are installed inside a standard grooved inclinometer casing for real-time lateral movement
monitoring in critical applications. Continuous data logging and real-time monitoring help to provide an
early warning in case of an impending failure.
EAN-52M in-place inclinometer system provides significant quantitative data on the magnitude of
inclination or tilt of a foundation, embankment or slope and its variations with time. It also provides the
pattern of deformation, zones of potential danger and effectiveness of construction control measures
undertaken. Real-time monitoring of inclination with in-place inclinometer system helps in observing the
behaviour of ground movement after construction and indicates potentially dangerous conditions that may
adversely affect the stability of the structure.
Page | 1
2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
In-place inclinometer system consists of a string of in-place sensors (sensor model EAN-52M with SDI-12
interface, uniaxial or biaxial) installed inside standard inclinometer four grooved casing.
A series of four grooved access tubes attached to each other with fixed couplings are installed in a borehole
or embedded in earth/rockfill or concrete structure during construction or fixed to the vertical face of a
completed structure. One set of grooves is preferably aligned in the expected direction of movement and
if this is not known, in the N-S direction.
NOTE: For instructions on installation of Encardio-rite inclinometer casing refer to Users’ Manual of
EAN-26M Inclinometer System (Doc. # WI 6002.104).
A string of sensors is positioned inside the inclinometer casing in a continuous array to span the movement
zone. These sensors measure the tilt in successive segments to accurately monitor a change in the profile
of the inclinometer casing. Refer to figure 1.a. Each in-place sensor is fitted with a pair of pivoted sprung
wheels, which rests inside the grooves of the inclinometer casing. Length of spacer tubing determines the
distance between each sensor i.e. length of each segment over which the tilt is monitored.
 Spacer tubing length (mm) = gauge length (mm) - 381 mm
 Outside diameter of spacer tubing = 19 mm
When ground movement occurs, it displaces the inclinometer casing, causing a change in tilt of the in-
place tilt sensors. This results in a change in the output of the sensors, proportional to the tilt i.e. the angle
of inclination from vertical. The sensors are connected to a data acquisition system for real-time monitoring
of lateral movement. The tilt reading over gage length of each sensor (gage length is a distance between
wheels) can be converted to lateral deviation by:
“L sin A” where L is gage length; A is angle of tilt from vertical
The lateral movement of the casing can be calculated by subtracting initial deviation from current deviation.
Provided that one end of the casing is known to be fixed, it is possible to obtain a complete profile of the
access tubing by summing readings from successive sensors. By comparing the profiles, the horizontal
displacement of the gage well at different depths over a period of time may be determined.
SDI-12 is an acronym for "Serial Data Interface at 1200 Baud". It is an asynchronous ASCII, serial
communications protocol. Instruments with SDI-12 interface are typically low-power (12 V), often used in
remote locations, and usually, communicate with a data logger or other data acquisition device. In this
master-slave configuration, the data logger or data acquisition device typically acts as the master (SDI-12
Recorder and Interrogator) to data monitoring instruments, which are the slaves (SDI-12 sensors). One
master can communicate with multiple slaves; so the SDI-12 protocol requires that each device in the serial
network be identified with a unique address, which is represented by a single ASCII character.
This communication is achieved by digital communication along a single serial line. The digital addressing
system allows an SDI-Recorder to send out an address over a single line that is connected to sensors.
Only the pre-configured sensor matching that address will respond (handshake). The other sensors on the
same line will not respond until called and typically stay in "sleep mode" (low power mode), until called
(often in a sequence) at a later time by the SDI-Recorder (Master).
The sensor with SDI-12 interface bears a manufacturing serial number and an identity or address can be
assigned to it during the installation process. The identities are 0-9, a-z & A-Z. The sensors are provided
with a pair of 3 core cable terminating at a set of male/female connectors. These connectors are water
proof and are to be handled very carefully. The connectors are provided for installation of sensors in an
inclinometer casing which may be filled with water.
NOTE: In an in-place inclinometer chain with SDI interface connected to one port of a datalogger IDs
of the sensors cannot be repeated.
Page | 2
3 IN-PLACE INCLINOMETER SENSOR COMPONENTS
Figure 1.a shows an in-place inclinometer string assembly, Figure 1.b shows the sensor details and Figure
1.c shows the protective cover details. Please note the following:
 The depth of borehole and the gage length specified by the user determines the number of sensors
required.
 Spacer tubing length is determined by the gage length specified.

 The depth at which first in-place sensor is to be placed from top of the borehole determines the length
of the placement tube.
NOTE: Sensor used in this system is model EAN-52M with a SDI-12 interface. Sensors for both
vertical and horizontal installation are available. The latter are marked with the suffix ‘H’ along
with their serial number.
Figure 1.b: Dimensional details of

sensor EAN-52M
Figure 1.c: Protective

Figure 1.a: In-place Inclinometer
Page | 3
4 PREPARATION BEFORE INSTALLATION
4.1 Civil works

 Install casing as per Users’ Manual - EAN-26M
Inclinometer System - doc. # WI6002.104
 Make a concrete platform (refer to figure 2) such that
mouth of inclinometer casing is around 25 mm below
the top of the concrete platform. Inside diameter of the
cavity around the top of the casing in the platform
should be around 150 mm.
 Place the protective cover over the concrete platform
and mark location for the Hilti HLC-M10x80 fasteners
provided. Remove the cover and install the four
mounting fasteners on the marked locations (for later
mounting of the protective cover).
4.2 Pre-installation checks

 Check for any damage to cable/connector of each
sensor. Figure 2: Concrete platform for protection
 Each sensor bears a serial number and has two cables
coming out of it.
NOTE: The bottom wheel assembly is to be considered as the reference

point while analysing the monitored data.
 Identify the sensors to be lowered in order (lower most sensor to be Fixed Wheel
(A+)
numbered as sensor 1) and note down their serial number. Assign ID or
address (0-9, a-z or A-Z). to each sensor (refer to section 5.4.2). Ensure that
no sensor in the chain has the same ID.
 One end of the cable from the topmost sensor is directly terminated in a
junction box at the top of the borehole. The other end has a connector which
is mated with cable connector from the lower sensor.
 Locate A+ side i.e. the top wheel on all the sensors and it should be towards Figure 3: Top wheel
the expected direction of movement (refer to figure 3).
NOTE: Failure to place A+ side of each sensor of an IPI chain towards the expected direction of
movement can result in misinterpretation of the data. This may have serious consequences.
Figure 4 (Bottom assembly)
Page | 4
4.3 Pre-assembly
4.3.1 Bottom assembly:
 The supplied wire rope assembly has two loops. Fix the smaller loop of the wire rope
assembly to the lower end of the bottom wheel assembly as shown in figure 4 and
figure 6.a. Other end of wire loop is fixed to any secure structure at the top of the
borehole to prevent the whole assembly from dropping down accidentally into the
borehole during installation/removal.
 Assemble the lower end of the spacer tubing to the bottom wheel assembly as shown
in figure 6.a and figure 4.
4.3.2 Sensor assembly:
 Attach the bottom-most sensor to a wheel assembly as shown in figure 6.b.
 Fix a spacer tubing to other end of wheel assembly as shown in figure 6.b and figure 8.
 Prepare such assemblies for all the sensors except for the top most sensor.
 Spacer tubing connected to the sensors is shown in figure 5.

4.3.3 Top assembly/Suspension bracket:
 Attach a wheel assembly to the top most sensor as shown in figure 5.
 To the other end of the wheel assembly, fix the placement tube as shown in figure 6c.
 Attach suspension kit to the other end of the placement tube as shown in figure 6c.
NOTE: Required fasteners are supplied mounted on the assemblies except those used
for fixing the IPI sensors to the gage tubing. These fasteners with some spares
are packed separately.
Figure 5 In-place
assembly showing
top suspension
bracket, sensor and
Figure 6 Sensor assembly spacer tubing
Page | 5
5 INSTALLATION
 Place assemblies in side by side in the order of

installation.
 Lower the bottom assembly into inclinometer
casing holding the safety wire rope such that
assembly does not accidentally slip down into the
casing.
NOTE: Align wheels in casing grooves such that

top/fixed wheel points towards the
expected direction of movement.
 Insert a retaining rod (figure 7) in the hole at the
top end of the spacer tubing and rest assembly
on the casing’s top with the help of the retaining Figure 7: Inserting retaining rod in the spacer
rod. tubing
 Fix first (bottom-most) sensor assembly to the

lower most spacer tubing (refer to figure 8). Use
cable ties to tie the signal cable of sensor and
wire rope neatly to the spacer tubing.
 Remove retaining rod, lower assembly into
borehole, fix next sensor assembly to the lower
most sensor’s spacer tubing.
 Fix the connector of the lower sensor to the next
one tightly using the hands only (refer to figure
10) and insert retaining rod in hole of next spacer
tubing.
NOTE: Care should be taken during fixing of the Figure 8: Fixing sensor Figure 9: Lowering
connectors. to spacer tubing of assembly
 Repeat above procedure for all sensors taking

care of orientation of wheels as mentioned above
(refer figure 9) till suspension kit of the top
assembly rests on the mouth of the inclinometer
casing (refer figure 11).
NOTE: 1. While lowering assemblies make sure
to use the retaining rod in every spacer
tubing to prevent assemblies
accidentally falling in to the borehole. Figure 10: Connecting
connectors of different
2. Take care of the sequence of sensors sensors
from bottom to top. Note the
manufacturing serial and address of the Figure 11: Fixing Top
assembly
sensors during assembly.
3. Prevent twisting of installed sensors during tightening of fasteners as this can damage the
wheels and push them out of the grooves of inclinometer casing.
Page | 6
6 TAKING READINGS
6.1 Wiring details

Colour coding of the cable coming out from the top most IPI sensor is given below:
Colour Description
Red + 12V DC
Black 0V
Green Output
The SDI-12 sensors are connected in a bus chain through waterproof connectors.
For extending cable from the top of an IPI chain, a junction box is required. Mounting details of the standard
junction box from Encardio-rite are provided in figure 12. If it is required to connect IPI sensor chains
installed in two or more boreholes, a special junction box is required as shown in figure 12 (right).
6 Core
cable to DL
Figure 12 Junction Box
From IPI 3 core cable Description JB terminal Output 6-core cable

(Encardio-rite CS-0703)
Red +12 V A Red, White
Green Output B Green
Black 0V C Black, Blue, & Brown
6.2 Sign convention

Carefully orient the sensor during installation.
Make a note of the orientation. A “+” is marked
on each sensor along the A-axis.
A-axis measures tilt in the plane of wheels. B-
axis is at 90 degrees to A-axis. Uniaxial sensor
measures tilt only along axis ‘A’.
Figure 13 shows a view from top and also
convention used for assessing direction of
movement for data interpretation.
Figure 13: Sign convention
Page | 7
6.3 Maintenance of IPI Sensors

The in-place inclinometer requires careful maintenance after dismantling if the whole set needs to be
reused in another borehole in the future. Please implement the following maintenance steps:
 Wheel assemblies, springs, pivots and axles should be cleaned and dried after dismantling the IPI
chain using compressed air.
 Oiling of the wheels, springs, pivots and axles to be performed subsequently.
 Connectors should be cleaned and dried. These should be free of any cuts.
 As the dismantled IPI sensors were in use, there would be a zero offset for each sensor. It should be
removed before reusing. It is recommended that the sensors should be sent back to the factory for
recalibration.
Page | 8
7 CONNECTING SENSOR TO DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM
7.1 With EDAS-10 data acquisition system

Model EAN-52M (sensor used in IPI chain) sensors having SDI-
12 interface require a power source of 12V DC which is provided
by the EDAS-10 data acquisition system through Encardio-rite
power supply model EBP-127AH. Since the SDI-12 network is
connected in a bus mode, only a three core cable is routed to the
data acquisition system. A six core cable can also be used for the
connection. Depending upon the application, the data acquisition
system can be based on Campbell measurement and control
modules CR1000, CR800 or CR200.
NOTE: For detailed instructions on configuration of Encardio-
rite model EDAS-10 data acquisition systems
based on measurement and control modules CR
1000/CR 800/CR 200, refer to Campbell Scientific’s
relevant Users’ Manal.
Typical wiring/connection of in-place inclinometer system to

CR1000, CR800 or CR200 based data acquisition systems are
shown in the figures on the next page. In case data is to be
transmitted via GSM/GPRS or RF modem only the CR 1000 or CR
800 based data acquisition system can be used. The CR 200 does
not support transmission of data by GSM/GPRS or RF modem.
1) IPI with CR1000 System

DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM (EDAS-10)
POWER IN
SE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CAUTION
DIFF 1 2 3 4
EX1
DC ONLY
G
P1
P2
12V
H L H L H L H L
SE 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 GROUND LUG
Data transmission
5 6 7 8 CR 1000
DIFF via direct RS-232,
EX2
EX3
H L H L H L H L WIRING PANEL
RF or GSM/GPRS
RS 232 (NOT ISOLATED)
POWER OUT
COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 modem
SW-12
Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx
12V
12V
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
CS I/O
5V
G
3/6 core cable FIELD
R
Bk CHAIN OF
Gn IPI SENSORS
Page | 9

POWER IN
SE 1 2 3 4 5 6 CAUTION
DIFF 1 2 3
EX2
EX1
DC ONLY
G
P1
P2
5V
12V
G
H L H L H L
SW-12
SCM
Data transmission
12V
C1
C2
C3
C4
G
G
CR 800 via direct RS-232,
GROUND Tx Rx Tx Rx Measurement and Control Datalogger
COM1 COM2
RF or GSM/GPRS
LUG
modem
CS I/O RS 232
3/6 CORE CABLE FIELD
R
Bk CHAIN OF
Gn IPI SENSORS

C2
EX1
EX2
G
G
SW Battery
P_LL
Charge +
Charge -
Battery +
G
G
C1/SDI-12
CR200X Data transmission

Battery -
Datalogger with 900MHz

Ground
via direct RS-232
Lug
RS 232
SE5
SE4
SE3
SE2
SE1
P_SW
SCAN
RECEIVE
R
Bk Chain of
Gn IPI sensors
Page | 10
7.1.1 Program for SDI-12 sensor

Encardio-rite can supply a program
for monitoring in-place inclinometer
system based on information
provided by customer. For details,
contact Encardio-rite’s head office in
India.
SDI12 Recorder- The SDI12
Recorder instruction is used to
retrieve the results from an SDI-12
sensor.
Syntax- SDI12 Recorder (Dest,
SDIPORT, SDI Address, SDI
Command, Multiplier, Offset)
Where Destination is the defined address for storage, SDIPORT is the control port connected to sensor,
SDI Address is the defined address of the connected sensor, SDI Command is taken as “M!” The Multiplier
and Offset have purpose as per the name suggested.
The SDI-12 Command basically has three components i.e. aM1!. An active sensor responds to each
command.
Sensor address (a) – a single character, and is the first character of the command.
Command body (e.g., M1) – an upper case letter (the “command”) followed by alphanumeric qualifiers.
Command termination (!) – Command terminates with an exclamation mark.
SDI12 Sensor address change:
To change a sensor’s address we need to send a command as given below. Command: 0A2!
(Previous_AddressANew_Address!) Note: Here “2=Previous_Address” and “b= New_Address”
Figure 14: Sensor address change
Page | 11
7.1.2 Typical programming for reading one SDI-12 sensor using CRBasic
The IPI sensor response can be checked before installation at site with the help of simple program module
as shown in picture 7.
'' SDI-12 Sensor measurements with CR1000 Series Datalogger
'Declare Public Variables
Public batt_volt
Public PTemp
Public Results(6)
Public Sensor_ID(2)
Public watchdog
'Declare Other Variables --Sensor name can be changed as required

Alias Results(1)=Sensor_1
Alias Results(4)=sensor_2
'Define Data Tables

DataTable (SDI_DATA,True,-1)
DataInterval (0,5,min,0)
Sample (1,batt_volt,FP2)
Sample (1,PTemp,FP2)
Sample (1,Sensor_1,IEEE4)
Sample (1,Sensor_2, IEEE4)
Sample (1,watchdog,FP2)
EndTable
'Main Program
BeginProg
watchdog=0
Scan (10,sec,1,0) ' Scanning Interval Can be changed
PanelTemp (PTemp,250)
Battery (batt_volt)
'Sensor_ID()=value
Sensor_ID(1)=0 'for connected sensor
Sensor_ID(2)=1
'SW12(1)
Delay(0,3,sec)
' SDI-12 Sensor measurements

SDI12Recorder (Results(1),3,Sensor_ID(1),"M!",1.0,0)
Delay(0,5,sec)
If watchdog = 0 Then
watchdog = 10
EndIf
CallTable(SDI_Data)
NextScan
EndProg
Page | 12
7.1.3 Typical programming for reading one SDI-12 sensor using Terminal Emulator
Terminal Emulator emulates a terminal connected to a datalogger or communications device. On selecting
a device and baud rate and clicking Open Terminal causes PC400 to attempt to connect with that device.
If the device is a datalogger, PC400 will call the datalogger over whatever communications link has been
established and will attempt to get a prompt from that datalogger. The data response through emulator is
as per figure 15.
Figure 15: Terminal Emulator
7.2 With ESDL-30 Data acquisition system

ESDL-30 datalogger is designed to record data from the sensors connected to SDI-12 bus. The datalogger
is having 3 SDI-12 ports (channels). Sensors having SDI-12 interface can be connected on a common SDI-
12 bus. This bus can be connected to any SDI-12 port of the datalogger. Each reading is stamped with
date and time at which the measurement was taken. It has a non-volatile flash memory to store up to 2
million data points.
These data files can be downloaded to PC using Configuration Manager software by connecting logger
with data cable or Bluetooth. The downloaded readings get stored in the PC’s Home Directory in CSV
format. The downloaded files can be transferred to FTP server using internet connection. It can be
processed on any commonly available spreadsheet like Microsoft-Excel.
ESDL-30 with built in GSM/GPRS modem has capability to upload data records directly to remote FTP
server. Upload schedule can be programmed in the datalogger using the software for automatic data
upload to FTP server. Schedule can be set as fast as 5 minutes.
SDI-12 inputs should have a unique ID (0-9, a-z or A-Z). So one needs to set ID of sensors having SDI-12
output. Each of the 3 channels of the datalogger can have 61 sensors with ID 1-9 (ID 0 is used for factory
purposes, hence not available for use), a-z or A-Z. For a given channel each sensor should have a different
ID.
Page | 13
1 2
Figure 16: Connection of IPI with ESDL-30 Datalogger: 1- Datalogger shown without the IPI
connection; 2- Datalogger shown with the IPI connection without internal batteries; 3- Batteries to
be inserted after the IPI connection
7.2.1 Sensor Configuration with ESDL-30

1 Double click the SDI-12 Universal datalogger software icon on the Desktop. Then click “File”
followed by “Create Site” as shown in figure 17 below:
Figure 17 Home screen of EDSL-30UNI Configuration Manger Software

2 After clicking “Create Site”, a “Create Site” window will appear as shown in figure 18 below. Enter “Site
Name” and “Site Description”. Then click “Save” button.
Page | 14
Figure 18 Create site window of EDSL-30UNI Configuration Manger Software

3 Then click “Datalogger” followed by “Connect/Disconnect Datalogger” as shown in figure 19 below.
Figure 19 Datalogger menu of EDSL-30UNI Configuration Manger Software

4 After clicking “Connect/Disconnect Datalogger”, a “Connection” window will appear as shown below.
Select the usable “Com port” and then click “Connect” (figure 20).
Page | 15
Figure 20 Dalalogger connection window of EDSL-30UNI Configuration Manger Software

5 Confirmation window showing Datalogger connection status will appear. Then click “OK” button. This
will change the “Connection Status” from Red to Green (displayed at the bottom left in figure 21 below).
Figure 21 Datalogger connection status on EDSL-30UNI Configuration Manger Software

6 Then the Open Site window will appear automatically. Choose the created site file from “Select Site”
dropdown menu and click “Open” (figure 22 and figure 23)
Page | 16
Figure 22 Open site window of EDSL-30UNI Configuration Manger Software
Figure 23 Open site window with dropdown list of sites of EDSL-30UNI Configuration Manger
Software
7 Connect a single sensor to any Channel of the Datalogger physically. Click “Diagnostic” followed by
“SDI-12 Terminal” to the set the ID of the sensor as shown in figure 24 below.
Page | 17
Figure 24 Assigning ID to SDI-12 sensor

8 In “SDI-12 Terminal” window (figure 25), select appropriate Channel number from the drop down list
and then click “Update”.
Figure 25 SDI-12 Terminal Window

9 Now type “?!” on the “Command” bar and click “Send” to read the sensor’s present address (figure 26).
Page | 18
Figure 26 Command/Reply Window

10 To change the sensor address, type “oldaddr A newaddr !” then click “Send” as shown in figure 27
below. Now connect other sensors to the datalogger one by one and repeat the same procedure.
Figure 27: Command/Reply Window showing change in address

11 Click “Diagnostic” followed by “Search Sensors” to search the sensors connected with the Datalogger
as shown in figure 28 below.
Page | 19
Figure 28 Diagnostic menu of EDSL-30UNI Configuration Manger Software

12 Click “Search Sensors” button to search all the sensors connected to the Datalogger (figure 29).
Figure 29 Search sensor window of EDSL-30UNI Configuration Manger Software

13 A message box showing progress of search will appear as shown in figure 30 below:
Page | 20
Figure 30 Message box showing sensor scan progress

14 On completion of search progress, addresses of sensor will be displayed (figure 31). Note
down/generate report for later usage. Close “Search Sensors” window after use.
Figure 31 Search sensor window showing the detected sensors

15 Click “Edit” menu followed by “Sensor Table” as shown in figure 32 below to define the parameter
name & unit of each sensor
Page | 21
Figure 32 Edit menu with sensor table option of EDSL-30UNI Configuration Manger Software
16 In the “Sensor Table” window shown in figure 33 below, select appropriate channel from “Select
Channel” & address from “Sensor Address” to which the sensor is connected. Then select the
“Measurement Command Type” which is “M!” by default and “Select Number of Parameters” to be
measured. Then click on “Edit Parameter Units”
Figure 33 Sensor table window of EDSL-30UNI Configuration Manger Software

17 “Parameter Units” window will appear as shown in figure 34 below. Enter the required “Parameter
Name” & “Parameter Unit”. Then click “Exit”
Page | 22
Figure 34 Paramaters unit window of EDSL-30UNI Configuration Manger Software

18 Click (figure 35) to define the parameters of next sensor connected and repeat the steps mentioned
in Point no. 13 & 14 and so on. After defining parameters for all the sensors connected to the
Datalogger, click “Update” button.
Figure 35 Selecting next sensor to be programmed in Sensor Table window

19 “Warning” message window will appear (figure 36). Click “Yes”
Page | 23
Figure 36 Warning message window appearing upon update of sensor table window
20 Now “Erase Memory” window will appear (figure 37). Click “Yes”.
Figure 37 Esase memory window appearing upon update of sensor table window
Page | 24
21 Click on “Datalogger” menu followed by “Monitor Sensors” as shown in figure 38 below:
Figure 38 Monitor sensors option inside Datalogger manu

22 After clicking “Monitor Sensor” tab, a window will appear as shown in figure 39 below. Select
appropriate Channel and click “Start” Button for sensor readings in Real Time
Figure 39 Monitor sensor window

23 Sensor readings for selected “Channel” & “Sequence no.” will be displayed as shown in figure 40
below. Click “Exit” button to close this window.
Page | 25
Figure 40 Measured sensor values appearing in Monitor Sensor window

24 Click “Settings” followed by “GPRS Modem” (figure 41) to configure FTP settings.
Figure 41 GPRS Modem option under Settings menu

25 Enter appropriate FTP credentials and click “Update”. Then, set “Upload Time” as required and click
update (figure 42).
Page | 26
Figure 42 FTP settings window

26 After completing GPRS modem settings, click “Datalogger” followed by “Scan” to set the Datalogger
Scan interval (figure 43):
Figure 43 Scan option under Datalogger menu
1. Set “Scan Option” as required and click “Update” (figure 44)
Page | 27
Figure 44 Configuring scan setting in Scan window

2. After updating, colour of “Scan Status” will change from Red to Green (as displayed at the bottom
left corner of figure 45 below). Now click “Datalogger” followed by “Connect/Disconnect
Datalogger”
Figure 45 Scan status indicator in Scan window

3. Click “Disconnect” button to disconnect the Datalogger from Computer/ Laptop (figure 46).
Page | 28
Figure 46 Disconnecting datalogger rom PC
Page | 29
8 SAMPLE TEST CERTIFICATES
Page | 30
Page | 31
DATASHEET
WIRELESS IN-PLACE
INCLINOMETER
MODEL EAN-53MW
INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite model EAN-53MW is the most advanced wireless in-place inclinometer

(IPI) system, designed to measure lateral movement of earthworks or structures.
This is used in critical applications where real time monitoring and early warning is
required in order to protect life and valuable assets.
The wireless IPI system basically consists of an array of inclination sensors with
SDI-12 digital interface, placed inside inclinometer gage well, connected to a
wireless mesh network with Node and Gateway, to enable real-time monitoring. Its
data logging and real-time monitoring feature helps to provide early warning in case
of failures. The innovative wireless mesh network used in the system, has an
advantage of reliable data transfer over long distances, without any delay.
FEATURES APPLICATION
 Provides reliable and high resolution  To accurately measure lateral

readings with long term stability movement of structures and
 Rugged and robust construction embankment fills and landslide
areas above dams, highways,
 Excellent temperature stability
earthworks, etc.
 Innovative wireless mesh-based data
 To monitor deformation of
collection protocol that provides
embankments, retaining walls etc.
seamless connectivity in large sites
 Construction control, stability
 Easy to install and monitor hard to
investigation and monitoring of
access sites and tunnels remotely.
ground movement caused by
tunnel construction or any such
excavation.
www.encardio.com
APPLICATION
The in-place inclinometer system provides significant
quantitative data on magnitude of inclination or tilt of a
foundation, embankment or slope and its variations with
time. It provides the pattern of deformation, zones of
potential danger and effectiveness of construction control
measures undertaken. It also helps in observing behavior
of ground movement after construction and indicates
potentially dangerous conditions that may adversely affect
stability of the structure, its foundation and appurtenant.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A series of inclinometer access tubes, attached to each
other, are installed in a borehole or embedded in
earth/rock fill or concrete structure during construction
or fixed to the vertical face of a completed structure. In-
place inclinometer system, consisting of a string of
inclination sensors with MEMS tilt sensors and SDI-12
digital interface, is positioned inside the inclinometer
casing to span the movement zone.
Each in-place inclination sensor is fitted with a pair of
pivoted sprung wheels. The extension rod lengths,
connecting the sensors, can be varied to suit individual
gage length requirements. The sensors can also be
concentrated in areas where movement is expected. A
suspension stainless steel wire rope is available to
position a single or group of sensors where profile of
entire borehole is not of interest but only a specific
portion needs monitoring.
A single 3 conductor bus cable is threaded in a daisy
chain fashion connecting each sensor to its next
immediate neighbour and finally to the top of the borehole
and directly to the wireless communication network
through a Node.
The design allows each sensor to move independently to
each other without influence from the sensors above or EAN-53M In-place inclinometer system with SDI-12 bus
below. This provides a profile of displacement over the interface and wireless data transmission
complete length of the installation.
WIRELESS MESH NETWORK
Operation
When ground movement occurs, it displaces the The IPI sensor array is interfaced with the long range,
inclinometer access tubing, causing change in the tilt of low power wireless mesh network through a Node that
the in-place inclinometer sensors. This results in change allows sensors to send recorded data to the Gateway with
in output of the sensors, proportional to the tilt i.e. the over 99% reliability. The Gateway then uploads all the
angle of inclination from the vertical. The tilt reading collected sensor data to the central/cloud server.
applies over the gage length of the sensor (gage length is
distance between wheels). This tilt reading can be The innovative wireless mesh-based data collection
converted to lateral deviation - “L sin θ” where L is gage network provides seamless connectivity in large sites and
length and θ is angle of tilt from vertical. tunnels. The system is low-power and consists of long-
range wireless radios that provide a range of up to 15 km
Displacement i.e. the lateral movement of casing can be in each hop of the mesh network.
calculated by subtracting initial deviation from current
deviation. A cloud-hosted data management and configuration
software can be used to manage the network. The
Provided that one end of the access tubing is known to be configuration can be done with an easy to use
fixed, it is possible to obtain a complete profile of the smartphone application that comes free with the system.
access tubing by summing readings of successive The application provides step-by-step instructions. It even
sensors. By comparing these profiles, the horizontal displays whether the radio signals or battery strength is
displacement of the gage well at different depths over a good enough.
period of time may be determined.
www.encardio.com
The database management system allows analysis and EAN-53MW/2.2 Spacer assembly for 2 m gage length.
visualization of the sensor data collected from project EAN-53MW/2.3 Spacer assembly for 3 m gage length.
site/installation locations. The data is accessible 24 x 7 to
EAN-53MW/3 Wheel assembly.
all the related authorities. The system can generate
automatic reports and provide automated alerts over SMS EAN-53MW/4 Suspension kit with protective cap.
or email for any reading crossing the pre-defined alert Placement tubing (specify length) for placing
levels. EAN-53MW/5 string of sensors.
Protective rope to prevent loss of sensor
In case a number of sensor arrays/Nodes are used at EAN-53MW/6 down hole.
site, our innovative mesh network ensures that data from
Suspension stainless steel wire rope for
all the sensor arrays/Nodes are transferred to Gateway
positioning single or group of sensors in
and hence cloud server without any delay. The beauty of EAN-53MW/7 specific portion of borehole.
mesh network is that even if a Node cannot reach the
3 core SDI-12 bus cable for sensors with
Gateway directly, it can still send its data to the Gateway
CS-1002 SDI-12 card.
via other Nodes in the network. The mesh network allows
all Nodes to talk to each other, thus allowing them to relay For casing refer to datasheet 1064 on
Casings model EAN-26 Inclinometer system.
other Node data to the Gateway.
The system automatically mitigates well-known wireless
problems like signal blockages and interference, allowing SPECIFICATIONS
the tilt meters to reliably send their data to the gateway
every time. Every single radio transmission in the system
is secured using AES-128 encryption to maximize security Sensor
of the sensor data gathered by the system.
Uniaxial or biaxial sensor; with SDI-12
Sensor or without SDI-12
Measuring range ± 15°
Accuracy1 ± 0.1% fs
Temperature range -20°C to 80°C
1 As tested under lab conditions
Radio Frequency
Up to 15 km (line of sight)
Transmission
distance Up to 4 km (cities, urban)
Sub-1 GHz band
– complies with unlicensed ISM band
Radio bands specifications in most countries
Link data speed 625 bps – 2.5 kbps variable bitrate
Data security AES128 Encrypted end to end data
Gateway
SYSTEM COMPONENTS Power supply 12 V DC @ 2A nominal, Solar panel

1 D-cell Lithium Thionyl Chloride (Li-
Following sub-assemblies are available in the Encardio- Battery SOCl2) 3.6 V 19 Ah batteries.
rite in-place inclinometer system:
Typical current drain 200 mA typical operating current
Uniaxial sensor with SDI-12, with pair of
EAN-53MW/1.1 wheels. Internal connectivity In-built 3G/4G modem, Ethernet
Biaxial sensor with SDI-12, with pair of
EAN-53MW/1.2 wheels.
EAN-53MW/2.1 Spacer assembly for 1 m gage length.

International: India | UAE | Qatar | Bahrain | Bhutan | Europe | USA
www.encardio.com
USERS’ MANUAL
IN-PLACE 3D INCLINOMETER CUM

SETTLEMENT SYSTEM (IPIS)
FOR MONITORING LATERAL MOVEMENT AND
SETTLEMENT
MODEL EAN-61MS
Doc # WI 6002.128 R00 | Apr 2020

A-7, Industrial Estate, Talkatora Road Lucknow, UP-226011, India | P: +91 522 2661039-42 | Email: geotech@encardio.com | www.encardio.com
International: UAE | Qatar | Bahrain | Bhutan | Europe | USA | UK
Users’ Manual EAN 61MS- 3D In-place Inclinometer System
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Purpose 1
1.4 Tools and accessories required for installation 2
3 IN-PLACE 3D INCLINOMETER CUM SETTLEMENT SENSOR COMPONENTS 5
4 GUIDELINES FOR SUCCESSFUL INSTALLATION 6

4.1 Civil works (installation of casings and magnets) 6
4.1.1 With Encardio-rite model EAN-26 DP dummy probe 6
4.1.2 With Encardio-rite model EAN-26M inclinometer probe 7
4.1.3 X-Y coordinates with Prism target 7
4.1.4 Elevation by settlement point 8
4.1.5 With Encardio-rite model EDS-91/2.1 – IPI version magnetic extensometer probe 8
4.2 Pre-assembly 9
4.2.1 Bottom assembly 9
4.2.2 Sensor assembly 9
4.2.3 Top assembly/Suspension bracket: 10
4.3 Pre-assembling IPIS for installing in borewell 11
5 INSTALLATION 14
6 TAKING READINGS 16
6.2 Powering up the 3D IPI daisy chain assembly 16
6.4 Lowering of 3D IPI sensors 18
6.5 Maintenance of 3D IPI Sensors 18
7 CONNECTING SENSOR TO DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM 19

7.1 Encardio-rite model ESDL-30 datalogger overview 19
7.1.1 Sensor Configuration with ESDL-30 20
7.1.2 SDI-12 Bus Power 20
7.1.3 15V Battery Backed Supply Wiring with ESDL-30 20
8 SAMPLE TEST CERTIFICATES 21
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose
The In-place 3D Inclinometer cum Settlement System (IPIS) is used wherever lateral movement along with
settlement/heave is to be monitored in a borewell or on a structure. It finds wide application in measurement
of lateral movement and settlement in soil, earthworks, slopes or structures like retaining/diaphragm walls,
embankment, deep foundations or dams etc. It is also very useful in monitoring landslide areas.
An array of integrated tilt (x-y) cum settlement (z) probes are installed inside a standard grooved
inclinometer casing for real-time displacement monitoring in critical applications. Continuous data logging
and real-time monitoring help to provide an early warning in case of an impending danger or failure.
The Encardio-rite model EAN-61MS In-place 3D Inclinometer cum Settlement System (IPIS) provides a
significant quantitative data on the magnitude of settlement along with the inclination or tilt of a foundation,
embankment or slope and its variations with time. It also provides the pattern of deformation, zones of
potential danger and effectiveness of construction control measures undertaken.
Real-time 3D (x-y-z) profile of a borehole helps in observing the behaviour of structural and ground
movement during and after construction and indicates potentially dangerous conditions that may adversely
affect stability of the structure.
The real advantage of IPIS is that it allows online monitoring of transverse movement as well as settlement
using the same borehole. This was not possible until now using presently available instruments. Another
advantage of the IPIS system is that it can be used as a combination of IPIS sensors (x-y-z) and IPI (x-y)
where the settlement measurement is required at selected levels.


This users’ manual is intended to provide sufficient information for installing and making optimum use of
the model EAN-61MS 3D In-place Inclinometer cum Settlement System (IPIS). It covers description of the
gage and installation & maintenance procedure.
To make this manual more useful, we invite your valuable comments and suggestions regarding any
additions or enhancements. We also request you to please let us know of any errors that you may find
while going through this manual.
NOTE: The installation personnel must have a background of good installation practices and
knowledge of the fundamentals of geotechnics. Novices may find it very difficult to carry on
installation work. The intricacies involved in installation are such that even if a single essential
but apparently minor requirement is ignored or overlooked, the most reliable of instruments
will be rendered useless.
A lot of effort has been made in preparing this instruction manual. However, the best of
instruction manuals cannot provide for every condition in the field that may affect the
performance of the sensor. Also, blindly following the instruction manual will not guarantee
success. Invariably, installation personnel depending upon field conditions, will have to
Page | 1
consciously depart from the written text and use their knowledge and common sense to find
solution to a particular problem.
For description of In-place 3D Inclinometer cum Settlement System (IPIS): See § 2 ‘General description’.
For description of the IPIS accessories available: See § 3 ‘General description’.
For pre check installations of IPIS: See § 4 ‘Preparation before installation’
For installation of IPIS: See § 5 ‘Installation’.
For monitoring of the IPIS: See § 6 ‘Taking readings’
For configuration of IPIS with datalogger : See § 7 ‘Connecting IPIS Sensor to Data Acquisition System’.
1.4 Tools and accessories required for installation

The following tools and accessories are required for proper installation of the 3D In-place Inclinometer:
1. Magnetic probe with cable reel assembly – Encardio-rite model EDS-91/2.1-IPI version
2. Sensor tilt test jig – Encardio-rite model EAN-61MS TTJ. This is a jig for approximately verifying
tilt in sensor. It is not a calibration jig.
3. Dummy probe – Encardio-rite model EAN-26 DP
4. Digital Inclinometer probe – Encardio-rite model EAN-26M
5. 20 mm spacer for verifying/checking correctness of settlement readings
6. Cable ties
7. BOPP tape, insulation tape and 50 mm wide water proof sealing tape
8. Spanners 8/10 and 16/18 and 25 mm
9. Screw driver 100 mm
10. Pliers 150 mm
11. Flat file 150 mm
12. Hand saw with three 30 cm blades
13. Allen key 5 mm
14. Safety line or tension cable in case hole is very deep
15. Clean water supply to clean casing
16. Hand saw with three 30 cm blades
17. Casing collar protection if required
18. Grout tube - requisite length
19. Acetone
20. Pop rivet gun and aluminium pop rivets - four per joint plus some extra
21. Drill with a 3.15 mm spare drill bit.
22. Casing clamps - 2 sets
23. Casing cap with guy ropes (for embankment installations)
24. Casing ‘U’ clamps and grout bolts (For installation on concrete structures)
Page | 2
In-place 3D Inclinometer cum Settlement System (IPIS) consists of a string of in-place cum contactless
magnetic sensors (model EAN-61MS/1 with SDI-12 interface) installed inside a standard inclinometer four
grooved casing.
A series of four grooved ABS access tubes/casings attached to each other with couplings, are installed in
a borehole or embedded in earth/rockfill or concrete structure during construction or fixed to the vertical
face of a completed structure. One set of grooves is preferably aligned in the expected direction of
movement and if this is not known, in the N-S direction.
NOTE: For instructions on installation of Encardio-rite inclinometer casing please refer to Users’
Manual of EAN-26M Inclinometer System (Doc. # WI 6002.104).
For instructions on installing of the spider magnets on the inclinometer casing, please refer to
Users’ Manual of EDS-91 Vertical Inclinometer cum magnetic settlement system (Doc. # WI
6002.114)
A string of sensors is positioned inside the inclinometer casing in a continuous array to span the movement
zone. These sensors measure the tilt and settlement in successive segments to accurately monitor a
change in the profile (x-y-z) of the inclinometer casing. Each IPIS is fitted with a pair of pivoted sprung
wheels and is connected to each other through gage tubes (with adjustable lengths).The IPIS rests inside
the grooves of the inclinometer casing (Figure 1.a). Length of spacer tubing determines the distance
between each sensor i.e. length of each segment over which the tilt is monitored.
• Spacer tubing length (mm) = gauge length (mm) – 921 mm
Example: For 1.5 m gage length, the gage tube would be 0.579 m and for 2 m gage length, the
gage tube would be 1.079 m long.
NOTE: Each EAN-61MS/1 settlement sensor has a displacement range of 100 mm to measure
expected settlement/heave. It is marked at three locations – two ends and the middle for ease
in setting.
To position the settlement sensor over the ring magnets, a coarse adjustment of 50 mm (± 25
mm) and a fine adjustment of 50 mm (± 25 mm) is provided in the gage tube. The gage tube
is assembled in parts. For details refer to figure 5.
When subsurface movement in the ground occurs, it displaces the inclinometer casing, causing a change
in tilt of the in-place tilt sensors. This results in a change in the output of the sensors, proportional to the tilt
i.e. the angle of inclination from vertical.
Simultaneously, if any settlement/heave takes place, it is measured by the position change between the
contactless magnetic sensors and the magnet rings fixed outside the inclinometer casing.
Settlement/heave of all the sensors is thus determined with respect to a reference, which can be the top
of the borewell or a datum magnet that can be installed at the bottom of the borewell casing.
The daisy chain of sensors are connected to a data acquisition system for real-time monitoring of lateral
movement and settlement.
The lateral movement of the casing can be calculated by subtracting initial deviation from current deviation.
Similarly, the displacement of the contactless magnetic sensors at different levels can be calculated by
subtracting it with the reference. Provided that one end of the casing is known to be fixed in the ground, it
is possible to obtain a complete profile of the access tubing by summing readings from successive sensors
and settlement at the desired levels. By comparing the profiles, the lateral displacement (x-y) of the gage
well along with the settlement (z) at different depths over a period of time may be determined.
Page | 3
The system has a SD-12 output. SDI-12 is an acronym for "Serial Data Interface at 1200 Baud". It is an
asynchronous ASCII, serial communications protocol. Instruments with SDI-12 interface are typically low
power (12 V); often used in remote locations, and usually, communicate with a data logger or other data
acquisition device. In this master-slave configuration, the data logger or data acquisition device typically
acts as the master (SDI-12 Recorder and Interrogator) to data monitoring instruments, which are the slaves
(SDI-12 sensors). One master can communicate with multiple slaves; so the SDI-12 protocol requires that
each device in the serial network be identified with a unique address, which is represented by a single
ASCII character.
This communication is achieved by digital communication along a single serial line. The digital addressing
system allows an SDI-Recorder to send out an address over a single line that is connected to sensors.
Only the pre-configured sensor matching that address will respond (handshake). The other sensors on the
same line will not respond until called and typically stay in "sleep mode" (low power mode), until called
(often in a sequence) at a later time by the SDI-Recorder (Master).
The sensor with SDI-12 interface bears a manufacturing serial number and an identity or address can be
assigned to it during the installation process. The identities are 0-9, a-z & A-Z. The sensors are provided
with a pair of 3 core cable terminating at a set of male/female connectors. These connectors are waterproof
and are to be handled very carefully. The connectors are provided for installation of sensors in an
inclinometer casing, which may be filled with water.
NOTE: In an in-place inclinometer, chain with SDI interface connected to one port of a datalogger IDs
of the sensors cannot be repeated.
Page | 4
3 IN-PLACE 3D INCLINOMETER CUM SETTLEMENT SENSOR COMPONENTS
Figure 3-1.a shows an in-place inclinometer string assembly, and Figure 3-1.b shows the protective cover
details. Please note the following:
 The depth at which first in-place sensor is to be placed from top of the borehole determines the
length of the placement tube.
 The depth of borehole, number of sensors per borehole and the gage length at which sensors are
to be placed is specified by the user.
Encardio-rite stocks IPIS with a gage length of 1.5 m and 2 m. Gage length is the spacing between
two wheel assemblies as shown in figure 1.a. Other gage lengths are also available on request.
(b) Protective Cover on top of In-

clinometer borehole
(a) IPIS assembly
Figure 3-1: In-place 3D Inclinometer cum Settlement assembly and Protective cover
NOTE: Sensor used in this system is model EAN-61MS/1 with a SDI-12 interface
Page | 5
4 GUIDELINES FOR SUCCESSFUL INSTALLATION
NOTE: These guidelines are very important to follow. It is recommended that they be read repeatedly
and definitely always before a new installation.
4.1 Civil works (installation of casings and magnets)
• Install ABS casings as per Users’ Manual - EAN-26M Inclinometer System - doc. # WI 6002.104
in a 150 mm diameter borehole. For installation of
datum magnet and spider ring magnets at different
levels of the casing, please refer to Users’ Manual
EDS-91 Vertical Inclinometer cum magnetic set-
tlement system (Doc. # WI 6002.114).
Note: ‘BOTTOM’ embossed on the magnet should (a) Datum Magnet

face downwards while installing on the ABS
casing (Refer to figure 4-1.a).
• Fix the datum magnet assembly (refer to figure 4-

1.b) firmly to the bottom most access tubing with
the screws provided, around 0.5 m above the bot-
tom of the plug. Since in most cases the bottom of
inclinometer access tubing is located in solid
ground (fixed), the datum magnet provides a good (b) Spider Magnet
benchmark. All the other settlement (z) readings
are referred to this datum magnet to get their re-
spective absolute settlement relative to the bench-
mark.
Note: The gage tube connecting bottom wheel to
sensor will have fixed length (80 mm).
• Fix the other magnet rings on the surface of the

ABS casing at the desired levels, as it is installed.
• With the casing and magnets lowered down in po-
sition, release the spider magnet springs to grip
the surrounding soil at locations where displace-
ment is to be monitored and grout the borehole as
detailed in instruction manuals WI 6002.104 and
WI 6002.114.
NOTE: Ensure quality of grouting such that all area

around the ABS casing and magnet rings are
filled and magnets are not displaced during
lowering or grouting.
• Make a concrete platform (refer to figure 4-1.c)

such that mouth of inclinometer casing is around (c) Concrete platform for protection
50 mm below the top of the concrete platform.
Mandatory checks before installation of IPIS in borewell.
Figure 4-1 : Datum magnet, Spider magnet,
4.1.1 With Encardio-rite model EAN-26 DP dummy probe Concrete platform for protection
them, clean if necessary.
Page | 6
separately.
4.1.2 With Encardio-rite model EAN-26M inclinometer probe
Take initial reading of x-y profile of borehole with
model EAN-26M inclinometer probe and store the
data for future reference. This step is very
important and should never be missed. The
inclinometer probe gives the true x-y profile of the
borewell with a gage length of 0.5 m. In case of
any abnormal movement observed from the
installed IPIS, the borehole profile can be verified
by removing the IPIS and taking a fresh set of
readings with the model EAN-26M inclinometer
probe.
NOTE: The model EAN-26M inclinometer
probe is not a part of the supply and
has to be ordered separately. Figure 4-2 Digital Inclinometer – EAN-26M
CAUTION: The initial x-y profile taken with the model EAN-26M inclinometer probe is a reference for
future use. It should be carefully stored and never be lost till the borewell is used for monitoring
4.1.3 X-Y coordinates with Prism target
Determine initial Northing (X) and Easting (Y) positions of casing top by surveying after the casing is set.
For this purpose use a prism assembly with holder pin and suspension bracket (to be ordered separately)
for inclinometer casing EAN-AT-70. ERT-10P2 prism target can be directly mounted on the suspension
bracket (which is an integral part of the IPIS). Readings should be taken with an accurate and precise total
station. This data should be treated as a reference during verification of deflection at a later date.
Note: This step can be taken before IPIS chain installation or just after the IPIS chain is installed. In
former case, place only the suspension bracket over the casing for mounting prism target.
Top fitting on Prism holding pin Prism target

IPI/IPIS assembly is adaptor is mounted on mounted over the
removed for fixing the the assembly holding pin
prism target
Figure 4-3 Prism target mounting accessories suitable for taking X-Y coordinates for IPIS
Page | 7
4.1.4 Elevation by settlement point

Additionally, determine the elevation of the pipe top using a precision
digital level. For this purpose, a settlement marker should be provided
adjacent to top of inclinometer casing that will serve as survey reference
point. (Refer to figure 4-4)
This will allow inclinometer as well as settlement profile to be referenced
to an absolute reference (elevation above sea level) should datum
reference at the bottom be required to be verified due to any reason.
NOTE: The prism target assembly and suspension bracket are not
a part of the supply and have to be ordered separately.
CAUTION: The Northing (X), Easting (Y) and Elevation (Z) of the Figure 4-4
Survey target to be
casing top taken by the precision total station and digital mounted on top con-
level is a reference for future use. It should be carefully crete platform to deter-
stored and never be lost till the borewell is used for mine elevation of cas-
monitoring. ing top
4.1.5 With Encardio-rite model EDS-91/2.1 – IPI version magnetic extensometer probe
The position of the datum magnet and the other magnetic rings needs to be verified after the inclinometer
casing is installed and grouted in the borehole. For verifying the position always use Encardio-rite model
EDS-91/2.1 – IPI version magnetic extensometer probe.
The IPI version probe has a nylon disc of 54 mm diameter
for centering the probe inside the inclinometer casing.
(Refer to figure 4-5)
The magnetic extensometer probe has a reed switch

encapsulated inside it at a distance of around 60 mm from
the end. It is made to travel within the access tube to
sense the position of magnets outside the access tube.
The reed switch closes on entering a magnetic field and
activates a buzzer and an indicator light in the signal
receiving instrument. The flat 10 mm wide x 2 mm thick
cable tape of the probe is marked at suitable intervals for
measuring the location of each magnet from the top of the
access casing.
For verifying the position of the ring magnets outside the
access casing, always take the depth reading of each
magnet at the beginning of first buzz while lowering the Figure 4-5 Magnetic Probe with nylon disc
probe into the casing. The buzz will be long and there may
be more than one buzz at every location of the magnet. It is repeated that the beginning of the first
buzz is always to be taken to determine the depth of the magnetic ring.
The position of the reed relay in the Encardio-rite model EDS-91/2.1 – IPI version magnetic extensometer
probe is set in a manner that subtracting 5 mm from the reading will give the position of the ring magnet to
an accuracy of ± 10 mm. For example, if the reading on the tape is 3.010, the depth of the magnet from
the top should be taken as 3.005 m.
The datum magnet is installed 50 cm from the bottom of the borewell. The position of the datum magnet
can therefore only be taken with the magnetic extensometer probe.
Page | 8
NOTE: For verifying the position of the ring magnets outside the access casing, always take the depth
reading of each magnet at the beginning of first buzz while lowering the probe into the casing.
Always use Encardio-rite model EDS-91/2.1 – IPI version magnetic extensometer probe to
take the reading. The extensometer is not a part of the supply and has to be ordered
separately.
4.2 Pre-assembly
4.2.1 Bottom assembly

• The supplied wire rope assembly has two loops. Fix the smaller loop of the wire rope assembly to
the lower end of the bottom wheel assembly as shown in figure 4-9 and figure 4-8.(a). Other end
of wire loop is fixed to any secure structure at the top of the borehole to prevent the whole assembly
from dropping down accidentally into the borehole during installation/removal.
• Assemble the lower end of the spacer tubing to the bottom wheel assembly as shown in figure 4-
8.(a) and figure 4-9.
4.2.2 Sensor assembly

• Note down the sequence of sensors to be installed from bottom to top and assign individual ID to
each sensor
• All the sensors are provided with wheel assembly fixed to it.
• Attach the bottom-most sensor to a wheel assembly as shown in figure 4-8.(a).
• Fix a gage coupler tubing to other end of wheel assembly as shown in figure 4-8.(b) and figure 5-
1.(b).
• Prepare such assemblies for all the sensors.
• Gage coupler tubing connected to the sensors as shown in figure 4-6. These gage couple tubing
have ± 25 mm chuck nuts in clockwise and anticlockwise direction to tweak the marked mid level
of the sensor which should coincide with the spider magnet.
• The gage coupler tubing supplied as a standard length (Refer to figure 4-6.(a)).
• The gage with -25 mm coarse adjustment (refer to figure 4-6.(b))

• The gage with +25 mm coarse adjustment (refer to figure 4-6.(c))
Page | 9
(a)
(b)
(c)
Figure 4-6 Gage coupler tubing with coarse adjustments of ±12.5 and ±25 mm through extension pin with
six holes (left) and spacer tube and fine adjustments of ± 25 mm with chuck nut with right and left hand
threads (right).
• At the time of supply, both coarse and fine adjustments are set in the middle position to provide
the specified gage length.
• To adjust coarse length of ±12.5 mm, adjust one end of gage tube by shifting it to one hole on the
extension pin.
• To adjust coarse length of ±25 mm, adjust both end of gage tube by shifting it to one hole on either
side of the extension pin.
4.2.3 Top assembly/Suspension bracket:
• Attach a wheel assembly to the top most sensor as shown in figure 4-7.
• To the other end of the wheel assembly, fix the placement tube as shown in figure 4-8. (c).
• Attach suspension kit to the other end of the placement tube as shown in figure 4-8 (c).
• Measure and adjust the required distance between centre line marking to the collar of plastic
component of the top suspension kit.
Page | 10
(a)
(b) (c)
Figure 4-7 Sensor assembly
NOTE: Required fasteners are supplied mounted on the assemblies except those used
for fixing the IPI sensors to the gage tubing. These fasteners with some spares
are packed separately.
CAUTION: Please refer to section 4.1 for mandatory checks to be performed before
lowering of the IPIS chain in the gage well.
4.3 Pre-assembling IPIS for installing in borewell

• In preparing the IPIS sub-assemblies for installation in the borewell, use position of
the ring magnets as obtained with the model EDS-91/2.1 – IPI version magnetic
extensometer probe as mentioned in Section 4.2.4.
NOTE: These positions may be slightly different from those initially specified but
should be used for making the best and most efficient use of the IPIS system. Figure 4-8
• Use the table below (Table 1) and calculate difference in consecutive In-place assembly
magnets showing sensor
and gage coupler
• Identify the sensors to be lowered in order (lower most sensor to be numbered tubing
as sensor 1) and note down their serial number. Assign ID or address (0-9,
a-z or A-Z) to each sensor. Ensure that no sensor in the chain has the same ID.
• Attach the bottom-most sensor to a bottom wheel assembly as shown in figure 4-8. (a).
• Fix a gage coupler tubing to other end of wheel assembly as shown in figure 4-8. (b) and figure 4-
7.
Page | 11
• After assembling the bottom sensor wheel assembly, keep it on the ground. Fix the appropriate
gage tube to it and fix the next sensor at the other end.
• Measure distance between centre line (settlement monitoring region) of the sensor. While
measuring the distance between IPIS sensors make sure that they are in a straight line. The sensor
should be nearest to the measurements obtained by EDS-91/2.1. (Difference between the readings
of these two magnet location). This can be set by coarse and fine adjustment of gage coupler.
• Plug in the male seacon connector to the female connector (refer to figure 5-1. (f)) of the upper
sensor and roll the extra length of cable on the gage tube. Tie with cable ties.
Note: Avoid any sharp looping of the cable.
• Tighten all the fasteners (allen nuts and bolts) properly.
• Verify the distance again (correct it, if required). Unplug the cable connector and then remove the
upper sensor.
• Keep aside the assembly and mark accordingly (location in borehole).
• Now fix another gage tube on the removed sensor assembly and then fix next sensor.
• Repeat the processes for every subsequent sensor till the top most sensor is connected.
• Remove the top most sensor from this assembly and fix the placement tube and then suspension
assembly.
• Measure and adjust the required distance between centre line marking on the sensor to the collar
of plastic component of Top suspension kit.
• Place all the sensor assemblies nearby to the borehole in sequential manner of lowering them.
Readings of magnet location by EDS-91/2.1

Magnet Reading from Relative difference
Top top between magnets
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1 0
bottom --------- ---------
Table-1
Page | 12
Encardio-rite stocks systems with a gage length of 1.5 m and 2 m. We recommend use of these gage lengths.
However, different gage length to these can be made available and can be directly ordered from the factory.
The lesser the gage length, the better the system.
The gage length can be changed by changing the length of the gage tube. A gage tube assembly is shown
below:
To adjust the gage length to match the position of the ring magnets outside the inclinometer casing, a coarse
adjustment of ± 25 mm and a fine adjustments of ± 25 mm each is available on the gage tube (refer to figure
9).
Please refer to figure 11 below:
• Check for any damage to cable/connector of each sensor.
• Each sensor bears a serial number and has two cables coming out of it.
NOTE: The bottom wheel assembly is to be considered as the reference point while analysing the
monitored data.
• One end of the cable from the topmost sensor is directly terminated in a junction box at the top of the
borehole. The other end has a connector, which is mated with cable connector from the lower sensor.
• Locate A+ side i.e. the top wheel on all the sensors and it should be towards the expected direction
of movement (refer to figure 4-10).
NOTE: Failure to place A+ side of each sensor of an IPI chain towards the expected direction of
movement can result in misinterpretation of the data. This may have serious consequences.
NOTE: Before starting with the installation of 3D In-Place sensor daisy chain, the
position of the magnetic rings after casing installation shall be verified
A+
using the Encardio-rite model EDS-91/2.1 magnetic probe with cable reel
assembly.
Figure 4-9 Bottom wheel assembly Figure 4-10 Top

wheel
Page | 13
5 INSTALLATION
• Place assemblies and the necessary tools (re-

taining rod, allen key, spanners, cutter etc.) in
side by side in the order of installation.
• Lower the bottom assembly in inclinometer

casing, holding the safety wire rope such that
assembly does not accidentally slip down into
the casing. Ensure that the bottom sensor as-
sembly female seacon connector is plugged
before lowering in the borehole and make sure
the male seacon connector is out of the bore-
hole.
NOTE: Align wheels in casing grooves such

that top/fixed wheel points towards the (a) Inserting retaining rod in (b) Connecting the
expected direction of movement. the spacer tubing spacer tubing with
the sensor
• Insert a retaining rod in the hole at the top end
of the spacer tubing and rest assembly on the
casing’s top with the help of the retaining rod
(figure 5-1.a).
• Fix first (bottom-most) sensor assembly to the

lower most gage coupler tube (refer to figure 5-
1.b) with the allen bolts and nuts and spring
washers and tighten it with the spanner and al-
len key.
• Lower the assembly down, till the hole of gage

tube coincides the top of hole (figure 5-1e) and
instert the retaining rod to hold the assembly on
top of the inclinometer casing. (c) Fixing sensor to (d) Lowering of assembly
• Use cable ties to tie the signal cable of sensor gage coupler tubing
and wire rope neatly to the spacer tubing.
• Remove retaining rod, lower assembly into

borehole, fix next 3D IPIS sensor assembly to
the lower most sensor’s gage.
• Repeat the adjustment of the next expandable
gage as per the expected movement.
• Fix the connector of the lower sensor to the

next one tightly using the hands only (refer to
figure 5-1.e) and insert retaining rod in hole of
next spacer tubing.
NOTE: Care should be taken during fixing of (e) Lowering of assembly
Figure 5-1 Installation steps (f)
forConnecting connectors
the IPIS sensors as-
the connectors. of different sensors
sembly
• Repeat above procedure for all sensors taking
care of orientation of wheels as mentioned above (refer figure 5-1.d) till suspension kit of the top
assembly rests on the mouth of the inclinometer casing.
Page | 14
NOTE: 1. While lowering assemblies make sure to use the retaining rod in every expandable gage tube
to prevent assemblies accidentally falling in to the borehole.
2. Take care of the sequence of sensors from bottom to top. Note the manufacturing serial and
address of the sensors during assembly.
3. Prevent twisting of installed sensors during tightening of fasteners as this can damage the
wheels and push them out of the grooves of inclinometer casing.
• Take the readings by connecting datalogger (refer to section 6) of all sensors for its magnet location.
• Reading should be 50 (± 10). The common variation can be adjusted by adjustment in placement tube
(using coarse and fine adjustment).
Page | 15
6 TAKING READINGS
6.1 Wiring details
Colour coding of the cable coming out from the top most IPI sensor is given below:
Colour Description
Red + 12V DC
Black 0V
Green Output
The SDI-12 sensors are connected in a bus chain through waterproof connectors.
For extending cable from the top of an IPI chain, a junction box is required. Mounting details of the
standard junction box from Encardio-rite are provided in figure 6-1. If it is required to connect IPI
sensor chains installed in two or more boreholes, a special junction box is required as shown in
figure 6-1 (right).
Figure 6-1 Junction box
From IPI 3 core Description JB terminal Output 6-core cable

cable (Encardio-rite CS-0703)
Red +12 V A Red, White
Green Output B Green
Black 0V C Black, Blue, Brown and Shield
6.2 Powering up the 3D IPI daisy chain assembly

1. After completion of the whole assembly of daisy chain, a single 3 core cable coming out of the top
of borehole will then be connected to our Encardio-rite model ESDL-30 datalogger for datalogging.
2. ESDL-30 datalogger will be powered with battery pack supply of 15V. The battery pack is an inte-
gral part of dispatch of the complete assembly kit.
Page | 16
6.3 Sign convention

• Carefully orient the sensor during
installation. Make a note of the
orientation. A “+” is marked on each
sensor along the A-axis.
• A-axis measures tilt in the plane of
wheels. B-axis is at 90 degrees to A-axis.
Uniaxial sensor measures tilt only along
(a)
axis ‘A’.
Figure 6-2(a) shows a view from top and also convention used for
assessing direction of movement for data interpretation.
• Generally we install the sensors with A+ orienting towards the
expected movement side / excavation direction. If the expected (b)
movement is uncertain, we orient the sensor’s A+ towards the
geographic North. (Figure 6-2 (b)) Figure 6-2 Sign convention
Figure 6-3 Displacement and Settlement Direction
• For settlement or heave the expandable gage /gage couple tubing (joint between the subsequent
sensors) will need to be adjusted depeding on the expected movement
Page | 17
6.4 Lowering of 3D IPI sensors

• SENSOR MARKING Once the exact levels of the magnetic
readings are noted, the 3D IPI sensors connected with the
gage coupler tubing is adjusted according to the centre of the
spider magnet.
• The centre of the three-marked location for sensing the settle-
ment is adjusted with the centre of the spider magnet. (Refer
to figure 6-4)
• The coarse and fine adjustments of the 3D IPI sensor is done

by the ±25 mm slots and chuck nuts provided on the either
side of the gage coupler tube. (For details refer to section
4.2.2)
6.5 Maintenance of 3D IPI Sensors

The 3D In-place inclinometer requires careful maintenance
after dismantling if the whole set needs to be reused in
another borehole in the future. Please implement the
following maintenance steps:
• Wheel assemblies, springs, pivots and axles should be
cleaned and dried after dismantling the IPIS and IPI chain
Figure 6-4
using compressed air.
Sensor marking 100 mm for settle-
• Oiling of the wheels, springs, pivots and axles to be per- ment measurement
formed subsequently.
• Connectors should be cleaned and dried. These should be

free of any cuts.
• As the dismantled IPIS and IPI sensors were in use, there would be a zero offset for each sensor.
It should be removed before reusing. It is recommended that the sensors should be sent back to
the factory for recalibration.
Page | 18
7 CONNECTING SENSOR TO DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM
7.1 Encardio-rite model ESDL-30 datalogger overview

ESDL-30 datalogger is designed to record data from the
sensors connected to SDI-12 bus. The datalogger is having 3
SDI-12 ports (channels). Sensors having SDI-12 interface can
be connected on a common SDI-12 bus. This bus can be
connected to any SDI-12 port of the datalogger. Each reading
is stamped with date and time at which the measurement was
taken. It has a non-volatile flash memory to store up to 2 million
data points.
These data files can be downloaded to PC using Configuration Model ESDL-30 datalogger
Manager software by connecting logger with data cable or
Bluetooth. The downloaded readings get stored in the PC’s Home Directory in CSV format. The
downloaded files can be transferred to FTP server using internet connection. It can be processed on any
commonly available spreadsheet like Microsoft-Excel.
ESDL-30 with built in GSM/GPRS modem has capability to upload data records directly to remote FTP
server. Upload schedule can be programmed in the datalogger using the software for automatic data
upload to FTP server. Schedule can be set as fast as 5 minutes.
SDI-12 inputs should have a unique ID (0-9, a-z or A-Z). So one needs to set ID of sensors having SDI-12
output. Each of the 3 channels of the datalogger can have 61 sensors with ID 1-9 (ID 0 is used for factory
purposes, hence not available for use), a-z or A-Z. For a given channel each sensor should have a different
ID.
1 2
3
Figure 7-1 Connection of IPIS with ESDL-30 Datalogger:
1- Datalogger shown without the 3D IPI connection
2- Datalogger shown with the IPI connection without internal batteries
3- 15 V Supply connected with the datalogger and 3D IPIS connection
Page | 19
7.1.1 Sensor Configuration with ESDL-30

For sensor configuration with ESDL-30 refer to manual “ESDL-30UNI-Configuration-Manager-for-
Windows – Doc. # 6002.110”.
7.1.2 SDI-12 Bus Power
The IPI Probe is designed to work on standard SDI-12 Bus protocol. Probe operating voltage range is 12V
– 16V. Probes are connected in a daisy chain on SDI-12 Bus. Cable length between bottom most probe
and the datalogger will cause significant amount of voltage drop due to its higher cable resistance. Since
probe cannot work properly below 12 V at its terminal, it is recommended to use 15V Battery backed power
supply to power SDI-12 Bus for its smooth operation. The battery pack is an integral part of dispatch of the
complete assembly kit.
7.1.3 15V Battery Backed Supply Wiring with ESDL-30

Refer the following wiring diagram to connect 15 V Battery backed power supply to ESDL-30 Datalogger
Page | 20
8 SAMPLE TEST CERTIFICATES
Page | 21
USERS’ MANUAL
INCLINOMETER CASING INSTALLATION

FOR SUBSURFACE MONITORING OF LATERAL
MOVEMENT AND SETTLEMENT
MODEL EAN-AT series
Doc. # WI 6002.104 R04 | Jul 2020

A-7, Industrial Estate, Talkatora Road Lucknow, UP-226011, India | P: +91 522 2661039-42 | Email: geotech@encardio.com | www.encardio.com
Page | 1
Users’ Manual Inclinometer casing installation for subsurface x-y-z monitoring
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.4 Mandatory checks after installation of inclinometer casing 2
1.4.1 With Encardio-rite model EAN-26 DP dummy probe 2
1.4.2 With Encardio-rite model EAN-26M inclinometer probe 2
1.4.3 X-Y coordinates with Prism target 3
1.4.4 Elevation by settlement point 4
1.4.5 With Encardio-rite model EDS-91/2.1 – IPI version magnetic extensometer probe 4
2 MEASUREMENT OF LATERAL MOVEMENT/SETTLEMENT 5
2.1 Inclinometer system for lateral movement measurement 5
2.1.1 Encardio-rite model EAN-26M digital inclinometer system 5
2.1.2 Encardio-rite model EAN-52M in-place inclinometer system (IPI) for online monitoring
of lateral movement 6
2.1.3 Encardio-rite model EAN-61M in-place 3D inclinometer system (IPIS) for online
monitoring of lateral movement and settlement 6
2.1.4 Encardio-rite model EDS-91/2.1 Magnetic settlement probe 7
3 ACCESS CASING AND FITTINGS 8

3.1 EAN-AT70 ABS access casing (70 mm) 8
3.2 EAN-FC70 ABS fixed coupling (70 mm) 8
3.3 EAN-TC70 ABS telescopic coupling (70 mm) 8
3.4 Accessories 9
3.4.1 EAN-EC70 ABS end cap for access casing (70 mm) 9
3.4.2 EAN-TT70 ABS top cap for access casing (70 mm) 9
3.4.3 Pop rivets and self-taping screws for ABS casing 9
3.4.4 Pop rivet gun 9
3.4.5 Drill machine 9
3.4.6 Mastic tape 9
3.4.7 BOPP tape 9
3.4.8 EAN-PC Protective cover unit 9
4 MAGNET TARGETS FOR SETTLEMENT MONITORING 10
4.1 Plate magnets 10
4.2 Spider magnets 10
4.3 Datum ring magnets 10

6 PRE-ASSEMBLY OF CASING 12
6.1 Casing storage 12
6.2 General instructions 12
6.3 Alignment of casing 12
6.4 Preparation of casing before installation 12
6.4.1 Fixed coupling 13
6.4.2 Telescopic coupling 13
www.encardio.com
7 INSTALLATION IN BOREHOLE 16
7.1 Borehole drilling 16
7.2 Installation of inclinometer casing in borehole 16
7.3 Grouting in borehole 17
7.4 Stage grouting in deep borehole 19
7.4.1 Option 1: Fixing casing bottom by grout 19
7.4.2 Option 2: Using steel pipe inside casing 19
7.4.3 Option 3: Using weights at bottom 19
7.4.4 Option 4: Using special anchor at bottom 20
7.5 Top cover 20
7.6 After installation check 20
7.7 Marking of grooves (sign convention) 20
7.8 Fixing magnets 21
8 INSTALLATION IN DIAPHRAGM WALL OR PILE 23

8.1 Preparation for installation in D-wall – MS casing 23
8.2 Installation of inclinometer casing in MS casing (D-wall) 23
8.3 Grouting in MS casing (D-wall) 24
8.4 Top cover 24
8.5 After installation checks 25
9 INSTALLATION IN DAM EMBANKMENT (FILL) – CORE SECTION 26

9.1 Precaution for installation in embankment fill (core) 26
9.2 Protection of installation in embankment fill (core) 26
9.3 Installation of casing in embankment fill (core) 26
9.5 Top protection 27
10 INSTALLATION IN DAM EMBANKMENT (FILL) – CREST 28

10.1 Precaution for installation in crest/rockfill section 28
10.2 Protection of installation in crest/rockfill section 28
10.3 Installation of casing in crest/rockfill section 28
10.5 Top protection 30
10.6 Fixing magnets (in fill – core & crest) 30
Annexure 1 Importance of internal diameter of casing 31
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
Inclinometer casing (also called ABS grooved access casing) play a vital role in measurement of lateral
deformation (inclination) and vertical displacement (settlement/heave). For this purpose, series of
inclinometer casing (with standard 3 m length), attached to each other, are installed in a borehole or
embedded in earth/rock fill or concrete structure during construction or fixed to the vertical face of a
completed structure. Any subsurface or structural movement may result in a displacement of the casing.
Encardio-rite offers the following precision instruments to monitor the casing displacement:
• Encardio-rite model EAN-26M digital inclinometer system for manual monitoring of lateral
displacement
• Encardio-rite model EAN-52M in-place inclinometer system (IPI) for online web base monitoring of
lateral movement
• Encardio-rite model EDS-91/2.1 Magnetic settlement probe with datum/spider magnets installed
outside the casing at various depths, for manual monitoring of settlement.
• Encardio-rite model EAN-61MS In-place 3D inclinometer system (IPIS) for online web base
monitoring of lateral movement and settlement.
These monitoring systems are described in brief in the next section.
The access casings are installed with fixed couplings where no significant or a little settlement is anticipated
(e.g. in d-walls). Where substantial settlement is expected, the casing maybe installed with telescopic
couplings and suitable magnetic rings for settlement measurements (e.g.in earth fill embankments).
If casing is installed in a landslide area to monitor unstable slopes, it is recommended that the casing is
installed deep enough into stable rock (passing through the expected zone of movement). Also, it is
recommended to use a larger diameter inclinometer casing (80 mm) as large movements are expected at
such locations. Please refer to Appendix 1 on ‘Importance of internal diameter of casing, for a better
understanding.
The sturdy Encardio-rite ABS (Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene) casing has four longitudinal keyway
grooves oriented at 90° to each other, specially produced to close tolerances. The grooves act as an
access guide for tilt sensor wheels, which can run smoothly inside these keyways.
The manual is divided into a number of sections. Each section contains a specific type of information. Refer
to the index for any specific information required.
To make this manual more useful, your valuable comments and suggestions are invited regarding any
additions or enhancement. You are also requested to please point out any errors that are found while going
through the manual.
Page | 1
This users’ manual is intended to provide sufficient information for installing and making optimum use of
ABS inclinometer casing. The manual also contains instructions on how to set-up for lowering of the
measuring instruments into the gage well for purpose of taking inclination/settlement readings.
A lot of effort has been made in preparing this instruction manual. However, the best of instruction manuals
omissions in installation, data or data interpretation are not the responsibility of Encardio-rite Electronics
Pvt. Ltd. or its Group Companies
1.4 Mandatory checks after installation of inclinometer casing
Logically, these checks should have been given later on in the manual after procedure of installation of
casing is described. They are included in the first chapter only to emphasize that they should never be
missed. Please read section 1.4 once again after the installation of the casing is complete.
1.4.1 With Encardio-rite model EAN-26 DP dummy probe
them. Clean if necessary.
The monitoring instruments described in the introduction should never be lowered down in the gage well
unless the latter is checked by the dummy probe. The monitoring instrument may get stuck in the gage
well and you may permanently lose it in case this instruction is not followed.
separately.
1.4.2 With Encardio-rite model EAN-26M inclinometer probe

In case an IPI or IPIS system is used to monitor the gage well, always ensure to take initial reading of x-y
profile of borehole with model EAN-26M inclinometer probe and store the data for future reference. This
step is very important and should never be ignored.
The inclinometer probe gives the true x-y profile of the borewell with a gage length of 0.5 m. In case future
readings are taken manually with the EAN-26M inclinometer probe, these readings form the initial reference
with respect to which all future readings are compared. In case any abnormal movement is observed later
on when IPI or IPIS is installed in the borehole, the borehole profile can be verified by removing the IPI or
IPIS and taking a fresh set of readings with the model EAN-26M inclinometer probe.
NOTE: The model EAN-26M inclinometer probe is not a part of the supply (with IPI or IPIS systems)
and has to be ordered separately.
CAUTION: The initial x-y profile taken with the model EAN-26M inclinometer probe is a reference for
future use. It should be carefully stored and never be lost till the gage well is used for
monitoring.
Page | 2
1.4.3 X-Y coordinates with Prism target
Determine initial Northing (X) and Easting (Y) positions of casing top by surveying after the casing is set.
For this purpose, Encardio-rite provides different types of prism assembly as described below. Readings
should be taken with an accurate and precise total station. This data should be treated as a reference
during verification of deflection at a later date.
1.4.3.1 For digital inclinometer
An aluminium adaptor (suitable for inclinometer casing EAN-AT-70) with holder pin is available to mount
the ERT-10P2 prism target (figure 1-1).
Aluminium
adaptor
Precision holding
pin
Prism target with
Prism target
adaptor placed
mounted on
on access casing
holding pin
Figure 1-1 Prism adapter for inclinometer casing suitable for model EAN-26M digital inclinometer system
1.4.3.2 For IPI or IPIS
In case the inclinometer casing is used for IPI or IPIS systems, ERT-10P2 prism target can be directly
mounted on the suspension bracket (which is an integral part of the IPI or IPIS), with a precision prism
holding pin adaptor, as shown in figure 1-2.
Top fitting on Prism holding pin Prism target

IPI/IPIS assembly is adaptor is mounted on mounted over the
removed for fixing the the assembly holding pin
prism target
Figure 1-2 Prism target mounting accessories suitable for model EAN-52M IPI & EAN-61MS 3D IPIS
systems
Page | 3
1.4.4 Elevation by settlement point
Additionally, determine the elevation of the pipe top using a precision

digital level. For this purpose a settlement survey marker should be
mounted adjacent to top of inclinometer casing that will serve as survey
reference point. The survey marker is illustrated in figure 1-3.
This will allow inclinometer as well as settlement profile to be

referenced to an absolute reference (elevation above sea level) should
datum reference at the bottom be required to be verified due to any
reason.
NOTE: The aluminium adaptor with holder pin, prism holding pin
adaptor, prism target ERT-10P2 or the settlement point
are not a part of the supply and have to be ordered
separately. Figure 1-3 Survey target to
be mounted on top concrete
CAUTION: The Northing (X), Easting (Y) and Elevation (Z) of the platform to determine
casing top taken by the precision total station and digital elevation of casing top
level is a reference for future use. It should be carefully
stored and never be lost till the borewell is used for monitoring.
1.4.5 With Encardio-rite model EDS-91/2.1 – IPI version magnetic extensometer probe
In case settlement is to be monitored, manually using the EDS-91/2.1 probe or automatically using IPIS,
the position of the datum magnet and the other magnetic rings needs to be verified after the inclinometer
casing is installed and grouted in the borehole.
For verifying the position always use Encardio-rite model EDS-91/2.1 – IPI version magnetic extensometer
probe. The IPI version probe has a nylon disc of 55 mm diameter for centring the probe inside the
inclinometer casing.
Spider magnets used for manual and automatic monitoring are different from each other and must be
accordingly ordered.
For verifying the position of the ring magnets outside the access casing, always take the depth reading of
each magnet at the beginning of first buzz while lowering the probe into the casing. The buzz will be long
and there may be more than one buzz at every location of the magnet.
The datum magnet is installed 50 cm from the bottom of the borewell. The position of the datum magnet
can therefore only be taken with the magnetic extensometer probe and not with the IPIS.
NOTE: For verifying the position of the ring magnets outside the access casing, always take the depth
reading of each magnet at the beginning of first buzz while lowering the probe into the casing.
Always use Encardio-rite model EDS-91/2.1 – IPI version magnetic extensometer probe to
take the reading. The extensometer is not a part of the supply and has to be ordered
separately.
Page | 4
2 MEASUREMENT OF LATERAL MOVEMENT/SETTLEMENT
The first step is to make a near vertical gage well by installing casing in a borehole, embedding in an
earth/rock fill or concrete structure during construction or fixing to face of a completed structure.
With suitable measuring system, a set of initial base reading is taken at given depths within the gage well.
These readings forms the reference datum. Subsequent reading sets are compared with this reference
datum. All subsequent readings are taken over a period of time at identical depths to provide information
on rate, magnitude, and direction of lateral deformation and settlement/heave.
Provided that one end of access casing is known to be fixed, it is possible to obtain a complete profile of
the gage well by taking a succession of readings. By comparing these profiles, the horizontal and vertical
displacement of gage well at different depths over a period of time is determined.
2.1 Inclinometer system for lateral movement measurement
Inclinometer system is used for reliable measurement of lateral movement in applications like:
 Earth movement in landslide zone
 Detecting shear planes in hydraulic structures
 Measuring stability during construction
 Deflection of diaphragm/retaining walls and piles under load
Encardio-rite offer three type of Inclinometer systems for monitoring profile of the gauge well:
• Model EAN-26M digital inclinometer system for taking manual readings.
• Model EAN-52M in-place inclinometer system for online (automatic) readings.

• Model EAN-61M in-place 3D inclinometer system for online (automatic) readings. In addition to
lateral movement, this instrument also monitors settlement.
2.1.1 Encardio-rite model EAN-26M digital inclinometer system

The EAN-26M digital inclinometer system is an accurate instrumentation system for taking manual
inclinometer readings.
The system comprises of:
• Inclinometer probe
• Interconnecting cable with reel and cable holder
• Smartphone datalogger
• Accessories (to be ordered separately) including
dummy probe, calibration check jig, suspension
bracket, prism target with adaptor, settlement point, etc.
The inclinometer probe is passed through entire length of
gage well, taking readings at fixed pre-determined depths Figure 2-1 Digital inclinometer system
from bottom to top. A dual accelerometer probe senses
inclination of casing in two planes at right angles to each other. Voltage output from probe is directly
proportional to sine of angle of inclination of long axis of probe from the vertical. A positive output voltage
indicates a negative angle of inclination.
Page | 5
A standard commercially available Android OS based mobile phone is used as a hand held datalogger for
recording data from gage well at 0.5 m intervals. The Encardio-rite Digital Inclinometer application is loaded
on the mobile phone to enable it to configure and collect data from the digital inclinometer system. It utilises
the huge computational and image processing power of mobile phone to display the logged borehole data
as tables or different types of graphs. It also has a large data storage capacity. This allows the operator to
verify the logged data and investigate any anomaly immediately at site.
For details on model EAN-26M digital inclinometer system, please refer to operating
manual # WI 6002.103.
2.1.2 Encardio-rite model EAN-52M in-place inclinometer system (IPI) for

online monitoring of lateral movement
In-place inclinometer system consists of a string of inclination sensors positioned inside

the inclinometer casing to span the movement zone. Each in-place inclination sensor
is fitted with a pair of pivoted sprung wheels. The gage length varies from 1 m to 3 m.
When ground movement occurs, it displaces the inclinometer access tubing, causing
change in the profile of the in-place inclinometer sensors.
The In-place inclinometer system is connected to an automatic SDI-12 interface

datalogger for continuous real-time monitoring of the lateral movement. Continuous
data logging and real-time monitoring help to provide an early warning in case of an
impending danger or failure.
For details on model EAN-52M in-place inclinometer system, please refer to operating
manual # WI 6002.113.
2.1.3 Encardio-rite model EAN-61M in-place 3D inclinometer system (IPIS) for

online monitoring of lateral movement and settlement
Figure 2-2 In-place
This system is similar to the above, excepting that settlement along with lateral inclinometer
movement can also be monitored online automatically. Special magnetic ring targets
are fixed outside the access casing at specified levels. Monitoring settlement along with lateral movement
automatically by using inclinometer casing is very cost effective as it can eliminate the use of separate
borehole extensometers.
The in-place 3D inclinometer systems (IPIS) consists of an array of integrated tilt (x-y) cum contactless
magnetic sensors (z), installed inside the inclinometer access casing for real-time displacement monitoring
in critical applications.
Figure 2-3 In-place 3D inclinometer system
Page | 6
The sensors measure tilt and settlement in successive segments to accurately monitor a change in the
profile (x-y-z) of the inclinometer casing. Each IPIS sensor is fitted with a pivoted sprung wheel which rest
inside the grooves of the inclinometer casing. Successive sensors are connected to each other through
gage tubes (with adjustable lengths).
When subsurface movement occurs, it displaces the inclinometer casing, causing a change in tilt of the in-
place tilt sensors. This results in a change in the output of the sensors, proportional to the tilt i.e. the angle
of inclination from vertical. Simultaneously, if any settlement/heave takes place, it is measured by the
position change between the contactless magnetic sensors and the magnet rings fixed outside the
inclinometer casing. Settlement/heave of all the sensors is thus determined with respect to a reference
which can be the top of the borewell or a datum magnet that can be installed at the bottom of the borewell
casing.
The daisy chain of sensors are connected to a data acquisition system for real-time monitoring of lateral
movement and settlement. For details on model EAN-61MS in-place 3D inclinometer system, please refer
to operating manual # WI 6002.128.
2.1.4 Encardio-rite model EDS-91/2.1 Magnetic settlement probe
Another important instrument which is used is the model EDS-91/2.1-

IPI version magnetic probe. The magnetic probe has a reed switch
encapsulated inside it in silicon rubber for protection against shock,
corrosion and ingress of water. It is connected to the signal receiver
consisting of a reel with a battery pack, an on-off switch, buzzer, LED by
a flat measuring tape.
For more information, please refer to section 1.4.4 and instruction

manual # WI 6002.18 for model EDS-91/2.1 magnetic probe.
Figure 2-4 Magnetic settlement probe
Page | 7
3 ACCESS CASING AND FITTINGS
3.1 EAN-AT70 ABS access casing (70 mm)
ABS access casing has longitudinal keyways,

specially produced to close tolerances. Wheels of tilt
sensing probe can run smoothly inside these keyways.
The casing is self aligning ABS tubing, 70 mm o.d., 58
mm i.d., 3 m in length.
Two kinds of couplings are available to rapidly join

access casing. Fixed couplings are normal and
telescopic couplings are available in case substantial
settlement is expected to take place. The design of the
couplings ensures that correct alignment of keyways Figure 3-1 Inclinometer ABS casing
is maintained throughout the depth of gage well.
Key features
• High precision internal grooves

• Self-aligning, leak-proof couplings
• ABS material and thick walls make it strong enough for use in any kind of application
• Spiral effect, less than 0.3°/3 m
3.2 EAN-FC70 ABS fixed coupling (70 mm)
77 mm o.d. ABS fixed coupling, 160 mm long, with four internal keyways at 90° to each other.
Figure 3-2 ABS casing with fixed coupling
3.3 EAN-TC70 ABS telescopic coupling (70 mm)
77 mm o.d. ABS telescopic coupling, 400 mm long, with four internal keyways at 90° to each other.
Displacement 150 mm.
Page | 8
Figure 3-3 ABS casing with telescopic coupling
3.4 Accessories
3.4.1 EAN-EC70 ABS end cap for access casing (70 mm)
ABS cap to fit 70 mm o.d. casing at top or bottom.
3.4.2 EAN-TT70 ABS top cap for access casing (70 mm)
ABS top cap with locking arrangement to fit 70 mm casing at top.
3.4.3 Pop rivets and self-taping screws for ABS casing
Pop rivets packets of 100 numbers for fixed coupling. Self-tapping screws packets of 100 numbers for
3.4.4 Pop rivet gun
Hand held manually operated.
3.4.5 Drill machine

Hand operated drill machine with two 3.2 mm diameter drill bits. Optionally a 230 V, 50 Hz operation power
drill can also be used.
3.4.6 Mastic tape
50/100 mm wide x 10/5 m long
3.4.7 BOPP tape
50 mm wide x 65 m long BOPP waterproof sealing tape.
3.4.8 EAN-PC Protective cover unit
A lockable protective cover unit made of MS sheet and angle is available with extended Torr steel anchors
for grouting at top of hole. The 150 x150 mm protective cover is provided with a hinged cover with lock with
an interchangeable key. The cover is painted bright red in colour.
Page | 9
4 MAGNET TARGETS FOR SETTLEMENT MONITORING
Magnets are installed over access tubing for monitoring settlement, where large displacement is expected.
Encardio-rite provides a wide variety of magnet assemblies to suit different applications.
4.1 Plate magnets
Model EDS-91/3.1.2 Plate magnet is suitable for installation in embankments/land fills. The 300 mm square
magnet assembly with a center hole of 71 mm, easily slides over the access tubing of 70 mm od
4.2 Spider magnets
Spider magnets are used for monitoring settlement in a borehole. The leaves of the spider magnet are
made to spring out and grip into the surrounding ground.
Model EDS-91/3.3.2 spider magnet has 6 leaves while model EDS-91/3.4.2 spider magnet has 3 leaves.
Both are suitable for 70 mm od access casing. Magnet with 6 leaves are a better choice as it holds the
ground firmly.
Model EAN-61MS/8 magnet ring with 6 leaves are specially designed for model EPS-61MS 3D IPIS system
for automatic monitoring of lateral movement with settlement/heave i.e. displacements in X-Y-Z directions.
EDS-91/3.2.2 Datum magnet

for manual readings
EDS-91/3.1.2 Plate EDS-91/3.3.2 Spider EDS-91/3.4.2 Spider EAN-61MS/8 Spider EAN-61MS/9

magnet magnet with 6 leaves magnet with 3 leaves magnet ring with 6 datum magnet
leaves for IPIS ring for IPIS
Figure 4-1 Different type of magnets for access casing (70 mm od)
4.3 Datum ring magnets
For taking manual readings with model EDS-91/2.1 Magnetic settlement probe, model EDS-91/3.2.2
Datum ring magnet with 71 mm id is fixed permanently near the bottom of 70 mm od access tubing for
datum (fixed reading). In an embankment fill the datum magnet is fixed on a 30 cm square plate. For use
in a borehole, it is tightened with screws on the inclinometer casing.
In case of IPIS, the construction of the datum magnet and the spider magnets is quite different from those
used for manual monitoring. The magnets used for manual settlement monitoring cannot be used for this
purpose and have to be ordered separately.
Page | 10
It should be ensured that following tools and accessories required for proper installation of the inclinometer
PVC casing:
1 Dummy probe – Encardio-rite model EAN-26DP
2 Digital Inclinometer probe – Encardio-rite model EAN-26M
3 Prism target and mounting accessories
4 Settlement monitoring pin

5 Magnetic probe with cable reel assembly – Encardio-rite model EDS-91/2.1-IPI version in case
settlement is to be monitored
6 Tool box
7 50 mm wide water proof sealing tape
8 Spanner 16/18
9 Screw driver 100 mm
10 Voltage tester
11 Pliers 150 mm
12 Flat file 150 mm

13 Hand saw with three 30 cm blades
14 Drill with a 3.15 mm spare drill bit
15 Safety line or tension cable in case hole is very deep

16 Clean water supply to clean casing
17 Casing collar protection if required
18 Grout tube - requisite length
19 Acetone
20 Aluminium pop rivets - four per joint plus some extra
21 Pop rivet gun
22 Casing clamps - 2 sets
23 Plumb bob with 5 m chord
24 Casing cap with guy ropes (for embankment installations)

25 Casing ‘U’ clamps and grout bolts (For installation on concrete structures)
26 Pull cord (if spider magnets are to be installed)
Page | 11
6 PRE-ASSEMBLY OF CASING
6.1 Casing storage
• Do not apply too much load or force on casing.
• Store all items in a proper place in a ventilated building under shade of a roof
• Do not warp or bend during storage.
• Avoid direct sunlight on plastic casing and accessories as it can cause deformation of casing.
6.2 General instructions
Following general instructions for installing ABS casing are typical

practices in the field and may require modification to suit specific
conditions and applications at site.
Inspect casing to ensure that damage in transit or storage has not

occurred. See that ends and interior of casing are clean.
Cracked
Store casing horizontally, fully supported and away from sunlight. by axial load
This will prevent it from getting damaged or distorted. Number each

length and assemble numerically to avoid errors and confirm correct Cracked by
depth. dropping load
CAUTION: Do not apply too much axial load on casing as it may

damage casing by cracking. Also do not drop casing.
Casing may be installed in a borehole, embedded in an earth/rock
fill or concrete structure during construction or fixed to vertical face
of a completed structure. Installation on completed structure is not
being described in this manual, as it is easy with help of casing Figure 6-1 Checking of casing
clamps that may be separately procured.
6.3 Alignment of casing
Maintain one pair of casing grooves perpendicular to direction in

which lateral movement is to be measured. If no such direction is
known, maintain one set of grooves parallel to N-S direction.
6.4 Preparation of casing before installation
NOTE: Pre-assembly and storage of inclinometer casings

should be done in shade as prolonged exposure to
direct sun light might distort the tubes.
a. Clean inside of bottom cap and outside of lower end of a casing with moist cloth (use isopropyl
alcohol if greasy).
b. Push bottom end cap over casing. Fix it to casing with four pop rivets using 3.2 mm diameter drill
bit. Riveting should be done at diametrically opposite points 90° apart.
c. Seal joint between bottom cap and casing with mastic waterproof tape. One round of this tape with
10 mm overlap is sufficient. Press tape firmly after applying, to remove any air pocket.
d. Additionally wrap three to four rounds of BOPP tape with a little force over mastic tape for extra
protection (refer to figure 6-2). Proper sealing is necessary to prevent intrusion of backfill materials
inside casing.
Page | 12
6.4.1 Fixed coupling
a. Attach a fixed coupling each to one end of all

other casings to be installed. Clean mating
surfaces with moist cloth (use isopropyl alcohol
if greasy).
b. Push 160 mm long fixed coupling over end of

casing up to maximum allowable depth of
around 80 mm. Drill holes with 3.2 mm bit and
pop rivet coupling to casing at four places
(position for two pop rivet holes are marked on
coupling; other two holes should be
symmetrically drilled).
c. Seal joint between fixed coupling and casing

with mastic waterproof tape and BOPP tape as
described above in § 6.4 (c) and 6.4 (d).
6.4.2 Telescopic coupling
Telescopic couplings are mostly installed in

embankments where settlement takes place
during construction. They are sometimes
installed in boreholes also where large
settlement or heave may take place. Telescopic
coupling has two sets of diametrically opposite
longitudinal grooves which facilitate a total
movement up to 150 mm (refer to figures 6-4
and 6-5). Coupling is secured to adjacent
casings with a set of four screws and nylon
washers.
Figure 6-2 Preparation of casing
Casing
160 mm Fixed coupling
Casing
Casing
400 mm Telescopic Coupling
Casing
Figure 6-3 Fixed & telescopic couplings
Page | 13
a. Attach a telescopic coupling each to one end of all other casings to be installed excepting the one
with the bottom cap. Clean mating surfaces with moist cloth (use isopropyl alcohol if greasy).
b. For applications in which only settlement takes place push 400 mm long telescopic coupling over
end of casing up to maximum allowable depth of around 195 mm. Drill two holes with 2.5 mm bit
at end of slot of coupling as shown in figures 6-4. Fix coupling to casing with self-tapping screws
and washers at position A. (Position B is location where the other casing will be drilled during
installation at site).
c. Pull casing out so that screw comes to position C as shown in figure 6-6. Tighten screws. Do not
over tighten. When the other casing is finally assembled at site, a space of 150 mm will be left
between the casing ends to take care of settlement.
d. In case settlement/ heave are both possible at location where casing is to be installed, adjust
position of screws in groove for an appropriate length of travel as shown in figure 6-6. If such a
casing is required to be lowered from top into a borehole, aluminium pop rivets may have to be
used to keep coupling in position (refer to figure 6-6). Seal joint between telescopic coupling and
casing with mastic waterproof tape and BOPP tape as described in § 6.4 (c) and 6.4 (d).
e. The casing assemblies are now ready for installation. Carefully transport them to site when
required.
Screw Do not over

tighten screw
Washer
400 mm coupling
200
mm
Casing
Fixed coupling
Casing Screw
Washer For settlement monitoring 2.5

mm holes will be required to be
A drilled at A and B
B
400 mm coupling
Casing
Figure 6-4 Fixed and telescopic coupling
Page | 14
Pull
150
mm
C Pull
Casing
Screw with washer
D
400 mm coupling
Casing
Installation positions of casing ends & telescopic coupling for
settlement monitoring
Rivet
Telescopic casing preassembly for heave/settlement

applications
Figure 6-5 Fixing telescopic coupling for heave/settlement

monitoring
Page | 15
7 INSTALLATION IN BOREHOLE
7.1 Borehole drilling
a. Drill 125 mm diameter hole as vertical as

possible around 0.5 m more than planned
depth of inclinometer casing. The drill hole
diameter should facilitate grouting around
outside of casing. A mobile rotary drilling rig
using rotary wash boring technique may be
used to perform the drilling. Wash borehole
clean and verify that it is not blocked
anywhere upto bottom. To prevent sidewalls
of borehole from collapsing, casing along
with bentonite slurry may be used.
NOTE: If necessary, use suitable steel casing
to prevent sidewalls of borehole from
collapsing. In such a case, steel casing
will have to be gradually withdrawn as
grout is pumped into borehole.
NOTE: In case spider magnets are used around
casing for settlement monitoring, drill
hole diameter should preferably be 150
mm.
7.2 Installation of inclinometer casing in

borehole
a. Lower casing with bottom cap into borehole

gripping it with safety clamp secured around
500 mm from top.
NOTE: Ensure the grooving alignment as
mentioned above.
b. Take a casing pre-assembled with fixed

coupling. Secure a safety clamp around 500
mm from its top end and mate coupling end
with casing already lowered. Pop-rivet fixed
coupling to casing at four places.

BOPP tape, as described in § 6.4 (c & d).
d. Remove safety clamp from first casing and

lower jointed casings into guide
pipe/borehole.
e. To counteract buoyancy, if required fill casing Figure 7-1 Checking of casing

with clean water to lower it into guide
pipe/borehole.
f. Repeat above procedure for all casings to be installed in borehole.
Page | 16
NOTE: Overcoming buoyancy while

lowering of casing: Casing will be
buoyant if borehole is water or mud filled
and must be filled with water to install it
in borehole.
CAUTION: Do not accidentally drop casing into
borehole. During insertion of casing
sections, clamps should be used at top
of hole to prevent lower casing
sections from falling to bottom of hole.
For very deep installations, a tension
cable may be attached to bottom of
casing to relieve tension on upper
casing couplings. During process of
lowering, casing grooves should be
kept aligned to final configuration
desired so that later turning of casing
is minimized.
CAUTION: When casing reaches correct depth;
check proper installation with dummy
probe. If probe will not pass or jumps
track, pull casing out and rectify
problem.
7.3 Grouting in borehole
a. Grout casings as directed by project authorities.

Ideally, grout should be mixed to match strength
and deformation characteristics of material
around borehole. In practice, main
consideration is to use a grout that allows
casing to move with surrounding material. For
information, grout mixes used by some
authorities are as follows:
Hard and medium soils
Cement 50 kg
Bentonite 15 kg
Water 125 litres
28-day compressive strength was about 350

kPa.
Soft soil
Cement 50 kg Figure 7-2 Casing installation

Bentonite 20 kg
Water 325 litres
Page | 17
NOTE: Please verify above values yourself in

actual conditions before use.
Encardio-rite takes no responsibility
for correctness of above information
at your site as the compressive
strength values are dependent upon
geology of site and environmental
conditions.
b. For mixing grout use a grout mixer or
circulation method (figure 7-3), in case a mixer
is not available. In the circulation method, a
rig pump or a trash pump coupled to a gasoline Figure 7-3 Circulation method of pumping
engine is used for mixing the grout grout
components i.e. water, cement and bentonite.
Subsequently, the same pump can be used for pumping the grout to the bottom of the borehole. It is
to be noted that pressure grouting is not required as the grout flows down under gravity.
c. Add cement to water first and mix/circulate. Add bentonite in small quantities slowly during the
mixing/circulation process such that lumps of bentonite are not formed. Adjust amount of bentonite to
produce a grout within consistency of heavy cream. If grout is too thin, the solids and water will
separate. If the grout is too thick, it will be difficult to pump.
d. Pull out and dismantle grout pipes one by one as the hole is being filled with grout.
NOTE: Use a mixer, a grout pump, a pipe or
Grout Pump
hose for delivering grout. Do not mix Coupling Mixer
Water
grout by hand. Also do not use a
water pump to place grout, since
pumping grout would damage it.
Properly mixed grout should be free

of lumps. It has to be thin enough to
Casing
pump but thick enough to set in a
reasonable length of time. If mixture is
too watery, it will shrink excessively, Bentonite
Bottom cement
leaving upper portion of the borehole cap grout
un-grouted. Avoid use of admixtures
and grouts that cure at high
temperature since these may damage
the casing.
The use of hydrated lime rather than

cement is sometimes recommended
to provide for a more responsive,
somewhat weaker backfill.
For plastic casing, heat of hydration of

grout or excess grout pressure can
deform the plastic. This problem can
be eliminated by maintaining casing 1 2 3 4
full of water until grout has set or by
Figure 7-4 Grouting by tremie method
grouting hole in stages.
Page | 18
CAUTION: Experience shows that sand or pea gravel should

not be used as backfill material unless it is
absolutely necessary. These backfill tend to mask
movement, not allowing a rigid shear plane to
reach the casing.
e. For grouting the inclinometer casing in the borehole use of
tremie method is recommended (figure 7-4). Lower 20 mm
nominal diameter rigid PVC pipe lengths jointed using
threaded sockets to around 0.5 m above the bottom of the
borehole. Figure 7-5 Grout overflowing (instead of
water) denotes grouting is complete
NOTE: Pre-grouting is sometimes done in case of a
shallow borehole. It is also useful when there is not enough space for the grout pipe in the
annulus between the casing and the borehole wall.
f. Flush inside of casing with clean water after grouting to prevent any leaked in grout from sticking to
inside of casing and impairing movement of probe.
7.4 Stage grouting in deep borehole
Boreholes deeper than 30 m require special care while grouting to prevent the grout pressure from
collapsing the casing.
Also, when grout, which has a density of 1280 kg per cubic meter, is pumped into borehole, water-filled
casing becomes buoyant because grout is denser than water.
To counter this buoyancy/collapsing of casing, following methods can be used (depending on depth of
borehole and site requirements):
7.4.1 Option 1: Fixing casing bottom by grout
A two stage grouting process can be carried out, where the first pipe extends to the bottom of the borehole
and the next pipe extends to bottom of the next stage.
In the first stage, bottom 10~15 m (20~25 m for very deep borehole) can be grouted and left for sufficient
time (at least 12 hr) to set. For this, the volume of grout needs to be calculated (grouting depth for stage 1
+ around 30% extra). Once grout is set, it will hold the bottom and overcome the buoyancy due to the grout
which is denser than water. Rest of the hole can be grouted using tremie method.
NOTE: Each grout pipe needs to be labelled or color coded properly to avoid accidentally pumping
grout or water down the wrong pipe.
During stage grouting, provisions need to be made to overcome the uplift force due to the first stage
grouting. For this, a clamp can be installed at the topmost casing of the installation and tied to a firm object.
Or suitable down force can be applied using steel pipe or weight as mentioned below.
7.4.2 Option 2: Using steel pipe inside casing

A down force can be applied at bottom of casing by lowering a steel pipe of suitable weight and length
(calculated depending on depth and dia of borehole) to bottom of casing. This needs to be done until grout
is set. It must be ensured that the bottom cap is securely fixed.
7.4.3 Option 3: Using weights at bottom
A non-retrievable weight can be suspended from the bottom casing before lowering it in borehole. This
method is however cannot be used in very deep boreholes.
Page | 19
7.4.4 Option 4: Using special anchor at bottom
A suitable anchor (spider type or hydraulically actuated anchor) can be attached to the bottom most casing
to hold the complete casing length in place.
NOTE: Do not park a drill rig over the casing or apply any other top-down method of counteracting
buoyancy. Putting weight at the top of the installed tubes to overcome the upward force due
to buoyancy is not recommended, as it tends to distort the casing.
7.5 Top cover
a. Fix protective cover in concrete platform on top of borehole.

Protective covers feature a universal key and dust
protection for lock (always put back dust protection after
locking to avoid lock jamming). Typical dimensions for
concrete platform are given in figure 7-1. These may vary
depending on local site conditions.
Top of upper most casing should be kept below final ground

level and protected by top cap and lockable manhole cover.
Cut top of pipe suitably by a hacksaw. Use flat file to make Figure 7-6 Protection for inclinometer
pipe end smooth.
7.6 After installation check
a. Check installed access tubing by dummy probe (EAN-26/2.2) for smooth movement up to bottom
of borehole.
NOTE: Top of uppermost casing should be 125 mm above base of niche as shown in figure 7-1. The
niche is around 200 mm deep. This is necessary for fixing pipe extension jig over casing for
taking readings.
b. When not taking readings, gage well should be protected by top cap and manhole cover should
be kept locked.
c. Mark tag no. of the installation with paint on inner side of hinged cover.
NOTE: Plying of heavy machinery such as cranes, loaded trucks etc. near protective cover should
not be allowed and if required proper fencing with warning flags should be provided. In case
it is not possible to avoid movement of heavy machinery over protective cover, specially
procure heavy duty covers from factory and embed in a heavy concrete platform.
NOTE: If telescopic coupling is used, settlement sections must be inserted appropriately extended or
collapsed. Grease telescopic joint and use mastic and BOPP tape to keep telescopic section at
required opening and also to prevent intrusion of grout or backfill materials inside casing.
7.7 Marking of grooves (sign convention)
Mark casing grooves as ‘A+’, ’B+’ ,’A-’ and ‘B-’ with permanent ink marker
pen. If uppermost probe wheel is pointed in direction of major principle plane
of movement, casing groove pointing in this direction is marked as ‘A+’.
Looking down the well, directions ‘B+’, ’A-’ and ‘B-’ are clockwise from ‘A+’.
Page | 20
7.8 Fixing magnets
Where settlement reading is also required with lateral movement, datum and leaf spring (spider) magnets
are mounted on the inclinometer casing. Different type of magnet
assemblies available are described in section 5.
1. Before lowering the bottom most casing, fix the datum magnet
assembly (refer to figure 7-7) firmly to the access tubing with
the screws provided, 0.5 m above the bottom cap.
NOTE: Since in most cases the bottom of inclinometer

access tubing is located in solid ground (fixed), the
datum magnet becomes a benchmark. This tubing
will be used as bottom most tubing. All the other
magnet assembly readings are referred to this datum
magnet to get their respective absolute settlement
relative to the benchmark. Figure 7-7 Datum magnet fixed on
bottom most casing
Datum and spider ring magnets are different for
manual and automatic monitoring and should be ordered separately according to requirement
2. Before lowering the second casing, position the spider magnet on casing at the desired location. Fix it
with waterproof sealing tape (refer to figure 7-8) on the access casing. For example, in case the desired
interval between the magnets is 3 m, the spring magnet will be fixed on the access casing, which
comes in 3 m length, 0.5 m above the bottom of casing (to maintain 3 m interval from datum magnet).
3. Close the leaf spring legs of the magnet with release wire link and release pin provided with supply.
Lock the release wire link with release pin, holding the leaves tightly to compress them. This will allow
easy lowering of the casing into borewell.
Six leg spider magnet placed over

access casing
Magnet fixed with sealing tape; leaves

compressed with release wire link and
pulling cord
Figure 7-8 Spider magnet installation on access casing
4. Tie the pulling cord (fishing cord) to the head of release pin so that it may be pulled from the top to
release the spider arms.
Page | 21
CAUTION: The spider magnets are provided with two holes on the magnet housing (refer to figure 7-9).
Ensure that at least one of the holes of the magnet housing is aligned with the hole of other
magnets fixed on different casings. This will ensure that all release pin are aligned with each
other and can be pulled out from the release wire link easily.
Pulling cord Pulling cord
Wire release pin tied Wire release pin tied

with pulling cord with pulling cord
Wire release pin Wire release pin
Spider magnet Spider magnet
Leaf spring Leaf spring
Release wire Release wire

assembly assembly
Spider Magnet for Automatic

Spider Magnet for manual readings readings
Figure 7-9 Magnet leaves compressed with release wire link and pulling cord
NOTE: Ensure that at least one leaf (of magnet) is aligned with the groove of the access casing. This
will make releasing the spider leaf easier and also in pushing the grout pipe safely.
5. Install the remaining spider magnets at desired locations in a similar way before lowering other casings.
CAUTION: Each spider magnet will have a different pulling cord to lock its release wire link. Mark each
cord precisely, taking the bottom most magnet (magnet which is just above the datum magnet)
as # 1.
Ensure that release cord (fish cord) does not get entangled while lowering of casings.
6. Once all the casing are lowered with spider magnets i.e. on reaching the top of the installation, release
spider magnet leaf springs by puling the pulling cord one by one, starting from bottom most magnet.
NOTE: For automatic settlement readings, special ring spider magnets are used, as explained in
section 2.1.3 and 4.2. Please refer to manual # WI 6002.128 on EAN-61MS in-place 3D
inclinometer system, for detail installation of the same.
Page | 22
8 INSTALLATION IN DIAPHRAGM WALL OR PILE
8.1 Preparation for installation in D-wall – MS casing
Direct installation of inclinometer casing in diaphragm

wall or a pile is problematic. It should be avoided.
Inclinometer casing will get distorted and stressed
when firmly tied to steel structure from bottom to top.
It is also not good to directly expose the casing to heat
of hydration and stresses generated during the
concreting process. Casing may distort and even get
cracked.
a. Fix a 150 mm nominal bore diameter steel guide pipe

vertically within reinforced bar cage as shown in figure
8-1. The pipe length to be installed should be worked
out in such a way that its top remains around 0.5 m
above the existing ground level after cage is fully
lowered to bottom of the slurry trench. Bottom of guide
pipe should be around 0.5 m above bottom level of
cage. It should be sealed at bottom with a concrete
plug/plastic cap.
Figure 8-1 Inclinometer casing in D-wall
Make sure that jointing of tube lengths is water proof to
prevent any grout/concrete from entering pipe, while cage is
being concreted. Use of dented or distorted pipes shall not be done as this will make installation of
inclinometer access tube difficult or even impossible.
NOTE: It is recommended that an auxiliary guide pipe be installed adjacent to the main guide pipe at
1.25 m approx. centre to centre distance at critical monitoring locations. This auxiliary pipe
can be used in case main pipe gets choked and becomes useless due to any reason.
b. Weld or fasten guide pipe securely to cage. Ensure that it remains vertical and is least distorted
during lowering of cage.
c. Concrete cage after covering mouth of guide pipe.
d. Flush guide pipe clean with water and verify depth with help of a suitable depth measuring device
(e.g. a sounding chain) that it is fully open up to the bottom.
NOTE: Ensure that heat of hydration of mass concrete has dissipated before installing access casing
in guide pipe. Use a temperature probe for this purpose. Temperature should not exceed
40oC. The heat of hydration, if present may warp access casing and render installation
useless.
8.2 Installation of inclinometer casing in MS casing (D-wall)
a. Lower casing with bottom cap into guide pipe gripping it with the safety clamp secured around 500
mm from top.
NOTE: Maintain one pair of casing grooves parallel to the direction in which lateral movement is to
be measured i.e. perpendicular to the diaphragm wall.
b. Take a casing pre-assembled with a fixed coupling, having a safety clamp secured around 500 mm
from its top end and mate it with the pipe already lowered through the coupling end. Pop-rivet the
fixed coupling to lowered casing at four places.
Page | 23
c. Seal joint with mastic waterproof tape and BOPP tape, as described in § 6.4.
d. Remove safety clamp from first casing and lower jointed casings into guide pipe.
NOTE: Always use safety clamp such that casing does not accidentally fall into guide pipe while
installing.
e. To counteract buoyancy, if required fill casing with clean water to lower it into the guide pipe.
f. Repeat above procedure for all the casings to be installed in the guide pipe.
NOTE: It is preferable to use 20 mm nominal diameter rigid PVC pipe lengths jointed using threaded
sockets for grouting. Lower above tubes say up to 0.5 m above bottom of guide pipe.
Inclinometer
casing in D-wall
MS casing in D-
wall cage
Figure 8-2 Installation of MS casing in Figure 8-3 Inclinometer casing installed in

diaphragm wall cage diaphragm wall
8.3 Grouting in MS casing (D-wall)
a. Prepare a grout mix to be filled in the annular space between the guide pipe and casings as
directed by project authorities. If no instructions are available, suggested grout mix is as follows:
Cement 50 kg
Bentonite 10 kg
Water 75 litres Cover
Top cap Allen head bolt
b. It is recommended to flush inside of
casing with water after grouting. This is to
100
prevent any leaked in grout from sticking Guide pipe

500
-150 NB
in the casing and impairing the movement
of the probe. Top level of D-wall
8.4 Top cover
a. Top of uppermost casing should be 25 Grout

mm above top of steel pipe. Cut top of Casing Diaphragm wall
pipe suitably by a hacksaw. Use flat file to

Figure 8-4 Protection of casing in diaphragm
make the pipe end smooth.
wall
Page | 24
NOTE: Depth of top of grout face from top of steel casing should be at least 100 mm (125 mm from
ABS casing top) as shown in figure 8-4. This is necessary for fixing pipe extension jig over
casing for taking readings.
b. Clean exposed portion of casing top and fix top cap.
c. When not taking readings, the gage well should be protected with cover fixed to top of steel casing
by four M6 Allen head bolts (figure 8-4).
8.5 After installation checks
a. Check installed guide pipe for proper installation before installation of access tubing. Ensure that
it is sufficiently vertical and is least distorted.
b. Check installed access tubing by dummy probe (EAN-26/2.2) before lowering inclinometer probe.
c. Ensure fixing protection cover and placing top cap after installation of inclinometer casing.
a. Mark tag no. of installation in paint on inner side of steel

guide pipe. Also mark casing grooves as ‘A+’,’A-’,’B+’ and
‘B-’ with permanent ink marker pen. If uppermost probe
wheel is pointed in direction of the major principle plane of
movement, the casing groove pointing in this direction is
marked as ‘A+’. Looking down the well, directions ‘B+’,’A-’
and ‘B-’ are clockwise from ‘A’.
NOTE: Plying of heavy machinery such as cranes, loaded

trucks etc. over the installation should not be allowed
and if required proper fencing with warning flags should be provided. If necessary, the guide
pipe with inclinometer casing be cut short to just above the diaphragm wall top level and a
lockable hinged cover be provided. Readings can be taken using an extension jig.
Page | 25
9 INSTALLATION IN DAM EMBANKMENT (FILL) – CORE SECTION
9.1 Precaution for installation in embankment fill (core)
a. In an embankment installation like in a dam, settlement will take place and coupling selected should
be long enough to provide for anticipated settlement. Encardio-rite ABS telescopic coupling provides
for a displacement of 150 mm.
b. Telescopic type slip joints are usually used only in embankment, but if settlement is anticipated below
a dam, they may be used in foundation also.
c. While installation, maintain one groove of inclinometer casing orientated in the direction in which
maximum deflection is expected. If the deflection direction cannot be determined, orient north/south.
d. Alignment of grooves (of casing) must be maintained throughout the installation process, to avoid
inducing torsion to the casing thereby causing spiral of the grooves.
9.2 Protection of installation in embankment fill (core)
a. As the installation progresses in stages over a few months, it is essential that the inclinometer
casings be properly protected against damage. The followings precautionary steps are
recommended.
• The contractor has to fabricate a circular fencing of G.I. wire with top & bottom end open (2 m
dia.) duly flagged, for protection of plastic casing from accidental damage due to nearby
construction work. This fencing can be manually raised, as and when the embankment height
is raised.
• The exposed top end of the inclinometer casing shall always be kept covered with the help of
top cap to prevent any loose soil or rock debris from entering the inclinometer casing.
b. Inclinometer casing in embankment installation can warp from extended exposure to hot sunlight.
The exposed part of the inclinometer casing should therefore be properly shielded from sunlight.
Suitably cover exposed part of inclinometer casing with tarpaulin or thick black plastic sheet to protect
plastic casings from unnecessary exposure to strong sunlight. Ultra violet radiation in sun rays cause
faster weathering of the plastic material. Once casings are fully embedded in soil they are safe.
c. A settlement marker should be provided adjacent to top of inclinometer casing that will serve as
survey reference point. This will allow inclinometer as well as settlement profile to be referenced to
an absolute reference (elevation above sea level) should bottom reference be lost due to any reason.
9.3 Installation of casing in embankment fill (core)
a. The first casing to be installed is the one with the bottom cap. Orient casing vertically with help of
casing top cap and guy ropes. Use plumb bob for this purpose. Ensure that one groove is oriented
in direction of maximum deflection.
b. It is good practice to grout fix lower end of casing. Effort should be made to install casing plumb
within 1° from vertical.
c. Remove casing cap and guy ropes as soon as possible because these will have to be re-used as
installation continues.
d. Compact soil carefully around casing and let level rise to around 20 cm below top of casing.
NOTE: An inclinometer installation in embankment requires no special backfill. The soil used for
embankment is compacted carefully around the casing.
Page | 26
e. Assemble telescopic coupling using acetone for cleaning and pop rivets, mastic & BOPP tape for
jointing suitably extending telescopic coupling to accommodate the expected settlement/rebound
as described in § 6. Grease telescopic joint as a bond breaker for the back fill. Properly seal by
mastic and BOPP tape to prevent intrusion of backfill materials inside casing.
f. Assemble next casing to telescopic coupling using procedure described above.
g. Repeat procedure till all casings and telescopic couplings are assembled. This of course will have
to go along with the filling of the embankment.
NOTE: In case settlement has also to be monitored, install plate magnets as the required level is
reached.
h. Flush inside of casing with water during assembly and after it is fully assembled. This is to prevent
any back fill or dirt from sticking on to grooves in casing and impairing movement of probe. Always
keep top of casing well plugged with top plug.
Mark the casing grooves as ‘A’,’B’,’C’ and ‘D’ with a permanent ink marker
pen. If the uppermost torpedo wheel is pointed in the direction of the
principal plane of movement, the casing groove pointing in this direction is
marked as ‘A’. Looking down the well, directions ‘C’,’B’ and ‘D’ are
clockwise from ‘A’.
9.5 Top protection
The top of the upper most casing should project around 150 mm above
the ground level. Fix the protective top cap and lock it. When not taking readings, the gage well should be
protected with the top cap and locked.
Page | 27
10 INSTALLATION IN DAM EMBANKMENT (FILL) – CREST
10.1 Precaution for installation in crest/rockfill section
a. Procedure for installation of casing in core and crest is different as crest area principally consists of
rock aggregates varying in size. This type of rock fill may show considerable lateral shift with large
localized variation along the depth. Localized lateral movement in rock fill is often beyond allowed
deformation limits of standard inclinometer casings causing casings to either shear off or crush.
b. Surrounding inclinometer casings with graded fine sand or clay up to some distance may not help
as it has been observed that due to piping effect, fine fill material can easily drain off through voids
in surrounding large rock aggregate fill matrix. Loss of fill material around inclinometer casings may
give rise to cavities that cause rock pieces from surrounding rock fill matrix to come loose and strike
inclinometer casing causing catastrophic damage to the casings.
10.2 Protection of installation in crest/rockfill section
Same as mentioned in section 8 above (protection of installation in embankment fill-core).
10.3 Installation of casing in crest/rockfill section
a. Before installation the location of the inclinometer casing (northing & easting) should be properly
marked by surveying.
b. Generally following installation instructions in § 9.3 wherever applicable, it is best to surround the
inclinometer casing in crest with graded material as per procedure described below. A typical
installation is illustrated in figure 10-1.
Zone 2 material Inclinometer casing

(<76 mm)
Fine aggregate (<10 mm)
Zone 3A material
(<200 mm) Cylindrical casing Ø750x300 high
with lifting rings.
Embankment fill Plate magnet with arms
(600 to 800 mm) at specified elevation
750
2000
3000
All dimensions are in mm.
Figure 10-1 Typical details of fill around casing
c. Because of graded fill requirement around inclinometer casings, the installation will have to
proceed after every 1.2 metres of main fill is in place and compacted. A pit of approximately 3
metres diameter at the bottom shall be left during the fill procedure.
Page | 28
d. Place a mild steel cylinder (typically 750 mm diameter x 300 mm high) formwork centred on the
inclinometer location mark. Locate bottom cap of casing at the location mark and centre the
cylinder around the casing.
e. Stand the bottom casing vertically on the capped end with the help of guy ropes to be held by three
persons each.
f. Orient casing vertically with help of guy ropes. Use plumb bob for this purpose. It is good practice
to grout fix lower end of casing. Effort should be made to install casing within 1º from the vertical.
g. Carry on fill operation in lifts of approximately 300 mm height. Build next layer only when preceding
layer has been properly compacted. Only use hand held compactors for compaction around
casings (figure 10-2). Four fill layers will raise fill height by around 1.2 m that is just sufficient to
hold the inclinometer tubing vertically in places.
h. The sheet steel cylinder is used to place and compact the sand and fine aggregate fill immediately
around the inclinometer casing. After the layer is compacted the cylinder is raised up and out of
the finished layer in preparation for the next layer. The other two graded zones shown in the figure
10-1 outside the 750 mm diameter cylinder can be carefully hand placed and compacted. It is
easier if the outer layer of fill material is placed first followed by the inner layer of fill material.
i. Remove guy ropes only after casing is two-thirds embedded in fill.
j. Once fill level reaches top of casing, add another length of casing using a telescopic coupling.
k. Suitably extended telescopic coupling to accommodate expected settlement/rebound. Hold casing

in extended condition with help of two pop rivets riveted diametrically opposite telescopic joints.
Grease the telescopic joint or cover with plastic as a bond breaker for the back fill. Waterproof
sealing tape is used to extend and keep the telescopic section to the required opening. Proper
sealing by the waterproof tape is also necessary to prevent intrusion of backfill materials inside the
casing.
Casing with telescopic coupling installed in Casing with telescopic coupling being installed
rockfill section of dam, supported by guy in rockfill section of dam, using hand help
ropes. compactor
Figure 10-2
Page | 29
l. Repeat above steps till all the access casings and telescopic couplings are assembled. This of
course will have to go along with the filling of the embankment. Insure that joints are riveted and
waterproof sealing tape is properly applied.
CAUTION: Groove alignment must be maintained throughout the installation process, to avoid inducing
torsion in the casing thereby causing spiralling of the grooves.
m. Flush the inside of the casing with water during assembly and after it is fully assembled. This is to
prevent any back fill or dirt from sticking on to the grooves in the casing and impairing the
movement of the probe. Always keep the top end of the casing covered with the top cap.
Mark the casing grooves as ‘A’,’B’,’C’ and ‘D’ with a permanent ink marker
pen. If the uppermost torpedo wheel is pointed in the direction of the
principal plane of movement, the casing groove pointing in this direction is
marked as ‘A’. Looking down the well, directions ‘C’,’B’ and ‘D’ are clockwise
from ‘A’.
10.5 Top protection
The top of the upper most casing should project around 150 mm above the
ground level. Fix the protective top cap and lock it. When not taking readings,
the gage well should be protected with the top cap and locked.
10.6 Fixing magnets (in fill – core & crest)
Settlement reading is normally required with lateral movement in embankment ill (earth/rockfill), as huge
settlements are expected. Plate magnets are mounted on the inclinometer casing for monitoring
settlements in fill.
1. Slide the datum magnet down the bottom most casing, that will grouted in the stable stratum, not
susceptible to any settlement. Position the magnet at around 0.5 m height from the bottom of casing
with 3 self-tapping screws as shown in figure 7-7 (in section 7) above.
NOTE: As the bottom of the access casing is located in the stable ground, the datum magnet
becomes the benchmark or reference point. Locations of all other magnets are referred to this
datum magnet to get their respective absolute settlement.
2. Wait till the level of clay/fill reaches the height/elevation of the plate magnet. Slide the plate magnet
from the top to rest on the fill at required locations. Cover the magnet with fill material & compact to
the same density as the surrounding fill (refer to figure 10-1). Repeat the process till all the magnets
are installed.
Page | 30
Annexure 1 Importance of internal diameter of casing

The following calculation is based upon dimensions of Encardio-
rite model EAN-26M inclinometer probe which has a diameter of
25 mm and a wheel spacing of 500 mm.
When embedded, the casing deforms with the lateral movement

of earthworks or structures. Larger the diameter of the casing,
lower is the chance of the inclinometer torpedo getting stuck into
it due to deformation of the casing.
The minimum tolerable casing radius is achieved when a portion

of the torpedo other than the wheels makes contact with the
casing. The radius may be calculated approximately by the
following formula:
R= (B22 - B12) equation 1

(Dc - Dp)
where:
R is the casing centerline radius
B1 is half the wheel spacing
B2 is the distance from the mid wheel base to the furthest
extremity, typically the connector
Dp is the torpedo diameter at the furthest extremity
Dc is the inside diameter of the casing
Thus for the ER torpedo and 75.5 mm o.d. ER casing
B1 = 250 mm
B2 = 420 mm
Dp = 25.0 mm at the connector
Dc = 65.0 mm for the 75.5 o.d. casing
R = 2.8 m as calculated by equation 1
Now take the example of a lower diameter casing
For a 61 mm o.d. casing (not sold or manufactured by E-R)
Dc = 43.5 m for the 61 mm o.d. casing
R = 6.6 m as calculated by equation 1
It can be easily seen that the higher diameter casing can take much more deformation and lateral
movement.
Obviously, in a real geotechnical situation, the casing is unlikely to deform at a constant radius, nor would
it be likely to maintain a circular cross section. However, these calculations show a theoretical basis for
predicting loss of use of a borehole due to deflection. Given the high cost of borehole re-drilling, the practice
of using larger diameter casing in all cases where movement is likely, is strongly recommended.
NOTE: When using inclinometer casing with IPI or IPIS, user is advised to work our “R’” based on
gauge length (wheel spacing) specified. Lower the gauge length, better will be the results. It
is recommended that a gauge length of more than 2 m should not be used.
Page | 31
ONE STOP MONITORING SOLUTIONS | HYDROLOGY | GEOTECHNICAL | STRUCTURAL | GEODECTIC
USERS’ MANUAL
VIBRATING WIRE PIEZOMETER

MODEL EPP-30V, EPP-40V, EPP-50V & EPP-60V
EPP-50V EPP-60V EPP-40V EPP-30V
Doc. # WI 6002.19 R16 | April 2018

International: UAE | Qatar | Bahrain | Bhutan | Morocco | Europe | USA | UK
Users’ Manual Vibrating wire piezometer
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Applications 1
1.2 Vibrating wire piezometer Encardio-rite’s range 1
2 VIBRATING WIRE PIEZOMETER 3
2.2 General description 3
2.2.1 Model EPP-30V electron beam welded heavy duty piezometer 3
2.2.2 Model EPP-40V slim size piezometer 4
2.2.3 Model EPP-60V low pressure piezometer 4
2.2.4 Model EPP-50V push-in piezometer 4
2.3 Typical installations 5
2.4 Zero Reading 5
2.5 Taking readings with model EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator 5
2.6 Sample test certificate for model EPP-30V piezometer 7
2.7 Sample test certificate for model EPP-40V or model EPP-50V piezometer 8
2.8 Sample calibration constants for model EPP-30V piezometer required to be used with
EDI-54V Readout Unit 9
ESDL-30 Datalogger 10
4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 12
4.1 Preparation of sensor before installation 12
4.2 Saturating filters 13
4.3 Installing piezometer (model EPP-30V or EPP-40V slim size) in borehole/foundation 13
4.4 Installing piezometer in embankment – recommended piezometer model EPP-30V 16
4.5 Embedment of sensor and cable laying 17
4.5.1 General precautions in the mounting of the cable 17
4.5.2 Earth and rock fill dam – recommended piezometer model EPP-30V 18
4.5.3 Concrete dam – recommended piezometer model EPP-30V 20
4.6 Installation of model EPP-50V push-in piezometer in soft soil 21
5 TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT 24
5.1 Thermistor - temperature resistance correlation 24
5.2 Measurement of temperature 25
5.3 Temperature correction 25
6 OTHER CONSIDERATIONS/TROUBLE SHOOTING 26
6.1 Barometric pressure correction 26
6.2 Polynomial linearity correction 26
6.3 Use of piezometers in coastal areas 26
6.3.1 Saline corrosion 27
6.3.2 Precautions to be taken 28
6.4 Trouble shooting 28
6.4.1 Symptom: piezometer reading unstable 28
6.4.2 Symptom: piezometer fails to read 29
7 APPENDIX-B: SAMPLE OBSERVATION SHEETS 30
7.1 Vibrating wire piezometer sample observation sheet and chart 30
8 WARRANTY 31
Page (i)
1 INTRODUCTION
Pressure experienced by water contained in pores of earth materials, concrete structures or rock is
generally called pore water pressure. In any instrumentation scheme for geotechnical or geo-structural
study associated with large civil engineering structures like tall buildings, dams, underground tunnels
etc., measurement of pore water pressure (also known as piezometric level) plays an important part.
The study of pore pressure has following main purposes:
 Effect of water in pores of soil or rock is to reduce load bearing capacity of soil or rock. Effect is
more pronounced with higher pore water pressure leading eventually in some cases to total
failure of load bearing capacity of the soil.
 To determine level and flow pattern of ground water

 Determine flow pattern of water in earth/rock fill & concrete dams and their foundations and to
delineate the phreatic line.
1.1 Applications
Encardio-rite vibrating wire piezometer is the electrical piezometer of choice as its frequency output is
immune to external noise, it is able to tolerate wet wiring common in geotechnical applications and it is
capable of transmission of signals to long distances. It has applications in the measurement of positive or
negative pore pressure in soil, concrete mass or rock including:
 Construction control, stability investigation and monitoring of earth dams, embankments,
foundations, shallow underground works and surface excavations.
 Uplift and pore pressure gradients in foundations, embankments, abutments and fills.
 Hydrological investigation, ground water elevation study and water supply operations.
 Pore pressure studies in relation to waste and environmental applications
 Monitoring of pore pressure for soil improvement & stability and for slope stability
1.2 Vibrating wire piezometer Encardio-rite’s range

 Encardio-rite model EPP-30V electron beam welded robust vibrating wire piezometer especially
suitable for monitoring pore pressure in heavy structures like earth/rockfill dams and mass
concrete during construction and for long term monitoring after construction is over.
 Encardio-rite model EPP-40V slim piezometer 19 mm diameter specially designed to monitor

pore pressure in small diameter boreholes during construction activity.
 Encardio-rite model EPP-60V low pressure piezometer specially designed to monitor low pore
pressures.
 Encardio-rite model EPP-50V piezometer for installing by pushing into soft soil.

WARNING! Warning messages calls attention to a procedure or practice that if not properly followed
CAUTION: Caution messages calls attention to a procedure or practice that if not properly followed may
NOTE: Note contains important information and is set off from regular text to draw the users’
attention.
Page | 1

The users’ manual is intended to provide sufficient information for making optimum use of vibrating wire
piezometers in different applications.
To make the manual more useful we invite valuable comments and suggestions regarding any additions
or enhancements. We also request to please let us know of any errors that are found while going through
the manual.
of fundamentals of geotechnics. Novices may find it very difficult to carry on installation
A lot of effort has been made in preparing this instruction manual. However best of
instruction manuals cannot provide for each and every condition in field that may affect
performance of the sensor. Also, blindly following the instruction manual will not guarantee
success. Sometimes, depending upon field conditions, installation personnel will have to
consciously depart from written text and use their knowledge and common sense to find
solution to a particular problem.
Installation of a piezometer requires expertise. It is recommended that potential users

themselves practice all the operations laid down in this manual by repeated installations.
NOTE: The sensor is normally used to monitor site conditions and will record even a minor change
that may affect behaviour of structure being monitored. Some of these factors amongst
others, are, seasonal weather changes, temperature, rain, barometric pressure, nearby
landslides, earthquakes, traffic, construction activity around site including blasting, tides
near sea coasts, fill levels, excavation, sequence of construction and changes in personnel
etc. These factors must always be observed and recorded as they help in correlating data
later on and also may give an early warning of potential danger or problems.
The manual is divided into a number of sections. Each section contains a specific type of information.
Please refer to the “table of content” for the sections included in the manual.
Page | 2
2 VIBRATING WIRE PIEZOMETER

The vibrating wire piezometer consists of a magnetic, high tensile strength stretched wire, one end of
which is anchored and the other end fixed to a diaphragm that deflects in some proportion to applied
pressure. Any change in pressure, deflects the diaphragm proportionally and this in turn affects the
tension in the stretched wire. Thus any change in pore pressure, directly affects the tension in the wire.
The wire is plucked by a coil magnet. Proportionate to the tension in the wire, it resonates at a frequency
‘f’, which can be determined as follows:
f = [σg/ρ]1/2/ 2l Hz
where σ = tension of wire
g = gravitational constant
ρ = density of wire
l = length of wire
The resonant frequency, with which wire vibrates, induces an alternating current in the coil magnet. The
pore pressure is proportional to the square of the frequency and the Encardio-rite model EDI-54V
readout logger is able to display this directly in engineering units.
2.2 General description

Piezometers are manufactured in various capacities. A thermistor is provided integrally in each
piezometer to monitor temperature and if necessary, to make the temperature correction in the zero
reading (see § 5).
A tri-polar plasma surge arrestor inside the transducer housing protects the vibrating wire pluck and read
coils from electrical transients such as may be induced by direct or indirect lightning strikes.
2.2.1 Model EPP-30V electron beam welded heavy duty piezometer

The vibrating wire and coil magnet assembly is enclosed in a stainless steel body (figure 2.1) which is
electron beam welded to the diaphragm. This results in a
vacuum of around 1/1000 Torr inside the sensor resulting in
it becoming immune to effect of any ingress of water and
other corrosive materials that may be present in the water.
As piezometer is of stainless steel construction, it is not
affected by normal chemical corrosion at locations in which it
is used.
A low air entry value ceramic flat filter with a thickness of 3

mm and a grain size of 40-60 microns is normally provided. The water oozing through internal pores or
seams in rock formations of dam foundations, mass concrete of structures, foundation soil of structures,
reclaimed land soil etc. percolates through the filter to pressurise the diaphragm. A locking nut holds the
filter in position. For filling up the cavity behind the filter with de-aired water before installation and for
saturating the filter with water, a bent nose plier (commonly used for circlips) is used to remove and again
assemble the locking nut.
Depending upon the application, filters with different porosity and air entry values are available.
Page | 3
The leads from the coil magnet are terminated on a glass to metal seal which is integrally electron beam
welded to the stainless steel body of the piezometer. The two pins marked red and black are connected
to the coil magnet. The other two pins are connected to a thermistor. A cable joint housing and cable
gland is provided for the cable connection. For cable jointing, refer to Users’ Manual 6002.11.
Figure 2-1 Model EPP-30V electron beam welded piezometer
Normally, the piezometer is supplied without any cable attached to it. Cable jointing with required length
of appropriate cable can be easily done at site. However, if specifically requested, piezometers are
supplied with requisite length of cable attached.
2.2.2 Model EPP-40V slim size piezometer

EPP-40V slim size 19 mm φ piezometer is mostly used for monitoring
pore pressure in boreholes during construction operation. This sensor is
electron beam welded with a vacuum of around 1/1000 Torr inside it. A
low air entry value ceramic flat filter is provided with a grain size of 40-
60 microns unless specified otherwise. Cable jointing through a glass to
metal seal is just like as in model. However, if specifically requested, the
piezometers are supplied with the requisite length of cable attached.
2.2.3 Model EPP-60V low pressure piezometer

EPP-60V low pressure sensor is specially designed to measure low
water pressure. The basic pressure sensor, in a diameter of 30 mm, is
conveniently designed to measure water level, and water pressure in
boreholes. Pressure sensor is used for applications in which maximum
hydrostatic head (height of water level above piezometer location) is
less than 7 m over the sensor diaphragm.
2.2.4 Model EPP-50V push-in piezometer

EPP-50V push-in type vibrating wire piezometer is used for monitoring
pore water pressure in soft soil/clay and landfills. It has a pointed cone at
one end and drill rod threads (EW or M 28) at the other end. It is inserted
into a borehole, threaded into a drill rod and then pushed into soft soil
directly till the required depth. The cable is passed through the drill rod.
Push-in piezometer is provided with a standard 1 m long polyurethane
sheathed cable which can be extended at site as per requirement with a
kit that is available from the factory. However, if specifically requested,
the piezometers are supplied with the requisite length of cable attached.
Page | 4
2.3 Typical installations

Typical installation methods are described in section 4.
2.4 Zero Reading

In any Encardio-rite vibrating wire piezometer, tension in wire is set such that at no pressure on the
diaphragm, the wire vibrates at an initial frequency as specified in the test certificate. This means that the
piezometer has an initial frequency reading with no pressure exerted on its diaphragm. It is therefore
necessary that an initial zero reading be accurately determined for each piezometer, as this reading will
be used for subsequent data reduction. Generally, the initial reading prior to installation with no pressure
applied is considered.
Special consideration should be given to the following:
 Make sure that piezometer temperature reaches thermal equilibrium. Temperature variation across
body of piezometer results in temperature transients and consequently error in reading. Allow 20-25
minutes for piezometer temperature to stabilize. Take particular care that sunlight does not fall on
any surface of piezometer. For borehole installations, to achieve thermal equilibrium the piezometer
may be lowered down in the borehole and stopped just above the water table. It should remain at the
same location and initialized once thermal stability is achieved.
 Check if filter is fully saturated with water. Reading will be seriously affected due to surface tension
effects in pores of filter in case filter is not fully saturated. At low pressures below 0.5 kg/cm2, the
problem is more acute.
 In conducting any preliminary tests involving raising or lowering piezometer in a fluid filled borehole
or at low pressures it is advisable to remove the filter.
 Check if temperature and barometric pressure are recorded at time of taking zero reading.
 For monitoring level in a standpipe, allow sufficient time for level to stabilize. Lowering piezometer
and cable in a borehole may sufficiently displace water column and affect the water level reading,
especially if diameter of borehole is proportionately small. Take an example in which the model EPP-
30V piezometer is lowered by a 6 mm outside diameter cable, 10 m below water column in a 50 mm
inside diameter casing. The water level will rise by around 22 cm and unless allowed to stabilize with
time will give an erroneous reading.
2.5 Taking readings with model EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator

The model EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator (figure
2.3) is a microprocessor-based read-out unit for use
with Encardio-rite’s range of vibrating wire sensors. It
can display the measured frequency in terms of time
period, frequency, frequency squared or the value of
measured parameter directly in proper engineering
units. It uses a smartphone with Android OS as
readout having a large display with a capacitive
touch screen which makes it easy to read the VW
sensor.
The EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator can store cal-
ibration coefficients from 10,000 vibrating wire Fig 2.3 – Vibrating wire indicator
sensors so that the value of the measured pa-
rameter from these sensors can be shown directly in proper engineering units. For transducers with built-
in interchangeable thermistor, it can also display the temperature of the transducer directly in degree
Centigrade.
Page | 5
The vibrating wire indicator has an internal non-volatile memory with sufficient capacity to store about
525,000 readings from any of the programmed sensors. Each reading is stamped with the date and time
the measurement was taken.
Refer instruction manual WI-6002.112 of model EDI-54V for entering the transducer calibration
coefficients. The gage factor of the model EPP-30V/40V/50V/60V vibrating wire piezometer is given in
the test certificate provided with every supply. The initial reading IR will be the actual reading in digits
from the vibrating wire piezometer after it is installed in the borehole/foundation and properly set in grout.
An internal 6 V 4 Ah rechargeable sealed maintenance-free battery is used to provide power to the

vibrating wire indicator. A battery charger is provided to charge the internal battery, which operates, from
90 V to 270 V AC 50 or 60 Hz V AC mains. A fully discharged battery takes around 6 hours to get fully
charged. The indicator uses a smartphone as a readout that has its own internal sealed rechargeable Li-
ion maintenance battery as a power source. A separate battery charger/adapter unit for the smartphone,
operating from universal AC mains supply is supplied with each EDI-54V indicator unit.
The EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator is housed in an impact resistant plastic moulded housing with
weatherproof connectors for making connections to the vibrating wire transducer and the battery charger.
For operating complete operating procedure please refer ‘Doc. # WI 6002.112’
Page | 6
2.6 Sample test certificate for model EPP-30V piezometer
Page | 7
2.7 Sample test certificate for model EPP-40V or model EPP-50V piezometer
Page | 8
2.8 Sample calibration constants for model EPP-30V piezometer required to be used with EDI-
54V Readout Unit
Page | 9
ESDL-30 Datalogger
Page | 10
Model EPP-30V, 40V and 60V piezometer has a glass to metal seal with four terminals for jointing the
cable at site. Model EPP-50V is supplied with 1 m long cable attached and may be suitably extended at
site. The following is a general list from which tools and accessories required by you may be chosen
(also refer to users’ manual on cable jointing WI-6002.11):
3.1 Soldering iron 25 watt

3.2 Rosin 63/37 solder wire RF-3C, 30 swg
3.3 Thread sealant (Loctite 577 or equivalent)
3.4 Cable jointing compound (Please refer to Encardio-rite user’s manual “cable jointing of sensors”
6002.11 for options that can be used)
3.5 Acetone (commercial)
3.6 Spanner 20/22 and 26/28 and pliers 160 mm
3.7 Hacksaw with 150 mm blade
3.8 Cable Cutter
3.9 Surgical blade with holder
3.10 Wire stripper
3.11 Bent nose plier (internal)
3.12 Pouring funnel.
3.13 Stainless steel rod 5 mm φ, 150 mm length and Spatula
3.14 Rotary tin cutter
3.15 Fixture for jointing upto six piezometers (figure 3-1)
3.16 Toothbrush
3.17 Cloth for cleaning (lint less)
3.18 Geo-textile bag (150 mm x 250 mm) with integral tying lace to contain the piezometer
3.19 Digital multimeter
3.20 EDI-54V portable readout unit
Page | 11
4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
4.1 Preparation of sensor before installation

Following instructions are for model EPP-30V piezometer. Modify instructions for the other piezometers
as per additional instructions given.
4.1.1 Remove cable joint housing from cable end of sensor. This gives access to the four pin terminal.
Two of the terminals are marked with red and black colours. These are internally wired to the coil
of the magnet assembly inside the sensor. The other two terminals are utilized for measurement
of temperature using a thermistor. Clean the terminals with a toothbrush.
NOTE: Do not use any acetone for cleaning the terminals as it may damage the glass to metal seal.
Acetone should be used to clean the other portions of the sensor.
4.1.2 Check working of the sensor as follows:
 For EPP-30V, the coil resistance measured by a digital multimeter between the red and black
pins, should lie between 120-150 Ohm. For EPP-40V and EPP-50V, the coil resistance
measured by a digital multimeter between the red and black pins, should lie between 130-170
Ohm. Determine resistance at room temperature from thermistor temperature resistance chart in
§ 5. This resistance should be approximately equal to that between pins marked green and
white. For example, if room temperature is 25oC, the resistance would be 3,000 Ohm.
 The resistance between any lead and the protective armour should be > 500 M Ohm.
 Connect sensor to Encardio-rite model EDI-54V portable readout unit and switch it on. The
display will show something like:
Freq: 2629.8 Hz
Where the actual figure will vary depending on the transducer connected to the indicator.
 For piezometer, initial reading (offset) in frequency as read on the portable readout unit should
be stable.
 For model EPP-30V, check whether sensor is responding to changes in pressure. A crude but
simple and effective method of checking whether sensor is responding to changes in pressure is
as follows:
o Remove filter from piezometer by using a locking nut spanner.

o Press diaphragm with thumb and verify that frequency reading on indicator decreases.
o This change in reading ensures that deformation produced by pressure of thumb on

diaphragm is transmitted to vibrating wire sensing element.
Note: This test is not possible for the model EPP-40V and EPP-50V piezometers.
 Shift readout unit display to frequency2 mode. Each sensor is provided with a test certificate
giving relationship between applied pressure and output. For model EPP-30V and EPP-40 V the
zero reading in frequency2 given in test certificate should not differ from current zero reading by
more than 100 (x 103) divisions and 250 (x 103) divisions respectively after due regard to
corrections made for difference in temperature, barometric pressure, height above sea level and
actual cell position (whether standing up or lying down).
 For example in test certificate for model EPP-30V (see § 2.6), zero reading in frequency2 at the
time of dispatch is 6452.6 (x 103 Hz2). In case temperature and barometric pressure is same at
place and time of installation and sensor is placed lying down, reading in frequency2 should be
between 6,352.6 and 6,552.6 (x 103 Hz2).
Page | 12
4.1.3 Connect required length of cable to model EPP-30V or EPP-40V piezometer as described in
operating manual on cable jointing WI-6002.11 or extend cable of model EPP-50V as required.
NOTE: The cable should always be unreeled by turning cable drum so that cable is laid out on the
flooring. Cables should never by unreeled by pulling on cable itself as the internal
conductors can get damaged from excessive strain.
Cable should never be unwound from any one side of the drum. This can happen, for
example, when the cable drum is kept on its side and the cable is taken out without rolling
the drum.
4.1.4 Check working of the sensor again following the procedure described above.
NOTE: Add cable resistance when checking resistance between the leads after the cable jointing.
For the model CS 0401 cable, the resistance is 26 Ohm/km and for the model CS 0406
cable, the resistance is 48 Ohm/km. (multiply by 2 for both leads). In case any other cable
is used, make necessary addition in resistance value.
4.2 Saturating filters

4.2.1 Use a bent nose pliers to remove filter from piezometer and boil it in water in a large vessel for
about 15 minutes. The filter will saturate with water. Let the water in vessel cool down to room
temperature.
NOTE: In model EPP-30V, filter can be removed by opening the locking nut. In model EPP-40V,
filter can be removed by pulling out the filter holder. In model EPP-50V, filter can be
removed by unscrewing the conical top.
4.2.2 Dip piezometer head inside water and re-assemble filter. Make sure that water enclosed between
diaphragm and filter does not leak out of sensor when it is tilted or turned around. Bag sensor in
de-aired water until installation.
CAUTION: Make sure that de-aired water does not leak out of piezometer. If this happens, an air lock
may develop behind filter resulting in erroneous reading of pore pressure. In case water
leaks out, repeat process making sure that ‘O’ ring provided sits properly in its position and
locking nut is properly tightened.
NOTE: Assembled piezometer should be bagged in de-aired water to maintain saturation until
installation.
NOTE: Some users follow above procedure only in case of high air entry filters and do not find it
necessary for low air entry filters as with time air between filter and diaphragm gets
dissolved in the water. We however recommend above procedure.
4.3 Installing piezometer (model EPP-30V or EPP-40V slim size) in borehole/foundation

Installation of piezometer in a borehole is done with fully grouted method. Installing multiple piezometers
in a borehole using the traditional method, which involves placement of sand pockets surrounding the
piezometers, bentonite seals and grout columns to separate piezometers at different levels, is slow and
complex. It also poses a risk of unintended communication between piezometers. Fully grouted method
(refer to figure 4-1 and 4-2) is quick and easy and results in excellent zone isolation. Vibrating wire
piezometers are the electrical piezometers of choice to implement this method as these require very little
volume of water to register a change in pore water pressure, thus resulting in a fast response time.
Page | 13
4.3.1 Determine the installation depths of the Lockable protective cover

multilevel piezometers. Connect the required G.L.
length of cables - installation depth plus extra Cavity
length of 1 to 2 m, to each piezometer. Check (250x250
x150 depth)
the working of the sensors again following the
Concrete
procedure described above.
Terminal box
4.3.2 At any elevation, locate by surveying exact po- for observing data
X1
sition of borehole where borehole/foundation Cement, Bentonite
piezometers are to be installed. & Water
4.3.3 Drill a 100 mm diameter hole to a depth of
X2
around 1 m below the elevation at which the pi-
ezometer is to be installed using Guargum as
V W piezometer
drilling mud. If necessary, use casing to prevent
the sidewall of the borehole from collapsing.
Wash the borehole clean up to the bottom by
X3
Sensor cable
pumping in fresh water.
4.3.4 Attach bottom most piezometer to sacrificial
grout pipe, approximately 300 to 500 mm from
the end as shown in picture on net page. PVC
pipe of 20 mm dia., bell ended or threaded, V W piezometer
could be used as sacrificial grout pipe. Use
nylon cable tie to attach piezometer to PVC
pipe. Attach piezometer to pipe with its tip Sensor cable
pointing upwards. This is to avoid leakage of
de-aired water enclosed between diaphragm
and filter and to minimize possibility of de-
saturation.
Grout pipe
NOTE: For long term monitoring, model EPP-30V
is recommended. For EPP-40V smaller V W piezometer
diameter borehole can be drilled. Outer Nylon cable tie
diameter of EPP-40V is 19 mm.
1000
Sensor cable
4.3.5 Connect leads to EDI-54V and take the reading
in frequency2 (digits). This reading will form the Borehole Ø100
‘initial reading’ to be entered in the EDI-54V for Note : All dimensions in mm.
the sensor set-up data. Shift to temperature
mode and record the ambient temperature. Figure 4-1
4.3.6 Lower the above assembly into the borehole.

Attach the cable from the piezometer to the grout pipe at approximate intervals using nylon cable
tie or BOPP tape, leaving some slack. Attach subsequent lengths of grout pipe following the
same method as described above. Cable should be taped above the grout pipe at regular
intervals. Hold the assembly at the borehole top such that there is gap between grout pipe and
borehole bottom.
4.3.7 Take readings of piezometer after the complete assembly is lowered down the borehole, to
check functioning. Normally, the reading should be in accordance to the height of the water
column above the piezometer.
Page | 14
4.3.8 Prepare grout mix to be filled in the annular space between

the piezometer assembly and borehole, as directed by
project authorities. If no instructions are available,
suggested grout mix is as follows:
Cement 50 kg
Bentonite 15 kg
Water 125 liters
NOTE: It is re-commended that the grout mix should be

prepared in sufficient amount such that continuous
grouting of the borehole can be carried out in order to
avoid choking of the borehole and loss of
instrumentation.
4.3.9 Mix cement in water first. Add bentonite in cement-water
mix slowly, such that clumps are not formed. Continue Figure 4.2 – installation by
adding bentonite until the watery mix turns to an oily/slimy
fully groutable method
consistency. Circulate/mix the grout for another five to ten
minutes. Add more bentonite if required until the grout has
consistency of cream. It should not be so thick that it is difficult to pump it into the borehole.
NOTE: Record initial reading and temperature with EDI-54V for permanent record before lowering
piezometer in borehole. This will form the zero reading for the piezometer. Note barometric
pressure at time of taking initial reading.
4.3.10 Pump grout in the annular space between borehole and piezometer assembly using the
sacrificial grout pipe until it reaches the ground surface. If casing is used for preventing the
borehole walls from collapsing, successively pull it out as the borehole is grouted.
NOTE: It is suggested that the maximum discharge head capacity of the grouting pump (Trash
Pump) should be higher than the maximum depth of borehole. If no details are available,
suggested grout pump is as follows:
Model KTH-80X-BAB
Make Keshin Ltd.
Mix Discharge head 27 m
Delivery Volume 1340 l/min
4.3.11 Leave the grout to settle down overnight or 12 hr. approximately. Next day, top up the settled
grout to the ground surface.
4.3.12 Take readings of piezometers after the borehole is grouted. The piezometer readings will
normally be more at this stage owing to the grout column above the piezometers, which is denser
than water. The readings will decrease as the grout cures. Normally the grout will take two days
to cure.
4.3.13 Make a 400 mm x 400 mm concrete platform on top and install 250 mm x 250 mm lockable
protective cover. Terminate the cable end in a terminal box for observing data, located in the
niche/cavity.
NOTE: For saline water applications, specially treated piezometers have to be procured. In
these,the stainless steel diaphragm is protected with a thin layer (around 1 mm) of GE
Silicones compound TSE 399. Wrap the remaining exposed cylindrical surface of the
piezometer stainless steel body with a saline resistant tape like "33 super PVC 3M tape".
Page | 15
Particular care should be taken to cover the joint between the piezometer and the cable joint
housing.
NOTE: In case readings are to be taken with the portable EDI-54V at specified intervals, use a
junction box with only one cable gland. However, in case cable has to be extended to a
distant location, use a junction box with two cable glands.
NOTE: At certain locations like earth/rockfill or concrete dams, it is convenient not to have the
junction box and route one continuous cable from the sensor to the observation room. In
such a case the platform (clause 4.3.13) is not made.
NOTE: Note elevation at which piezometer is installed for future correlation of data and its analysis.
4.4 Installing piezometer in embankment – recommended piezometer model EPP-30V

4.4.1 Carefully mark the position where piezometer is to be installed. Place some sand/gravel to form a
plain surface in the earth/rock fill or concrete dam.
4.4.2 Fill geo-textile bag with saturated sand (2-4 mm) and insert piezometer in it. Tie bag at top by
pulling lace. Make assembly into a cylinder of around 75 mm φ.
4.4.3 Connect leads to EDI-54V and take reading in frequency2 (digits). This reading will form the
‘initial reading’ to be entered in EDI-54V for sensor set-up data. Also record ambient
temperature.
NOTE: Record initial reading and temperature with EDI-54V for permanent record. This will form the
zero reading for the piezometer. Note barometric pressure at time of taking initial reading.
V/W piezometer Concrete
Lace tie
4-core cable
Geotextile bag Sand Pea gravel

and sand
Figure 4-2
4.4.4 Place enough sand/ gravel to cover the sensor and the adjoining cable all around.
4.4.5 Cover sensor with enough back fill in case of earth/rock fill dam. In concrete dam pour concrete
by hand shovel to embed sensor to depth of around 0.5 m before commencing normal operation.
Page | 16
4.5 Embedment of sensor and cable laying
4.5.1 General precautions in the mounting of the cable

Careful and skilled cabling is required in installation of piezometer as sensor/cable joint and a large part
of cable is permanently embedded and no future access is available for any maintenance and corrective
action.
The procedure for laying of cables differs with individual installations. In general, however, all installations
have the following common requirement:
 Protect cable from damage by angular and sharp particles of material in which it is
embedded.
 Cables may be spliced without affecting sensor reading; nevertheless splicing should be
avoided wherever possible. If necessary, use special cable jointing kits available from factory.
 In earth/rock embankments and backfill, cable must be protected from stretching due to
differential compaction of embankment. Cable must also be protected from damage by
compaction equipment.
Precaution must be taken that cable is properly tagged, onward from point from which they come out of
embankment. With the best possible precautions, mistakes may still occur. Tags may get lost due to
cable getting accidentally cut. Encardio-rite uses the convention that looking from end of trench towards
sensor, cable from most distant sensor is always at the left hand side and the offset trenches are to the
right of the cable trench. In that order, the cable from the closest sensor is at the extreme right.
NOTE: A simple code for remembering this is “LL-SR”. Longer (cable) left, shorter (cable) right
when viewing the sensors from the observation room.
CAUTION: All cables should be properly identified by tagging them every 5 m, onwards from the point
from which they come out of the embankment. The tags should be of a non-corrosive
material like stainless steel or plastics.
CAUTION: Follow the Encardio-rite convention that looking from the end of the trench towards the
sensor, the cable from the most distant sensor is always at the left hand side and the cable
from the closest sensor is at the extreme right.
As an Encardio-rite convention, cable from most distant sensor should be connected to extreme left
socket in junction box. Succeeding cables from sensors are connected progressively towards the right in
junction box.
In case of an earth dam before packing the trench with back fill, a plug approximately 100 mm thick,
made of a mixture of 5% bentonite (by volume) exhibiting a free swell factor of approximately 600%, and
95% sand should be placed in the trench at intervals of approximately 10 m.
In case of concrete dam, to take care of any settlement and/or contraction of concrete due to
temperature effects, cable should be zigzagged by providing a uniformly distributed slack of around 0.5
m in a 15 m length of each cable.
Page | 17
4.5.2 Earth and rock fill dam – recommended piezometer model EPP-30V
In an earth and rock fill dam, a number of piezometers and maybe other sensors are installed at selected
elevations at different cross sections, as illustrated in figure 4-4. For example, nine piezometers and
three soil pressure meters are installed at elevation 438 m.
Soil Pressure
Pore Pressure
EL-461
Under ground settlement & tilt
Seepage measurement EL-447

Figure 4-3 EL-438
Ground line
Grout EL-422
Assumed rock line
hole
Figure 4-4 - Typical piezometer layout in earth and rockfill dam
Monitoring of readings from group of Cable 25 mm apart

piezometers installed at different elevations Cable trench
Embankment
help in determining the phreatic line and gives piezometer
an indication on how it advances with time till
steady state conditions are reached.
To observation room
At any cross section, filling of dam is allowed
1000
to continue to an elevation of around 0.5 to 1

m higher than where piezometers are to be
mounted. Positions where piezometers
(whether foundation or embankment) are to
Offset trench
be mounted are carefully marked. Offset
trenches (around 1 m x 1 m) to reach correct Figure 4-5 Installation in embankment
required elevation are dug at these positions.
Material around sensor should be placed by 1000 400 to 800 Cable trench
hand shovel and compacted with a light duty
pneumatic or petrol backfill tamper. First layer
Compacted
of material over sensor should be around 250
500 max.
earth fill
mm high and compacted properly. Similar
layers of material should be put over this and
compacted properly until at least 500 mm of
material has been placed. Rubber tyre Selected fine
equipment can now cross this location, but no material
vibratory rollers should be permitted over the
sensor until a compacted thickness of at least
Foundation piezometer
1 m is laid.
In case foundation piezometers are to be

installed, necessary boring is done to the
Ø100 mm
required depth and installation of piezometer is
done as per section § 4.3. Figure 4-6 Installation in foundation
Page | 18
In case of installation of foundation piezometer in earth/rockfill or concrete dams, it is convenient not to

have the junction box and route one continuous cable from the sensor to the observation room. In such a
case the platform (clause 4.2.13) is not made instead cabling is done in cable trench.
Looking towards the sensors from the trench end side dig a cable trench around 400 - 800 mm wide and
upto 500 mm deep suitable cable trench at the left hand side of the sensor locations to route cables from
all the sensors at that elevation along the offset trenches, as shown in figure 4-5 and figure 4-6. Remove
any sharp rocks to prevent the cable from accidentally getting damaged. Properly clean and level the
trench with 50 mm (as specified by project) of well graded clean sand (2-4 mm) at the bottom of the
trench along the path. Depth and width depends upon number of cables trench has to carry. Based upon
cable layout design, the trench runs into abutment and then along abutment to downstream side or
directly to downstream side towards observation room. These cable trenches carry the individual cables
from piezometers to observation room.
Before laying cables, trench should be properly cleaned and levelled with 30 mm of fine sand at bottom
of trench along the path. Any sharp rocks should be removed to prevent cable from accidentally getting
damaged. Centre distance between successive cables should be kept at around 25 to 40 mm. A distance
of 100 mm must be left free from sides of trench. To take care of any increase in length due to
settlements cable should be zig zagged by providing a uniformly distributed slack of around 0.5 m in a 15
m length of each cable
NOTE: In embankments, sensor and cables may be embedded in a protective covering of sand or
selected fine embankment material. Typical installation might, for example comprise
positioning of a series of sensors and cables on a prepared layer consisting of not less than
100 mm of compacted selected fine material. In order to establish an acceptable grade
without undue interference with construction operations, prepared layer may be located
either in a trench or on an exposed ramp. In rockfill dams with earth fill cores, for example, it
is frequently convenient to install sensors and cables in trenches in core and fine filter zones
and in ramps in coarse filter and compacted rock fill shell zones. In an earth embankment it
is convenient to install in a trench. By doing so, adequate degrees of compaction of backfill
can be more easily obtained without damage to sensor or cable trench. As sensors and
cables are covered and compacted, repeated readings should be taken to ensure that they
continue to function properly.
NOTE: In instances in which more than one layer of cables must be placed in a given array, the
cables should be separated from each other by a vertical interval of not less than 100 mm of
hand compacted sand or selected fine embankment material.
NOTE: In case of an earth dam, before packing the trench with back fill, a plug approximately 100
mm thick, made of a mixture by volume of 5:95 bentonite and backfill exhibiting a free swell
factor of approximately 600% should be
placed in trench at intervals of
Sensors
approximately 10 m. Cable
Core
Filter zone
NOTE: In embankment dams vertical routing of
signal cables from sensors should be
avoided as far as possible. However, if
vertical run of cables is unavoidable, they
should be routed vertically only through the
filter. Figure 4.7 schematically shows Fig. 4.7 - Section of Dam
preferred method for vertical routing of
instrumentation cables through the filter.
Page | 19
4.5.3 Concrete dam – recommended piezometer model EPP-30V

As access galleries are available in concrete dams, the cable from the sensors is first routed to the
gallery. These cables may be terminated in junction boxes inside the gallery. The data from the various
sensors can then be taken or logged from the junction boxes with the help of a readout unit or data
logger. Alternatively, if required, the signals from the junction boxes may be carried through multi core
cables to any observation room outside the dam structure.
In a concrete dam, a number of piezometers along with other sensors are installed at selected elevations
at different cross sections, as illustrated in figure 4-8 below For example, three piezometers, five strain
rosettes, five no stress strain containers, five stress meters and two temperature meters are installed at
elevation 132 m. Cables from these sensors have to be taken to junction boxes to be mounted inside one
of the cross galleries. The gallery may be above or below the elevation at which the sensors are to be
installed. As a general practice, all the cables from sensors at any particular elevation are routed to a
vertical shaft on the upstream side of the dam. The cables are then lowered or lifted through the vertical
shaft to the gallery.
At any cross section, the filling of the dam is allowed to continue to an elevation of around 25 cm higher
than where the sensors are to be mounted, leaving 0.5 m x 0.5 m x 25 cm deep trenches at the positions
where the sensors are to be placed. Larger trench may be left in case the piezometer is to be installed
along with other sensors, especially the strain rosette and the no stress strain meter that require more
space. In case the latter are to be mounted along with the piezometer, refer to User’s manual WI-
6002.16.
EL-372
Plumb line
20 m
Stress
Strain
EL-352 No stress strain
Temperature
EL-342
Uplift
Pore
EL-332
Joint
Borehole extensometer
EL-322
Seepage measurement
EL-315
EL-310
Figure 4-8
The cable from the sensors should be routed through a carefully marked channel trench ending into the
vertical shaft and running parallel to the line of the sensors. The depth and width of the channel trench
depends upon the number of cables the trench has to carry. In case all the cables at an elevation fit in
one row, the depth of the channel can be around 10 cm. If more than one row is required to lay all the
cables, the depth should be increased by 10 cm per row. Before laying the cables, the channel trench
Page | 20
should be properly cleaned and levelled. Any sharp rocks or objects should be removed to prevent the
cable from accidentally getting damaged. The centre distance between successive cables should be kept
at a distance of around 25 mm with the help of the wooden cable spacer and cable rake provided. To
take care of settlement effects and temperature effects during concrete setting, the cable should be zig
zagged by providing a uniformly distributed slack of around 0.5 m in a 15 m length of each cable. After
laying the cable in any row, it should be covered with concrete by a hand shovel to a depth of around 10
cm and allowed to set. This is necessary to prevent any accidental damage to the cables.
To make doubly sure that some of the precautions in the laying of cable are definitely followed, they are
being repeated in the following few paragraphs.
Precaution must be taken that the cables are properly tagged, onward from the point from which they
come out of the dam into the vertical shaft. With the best possible precautions, mistakes may still occur.
Tags may get lost due to the cable getting accidentally cut. Encardio-rite uses the convention that looking
from the vertical shaft end towards the sensor, the cable from the most distant sensor is always at the left
hand side and the offset trenches are to the right of the channel trench. In that order, the cable from the
closest sensor is at the extreme right.
CAUTION: All cables should be properly identified by tagging them every 5 m or closer, onwards from
the point from which they come out of the dam body into the vertical shaft. The tags should
be of a non-corrosive material like stainless steel or plastics.
CAUTION: To take care of any of any settlement and/or contraction of concrete due to temperature
effects, the cable should be zigzagged by providing a uniformly distributed slack of around
0.5 m in a 15 m length of each cable.
It is good practice to grout the cable in the vertical shaft at 2 m distances such that the left to right
alignment is maintained. As an Encardio-rite convention, the cable from the most distant sensor at any
elevation should be connected to the extreme left socket in the junction box. Succeeding cables from the
sensors are connected progressively towards the right in the junction box.
4.6 Installation of model EPP-50V push-in piezometer in soft soil

4.6.1 For installation in soft soils the Encardio rite model EPP-50V push-in piezometer is
recommended. It does not require any elaborate grout sealing below and above the piezometer
as required for other piezometer models. The EPP-50V has a hard conical tip that allows the
piezometer to be pushed in to the required depth from the ground surface or the base of a drilled
borehole.
4.6.2 The EPP-50V has a conical tip at one end and drill rod threads at the other end. It is available in
two different thread options, one with EW thread for use with EW drill rods and the other with M
28x1.5 thread for use with cone penetrometer rods. Just above the conical tip are three stainless
steel disc filters arranged around the cylindrical housing of the piezometer which make intimate
contact with the surrounding soil when the piezometer is driven inside soft soil.
4.6.3 The conical tip of the piezometer with the three stainless steel filter discs can be unscrewed from
the EPP-50V body. Before installation the EPP-50V filters need to be deaired or saturated. To
saturate the filters unscrew the conical tip and follow the saturation process as described in
section 4.2. Reassemble the conical tip on the piezometer body under water after saturation.
4.6.4 The EPP-50V can be installed for two different situations, one where the piezometer is
permanently left in place after installation and the other where the piezometer is to be retrieved
after some time.
Page | 21
Piezometer cable
Ground surface
Bore hole Soft soil
EW drill rod
Drill rod coupler

Bore hole depth
Anti rotation fins
Adaptor rod
1.5 m
Push in piezometer
Piezometer tip
Piezometer
location (depth)
Figure 4.9
4.6.5 If the piezometer is to be retrieved after some time it can be directly screwed on to the end of the
hollow drill rod. The piezometer cable should first be routed through the hole in the drill rod
before fixing the piezometer to the drill rod. The drill rod with the piezometer should be pushed
into the soil slowly using a constant pushing force. The drill rod should not be hammer driven or
rotated while pushing in the piezometer as it can damage the piezometer.
4.6.6 To increase the piezometer tip installation depth a series of drill rods can be connected to
increase the overall length of the rods. After the piezometer tip reaches the required depth the
drill rods with the cable inside are left in place till the time the piezometer needs to be retrieved.
NOTE: Care must be taken to ensure the piezometer cable is properly guided through the drill rods
and the piezometer or the piezometer cable is never allowed to rotate inside the drill rods.
Precaution should also be taken to ensure that the drill rod edges do not cut into the cable
sheathing while installing.
4.6.7 While pushing piezometer inside soil keep checking the pressure readings frequently on EDI-54V
read-out. The pressure should not exceed the calibrated range of the piezometer. If necessary,
stop the process for a while to allow the pressure to dissipate.
Page | 22
4.6.8 If the piezometer is to be installed at a greater depth, pushing in the piezometer along the whole
depth may damage the piezometer. A recommended procedure is to make a bore hole using an
auger or casing advanced boring with a diameter larger than 100 mm to a depth of around 1.5
metres less than the final piezometer tip depth. The drill rods with the piezometer will then only
need to be pushed-in in the final 1.5 metres of soil. This ensures that the piezometer tip is
isolated from top and bottom layers and correctly measures the pore pressure at its own depth.
4.6.9 After the piezometer’s purpose is over it can be retrieved by pulling out the drill rods. The
piezometer can then be used at another location.
4.6.10 For installations where the piezometer is to be permanently left in place and only the drill rods
retrieved a special adaptor rod which is a modified drill rod of 1.5 m length and a left hand / right
hand coupler is available. The piezometer is fixed at one end of the adaptor rod and at the other
end with left hand thread a special left hand / right hand threaded coupler is fixed. The adaptor
rod is optionally provided with anti-rotation fins. In practice the adaptor rod is fixed to the drill rods
using the coupler. After the piezometer is installed at its predetermined depth the drill rod (or the
series of drill rods) is rotated clockwise so that the coupler unscrews free of the adaptor rod. The
anti-rotation fins of the adaptor rod prevent it from rotating while unscrewing the drill rods. The
piezometer with the adaptor rod can be left in place while the drill rods with the coupler can be
removed for reuse. In this method one adaptor rod is required for each push-in piezometer. The
same coupler can be reused for different installation.
NOTE: Before fixing the piezometer to the adaptor rod ensure that the piezometer cable is pushed
through the holes of the adaptor rod, coupling and the first drill rod in that sequence. Always
keep the piezometer fixed while rotating the adaptor rod, coupling or the drill rods. If the
piezometer is let to rotate the piezometer cable will get damaged.
NOTE: Great care should be taken while unscrewing the drill rods from the rod adaptor as the
piezometer cable running inside the drill rods do not get damaged due to abrasion from the
drill rod surface or edges.
Page | 23
5 TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT
5.1 Thermistor - temperature resistance correlation

Thermistor type Dale 1C3001-B3
Temperature resistance equation

T = 1/[A + B(LnR) + C(LnR)3] - 273.2 oC
where T = temperature in oC
LnR = Natural log of thermistor resistance
A = 1.4051 x 10-3
B = 2.369 x 10-4
C = 1.019 x 10-7
O hm T emp. o C Ohm T emp. o C Ohm T emp. o C

20 1 .1k - 50 16 . 60 K - 10 24 1 7 + 30
18 7 .3 K - 49 15 . 72 K -9 23 1 7 31
17 4 .5 K - 48 14 . 90 K -8 22 2 1 32
16 2 .7 K - 47 14 . 12 K -7 21 3 0 33
15 1 .7 K - 46 13 . 39k -6 20 4 2 34
14 1 .6 K - 45 12 . 70 K -5 19 5 9 35
13 2 .2 K - 44 12 . 05 K -4 18 8 0 36
12 3 .5 K - 43 11 . 44 K -3 18 0 5 37
11 5 .4 K - 12 10 . 86 K -2 17 3 3 38
10 7 .9 K - 41 10 . 31 K -1 16 6 4 39
10 1 .0 K - 40 97 9 6 0 15 9 8 40
94 . 48 K - 39 93 1 0 +1 15 3 5 41
88 . 46 K - 38 88 5 1 2 14 7 5 42
82 . 87 K - 37 84 1 7 3 14 1 8 43
77 . 66 K - 36 80 0 6 4 13 6 3 44
72 . 81 K - 35 76 1 8 5 13 1 0 45
68 . 30 K - 34 72 5 2 6 12 6 0 46
64 . 09 K - 33 69 0 5 7 12 1 2 47
60 . 17 K - 32 65 7 6 8 11 6 7 48
56 . 51 K - 31 62 6 5 9 11 2 3 49
53 . 10 K - 30 59 7 1 10 10 8 1 50
49 . 91 K - 29 56 9 2 11 10 4 0 51
46 . 94 K - 28 54 2 7 12 10 0 2 52
44 . 16 K - 27 51 7 7 13 96 5 .0 53
41 . 56k - 26 49 3 9 14 92 9 .6 54
39 . 13 K - 25 47 1 4 15 89 5 .8 55
36 . 86 K - 24 45 0 0 16 86 3 .3 56
34 . 73 K - 23 42 9 7 17 83 2 .2 57
32 . 74 K - 22 41 0 5 18 80 2 .3 58
30 . 87 K - 21 39 2 2 19 77 3 .7 59
29 . 13 K - 20 37 4 8 20 74 6 .3 60
27 . 49 K - 19 35 8 3 21 71 9 .9 61
25 . 95 K - 18 34 2 6 22 69 4 .7 62
24 . 51 K - 17 32 7 7 23 67 0 .4 63
23 . 16 K - 16 31 3 5 24 64 7 .1 64
21 . 89 K - 15 30 0 0 25 62 4 .7 65
20 . 70 K - 14 28 7 2 26 60 3 .3 66
19 . 58 K - 13 27 5 0 27 58 2 .6 67
18 . 52 K - 12 26 3 3 28 56 2 .8 68
17 . 53 K - 11 25 2 3 29 52 5 .4 70
Page | 24
5.2 Measurement of temperature

Thermistor for temperature measurement is integral with all Encardio-rite piezometers. The thermistor
gives a varying resistance output related to the temperature (see § 5.1). The thermistor is connected
between the green and white leads. The resistance can be measured with an Ohmmeter. The cable
resistance may be subtracted from the Ohmmeter reading to get the correct thermistor resistance.
However the effect is small and is usually ignored.
The Encardio-rite model EDI-54V readout unit gives the temperature from thermistor reading directly in
oC.
5.3 Temperature correction

Each vibrating wire sensor is individually compensated for temperature zero drift. It is therefore relatively
insensitive to temperature fluctuation and often the effect of temperature can be ignored. However in
case a ‘pressure - temperature variation’ correlation is required, the correction for the temperature effect
on the sensor can be made by making use of the temperature zero shift factor (K) provided in the Test
certificate (see § 2.6 and § 2.7) and substituting it in the following equation:
P c o r r e c t i o n = (current temperature - initial temperature) x K

The temperature correction value is added to the pressure value read from the EDI-54V readout.
Encardio-rite gives the value of the factor ‘K’ by actually determining the zero shift by putting the
complete cell in the thermal chamber.
Page | 25
6 OTHER CONSIDERATIONS/TROUBLE SHOOTING
6.1 Barometric pressure correction

The pressure transducer used in the Encardio-rite vibrating wire piezometer is evacuated and
hermetically sealed and will respond to barometric pressure fluctuation. In fact all piezometers will
respond to barometric pressure fluctuations unless they are manufactured in the gage pressure version
and a capillary tube is provided in the cable that opens into the atmosphere.
Since the magnitude of barometric pressure fluctuations is of the order of +/- 0.3 kPa, correction is
generally not required for sensors with a range of 0.2 MPa and higher. If a correction for these
fluctuations is required then it is necessary to record the barometric pressure at the time of taking the
reading. The initial barometric pressure corresponding to the zero reading is to be recorded at the time of
installation (see § 2.5). The correction can be made by using the following equation:
P c o r r e c t i o n = (initial barometric pressure - current barometric pressure)
The pressure correction value is added to the pressure value read from the EDI-54V readout.
6.2 Polynomial linearity correction

Refer to § 2.6 - test certificate for EPP-30V and to § 2.7 – test certificate for EPP-40V/50V. Polynomial
constants ‘A’, ‘B’, and ‘C’ in test certificate are determined at ambient barometric pressure and
temperature at time of calibration. The value of constant ‘C’ given in test certificate would have been
different had barometric pressure or temperature been different at time of calibration.
For example in § 2.6 - test certificate for EPP-30V, the initial average reading in digits in test certificate at
time of calibration is 6442. This initial zero reading at time of installation would have slightly changed due
to difference in barometric pressure/temperature or due to rough handling during transportation or
installation. For example, let initial zero reading (§ 2.6) at time of installation be 6462 digits. The constant
‘C’ will then have to be reworked as follows by setting the pore pressure ‘P’ at zero in the polynomial
equation:
P = A (R1)² + B(R1) + C MPa
or 0 = -1.4257E-09 x (6462)2 - 2.2094E-04 x (6462) + C
or C = 1.4277
Instead of C = 1.4826 given in the test certificate, use the value C = 1.4277 to get the pressure reading
with polynomial linearity correction.
6.3 Use of piezometers in coastal areas

Use of piezometers in coastal areas has increased in the last few years. Some of the applications to
which they are being put in use are as follows:
 Reclamation of land in high population density areas in coastal regions for building highways,
multi-storied structures, port trusts or recreational facilities. This requires extensive
instrumentation for measurement of horizontal displacement, vertical movement and pore
pressure.
 At Vancouver, a highway along the coast is extended towards the seashore to increase the
number of transportation lanes. Closer to home, reclamation of land is always going on at
Mumbai.
 In many coastal areas, and occasionally inland, there is a danger that over pumping water from
boreholes will cause saline water to replace the fresh water in the aquifer. Once this saline
intrusion has occurred it is extremely difficult to remove the problem. Frequently, boreholes have
Page | 26
to be abandoned and other water sources sought, often at high cost. Aquifers can be complex
and include several saline horizons at different depths. Such horizons can be detected by
multilevel piezometers and water sampling systems together with conductivity/flow logging in
boreholes.
Saline intrusion into the coastal aquifer of Kerala is a serious and increasing problem in this
relatively densely populated rural area with many wells used for irrigation and domestic supply. A
program of sampling has been established using multilevel piezometers to determine the
characteristics of the groundwater regime that is strongly influenced by the local monsoon
climate. A saline intrusion computer model helps in understanding the seasonal cyclic movement
of the saline/freshwater interface and provides recommendations for safe abstraction.
Excessive pumping over many years caused serious draw downs in the alluvial coastal aquifer of
the Valle de San Quintin at Baja California, Mexico. This resulted in the intrusion of seawater in
this arid area. Alternative supplies are not available and the livelihood of the 50,000 local
population is being put at risk. Pore pressure measurement and borehole conductivity/flow
logging was undertaken to determine the extent of intrusion and then a computer model
developed to aid remedial measures.
 In coastal areas, it is necessary to determine and implement a strategy to overcome salinity
problems and to increase community understanding and involvement in finding and implementing
a solution. Monitoring piezometer data and water sampling helps in determining the effect on
salinity of climate, vegetation, and management of groundwater movement. At the
Derriwong/Ootha area of the USA associated with an elevated saline groundwater table, a tree
planting program has been implemented to recharge the area throughout the catchments. Using
farm plans and government agency advice, changes in management and land use practices are
being adopted (i.e. increased perennial pastures). More than 40 salt-tolerant pasture species are
being used to assess suitability for land reclamation and rehabilitation. Over 20,000 seed have
been planted and direct seeding of local tree species is underway.
 New ports are being built and extra capacity is being added to several existing ports. At the
Kandla port in India, construction work on new berths for docking of cargo vessels is normally
going on. These areas need a lot of instrumentation. At the Kandla port, the proposed material
storage yard (cargo section) behind the eighth berth is 205 m long x 151 m wide. It was
instrumented with 22 piezometers, 8 magnetic extensometer devices for settlement, 29 platform
type settlement gages and inclinometer tubing at 8 locations for measurement of horizontal
displacement. The land behind the eight berth was a normally consolidated area. When used as
a cargo storage facility, the overburden pressure would obviously increase. This area was
therefore consolidated resulting in a settlement of around 1 m in depth.
6.3.1 Saline corrosion

Use of sensors in saline water is one of the most difficult applications from the point of view of corrosion.
Great care should be taken for corrosion protection in case a piezometer is used for such applications.
This is a tricky application and precaution must be taken to protect both the body and the diaphragm of
the sensor.
It should be remembered:
 Seawater corrosion or atmospheric corrosion in coastal areas is very different from other
corrosions, like in industrial areas.
 Sensors used in geotechnical applications are generally of stainless steel construction. Stainless
steels are normally passive, but when exposed to corrosive solutions whose oxygenating power
is low, these steels become active. Oxygenating agents must be present and replenished
Page | 27
constantly to maintain passivity. Otherwise localized corrosion frequently results in pitting at the
surface. It should be remembered that in case seawater in the vicinity of the piezometer is
flowing, the pitting would be less than when it is stationary.
 The best material for use in case of seawater is Monel. Stainless steel 316L is also substantially
used. However, this is not always possible in the case of sensors. To attain good linearity and
hysteresis characteristics the diaphragm of the piezometer has to be a spring element. To
achieve this, hardened AISI 420 or 17-4 PH is generally used.
 In seawater, galvanic couples with different types of stainless steels may result in severe
corrosion of the metals forming the couple. It is preferable to use only those metals that are
closely related in electrode potential. Galvanic couples may form at the intersection of the AISI
304 cable joint housing and the AISI 420 body of the piezometer.
 Welding of unstabilized grades of stainless steel can lead to localized attack in seawater by
upsetting the condition of heat treatment necessary for good corrosion resistance. Welding can
also result in localized depletion of nickel and chromium, thus enhancing the effect of sea water
corrosion
6.3.2 Precautions to be taken

To substantially minimize the effect of saline corrosion, it is recommended to protect the outside body
and the diaphragm of the piezometer from corrosion. The literature has a number of suggestions on how
to do this.
 The stainless steel diaphragm should be protected with a thin layer (around 1 mm) of GE
Silicones compound TSE 399. This will prevent pitting of the surface, the piezometer being used
in still seawater. No solvent (like acetone) should be used to clean this area as it may affect the
adhesion of the silicone rubber to the diaphragm.
 The weld area may also be protected with GE Silicones compound TSE 399 enclosed in a PVC
retainer housing. In any case, wrap the other surface areas of the stainless steel body of the
piezometer with a saline resistant tape like "33 super PVC 3M tape". Particular care should be
taken to cover the joint between the piezometer and the cable joint housing.
An easier method is to use a heat shrinkable tube with an integral adhesive inner lining, to
encapsulate and protect the complete piezometer body including the weld area from the ingress
of seawater.
6.4 Trouble shooting

Piezometer is generally installed in a borehole or buried inside a structure. Once installed, the cell is
usually inaccessible and remedial action is limited. Maintenance and trouble shooting is consequently
confined to periodic checks of cable connection and functioning of the readout unit. Refer to the following
list of problems and possible solutions should problems arise. For any additional help, consult factory.
6.4.1 Symptom: piezometer reading unstable

 Check the insulation resistance. The resistance between any lead and the protective armour
should be > 500 m Ohm. If not, cut a meter or so from the end of cable and check again.
 Does the readout work with another piezometer? If not, the readout may have a low battery or be
malfunctioning. Consult the manual of the readout unit for charging or trouble shooting
instructions.
 Use another readout unit to take the reading.
Page | 28
 Check if there is a source of electrical noise nearby? General sources of electrical noise are
motors, generators, transformers, arc welders and antennas. If so the problem could be reduced
by shielding from the electrical noise.
6.4.2 Symptom: piezometer fails to read

 The cable may be cut or crushed? Check the nominal resistance between the two
gage leads using an Ohmmeter. It should be within 120 - 150 Ohm. The correct
value is given in the piezometer test certificate. For the model CS 0401 cable, the
resistance is 26 Ohm/km and for the model CS 0406 cable, the resistance is 48
Ohm/km. (multiply by 2 for both leads). In case any other cable is used, make
the necessary addition in the resistance value. If the resistance reads infinite or a
very high value, a cut in the cable is suspected. If the resistance reads very low
(<100 Ohm), a short in the cable is likely.
 Does the readout work with another piezometer? If not, the readout may have a
low battery or be malfunctioning. Consult the manual of the readout unit for
charging or trouble shooting instructions.
 Use another readout unit to take the reading.
Page | 29
7 APPENDIX-B: SAMPLE OBSERVATION SHEETS
7.1 Vibrating wire piezometer sample observation sheet and chart
Customer's name:
PO no.:
Project name:
Owners:
The Engineer:
Site name:
Instrument type: Vibrating wire piezometer
Instrument model no. EPP-30V
Instrument tag no.: MZ3-PZ2
Reading Date Time Date/Time Pore- Temp, deg

no. water C
pressure
(kPa)
1 (initial) 01-Nov-09 14:00 01/11/2009 14:00 3.0 33.0
2 02-Nov-09 16:10 02/11/2009 16:10 2.0 33.0
3 03-Nov-09 15:10 03/11/2009 15:10 5.0 33.0
4 04-Nov-09 16:00 04/11/2009 16:00 6.0 33.0
5 05-Nov-09 16:12 05/11/2009 16:12 6.2 33.0
6 07-Nov-09 14:12 07/11/2009 14:12 5.8 33.0
7 08-Nov-09 14:12 08/11/2009 14:12 3.0 33.0
8 09-Nov-09 13:12 09/11/2009 13:12 3.0 33.0
9 10-Nov-09 13:01 10/11/2009 13:01 3.0 33.0
10 11-Nov-09 18:00 11/11/2009 18:00 3.0 33.0
Page | 30
8 WARRANTY
The Company warrants its products against defective workmanship or material for a period of 12 months
from date of receipt or 13 months from date of dispatch from the factory, whichever is earlier. The
warranty is however void in case the product shows evidence of being tampered with or shows evidence
of damage due to excessive heat, moisture, corrosion, vibration or improper use, application,
specifications or other operating conditions not in control of Encardio-Rite. The warranty is limited to free
repair/replacement of the product/parts with manufacturing defects only and does not cover
products/parts worn out due to normal wear and tear or damaged due to mishandling or improper
installation. This includes fuses and batteries
If any of the products does not function or functions improperly, it should be returned freight prepaid to
the factory for our evaluation. In case it is found defective, it will be replaced/repaired free of cost.
A range of technical/scientific instruments are manufactured by Encardio-rite, the improper use of which
is potentially dangerous. Only qualified personnel should install or use the instruments. Installation
personnel must have a background of good installation practices as intricacies involved in installation are
such that even if a single essential but apparently minor requirement is ignored or overlooked, the most
reliable of instruments will be rendered useless.
The warranty is limited to as stated herein. Encardio-rite is not responsible for any consequential
damages experienced by the user. There are no other warranties, expressed or implied, including but not
limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and of fitness for a particular purpose. Encardio-rite is
not responsible for any direct, indirect, incidental, special or consequential damage or loss caused to
other equipment or people that the purchaser may experience as a result of installation or use of the
product. The buyer’s sole remedy for any breach of this agreement or any warranty by Encardio-rite shall
not exceed the purchase price paid by the purchaser to Encardio-rite. Under no circumstances will
Encardio-rite reimburse the claimant for loss incurred in removing and/or reinstalling equipment.
A lot of effort has been made and precaution for accuracy taken in preparing instruction manuals and
software. However best of instruction manuals and software cannot provide for each and every condition
in field that may affect performance of the product. Encardio-rite neither assumes responsibility for any
omissions or errors that may appear nor assumes liability for any damage or loss that results from use of
Encardio-rite products in accordance with the information contained in the manuals or software.
Products described in Encardio-rite’s catalogs are subject to modification and improvement as dictated
by subsequent developments. Encardio-rite reserves the right to modify, change or improve products, to
discontinue them or to add new ones without notice.
Page | 31
USERS’ MANUAL
UPLIFT PRESSURE MEASURING SYSTEM

MODEL EPU-20V/EPU-20G
Doc # WI 6002.14 R01 | Jan 2012

Users’ Manual EPU-20V/EPU-20G Uplift Pressure Measuring System
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Typical installation in a concrete dam 1
1.2 Uplift pressure measurement methods 1
2.1.1 Mechanical method 1
2.1.2 Electronic method 2
2 UPLIFT PRESSURE MEASUREMENT 3

2.1 Uplift Pressure Measurement Using Mechanical System 3
2.1.1 Tools & accessories 3
2.2 Uplift Pressure Measurement Using Electronic System 4
2.1.2 General system description 4
2.3 Vibrating wire pressure sensor 4
2.1.3 Manufacturing range 5
2.1.4 Operating principle 5
2.1.5 Description 5
2.4 Typical installations 6
2.5 Zero Reading 6
2.6 Taking readings with the model EDI-51V vibrating wire indicator 6
2.7 Tools & accessories required for installation of vw system 7
2.8 Sample test certificate with electronic sensor 9
3 INSTALLATION OF UPLIFT PRESSURE MEASUREMENT SYSTEM 10

3.1 Preparation of the sensor before installation 10
3.2 Installing the uplift pressure meter 11
5 WARRANTY 14
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite uplift pressure measurement is a precision instrumentation system designed to help civil
engineers in the measurement of uplift pressure in the foundation of a concrete dam. It forms an important
part of dam instrumentation. Seepage water from the reservoir area often seeps into the dam foundation
and the downstream side. The study of uplift pressure has the following main purposes:
 To determine the magnitude of any hydraulic pressure that may be present at the base of a dam due
to percolation or seepage of water along underlying foundation seams or joint systems after the
reservoir is filled. To release this pressure, if necessary.
 To monitor seepage water from the reservoir area into the dam foundation in view of the safety of the
dam structure.
 To monitor the effectiveness of the drainage system below the dam.
 To study the effectiveness of foundation grouting.

1.1 Typical installation in a concrete dam
Figure 1.1
1.2 Uplift pressure measurement methods
The uplift pressure is measured mechanically by using a Bourdon pressure gage or electronically by using
a vibrating wire uplift pressure meter and a digital vibrating wire indicator. The uplift pressure measuring
device consists of a perforated/non-perforated pipe of 50mm to 63mm φ of adequate strength. The pipe is
inserted in a drilled hole in the foundation from the instrumentation gallery to a depth upto the required
location. The other end of the pipe is brought into the gallery where it is connected to an uplift pressure
meter or a Bourdon pressure gage.
2.1.1 Mechanical method
The mechanical uplift pressure meter incorporating the Bourdon type pressure gage can be conveniently
fixed to the uplift pressure pipe in the gallery. The installation of the mechanical system is very easy and
requires no cable jointing and special orientation.
Page | 1
2.1.2 Electronic method

The development of vibrating wire sensor introduced a reliable and fast method of taking uplift pressure
readings electrically. This enables remote reading as well as data storing in case the output is connected
to a data acquisition system. The cable is carried from the sensor to the read-out unit or data logger and is
protected against any possible damage during construction. For details of vibrating wire sensors and other
vibrating wire instruments manufactured by Encardio-rite, refer to the consolidated catalogue on home
page of our website www.encardio.com.
The electronic uplift pressure meter is installed with the necessary length of cable jointed with it. Proper
junction boxes are also available to carry the signal to any distant location through multi-core cables. The
mounting is very simple as the uplift pressure meter is surface mounted and does not require to be
embedded.
NOTE: Note contains important information & is set off from regular text to draw users’ attention.
The user’s manual is intended to provide sufficient information for making optimum use of uplift pressure
measurement assembly in your applications. It covers description of the vibrating wire uplift pressure meter
and its accessories, procedure for installation & maintenance of the sensor, method of taking observations
and recording data. The description of the mechanical system is also covered.

This manual is divided into a number of sections, each section containing a specific type of information.
The list given below tells you where to look for in this manual if you need some specific information. It is
however recommended that you read the manual from the beginning to the end to get a thorough grasp of
the subject. You will find lots of unexpected information in the sections you feel you may skip.
For measurement by Bourdon gage: See § 2.1 ‘Uplift Pressure Measurement Using Mechanical System’
For measurement by electronic sensor: See § 2.2 ‘Uplift Pressure Measurement Using Electronic System”
For understanding principle of vibrating wire uplift pressure meter: See § 2.3.2. ‘Operating principle’.
For installation of uplift pressure measurement system: See § 3 ‘Installation of uplift measurement system’.
Page | 2
2 UPLIFT PRESSURE MEASUREMENT
The uplift pressure meter is suitable for monitoring uplift pressure of water in the foundation of the dam and
the stability of foundations of embankments in dams, tunnels and other underground works. A system of
piping is installed at several locations in the dam gallery/instrumentation gallery usually in the first lift just
above the contact between the foundation rock and the base of the dam. The pipes extend into one or
more of the lower galleries in the dam. Alternatively, holes may be drilled from the gallery down to the level
up to which the drain pipes have to be installed. Drain pipes extend below the dam, both on the upstream
and downstream side. The other end of the pipe is brought into the instrumentation gallery from the
foundation rock where the mechanical uplift pressure meter or vibrating wire uplift pressure meter is fitted
on this pipe through accessories.
The uplift pressure meter helps to accurately measure the uplift pressure at various locations in the
foundation of the dam. Sharp increase in uplift pressure is interpreted as failure of the foundation grouting
or improper drainage system. Being surface mounted, uplift pressure meter is easy to install and requires
no special orientation.
2.1 Uplift Pressure Measurement Using Mechanical System
Model EPU-20G Bourdon gage type mechanical uplift pressure system is assembled and installed on the
available drain pipes in the dam gallery. A typical layout for the Bourdon gage uplift pressure meter with its
accessories is shown in figure 2.1. The installation is simple and does not need a detailed description.
2.1.1 Tools & accessories
Following tools and accessories are required for installation of the model EPU-20G mechanical uplift
pressure meter:
2.1.1.1 Spanner 23/25 and 30/32
2.1.1.2 Pipe wrench (30 cm) 1/2" Elbow

Gage adaptor
2.1.1.3 Teflon tape (10 mm)
2.1.1.4 Thread sealant (Loctite 577)

1/2" Nipple
2.1.1.5 Acetone (commercial)
2.1.1.6 Hacksaw with 300 mm blade
2.1.1.7 Pliers 160 mm Bourdon

pressure gage
2.1.1.8 Cloth for cleaning (lintless)
1/2" T
Sl. Description Qty. 1/2" Ball valve
1 Reducer (2”x1” BSP) 1 Reducer (1" - 1/2" BSP.)

2 1” Threaded GI pipe (350 mm) 1
3 Reducer (1”x ½” BSP) 1
4 ½” T ( tee) 1 1" Threaded GI pipe
5 ½” Male nipple (50 mm) 2
6 ½” Balll valve-1 MPa 1
8 ½” Elbow 2 Reducer (2" - 1" BSP.)
10 Gage adapter with Teflon 1 2" BSP. Thread
washer
11 Bourdon pressure gage 1 Figure 2.1
Page | 3
2.2 Uplift Pressure Measurement Using Electronic System

Model EPU-20V vibrating wire type electronic uplift pressure system is assembled and installed on the
available drain pipes in the dam
instrumentation gallery.
2.1.2 General system description

The electronic uplift pressure measuring Cable gland
system consists of a vibrating wire uplift
pressure meter and a perforated/non-
perforated pipe of 50mm to 63mm φ with
adequate strength and connecting Cable holder
accessories. The uplift pressure meter has Sensor cable
a ½” BSP adopter for pipe connection. A
typical layout for the vibrating wire uplift
pressure meter with its connecting
accessories is shown in figure 3.1.
NOTE: The ½” Tee (sl. # 4) may be

repositioned if it is convenient
to install the sensor
horizontally. V W pressure sensor
2.3 Vibrating wire pressure sensor
The heart of the electronic measurement is Adaptor

the Encardio-rite model EPU-20V vibrating
wire pressure sensor. The Encardio-rite 1/2" Union
vibrating wire sensor is the electrical sensor
of choice as its frequency output is immune
to external noise & the output signal can be
1/2" Nipple
transmitted to long distances. It is able to
tolerate wet wiring common in geo-technical
applications.
Sl. Description Qty. 1/2" T
1 Reducer (2”x1” BSP) 1

2 1” Threaded GI pipe (350 1
1/2" Ball valve
mm)
3 Reducer (1”x ½” BSP) 1
Reducer (1" - 1/2" BSP.)
4 ½” Tee 1
6 ½” Male nipple (150 mm) 1 1" Threaded GI pipe
7 ½” Ball valve-1 MPa 1
8 ½” Union 1
9 VW pressure sensor 1
10 Adaptor 1
Reducer (2" - 1" BSP.)
11 Cable gland NG 16 1
12 Cable joint holder/splicing 1
2" BSP. Thread
kit
Figure 3.1
Page | 4
2.1.3 Manufacturing range

A pressure sensor of suitable range is fitted
through a ½” BSP adopter to the uplift pressure
pipe as shown in the adjoining figure. The height
from the bottom of the uplift pipe to where the
sensor is installed/mounted, should be added to
the reading of the sensor to get the correct
pressure at the bottom of the uplift pipe. The
sensor is available in standard ranges of 0.2,
0.35, 0.5, 1.0 MPa.
2.1.4 Operating principle

The vibrating wire pressure sensor basically consists of a magnetic, high tensile strength stretched wire,
one end of which is anchored and the other end fixed to a diaphragm which deflects in some proportion to
the applied pressure. Any change in uplift pressure, deflects the diaphragm proportionally and this in turn
affects the tension in the stretched wire. Thus any change in uplift pressure, directly affects the tension in
the wire.
f = [σg/ρ]1/2/ 2l Hz
L = length of wire
The resonant frequency at which the wire vibrates, induces an alternating current in the coil magnet. The
pressure is proportional to the square of the frequency and the Encardio-rite model EDI-51V readout logger
is able to display this directly in engineering units.
Summarizing, any variation in uplift pressure causes the diaphragm to deflect. This changes the tension in
the wire thus affecting the frequency of vibration. Uplift pressure is proportional to the square of the
frequency and the read out unit is able to display this directly in engineering units.
2.1.5 Description
The uplift pressure meter is manufactured in various capacities. Each sensor is provided with a thermistor
for making correction due to temperature induced frequency changes and the correlating data for this is
provided in the test report (see § 2.8). Thermistor may also be used to monitor the temperature.
A tri-polar plasma surge arrestor inside the sensor housing protects the vibrating wire pluck and read coils
from electrical transients such as may be induced by direct or indirect lightning strikes.
2.3.3.1 Stainless steel body
The vibrating wire and coil magnet assembly is enclosed in a stainless steel body (figure 3.2) which is
electron beam welded to the diaphragm. This results in a vacuum of around 1/1000 Torr inside the sensor
resulting in it becoming immune to effect of any ingress of water and other corrosive materials that may be
present in the water.
Page | 5
As the uplift pressure meter is of stainless steel construction, it is not affected by normal chemical corrosion
at locations in which it is used. Once properly installed, it is almost maintenance free.
4-core cable
Adaptor Pressure sensor Cable housing Cable gland
Figure 3.2
2.3.3.2 Adopter
A ½” BSP adopter is provided for the pipe connection. The water oozing through internal pores or seams
in rock formations of dam foundations, mass concrete of structures, foundation soil of structures, reclaimed
land soil etc. percolates upward through the pipe to actuate the diaphragm.
2.3.3.3 Cable connection:
Normally, the uplift pressure sensor is supplied without any cable attached to it. Cable jointing with required
length of appropriate cable can be easily done at site. However, if specifically requested, uplift pressure
sensors are supplied with requisite length of cable attached.
welded to the stainless steel body of the uplift pressure meter. The two pins marked red and black are
connected to the coil magnet. The other two pins are free and may be used in case a thermistor is required
for measurement of temperature. A cable joint housing and cable gland is provided for the cable
connection. For cable jointing, refer to Users Manual 6002.11.
2.4 Typical installations
Typical installation method is described in section 5. Installation of model EPU-20V/EPU-20G is shown in

figure 2.1 & 3.1.
2.5 Zero Reading
In any Encardio-rite vibrating wire sensor, tension in wire is set such that at no pressure on the diaphragm,
the wire vibrates at an initial frequency as specified in the test certificate. This means that the pressure
sensor has an initial frequency reading with no pressure exerted on its diaphragm. It is therefore necessary
that an initial zero reading be accurately determined for each uplift sensor, as this reading will be used for
subsequent data reduction. Generally, the initial reading prior to installation with no pressure applied is
considered.
2.6 Taking readings with the model EDI-51V vibrating wire indicator
The model EDI-51V vibrating wire indicator is a microprocessor based readout unit for use with Encardio-
rite’s range of vibrating wire transducers. It can display the measured frequency in terms of time period,
frequency, frequency squared or the value of the measured parameter directly in proper engineering units.
The EDI-51V indicator can store calibration coefficients of up to 500 vibrating wire transducers so that the
value of the measured parameter from these transducers can be shown directly in proper engineering
units.
Page | 6
The indicator has an internal non-volatile memory with sufficient capacity to store about 4,500 readings
from any of the 500 programmed transducers in any combination. 4,500 sets of readings can be stored
either from any one transducer or 9 sets stored from all 500 transducers. Each reading is stamped with
date and time of taking measurement.
Calibration coefficients are given in the individual ‘Test Certificate’ provided with each transducer. Refer
to model EDI-51V instruction manual WI-6002.26 for entering the transducer calibration coefficients. The
gage factor given in the test certificate and the zero reading in frequency2 (digits) at the time of installation
are used for setting up the transducer coefficients in the readout unit.
The Test certificate also gives factory zero reading in frequency2 for use with transducers provided with
polynomial linearity correction. For polynomial linearity correction, pressure is calculated by following
equation:
P = A(R1)² + B(R1)² + C (MPa)
where P = pressure in engineering unit
R1 = current reading in digits during observation
A, B, C = polynomial constants
The polynomial constants are stored in model EDI-51V memory to give linearity corrected data of the
parameter in engineering units. For more details refer to instruction manual WI-6002.26 of model EDI-51V.
For transducers with a built-in interchangeable thermistor, the model EDI-51V can also display and record
the temperature of the transducer directly in degree Centigrade. Any Encardio-rite vibrating wire sensor
with the exception of the temperature sensor has a thermistor incorporated in it for temperature
measurement, unless not required specifically by the customer.
The stored readings can either be uploaded to a host computer using a serial interface or can be printed
out on any text printer equipped with a RS-232C serial communications interface. The set-up information
(calibration coefficients) for all the channels can also be printed out for verification.
The readout indicator is powered by an internal 6 V rechargeable sealed maintenance free battery. A fully
charged new battery provides nearly 60 hours of operation on a single charge. A separate battery charger
is provided with the EDI-51V indicator to charge the internal battery from 230 V AC mains.
The EDI- 51V indicator is housed in a splash proof resin moulded enclosure with weatherproof connectors
for making connections to the vibrating wire transducer and the battery charger.
2.7 Tools & accessories required for installation of vw system
The following tools and accessories are required for proper cable jointing and installation of the vibrating
wire uplift pressure meter (also refer user’s manual on cable jointing - 6002.11):
2.7.1 Soldering iron 25 watt

2.7.2 Rosin 63/37 solder wire RF-3C, 30 swg.
2.7.3 Thread sealant (Loctite 577 or equivalent)
2.7.4 Cable jointing compound (MS 853 and hardener MSH 283 - Mahindra Engineering & Chemical
Products Ltd.) or equivalent. For alternatives, refer to note on page 3-3 of Encardio-rite user’s
manual “cable jointing of sensors” 6002.11)
2.7.5 Acetone (commercial)
2.7.6 Spanner 23/25 and 30/ and Pliers 160 mm
2.7.7 Cable joint housing (refer figure 3.2)
2.7.8 Hacksaw with 300 mm blade
2.7.9 Cable Cutter
2.7.10 Surgical blade with holder
2.7.11 Wire Stripper
2.7.12 Pouring funnel.
Page | 7
2.7.13 Stainless steel rod 5 mm dia., 150 mm length and Spatula

2.7.14 Rotary tin cutter
2.7.15 Fixture for jointing upto six uplift pressure meters (refer figure 4.1)
2.7.16 Tooth brush
2.7.17 Cloth for cleaning (lint less)
2.7.18 Digital multimeter
2.7.19 Portable digital indicator (EDI-51V)
2.7.20 Pipe wrench (30 cm)
Figure 4.1
NOTE: A simple wooden fixture as shown may be fabricated at site for faster cable jointing. It is also
available from Encardio-rite.
Page | 8
2.8 Sample test certificate with electronic sensor
TEST CERTIFICATE
DWT Traceable to standard no. : J082301 T8F 281 TC
Customer :
P.O.No. :
Instrument : VW sensor for uplift pressure meter Date : 16.06.2010
Serial number : xxxxx Temperature : 35°C
Capacity : 0.5 MPa Atm. Pressure: 0.099 MPa
Input Observed value Average End Point Poly

pressure Up1 Down Up2 Fit Fit
(MPa) (Digit) (Digit) (Digit) (Digit) (MPa) (MPa)
0.000 6275.8 6276.0 6276.0 6275.9 0.000 0.000
0.100 5914.3 5916.0 5913.4 5913.9 0.101 0.100
0.200 5553.2 5556.0 5552.5 5552.8 0.201 0.200
0.300 5193.6 5196.6 5193.0 5193.3 0.302 0.300
0.400 4836.4 4838.9 4836.0 4836.2 0.401 0.400
0.500 4481.4 4481.4 4479.9 4480.6 0.500 0.500
Error
(%FS) 0.30 0.02
Digit : f ² /1000
Linear gage factor (G) : 2.7851E-04 MPa/digit
(Use gage factor with minus sign with our read out unit Model : EDI-51V)
Thermal factor(K) : 0.000 MPa/°C
Polynomial constants :
A= 1.8523E-09 B= -2.9839E-04 C= 1.7997E+00
Pressure "P" is calculated with the following equation:
Linear : P(MPa) =G(R0-R1)+K(T1-T0)-(S1-S0)
Polynomial : P(MPa) = A(R1)² + B(R1) + C+K(T1-T0)-(S1-S0)
R1 = current reading & R0 is initial reading in digit.
S1 and T1 = current atmospheric pressure(MPa) and temperature (°C)
Readings at the time of shipment Date 16.6.2010
f : Hz 2505.3
f² : Digit 6276.4
Temperature : °C 35
Thermistor : Ohm 2007
Atm. pressure : MPa 0.099
Coil resistance : Ohm 132
(Zero conditions in the field must be established by recording the reading R0 (digit) along with
temperature T0 (°C)and atmospheric pressure S0 (MPa) at the time of installation. If polynomial
constants are used, determine value of 'C' as per § 2.6 of user's manual.)
Pin configuration/wiring code:
Red & black : Signal Green & white: Thermistor
Checked by Tested by
Page | 9
3 INSTALLATION OF UPLIFT PRESSURE MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
The typical layout for the Bourdon gage uplift pressure meter with its connecting fixtures and vibrating wire
uplift pressure meter is illustrated in figures 2.1 and figure 3.1 respectively. The pipes are fitted with a tee-
section and Bourdon gage or a vibrating wire uplift pressure meter for observing water pressure can be
installed. A shutoff valve is included on one leg of the tee. Although readings may be taken at any time, it
is common practice to leave the shut-off valve open and to close the system the day before readings are
to be taken. Once the readings are taken by any of the methods mechanical or electronic, the valve is to
be reopened. Therefore in addition to the existing uplift pressures, readings taken in this manner indicate
the uplift pressure that may be achieved if one or more systems of drains should become inoperative
through blockage. The shut-off valve may also be kept closed & opened only when the uplift pressure
builds up.
3.1 Preparation of the sensor before installation
Following instructions are for checking the model EPU-20V vibrating wire uplift pressure sensor.
Two of the terminals are marked with red and black colours. These are internally wired to the coil
of the magnet assembly inside the sensor. The other two terminals are utilized for measurement
of temperature using a thermistor. Clean the terminals with a toothbrush.
3.1.2 Check the working of the sensor as follows:

For EPU-20V, the coil resistance measured by a digital multimeter between the red and black pins, should
lie between 120-150 Ohm. Determine resistance at room temperature from thermistor temperature
resistance chart § 4. This resistance should be approximately equal to that between pins marked green
and white. For example, if room temperature is 25oC, the resistance would be 3,000 Ohm.
The resistance between any lead and the protective armour should be > 500 M Ohm.
Connect sensor to Encardio-rite model EDI-51V portable readout unit and switch it on. The display will
show something like:
Freq: 2629.8 Hz
Where the actual figure will vary depending on the sensor connected to the indicator.
For the uplift pressure meter, the initial reading (offset) in frequency should lie between 2,250 - 2,650 Hz.
This initial reading on the portable readout unit should be stable.
Check whether sensor model EPU-20V is responding to changes in pressure. A crude but simple and very
effective method of checking whether the sensor is responding to changes in pressure is as follows:
 Connect sensor to the portable readout unit and remove ½” BSP adapter from uplift pressure sensor
by using a spanner.
 Press diaphragm with thumb very softly and verify that frequency reading on the indicator decreases.
 This change in reading ensures that the deformation produced by the pressure of the thumb on the
diaphragm is transmitted to the vibrating wire sensing element.
 Shift the read-out unit display to the frequency2 mode. Each sensor is provided with a test certificate
giving relationship between applied pressure and output. The zero reading in frequency2 given in the
test certificate should not differ from the current zero reading by more than 100 (x 103) divisions after
due regard to corrections made for difference in temperature, barometric pressure, height above sea
level and actual cell position (whether standing up or lying down).
Page | 10
 For example in test certificate (see § 2.8), the zero reading in frequency2 at time of dispatch is 6276
(x 103 Hz2). In case temperature and the barometric pressure is the same at the place and time of
installation and the sensor is placed lying down, the reading in frequency2 should be between 6176
and 6376 (x 103 Hz2).
3.1.3 Connect the required length of cable to the sensor as suggested in the operating manual on cable
jointing - 6002.11.
WARNING! Take precautions while handling the cable jointing compound and avoid skin contact. The
epoxy components should never come in contact with eyes or other sensitive body parts.
Wash hands very thoroughly with soap immediately after work is over.
3.1.4 Check the working of the sensor again following the procedure described in § 3.1.2.
NOTE: Remember to add the cable resistance when checking the resistance between the leads after
the cable jointing. For the model CS 0401 cable, the resistance is 26 Ohm/km and for the
model CS 0406 cable, the resistance is 48 Ohm/km. (multiply by 2 for both leads). In case
any other cable is used, make the necessary addition in the resistance value. If the resistance
reads infinite or a very high value, a cut in the cable is suspected. If the resistance reads very
low (<100 Ohm), a short in the cable is likely. Replace cable if required. Record the initial
readings including offset, barometric pressure and temperature in the field book.
3.1.5 Cable should be carefully marked with permanent markers every 5m by the use of stainless steel
tags tied by stainless steel wire stamped with appropriate sensor number. Alternatively, plastic
tags are also available. Temporary identification is possible by writing serial number of the sensor,
its code number and the location at which it is installed, on a strip of paper, placing the strip on the
cable and covering it with a transparent plastic cello tape. Permanent identification is necessary
for proper connections in the junction box and to insure correct splicing if cable is cut or broken.
NOTE: A simple code for remembering this is “LL-SR”. Longer (cable) left, shorter (cable) right when
viewing the sensors from the observation room.
CAUTION: All cables should be properly identified by tagging them by tags of non-corrosive material like
stainless steel or plastics every 5 m, onwards from the point from which they come out of the
embankment. Follow the Encardio-rite convention that looking from the end of the
tunnel/trench towards the sensor, the cable from the most distant sensor is always at the left
hand side.
3.2 Installing the uplift pressure meter
The installation procedure comprises of the following steps:

3.2.1 A system of piping is installed at several locations in the dam instrumentation gallery with the top
of the pipe ending in the gallery available for installation of uplift pressure measuring system.
3.2.2 Remove the plug on the pipe coming into the gallery from foundation and check the threads.
3.2.3 In case of electronic sensor record the initial readings including offset, barometric pressure and
temperature in the field book.
3.2.4 In case of Bourdon gage check and record offset, barometric pressure and temperature in the field
book.
3.2.5 Make the connections as illustrated in figure 2.1 for mechanical system or as per figure 3.1 for
electronic system. Use Loctite or the teflon tape to make them water tight.
3.2.6 For electronic system connect the leads of the cable to the respective connector pins in the junction
box, in case the same is provided.
Page | 11
NOTE: For transmitting the signals to the observation room from the junction box, 10 core (5 pairs)
or 20 cores (10 pairs) jelly filled cable, standardized by Encardio-rite may be used.
Page | 12

T = 1/[A + B(LnR) + C(LnR)3] - 273.2 oC
A = 1.4051 x 10-3
B = 2.369 x 10-4
C = 1.019 x 10-7
20 1 .1k - 50 16 . 60 K - 10 24 1 7 + 30
18 7 .3 K - 49 15 . 72 K -9 23 1 7 31
17 4 .5 K - 48 14 . 90 K -8 22 2 1 32
16 2 .7 K - 47 14 . 12 K -7 21 3 0 33
15 1 .7 K - 46 13 . 39k -6 20 4 2 34
14 1 .6 K - 45 12 . 70 K -5 19 5 9 35
13 2 .2 K - 44 12 . 05 K -4 18 8 0 36
12 3 .5 K - 43 11 . 44 K -3 18 0 5 37
11 5 .4 K - 12 10 . 86 K -2 17 3 3 38
10 7 .9 K - 41 10 . 31 K -1 16 6 4 39
10 1 .0 K - 40 97 9 6 0 15 9 8 40
94 . 48 K - 39 93 1 0 +1 15 3 5 41
88 . 46 K - 38 88 5 1 2 14 7 5 42
82 . 87 K - 37 84 1 7 3 14 1 8 43
77 . 66 K - 36 80 0 6 4 13 6 3 44
72 . 81 K - 35 76 1 8 5 13 1 0 45
68 . 30 K - 34 72 5 2 6 12 6 0 46
64 . 09 K - 33 69 0 5 7 12 1 2 47
60 . 17 K - 32 65 7 6 8 11 6 7 48
56 . 51 K - 31 62 6 5 9 11 2 3 49
53 . 10 K - 30 59 7 1 10 10 8 1 50
49 . 91 K - 29 56 9 2 11 10 4 0 51
46 . 94 K - 28 54 2 7 12 10 0 2 52
44 . 16 K - 27 51 7 7 13 96 5 .0 53
41 . 56k - 26 49 3 9 14 92 9 .6 54
39 . 13 K - 25 47 1 4 15 89 5 .8 55
36 . 86 K - 24 45 0 0 16 86 3 .3 56
34 . 73 K - 23 42 9 7 17 83 2 .2 57
32 . 74 K - 22 41 0 5 18 80 2 .3 58
30 . 87 K - 21 39 2 2 19 77 3 .7 59
29 . 13 K - 20 37 4 8 20 74 6 .3 60
27 . 49 K - 19 35 8 3 21 71 9 .9 61
25 . 95 K - 18 34 2 6 22 69 4 .7 62
24 . 51 K - 17 32 7 7 23 67 0 .4 63
23 . 16 K - 16 31 3 5 24 64 7 .1 64
21 . 89 K - 15 30 0 0 25 62 4 .7 65
20 . 70 K - 14 28 7 2 26 60 3 .3 66
19 . 58 K - 13 27 5 0 27 58 2 .6 67
18 . 52 K - 12 26 3 3 28 56 2 .8 68
17 . 53 K - 11 25 2 3 29 52 5 .4 70
Page | 13
5 WARRANTY
from date of receipt or 13 months from date of dispatch from the factory, whichever is earlier. The warranty
is however void in case the product shows evidence of being tampered with or shows evidence of damage
due to excessive heat, moisture, corrosion, vibration or improper use, application, specifications or other
operating conditions not in control of Encardio-rite. The warranty is limited to free repair/replacement of the
product/parts with manufacturing defects only and does not cover products/parts worn out due to normal
wear and tear or damaged due to mishandling or improper installation. This includes fuses and batteries
If any of the products does not function or functions improperly, it should be returned freight prepaid to the
factory for our evaluation. In case it is found defective, it will be replaced/repaired free of cost.
A range of technical/scientific instruments are manufactured by Encardio-rite, the improper use of which is
potentially dangerous. Only qualified personnel should install or use the instruments. Installation personnel
must have a background of good installation practices as intricacies involved in installation are such that
even if a single essential but apparently minor requirement is ignored or overlooked, the most reliable of
instruments will be rendered useless.
The warranty is limited to as stated herein. Encardio-rite is not responsible for any consequential damages
experienced by the user. There are no other warranties, expressed or implied, including but not limited to
the implied warranties of merchantability and of fitness for a particular purpose. Encardio-rite is not
responsible for any direct, indirect, incidental, special or consequential damage or loss caused to other
equipment or people that the purchaser may experience as a result of installation or use of the product.
The buyer’s sole remedy for any breach of this agreement or any warranty by Encardio-rite shall not exceed
the purchase price paid by the purchaser to Encardio-rite. Under no circumstances will Encardio-rite
reimburse the claimant for loss incurred in removing and/or reinstalling equipment.
Products described in Encardio-rite’s catalogs are subject to modification and improvement as dictated by
subsequent developments. Encardio-rite reserves the right to modify, change or improve products, to
Page | 14
DATASHEET
POROUS TUBE PIEZOMETER

MODEL EPP-10
OVERVIEW
Monitoring of ground water table has assumed great significance in view of

depleting ground water reserves. The basic measurement of ground water level can
be done by installing Porous tube piezometers.
FEATURES
 Low cost, rugged and easy to
install.
 Reliable, accurate and simple to
read, with audio and visual  Tape locking arrangement
signals. provided.
 Proven technology. APPLICATION
 Can be installed after the
construction of the dam is
 To determine the uplift and pore
completed by drilling a proper
pressure gradients in foundations.
bore hole at the desired location
to the original depth.  Measuring the elevation of ground
water in stand pipes, bore holes
 Monitoring is not limited to depth
and wells
of water being within 5 meter
from the observation station as in  To determine the flow pattern
the case of twin tube through earth/rock fill dams, their
piezometers. abutments and foundations and to
delineate the phreactic line.
 Stand pipe of durable heavy duty
PVC construction.  Hydrological investigation,
construction control, stability
 Flat cable used in water level
investigation and monitoring of
sounder is high tensile, virtually
earth dams, foundations, shallow
non-expandable, water proof and
underground works and surface
corrosion resistant.
excavations.
 The water level sounder is
 Ideal for simple ground water
portable, light weight and easy to
level monitoring.
carry.
www.encardio.com
The installation of piezometers in earth fills and their suitable rubber stopper. The porous tube is set in a hole
foundations provides important and significant which is either drilled or jetted into the foundation to a
quantitative data on the magnitude and distribution of predetermined elevation to intercept ground water or
pore pressure and its variations with time. Piezometer pore pressure in the foundation. The porous tube is
are also extensively used to monitor variations in pore surrounded by sand and has a plastic riser pipe extending
pressure. It also gives the pattern of seepage, zones of to the surface.
potential piping and the effectiveness of seepage control
measures undertaken. In case the piezometers are The pressure of the pore water surrounding the porous
correctly installed, proper evaluation of pore pressure will tube causes a flow through the piezometer until the
give the following information: pressures are equalized by the head of water in the
standpipe (plastic tube). The elevation of water in the
 Indicate potentially dangerous conditions that may plastic tube is determined by an electrical sounding device
adversely affect the stability of a structure and its lowered from the ground surface. The Encardio-rite
appurtenant structures water level sounder uses a special non expandable
measuring tape with integral twin wires for current
 Help monitor, after construction, the behavior of
transmission. The two conductor cable serves to lower
structure and their foundations and appurtenant
the probe and also to connect the probe to the output
structures.
circuit board.
 Provide basic data for improvement of design
practices and criteria that will promote safer and Figure on next page gives typical assembly and installation
economical construction of earth and rock fill dams layout of the porous tube piezometer.
and appurtenant structures.
 The help evaluating effectiveness of grout curtains. DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT
 Variations in ground water levels.
EPP-10/1 Porous tube
DESCRIPTION
The EPP-10/1 piezometer tip is a porous carborundum
The porous tube piezometer is a device for measuring or alundum tube of annular cross-section, 37 mm outer
pore water pressures primarily in a foundation though it dia, 25 mm i.d. with 6 mm wall thickness available in 20,
can also be used to measure pore pressure in an 40 and 60 cm lengths covered with geo-textile material.
embankment. It is more sensitive to foundation pressures For 40 cm length two porous tubes and for 60 cm length
or ground water fluctuations and is more resistant to three porous tubes of 20 cm length are coupled together
plugging due to silting than the conventional observation to form a 40/60 cm long piezometer tip. The length of the
well which it replaces. The porous tube piezometers may porous tube and the sand backfill (see figure on next
not indicate the correct pressures where sufficient flow of page) may be varied with the subsurface conditions
water into the standpipe of the piezometer is not available encountered at site. The porosity of the porous tube is
as in partially saturated soils. chosen according to site conditions. Unless specifically
requested, the porous tube filter has a grain size of 40
Even though the foundation pore pressure can be micron.
measured by the conventional twin tube hydraulic type
foundation piezometer, there are locations not easily
accessible to these piezometers, in view of the depths at
which the tips are required to be installed and of the
necessity of terminal facilities. This is especially true in
case where the depth of water level is more than 5 m
below the observation room. Every porous tube
piezometer being an independent installation, the porous
tube piezometer can be installed at such locations.
Because of its simplicity, and reliability, the porous tube
piezometer can be used by taking advantage of the
drainage tunnels and grouting culverts to provide EPP-10/2 Stopper
permanent access to the top of the holes. Since porous
tube piezometers can be installed after completion of The bottom end of the porous tube is sealed with a built in
construction, obstruction to construction equipment can suitable rubber plug.
also be avoided.
EPP-10/3 Top Adapter
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
It is required to be fitted on the upper end of the porous
tube assembly to connect the standpipe to the porous
The intake point of the piezometer consists of a porous
tube.
carborundum/alundum tube of annular cross-section.
The bottom end of the porous tube is plugged with a
www.encardio.com
EPP-10/4 Standpipe convenient to use. The water level sounder probe is
lowered from the surface with the help of the connecting
Durable rigid PVC tubing having an outside diameter of 25 flat cable for taking observations. The cable is made up of
mm and a wall thickness of 1.50 mm in maximum 3 meters high tensile virtually non-expandable, non-stretch, PE
of available lengths is provided, however for longer insulated flat steel tape 10 mm wide x 2 mm thick. The
lengths tubes can be coupled together. The inside length of the cable is commensurate with the depth up to
diameter of the tubing is suitable for easy insertion of the which the observation is required to be made.
sounder.
The tape has integral twin wires for current transmission.
The two conductor cable serves to lower the probe and
also to connect the probe to the output circuit board. The
permanent marking on tape is available in meter with a
resolution of 1 mm or feet with a resolution of 0.1”. The
unit is battery operated complete with an on-off switch,
buzzer, LED for power on and signal, flat cable connected
to a probe, winding reel and carrying handle.
The probe gives sound and light signal when water in the
borehole/well makes a contact with the tip. The moisture
resistant electronics and standard 9 V PP-3 size battery
are housed in a hub on the cable reel.
The hub can be easily removed to replace the battery or

check the electronics without disassembling the entire
cable reel.
EPP-10/5 Joint for PVC Tubing EPP-10/7 Pipe cap assembly
These are required for jointing the available lengths of The pipe cap assembly is fixed to the top of the PVC tube
PVC tubing. The joints are suitable to ensure no leakage at the top.
and are smooth and flush inside to prevent lodging of air
bubbles and smooth passing of the sounder. The joiner or EPP-10/8 Top cap (50 mm nominal bore)
coupler for PVC tubing is made of rigid PVC having an
internal rubber sleeve. Suitable adhesive/resin is used This provides a cover to the porous tube piezometer
for jointing lengths of PVC tubing. assembly. A locking arrangement is also provided.
EPP-10/6 Water level sounder EPP-10/9 Protective pipe (50 mm nominal bore)
The model EPP-10/6 water level sounder is designed to The protective GI pipe 50NB x 1250 L is grouted in
measure the elevation of ground water in boreholes, concrete and the top cap protects the complete porous
stand pipes and wells. It is robust, light weight and tube piezometer assembly.
www.encardio.com
EPP10/10 Lockable protective manhole cover
SPECIFICATIONS
A MS lockable protective manhole cover is provided with
EPP-10 Porous Tube
the system to protect the installation from moving vehicles
and other damages at site. Casagrande tip, 37 mm o.d., 25
mm i.d., 20, 40, 60 cm long
ORDERING CODE: Porous tip (L) covered with geo-textile
25 mm o.d., with wall thickness
EPP-10/6-L-X [L= length, X = unit (m or ft)] 1.5 mm PVC pipe in suitable
Standpipe length
EPP-10/6 Water level sounder

Length ‘L’ (m) 30, 50, 100, 150, 200, 300
Resolution 1 mm standard
Length ‘L’(ft) 50, 100, 150, 300, 500
Resolution 0.1” standard

High tensile virtually non-
expandable, non-stretch, PE
Cable/Tape insulated flat steel tape
Tape/Cable Size 10 mm wide x 2 mm thick
Probe Stainless steel 12.7 mm dia.

Power Supply 9 V PP-3 size battery
Audio Signal Sound buzzer
Visual Signal Green LED light signal
Model EPP-10 porous tube & EPP-10/6 water level

sounder is available with above specifications.

www.encardio.com
DATASHEET
OPEN STANDPIPE PIEZOMETER

MODEL EPP-10SP
INTRODUCTION
Ground water table monitoring has assumed great significance in view of depleting
ground water reserves. The basic measurement of ground water level can be done
by Open Standpipe or constructing observation wells.
 Reliable, Rugged, easy to install  Ground water level measurement

and economical. in boreholes near dams, rivers,
 Accurate, simple to read, and high rise buildings, farm houses,
proven technology. factories, institutes and residential
areas.
 Can be installed after the
construction of the  Ideal for simple ground water
structure/dam is completed by level monitoring.
drilling a proper bore hole at the
desired location to the original
depth.
 Stand pipe of durable heavy duty
PVC construction.
 Flat cable used in water level
sounder is high tensile, virtually
non-expandable, water proof and
corrosion resistant.
 The water level sounder is
portable, light weight and easy to
carry.
 Locking arrangement provided.
www.encardio.com
Observation wells are vertical pipes with a slotted section A plate hinged cover with locking arrangement is available
at the bottom typically installed in boreholes with a seal at for mounting at top of the standpipe. The locking
the surface to prevent surface water from entering the arrangement has a universal key and a dust protection
borehole. The depth to the water level is measured by cap. Figure on next page gives typical assembly and
lowering the water level measurement probe into the installation layout of the EPP-10SP standpipe.
pipe.
ORDERING CODE:
The model EPP-10 SP standpipe is used for measuring
ground water level and its variation with time. The
EPP-10SP-L-Y [L= length of slotted pipe, Y= No. of
Encardio-rite model EPP-10SP standpipe piezometer
stand pipes
consists of a pipe that is sealed along its entire length and
installed in a borehole such that it must be open to water
flow at bottom and open to atmosphere at the top. The EPP-10/6-L-X [L= length, X = unit (m or ft)]
intake is a slotted pipe covered with geo-textile material.
SPECIFICATIONS
EPP-10SP Stand Pipe
PVC slotted pipe, 50 mm o.d.,
Porous tip (L) covered with geo-textile
50 mm o.d., 44.5 i.d., 3 m length
PVC pipe with an inbuilt socket for
Standpipe (Y) jointing
EPP-10/6 Water level sounder
Length ‘L’ (m) 30, 50, 100, 150, 200, 300

Length ‘L’(ft) 50, 100, 150, 300, 500

High tensile virtually non-
expandable, non-stretch, PE
Cable/Tape insulated flat steel tape
Tape/Cable Size 10 mm wide x 2 mm thick

DESCRIPTION
Probe Stainless steel 12.7 mm dia.
The standpipe consists of a series of PVC stand pipes, 50 Power Supply 9 V PP-3 size battery
mm o.d., 44.5 i.d., 3 m length with an inbuilt socket for
jointing. The intake point of the standpipe consists of a Audio Signal Sound buzzer
PVC slotted pipe, 1 m long, 50 mm o.d., covered with geo- Visual Signal Green LED light signal
textile. Bottom end of slotted pipe is plugged with a
suitable PVC cap.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE EPP-10/6 Water level sounder
The model EPP-10/6 water level sounder is designed to

The standpipe is set in a bore hole, which is drilled into measure the elevation of ground water in boreholes,
the soil/foundation to a pre-determined depth to intercept stand pipes and wells. It is robust, light weight and
ground water. The slotted pipe is connected by a socket to convenient to use. The water level sounder probe is
same diameter plastic stand pipes extending to the lowered from the surface with the help of the connecting
surface. The borehole is filled with pea gravel. The top of flat cable for taking observations. The length of the cable
borehole is sealed with cement bentonite plug. Ground is commensurate with the depth up to which the
water seeps into the stand pipe through the slotted end observation is required to be made. The unit is battery
and attains a level equal to ground water. This level is operated complete with an on-off switch, buzzer, LED for
determined by an electrical sounding device model EPP- power on and signal, flat cable connected to a probe,
10/6 lowered from the surface. winding reel and carrying handle.
www.encardio.com
The probe gives sound and light signal when water in the
borehole/well makes a contact with the tip. The moisture
resistant electronics and standard 9 V PP-3 size batteries
are housed in a hub on the cable reel. The hub can be
easily removed to replace the battery or check the
electronics without disassembling the entire cable reel.

www.encardio.com
USERS’ MANUAL
WATER LEVEL INDICATOR

MODEL EPP-10/6
Doc. #WI 6002.66 R04 | Oct 2013

Users’ Manual EPP-10/6 Water level Indicator
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
2 DESCRIPTION 2
2.1 Cable description 2
2.2 Measurement of water level 2
2.3 Cleaning indicator 2
2.4 Replacing battery 3
3 WARRANTY 4
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
Monitoring of ground water table has assumed great significance in view of depleting ground water
reserves. The basic measurement of ground water level can be done by Open Standpipe or constructing
observation wells.
Encardio-rite model EPP-10/6 water level indicator is designed to measure elevation of ground water in
bore holes, casagrande piezometers, stand pipes and wells. It is accurate, robust, light weight and
convenient to use.
This users’ manual covers description of the water level sounder, procedure for measuring water level,
cleaning indicator and replacing battery.
This users’ manual is intended to provide you with sufficient information for making optimum use of water
level sounder in your applications.
For measuring water level See § 2.3 ‘Measurement of water level’.
For cleaning indicator See § 2.4 ‘Cleaning indicator’.
For changing battery of water level indicator See § 2.5 ‘Replacing battery’
Page | 1
2 DESCRIPTION
Model EPP-10/6 water level sounder comprises of a probe, graduated cable and cable reel. The Encardio-
rite model EPP-10/6 water level sounder is designed to measure the elevation of the ground water in bore
holes, stand pipes and wells. The water level sounder is required to be lowered from the surface with the
help of the connecting cable for taking observations.
The model EPP-10/6 comprises of a specified length of flat cable made of high tensile virtually non-
expandable, non-stretchable polyethylene coated flat tape having markings at an interval of every 1 cm,
connected at one end to a weighted probe of stainless steel. The probe is of stainless steel construction
with a diameter of 12.7 mm. The 3 mm long tapered tip of the probe is insulated from the main housing by
a 15 mm long white nylon spacer.
The unit is battery operated complete with an on-off switch, buzzer, red LED for power on and signal, flat
cable connected to a probe, winding reel and carrying handle. The probe gives sound and green light signal
when water in the borehole/well makes a contact with the tip. The moisture resistant electronics and
standard 9 V PP-3 size battery are housed in a hub on the cable reel. The hub can be easily accessed to
replace the battery without disassembling the entire cable reel. The cable reel is rugged, light weight and
easy to carry.
2.1 Cable description
The cable of model EPP-10/6 water level sounder is made of high tensile virtually non-expandable, non-
stretch, PE insulated flat steel tape 10 mm wide x 2 mm thick. The length of the cable is commensurate
with the depth up to which the observation is required to be made. The tape has integral twin wires for
current transmission. The two conductor cable serves to lower the probe and also to connect the probe to
the output circuit board.
The permanent markings on tape is available in meter with a resolution of 1 mm or feet with a resolution
of 0.1”.
Model EPP-10/6 water level sounder is available with following tape lengths:
Length ‘L’ (m) 30, 50, 100, 150, 200, 300
Length ‘L’ (ft) 50, 100, 150, 300, 500

2.2 Measurement of water level
1 Unlock the top cap and Remove the PVC pipe cap.
2 Switch on the indicator.

3 Lower probe into well. When probe tip and housing touches water, the probe will give a sound alarm
and green light signal.
4 Hold flat cable against the reference and read depth from the cable marking.
NOTE: Top of the well is usually taken as the reference.
5 Remove probe carefully from the well winding the flat cable on the cable reel.
6 Replace PVC pipe cap and place the top cap.

2.3 Cleaning indicator
1 Wash probe and cable with a laboratory-grade detergent. Rinse with clean/distilled water.
Page | 2
NOTE: The probe has a diameter of 12.7 mm. The 3 mm long tapered tip of the probe is insulated
from the main housing by a 15 mm long white nylon spacer. The probe will give sound and
light signal when the water in the borehole/well makes simultaneous contact with the tip as
well as the lower end of the housing. In case of any deposit on the nylon spacer, carefully
remove it as it may be conductive and impair performance.
2 Remove oily deposits with dishwashing detergent, after testing its effect on a short length of cable. Do
not leave the cable immersed in detergent for a long time. Rinse in clean/distilled water.
3 Wipe the reel with a damp cloth taking care that water does not enter the hub.
2.4 Replacing battery
The indicator uses a 9 V PP3-size battery. Battery must be replaced if indicator fails to buzz or show green
light signal when probe tip and housing contact water. To replace battery:
1 Release the cable locking assembly.
2 Remove the SS screw on the hub to gain access to battery holder.

3 Remove battery terminal from the 9 V PP3 size battery. Replace battery with new one and connect
battery terminal.
4 Secure the hub with SS screw.
5 Secure the cable locking assembly
Page | 3
3 WARRANTY
operating conditions not in control of Encardio-Rite. The warranty is limited to free repair/replacement of
the product/parts with manufacturing defects only and does not cover products/parts worn out due to
normal wear and tear or damaged due to mishandling or improper installation. This includes fuses and
batteries.
Products described in Encardio-rite’s catalogues are subject to modification and improvement as dictated
Page | 4
USERS’ MANUAL
TILTMETER
Model EAN-92M MEMS type with SDI-12 interface
Doc. # WI 6002.100 R01 | June 2018

Page | 1-1
Users’ Manual EAN-92M Tiltmeter with SDI-12 interface
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 3
1.1 Applications 3
1.2 Specifications 3
2 TILTMETER 5
2.1 Operation 5
2.2 Installation of Tiltmeter 5
2.2.1 Installation on vertical surface 5
2.2.2 Installation on horizontal surface 6
2.2.3 Installation on roof 6
2.2.4 Tool and accessories 7
3 MEASUREMENT OF TILT 8
3.3 Measurement using ESDL-30 datalogger 8
3.4 Measurement using EDAS-10 data acquisition system 9
3.5 Sample Test Certificate 14
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite model EAN-92M tilt meter is suitable for monitoring inclination and vertical rotation of
structures. It is a high resolution tilt meter, is rugged in construction and has excellent temperature stability.
Tilt change in a structure may be caused by construction activity like excavation, tunneling or de-watering
that may affect the ground supporting the structure. Change in tilt could also result from loading of the
structure, such as loading of a dam during impoundment, loading of a diaphragm wall during excavation or
loading of a bridge deck due to wind and traffic. Data from the tilt meter provides early warning of
threatening deformations, allowing time for corrective action to be taken or if necessary for safe evacuation
of the area.
SDI-12 is the acronym for "Serial Data Interface at 1200 Baud". SDI-12 is an asynchronous, ASCII, serial
communications protocol. These instruments are typically low-power (12 volt), are often used in remote
locations, and usually communicate with a data logger or other data acquisition device. In this master-slave
configuration, the data logger or data acquisition device typically acts as the master (SDI-12 Recorder and
Interrogator) to the data monitoring instruments, which are the slaves (SDI-12 sensors). One master can
communicate with multiple slaves, so the SDI-12 protocol requires that each device in the serial network
be identified with a unique address, which is represented by a single ASCII character.
This communication is achieved by digital communications along a single serial line. The digital addressing
system allows an SDI-Recorder to send out an address over a single line that is occupied by sensors with
only the pre-configured sensor matching that address will respond (handshake), while the other sensors
on the same line will not respond until called and typically stay in "sleep mode"(low power mode), until
called (often in a sequence) at a later time by the SD-I Recorder (Master).
1.1 Applications
EAN-92M tiltmeter is widely used in following applications:
 Monitoring vertical rotation of retaining walls.

 Monitoring inclination and rotation of dams, piers, piles and other structures.
 Monitoring stability of structures in landslide areas.
 Monitoring tunnels for convergence and other movement.
 Monitoring safety of structures around zones of excavation or tunneling.
 Monitoring deflection in bridges and struts under different loading conditions.
1.2 Specifications
No. of axes Uniaxial or Biaxial
Sensor type Accelerometer
Standard range ± 15°, ± 30°
Sensitivity ± 10 arc second

Accuracy1 ± 0.1% fs
Supply voltage 12V dc (nominal)
Supply current Less than 35 mA
Temperature range -20°C to 80°C
Dimension 32 mm x 160 mm
Page | 3
Weight 0.4 kg (sensor)
Output connection Integral: 1-3 core cable for Tilt sensor, 2- 3 core cable for IPI sensor
1
As tested under laboratory conditions

WARNING: Warning messages calls attention to a procedure or practice, that if not properly followed
This users’ manual is intended to provide you with sufficient information for making optimum use of
tiltmeters and beam sensors in your applications.
To make this manual more useful we invite valuable comments and suggestions regarding any additions
or enhancements. We also request you to please let us know of any errors that may be found while going
through the manual.

For understanding principle of tiltmeters: See § 2.1 `Principle of Operation’.
For installation of tiltmeters: See §2.3 Ìnstallation of Tiltmeters’.
For measurement with readout: See § 3 `Measurements.
Page | 4
2 TILTMETER
2.1 Operation
Model EAN-92M tilt meter is built around a precision
accelerometer and suitable signal conditioning
circuit mounted inside a stainless steel housing. The
accelerometer senses force of acceleration due to
gravity which is maximum when accelerometer is
rotated to full 90 degree tilt position and is zero
(minimum) when tilt angle of accelerometer is zero.
For in-between tilts, force experienced by
accelerometer is equal to product of sine of tilt angle
and acceleration due to gravity. The tilt sensor thus
provides a bipolar DC voltage output proportional to
the sine of tilt angle measured by the tilt meter. The
output is zero volts for a truly vertical position.
The sensor provides a relatively low cost tilt
6
measurement solution but still offers excellent resolution, long term
stability and a low thermal sensitivity.
The tilt meter can be fixed to any vertical surface, horizontal floor or
ceiling by means of suitable mounting accessories consisting of
brackets and anchors. These are available separately when ordered.
3
The EAN-92M is not intended for absolute determination of tilt of
structures. Its measures change in tilt of a structure to which the
sensor is attached. The initial tilt reading for each tilt sensor is 4 5
recorded after it has been mounted on the structure to be monitored. 1
Subtracting initial tilt reading from subsequent tilt reading gives
change in tilt of structure over a period of time.
2.2 Installation of Tiltmeter

Model EAN-92M tilt meter can be fixed to a vertical surface,
suspended from ceiling or mounted on the floor with help of suitable Wall
mounting arrangement/bracket available from Encardio-rite as
optional accessories.
Item Description Qty.

2
1 Anchor (HSA M8 x 75 Hilti) 1
2 Tilt meter 1
3 Wall mounting bracket 1
4 Allen bolt, SS, M6 x 20 2
5 Plain washer, SS 2
6 Hex. nut, SS, M6 2
2.2.1 Installation on vertical surface

1 Drill a 8 mm Φ x 50 mm deep hole for Hilti anchor HAS M8 x 75 or equivalent on wall of which change
in tilt has to be measured.
Page | 5
2 Insert anchor in hole, mount tiltmeter bracket on anchor and tighten slightly.
3 Fix tiltmeter on mounting bracket with two M6 x 20mm Allen bolts. Tighten anchor and Allen bolts/nuts
so that the tiltmeter reads almost vertical on the read-out unit.
2.2.2 Installation on horizontal surface

1 Using mounting bracket as a template, mark position of two mounting holes. Visually ensure that the
two hole positions are almost aligned along axis at which tilt has to be measured.
2 Drill two 8 mm Φ x 50 mm deep holes for Hilti anchor HAS M8 x 75 or equivalent.
3 Insert anchors in holes and mount tiltmeter bracket on anchors and tighten slightly.
4 Fix tiltmeter on mounting bracket with two M6 x 20 mm Allen bolts. Tighten anchors and Allen bolts/nuts
so that the tiltmeter reads almost vertical on the read-out unit.
4
5 6 1 Anchor (HSA M8 x 75 Hilti) 2
2 Tilt meter 1
3 Surface mounting bracket 1
4 Sensor mount plate 1
2
G. L.
2.2.3 Installation on roof

1 Drill 8 mm Φ x 50 mm deep hole for Hilti anchor HAS M8 x 75 or equivalent on roof at which change
2 Insert anchor in hole, mount tiltmeter bracket on anchor and tight slightly.
Page | 6
3 Fix tiltmeter on mounting bracket with two M6

1
x 20mm Allen bolts. Tighten anchor and Allen
bolts/nuts so that the tiltmeter reads almost Roof
vertical on the read-out unit.

3
4
2 Tilt meter 1
5
3 Roof mounting bracket 1 6

2
2.2.4 Tool and accessories

1 Power drill
2 Concrete / Masonry drill bit 8 mm

3 Spanner 8/9, 12/13 mm
4 Allen key 5 mm
Page | 7
3 MEASUREMENT OF TILT
The output of model EAN-92M tilt meter can be read by read or logged from a remote location by an
automatic datalogger like Encardio-rite model ESDL-30.
The tiltmeter is supplied with built-in 3 core cable. The cable can be terminated or extended to the nearest
measurement station through a suitable junction box. There will be 2 sets of 3 cable when used as IPI
sensors.
3.1 Wiring details

Cable colour Description
Red 12V DC
Black/Shield Ground
Green Output
3.2 Sign convention
+
Careful orient tilt sensor during installation. Make a note of the orientation. A (+)
sign is marked to show the orientation along the A axis.
Tilt
B
Uni-axial sensor measures tilt only along axis ‘A”.
-
The adjacent figure shows a view from top and also convention used for
+ A -
direction/output signal polarity.
Tilt
3.3 Measurement using ESDL-30 datalogger

ESDL-30, SDI-12 Datalogger is designed to record data produced by the sensors connected to SDI-12
bus. Datalogger is having 3 SDI-12 ports (channels). Sensors having SDI-12 interface can be connected
on a common SDI-12 bus. This bus can be connected to any SDI-12 port of the datalogger. Each reading
is stamped with date and time at which the measurement was taken. It has non-volatile flash memory to
store up to 2 million data points.
with data cable or Bluetooth. The downloaded readings get stored in the PC’s home directory in CSV
processed on any common available spreadsheet like Microsoft-Excel.
ESDL-30UNI with built in GSM/GPRS has capability to upload data records directly to remote FTP server.
Upload schedule can be set in Data logger using this software for automatic data upload to the FTP server.
Schedule can be set as fast as 5 minutes.
SDI-12 inputs should have a unique ID (0-9, a-z or A-Z). Each of the 3 channels of the datalogger can have
61 sensors with ID 1-9 (ID 0 is used for factory purposes, hence not available for use), a-z or A-Z. For a
given channel each sensor should have a different ID.
Page | 8
For operational details please refer to the users’ manuals of ESDL-30 SDI-12 datalogger and ESDL-30
Configuration Manager.
3.4 Measurement using EDAS-10 data acquisition system

Model EAN-92M tiltmeter having SDI-12 interface requires power source of 12V DC which is provided by
EDAS-10 data acquisition system through Encardio-rite power supply model EBP-127AH. Since SDI-12
network is connected in bus mode, only 3 core cable is connected to the data acquisition system. A six
core cable can also be used for the connection. Depending upon the application, the data acquisition
system can be based on Campbell measurement and control modules CR1000, CR800 or CR200.
NOTE: For detailed instructions on configuration of Encardio-rite model EDAS-10 data acquisition
systems based on measurement and control modules CR 1000/CR 800/CR 200, refer to
Campbell Scientific’s relevant Users’ Manual.
Typical wiring/connection of in-place inclinometer system to CR1000, CR800 or CR200 based data
acquisition systems are shown in the figures on the next page. In case data is to be transmitted via
GSM/GPRS or RF modem only the CR 1000 or CR 800 based data acquisition system can be used. The
CR 200 does not support transmission of data by GSM/GPRS or RF modem.
Page | 9
1) Tilt meter with CR1000 System

POWER IN
SE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CAUTION
DIFF 1 2 3 4 DC ONLY
EX1
G
P1
P2
12V
H L H L H L H L
SE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 GROUND LUG CR 1000

DIFF 5 6 7 8
Data transmission
EX2
EX3
POWER OUT RS 232 (NOT ISOLATED) via direct RS-232,

COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4
SW-12
Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx
RF or GSM/GPRS
12V
12V
CS I/O
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
5V
G
G
R
Bk SDI-12 tilt
Gn sensor(s)

POWER IN
DIFF 1 2 3 DC ONLY
EX1
EX2
G
P1
P2
5V
12V
H L H L H L
G
SW-12
SCM
12V
C1
C2
C3
C4
G
CR 800
GROUND Tx Rx Tx Rx
Measurement and Control Datalogger
LUG COM1 COM2 Data transmission
via direct RS-232,
CS I/O RS 232
RF or GSM/GPRS
R
Bk SDI-12 tilt
Gn sensor(s)

EX1
CR200X
SW Battery
EX2
G
Battery +
Charge +
C1/SDI-12
P_LL
C2
Battery -
Charge -
Datalogger with 900MHz

Ground
Lug
RS 232
Data transmission
P_SW
SE5
SE4
SE3
SE2
SE1
SCAN
RECEIVE via direct RS-232
R
Bk SDI-12 tilt
Gn sensor(s)
Page | 10
3.4.1.1 Program for SDI-12 sensor

Encardio-rite can supply a program
for monitoring SDI12 tilt meter based
on information provided by the
customer. For details, contact
Encardio-rite’s head office in India.
SDI12 Recorder-The SDI12

retrieve the results from an SDI12
sensor.
Syntax-SDI12 Recorder (Dest,
Where, Destination is the defined address for storage, SDIPORT is the control port connected to sensor,
and Offset have purpose as the name suggests.
aM1!. - An active sensor responds to each command

The SDI-12 command basically has following three components:
Sensor address (a) - a single character, and is the first character of the command
Command body (e.g., M1) - an upper case letter (the “command”) followed by alphanumeric qualifiers.
Page | 11
(Previous_AddressANew_Address!)
Note: Here, 2 = Previous_Address and b = New_Address
3.4.1.2 Typical programming for reading one SDI-12 sensor using CRBasic
The tilt meter response can be checked before installation at site with the help of simple program module:
Public batt_volt
Public PTemp
Public Results(6)
Public Sensor_ID(2)
Public watchdog

'Define Data Tables

Figure : Sensor address change
EndTable
'Main Program
BeginProg
watchdog=0
Battery (batt_volt)
'Sensor_ID()=value
Sensor_ID(2)=1
'SW12(1)
Delay(0,3,sec)

Delay(0,5,sec)
watchdog = 10
EndIf
CallTable(SDI_Data)
NextScan
EndProg
Page | 12
3.4.1.3 Typical programming for reading one SDI-12 sensor using Terminal Emulator
as per figure below.
Terminal Emulator
Page | 13
3.5 Sample Test Certificate

TEST CERTIFICATE
(for 'A' axis calibration)
Item : Tiltmeter with SDI -12 interface Date : 23.06.2018

Model : EAN-92M-B Temperature : 32 ºC
Range : ±15º
Serial No. : Gxxxxxx
Next calibration due on : 22.06.2019
Test data
Test Corrosponding Observed Offset corrected Non-conformance

SinA
position SinA SinA (% fs)
Arc degrees
A' axis A' axis 'A' axis
(A)
15 0.2588 0.2590 0.2589 0.0344

12 0.2079 0.2080 0.2079 0.0014
9 0.1564 0.1566 0.1565 0.0091
6 0.1045 0.1048 0.1047 0.0485
3 0.0523 0.0525 0.0524 0.0189
0 0.0000 0.0001 0.0000 0.0000
-3 -0.0523 -0.0522 -0.0523 0.0178
-6 -0.1045 -0.1043 -0.1044 0.0342
-9 -0.1564 -0.1562 -0.1564 0.0307
-12 -0.2079 -0.2078 -0.2079 0.0103
-15 -0.2588 -0.2588 -0.2589 0.0278
Max non-conformance (% fs) : 0.05
Calculation of tilt value (arc degree) :

A= Sin-1(observed output)
Wiring colour code :
Wire colour Signal

Red + 12 V (supply )
Black 0 V (supply )
Green Output signal
Tested by :
Page | 14
TEST CERTIFICATE
(for 'B' axis calibration)
Item : Tiltmeter with SDI -12 interface Date : 23.06.2018

Model : EAN-92M-B Temperature : 32 ºC
Range : ±15º
Serial No. : Gxxxxxx
Test data
Test Corresponding Observed Offset corrected Non-conformance
position SinA SinA SinA (% fs)
Arc degrees
B' axis B' axis 'B' axis
(B)
15 0.2588 0.2582 0.2587 0.0510
12 0.2079 0.2073 0.2078 0.0617
9 0.1564 0.1557 0.1562 0.0717
6 0.1045 0.1038 0.1043 0.0693
3 0.0523 0.0518 0.0523 0.0251
0 0.0000 -0.0005 0.0000 0.0000
-3 -0.0523 -0.0529 -0.0524 0.0294
-6 -0.1045 -0.1051 -0.1046 0.0338
-9 -0.1564 -0.1569 -0.1564 0.0164
-12 -0.2079 -0.2085 -0.2080 0.0330
-15 -0.2588 -0.2595 -0.2590 0.0780

B= Sin-1(observed output)
Wire colour Signal

Red + 12 V (supply )
Black 0 V (supply )
Green Output signal
Tested by :
Page | 15
USERS’ MANUAL
ELECTROLYTIC LEVEL UNIAXIAL TILT

METER/BEAM TILT SENSOR
MODEL EAN-31EL/EAN-31EL-B
Doc # WI 6002.72 R00 | Sept 2010

Users’ Manual EAN-31EL/EAN-31EL-B Electrolytic Level Uniaxial Tilt Meter/Beam Tilt Sensor
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Applications 1
2 THE ELECTROLYTIC TILT / BEAM SENSOR 3

2.1 Principle of Operation 3
2.1.1 Temperature sensitivity of electrolytic bubble level sensors 3
2.2 Sign convention for Tilt and Beam Sensors 3
2.3 Usage of Tilt and Beam Sensors 4
2.4 Sensor measurement range 6
2.5 Calibration and gauge factors of tilt and beam sensors 6
3 INSTALLATION OF TILT AND BEAM SENSORS 8

3.1 Use of mounting kit 8
3.3.1 Rotation expected in the plane of the wall 9
3.3.2 Rotation expected in a vertical plane perpendicular to the wall 9
3.4 Installation of Horizontal Beam Sensor 10
3.4.1 Mounting the sensor assembly on the beam 10
3.4.2 Installing the anchors 10
3.4.3 Fixing the beams 11
3.5 Installation of Vertical Beam Sensors 12
3.5.2 Mounting the tiltmeter on the beam 13
4 WORKING WITH HALF BRIDGE OUTPUT SENSORS (OPTION R) 15

4.1 Making connections 15
4.2 Setting the DIP switches 15
4.3 Initial or Mechanical Zero Adjustment 16
4.4 Setting sensor zero 16
4.5 Reading the raw output sensors 17
4.6 Connecting sensor to CR1000 18
5 WORKING WITH VOLTAGE OUTPUT SENSORS (OPTION V) 19

5.1 Making connections 19
5.2 Initial or Mechanical Zero Adjustment 20
5.3 Setting sensor zero 20
5.4 Reading the voltage output sensors 21
5.5 Connecting Tiltmeter to CR1000 21
6 DIMENSIONS 22
6.1 EAN-31EL Tiltmeter 22
www.encardio.com
6.2 EAN-31EL-B Beam Sensor (EAN-31EL Tilt meter + beam assembly) 22
7 THERMISTOR RESISTANCE VS. TEMPERAURE TABLE 23

7.1 Thermistor t ype: Dale 1C3001-B3 23
7.2 Temperature resistance equation 23
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite Model EAN-31EL tiltmeters are designed for measuring very small tilts, of the order of half a
degree, with a high resolution. It uses a ceramic encapsulated electrolytic bubble level sensor as its sensing
element.
The EAN-31EL Tiltmeter is housed in an aluminium die cast enclosure and is generally used as a stand-
alone unit for measuring tilt. It is either attached directly to the structure whose tilt is to be monitored using
suitable mounting brackets or fixed to horizontal or vertical beams.
EAN-31EL can be mounted on 38 mm x 38 mm hollow square aluminium structural sections (beam). The
length of the beam is known as the gauge length and is supplied with suitable mounting hardware for fixing
onto concrete or brickwork structures. The beam mounted tilt sensor measures the tilt angle between the
end points of the beam. From the measured tilt angle and the beam length the vertical or horizontal
displacement (depending on the orientation of the beam) of the endpoints of the beam can be precisely
calculated.
The EAN-31EL-B beam sensor is basically an EAN-31EL tilt meter mounted on a beam of specified gauge
length and suitable mounting hardware for fixing the beams to the structure. The beams are available in
different standard lengths, generally between 1 to 3 meters. The beam sensors are often used as a linear
array of linked beams, fixed to anchors at specified lengths. An array of linked beam sensors allows the
vertical settlement profile along the array line to be determined.
EAN-31EL tilt meter is available with either voltage output (output option V) or raw half bridge output (output
option R).
The voltage output sensors can be read with any digital voltage-measuring device like digital indicators or
multimeters but do require an additional low current dc power source. A 12 Vdc battery is sufficient to
power the tilt sensor. Most commercially available dataloggers generally have some provision for supplying
the required power to the sensor. Although voltage output sensors are costlier their output can be read by
any low cost digital voltmeters.
The voltage output option should be preferred for most applications especially if the sensors are spread
over a fairly wide area.
The raw half bridge output sensors are lower cost sensors but require a suitable datalogger that can accept
half bridge sensor output and provide ac excitation. Encardio-rite suggests the model CR1000 datalogger
from Campbell Scientific, U.S.A., for this application. The raw half bridge output option is more popularly
used with beam sensors that are used in arrays as a number of sensors are in close proximity requiring a
minimum length of wiring to the datalogger while reducing the cost per sensor.
1.1 Applications
The EAN-31EL Tiltmeters and EAN-31EL-B Beam Sensors are widely used in following applications:

 Monitoring settlement or heave in ground.
 Monitoring tunnels for convergence and other movements.
Page | 1

This user’s manual is intended to provide you with sufficient information for making optimum use of El
through the manual.
For understanding principle of electrolytic tilt / beam sensors: See § 2.1 `Principle of Operation’.
For installation of electrolytic tilt / beam sensors: See § 3 Ìnstallation of Tilt and Beam Sensors’.
For essential tools and accessories: See § 3.2 `Tools and accessories required for installation’.
Page | 2
2 THE ELECTROLYTIC TILT / BEAM SENSOR
2.1 Principle of Operation

The Tilt / Beam sensor uses a bubble level sensor just like those used in spirit levels except that in this
case the spirit is replaced with an electrically conductive fluid known as electrolyte. In EAN-31EL the glass
vial of the spirit level is replaced with a more thermally stable and dimensionally accurate ceramic housing.
The ceramic electrolytic bubble level sensor has three terminals and behaves as a resistive half bridge
circuit. The electrolytic bubble sensor has two end terminals and a middle terminal. Electrically it appears
as a potentiometer with a fixed resistance between its end terminals and the middle terminal behaves as
wiper in a potentiometer. When the bubble level tilts, the resistance between the middle and one of the end
terminals goes up and between the middle and the other end terminal goes down. The effect reverses if
the direction of tilt is reversed.
The change in the ratio of resistance between the middle terminal and the two end terminals can be
measured using an electrical half bridge circuit. In a half bridge circuit the indicator / datalogger applies a
voltage across the end terminals and measures the output voltage between the middle terminal and one
of the end terminals.
Unfortunately, as the electrolyte used in the sensor deteriorates irreversibly if a dc voltage is applied across
its terminals, a pure ac excitation voltage source is a must.
In EL tilt sensors with raw output option the bubble level sensor terminals are directly available across the
output terminals.
In tilt / beam sensors with voltage output option a signal conditioning card converts the half bridge bubble
level sensor output to a proportional dc voltage with a nominal full scale value of ± 1 V dc.
Tilt / beam sensors with a measurement range lower than 1° are very sensitive sensors and are easily
influenced by even small vibrations that appear as noise on the output. These sensors should, as far as
possible, be mounted at locations where expected vibration levels are quite low. To exploit the full
sensitivity limit of these sensors some kind of averaging facility should be available in the readout unit or
datalogger used for monitoring.
2.1.1 Temperature sensitivity of electrolytic bubble level sensors

Electrolytic bubble level sensors have a relatively higher drift in output with ambient temperature. The EAN-
31EL / EAN-31EL-B tilt sensors should therefore be located in areas where the change in temperature is
expected to be minimum. For example, the sensors should never be mounted at a place where they would
be exposed to direct sunlight.
The EAN-31EL tilt meter is supplied with a thermistor temperature sensor, which can be used to measure
the sensor temperature. This temperature reading can be used to correlate the change in tilt with sensor
temperature to detect change in tilt that can be attributed to change in sensor temperature.
2.2 Sign convention for Tilt and Beam Sensors
The tilt and beam sensors basically measure rotation of the electrolytic level sensors. The electrolyte level
sensor capsule is mounted on an aluminium block that can rotate about a screw at one end and has a
taper at the other end lying between a pair of thumb nuts which are used to set the initial sensor zero.
Considering the pivot screw as the fixed reference, if the tapered end of the block rotates counter clockwise
the rotation is considered positive. Similarly clockwise rotation is considered negative.
Page | 3
This screw
considered
+
Positive tilt
as reference Positive displacement
Negative tilt
_Negative displacement
Sign convention for tilt and beam sensor
The voltage in case of voltage output sensors are also correspondingly positive for rotation in positive
direction and negative for negative direction.
_
Left anchor
considered Positive (+) displacement means
as reference right anchor has moved up.
+ Right anchor
considered
Positive (+) displacement means
as reference
left anchor has moved down.
For beam sensors the rotation is converted to a gradient reading using the distance between the anchors
at the two ends of the beam, also known as the gauge length. If L is the beam gauge length, and the angle
of rotation is α the gradient would be ‘tan(α)’. The perpendicular displacement ‘d’ of one end of the beam
considering the other end as fixed is given by
d = L tan(α)
For counter clockwise rotation of the beam the displacement is considered positive and for clockwise
rotation the displacement is considered negative.
Vertical beam sensors consist of an EAN-31EL Tiltmeter mounted on a beam of suitable gauge length.
The figure below shows the sign convention for vertical beam sensors.
2.3 Usage of Tilt and Beam Sensors

+ _
The EAN-31EL Tilt sensor is mostly used for stand- Negative
displacement
Top anchor
considered
alone applications where only the change in tilt or means anchor

has moved out
as reference
rotation of the structure is to be measured. The tilt

sensor enclosure can be directly mounted on the
structure by using two mounting screws or, more often, by
using a suitable wall mounting bracket that allows some
degree of rotational adjustment to orient the tilt sensor in a
true horizontal position. The use of a wall-mounting
bracket allows easier drilling of mounting holes as very
precise hole locations are not required. Bottom anchor
Positive
displacement
considered means anchor
as reference has moved out
_
+
Page | 4
Vertical
Beam
Tiltmeter
WALL
Tilt
Stand alone Tiltmeter Anchor
Linked vertical beams monitor

horizontal displacement profile
The EAN-31EL Tilt sensor is also used with vertical beams of known lengths to determine the horizontal
displacement of walls etc. In most cases a series of linked beams are fixed to the wall vertically using a
series of anchors. The distance between the anchors is known as the gauge length. Two adjacent beams
in the link share the same anchor.
Linked horizontal beams monitor vertical settlement or heave
The EAN-31EL-B Horizontal beam sensor is primarily used for obtaining the vertical displacement (i.e.
settlement or heave) profile. A series of beam sensors are fixed to an array of anchors in a straight line in
the desired direction along which vertical displacement profile is required. A stand-alone horizontal beam
sensor (i.e. when used singly) is equivalent to a simple tiltmeter and offers no additional advantage unless
vertical displacement between two anchors at certain distance is required to be measured.
Page | 5
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7
-d1 d7
d6
-d2
d5
-d3
d4
Summation of displacements vs. gauge lengths to obtain

displacement profile of a series of linked beam sensors
(in above figure all beams have equal gauge length)
When beam sensors are used in an array, plotting the individual displacements against the gauge length
of each beam yields the displacement profile as shown in accompanying figure. Gauge lengths in an array
can be mixed, using shorter gauge lengths where higher resolution is required and longer gauge lengths
where lower resolution is required or expected displacement values are very low. However, use of an
uniform gauge length will give satisfactory results for most applications.
The sensor beam lengths in the figure is shown as L1, L2,... L7 and the corresponding displacements
measured by each sensor are shown above as d1, d2, ... d7. All beam lengths shown in the figure are
equal. The sign of the displacement follows Encardio-rite convention for the EAN-31EL sensors.
Displacement of sensors rotating anti-clockwise are shown with a positive sign and displacement of
sensors rotating in the clockwise direction are shown with a negative sign.
On plotting the cumulative length vs. the cumulative displacement curve one gets the vertical displacement
profile along the line of sensor string.
2.4 Sensor measurement range
The EAN-31EL tilt meter is invariably supplied with a full scale tilt measuring range of a ±0.5º. However, in
structural and civil engineering applications such small tilt and inclination angles are generally measured
and/or specified in terms of gradient such as mm per metre.
For a ±0.5º sensor the corresponding gradient is ±8.727 mm per metre. So the full scale range for the EAN-
31EL is specified as ±8 mm per metre. The calibration certificate supplied with each individual sensor gives
the calibration table in terms of mm per metre. The calibration factors supplied with the sensors is valid for
the full scale range of ±8.73 mm per metre.
2.5 Calibration and gauge factors of tilt and beam sensors
The EAN-31EL / EAN-31EL-B tilt and beam sensors are supplied with individual test certificates. The test
certificate provides a linear gauge factor and polynomial constants for polynomial calculations. The tilt
measurement units are in terms of gradient as mm per metre
The tilt or gradient using linear gauge factors is given by
Y = mX + b
Where Y is the gradient in “mm per metre” and X is the sensor output is in CR-1000 data units for raw half
bridge output option and volts for voltage output option. The factors ‘m’ and ‘b’ are provided in the test
certificate.
The tilt sensor output curve is quite non-linear. If better accuracy is required then polynomial calculation
can be used to get better accuracy. However, this is a fairly complex calculation and is best performed
either by a datalogger that has polynomial calculation facility such as Encardio-rite EDAS-10 or Campbell
Scientific CR1000 datalogger or a PC with a spread sheet program like Microsoft Excel.
For conversion of measured half bridge or voltage output from the tilt sensor to corresponding tilt in terms
of gradient (i.e. mm per metre) the constants of a fifth order polynomial is provided in the test certificate.
The tilt or gradient using polynomial coefficients is given by:
Page | 6
Y = C0 + C1X + C2X2 + C3X3 + C4X4 + C5X5
Where, Y is the tilt or gradient in “mm per metre”, C0 through C5 are the polynomial constants as given in
the test certificate, and X is the sensor output measured in terms of CR1000 data units for raw half bridge
output sensors and volts for voltage output sensors.
Samples of Raw Output and Voltage Output sensor Test Certificates are attached at the end of this manual.
The calibration data shown in the test certificates is obtained by mounting the tilt or beam sensors on a
precision 0.500 m long beam.
2.6 Specifications
Specifications for 0.5° sensor (standard)
Measurement range : ± 0.5° ( ±8.73 mm per metre)

Non-conformance error (polynomial fit) : ± 0.3 mm per metre (standard)
Repeatability : ± 3 arc second
For Voltage output option only

Output voltage between OP+ and OP- : ± 1V dc nominal (differential) (The output voltage is
referenced to the O/P – terminal)
Output Common Mode Voltage : 2.5 V dc

Power supply voltage : 12 V dc
General Specifications
Sensor type : Electrolytic level type, uniaxial

Operating Temperature Range : -20°C to 55°C
Mechanical zero adjustment range : approximately ± 4°
Dimensions : See § 6, ‘Dimensions’
Output cable : 4-conductor shielded cable recommended.

(6 conductor shielded cable is required for thermistor
output if temperature measurement is desired)
Cable gland size for output cable : Accommodates cable OD sizes from 2.5 to 6.5 mm.
Temperature sensor : R-T curve matched thermistor, 3 kohms at 25°C,

provided between screw terminals marked T1 and T2.
Dale type 1C3001-B3 or equivalent. (Themistor
resistance vs. temperature table is provided at the end
of this manual.)
Page | 7
3 INSTALLATION OF TILT AND BEAM SENSORS
The EAN-31EL Tilt meter is housed in a weather proof die cast aluminium box and can be fixed to any
structure either directly using 4 mounting screws or fasteners or using a mounting kit that allows more
flexibility in mounting the tilt meter.
The beam sensor model EAN-31EL-B consists of an EAN-31EL tilt meter together with a 38mm x 38mm
square hollow aluminium structural section (beam) of specified length. The tilt meter may be factory fitted
on a beam or the two can be supplied separately for assembly at site. Standard beam lengths are 1m, 2m
and 3m but customer specified beam lengths between 0.5 m to 3m are also supplied.
The beam length in the specification refers to the gauge length of the beam in the mounted position. The
actual length of the beam is about 36 mm longer than the specified size due to the mounting brackets
provided at the end of the beams.
The beams can be fixed either horizontally or vertically as desired depending on the kind of tilt to be
measured. The sensor mounting bracket on the beam allows the tilt meter to be rotated by 90º so that
irrespective of the orientation of the beam the tilt meter can be mounted in a horizontal position.
3.1 Use of mounting kit
The tiltmeter and the beam sensors can be mounted directly to the anchors on wall or floor using the
mounting angles or brackets supplied with the tiltmeter or beam sensors. However, if the structure is likely
to deform in directions other than the rotational plane of the beams the use of components supplied in the
optionally available mounting kit will give better result.
Mounting kits are available for mounting the tiltmeter and beam sensors on wall or floor but have to be
ordered separately. Two mounting kits are required for mounting an individual beam sensor, but as
invariably the beam sensors are mounted linked in series for profiling settlement, the number of mounting
kits required is one more than the number of beams in a string. The mounting kit is common for wall, floor
or series mounting.
Each mounting kit consists a set of groutable 148 mm long all threaded stud anchor, with an angle bracket
and a set of nuts, spring washers, and plain washers. Another set of an all thread stud anchor of around
72 mm length and a set of nuts, plain washers, spring washers, disc spring washers, two single shouldered
and one double shouldered nylon washer is also included. The nuts and washers are supplied assembled
on the respective studs from which the correct position of these components during assembly can be noted.
The following tools and accessories are required for installation of beam sensors model EAN-31EL-B:
1. El-beam sensor mounting kits, one more than the number of beams to be mounted in series.
2. Two open-ended spanners of 17mm size and one open ended spanner of 13mm size, or two
adjustable wrenches.
3. One flat head screw driver with 4mm blade width.
4. Quick set epoxy grout for grouting the anchors in concrete.
5. Loctite 290 thread sealant or any other post assembly thread sealant.
6. Percussion or hammer drill with 12 mm drill bit.
7. Chalk line and coloured chalk.

8. Tape measure, longer than the maximum beam gauge length to be used.
9. Spirit level.
Page | 8
10. One of the following indicators for initial zero adjustment and/or monitoring:
i) Encardio-rite digital indicator model EDI-53ELV (for voltage output tilt sensors, can be used
for both initial zero adjustment and for local monitoring also).
ii) Encardio-rite El-beam indicator model EDI-53EL (for raw output sensors zero adjustment
only, not suitable for local monitoring);
iii) 3 ½ digit, 2 V range, indicator or multimeter (for voltage output sensors only, a separate 12 V
excitation voltage source is also required);
iv) CR-1000 datalogger (for both raw output or voltage output sensors but is suitable for remote
monitoring only).

The EAN-31EL Tiltmeter is used to measure simple rotation of structures in a single plane known as plane
of rotation. The plane of rotation is a plane parallel to the back side (surface) of the tiltmeter.
Depending on monitoring requirement the tiltmeter can be mounted in two different ways as described
below.
3.3.1 Rotation expected in the plane of the wall
If the structural rotation is expected to be in the plane of the surface of the wall, the tiltmeter is mounted
directly on the wall using the wall-mounting bracket. The use of wall mounting bracket allows coarse
levelling of the tiltmeter and the alignment of the anchors need not be very precise. The wall mounting
bracket is fixed to the wall using any commercially available 8 mm anchors / fasteners suitable for brick or
concrete wall.
Wall mounting
Wall
bracket
Tilt sensor
Front view
(Parallel to wall)
1. Using the wall mounting bracket as a template, mark position of two mounting holes. Visually
ensure that the two hole positions are aligned vertically as much as possible.
2. Drill two holes of diameter and depth suitable for the type of anchor to be used.
3. Fix the mounting anchors in holes following the manufacturer’s recommendation.
4. Mount the tiltmeter on the wall-mounting bracket.
5. Fix the wall-mounting bracket with the tiltmeter to the anchors on the wall.
3.3.2 Rotation expected in a vertical plane perpendicular to the wall
If the surface of the wall is expected to rotate in a vertical plane perpendicular to the wall the tiltmeter
should be mounted in an orientation as shown in the accompanying figure. The use of a mounting kit is
recommended as this allows easy adjustment of the tiltmeter orientation.
Page | 9
1. Remove tiltmeter cover. Fix the tiltmeter housing to Wall Fastener the
Wall clamp
mounting bracket using the two mounting screws. Wall mounting
bracket
Replace tiltmeter cover.
Tilt sensor
2. Drill 12mm diameter anchor holes to a depth of about 100
mm at the marked position. Top view
(Perpendicular to Wall)
3. Clear the hole of debris by blowing air or brushing.
4. Fix the longer (148 mm) anchors of the mounting kits with suitable epoxy grout in these holes such
that around 50mm length of anchors project out of the surface after fixing. Follow epoxy
manufacturer’s recommendation for fixing the anchors.
5. Allow the grout to set for the recommended time before handling.
6. Fasten angle brackets to the already grouted 148 mm anchors. Check the relative position of the
nuts, washers and angle brackets from the accompanying figure.
7. Fix the 72 mm stud anchors on the angle brackets fixed to the grouted anchors.
8. Fix the tiltmeter mounting bracket on the 72 mm stud anchors as shown in accompanying figure.
9. Lightly tighten the nuts so that the spring washers are slightly compressed.
10. Ensure that the tiltmeter cover surface is both, perpendicular to the wall as well as vertical.
11. Put a drop of Loctite 290 (post assembly thread locking compound) at the accessible junction of
each nut on the studs to lock them in place.
3.4 Installation of Horizontal Beam Sensor
3.4.1 Mounting the sensor assembly on the beam

The EAN-31EL-B, El-beam sensor is generally supplied as EAN-31EL tiltmeter mounted on a beam of
customer specified length. However, on specific customer request the tiltmeter and the beams may be
supplied separately. In such cases the sensor has to be mounted on the beam before the beams are fixed.
3.4.2 Installing the anchors
Horizontal beam sensors are used to find the relative vertical displacement of the two anchors at its ends.
The distance between the two anchors is known as the gauge length of the beam sensor. The beam
sensors are generally supplied in standard gauge lengths of 1, 2 or 3 m, but other customer specified
lengths are also available.
The beam sensors are generally used in a string with two beam sensors sharing a common anchor for
fixing.
1. Using a chalk-line and suitable coloured chalk mark a straight line along
which the beam sensors would be fixed. For wall mounting use a sprit
level and a beam to ensure that the line is as horizontal as possible. For
floor mounting the line should be aligned along the direction in which the
vertical settlement profile is desired.
2. With a tape measure, on the above line, mark off distances

corresponding to the gauge length of the beams to be fixed. It may be
noted that the beams are slightly longer than their gauge length. If
required, beams of different gauge lengths may be used in the same
string. Each mark corresponds to an anchor position.
3. Drill 12mm diameter anchor holes to a depth of about 100 mm at the marked position. Ensure that
the holes are as perpendicular to the wall or floor surface as possible.
Page | 10

7. Measure and record the exact centre distances between each anchor in the string.
Hint: As the anchor centres may be difficult to locate, measure the distance between the left side
of each anchor.
3.4.3 Fixing the beams
The El-beams are provided with two mounting angles on each side. The beams can be fixed to the anchors
directly using these mounting angles. However, if the strings of beams are subject to any torsional
movement the separately available beam mounting kits provide more flexibility and are strongly
recommended.
The figure below also shows the correct position of each component of the kit while mounting the beams.
nuts, washers and angle brackets from the drawing.
3. Slightly loosen the mounting angle at both sides of each beam by loosening the hex nut holding it
to the beam.
4. Fix the beams on the 72 mm stud anchors as shown in drawing. Use the double-shouldered nylon
washer between the mounting angles of two adjacent beams.
6. Tighten the bolt head holding the mounting angles to the beam-ends.
each nut on the studs to lock them in place.
Figure below shows how to mount the EAN-31EL-B horizontal beam sensor on wall using the standard
mounting kit.
Page | 11
Sensor compartment assly.

Side mounting angle
of beam
Wall
Nylon disc washers, Nuts,

plain & spring washers
Angle bracket
HORIZONTAL BEAM SENSOR MOUNTED ON WALL
Figure below shows how to mount the EAN-31EL-B horizontal beam sensor on floor using the standard
mounting kit.
Side mounting angle of beam

Angle bracket
Sensor compartment assly.
Angle bracket should be

at least 60 mm from floor
Floor
HORIZONTAL BEAM SENSOR MOUNTED ON FLOOR
3.5 Installation of Vertical Beam Sensors
Vertical beam sensors are used to find the relative horizontal displacement of the two anchors at its ends.
The distance between the two anchors is known as the gauge length of the beam sensor. Vertical beam
lengths are also available. The beam sensors are generally used in a string with two beam sensors sharing
Page | 12
a common anchor for fixing.

Vertical beam sensors consist of a standard EAN-31EL tiltmeter, an aluminium beam, 38mm x 38 mm
square and of specified gauge length and mounting hardware for mounting the tiltmeter on the beam,
generally packed separately for shipment.

1. Using a plumb line and suitable coloured chalk mark a vertical straight line along which the beam
sensors would be fixed.
2. With a tape measure, on the above line, mark off distances corresponding to the gauge length of
the beams to be fixed. It may be noted that the beams are slightly longer than their gauge length.
If required, beams of different gauge lengths may be used in the same string. Each mark
corresponds to an anchor position.
3. Drill 12mm diameter anchor holes to a depth of about 100 mm at the marked position. Ensure that

7. Measure and record the exact centre distances between each anchor in the string.
Hint: As the anchor centres may be difficult to locate, measure the distance between the left side
of each anchor.
3.5.2 Mounting the tiltmeter on the beam
Mount the tiltmeter on the beam as described below. The accompanying figure shows the details.
Clamp
tightening
screw
Clamp
Clamp nuts
Tiltmeter housing
Tiltmeter fixing screws
View from above
1. Slide the beam through the clamp opening of the mounting hardware. Lightly tighten the clamp
around the middle of the beam. The mounting angles of the beam should lie towards the clamping
screw side of the clamp opening.
2. Remove the tiltmeter cover.
Page | 13
3. Fix the tiltmeter to the mounting plate using the two fixing screws.
4. Clamp tiltmeter to the beam by tightening the two clamp nuts.

The sensor beams are provided with two mounting angles on each side. The beams can be fixed to the
anchors directly using these mounting angles. However, if the string of beams are subject to any torsional
recommended.
nuts, washers and angle brackets from the drawing.
3. Slightly loosen the mounting angle at both sides of each beam by loosening the hex nut holding it
to the beam.
4. Fix the beams on the 72 mm stud anchors as shown in drawing. Use the double shouldered nylon
washer between the mounting angles of two adjacent beams. The beams should be roughly
parallel to the wall surface.
6. Tighten the bolt head holding the mounting angles to the beam ends.
7. Check that the top of the tiltmeter enclosure is level. If not, then remove cover, loosen the two
mounting screws and rotate housing. Tighten mounting screws and replace cover when done.
each nut on the stud anchors to lock them in place.
Side view (Parallel to wall) Front view (Facing wall)
Page | 14
4 WORKING WITH HALF BRIDGE OUTPUT SENSORS (OPTION R)
The instructions in this section applies to sensors with raw half bridge output (output option R) only. See
the next section for initial adjustment of sensors provided with a voltage output.
The EAN-31EL and EAN-31EL-B are identical sensors except that EAN-31EL-B consists of a standard
EAN-31EL tiltmeter, mounted on an aluminium beam of 38mm x 38 mm square section.
4.1 Making connections

As the sensor is sensitive to very minute changes in tilt (of the order of 1 arc seconds) it is recommended
that the signal cable be connected to the sensor output terminals before zero adjustment is carried out.
After connecting the signal cable, it should be secured to the wall or any other stationary structural member
so that the cable cannot move and affect the sensor position.
Use a good quality 3 or 4 conductor shielded cable for making connections between the sensor and the
read out or datalogger unit. Encardio-rite type EC-0107 or Belden type 8723 cables are recommended for
this application.
A suggested wiring colour code for connecting above cables is shown below:
CR1000 Sensor
Wire colour Signal name
Terminal terminal
EX1 E+ Red AC Excitation
(or any of the 2
excitation
channels)
REF None Not used

(reference half bridge mid point)
H or L O/P Green Sensor output (AC)

(i.e. any SE
channel)
G GND Black Analog ground
Earth Drain wire Not connected to sensor.

Should be connected to ground at
datalogger end only if required, to
reduce noise pickup.
T1 Brown
Thermistor
T2 Blue
However, the user can use any other suitable cable or colour scheme without affecting performance.
The thermistor terminals are available on screw terminals marked T1 and T2. If temperature measurement
is required a 5 or 6 conductor cable (3 conductors for tilt sensor, 2 conductors for thermistor) would be
required.
4.2 Setting the DIP switches
The sensor printed circuit board (PCB) contains two banks of slide switches, SW1 comprising of two
switches and SW2 comprising of four switches. The individual switches are in ON position when the raised
Page | 15
actuators of the individual switches are towards the position marked ON on the switch. In the other position,
the switches are OFF.
SW2
E+ 1
ON
2
T1 REF 3
DIP
T2 O/P 4
1
ON
GND 2
SW1
Whenever the signal cable connected to the output terminals need to be tested for continuity or proper
wiring etc. using equipment like multimeter all switches should be set to the OFF position. Failure to do this
may cause serious damage to the electrolytic sensing element, as it is very sensitive to dc current or
voltage.
4.3 Initial or Mechanical Zero Adjustment
The tilt measurement range of EAN-31EL/ EAN-31EL-B Electrolytic beam sensors is very small, i.e. of the
order of ±1°. While mounting the sensor it is not practically possible to very precisely level the sensor. In
most cases the initial sensor tilt would be much greater than its specified tilt measurement range. It is very
important that the sensor element, SB in figure below, is initially set to its true horizontal (i.e. zero) position
after mounting so that its full tilt measurement range can be utilized.
The EAN-31EL/ EAN-31EL-B sensor is provided with a double thumb wheel arrangement, N1 and N2 that
allows the sensor to be precisely leveled after mounting. A level correction range of approximately ± 4°
from true horizontal is provided.
In principle, to level (i.e. zero adjust) the sensor a suitable read out unit is connected to the sensor output
terminals and the twin adjusting thumb wheels rotated to level the sensor holding beam while monitoring
the sensor output.
Enclosure SB N1
N2
SW2
E+ 1
ON
2
T1 REF 3
DIP
T2 O/P 4
1
ON
GND 2
SW1
Cable gland PCB
4.4 Setting sensor zero

A readout unit has to be connected to the sensor before zero adjustment so that the required amount of
adjustment can be displayed.
A CR1000 datalogger can be used as readout during zero adjustment if it is located adjacent to the sensor.
Otherwise Encardio-rite model EDI-53EL digital indicator can be used for zero adjustment. However, the
EDI-53EL is not recommended for regular tilt measurement for which a CR1000 or equivalent datalogger
is essential.
Page | 16
Follow the steps given below if an EDI-53EL indicator is used for zero adjustment:
1. The EDI-53EL indicator first needs to be set up to read the EAN-31EL tilt meter (half bridge output
version) output. The setup process is described in detail in the Addendum section of the EDI-53EL
Digital Indicator User’s Manual.
2. Connect the EDI-53EL indicator to the tilt meter using the signal cable as shown in the EDI-53EL
user’s manual and turn on the indicator. For more details on how to connect the EDI-53EL to the
tilt meter please see the EDI-53EL user’s manual.
3. When the EAN-31EL tilt meter is truly horizontal the EDI-53EL indicator will show 5.000. However,
as the EAN-31EL is a very sensitive tilt meter achieving a true zero reading is extremely difficult
and is also not required as we are more interested in monitoring change in tilt from a reference
date. The tilt meter should be considered to be set to horizontal if the display on the EDI-53EL
shows a value between 4.900 to 5.100.
4. If the EL-35 sensor shows a reading outside 4.900 to 5.100 rotate the two thumb nuts so that the
display shows a reading as near to 5.000 as possible. The display reading will become more
positive if the pointed end of sensor beam moves up and more negative when it moves down. DO
NOT loosen the sensor beam retaining screw, as it is a friction clutch that introduces a controlled
amount of friction to the beam movement. Finger tight the two thumbnuts to the sensor beam.
5. Wait for some time to ensure that the zero reading is stable otherwise a readjustment is required.
6. Put a drop of post assembly thread locking compound, such as Loctite 290, at the junction of the
thumb nut and threaded stud to prevent the thumb nuts from loosening.
7. The EDI-53EL readout unit can now be turned off and disconnected from the sensor board.
8. The EAN-31EL/ EAN-31EL-B beam sensor is now ready for use.
4.5 Reading the raw output sensors
EAN-31EL/31EL-B sensors with raw half bridge output behave as a resistive half bridge between the output
terminals. The electrolyte fluid used in the sensors gets irreversively damaged in the presence of even very
small dc voltages across the sensor terminals. It is very important that these sensors are always measured
using pure ac excitation voltage sources.
The EAN-31EL/31EL-B sensors can be read with any indicator or datalogger that has ac half bridge
measurement function. However, Encardio-rite recommends using Campbell Scientific (USA) CR1000
datalogger for acquiring data from a number of sensors for reasons mentioned below.
Although the EAN-31EL/31EL-B is a very sensitive, high resolution and high repeatability tilt sensor, it is a
very non-linear sensor. The sensor parameters also vary a lot between units. For these reasons each
sensor has to be supplied with an individual calibration sheet. The calibration data is usually supplied in
the form of fifth order polynomial coefficients. The polynomial coefficients can be used only if the
measurement at the user end is also carried out in the same way as it was done at the factory.
Encardio-rite uses a calibrated Campbell Scientific CR1000 datalogger for computing the polynomial
coefficients during calibration of these sensors. Users are advised to use the following CR1000 instruction
and parameters while writing their program.
1. Use BrHalf(Dest, Reps, Range, SEChan, ExChan, MeasPEx, ExmV, RevEx, SettlingTime, INteg,
Mult, Offset).
2. Use the following parameter values Reps = 1, Range = mV2500, SEChan = (any SE Channel),
ExChan = VX1, MeasPEx = 1, ExmV = 2500, RevEx = 1, SettlingTime = 1000, Integ = 250, Mult =
10, Offset = 0.
Page | 17
4.6 Connecting sensor to CR1000

The wiring between EAN-31EL/31EL-B sensor and the CR1000 depends on how many multiplexers are
being used in the system and the control program. However, a typical direct interconnection between a
single sensor and a CR1000 can be made as follows. The suggested colour codes are for Encardio-rite
type EC-0107 or Belden type 8723 cable.
CR1000 Sensor Wire Signal name

Terminal terminal colour
EX1 E+ Red AC Excitation

(or any of the 2
excitation channels)
REF Not used
H or L O/P Green Sensor output (AC)

(i.e. any SE channel)
G GND Black Analog ground
Earth Drain Not connected to sensor. Should be connected to

wire ground at datalogger end only to reduce noise pickup.
T1 Brown
Thermister (optional)
T2 Blue
The switches on the EAN-31EL/31EL-B sensor board should be set to the following position:
Bank Switch Switch position
SW2 1 ON
SW2 2 OFF
SW2 3 ON
SW2 4 ON
SW1 1 OFF
SW1 2 OFF
Use CR1000 function and parameters as given in section 4.5 above to measure the tilt meter output.
Page | 18
5 WORKING WITH VOLTAGE OUTPUT SENSORS (OPTION V)
The instructions in this section apply to sensors with voltage output (output option V) only. See the previous
section for initial adjustment of sensors with raw half bridge output.
The EAN-31EL and EAN-31EL-B are identical sensors except that EAN-31EL-B consists of a standard
EAN-31EL tiltmeter, mounted on an aluminium beam, 38mm x 38 mm square section.
5.1 Making connections

As the sensor is sensitive to very minute changes in tilt (of the order of 1 arc seconds) it is recommended
that the signal cable be connected to the sensor output terminals before zero adjustment is carried out.
After connecting the signal cable, it should be secured to the wall or any other stationary structural member
so that the cable cannot move and affect the sensor position.
Use a good quality 3 or 4 conductor shielded cable for making connections between the sensor and the
read out or datalogger unit. Encardio-rite type EC-0107 or Belden type 8723 cables are recommended for
this application.
A suggested wiring colour code for connecting above cables is shown below:
However, the user can use any other suitable cable or colour scheme without affecting performance.
CR-1000 terminal Sensor Wire colour Signal name

terminal
+12 Vdc E+ Red +12V dc to Sensor
L REF White Sensor output (Lo)
(of any channel)
H O/P Green Sensor output (Hi)
(of same channel)
G GND Black 0V/GND
Earth Drain wire Not connected to sensor.

Should be connected to ground at datalogger
end only to reduce noise pickup.
T1 Brown Thermister (optional)
T2 Blue
If the optional thermistor for monitoring sensor temperature is also provided the thermistor terminals are
available at screw terminals marked T1 and T2.
SW2
E+ 1
ON
2
T1 REF 3
DIP
T2 O/P 4
1
ON
GND 2
SW1
The electrolytic tiltmeter & beam sensors of voltage output type have basic tilt sensors integrated on a pcb
that contains the signal conditioning circuitry on it. This is connected with another pcb shown above. 6
screw terminals shown on it are for making external connections.
Page | 19
There are two pair of terminals on the four position terminal block. The terminals marked E+ and GND
have to be connected to a 12V dc power source. The sensor draws around 2 mA current from the power
supply.
The sensor output is available as a dc voltage between terminals marked O/P and REF. The output voltage
is bipolar, i.e. the O/P terminal can be either positive or negative with respect to the REF terminal. Signal
conditioner is internally adjusted to give nearly ±1 V dc at full-scale tilt value of ±0.5°).
Any suitable dc voltage source that can supply up to 2 mA current can be used as sensor supply. Any
ordinary 3½ digit multimeter with ±2 V measurement range can be used to measure the sensor output.
Most of the commercially available dataloggers have provision for providing the power supply required by
the sensor. The model CR1000 datalogger from Campbell Scientific, USA is one of the popular dataloggers
that is widely used by geotechnical instrumentation engineers worldwide for this application.
5.2 Initial or Mechanical Zero Adjustment
The tilt measurement range of EAN-31EL/31EL-B Electrolytic beam sensors is very small, i.e. of the order
of ±0.5°. While mounting the sensor it is not practically possible to very precisely level the sensor. In most
cases the initial sensor tilt would be much greater than its specified tilt measurement range. It is very
important that the sensor element, SB in figure below, is initially set to its true horizontal (i.e. zero) position
after mounting so that its full tilt measurement range can be utilized.
The EAN-31EL/31EL-B sensor is provided with a double thumb wheel arrangement, N1 and N2 that allows
the sensor to be precisely leveled after mounting. A level correction range of approximately ± 4° from true
horizontal is provided.
In principle, to level (i.e. zero adjust) the sensor a suitable read out unit is connected to the sensor output
terminals and the twin adjusting thumb wheels rotated to level the sensor holding beam while monitoring
the sensor output.
Enclosure SB N1
N2
SW2
E+ 1
ON
2
T1 REF 3
DIP
T2 O/P 4
1
ON
GND 2
SW1
Cable gland PCB
5.3 Setting sensor zero

A readout unit has to be connected to the sensor before zero adjustment so that the required amount of
adjustment can be displayed.
A CR1000 datalogger can be used as readout during zero adjustment if it is located adjacent to the sensor.
Otherwise a suitable 3½ digit multimeter with 2 V measurement range (not supplied by Encardio-rite)
together with a DC power supply (or a suitable battery) can be used with the sensor. Encardio-rite Digital
Indicator model EDI-53ELV can also be used for this adjustment.
Follow the steps given below for zero adjustment:
Page | 20
1. Connect the indicator / power supply or the CR1000 to the tilt sensor and turn on power to the
sensor.
2. If the indicator sensor shows a reading other than zero rotate the two thumb nuts so that the display
shows a reading as near to zero as possible. The display reading will become more positive if the
pointed end of sensor beam moves up and more negative when it moves down. DO NOT loosen
the sensor beam retaining screw, as it is a friction clutch that introduces a controlled amount of
friction to the beam movement. Finger tight the two thumbnuts, N1 and N2, to the sensor beam.
3. Wait for some time to ensure that the zero reading is stable otherwise a readjustment is required.
4. Put a drop of post assembly thread locking compound, such as Loctite 290, at the junction of the
thumb nut and threaded stud to prevent the thumb nuts from loosening.
5. The indicator / power supply or the CR1000 can now be turned off and disconnected from the
sensor board.
5.4 Reading the voltage output sensors
The EAN-31EL/31EL-B sensors can be read with any indicator or datalogger that has ± 2 V measurement
function. Most dataloggers will have some provision for supplying power to the tilt sensor. An additional 12
Vdc power supply would be required if a multimeter or an indicator is used as readout.
Although the EAN-31EL/31EL-B is a very sensitive, high resolution and high repeatability tilt sensor, it is a
very non-linear sensor. The sensor parameters also vary a lot between units. For these reasons each
sensor is supplied with an individual calibration sheet. The calibration data is usually supplied in the form
of fifth order polynomial coefficients. As a lot of processing is required to get accurate tilt data, a datalogger
with polynomial calculation function is strongly suggested for use with these tilt sensors.
5.5 Connecting Tiltmeter to CR1000

The wiring between EAN-31EL/31EL-B sensor and the CR1000 depends on how many multiplexers are
being used in the system and the control program. However, a typical direct interconnection between a
single sensor and a CR1000 can be made as follows. The suggested colour codes are for Encardio-rite
CR-1000 terminal Sensor Wire Signal name

terminal colour
+12 Vdc E+ Red +12V dc to Sensor
L (of any channel) REF White Sensor output (Lo)
H (of same channel) O/P Green Sensor output (Hi)
G GND Black 0V/GND
Earth Drain wire Not connected to sensor. Should be connected to

ground at datalogger end only to reduce noise
pickup.
type EC-0107 or Belden type 8723 cable.
If using the CR1000 use the following instruction to acquire data in your program.
1. Use function VoltDiff(Dest, Reps, Range, DiffChan, RevDiff, SettlingTime, Integ, Mult, Offset)
where use Reps = 1, Range = mV2500, DiffChan = (any differential channel), RevDiff = 0,
SettlingTime = 0, Integ = 250, Mult = 0.001, Offset = 0.
Page | 21
6 DIMENSIONS
6.1 EAN-31EL Tiltmeter

2- Mounting holes
52
80
113
125
TOP VIEW
(Without Cover)
Cover
Ø8.1
15
57
10
Ø4.8 SIDE VIEW Base

(All dimensions in mm.)
EAN-30EL, EL Tiltmeter
Enclosure Dimensions
6.2 EAN-31EL-B Beam Sensor (EAN-31EL Tilt meter + beam assembly)
38
110
100
L - 40 mm
L + 36 mm
All Dimensions in mm. `L` is beam gauge length

Dimensions shown are approximate.
Page | 22
7 THERMISTOR RESISTANCE VS. TEMPERAURE TABLE
7.1 Thermistor t ype: Dale 1C3001-B3
7.2 Temperature resistance equation

T = 1/[A + B(LnR) + C(LnR)3] - 273.2 oC
T = temperature in oC

A = 1.4051 x 10-3
B = 2.369 x 10-4
C = 1.019 x 10-7
20 1 .1k - 50 16 . 60k - 10 24 1 7 + 30
18 7 .3k - 49 15 . 72k -9 23 1 7 31
17 4 .5k - 48 14 . 90k -8 22 2 1 32
16 2 .7k - 47 14 . 12k -7 21 3 0 33
15 1 .7k - 46 13 . 39k -6 20 4 2 34
14 1 .6k - 45 12 . 70k -5 19 5 9 35
13 2 .2k - 44 12 . 05k -4 18 8 0 36
12 3 .5k - 43 11 . 44k -3 18 0 5 37
11 5 .4k - 12 10 . 86k -2 17 3 3 38
10 7 .9k - 41 10 . 31k -1 16 6 4 39
10 1 .0k - 40 97 9 6 0 15 9 8 40
94 . 48k - 39 93 1 0 +1 15 3 5 41
88 . 46k - 38 88 5 1 2 14 7 5 42
82 . 87k - 37 84 1 7 3 14 1 8 43
77 . 66k - 36 80 0 6 4 13 6 3 44
72 . 81k - 35 76 1 8 5 13 1 0 45
68 . 30k - 34 72 5 2 6 12 6 0 46
64 . 09k - 33 69 0 5 7 12 1 2 47
60 . 17k - 32 65 7 6 8 11 6 7 48
56 . 51k - 31 62 6 5 9 11 2 3 49
53 . 10k - 30 59 7 1 10 10 8 1 50
49 . 91k - 29 56 9 2 11 10 4 0 51
46 . 94k - 28 54 2 7 12 10 0 2 52
44 . 16k - 27 51 7 7 13 96 5 .0 53
41 . 56k - 26 49 3 9 14 92 9 .6 54
39 . 13k - 25 47 1 4 15 89 5 .8 55
36 . 86k - 24 45 0 0 16 86 3 .3 56
34 . 73k - 23 42 9 7 17 83 2 .2 57
32 . 74k - 22 41 0 5 18 80 2 .3 58
30 . 87k - 21 39 2 2 19 77 3 .7 59
29 . 13k - 20 37 4 8 20 74 6 .3 60
27 . 49k - 19 35 8 3 21 71 9 .9 61
25 . 95k - 18 34 2 6 22 69 4 .7 62
24 . 51k - 17 32 7 7 23 67 0 .4 63
23 . 16k - 16 31 3 5 24 64 7 .1 64
21 . 89k - 15 30 0 0 25 62 4 .7 65
20 . 70k - 14 28 7 2 26 60 3 .3 66
19 . 58k - 13 27 5 0 27 58 2 .6 67
18 . 52k - 12 26 3 3 28 56 2 .8 68
17 . 53k - 11 25 2 3 29 52 5 .4 70
Page | 23
USERS’ MANUAL
TILT BEAM SENSOR

MODEL EAN-41M
Doc # WI-6002.82 R00 | May 2012

Users’ Manual EAN-41M Tilt Meter
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Applications 1
2 THE TILTMETER 2
2.1 Operation 2
2.3 Installation of Horizontal Beam Sensor 2
2.4 Installation of Vertical Beam Sensors 5
3.3 Connecting sensor to Encardio-rite Digital readout unit 7
3.4 Connecting sensor to EDAS-10 data acquisition system 8
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite model EAN-41M tilt meter is suitable for monitoring inclination and vertical rotation of
structures. It is a high resolution tilt meter, is rugged in construction.
Tilt change in a structure may be caused by construction activity like excavation; tunneling or de-watering
of the area.
1.1 Applications
EAN-41M tiltmeter is widely used in following applications:

through the manual.

For understanding principle of tiltmeters: See § 2.1 `Principle of Operation’.

For installation of tiltmeters: See §2.3 Ìnstallation of Tiltmeters’.
For measurement with readout: See § 3 `Measurements.
For essential tools and accessories: See § 5 `Tools and accessories required for installation’.
Page | 1
2 THE TILTMETER
2.1 Operation
Model EAN-41M tilt meter is built around a Micro-
electro mechanical system (MEMS) having range of
±15°, with high sensitivity and accuracy mounted inside
an aluminium enclosure (beam). The tilt sensor
provides a bipolar DC voltage output proportional to the
sine of tilt angle measured by the tilt meter. The output
is zero volts for a truly vertical position.
The sensor provides a relatively low cost tilt measurement solution but still offers excellent resolution and
long term stability.
The tilt meter can be fixed to any vertical surface, horizontal floor or ceiling by means of suitable mounting
accessories consisting of brackets and anchors. These are available separately when ordered.
The EAN-41M is not intended for absolute determination of tilt of structures. Its measures change in tilt of
a structure to which the sensor is attached. The initial tilt reading for each tilt sensor is recorded after it has
been mounted on the structure to be monitored. Subtracting initial tilt reading from subsequent tilt reading
gives change in tilt of structure over a period of time.
Figure 1
Model EAN-41M tilt meter (figure 1) can be fixed to a vertical surface and horizontal surface.
2.3 Installation of Horizontal Beam Sensor

Horizontal beam sensors are used to find the relative vertical
displacement of the two anchors at its ends. The distance between the
two anchors is known as the gauge length of the beam sensor. The
beam sensors are generally supplied in standard gauge lengths of 1, 2
or 3 m, but other customer specified lengths are also available.
The beam sensors are generally used in a string with two beam sensors
sharing a common anchor for fixing.
1 Using a chalk-line and suitable coloured chalk, mark a straight line

along which the beam sensors would be fixed. For wall mounting
use a sprit level and a beam to ensure that the line is as horizontal
as possible. For floor mounting the line should be aligned along the
direction in which the vertical settlement profile is desired.
2 With a tape measure, on the above line, mark off distances
corresponding to the gauge length of the beams to be fixed. It may
be noted that the beams are slightly longer than their gauge length. Figure 2
If required, beams of different gauge lengths may be used in the
same string. Each mark corresponds to an anchor position.
Page | 2
3 Dill 12 mm diameter anchor holes to a depth of about 100 mm at the marked positions. Ensure that
4 Clear the holes of debris by blowing air or brushing.
5 Fix the longer (148 mm) anchors (figure 2) of the mounting kits with suitable epoxy grout in these
holes such that around 50 mm length of anchors project out of the surface after fixing. Follow epoxy
manufacturer’s recommendation for fixing all the anchors.
6 Allow the grout to set for the recommended time before handling.
7 Measure & record the exact centre to centre distances between each anchor in the string.
Note: As the anchor centre may be difficult to locate, measure the distance between the left sides
of each anchor.
The sensors are provided with two mounting angles on each side (figure 1). The beams can be fixed to the
anchors directly using these mounting angles. However, if the strings of beams are subject to any torsional
recommended.
The figure 3 also shows the correct position of each component of the kit while mounting the beams.
Figure 3
1 Fasten angle brackets to the already grouted 148 mm anchors. Check the relative position of the nuts,
washers and angle brackets from the drawing.
2 Fix the 72 mm stud anchors on the angle brackets fixed to the grouted anchors.
3 Slightly loosen the mounting angle at both sides of each beam by loosening the hex nut holding it to
the beam.
4 Fix the beams on the 72 mm stud anchors as shown in drawing. Use the double-shouldered nylon
5 Lightly tighten the nuts so that the spring washers are slightly compressed.
6 Tighten the bolt head holding the mounting angles to the beam-ends.
Page | 3
7 Put a drop of Loctite 290 (post assembly thread locking compound) at the accessible junction of each
nut on the studs to lock them in place.
Figure 4 shows how to mount the EAN-41M horizontal beam sensor on wall using the standard mounting
kit.
Side mounting angle

of beam
Wall

Angle bracket
HORIZONTAL BEAM SENSOR MOUNTED ON WALL
Figure 4
Figure 5 shows how to mount the EAN-41M horizontal beam sensor on floor using the standard mounting
kit.
Side mounting angle of beam

Angle bracket
Angle bracket should be

at least 60 mm from floor
Floor
HORIZONTAL BEAM SENSOR MOUNTED ON FLOOR
Figure 5
Page | 4
2.4 Installation of Vertical Beam Sensors

Vertical beam sensors consist of a standard EAN-41M tiltmeter, an aluminium beam, 38 mm x 38 mm

square and of specified gauge length and mounting hardware for mounting the tiltmeter on the beam,
generally packed separately for shipment.
1 Using a plumb line and suitable coloured
chalk mark a vertical straight line along
which the beam sensors would be fixed.
2 With a tape measure, on the above line,

mark off distances corresponding to the
gauge length of the beams to be fixed. It
may be noted that the beams are slightly
longer than their gauge length. If required,
beams of different gauge lengths may be
used in the same string. Each mark
corresponds to an anchor position.
3 Drill 12 mm diameter anchor holes to a

depth of about 100 mm at the marked
position. Ensure that the holes are as
perpendicular to the wall or floor surface as
possible.
4 Clear the hole of debris by blowing air or

brushing.
5 Fix the longer (148 mm) anchors of the

mounting kits with suitable epoxy grout in
these holes such that around 50 mm length
of anchors project out of the surface after
fixing. Follow epoxy manufacturer’s
recommendation for fixing the anchors.
6 Allow the grout to set for the recommended
time before handling. Side view (Parallel to wall) Front view (Facing wall)
7 Measure and record the exact centre to

Figure 6
centre distances between each anchor in
the string.
Note: As the anchor centre may be difficult to locate, measure the distance between the left sides
of each anchor.

Page | 5
recommended.
1 Fasten angle brackets to the already grouted 148 mm anchors. Check the relative position of the nuts,
2 Fix the 72 mm stud anchors on the angle brackets fixed to the grouted anchors.
3 Slightly loosen the mounting angle at both sides of each beam by loosening the hex nut holding it to
the beam.
4 Fix the beams on the 72 mm stud anchors as shown in drawing. Use the double shouldered nylon
washer between the mounting angles of two adjacent beams. The beams should be roughly parallel
to the wall surface.
5 Lightly tighten the nuts so that the spring washers are slightly compressed.
6 Tighten the bolt head holding the mounting angles to the beam ends.
7 Check that the top of the tiltmeter enclosure is level. If not, then remove cover, loosen the two
mounting screws and rotate housing. Tighten mounting screws and replace cover when done.
8 Put a drop of Loctite 290 or equivalent (post assembly thread locking compound) at the accessible
junction of each nut on the stud anchors to lock them in place.

The following tools and accessories are required for installation of beam sensor model EAN-41M.
1 Sensor mounting kits, one more than the number of beams to be mounted in series.
2 Two open-ended spanners of 17 mm size and one open ended spanner of 13 mm size, or two
adjustable wrenches.
3 One flat head screw driver with 4 mm blade width.
4 Quick set epoxy grout for grouting the anchors in concrete.
5 Loctite 290 threads sealant or any other equivalent post assembly thread sealant.
6 Percussion or hammer drill with 12 mm drill bit.

7 Chalk line and coloured chalk.
8 Tape measure, longer than the maximum beam gauge length to be used.
9 Spirit level.
Page | 6
The output of model EAN-41M tilt meter can be read by Encardio-rite model EDI-53UTM portable digital
read-out unit/datalogger. The EAN-41M can also be read or logged from a remote location by an automatic
data acquisition system like Encardio-rite model EDAS-10.
The tiltmeter is supplied with 2 m built-in six core cable. The cable can be terminated or extended to the
nearest measurement station through a suitable junction box.
When using with Encardio-rite model EDI-53UTM portable digital read-out unit/datalogger, a special
junction box having suitable circular connector is available from Encardio-rite.
3.1 Wiring details

Red + 12 V DC
Black - 12 V DC
Green 0 V (Power supply common)
Blue Output Channel A
Brown Output Channel B (only for biaxial tilt sensors)
White Output Common
3.2 Sign convention
The output voltage of the sensors are correspondingly positive for rotation in positive direction and
negative for negative direction.
For beam sensors the rotation is converted to a gradient reading using the distance between the anchors
at the two ends of the beam, also known as the gauge length. If L is the beam gauge length, and the angle
of rotation is α the gradient would be ‘tan(α)’. The perpendicular displacement ‘d’ of one end of the beam
considering the other end as fixed is given by
d = L tan(α)
For counter clockwise rotation of the beam the displacement is considered positive and for clockwise
rotation the displacement is considered negative.
_
Left anchor Positive (+) displacement means
considered right anchor has moved up.
as reference
Figure 7
3.3 Connecting sensor to Encardio-rite Digital readout unit
Tiltmeter can be connected to Encardio-rite model EDI-53UTM portable digital read-out unit/datalogger
through a break-out box. Break-out box provides the mating circular connector to read-out unit. The cable
can also be extended through the break-out box. The breakout box is also equipped with lightning arrestor.
Encardio-rite model EDI-53UTM portable digital read-out unit/datalogger reads sine of tilt angle when
parameter of typical tiltmeter is fed.
To read sine of tilt angle, set-up EDI-53UTM channel as follows:
Unit [UNITS] No units (key 9)
Page | 7
Initial reading [IR] Set to zero

Gauge factor [GF] 2/tiltmeter gage factor in volts/sin 90°
Coeff of X² Set to zero
Decimal point [DP] as required (recommended value is 4)
Tilt angle can be calculated by sin-1(observed value).
For bi-axial tilt measurement setup two beam sensors one for A-axis and one for B-axis in a similar manner.
3.4 Connecting sensor to EDAS-10 data acquisition system

Model EAN-41M tiltmeter requires external power source of ± 12 V DC (regulated) when connected to
EDAS-10 data acquisition system. For more than one tiltmeter to be connected, a set of two multiplexers
is required. 16 tiltmeters can be connected to each set. One multiplexer of each set will be used to provide
power supply to tiltmeter while other will be connected to EDAS-10 input.
Tilt measurement with EAN-41M and EDAS-10 datalogger
Power supply EAM 416 - (# 1)
+12V COM H1 H1
COM L1 L1
0V
COM H2 H2
-12V
COM L2 L2
Relay n EAN-41M
Red
+12V
Green
0V
Black
-12V
CR1000 EAM 416 - (# 2)
R1
H COM H1 H1 Blue
A AXIS
R2
COM L1 L1 White
L COM
COM H2 H2 Brown
H * B AXIS *
COM L2 L2
R4 *
L *
Relay n
R3 * Tilt Sensor
* Required for biaxial sensors only.

R1 = R2 = R3 = R4 = 100k ±0.01%, 5ppm.
Figure 8
Maximum input of EDAS-10 is ± 2.5 V; whereas output of tiltmeter is ± 4V. A high precision attenuator is
therefore required as shown in figure 8 below:
Use EDAS-10 function P2 to read output of tilt sensor in terms of 0.5 volts. The multiplier and offset should
be kept as 1 and 0 respectively. To get tilt angle refer to typical gage factor and formula given in relevant
test certificate. A sample test certificate for uni-axial sensor can be referred to in § 3.5.
Page | 8
TEST CERTIFICATE
Customer :
P.O. :
Item : Tilt meter Date :12.04.2007
Model : EAN-41M Temperature :32 ºC
Range : ±15º
Serial no. : 704007
Test data
Test SinA output Offset Error Non-
Position *Calculated **Ideal Observed corrected output 'A' axis Conformance
Arc degrees (V1) (V2) (V3) (V5) ( V5 - V2 ) % fs
(A) Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts
15 0.2588 4.1408 4.106 4.117 4.106 0 0
12 0.2079 3.3264 3.2984 3.308 3.297 0.0014 0.035
9 0.1565 2.5032 2.4822 2.492 2.481 0.0012 0.028
6 0.1046 1.6728 1.6587 1.668 1.657 0.0017 0.042
3 0.0524 0.8376 0.8306 0.84 0.829 0.0016 0.038
0 0 0 0 0.011 0 0 0
-3 -0.0524 -0.8376 -0.8306 -0.819 -0.83 0.0006 0.014
-6 -0.1046 -1.6728 -1.6587 -1.645 -1.656 0.0027 0.067
-9 -0.1565 -2.5032 -2.4822 -2.469 -2.48 0.0022 0.053
-12 -0.2079 -3.3264 -3.2984 -3.285 -3.296 0.0024 0.06
-15 -0.2588 -4.1408 -4.106 -4.095 -4.106 0 0
Sensor gauge factor : 15.866 Volts/Sin (90°) Max non-conformance (% fs) : 0.067
SinA =Observed output / gauge factor
A =Sin-1(observed output / gauge factor)
Wire colour Signal
Red +12 V (supply )
Black - 12 V (supply )
Green 0 V (supply )
Blue Output 'A' axis
Brown Output 'B' axis
White Output common
Note :
*Calculated output Voltage (V1) worked out based on nominal gauge factor of
16.000 V/ g (i.e. 16 V X Sin A).
**Ideal output Voltage (V2)' calculated from sine curve passing through sensitivity
calibration points (@ ±15º).
Page | 9
USERS’ MANUAL
PORTABLE TILT METER

MODEL EAN-70M
Doc # WI 6002.83 R01 | Feb 2012

Users’ Manual EAN-70M Portable tilt meter
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Applications 1
2 PORTABLE TILT METER 3

2.1.1 Tilt plate 3
2.1.2 Tilt meter 3
2.1.3 Readout unit 4
2.2.1 Reading horizontal tilt plates 4
2.2.2 Reading vertical tilt plates 5
2.2.3 Taking readings with Encardio-rite model EDI-53 UTM readout unit 6
2.3 Sample test certificate 8
3.1 Orientation of horizontal tilt plates 9
3.2 Orientation of vertical tilt plates 9
3.3 Mounting procedure of tilt plates 9
3.3.1 Anchors and screws 9
3.4 Tools & accessories required for installation 9
4 DATA REDUCTION 10
4.1 Displayed readings 10
4.2 Combining + and – readings 10
4.3 Calculating tilt 10
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite model EAN-70M portable high resolution uniaxial tilt meter is suitable for monitoring
inclination and vertical rotation in structures. It is rugged in construction and has excellent temperature
stability.
Tilt changes in a structure may be caused by construction activity such as excavation, tunnelling or de-
watering that may affect ground that supports the structure. Change in tilt may also result from loading of
a structure, such as loading of a dam during impoundment, loading of a diaphragm wall during excavation
or loading of a bridge deck due to wind and traffic. Data from tilt meter provides early warning of threatening
deformation, allowing time for corrective action to be taken or if necessary, for safe evacuation of the area.
EAN-70M tilt measurement system consists of two components – a portable tilt meter and a number of
Aluminium tilt plates. Individual tilt plates are Tilt plates are typically anchored to the structure, but may
also be bonded to a smooth clean surface i.e. granite, stone, tiles. To monitor tilt, the user places the
portable tilt meter on the mounted tilt plate and gets the tilt reading at that location. The portable tilt meter
has to be carried from one tilt plate to another to get readings at different locations. Although EAN-70M is
a uniaxial tilt meter it can be used to take biaxial measurements at any particular location by rotating the
tiltmeter by 90o on the tilt plate and taking a second reading.
In case automatic data acquisition is required, Encardio-rite offers a different tilt meter model EAN-90M for
use with data acquisition systems.
1.1 Applications
EAN-70M can be used for measurement of tilt of a structure along any vertical plane or along two
orthogonal vertical planes. Following are some examples of its use:
 Monitoring critical structures in zone of influence of cut and cover excavation/tunnelling activity.
 Monitoring inclination of dams, piers and piles etc.

 Monitoring performance of bridges.

WARNING! Warning messages calls attention to a procedure or practice that if not properly followed could
possibly cause personal injury.
The users’ manual is intended to provide sufficient information for making optimum use of the portable tilt
meter in different applications.
the manual.
of fundamentals of geotechnics. Novices may find it very difficult to carry on installation work.
The intricacies involved in installation are such that even if a single essential but apparently
Page | 1
minor requirement is ignored or overlooked, the most reliable of instruments will be rendered
useless.
A lot of effort has been made in preparing this instruction manual. However best of instruction
manuals cannot provide for each and every condition in field that may affect performance of
the sensor. Also, blindly following the instruction manual will not guarantee success.
Sometimes, depending upon field conditions, installation personnel will have to consciously
depart from written text and use their knowledge and common sense to find solution to a
particular problem.
Installation and measurements using portable tilt meter requires expertise. It is recommended
that potential users themselves practice all operations laid down in this manual by repeated
installations.
Page | 2
2 PORTABLE TILT METER

Model EAN-70M tilt meter is built around a precision accelerometer and suitable signal conditioning circuit
mounted inside an anodized aluminium housing. The accelerometer senses force of acceleration due to
gravity which is maximum when accelerometer is rotated to full 90o tilt position and is zero (minimum) when
the tilt angle of the accelerometer is 0o. For in-between angles, force experienced by accelerometer is
equal to product of sine of tilt angle and acceleration due to gravity. Tilt sensor provides a bipolar DC
voltage output proportional to sine of tilt angle measured by the tilt meter. Output is zero volts for a truly
vertical sensor.
The sensor provides a relatively low cost tilt measurement solution with excellent resolution, long term
stability and low thermal sensitivity.
The tilt meter can be used to measure change in tilt of any vertical surface or horizontal floor by placing it
on a suitable reference tilt plate, available separately.
The EAN-70M is not intended for absolute determination of tilt of structures. It measures change in tilt of
structures to which reference tilt plate is attached. Initial tilt reading for each tilt plate is recorded after it is
mounted on structure to be monitored. Subtracting initial tilt reading from subsequent tilt readings give
change in tilt of structure over a period of time.
2.1.1 Tilt plate
Tilt plate is a Aluminium disc about 142 mm in diameter. It is fixed
Peg 1 1
to the structure with four Hilti anchors HPS 1-6/15x40 # 260350 or Peg 4
equivalent. In case the structure has a smooth surface like marble 2
or granite, the tilt plate may be bonded to it by epoxy. The four pegs
on the tilt plate are used to orient the tilt meter. 4
Peg 2
Horizontally mounted tilt plate allows tilt readings in two planes that 3 Peg 3
are at 90o to each other. Vertically mounted tilt plate allows tilt
readings along one vertical plane only.
2.1.2 Tilt meter
Figure 1 tilt plate
Portable tilt meter is carried
from one tilt plate to another
to obtain tilt readings.
Alignment bars provided on
bottom, front and rear side of 2
tilt meter are used to
accurately position the tilt
meter on the tilt plate.
Two readings are taken for

each tilt plane - one reading Tiltmeter placed onto Tiltmeter placed against
in plus direction and another a horizontal tilt plate a vertical tilt plate
in minus direction. The base
plate of tilt meter has + and - Figure 2 Figure 3
marks to assist proper
orientation of the tilt meter.
Page | 3
2.1.3 Readout unit

Encardio-rite digital readout unit model EDI-53UTM is used to take observations from portable tilt meter. It
displays readings in terms of sine (tilt angle). The sign of reading is (+ or -) according to direction of tilt.
2.2 Taking readings

Allow time for tilt meter to adjust to ambient temperature. If possible, store tilt meter at same temperature
as at time of taking readings. Connect tilt meter to readout and power up. Take readings as follows:
2.2.1 Reading horizontal tilt plates
 Take reading in plane “A” first. In figures 4 below, pegs 1 and 3 define direction of plane “A”. Place “+”
end of tilt meter on peg 1, wait for reading to stabilize, and record it. Rotate tilt meter 180o and place
“-“ end of tilt meter on peg 1, wait for reading to stabilize and record it.
 Repeat steps two to three times to ensure readings are repeatable. In theory A+ and A - readings
should be identical except for different sign (+/-). In practice there is a difference up to 0.003 on
Encardio-rite readout unit EDI-53UTM between two readings due to bias of sensor and small
irregularities in tilt plate.
 Figure 4 below shows positioning of portable tilt meter on tilt plate for taking readings in plane A.
Take the A+ reading 2 2

with the + end of the
tiltmeter on peg 1 4
The alignment bars on the bottom

of the tiltmeter touch three pegs
Rotate the tiltmeter 2

180° and take the
A- reading with the 4 4
- end of the tiltmeter
on peg 1 3
Figure 4 taking readings in plane A
 Take readings in plane B next. Plane B is defined by direction of pegs 2 and 4. Place “+” end of tilt
meter on peg 4, wait for reading to stabilize and record it. Rotate tilt meter 180o and place “-“ end of
tilt meter on peg 4, wait for reading to stabilize and record it. Figure 4 & 5 explain positioning of portable
Page | 4
tilt meter on tilt plate to take readings in plane A and B respectively.

 Repeat steps two to three times to ensure readings are repeatable. In theory B+ and B - readings
should be identical except for different sign (+/-). In practice there is a difference up to 0.003 on
Encardio-rite readout unit EDI-53UTM between two readings due to bias of sensor and small
irregularities in tilt plate.
 Figure 5 below shows positioning of portable tilt meter on tilt plate for taking readings in plane B.
1 1
Take the B+ reading 2

tiltmeter on peg 4 4

1
Rotate the tiltmeter
180° and take the
B- reading with the 2
- end of the tiltmeter
on peg 4 4
3 3
Figure 5 taking readings in plane B
2.2.2 Reading vertical tilt plates

Vertical tilt plate allows reading in tilt plane A defined by direction of pegs 1 and 3. The tilt meter is aligned
using alignment bars at ends of tilt meter.
 Place “+” end of tilt meter against peg 1, wait for reading to stabilize and record it. Refer to figure 6.
 Place “-” end tilt meter against peg 1, wait for readings to stabilize and record it.
 Repeat these steps three times to ensure that you have good repeatable readings.
 Repeat steps two to three times to ensure readings are repeatable. In theory readings should be
identical except for different sign (+/-). In practice there is a difference up to 0.003 on Encardio-rite
readout unit EDI-53UTM between two readings due to bias of sensor and small irregularities in tilt
plate.
 Figure 6 below shows position of portable tilt meter on tilt plate for taking readings in vertical plane B.
Page | 5
Take the A+ reading 2

tiltmeter placed
4
against pegs 1, 3 & 4
3

Rotate the tiltmeter 180°

2
and take the A- reading
with the - end of the
tiltmeter placed against 4
pegs 1 , 3 & 2
3
Figure 6 taking readings in vertical plane

2.2.3 Taking readings with Encardio-rite model EDI-53 UTM readout unit
For detailed description, refer to User’s Manual WI-6002.67 on EDI-53 series Digital Indicators and EDI-
53 UTM Addendum.
Encardio-rite model EDI-53 UTM portable readout unit is a microprocessor based indicator that reads sine
of tilt angle when parameters of a typical portable tilt meter are fed.
The EDI-53 indicator can store initial data from up to 250 tilt plates so that change in tilt angle measured
from these tilt plates can be determined in proper engineering units.
The indicator has an internal non-volatile memory with sufficient capacity to store about 3600 readings
from any of the 250 programmed tilt plates in any combination. You can store either 3600 readings from
any one tilt plate or 14 sets of readings from all 250 tilt plates. Each reading is stamped with the date and
time the measurement was taken.
The stored readings can either be uploaded to a host computer using the serial interface or can be printed
out on any text printer equipped with a RS-232C serial communications interface. The setup information
Setting up the EDI-53 UTM indicator is easy as all the prompts and error messages are in plain simple
English language. Power on self tests and a separate test mode operation for more detailed diagnostics
are an added advantage.
Page | 6
An internal 6V rechargeable sealed maintenance free battery is used to provide power to the indicator. A
fully charged new battery provides nearly 60 hours of operation on a single charge. A separate battery
charger is provided with the EDI-53 UTM indicator to charge the internal battery from 230 V AC mains.
The EDI-53 UTM indicator is housed in a splash proof plastic moulded enclosure with weather proof
connectors for making connections to the transducer and the battery charger.
To read sine of tilt angle one has to setup EDI-53UTM channel as follows:
Units [UNITS] No units (key 9)

Gauge factor [GF] 2/portable tilt meter gage factor in volts/sin 90
Coeff. Of X2 Set to zero
Decimal point [DP] as required
Page | 7
2.3 Sample test certificate
TEST CERTIFICATE
Customer : Date :18.05.2007
P.O. : Temperature :33 ºC
Item : Portable tilt meter (Uniaxial)
Model : EAN-70M
Range : ±15º
Serial no. : 0705002
Test data
Test position Sin(A) *Calculated out- Observed output Average Best fit Error Non-conform-
arc degrees put (+A axis) (-A axis) Sin(A) ance
(A) (X) (V1) (V2) (V3) (V4) (Y) (X~Y) %fs

Volts
1 0.01746 0.2794 0.277 -0.281 0.279 0.01743 0.00003 0.011

2 0.03491 0.5586 0.555 -0.559 0.557 0.03491 0.00001 0.002
3 0.05236 0.8377 0.833 -0.837 0.835 0.05239 0.00003 0.011
6 0.10457 1.6731 1.664 -1.667 1.666 0.10460 0.00003 0.012
9 0.15650 2.5040 2.49 -2.491 2.491 0.15647 0.00003 0.010
12 0.20799 3.3279 3.309 -3.311 3.310 0.20799 0.00000 0.000
15 0.25892 4.1427 4.118 -4.122 4.120 0.25892 0.00000 0.000

Sensor gauge factor (G) 6.287E-02 Sin(90)/Volts
[Sensor gage factor for read out unit Model : EDI-53 UTM is 15.905 Volts/Sin (90)**]
Regression zero (R0) 1.770E-03
Calculation of tilt value (arc degree)
SinA =G * (R1 - R0) R1 =Current display reading in volts
A =Sin {G*(R1 - R0)}
-1 R0 =Regression zero
G =Gage factor
Wiring code :
Pin ID Signal
A + 12 V (supply )
B - 12 V (supply )
C 0 V (supply )
D Output 'A' axis
E Output 'B' axis NA
F Output common
Note :
*Calculated output Voltage (V1) worked out based on nominal gauge factor of
16.000 V/ g ( i.e. 16V X Sin A ).
**Calculation of GF shall be done as per notes given in test certificate of read out unit EDI-53 UTM.
Page | 8
Tilt plates are placed on structural members that are

representative of the large structure. When a single location
does not represent the structure, additional tilt plates are 1
placed at other locations.
Plane A
Number of tilt plates needed is determined by stiffness of the 2
structure and accuracy desired. Stiffer structures require
fewer plates. To achieve high accuracy, more plates are Plane B 4
required. Tilt plates are generally placed with one set of pegs
oriented to the expected direction of rotation. Location of tilt
3
plate shall be chosen such they are easily accessible.
Be careful to avoid installation of tilt plates on expensive
exteriors like marble, granite, tiles or special materials where
cost of make good would be very high.
1
3.1 Orientation of horizontal tilt plates
2 Orient vertically
Horizontal plates provide two planes of measurement. Plane mouned tilt
A is defined by pegs 1 & 3. Peg 1 is usually oriented towards plates with
4 peg1 at top
the direction of tilt. Plane B is defined by pegs 2 & 4. Peg 4 is
usually oriented toward the direction of tilt. 3
3.2 Orientation of vertical tilt plates
Vertical tilt plates should be aligned so that a vertical line can
be drawn through pegs 1 and 3.
3.3 Mounting procedure of tilt plates

Side view of the
Tilt plates can be fixed to the structure with anchors and tilt plate showing
screws or with grout. When tilt plate experiences temperature plate of tilt that
changes or weather, a combination of both anchors and grout will be measured
works best.
3.3.1 Anchors and screws
Figure 7 tilt plate mounting on
 Prepare a clean flat surface. horizontal surface
 Place tilt plate on structure in its intended orientation. Mark
location of anchors.
 Drill holes large enough and deep enough to accommodate anchors.
 Screw the tilt plate to anchors.

 Check and ensure correctness of horizontal and vertical position of tilt plate by using a sprit level.
3.4 Tools & accessories required for installation
 Hilti Impact fastener polyamide no. HPS 1-6/15X40 or equivalent
 Star head screw driver
 Sprit level 150mm Drill bit 6mm
 Power drill machine

 Ball point hammer, 250 gm.
Page | 9
4 DATA REDUCTION
One is generally interested in finding change in tilt of a structure. To find change in tilt, subtract initial tilt
from current tilt and convert result in degrees or displacement.
4.1 Displayed readings
Encardio-rite readout unit model EDI-53UTM display the readings in terms of sin (tilt angle).
Displayed readings = sin(A)

where A = angle of tilt
4.2 Combining + and – readings

Obtain two readings for each tilt plane, a “+” reading a “-“ reading. In the data reduction process, add the
two readings to eliminate sensor bias. Denote this value by “DIFF”(algebraic difference). A positive DIFF
value indicate tilt toward + end of tilt meter.
DIFF = (+ reading) - (- reading)

4.3 Calculating tilt
To convert the DIFF value to tilt in degrees, divide it by 2 because the DIFF value comprises of two
readings.
Take inverse sine of this value to get angle of tilt in degrees.
Angle of tilt = sin-1 (DIFF/2)
To calculate change in tilt use following formula:
Change in tilt = sin-1 (DIFF2/2) – sin-1(DIFF1/2)
where DIFF1 is the initial reading (tilt reading taken just after installation) and DIFF2 is the current tilt reading
(reading taken on a subsequent date)
Angle of tilt = sin-1 (DIFF/2)
To calculate change in tilt use following formula:
Change in tilt = sin-1 (DIFF2/2) – sin-1(DIFF1/2)
where DIFF1 is the initial reading (tilt reading taken just after installation) and DIFF2 is the current tilt reading
(reading taken on a subsequent date).
Page | 10
USERS’ MANUAL
TILTMETER
MODEL EAN-90M
Doc # WI 6002.82 R02 | June 2018

Users’ Manual EAN-90M Tiltmeter
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Applications 1
2 MODEL EAN-90M TILTMETER 2

2.1 Principle of operation 2
2.2 Tool and accessories 2
2.3.1 Installation on vertical surface 3
2.3.2 Installation on horizontal surface 4
2.3.3 Installation on roof 5
3.3 Connecting sensor to Encardio-rite Digital readout unit 6
3.4 Connecting sensor to EDAS-10 data acquisition system 7
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite model EAN-90M tilt meter is suitable for

monitoring inclination and vertical rotation of structures. It is a
high resolution tilt meter, is rugged in construction and has
excellent temperature stability.
Tilt change in a structure may be caused by construction activity
like excavation, tunneling or de-watering that may affect the
ground supporting the structure. Change in tilt could also result
from loading of the structure, such as loading of a dam during
impoundment, loading of a diaphragm wall during excavation or
of the area.
1.1 Applications
EAN-90M tilt meter is widely used in following applications:


This users’ manual is intended to provide you with sufficient information for making optimum use of tilt
meters and beam sensors in your applications.
through the manual.

table of contents tell you where to look for in this manual if you need some specific information.
Page | 1
2 MODEL EAN-90M TILTMETER
2.1 Principle of operation

Model EAN-90M tilt meter is built around a precision accelerometer
and suitable signal conditioning circuit mounted inside a stainless
steel housing. The accelerometer senses force of acceleration due to
gravity which is maximum when accelerometer is rotated to full 90
degree tilt position and is zero (minimum) when tilt angle of
accelerometer is zero. For in-between tilts, force experienced by
accelerometer is equal to product of sine of tilt angle and acceleration
due to gravity. The tilt sensor thus provides a bipolar DC voltage
output proportional to the sine of tilt angle measured by the tilt meter.
The output is zero volts for a truly vertical position.
The sensor provides a relatively low cost tilt measurement solution

but still offers excellent resolution, long term stability and a low
thermal sensitivity.
The tilt meter can be fixed to any vertical surface, horizontal floor or
ceiling by means of suitable mounting accessories consisting of
brackets and anchors. These are available separately when ordered.
The EAN-90M is not intended for absolute determination of tilt of

structures. Tilt meter measures change in tilt of a structure to which
the sensor is attached.
The initial tilt reading for each tilt sensor is recorded after it has been
mounted on the structure to be monitored. Subtracting initial tilt
reading from subsequent tilt reading gives change in tilt of structure
over a period of time.
2.2 Tool and accessories

Following tools and accessories are required for proper installation of
tilt meter.
1 Power drill
2 Concrete / Masonry drill bit 8 mm
3 Spanner 8/9, 12/13 mm

4 Allen key 5 mm
5 Cloth for cleaning

Model EAN-90M tilt meter can be fixed to a vertical surface, suspended from ceiling or mounted on the
floor with help of suitable mounting arrangement/bracket available from Encardio-rite as optional
accessories.
Page | 2
Installation on vertical surface

1 Drill a 8 mm Φ x 50 mm deep hole for Hilti anchor HSA M8 x 75 or equivalent on the wall of which
change in tilt has to be measured.
2 Insert anchor in the drilled hole.
3 Mount tilt meter bracket on the anchor and tighten slightly.

4 Fix tilt meter on the mounting bracket with two M6 x 20 mm Allen bolts.
5 Connect tilt meter with read-out unit.
6 Tighten anchor and Allen bolts/nuts so that the tilt meter reads almost vertical on the read-out unit.
4 5
1
2 Tilt meter 1
3 Wall mounting bracket 1
Wall
Figure 1: Tiltmeter on vertical surface
Page | 3
Installation on horizontal surface

1 Using mounting bracket as a template, mark position of two mounting holes.
2 Visually ensure that the two hole positions are almost aligned along the axis at which tilt has to be
measured.
3 Drill two 8 mm Φ x 50 mm deep holes for Hilti anchor HAS M8 x 75 or equivalent.
4 Insert anchors in drilled holes.
5 Mount tilt meter bracket on the anchors and tighten slightly.
6 Fix the tilt meter on mounting bracket with two M6 x 20 mm Allen bolts.
8 Tighten anchors and Allen bolts/nuts so that the tilt meter reads almost vertical on the read-out unit.
5 6

2 Tilt meter 1
3 Surface mounting bracket 1
4 Sensor mount plate 1
G. L.
Figure 2: Tiltmeter on horizontal surface
Page | 4
Installation on roof
1 Drill 8 mm Φ x 50 mm deep hole for Hilti anchor HSA M8 x 75 or equivalent on roof at which change
2 Insert anchor in the drilled hole.
3 Mount the tilt meter bracket on anchor and tight it slightly.

4 Fix the tilt meter on the mounting bracket with two M6 x 20 mm Allen bolts.
6 Tighten anchor and Allen bolts/nuts so that the tilt meter reads almost vertical on the read-out unit.
Roof
3
4
5
6
2
2 Tilt meter 1
3 Roof mounting bracket 1
Figure 3: Tiltmeter on roof
Page | 5
The output of model EAN-90M tilt meter can be read by Encardio-rite model EDI-53UTM portable digital
read-out unit/datalogger. The EAN-90M can also be read or logged from a remote location by automatic
data acquisition system like Encardio-rite model EDAS-10. The tilt meter is supplied with 2 m built-in six
core cable. The cable can be terminated or extended to the nearest measurement station through a suitable
junction box.
Note: For automatic logging by Encardio-rite model ESDL-30 datalogger, model EAN-92M Tiltmeter with
in-built SDI-12 digital interface is available.
When using with Encardio-rite model EDI-53UTM portable digital read-out unit, a break-out box (special
junction box) having suitable circular connector is available from Encardio-rite.
3.1 Wiring details

+
Red + 12V DC
Tilt
B
Black - 12V DC
-
Brown Output Channel B
+ A -
(only for biaxial tilt sensors)
White Output Common Tilt
Figure 4: Tiltmeter sign
3.2 Sign convention
Careful orient tilt sensor during installation. Make a note of the orientation. Uni-axial sensor measures tilt
only along axis ‘A”. Figure 4 shows a view from top and also convention used for direction/output signal
polarity.
3.3 Connecting sensor to Encardio-rite Digital readout unit

Tilt meter can be connected to Encardio-rite model EDI-53UTM
portable digital read-out unit/datalogger through a break-out
box. Break-out box provides the mating circular connector to
read-out unit. The cable can also be extended through the
break-out box. The breakout box is also equipped with lightning
arrestor.
Encardio-rite model EDI-53UTM portable digital read-out

unit/datalogger reads sine of tilt angle when parameter of typical
tilt meter is fed. To read sine of tilt angle, set-up EDI-53UTM
channel as follows:
Gauge factor [GF] 2/tilt meter gage factor in volts/sin 90°
Decimal point [DP] As required (recommended value is 4) Breakout box
For bi-axial tilt meter, set-up two channels (one for A-axis and one for B-axis) in similar manner.
Page | 6
3.4 Connecting sensor to EDAS-10 data acquisition system

Model EAN-90M tilt meter requires external power source of ± 12V DC (regulated) when connected to
EDAS-10 data acquisition system. For connecting tilt meter, a multiplexer model EAM-616 is required. 16
tilt meters can be connected to each multiplexer model EAM-616.
Maximum input of EDAS-10 is ± 2.5 V; whereas output of tilt meter is ± 4 V at 150 proportional to Sin of
angle. A high precision attenuator is therefore required as shown in diagram below:
Tilt measurement with Tilt sensor and DAS

EAM 616 2C8
P S card
COM CH.
1 1
+12V
2 2
G
3 3
-12V
Tilt sensor
4 4
Red
5 5 +12V
Green
6 6 0V
Black
-12V
Blue
A AXIS
SW-12V
G
SE R1
Brown
H B AXIS *
R2 White
COM
L *
Datalogger R4 *
* * Required for biaxial sensors only.
R3 * R1 = R2 = R3 = R4 = 100k ±0.01%, 5ppm.
Figure 5: Tiltmeter connected to DAS
Use EDAS-10 function P2 to read output of tilt sensor in terms of 0.5 volts. The multiplier and offset should
be kept as 1 and 0 respectively. To get tilt angle refer to typical gage factor and formula given in relevant
test certificate. A sample test certificate for uni-axial sensor can be referred to in section 3.5.
Page | 7

TEST CERTIFICATE
Item : Tilt meter (Uniaxial) Date : 14.03.2018
Model : EAN-90M Temperature : 27 ºC
Range : ±15º
Serial no. : xxxxxxx
Next calibration due on :13.03.2019
Test data
Test SinA *Calculated **Ideal Observed Offset Error Non-
position output output output corrected output 'A' axis conformance
Arc degrees 'A' axis
(V1) (V2) (V3) (V4) ( V4 - V2 ) % fs
15 0.2588 4.1408 4.1403 4.1404 4.1399 0.0004 0.010

12 0.2079 3.3264 3.3260 3.3259 3.3254 0.0006 0.014
9 0.1565 2.5032 2.5029 2.5027 2.5022 0.0007 0.017
6 0.1046 1.6728 1.6726 1.6721 1.6716 0.0010 0.024
3 0.0524 0.8376 0.8375 0.8372 0.8367 0.0008 0.019
0 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0005 0.0000 0.0000 0.000
-3 -0.0524 -0.8376 -0.8375 -0.8371 -0.8376 0.0001 0.002
-6 -0.1046 -1.6728 -1.6726 -1.6725 -1.6730 0.0004 0.010
-9 -0.1565 -2.5032 -2.5029 -2.5028 -2.5033 0.0004 0.010
-12 -0.2079 -3.3264 -3.3260 -3.3260 -3.3265 0.0005 0.012
-15 -0.2588 -4.1408 -4.1403 -4.1402 -4.1407 0.0004 0.010
Sensor gauge factor : 15.998 Volts/Sin(90)

SinA = Observed output / gauge factor
A= Sin-1(observed output / gauge factor)
Wire colour Signal
Red +12 V (supply )
Black - 12 V (supply )
Green 0 V (supply )
Blue Output 'A' axis
Brown N/A
White Output common
Note : * Calculated output Voltage (V1) worked out based on nominal gauge factor of 16.000 V/g
(i.e. 16V X Sin A).
Ideal output Voltage (V2)' calculated from sine curve passing through sensitivity calibration points
**
(@ ±15º) .
Tested by
Page | 8
USERS’ MANUAL
TILT METER & BEAM SENSOR

(BOX TYPE)
MODEL EAN-91M (TILT METER) & EAN-91M-B (BEAM SENSOR)
Doc. # WI 6002.123 Rev. 0 | Dec 2019

International: UAE | Qatar | Bahrain | Greece | Singapore | USA | Bhutan
Users’ Manual EAN-91M Tiltmeter; EAN-91M-B Beam sensor
Content
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Applications 1
2.1 Sample test certificates 4
3.2 Installation on a vertical surface 5
3.2.1 Installation of tilt meter on the swivel bracket 5
3.2.2 Procedure 6
3.3 Installation of horizontal beam sensors 7
3.3.4 Installation of vertical beam sensors 9
3.4 Protection of tilt meter 11
3.5 Other considerations 11
4.3 Zero adjustment of tilt meter 12
4.4 Measurement using Encardio-rite Digital readout unit 12
ANNEXURE 1: WALL MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT FOR FIXING EAN-91M-B BEAM SENSOR 14
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite model EAN-91M/EAN-91M-B (with beam) tilt meter is suitable for long term monitoring
inclination and vertical rotation of structures.
Continuous data logging and real-time monitoring helps to provide early warning in case of impending
failure allowing time for corrective action to be taken or if necessary for safe evacuation of the area.
Tilt change in a structure may be caused by construction activity like excavation; tunneling or de-watering
of the area.
1.1 Applications

WARNING! Warning messages calls attention to a procedure or practice that if not properly followed, it
CAUTION: Caution messages calls attention to a procedure or practice, that if not properly followed, it
may result in loss of data or damage to equipment.
NOTE: Note contains important information and is set off from the regular text to draw the users’
attention.

meters in your applications.
the manual.
useless.
Page | 1
particular problem.
Installation of a tilt meter requires expertise. It is recommended that potential users

landslides, earthquakes, traffic, construction activity around site including blasting, tides near
sea coasts, fill levels, excavation, sequence of construction and changes in personnel etc.
These factors must always be observed and recorded as they help in correlating data later on
and may give an early warning of potential danger or problems.
Page | 2
Model EAN-91M tilt meter (Figure 1) is built around a Micro-Electro Mechanical System (MEMS)
technology tilt sensor having range of ±15°, with high sensitivity and accuracy mounted inside a compact
weatherproof enclosure. The tilt sensing module provides a bipolar DC voltage output proportional to the
sine of tilt angle measured by the beam. The output is zero volts for a truly vertical or horizontal position.
Enclosure
(Size: 125 x 80 x 57 mm)
Tilt sensor
6-core cable
Cable gland
Figure 1: EAN-91M tilt meter
The EAN-91M tilt meter is not intended for absolute determination of tilt of structures. It measures change
in tilt of a structure to which it is attached. The initial tilt reading for each tilt sensor is recorded after it has
been mounted on the structure to be monitored. Subsequent tilt readings will be displayed w.r.t. initial
reading.
Page | 3
2.1 Sample test certificates
Page | 4
The EAN-91M tilt meter (uniaxial) is used to measure simple rotation of structures in a single plane known
as plane of rotation. The plane of rotation is a plane parallel to the backside (surface) of the tiltmeter.
Depending on monitoring requirement, the tiltmeter can be mounted in two different ways as described
below.

3.1.1. Connect the 6-core cable to the tilt meter through screw terminal as per wiring details shown in
Figure 1.
3.1.2. Connect the tilt meter to the digital readout unit or data acquisition system and configure to display
the readings (refer to § 4.4/§ 4.5)
3.1.3. Tilt the sensor towards +ve side (counter clockwise) on the swivel bracket provided (Figure 9),
output of the sensor will increase in positive direction (+ve sign is marked on the right side of top
of enclosure). Similarly, the output will decrease when sensor is tilted in - ve direction (clockwise).
3.2 Installation on a vertical surface
3.2.1 Installation of tilt meter on the swivel bracket

• Installation parallel to the wall
If the structural rotation is expected to be in the plane of the surface of the wall, the tilt meter is mounted
directly on the wall using the wall-mounting bracket as shown in Figure 2. The use of wall mounting bracket
allows coarse levelling of the tilt meter and the alignment of the anchors need not be very precise. The
wall-mounting bracket is fixed to the wall using any commercially available 8 mm anchors/fasteners suitable
for brick or concrete wall.
Figure 2: Installation parallel to the wall
Page | 5
• Installation perpendicular to the wall

If the surface of the wall is expected to rotate in a vertical plane perpendicular to the wall, the tilt meter
should be mounted in an orientation as shown in the Figure 3. The use of a mounting kit is recommended,
as this allows easy adjustment of the tilt meter orientation.
Figure 3: Installation perpendicular to the wall
3.2.2 Procedure
Installation procedure for both type of mounting arrangements is mentioned below:
• For installation parallel to the wall - using the wall mounting swivel bracket as a template, mark
locations of two mounting holes. Visually ensure that position of the two holes are aligned vertically
using a spirit level.
• For installation perpendicular to the wall - using the wall mounting swivel bracket as a template, mark
• Drill two holes for 8 mm diameter anchors/fasteners and depth suitable for the type of anchor to be
used.
• Fix the mounting anchors in holes following the manufacturer’s recommendation.

• Mount the tilt meter on the wall-mounting bracket.
• Fix the wall-mounting bracket with the tilt meter to the anchors on the wall.
Page | 6
3.3 Installation of horizontal beam sensors

The EAN-91M-B, MEMS beam tilt sensor is generally supplied as EAN-91M tiltmeter mounted on a beam
of customer specified length. However, on specific customer request the tiltmeter and the beams may be

fixing.
• Using a chalk-line and suitable colored chalk mark a straight line along which the beam sensors would
be fixed. For wall mounting use a sprit level and a beam to ensure that the line is as horizontal as
possible. For floor mounting the line should be aligned along the direction in which the vertical
settlement profile is desired.
• With a tape measure, on the above line, mark off distances corresponding to the gauge length of the
beams to be fixed. It may be noted that the beams are slightly longer than their gauge length. If
required, beams of different gauge lengths may be used in the same string. Each mark corresponds
to an anchor position.
• Drill 12mm diameter anchor holes to a depth of about 100 mm at the marked position. Ensure that the
holes are as perpendicular to the wall or floor surface as possible.
• Clear the hole of debris by blowing air or brushing.

• Fix the longer (148 mm) anchors of the mounting kits with suitable epoxy grout in these holes such
that around 50 mm length of anchors project out of the surface after fixing. Follow epoxy manufacturer’s
• Allow the grout to set for the recommended time before handling.
• Measure and record the exact center distances between each anchor in the string.
Hint: As the anchor centers may be difficult to locate, measure the distance between the left side of
each anchor.

The beam tilt sensors are provided with two mounting angles on each side. The beams can be fixed to the
movement, the beam mounting kits provide more flexibility and are strongly recommended.
The Figure 4 below shows the correct position of each component of the kit while mounting the beams.
• Fasten angle brackets to the already grouted anchors. Check the relative position of the nuts, washers
and angle brackets from the drawing.
• Fix the 72 mm stud anchors on the angle brackets fixed to the grouted anchors.
• Slightly loosen the mounting angle at both sides of each beam by loosening the hex nut holding it to
the beam.
Page | 7
• Fix the beams on the 72 mm stud anchors as shown in drawing. Use the double-shouldered nylon
• Lightly tighten the nuts so that the spring washers are slightly compressed.
• Tighten the bolt head holding the mounting angles to the beam-ends.
• Put a drop of Loctite 290 (post assembly thread locking compound) at the accessible junction of each
Figure 4: Installation of the anchor and the nuts & washer set
Figure 5 below shows how to mount the EAN-91M-B horizontal beam sensor on wall using the standard
mounting kit.
Figure 5: Installation of the EAN-91M-B sensor horizontally on the wall
Page | 8
Error! Reference source not found. below shows how to mount the EAN-91M-B horizontal beam sensor
on floor using the standard mounting kit if the installation is in required in strings.
If an individual beam sensor is to be installed, please refer to Figure 7 for installation details of the anchors,
nut and washer.
Figure 6: Installation of EAN-91M-B sensor horizontally on the floor
Figure 7: Installation of an individual EAN-91M-B sensor on the wall
3.3.4 Installation of vertical beam sensors

square and of specified gauge length and mounting hardware for mounting the tiltmeter on the beam.
Page | 9

1. Using a plumb line and suitable colored chalk mark a vertical straight line along which the beam
2. With a tape measure, on the above line, mark off distances corresponding to the gauge length of the
3. Drill 12 mm diameter anchor holes to a depth of about 100 mm at the marked position. Ensure that the

7. Measure and record the exact center distances between each anchor in the string.
each anchor.
Figure 8: Installation of an individual EAN-91M-B on a vertical beam
Page | 10

recommended.
• Fasten angle brackets to the already grouted 148 mm anchors. Check the relative position of the nuts,
• Fix the 72 mm stud anchors on the angle brackets fixed to the grouted anchors.
• Slightly loosen the mounting angle at both sides of each beam by loosening the hex nut holding it to
the beam.
• Fix the beams on the 72 mm stud anchors as shown in drawing. Use the double shouldered nylon
• Lightly tighten the nuts so that the spring washers are slightly compressed.
• Tighten the bolt head holding the mounting angles to the beam ends.
• Check that the top of the tiltmeter enclosure is level. If not, then remove cover, loosen the two mounting
screws and rotate housing. Tighten mounting screws and replace cover when done.
• Put a drop of Loctite 290 (post assembly thread locking compound) at the accessible junction of each
nut on the stud anchors to lock them in place.
3.4 Protection of tilt meter
Avoid installation of tilt meter in parts of the structure exposed to direct sunlight. If this is not feasible, a box
made from Thermocole or similar heat insulating material should be installed covering the tilt meter and
protecting it from direct sunlight.
If certain degree of mechanical protection is also required, wooden or fibreglass protection boxes may be
considered. Heat insulating tape can be fixed to the inner surface of such boxes for thermal insulation.
3.5 Other considerations

Install tilt meter on a structural member of a building and not on the façade or boundary wall which may
behave in a different manner than the main building. Do not install it at a location having vibrations, for
example caused by a heavy rotary machinery. Avoid installing at location where it can be vandalized or get
hit by pedestrians.
Page | 11
The output of model EAN-91M tilt meter can be read by EDI-53 UTM or logged from a remote location by
an automatic data acquisition system like Encardio-rite model ESDL-30/EDAS-10.
A 6-core cable can be terminated or extended to the nearest measurement station through a suitable
junction box.
4.1 Wiring details

Cable colour (CS-0703) Description
Red +12 V DC (supply)
Black -12 V DC (supply)

Brown Not to be used for uniaxial tilt sensors
White Output Common
4.2 Sign convention

Carefully orient the tilt sensor during installation. A (+) sign is on the top right side of the enclosure. If the
enclosure is tilted counter clockwise then readings shows an increase (with positive sign) - Figure 9 (left).
If the enclosure tilts clockwise then readings shows a decrease (with a negative sign) -Figure 9 (right).
After the enclosure is fixed to the structure, the sensor is adjusted to the zero reading (initial). Subtracting
the initial tilt reading from the subsequent tilt reading gives change in tilt of structure over a period of time.
4.3 Zero adjustment of tilt meter
A+ A-
Figure 9 Sign Convention of tilt for EAN-91M tilt meter
Connect the EAN-91M/EAN-91M-B tilt meter with the datalogger and adjust the sensor housing/beam to
make it as close to zero and then fix it firmly such that it does not get disturbed.
4.4 Measurement using Encardio-rite Digital readout unit

Tilt meter can be connected to Encardio-rite model EDI-53UTM portable digital read-out unit/datalogger
through a break-out box. Break-out box provides the mating circular connector to read-out unit. The cable
can also be extended through the break-out box. The breakout box is also equipped with lightning arrestor.
Page | 12
Encardio-rite model EDI-53UTM portable digital read-out unit/datalogger reads sine of tilt angle when
parameter of typical tilt meter is fed. To read sine of tilt angle, set-up EDI-53UTM channel as follows:
Gauge factor [GF] 2/tilt meter gage factor in volts/sin 90°

Decimal point [DP] as required (recommended value is 4)

Model EAN-91M tilt meter requires external power source of ± 12V DC (regulated) when connected to
EDAS-10 data acquisition system. For connecting tilt meter, a multiplexer model EAM-616 is required. 16
tilt meters can be connected to each multiplexer model EAM-616.
Maximum input of EDAS-10 is ± 2.5 V; whereas output of tilt meter is ± 4V at 15° proportional to sine of
angle. A high precision attenuator is therefore required as shown in diagram below:
Tilt measurement with Tilt sensor and DAS

EAM 616 2C8
P S card
COM CH.
1 1
+12V
2 2
G
3 3
-12V
Tilt sensor
4 4
Red
5 5 +12V
Green
6 6 0V
Black
-12V
Blue
A AXIS
SW-12V
G
SE R1
Brown
H B AXIS *
R2 White
COM
L *
Datalogger R4 *
* * Required for biaxial sensors only.
R3 * R1 = R2 = R3 = R4 = 100k ±0.01%, 5ppm.
Figure 10: Tilt meter connected to DAS
To get tilt angle refer to typical gage factor and formula given in relevant test certificate. A sample test
certificate for uni-axial sensor can be referred to in section 2.1
Campbell Scientific’s relevant Users’ Manual.
Page | 13
ANNEXURE 1: WALL MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT FOR FIXING EAN-91M-B BEAM

SENSOR
Page | 14
USERS’ MANUAL
TILT METER & BEAM SENSOR

(BOX TYPE WITH SDI-12 INTERFACE)
MODEL EAN-93M & EAN-93M-B
Doc. # WI 6002.108 Rev. 1 | Jan 2019

Users’ Manual EAN-93M/93M-B Tilt meter & beam sensor (Box type with SDI-12 interface)
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Applications 1
2.1 Sample test certificates 4
3.2 Installation on a vertical surface 6
3.2.1 INSTALLATION OF TILT METER ON THE SWIVEL BRACKET 6

3.3 Installation of horizontal beam sensors 8
3.4 Installation of vertical beam sensors 10
3.5 Protection of tilt meter 12
3.6 Other considerations 12
4.3 Zero adjustment of tilt meter 13
4.4 Measurement using ESDL-30UNI datalogger 13
4.5.1 Program for SDI-12 sensor 16
4.6 Environmental factors 18
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite model EAN-93M/EAN-93M-B (with beam) SDI-12 tilt meter is suitable for long term monitoring
inclination and vertical rotation of structures.
Continuous data logging and real-time monitoring helps to provide early warning in case of impending
failure allowing time for corrective action to be taken or if necessary for safe evacuation of the area.
Tilt change in a structure may be caused by construction activity like excavation, tunnelling or de-watering
of the area.
1.1 Applications
 Monitoring safety of structures around zones of excavation or tunnelling.

WARNING! Warning messages calls attention to a procedure or practice that if not properly followed,
attention.

the manual.
useless.
Page | 1
particular problem.

and also may give an early warning of potential danger or problems.
For understanding principle of tilt meters: See § 2 `General Description’

For specifications of tilt meters: See § 2.1 `Specifications’
For installation of tilt meters: See § 3 Ìnstallation procedures’
For measurement with datalogger: See § 4
Page | 2
Model EAN-93M tilt meter (Figure 1) is built around a around Micro-Electro Mechanical System (MEMS)
technology tilt sensor having range of ±15°, with high sensitivity and accuracy mounted inside a compact
weatherproof enclosure. The tilt sensing module provides a bipolar DC voltage output proportional to the
sine of tilt angle measured by the beam. It is then digitized through the in-built SDI-12 interface. The output
is zero volts for a truly vertical or horizontal position.
SDI-12 is the acronym for "Serial Data Interface at 1200 Baud". SDI-12 is an asynchronous, ASCII, serial
Signal conditioner card Terminal connector card
Enclosure
(Size: 125 x 80 x 57 mm)
Tilt sensor
3-core cable
Cable gland
Figure 1 EAN-93M tilt meter
communications protocol. These instruments are typically low-power (12 volt), are often used in remote
locations, and usually communicate with a data logger or other data acquisition device. In this master-slave
configuration, the data logger or data acquisition device typically acts as the master (SDI-12 recorder and
interrogator) to the data monitoring instruments, which are the slaves (SDI-12 sensors). One master can
communicate with multiple slaves, so the SDI-12 protocol requires that each device in the serial network
be identified with a unique address, which is represented by a single ASCII character.
This communication is achieved by digital communications along a single serial line. The digital addressing
system allows an SDI-Recorder to send out an address over a single line that is occupied by sensors with
only the pre-configured sensor matching that address will respond (handshake), while the other sensors
on the same line will not respond until called and typically stay in "sleep mode"(low power mode), until
called (often in a sequence) at a later time by the SDI Recorder (Master).
The EAN-93M tilt meter is not intended for absolute determination of tilt of structures. It measures change
in tilt of a structure to which it is attached. The initial tilt reading for each tilt sensor is recorded after it has
been mounted on the structure to be monitored. Subsequent tilt readings will be displayed w.r.t. initial
reading.
Page | 3
2.1 Sample test certificates
Page | 4
Page | 5
The EAN-93M tilt meter (uniaxial) is used to measure simple rotation of structures in a single plane known
as plane of rotation. The plane of rotation is a plane parallel to the back side (surface) of the tiltmeter.
Biaxial tiltmeter also measures rotation in the plane perpendicular to the above.
Depending on monitoring requirement the tiltmeter can be mounted in two different ways as described
below.
3.1.1 Connect the 3-core cable to the tilt meter through screw terminal as per wiring details shown in
Figure 1.
3.1.2 Connect the tilt meter to the datalogger or data acquisition system and configure to display the
readings on the PC (refer to § 4.4/§ 4.5)
3.1.3 Tilt the sensor towards +ve side (counter clockwise) on the swivel bracket provided (Figure 8),
output of the sensor will increase in positive direction (+ve sign is marked on the right side of top
of enclosure). Similarly, the output will decrease when sensor is tilted in - ve direction (clockwise).
3.2 Installation on a vertical surface

3.2.1 Installation of tilt meter on the swivel bracket
3.2.1.1 Installation parallel to the wall

If the structural rotation is expected to be in the plane of the surface of the wall, the tilt meter is mounted
directly on the wall using the wall mounting bracket as shown in Figure 2. The use of wall mounting bracket
allows coarse levelling of the tilt meter and the alignment of the anchors need not be very precise. The wall
mounting bracket is fixed to the wall using any commercially available 8 mm anchors/fasteners suitable for
brick or concrete wall.
Figure 2 Installation parallel to the wall
Page | 6
3.2.1.2 Installation perpendicular to the wall

If the surface of the wall is expected to rotate in a vertical plane perpendicular to the wall, the tilt meter
should be mounted in an orientation as shown in the Figure 3. The use of a mounting kit is recommended,
as this allows easy adjustment of the tilt meter orientation.
Figure 3 Installation perpendicular to the wall
3.2.2 Installation procedure on wall (parallel or perpendicular)
Installation procedure for both type of installations will be same and is mentioned below:
 For installation parallel to the wall - using the wall mounting swivel bracket as a template, mark
 For installation perpendicular to the wall - using the wall mounting swivel bracket as a template, mark
 Drill two holes for 8 mm diameter anchors/fasteners and depth suitable for the type of anchor to be
used.
 Fix the mounting anchors in holes following the manufacturer’s recommendation.
 Mount the tilt meter on the wall mounting bracket.
 Fix the wall mounting bracket with the tilt meter to the anchors on the wall.
Page | 7
3.3 Installation of horizontal beam sensors

The EAN-93M-B, MEMS beam tilt sensor is generally supplied as EAN-93M tiltmeter mounted on a beam
of customer specified length. However, on specific customer request the tiltmeter and the beams may be
fixing.
 Using a chalk-line and suitable colored chalk mark a straight line along which the beam sensors would
be fixed. For wall mounting use a sprit level and a beam to ensure that the line is as horizontal as
possible. For floor mounting the line should be aligned along the direction in which the vertical
settlement profile is desired.
 With a tape measure, on the above line, mark off distances corresponding to the gauge length of the
 Drill 12mm diameter anchor holes to a depth of about 100 mm at the marked position. Ensure that the
 Clear the hole of debris by blowing air or brushing.
 Fix the longer (148 mm) anchors of the mounting kits with suitable epoxy grout in these holes such
that around 50mm length of anchors project out of the surface after fixing. Follow epoxy manufacturer’s
 Allow the grout to set for the recommended time before handling.
 Measure and record the exact centre distances between each anchor in the string.
Hint: As the anchor centres may be difficult to locate, measure the distance between the left side of
each anchor.
The beam tilt sensors are provided with two mounting angles on each side. The beams can be fixed to the
movement the beam mounting kits provide more flexibility and are strongly recommended.
The Figure 4 below shows the correct position of each component of the kit while mounting the beams.
 Fasten angle brackets to the already grouted anchors. Check the relative position of the nuts, washers
and angle brackets from the drawing.
 Fix the 72 mm stud anchors on the angle brackets fixed to the grouted anchors.
 Slightly loosen the mounting angle at both sides of each beam by loosening the hex nut holding it to
the beam.
 Fix the beams on the 72 mm stud anchors as shown in drawing. Use the double-shouldered nylon
Page | 8
 Lightly tighten the nuts so that the spring washers are slightly compressed.
 Tighten the bolt head holding the mounting angles to the beam-ends.
 Put a drop of Loctite 290 (post assembly thread locking compound) at the accessible junction of each
Figure 4 Installation of the anchor and the nuts & washer set
Figure 5 below shows how to mount the EAN-93M-B horizontal beam sensor on wall using the standard
mounting kit.
Figure 5 Installation of the EAN-93M-B sensor horizontally on the wall
Page | 9
Figure 6 below shows how to mount the EAN-93M-B horizontal beam sensor on floor using the standard
mounting kit.
Figure 6 Installation of the EAN-93M-B sensor on beam horizontally on the floor
3.4 Installation of vertical beam sensors

square and of specified gauge length and mounting hardware for mounting the tiltmeter on the beam.
1 Using a plumb line and suitable colored chalk mark a vertical straight line along which the beam
2 With a tape measure, on the above line, mark off distances corresponding to the gauge length of the
3 Drill 12 mm diameter anchor holes to a depth of about 100 mm at the marked position. Ensure that the
Page | 10
4 Clear the hole of debris by blowing air or brushing.

5 Fix the longer (148 mm) anchors of the mounting kits with suitable epoxy grout in these holes such
6 Allow the grout to set for the recommended time before handling.
7 Measure and record the exact centre distances between each anchor in the string.
each anchor.
Figure 7 Installation of EAN-93M-B on a vertical beam

recommended.
 Fasten angle brackets to the already grouted 148 mm anchors. Check the relative position of the nuts,
 Fix the 72 mm stud anchors on the angle brackets fixed to the grouted anchors.
 Slightly loosen the mounting angle at both sides of each beam by loosening the hex nut holding it to
the beam.
 Fix the beams on the 72 mm stud anchors as shown in drawing. Use the double shouldered nylon
Page | 11
 Lightly tighten the nuts so that the spring washers are slightly compressed.
 Tighten the bolt head holding the mounting angles to the beam ends.
 Check that the top of the tiltmeter enclosure is level. If not, then remove cover, loosen the two mounting
screws and rotate housing. Tighten mounting screws and replace cover when done.
 Put a drop of Loctite 290 (post assembly thread locking compound) at the accessible junction of each
nut on the stud anchors to lock them in place.
3.5 Protection of tilt meter

3.6 Other considerations

hit by pedestrians.
Page | 12
The output of model EAN-93M tilt meter can be read or logged from a remote location by an automatic
data acquisition system like Encardio-rite model ESDL-30/EDAS-10.
Encardio-rite recommends the termination or extension of the tiltmeter with the 6-core cable to the nearest
measurement station through a suitable junction box. We can use 3 core cable as well but 6 core cable
has an advantage over 3 core cable.
4.1 Wiring details
Cable colour (Sensor) Description Cable Colour (CS-0703)
Red 12V DC Red, Blue
Black Ground Black Brown, White
Green Output Green
4.2 Sign convention

enclosure is tilted counter clockwise then readings show an increase (with positive sign)- Figure 8 (left). If
the enclosure tilts clockwise then readings show a decrease (with a negative sign)-Figure 8 (right).
If the tilt meter is installed on the plane of a building, the B (+) sign is towards the plane and B (-) sign is
away from the plane.
If a uni-axial sensor is installed it measures tilt only along axis ‘A’.
Figure 8 below shows view from side and convention used for direction/output signal polarity. After the
enclosure is fixed to the structure, the sensor is adjusted to the zero reading (initial). Subtracting the initial
tilt reading from the subsequent tilt reading gives change in tilt of structure over a period of time.
4.3 Zero adjustment of tilt meter
A+ A-
Figure 8 Sign Convention of tilt for EAN-93M tilt meter
Connect the EAN-93M/EAN-93M-B tilt meter with the datalogger and adjust the sensor housing/beam to
make it as close to zero and then fix it firmly such that it does not get disturbed.
4.4 Measurement using ESDL-30UNI datalogger

ESDL-30UNI, SDI-12 Universal Datalogger is designed to record data produced by the sensors connected
to SDI-12 bus. Datalogger is having 3 SDI-12 ports (channels). Sensors having SDI-12 interface can be
connected on a common SDI-12 bus. This bus can be connected to any SDI-12 port of the datalogger.
Page | 13
Each reading is stamped with date and time at which the measurement was taken. It has non-volatile flash
memory to store up to 2 million data points.
with data cable or Bluetooth. The downloaded readings get stored in the PC’s home directory in CSV
processed on any common available spreadsheet like Microsoft-Excel.
ESDL-30UNI with built in GSM/GPRS has capability to upload data records directly to remote FTP server.
Upload schedule can be set in Data logger using this software for automatic data upload to the FTP server.
Schedule can be set as fast as 5 minutes.
SDI-12 inputs should have a unique ID (0-9, a-z or A-Z). Each of the 3 channels of the datalogger can have
61 sensors with ID 1-9 (ID 0 is used for factory purposes, hence not available for use), a-z or A-Z. For a
given channel each sensor should have a different ID.
For operational details please refer to the users’ manuals of ESDL-30 SDI-12 datalogger and ESDL-30
Configuration Manager.
Model EAN-93M tiltmeter having SDI-12 interface requires power source of 12V DC which is provided by
EDAS-10 data acquisition system through Encardio-rite power supply model EBP-127AH. Since SDI-12
network is connected in bus mode, only 3 core cable is connected to the data acquisition system. A six
core cable can also be used for the connection. Depending upon the application, the data acquisition
system can be based on Campbell measurement and control modules CR1000, CR800 or CR200.
Campbell Scientific’s relevant Users’ Manal.
Typical wiring/connection of in-place inclinometer system to CR1000, CR800 or CR200 based data
acquisition systems are shown in the figures on the next page. In case data is to be transmitted via
GSM/GPRS or RF modem only the CR 1000 or CR 800 based data acquisition system can be used. The
CR 200 does not support transmission of data by GSM/GPRS or RF modem.
Page | 14

POWER IN
SE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CAUTION
DIFF 1 2 3 4 DC ONLY
EX1
G
P1
P2
12V
H L H L H L H L
SE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 GROUND LUG CR 1000

DIFF 5 6 7 8
Data transmission
EX2
EX3
POWER OUT RS 232 (NOT ISOLATED) via direct RS-232,

COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4
SW-12
Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx RF or GSM/GPRS
12V
12V
CS I/O
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
5V
G
G
R
Bk SDI-12 tilt
Gn sensor(s)

POWER IN
DIFF 1 2 3 DC ONLY
Data transmission
EX1
EX2
G
P1
P2
5V
12V
H L H L H L
G
via direct RS-232,

SW-12
SCM
12V
RF or GSM/GPRS
C1
C2
C3
C4
G
CR 800
GROUND Tx Rx Tx Rx
Measurement and Control Datalogger
LUG COM1 COM2
CS I/O RS 232
R
Bk SDI-12 tilt
Gn sensor(s)

EX1
CR200X
SW Battery
EX2
Battery +
G
G
Charge +
C1/SDI-12
P_LL
C2
Battery -
Charge -
Datalogger with 900MHz Data transmission

Ground
Lug
via direct RS-232
RS 232
P_SW
SE5
SE4
SE3
SE2
SE1
SCAN
RECEIVE
R
Bk SDI-12 tilt
Gn sensor(s)
Page | 15
4.5.1 Program for SDI-12 sensor

Encardio-rite can supply a
program for monitoring SDI-12 tilt
meter based on information
provided by the customer. For
details, contact Encardio-rite’s
head office in India.
SDI12 Recorder-The SDI12
retrieve the results from an SDI12
sensor.
Syntax-SDI12 Recorder (Dest,
Where, Destination is the defined address for storage, SDIPORT is the control port connected to sensor,
and Offset have purpose as the name suggests.
aM1!. - An active sensor responds to each command
The SDI-12 command basically has following three components:
Sensor address (a) - a single character, and is the first character of the command
Command body (e.g., M1) - an upper case letter (the “command”) followed by alphanumeric qualifiers.
Page | 16
(Previous_AddressANew_Address!)
Note: Here, 2 = Previous_Address and b = New_Address
4.5.1.1 Typical programming for reading one SDI-12 sensor using CRBasic
The tilt meter response can be checked before installation at site with the help of simple program module:
Public batt_volt
Public PTemp
Public Results(6)
Public Sensor_ID(2)
Public watchdog

'Define Data Tables

EndTable
'Main Program
BeginProg
watchdog=0
Battery (batt_volt)
'Sensor_ID()=value
Sensor_ID(2)=1
'SW12(1)
Delay(0,3,sec)

Delay(0,5,sec)
watchdog = 10
EndIf
CallTable(SDI_Data)
NextScan
EndProg
Page | 17
4.5.1.2 Typical programming for reading one SDI-12 sensor using Terminal Emulator
as per Figure 9:
Figure 9 Terminal Emulator
4.6 Environmental factors

Several factors can influence the behavior of the structure being monitored for change in tilt using the tilt
meter. Having a knowledge of the factors influencing the behavior of the structure is essential for analyzing
the tilt meter data. Data related to factors such as rain fall, tidal or reservoir levels, excavation or fill levels,
construction activities nearby the structure, movement of traffic near the structure and its type, wind,
ambient temperature, barometric pressure etc. should also be observed and collected along with the tilt
meter data.
Page | 18
USERS’ MANUAL
WIRELESS TILT METER

MODEL EAN-95MW
Doc. # WI 6002.116 Rev. 02| Oct 2020

A-7, Industrial Estate, Talkatora Road, Lucknow, UP-226011, India | P: +91 522 2661039-42 | Email: geotech@encardio.com www.encardio.com
Users’ Manual EAN-95MW Wireless Tilt meter
Declaration of Conformity
FCC Declaration of Conformity

FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement:
1. This Transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
2. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment.
3. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between
the radiator & your body.
www.encardio.com
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Wireless tilt meter overview 1
1.2 Tilt meter applications 1
1.3 Wireless network 1
2.1 Model EAN-95MW wireless tilt meter 3
2.2 Model EWG-01 gateway 3
2.3 System components 3
3 SAMPLE TEST CERTIFICATE 4
4 PRE-INSTALLATION PREPARATIONS 6
4.2 Setting up the Gateway and Tilt meter location 6
4.3 Setting up the Gateway 6
5.1 Tilt meter installation 7
6 CONFIGURING TILT METER 8

6.1 Sensor (tilt meter) settings 13
Protection of tilt meter 15
Other considerations 15
7.2 Environmental factors 16
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Wireless tilt meter overview
Encardio-rite model EAN-95MW wireless tilt meter is

suitable for long term monitoring inclination and
vertical rotation of structures. Continuous data
logging and real-time monitoring helps to provide
early warning in case of impending failure allowing
time for corrective action to be taken or if necessary
for safe evacuation of the area.
Tilt change in a structure may be caused by
construction activity like excavation, tunneling or de-
watering that may affect the ground supporting the
structure. Change in tilt could also result from loading
of the structure, such as loading of a dam during
impoundment, loading of a diaphragm wall during
excavation or loading of a bridge deck due to wind
and traffic. Data from the tilt meter provides early
warning of threatening deformations, allowing time for
corrective action to be taken or if necessary for safe
evacuation of the area.
1.2 Tilt meter applications
EAN-95MW tilt meter is widely used in following applications:

 Monitoring safety of structures around zones of excavation or tunnelling.
1.3 Wireless network
Wireless sensors are vital in monitoring construction sites, large structures and landslide areas. They are
extensively used in applications where geotechnical and other sensors are used for data collection and
transfer to a central server for access by multiple users. Encardio-rite offers an innovative network solution
that allows real-time monitoring of not only wireless tilt meter but also other geotechnical and structural
sensors in challenging conditions with reliable data transfer without any delay.
In an end-to-end wireless monitoring system from Encardio-rite, the tilt meters are interfaced with the long
range, low power radio frequency network to gateway. The tilt meter sends recorded data to the gateway
through the RF network with utmost reliability. The gateway then uploads the collected data from sensors
to the central/cloud server.
The system operates on ISM sub 1 GHz operating frequency bands adjustable to requirement of each
territory. The system can be adjusted to different frequency bands; for example:
India 865 – 867 MHz

Europe 868 MHz
USA/Canada/Singapore/Australia 915 MHz
Page | 1
A detailed reference for frequency bands allowed in different Countries is available at:
https://www.thethingsnetwork.org/docs/lorawan/frequencies-by-country.html
The gateway has provision to set the frequency band, depending upon the Country.
attention.
the manual.
useless.
particular problem.

that may affect behaviour of structure being monitored. Some of these factors amongst others,
are, seasonal weather changes, temperature, rain, barometric pressure, nearby landslides,
earthquakes, traffic, construction activity around site including blasting, tides near sea coasts,
fill levels, excavation, sequence of construction and changes in personnel etc. These factors
must always be observed and recorded as they help in correlating data later on and also may
give an early warning of potential danger or problems.
Page | 2
2.1 Model EAN-95MW wireless tilt meter
Model EAN-95MW wireless tilt meter combines high precision Micro-Electro Mechanical System (MEMS)
sensor with radio transmission network to provide accurate tilt data. The unit is mounted inside a compact
weatherproof enclosure. The tilt sensor provides a bipolar DC voltage output proportional to the sine of tilt
angle measured by the beam. The sensor gives 4 V nominal output at ± 15°. The output is zero volts for a
truly vertical or horizontal position.
This output is transmitted through the long range, low power radio frequency network to the gateway
without any signal degradation. Each unit is individually calibrated to provide high system accuracy and
repeatability.
The tilt meter can be fixed to any vertical surface, horizontal floor or ceiling by means of suitable mounting
accessories consisting of anchors (and brackets – optional). These are available separately when ordered.
The model EAN-95MW tilt meter is not intended for absolute determination of tilt of structures. It measures
change in tilt of a structure to which it is attached. The initial tilt reading for each tilt sensor is recorded after
it has been mounted on the structure to be monitored. Subsequent tilt readings will be displayed w.r.t. initial
reading.
2.2 Model EWG-01 gateway
Encardio-rite model EWG-01 gateway is used as a main networking hardware, which uploads data
gathered from all the tilt meters (or other geotechnical sensors) to the Encardio-rite cloud server or a third
party server. The gateway enabled wireless network provides reliable data transfer over long distances,
without any delay. The wireless system eliminates the need for running lengthy cables. This is especially
useful at locations where sensors are distributed over a wide area and running cables to long distances
can be tricky and risky.
The data is accessible 24 x 7 to all the stakeholders. With Drishti, a cloud-hosted data management and
configuration software, the system can be programmed to generate automatic reports and provide
automated alerts over SMS or email for any reading crossing the pre-defined alert levels.
With the real-time data collected from wireless tilt meters and gateway, information about the slightest of
change taking place at specific location is available. This allows timely decisions, increased safety and also
cost effectiveness.
2.3 System components
Provided by Encardio-rite
• Model EAN-95MW- wireless tilt meter with antenna

• Model EWG-01 Gateway with GSM antenna
• OTG cable type B
• Application software for Android Smartphone
To be arranged by Client
• Laptop
• Android smartphone
• Activated data SIM card (for Gateway)
• D-Cell Li-SOCl2 3.6 V 14 Ah batteries nominal Voltage - 2 no (1 no. each for tilt meter and
Gateway)
Page | 3
3 SAMPLE TEST CERTIFICATE
TEST CERTIFICATE
Item : Wireless Tilt meter Date : 15.02.2020

Model : EAN-95MW Temperature: 19 ºC
Range : ±15º
Serial no. : TM-xxxxxx
Node ID : xxxx
Test data
Test SinA *Calculated **Ideal Observed Offset Error Non-
position output output output corrected output conformance
Arc (V1) (V2) (V3) (V4) (V4 - V2) % fs
degrees
Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts
(A)
15 0.2588 4.1408 4.1330 4.1280 4.1308 0.0022 0.053

12 0.2079 3.3264 3.3201 3.3150 3.3178 0.0023 0.056
9 0.1565 2.5032 2.4985 2.4930 2.4958 0.0027 0.065
6 0.1046 1.6728 1.6696 1.6650 1.6678 0.0018 0.045
3 0.0524 0.8376 0.8360 0.8340 0.8368 0.0008 0.019
0 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0028 0.0000 0.0000 0.000
-3 -0.0524 -0.8376 -0.8360 -0.8370 -0.8342 0.0018 0.044
-6 -0.1046 -1.6728 -1.6696 -1.6700 -1.6672 0.0024 0.059
-9 -0.1565 -2.5032 -2.4985 -2.4980 -2.4952 0.0033 0.079
-12 -0.2079 -3.3264 -3.3201 -3.3230 -3.3202 0.0001 0.002
-15 -0.2588 -4.1408 -4.1330 -4.1380 -4.1352 0.0022 0.053
Sensor gauge factor 'A' Axis : 15.970 Volts/Sin(9

0)

SinA = Observed output / gauge factor
A= Sin-1(observed output / gauge factor)
Note :
* Calculated output Voltage (V1) worked out based on nominal gauge factor of 16.000 V/g (i.e. 16 V X
Sin A).
** Ideal output Voltage (V2)' calculated from sine curve passing through sensitivity calibration points (@
±15º )
Tested by :
Page | 4
TEST CERTIFICATE
Item : Wireless Tilt meter Date : 15.02.2020

Model : EAN-95MW Temperature : 19 ºC
Range : ±15º
Serial no. : TM-xxxxxx
Node ID : xxxx
Test data
Test SinB *Calculated **Ideal Observed Offset Error Non-
position output output output corrected output conformance
Arc (V1) (V2) (V3) (V4) (V4 - V2) % fs
degrees
15 0.2588 4.1408 4.1435 4.1650 4.1420 0.0015 0.036

12 0.2079 3.3264 3.3286 3.3520 3.3290 0.0004 0.010
9 0.1565 2.5032 2.5048 2.5320 2.5090 0.0042 0.101
6 0.1046 1.6728 1.6739 1.7000 1.6770 0.0031 0.075
3 0.0524 0.8376 0.8381 0.8650 0.8420 0.0039 0.093
0 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0230 0.0000 0.0000 0.000
-3 -0.0524 -0.8376 -0.8381 -0.8180 -0.8410 0.0029 0.069
-6 -0.1046 -1.6728 -1.6739 -1.6530 -1.6760 0.0021 0.051
-9 -0.1565 -2.5032 -2.5048 -2.4820 -2.5050 0.0002 0.004
-12 -0.2079 -3.3264 -3.3286 -3.3070 -3.3300 0.0014 0.035
-15 -0.2588 -4.1408 -4.1435 -4.1220 -4.1450 0.0015 0.036
Sensor gauge factor 'B' Axis : 16.010 Volts/Sin(90)

SinB = Observed output / gauge factor
B= Sin-1(observed output / gauge factor)
Note :
* Calculated output Voltage (V1) worked out based on nominal gauge factor of 16.000 V/g (i.e. 16 V X
Sin A)
** Ideal output Voltage (V2)' calculated from sine curve passing through sensitivity calibration points (@
±15º)
.
Tested by :
Page | 5
4 PRE-INSTALLATION PREPARATIONS
• Check the tilt meter and gateway for any physical damage.
• Open the tilt meter box and check if the internal wiring is intact.
4.2 Setting up the Gateway and Tilt meter location
Settling up correct locations for Gateway and tilt meter is important, especially in case more than one tilt
meter are being installed at site and connected to single gateway. The first step is to install the Gateway
at a location that is in line of sight with all the installed tilt meters or in line of sight with most tilt meters. The
best location will have to be determined at the site itself. For best results, the link between the gateway
and the tilt meter should be strong, preferably better than -100 dBm. If it is not strong i.e. less than -100
dBm, use a relay node at an appropriate location (between tilt meter and gateway) to get to a signal
strength better than -100 dBm. A two way switch is provided on the node to switch it to a single hop position.
For best results, please ensure that the link between the relay node and the tilt meter is also stronger than
-100 dBm. Please note, the stronger the link (-95 dBm or -90 dBm) the better will be the results.
NOTE: Refer to user’s manual # WI6002.117 on gateway for details on how to determine signal
strength at any location. If signal strength is not good, a relay node should be added between
the gateway and the sensor. For details on relay node, please contact factory.
4.3 Setting up the Gateway
NOTE: For setting up and configuring the gateway, refer to user’s manual # WI6002.117 on gateway.
Page | 6
5.1 Tilt meter installation
The model EAN-95MW tilt meter (biaxial) is used to measure rotation of structures in the plane parallel as
well as perpendicular to the surface/wall on which the tilt meter is mounted.
• The tilt meter box is provided with mounting holes as in figure below.
Mounting holes
Figure 5-1 Model EAN-95MW wireless tilt meter
• For installing the tilt meter on wall, mark locations of the four mounting holes. Ensure that position
of the holes are aligned vertically using a spirit level.
• Drill holes depending on the mounting fasteners being used for fixing the tilt meter and fix the tilt
meter on wall ensuring its vertical position. (Do not close the box before configuring it. Configuration
details are given in next section)
NOTE: For installation of Gateway, please refer to users’ manual # WI 6002.117 on Gateway.
Page | 7
6 CONFIGURING TILT METER
1. Install the apk file (provided with the supply) for “Encardio Rite” app on the phone. App shortcut will
be available in the list of application software, as shown below (left figure).
2. Connect the Android phone to the ‘EnRite_Beam_DAC0’ Gateway Wi-Fi network. The password is
adminadmin.
NOTE: Refer to the users’ manual # WI 6002.117 on Gateway to learn how to switch on the
EnRite_Beam_DAC0 Gateway Wi-Fi network.
Figure 6-1
3. Connect the Smartphone to tilt meter’s RF node using the OTG adaptor provided with supply, as
shown in figure below
CAUTION: Please make sure the tilt meter’s RF node is switched off before connecting to the phone.
Page | 8
Figure 6-2 Tilt meter connected to Android phone with USB cable via OTG adaptor
Reset switch
Test switch
On-Off switch
Connector for connecting

phone
Figure 6-3
4. Switch on the Node with On-Off switch as shown in figure 6-3 above.
5. Open the ‘Encardio Rite’ app by clicking the Software Icon (extreme left screenshot in figure below).
Screen as shown in the middle screenshot will appear. Click on ‘Start’ button. A prompt window will
appear as shown in the extreme right screenshot in figure below, asking to access the USB device.
Tick the circle (for ‘Use by default for this USB device’) and click on OK.
Page | 9
Figure 6-4
NOTE: Add the tilt meter (i.e. it’s RF node) and create the project first before you commission the tilt
meter. Please refer to ‘Setting up the Gateway’ section in the users’ manual # WI 6002.117
for Gateway for creating project.
6. Once the ‘Encardio Rite’ app opens, the project already created (while configuring Gateway) can be
seen. Select the project and click the download button (shown in figure below) to download the
project.
Figure 6-5
Page | 10
7. Once downloaded, enter the project. Screen showing project details can be seen as shown in the
left figure below. Press "Reset" button on the Node (as shown in figure 6-3). Now click on “Pair Node”
on the menu (figure 6-6).
Figure 6-6
NOTE: If the connection is unsuccessful, press "Reset" button on Node and connect again by clicking
on ‘Pair Node’.
8. Once connection is done by clicking on ‘Pair Node’, the app will show connected node information
on “Node Setup’ screen as show in figure below.
NOTE: Optional Step: If “Relay” function is to be deployed, click on "Wireless Mesh" toggle button
to enable i.e. in case the Node needs to be used as a relay node (as shown in right side figure
below).
Page | 11
Figure 6-7
9. In case required, the ‘Node Name’ and ‘Sampling Rate’ inputs can be edited here by clicking on the
pencil icon. Setting Sampling Rate is shown in figure below. Please note that the sampling rate
should be set between 1 minute to 2 hours. Factory setting is 2 hours.
Figure 6-8
10. Once done, click on ‘Setup Sensor’ button to configure the sensor settings as explained in next section.
Page | 12
6.1 Sensor (tilt meter) settings
1. Sensor setting can be made as follows:

Sensor Code: Your desired sensor name.
Sensor Type: Select respective sensor type.
Parameters: Turn on the parameters as connected to the Node.
Excitation: Set the warm up time required for the sensor (for tilt meter, it can be set as
5 seconds).
Excitation Voltage: Select 24 (for tilt meter)
Refresh
Figure 6-9
2. Click on ‘Save Sensor’. The Node will now read the configured sensor, displaying the sensor
readings, as shown in figure on the right above.
3. To get another reading (in case more than one sensor is connected), click on the refresh button
(shown in the right side screenshot in figure above).
4. Once the tilt meter is configured, click on “Enable Sensor” as shown in the right side screen in figure
above. “Scanning Network” function will operate, which will scan the wireless signal strength (RSSI)
between the Tilt meter’s RF node and Gateway (as shown in figures below).
Page | 13
Refresh
Figure 6-10
5. After receiving the Network Test information, if required, another network test can be performed by
pressing the ‘Refresh’ button located at the lower right corner, as shown in the right side screenshot
in figure above.
6. Next, click “Start Monitoring” button (shown in the right side screenshot in figure above). The app will
prompt, “Node commissioned” as shown in left side screenshot in the figure below. Click OK.
Figure 6-11
Page | 14
7. Press the ‘Project Sync’ button at the bottom right of screen to send all the configuration information
back to the gateway (shown in the right side figure above).
8. To test, press the “TEST” button provided in tilt meter (shown in figure 6-3). The Node will
immediately send a reading to the Gateway.
9. Tilt meter’s RF node configuration is now complete. Close the tilt meter box.
10. The field engineer can now leave the site. The remaining configuration/changes can be done with
the Gateway software dashboard on laptop by selecting the related project. The commissioned
devices can be now seen under “Device Summary” Section.
NOTE: Refer to users’ manual # WI6002.117 on Gateway and the test certificate provided with the
tilt meter to put the gage factor and final configuration of the tilt meter for taking readings.
Figure 6-12
Protection of tilt meter

Other considerations
hit by pedestrians.
Page | 15
The output of model EAN-95MW tilt meter is transmitted via mesh wireless (RF) network. The tilt meter is
interfaced with the long range, low power wireless mesh network that allows tilt meter to send recorded
data to the Gateway. The Gateway then uploads all the collected sensor data to the central/cloud server.
The data management and application software is provided with the supply to configure and manage the
tilt meter data.
7.1 Sign convention
enclosure is tilted counter-clockwise then readings show an increase (with positive sign) as shown in figure
7-1 (left). If the enclosure tilts clockwise then readings show a decrease (with a negative sign) as shown in
figure 7-1 (right).
If the tilt meter is installed on the plane of a building, the B (+) sign is towards the plane and B (-) sign is
away from the plane.
Figure below shows view from side and convention used for direction/output signal polarity. After the
enclosure is fixed to the structure, the sensor is adjusted to the zero reading (initial). Subtracting the initial
tilt reading from the subsequent tilt reading gives change in tilt of structure over a period of time.
A+ A-
Figure 7-1 Sign Convention of tilt for EAN-95MW tilt meter
7.2 Environmental factors
Several factors can influence the behavior of the structure being monitored for change in tilt using the tilt
meter. Having a knowledge of the factors influencing the behavior of the structure is essential for analyzing
the tilt meter data. Data related to factors such as rain fall, tidal or reservoir levels, excavation or fill levels,
construction activities nearby the structure, movement of traffic near the structure and its type, wind,
ambient temperature, barometric pressure etc. should also be observed and collected along with the tilt
meter data.
Page | 16
USERS’ MANUAL
DATALOGGER WITH INTEGRAL TILT

METER
MODEL ESDL-30MT - Addendum
Doc. # WI 6002.110 Addendum R00 | May 2007

Users’ Manual ESDL-30MT Datalogger with integral tilt meter
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Specifications of inbuilt tilt meter 1
2 DESCRIPTION 2
3 INSTALLATION 3
4 CONFIGURATION, DATA RETRIEVAL 4

4.1 Configuration 4
4.2 Online data via telemetry transmission through GSM/GPRS modem 4
4.3 Readout/data retrieval using laptop PC 4
5 PROTECTION 5
6 SAMPLE CERTIFICATE 6
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite model ESDL-30MT consists of a tilt meter integrated with an automatic datalogger. The unit
has biaxial MEMS tilt sensor mounted inside it. It is a complete unit in itself for online monitoring of tilt at
any location. It is of rugged construction and can be used in a variety of applications to provide accurate
reliable data.
ESDL-30MT datalogger with inbuilt tilt meter also has provision to connect nearby installed crack meter,
another tilt meter or any others vibrating wire, resistive strain gage type sensor with SDI-12 interface.
1.1 Specifications of inbuilt tilt meter

The inbuilt MEMS tilt meter has a measurement range of ± 15° from vertical. It provides a full-scale output
of ± 4 V (nominal) at ± 15° and has an accuracy of ± 0.1% fs and sensitivity of ± 10 arc seconds.
Page | 1
2 DESCRIPTION
Figure 1 shows model ESDL-30MT datalogger with an inbuilt tilt meter. The biaxial tilt sensor is connected
at Channel 1. Channel 2 and Channel 3 can be used for other sensors to measure different parameters.
In figure below an interface suitable for vibrating wire, resistive strain gage type or 4-20 mA output sensor
is shown connected to channel 2 and an IPI sensor/tilt meter with SDI-12 output is shown connected to
channel 3 as an example.
SIM card slot
Tilt sensor - Bi- 3

axial
Biaxial tilt sensor

connected at
Channel 1
SDI-12 interface unit

at Channel 2 (for VW, Amphenol
resistive strain gage Batteries Connector for
type or 4-20 mA holder
connection with
output sensor PC/Laptop
IPI or tilt sensor (with

SDI-12 output) at
Channel 3
Figure 1: Details of model ESDL-30MT datalogger with inbuilt biaxial tilt meter
Page | 2
3 INSTALLATION
Typical mounting arrangement of model ESDL-30MT tilt meter (inside datalogger) on wall is shown in figure
2 below. Mounting arrangement of the same may differ depending on the location at which it is being
installed. Please contact factory in case any special mounting arrangement is required.
204 4 holes Ø8x50
82
Mounting hole details Anchor (HILTI

HSP-1-8/20x50)
Wall
Tilt meter with

Datalogger
(ESDL-30MT)
SDI-12 bus cable To Computer

for other sensors To Power supply
Front view Side view
Figure 2: Installation details of model ESDL-30MT datalogger
Page | 3
4 CONFIGURATION, DATA RETRIEVAL
4.1 Configuration
For configuration of ESDL-30MT datalogger with inbuilt tilt meter, please refer to manual # WI 6002.110
for model ESDL-30 datalogger. The configuration is same for both models.
4.2 Online data via telemetry transmission through GSM/GPRS modem
In a location covered by any GSM/GPRS service provider, data from the automatic datalogger can be
transmitted remotely to any server/cloud. A data SIM card is required for each datalogger (in customer’s
scope).
4.3 Readout/data retrieval using laptop PC

The logged data from datalogger installed in field can be directly downloaded to a laptop. Data can be
then transferred to central PC or server from the laptop using either a USB pen drive or through Internet.
Page | 4
5 PROTECTION
protecting it from direct sunlight. If certain degree of mechanical protection is also required, wooden or
fibreglass protection boxes may be considered. Heat insulating tape can be fixed to the inner surface of
such boxes for thermal insulation.
Page | 5
6 SAMPLE CERTIFICATE
TEST CERTIFICATE
Item : SDI-12 datalogger with built in tilt meter (Biaxial)

Model : ESDL-30R1 MT
Range : ±15º Date : 02.01.2019
Serial No. : 1803501 Temperature : 17 ºC
Test data

Arc degrees(B) ‘A' axis ‘A' axis 'A' axis
15 0.2588 0.2593 0.2590 0.0695
12 0.2079 0.2081 0.2079 0.0119
9 0.1564 0.1567 0.1564 0.0013
6 0.1045 0.1049 0.1046 0.0211
3 0.0523 0.0526 0.0523 0.0043
0 0.0000 0.0003 0.0000 0.0000
-3 -0.0523 -0.0519 -0.0522 0.0483
-6 -0.1045 -0.1042 -0.1045 0.0079
-9 -0.1564 -0.1560 -0.1562 0.0763
-12 -0.2079 -0.2076 -0.2078 0.0292
-15 -0.2588 -0.2586 -0.2588 0.0093
Max non-conformance (% fs): 0.08

A= Sin-1(observed output)

Wire colour Signal Marking on PCB
Red + 12 V (supply ) 12V
Black 0 V (supply ) GND
Green Output signal signal
(1) One no. In-built Biaxial tilt meter has been connected at channel # 1.
Tested by : (2) Channel # 2 & 3 are free for other SDI sensors.
Page | 6
TEST CERTIFICATE
Item : SDI-12 datalogger with built in tilt meter (Biaxial)

Model : ESDL-30R1 MT
Range : ±15º Date : 02.01.2019
Serial No. : 1803501 Temperature : 17 ºC
Test data

Arc degrees(B) ‘B' axis ‘B' axis 'B' axis
15 0.2588 0.2584 0.2586 0.0808
12 0.2079 0.2075 0.2077 0.0992
9 0.1564 0.1560 0.1561 0.1153
6 0.1045 0.1042 0.1043 0.0693
3 0.0523 0.0521 0.0523 0.0093
0 0.0000 -0.0002 0.0000 0.0000
-3 -0.0523 -0.0524 -0.0522 0.0378
-6 -0.1045 -0.1046 -0.1045 0.0268
-9 -0.1564 -0.1567 -0.1565 0.0191
-12 -0.2079 -0.2082 -0.2081 0.0561
-15 -0.2588 -0.2590 -0.2589 0.0135
Max non-conformance (% fs): 0.12

B= Sin-1(observed output)

Wire colour Signal Marking on PCB
Red + 12 V (supply ) 12V
Black 0 V (supply ) GND
Green Output signal signal
(1) One no. In-built Biaxial tilt meter has been connected at channel # 1.
Tested by : (2) Channel # 2 & 3 are free for other SDI sensors.
Page | 7
USERS’ MANUAL
MULTIPOINT BOREHOLE EXTENSOMETER

(MECHANICAL)
MODEL EDS-63UD
Doc # WI 6002.77 R01 | Jun 2019

Users’ Manual EDS-63UD Mechanical Borehole Extensometer
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Applications 1
1.2 Measurement method 1
1.3 Anchors 1
2 BOREHOLE EXTENSOMETER 3
2.1 Introduction 3
2.2 System description 4
2.2.1 Reference head assembly 4
2.2.2 Connecting rod assembly 4
2.2.3 Anchor 5
3 INSTALLATION 7
3.1 Installation with Fibreglass rod assembly 7
3.1.1 Site preparation before installation 7
3.1.2 Procedure 7
3.2 Installation of borehole extensometer with stainless steel connecting rod assembly 10
3.2.1 Procedure for installing the stainless steel connecting rods 10
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite borehole extensometer is a precision instrument designed to help civil engineers and
geologists in measurement of deformation of rock mass and adjacent or surrounding soil. Together with
anchor bolt load cell and tape extensometer, it is an essential piece of equipment for investigation and
monitoring of foundations, slopes & embankments and for studying the behaviour of rock around
underground cavities, tunnels and mines.
Model EDS-63U/D borehole extensometer can be used for upward or downward sloping hole using
fibreglass connecting rods or stainless steel extension rods.
In model EDS-63U/D system offered by Encardio-rite, up to three extensometers can be installed in a
borehole of φ 76 mm with diameter at the mouth of borehole increased to 90 mm up to a depth of 200 mm.
Up to six extensometers can be installed in a borehole of φ 102 mm with diameter at the mouth of borehole
increased to 125 mm to a depth of 225 mm.
NOTE: This instruction manual gives procedure for mounting up to 6 extensometers in a downward
slanting hole. For mounting in vertically upward to horizontal borehole modify procedure
suitably.
For borehole extensometers installed in deep boreholes, grouting in stages may be necessary. In such a
case consult factory at Lucknow.
1.1 Applications
 To determine how roof or wall of mine, underground cavity or tunnel behaves during excavation.
 To study effectiveness of roof/wall support system of a mine, underground cavity or tunnel.

 To predict potential roof or wall falls before they actually occur. Roof or wall falls in underground
cavities are almost invariably preceded by measurable sags as the strata opens up and the movement
usually occurs at an increasing rate as fall conditions are approached. Unsuspected roof and wall falls
may result in serious accidents and may require costly patch-up and repair operations.
 To measure and monitor movements in slopes and foundations due to excavation of underground
cavities or due to construction of heavy structures like concrete, rock fill, masonry or earth dams over
the foundation.
1.2 Measurement method
Displacement is measured by using a micrometer depth gage.
1.3 Anchors
Following type of anchors are available from Encardio-rite:
 Encardio-rite groutable anchors φ 20 mm x 500 mm long usually used for hard rocks. These are
lowered down or pushed in borehole along with connecting rod of appropriate length and fixed in
position by cement grout. The connecting rod is protected from cement grout by enclosing in nylon
tubing, thus allowing for its free movement. Groutable anchors may be installed in vertical boreholes
or holes inclined upwards. Installation of groutable anchors in holes inclined upwards needs special
precautions to retain grout and prevent it from flowing out of the borehole.
 Encardio-rite packer anchors usually used for soft rocks and soil. These are lowered down or pushed
in borehole along with connecting rod of appropriate length and fixed in position by pumping cement
grout into the packer for taking a firm grip with the surroundings.
Page | 1
NOTE: Encardio-rite uses convention that depth of anchor is calculated as distance from the mouth
of hole to near end of anchor.
WARNING! Warning messages calls attention to a procedure or practice, that if not properly followed could
The users’ manual is intended to provide sufficient information for making optimum use of borehole
extensometers in different applications.
this manual.
knowledge of fundamentals of geotechnics. Novices may find it very difficult to carry on the
A lot of effort has gone in preparing this instruction manual. However the best of instruction
manuals cannot provide for each and every condition in the field, which may affect
performance of the instrument. Also, blindly following the instruction manual will not guarantee
success. Depending upon field conditions, installation personnel will have to consciously
depart from the written text and use their knowledge and common sense to find the solution to
a particular problem.
The manual is divided into a number of sections, each section containing a specific type of
information. The list given below tells you where to look for in this manual if you need some
specific information. It is however recommended that you read the manual from beginning to
end to get a thorough grasp of the subject. You will find a lot of unexpected information in
sections you feel you may skip.
For description of borehole extensometer manufactured by Encardio-rite: See § 2.1 “Introduction” and §
2.2 “General Description”.
For installation of multi position borehole extensometers: See § 3 “Installation.
For tools & accessories required for installation: See § 3.3 “Tools & accessories required for installation”.
Page | 2
2 BOREHOLE EXTENSOMETER
2.1 Introduction
Borehole extensometer measures displacement taking place in a borehole with reference to time.
Extensometer helps to accurately measure change in distance between various anchors (1) with respect
to reference plate (6.9) and monitor GL their relative displacement with passage of time. It is usually
assumed that the deepest anchor is in stable ground and so any change in anchor spacing is interpreted
as sag of roof bed, movement of side wall or slope, settlement of foundation etc.
6.9
6.13
6.12
6.12
6.11 7
6.8 6.10 GL
6.7 6.6
6.5
6.4
4
6.1
5
6.2
6.3 3
2
Figure 2-1 – Reference Head Assembly

Grout
1
Sl. # Description
6.1 Flanged housing
6.2 Guide plate
6.3 Ch. Head screw, M6 x 8 mm.
6.4 Rubber bush
6.5 Washer
Figure 2-2 – Borehole Extensometer Assembly
6.6 Hollow bolt Sl. # Description
6.7 Central spacer 1 Anchor
6.8 Allen head bolt, M6x 80 2 Connecting rod assembly of required length
6.9 Reference plate 3 Protective sleeve
6.10 Setting spacer 4 Grout pipe
6.11 C’sk screw M6 x 50 5 Air vent tube
6.12 Reference button 6 Reference head assembly
6.13 Cover 7 Fastener
Page | 3
System description
EDS-63U/D essentially is a system in which up to six anchors can be mounted in a borehole and their
relative displacement monitored with time with respect to a reference plate.
At locations where access to mouth of borehole is easily available, mechanical measurement of

displacement by EDS-63U/D is economical and reliable. Displacement reading is taken by a micrometer
depth gage by measuring depth of reference button at near end of connecting rod from a reference plate.
Borehole extensometer basically comprises of three major components:
 Reference head assembly

 Fibreglass assembly
 Anchor
2.2.1 Reference head assembly

Refer to figure 2.1 and part list below it for details. Reference head assembly for up to 6 extensometers is
installed in a borehole of φ 102 mm. The diameter at the mouth of borehole is increased to 125 mm up to a
depth of 225 mm. The flange has four 18 mm diameter mounting holes at a PCD of 158 mm.
If less than six points are required other points are plugged with the help of standard rubber plug, steel
washer and hollow hex bolts.
2.2.2 Connecting rod assembly
2.2.2.1 Fibreglass rod assembly

It comprises of a fibreglass rod of specified length protected inside an outer continuous nylon tube. The
rod has end two connectors. One end connector has a male thread and fits into the anchor. The other end
connector with a female thread is for the reference button. The anchor end of nylon tube is firmly sealed
with the anchor to prevent any grout from leaking in. The other end of the nylon tube is firmly sealed in the
reference head assembly (refer 6.4 – 6.6 in figure 2.1). Proper sealing in the reference head assembly is
especially necessary for upwards to horizontally slanting holes for preventing any grout for leaking into the
reference head assembly during grouting.
The outer nylon tube allows free movement to fibreglass rod and reference button even after borehole is
grouted.
Figure 2-3 – Fibreglass rod assembly
NOTE: Fibreglass rods are generally more suitable for vertically upward holes as compared to
downward holes. This is because in vertically upward holes the rod is in tension; whereas in
downward holes it is in compression, resulting in sagging or buckling. Longer the
extensometer, greater may be the sagging or buckling.
Shorter the extensometer, better is accuracy of measurement of relative displacement

between anchors. In deeper boreholes, use of stainless steel connecting rods is
recommended, as they are more rigid.
Design Engineer should carefully consider what type of connecting rod to use taking into
consideration field conditions and accuracy of measurement required. Actual performance of
Page | 4
rods is determined by site conditions and it is recommended to conduct some field tests to
arrive at a proper conclusion.
2.2.2.2 Stainless steel AISI 410 connecting rod assembly

Stainless steel AISI 410 connecting rods of 8 mm diameter are available in standard lengths of 1m, 2 m
and 3 m with a M6 x 12 mm male thread at one end and a M6 x 15 mm female thread at other end. These
are connected together at site for positioning anchor at the correct depth from mouth of borehole. Thread
sealant Loctite 577 or equivalent is used between threads to firmly grip connecting rods to each other.
To give an example, in case depth of a particular anchor from the mouth is 14 m, use four connecting rods
of 3 m length and one of 2 m length. Similarly, in case depth of anchor from the mouth is 25 m, use eight
connecting rods of 3 m length and one connecting rod of 1 m.
On the near end of assembled connecting rods a standard 14 cm spacer with male thread on one side and
female on the other side is always provided. The reference button (6.12) is threaded into the female end
of this spacer. The male thread of bottom most connecting rod (most distant from the mouth of the borehole)
fits into the anchor (1).
PVC tubing 14 mm od x 10 mm id in 3 m length is provided for enclosing connecting rods at time of
assembly. One end of these tubes is swaged to form a male extender such that male and female ends of
successive PVC tubes can be conveniently assembled to each other using any PVC jointing compound in-
between. After jointing, the joint should always be checked by pulling and then wrapped with PVC tape to
make it leak proof. The outer PVC tubing allows free movement to connecting rods and reference button
even after borehole is grouted.
The furthest PVC tubing from mouth of borehole is firmly sealed to the anchor to prevent any grout from
leaking in. This 3 m long PVC tubing is cut by 50 mm from the plain end to make it convenient for successive
connecting rods and PVC tubings to be connected together.
The near end of the PVC tubing is firmly sealed in flanged housing (6.1) with help of rubber bush (6.4),
washer (6.5) and hollow bolt (6.6). The PVC tube should be cut such that when sealed in flanged housing,
its face extends around 20 mm beyond rubber bush (6.4). Proper sealing in reference head assembly is
especially necessary for upwards to horizontally slanting holes for preventing any grout for leaking into
2.2.3 Anchor
2.2.3.1 Groutable anchor

Reinforced bar groutable anchor of diameter 20 mm x 500 mm long is typically used in rock.
In case groutable anchor is installed in deep borehole, grouting in stages may be necessary and this may
require some modification in the design. In such a case consult factory at Lucknow.
Figure 2-4 – Groutable anchor
Page | 5
2.2.3.2 Packer anchor

Packer anchor with geotextile bladder inflated with grout is generally used in fractured rock or soil.
Grout tube
Compression tube fitting Packer anchor
Bore hole
Figure 2-5 – Packer anchor
NOTE: Encardio-rite uses the convention that depth of anchor is calculated as distance from mouth of
hole to near end of anchor.
The following tools and accessories are required for proper installation of the multi position borehole
extensometer:
 Loctite 290 and Loctite 415 or equivalent

 Acetone (commercial)
 Spanner size 22
 Screw driver
 Allen key
 Hacksaw with 150 mm blade
 Pliers 160 mm
 150 mm flat file
 Tube cutter
 M6 threading tap with handle
 M6 threading die with handle
 Wire brush
 Cloth for cleaning (lintless)
 Insulation tape
 Micrometer depth gage 100 mm range
Page | 6
3 INSTALLATION
3.1 Installation with Fibreglass rod assembly

NOTE: Procedure described below is for installing borehole extensometer upto 6 points in a downward
sloping hole using groutable anchors. For installation in an upward to horizontally sloping
borehole, or for using packer anchors, modify procedure suitably.
3.1.1 Site preparation before installation

1. Drill hole of 102 mm diameter to a depth of 0.5 m ~ 1 m more than length of deepest anchor.
NOTE: In case borehole extensometer is to be mounted horizontally and design permits, it is desirable
to provide a downward slope of 5o or more to the borehole. This facilitates grouting of anchors
as grout can easily flow in.
2. At the mouth of hole, increase diameter of drilled hole to 125 mm up to a depth of 225 mm for
wrapping outside of housing with rags or jute cloth strips soaked in cement.
3. Insert reference head assembly centralized in the 125 mm borehole. Taking holes on flange as
reference, drill four holes 18 mm diameter x 150 mm deep for fastening flange to borehole. Remove
reference head assembly from borehole.
4. Wash hole clean upto bottom by pumping in fresh water.
3.1.2 Procedure
1. If less than six points are required, plug other points on
reference head assembly with help of standard rubber plug,
steel washer and hollow hex bolts (6.6). G
1
6
2. Apply Loctite 415 or equivalent on machined portion of 5

2
groutable anchor. Screw male end connector of longest fibre 4

3
glass rod assembly to groutable anchor using Loctite 290 or

V
equivalent as a thread sealant. In the process, the nylon

tubing will also get firmly gripped to groutable anchor.
3. Refer to figure 2-1. Remove cover (6.13) from flanged To Pump 6.11
housing (6.1) and place latter flat on the ground. Loosen all
hollow bolts (6.6) slightly. 6.10
4. Insert groutable anchor into borehole till other end of

7
fiberglass rod is around 1 m - 1.5 m outside face of borehole.
Trim nylon sleeve such that female connector on fiberglass
rod is exposed by around 10 mm.
WARNING! The fibreglass rod is supplied in coil form using cable

ties. It is very stiff material and must be carefully handled
when unwinding as the end may snap back and cause 6
personal injury. 5
5. Guide end of fiberglass rod through corresponding hole in 3

guide plate (6.2) to emerge through hole marked ‘1’ on
2
flanged housing top (6.1). Fiberglass rod will have to be bent
to achieve this. Locate setting spacer (6.10) between Figure 3.2 – Installation in
reference plate (6.9) and female connector end of fiberglass borehole
rod. Insert screw (6.11) through reference plate hole and
Page | 7
screw through setting spacer into female connector end. When tightened, reference button will be
at a depth of around 25 mm from top of reference plate. In case this distance is to be maintained
different, use different length setting spacer (6.10).
6. In case hole in reference plate is not aligned with hole marked ‘1’in flanged housing, loosen Allen
head bolt (6.8) and retighten after aligning
NOTE: On side wall and roof where extension is generally expected, it may be desirable to use a 5-
10 mm setting spacer (6.10). Similarly, in a vertically down borehole where settlement is
generally expected, it may be desirable to use a setting spacer of 40-45 mm.
7. Tighten hollow bolt (6.6) with spanner size 22 mm to firmly grip nylon tube but not to squeeze or
hinder free movement of female end connector inside the nylon tube.
NOTE: In upward to horizontally sloping borehole, be particularly careful in tightening the hollow bolts
(6.6) properly as grout may leak through into the reference head assembly during the grouting
process.
NOTE: Always assemble and mount deepest anchor first. This is a good convention to follow to avoid
any confusion at a later date in identification of anchors. Holes on top of flanged housing are
marked clockwise with identification numbers 1, 2, 3, V, 4, 5, 6 and G respectively.
As an Encardio-rite convention, serial number ‘1’ always corresponds to deepest anchor, serial
number ‘2’ corresponds to second deepest anchor and so on. Also as an Encardio- rite
convention, looking into hole, serial numbers are always in a clockwise direction.
As an additional precaution, make a note in a diary of orientation of serial number ‘1’ with
geographical North.
8. Install all fiberglass connecting rods in descending order of their length as per procedure described
in § 3.2.2 - 3.2.5.
NOTE: Take care that extensometer assembly does not drop into borehole accidentally. It is
advisable to secure it properly by attaching a safety rope to the anchor.
9. Install grout tube in same manner as described in § 3.2.2 - 3.2.5. Generally, lower end of grout
tube is kept at a level higher than the anchor closest to the borehole face. While inserting last
anchor in borehole, lowest end of grout tube is tied with a cable tie to fibreglass connecting rod.
To determine length of grout tube ensure that around 1.5 m is outside the flanged housing (6.1)
for ease in attaching it to grout pump.
NOTE: In upward to horizontally sloping borehole, grout tube should be about 1.5 m longer than depth
of deepest anchor and taped around 300 mm below far end of anchor. Tape grout tube every
2 m with an insulation tape to the nylon tube to prevent it from swinging loose.
Page | 8
10. Install around 2 m long air vent tube in same manner as described in § 3.2.2 - 3.2.5 keeping in
view that grout should cover the anchor closest to the mouth or be around 1 m from the face of the
borehole whichever distance is less. Lower end of air vent tube should always be at a higher level
than lower end of grout tube.
NOTE: In upward to horizontally sloping borehole, air vent tube should be about 0.5 m longer than
depth of deepest anchor and taped around 50 mm above far end of anchor. Tape air vent tube
every 2 m with an insulation tape to the nylon tube to prevent it from swinging loose. Top end
of air vent tube should be at a level higher than the deepest anchor.
CAUTION: In upward to horizontally sloping borehole, care should be taken that air vent tube is taped
around 50 mm beyond rear of longest anchor and should not get detached. This is very
necessary for the grout to fill in up to end of longest anchor.
11. Wrap rags or jute cloth strips soaked in quick setting cement water mix outside flanged housing
(6.1) to build up approximately 5 mm thick layer. Lift and insert housing in borehole using a to and
fro screwing motion sealing the annular space between housing and borehole. Fix fasteners (‘7’ in
figure 2.2) in holes drilled earlier for securing flanged housing. Given enough time to let flanged
housing set in borehole.
12. Connect grout pipe to grouting machine and pump grout till the entire cavity is filled up to tip of air
vent pipe. Let grout set in for 8-12 hours.
NOTE: Check Engineer for cement water proportion to be used in grout. Composition of grout to be
used depends upon site conditions. In case of hard rock, 50 kg of cement with 30 kg of water
has been successfully used at some project sites.
NOTE: Grout should cover the anchor closest to the mouth or be around 1 m from the face of the
borehole whichever distance is less.
CAUTION: Please ensure that no grout overflows into the flanged housing. In case it overflows, it may get
into the protective nylon tubing and may also jam the setting rods.
13. Again pump grout into the system after the 8-12 hours setting period is over to ensure that all the
anchors are properly grouted. During setting, the heavier grout has a tendency to settle down
leaving water at the top with a possibility that anchors near the face of the borehole are not properly
grouted. Rule this possibility out by pumping grout again and ensuring that any such water at the
top is pumped out through the air vent tube and replaced by grout.
CAUTION: To get correct displacement readings, ensure that all anchors are properly grouted. This
problem may be particularly faced in case of near anchors in downward boreholes and rear
anchors in upward holes where with the cement in grout settling down, there may only be water
around the anchors.
14. Remove screws (6.11) and setting spacers (6.10). Cut the grout and vent tubes from the root and
remove them. Clean reference head assembly properly.
15. Fix reference buttons to top of fibreglass rods.
16. Take initial readings with help of depth micrometer. It is recommended to note date, time and
temperature while taking the initial reading. Subsequent readings will determine relative
displacement between anchors.
Page | 9
3.2 Installation of borehole extensometer with stainless steel connecting rod assembly
In case stainless connecting rods are being used in place of fibreglass connecting rods, following procedure
needs to be followed. Other installation procedure will remain same as explained in section 3.1 and in
figure 2.1, Figure 2.2 and Figure 3.2.
3.2.1 Procedure for installing the stainless steel connecting rods

1. Sort out the components required for completing individual borehole extensometer assemblies in
individual groups. Connecting rods are available in 1, 2 and 3 m lengths with a M6 x 12 mm male
thread at one end and a M6 x 15 mm female thread at the other end.
For example, in case an extensometer is 16 m long, it can be assembled with five connecting rods
of 3 m and one connecting rod of 1 m length threaded to an anchor.
NOTE: For borehole extensometer assembly requiring depth in fraction of a meter, a special fractional
length connecting rod is provided. Refer to the packing list for details.
NOTE: Encardio-rite uses the convention that the depth of anchor is calculated as distance from mouth
of the hole to near end of anchor.
2. Install extensometer assembly with deepest anchor first. Extensometers should always be
assembled with the deepest anchor first to the shortest anchor last. Thread the longest connecting
rod of the deepest extensometer to the anchor. Assume for this example that it is 3 m long. Use
Loctite 577 as a thread sealant.
Installation pictures from site
NOTE: Always use Loctite 577 as a thread sealant for securing the connecting rod to the anchor and
between connecting rod threads.
Page | 10
3. Cut a 3 m long PVC rigid pipe (3) by 150 mm from the plain end. The other end has a socket to
connect to the next PVC pipe. Insert this 2.85 m long PVC pipe over the connecting rod and fix it
to the end of the anchor with Loctite 577. In case the PVC pipe is loose over the anchor end, use
a thick coat of Mahendra’s M-Seal compound for a good joint. The PVC pipe should make a firm
joint with the anchor end to prevent any grout from seeping in.
NOTE: The joint between the anchor and the PVC pipe should be leak proof to prevent any grout from
seeping in.
4. Take a flexible PVC grout tube of 30 kg/cm2 burst pressure rating (12.5 mm bore x 2 mm wall
thickness) around 2 m longer than the length of the deepest anchor. Lightly tape it or secure it by
rubber bands to the anchor such that it is around 50 mm beyond the far end of the anchor. The
tubing is gradually withdrawn as the grout is filled into the hole and therefore should loosely grip
the anchor.
NOTE: The PVC grout tubing is gradually withdrawn as the grout is filled into the hole and therefore
should loosely grip the anchor.
5. Carefully push the anchor, connecting rod, PVC pipe assembly and the grout pipe inside the
borehole.
6. Thread another connecting rod of required length using Loctite 577 as a thread sealant. Continue
the procedure till all the connecting rods are assembled taking care that they are properly enclosed
with PVC protective rigid pipe (3). The PVC to PVC pipe sealing may be done with Loctite 577 or
any PVC jointing compound. The latter takes less time. While assembling the last connecting rod
take care that the overall length of the PVC tubing is 150 mm shorter than the length of the
connecting rods.
7. Slide the rubber boot over the connecting rod and fix it over the PVC tubing face with Loctite 577.
Keep the extensometer end around 300 mm outside the face of housing (6).
NOTE: Take care that the extensometer assembly does not drop into borehole accidentally. Secure it
properly by attaching a safety rope to the anchor or using suitable safety clamps.
Safety clamps are available from Encardio-rite. They have a groove that fits into the spanner
slot on the connecting rod.
8. Assemble the next longest anchor assembly in the same manner as described under serial number
3-7. Follow the same sequence for installing the other anchor assemblies also.
9. Use a strip of paper and cello tape to mark the connecting rods with numbers ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘3’ etc. marking
the deepest extensometer anchor assembly as ‘1’.
NOTE: A grout tube with one end fixed to the deepest anchor is usually adequate for a vertical down
hole. Tubing is drawn up from borehole as grout is pumped in. Sometimes a second shorter
grout tube is taped to an anchor about halfway down the length of the extensometer. This tube
can be used if difficulties may arise with the longer tube.
The hole in the reference plate (Refer Figure 2.1) (6.9) is 13 mm diameter. If two grout tubes
are required to be used, use suitable smaller diameter grout tubes.
10. Fix reference buttons (6.12) to the connecting rod ends securing them firmly with Loctite 577.
11. Tighten setting rods (Refer Figure 3.2) (6.10, 6.11) to reference buttons. Do not use any Loctite
577 in this case, as the setting rods will have to be removed later on.
12. Tighten mounting plate on the setting rods with M8 nuts and washers provided. Take care that the
grout pipe/pipes are routed through the central hole of the mounting plate.
Page | 11
13. Connect the flexible grout tubing to grout pump and pump grout till anchor closest to the mouth is
fully covered with grout. Grout should never be filled upto the mouth of the borehole.
14. Withdraw flexible grout tubing progressively from the hole as grout is filled in. Clean the grout
pipe/pipes for subsequent use by pumping fresh water. Let grout set for at least 24 hours.
NOTE: Grout should never be filled upto the mouth of the borehole because some flexibility is required
in positioning the connecting rods inside the housing. It also eliminates any possibility of grout
flowing into the PVC protective pipe.
Grout should cover the anchor closest to the mouth or be around 1 m from the face of the
borehole whichever distance is less.
15. Remove setting space (Refer Figure 2.1) (6.10). Insert C’sk screw M6 x 50 (6.11) over connecting
rod extensions and position it properly in the groove on the housing. Tighten reference button
(6.12) to the housing with the three Allen head bolt (6.8) provided.
16. Remove setting rods. In case they do not come out easily lock two M8 nuts together on the
threaded portion and remove with spanner.
17. Assemble reference plate (Refer Figure 2.1) (6.9) to reference button (6.12) with Allen head bolt
(6.8) keeping holes between reference plate and reference button aligned.
18. Put permanent identification marks on the side of housing.

19. Take initial depth reading of the reference buttons (6.12) from the reference plate (6.9) with the
depth micrometer (least count 0.01 mm). These will form the reference readings. Difference of
these readings from any subsequent readings will give the deformation.
NOTE: If installation is correct, depth of reference button from reference plate at time of initial reading
will be around 125 mm.
20. Securely tighten cover (6.13) over housing (6). In case there is any chance of damage to the
assembly due to construction activity or vandalism, provide additional protection as per
requirement.
NOTE: Personnel involved in installation and monitoring must have a background of good installation
and monitoring practices and knowledge of the fundamentals of geotechnics. They must be
professionally trained. Novices may find it difficult to carry on with this work. Intricacies involved
are such that even if a single essential but apparently minor requirement is ignored or
overlooked, the most reliable of instruments and data obtained from them will be rendered
useless.
This method statement does not provide for each and every condition in the field that may
affect the performance of the instrument. Also, blindly following the method statement will not
guarantee success. Sometimes, depending upon field conditions, the personnel will have to
the solution to a particular problem.
It is recommended that potential users themselves practice all operations laid down in the
method statement.
Page | 12
USERS’ MANUAL
SINGLE POINT MECHANICAL BOREHOLE

EXTENSOMETER
MODEL EDS-64UD
Doc # WI 6002.106 R00 | Jun 2012

Users’ Manual EDS-64UD Single Point Mechanical Borehole Extensometer
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Applications 1
2 BOREHOLE EXTENSOMETER 3
2.1 Introduction 3
2.2.2 Stainless steel/Fiber glass rod assembly 4
2.2.3 Anchor 5
3.1 Site preparation before installation 6
3.2 Procedure 6
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite borehole extensometer is a precision instrument designed to help civil engineers and
geologists in measurement of deformation of rock mass and adjacent or surrounding soil. Together with
anchor bolt load cell and tape extensometer, borehole extensometer is an essential piece of equipment for
investigation and monitoring of foundations, slopes & embankments and for studying the behavior of rock
around underground cavities, tunnels and mines. Model EDS-64UD borehole extensometer can be used
for upward or downward sloping hole using stainless steel or fiberglass connecting rods.
In model EDS-64U/D system offered by Encardio-rite, single point extensometer can be installed in a
borehole of φ 50 mm with diameter at mouth of borehole increased to 62 mm up to a depth of 200 mm.
NOTE: This instruction manual gives procedure for mounting single point extensometer in a
downward hole. For mounting in vertically upward to horizontal borehole modify procedure
suitably.
1.1 Applications
 To study effectiveness of roof/wall support system of a mine, underground cavity or tunnel.
cavities or due to construction of heavy structures like concrete, rock-fill, masonry or earth dams over
the foundation.
Displacement is measured by using a micrometer depth gage, selectable ranges are 50, 100 and 150 mm.

WARNING! Warning messages calls attention to a procedure or practice that if not properly followed could

The users’ manual is intended to provide sufficient information for making optimum use of the single
position mechanical extensometer in different applications.
the manual.
useless.
Page | 1
particular problem.
Installation and measurements using borehole extensometer requires expertise. It is

recommended that potential users themselves practice all operations laid down in this manual
by repeated installations.
For description of borehole extensometer manufactured by Encardio-rite: See § 2.1 “Introduction” and §
2.2 “General Description”.
For installation of single point position borehole extensometers: See § 3 “Installation”.
Page | 2
2 BOREHOLE EXTENSOMETER
2.1 Introduction
Borehole extensometer measures displacement
taking place in a borehole with reference to time.
Extensometer helps to accurately measure change in
distance between anchor (1 figure 2.1) with respect to
reference plate (5.8 in figure 2.2) and monitor their
relative displacement with passage of time. It is usually 6
117
assumed that the anchor is in stable ground and so any
change in anchor spacing is interpreted as sag of roof 7
bed, movement of side wall or slope, settlement of
foundation etc.
Sl. # Description
1 Anchor
L (Anchor depth)
2 Connecting rod
5
3 Air vent tube (Not required in Downward
sloping borehole)
4 Grout pipe
5 Reference/flanged head Assembly
6 Reference button
3
7 Expandable Anchor M12x145 with washer & 4
nut
8 Setting screw (Ch. Head) M6x100 (refer 2

Figure 2.5)
9 Hex. Nut M6 (refer Figure 2.5)
Borehole Ø50 mm
Figure 2.1
Page | 3

EDS-64U/D essentially is a system in which single anchor
is mounted in a borehole and it’s relative displacement is
5.8
monitored with time with respect to a reference plate. At 5.9
locations where access to mouth of borehole is easily
available, mechanical measurement of displacement by 5.10
117
EDS-64U/D is economical and reliable. Displacement 5.7
reading is taken by a micrometer depth gage by measuring
depth of reference button at near end of connecting rod from
a reference plate. 5.2
5.3
Borehole extensometer basically comprises of three major 5.4
components:
Ø130
 Stainless steel/Fiberglass assembly

5.1
152
 Anchor
Refer to figure 2.2 and part list below it for details. Reference 5.5 5.6
head assembly for single point extensometer is installed in
a borehole of φ 50 mm. The diameter at mouth of borehole
is increased to 62 mm up to a depth of 200 mm. The flange
Figure 2.2
has four 15 mm diameter mounting holes at a PCD of 105
mm. Sl. # Description
5.1 Reference Housing
5.2 Rubber bush
5.3 Washer
5.4 Hollow bolt
5.5 Guide plate
5.6 Ch. Head screw M5x8
5.7 Center pillar
5.8 Reference plate
5.9 Allen head bolt M5x10
5.10 Cover assembly
2.2.2 Stainless steel/Fiber glass rod assembly

It comprises of a stainless steel/fiberglass rod of specified length protected inside an outer PVC tubing/
continuous nylon tube. The rod has two end connectors. One end connector has a male thread and fits
into the anchor. The other end connector with a female thread is for the reference button. The anchor end
of PVC/nylon tube is firmly sealed with the anchor to prevent any grout from leaking in. The other end of
the PVC/nylon tube is firmly sealed in the reference head assembly (refer 5.2 – 5.4 in figure 2.2). Proper
sealing in the reference head assembly is especially necessary for upwards to horizontally slanting holes
for preventing any grout for leaking into the reference head assembly during grouting.
Page | 4
The outer tube allows free movement to stainless steel/fiberglass rod and reference button even after
borehole is grouted.
NOTE: Fiberglass rods are generally more suitable for vertically upward holes as compared to
downward holes. This is because in vertically upward holes the rod is in tension; whereas in
downward holes it is in compression, resulting in sagging or buckling. Longer the

2.2.3 Anchor
Following type of anchor are available from Encardio-rite:
 Encardio-rite groutable anchor φ 20 mm x 500 mm long usually used for hard rocks. Anchor is lowered
down or pushed in borehole along with connecting rod of appropriate length and fixed in position by
cement grout. The connecting rod is protected from cement grout by enclosing in PVC/nylon tubing,
thus allowing for its free movement. Groutable anchor may be installed in vertical boreholes or holes
inclined upwards. Installation of groutable anchor in holes inclined upwards needs special precautions
to retain grout and prevent it from flowing out of the borehole.
Reinforced bar groutable anchor of diameter 20 mm x 500 mm long is typically used in rock.
In case groutable anchor is installed in deep borehole, grouting in stages may be necessary and this may
require some modification in the design. In such a case consult factory at Lucknow
NOTE: Encardio-rite uses the convention that depth of anchor is calculated as distance from mouth
of hole to near end of anchor.
Figure 2.3 – Fiberglass rod assembly
Figure 2.4 – Groutable Anchor
Page | 5
NOTE: Procedure described below is for installing borehole extensometer for single point in a
downward/downward sloping hole using groutable anchor. For installation in an upward to
horizontally sloping borehole, modify procedure suitably.
3.1 Site preparation before installation

3.1.1 Drill hole of 62 mm diameter to the depth of 0.3 m
more than length of anchor.
NOTE: In case borehole extensometer is to be 3

mounted horizontally and design permits, it is V
desirable to provide a downward slope of 5o 4
G 1
or more to the borehole. This facilitates
grouting of anchor as grout can easily flow in.
3.1.2 At mouth of hole, increase diameter of drilled hole

to 62 mm up to a depth of 200 mm for wrapping
outside of housing with rags or jute cloth strips PLAN
soaked in cement.
3.1.3 Insert reference head assembly centralised in the 8

62 mm borehole. Taking holes on flange as
reference, drill four holes 15 mm diameter x 125 9
mm deep for fastening flange to borehole.

Remove reference head assembly from borehole.
3.1.4 Wash hole clean upto bottom by pumping in 7
freshwater.
3.2 Procedure
mounting at 105 PCD.

3.2.1 Apply Loctite 415 or equivalent on machined
4 holes Ø15 for

portion of groutable anchor. Screw male end
connector of stainless steel rod/fibreglass rod
assembly to groutable anchor using Loctite 290 or
equivalent as a thread sealant. In the process, the
PVC protective pipe/nylon tubing will also get
firmly gripped to groutable anchor.
3.2.2 Refer to figure 2-2. Remove cover (5.10) from

flanged housing (5.1) and place latter flat on the
ground. Loosen all hollow bolts (5.4) slightly.
3.2.3 Insert groutable anchor into borehole till other end

Figure 2.5 – EDS-64UD Assembly
of stainless steel/fibreglass rod is around 1-1.5 m
outside face of borehole. Trim PVC protective pipe/nylon sleeve such that female connector on
stainless steel/fibreglass rod is exposed by around 150 mm/10 mm from connector end.
NOTE: The stainless steel rods are supplied in standard lengths of 1, 2, and 3 m with protective PVC
tubing for the connecting rod.
WARNING! The fiberglass rod is supplied in coil form using cable ties. It is very stiff material and must be
carefully handled when unwinding as the end may snap back and cause personal injury.
3.2.4 The end of stainless steel rod to pass through the guide plate (5.5 of figure 2.2) to emerge through
hole marked ‘1’ on reference/flanged housing top (5.1 of figure 2.2). In case of Fiberglass rod,
Page | 6
guide end of fiberglass rod through corresponding hole in guide plate (5.5 of figure 2.2) to emerge
through hole marked ‘1’ on reference/flanged housing top (5.1 of figure 2.2). Fiberglass rod will
have to be bent to achieve this. Locate setting screw (8 of figure 2.5) between reference plate (5.8
of figure 2.2) and female connector end of stainless steel/fiberglass rod. Insert setting screw (8 of
figure 2.5) through reference plate hole and screw through setting spacer into female connector
end. When tightened, reference button will be at a depth of around 25 mm from top of reference
plate. In case this distance is to be maintained different, use different length setting spacer (8 of
figure 2.5).
3.2.5 In case hole in reference plate is not aligned with hole marked ‘1’ in flanged housing, loosen Allen
head bolt (5.9 of figure 2.2) and retighten after aligning.
NOTE: On side wall and roof where extension is generally expected, it may be desirable to use a 5-
10 mm setting spacer (8 of figure 2.5). Similarly, in a vertically down borehole where
settlement is generally expected, it may be desirable to use a setting spacer of 40-45 mm.
3.2.6 Tighten hollow bolt (5.4 of figure 2.2) with spanner size 20 mm to firmly grip PVC/nylon tube but
not to squeeze or hinder free movement of female end connector inside the PVC/nylon tube.
NOTE: In upward to horizontally sloping borehole, be particularly careful in tightening the hollow bolts
(5.4 of figure 2.2) properly as grout may leak through into the reference head assembly during
the grouting process.
NOTE: Always assemble and mount anchor first. This is a good convention to follow to avoid any
confusion at a later date in identification. Holes on top of flanged housing are marked
clockwise with identification numbers 1, G and V respectively.
3.2.7 Install grout tube in same manner as described in § 3.2.2 - 3.2.5. Generally, lower end of grout
tube is kept at a level higher than the anchor. While inserting the anchor in borehole, lowest end
of grout tube is tied with a cable tie to stainless steel/fiberglass connecting rod. To determine length
of grout tube ensure that around 1.5 m is outside the flanged housing (5.1 of figure 2.2) for ease
in attaching it to grout pump.
NOTE: In upward to horizontally sloping borehole, grout tube should be about 1.5 m longer than depth
of anchor and taped around 300 mm below far end of anchor. Tape grout tube every 2 m with
an insulation tape to the PVC/nylon tube to prevent it from swinging loose.
NOTE: In downward sloping borehole, air vent tube is not required.
depth of anchor and taped around 50 mm above far end of anchor. Tape air vent tube every
2 m with an insulation tape to the PVC/nylon tube to prevent it from swinging loose.
around 50 mm beyond rear of the anchor and should not get detached. This is very necessary
for the grout to fill in up to end of the anchor.
3.2.8 Wrap rags or jute cloth strips soaked in quick setting cement water mix outside flanged housing
(5.1 of figure 2.2) to build up approximately 5 mm thick layer. Lift and insert housing in borehole
using a to and fro screwing motion sealing the annular space between housing and borehole. Fix
wedge anchors (‘7’ in figure 2.5) in holes drilled earlier for securing flanged housing. Give enough
time to let flanged housing set in borehole.
3.2.9 Connect grout pipe to grouting machine and pump grout till the entire cavity is filled up to tip of air
vent pipe. Let grout set in for 8-12 hours.
Page | 7
used depends upon site conditions.
NOTE: Grout should cover the anchor or be around 1 m from the face of the borehole whichever
distance is less.
CAUTION: Please ensure that no grout overflows into the flanged housing. In case it overflows, it may
get into the protective PVC/nylon tubing and may also jam the setting rods.
3.2.10 Again pump grout into the system after the 8-12 hours setting period is over to ensure that the
anchor is properly grouted. During setting, the heavier grout has a tendency to settle down leaving
water at the top with a possibility that grouting is not proper near the face of the borehole. Rule this
possibility out by pumping grout again and ensuring that any such water at the top is pumped out
through the air vent tube and replaced by grout.
CAUTION: To get correct displacement readings, ensure that the anchor is properly grouted.
3.2.11 Remove screws (9 of figure 2.5) and setting spacers (8 of figure 2.5). Cut the grout and vent tubes
from the root and remove them. Clean reference head assembly properly.
3.2.12 Fix reference buttons to top of stainless steel/fiberglass rods.
3.2.13 Take initial readings with the help of depth micrometer. It is recommended to note date, time and
temperature while taking the initial reading. Subsequent readings will determine relative
displacement between anchor and reference plate.
The following tools and accessories are required for proper installation of the single position borehole
extensometer:
 Loctite 290 and Loctite 415 or equivalent
 Spanner size 6/7, 10/11, 20/22
 Screw driver ( tip size 6 x 0.4 mm)
 Allen key 5 mm
 Tube cutter
 SS connecting rod holding clamps-02 no.

 Application brush 25 mm
 SS top connecting rod (0.055 m)-1 no.
 Micrometer depth gage 100 mm range
Page | 8
USERS’ MANUAL
BOREHOLE EXTENSOMETER
MULTI-POINT WITH POTENTIOMETRIC SENSORS
MODEL EDS-70P
Doc. # WI 6002.21 R01 | Nov 2018

International: UAE | Qatar | Bahrain | Bhutan | Singapore | Greece | USA
Users’ Manual EDS-70P Multi-point borehole extensometer- electrical with potentiometric sensors
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Applications 1
2 MULTI POINT BOREHOLE EXTENSOMETER (MPBX) - ELECTRICAL 3

2.1 General Description 3
2.1.2 Potentiometric displacement sensor 3
2.1.4 Anchor 7
2.2 Accessories 8
2.2.1 Junction box 8
2.2.2 Cables 8
3 INSTALLATION OF MULTI POSITION BOREHOLE EXTENSOMETER 9

3.2 Check sensor before installation 9
3.3 Sample test certificate for potentiometric sensor 10
3.4 Procedure 11
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite borehole extensometer (BHE) using potentiometric sensors is a precision instrument

designed to help civil engineers and geologists in measurement of deformation of rock mass and adjacent
or surrounding soil. Together with anchor bolt load cells and tape extensometer, it is an essential piece of
equipment for investigation and monitoring of foundations, slopes & embankments and for studying
behaviour of rock around underground cavities, tunnels and mines.
1.1 Applications
• To determine how roof or wall of mine, underground cavity or tunnel behaves during excavation.
• To study effectiveness of the roof/wall support system of a mine, underground cavity or tunnel.
• To predict potential roof or wall falls before they actually occur. Roof or wall falls in underground cavities
are almost invariably preceded by measurable sags as the strata opens up and the movement usually
occurs at an increasing rate as fall conditions are approached. Unsuspected roof and wall falls may
result in serious accidents and may require costly patch-up and repair operations.
• To measure and monitor movements in slopes and foundations due to excavation of underground
cavities or due to construction of heavy structures like concrete, rockfill, masonry or earth dams over
the foundation.
• Suitable for upward or downward sloping hole using fiberglass or stainless steel AISI-410 connecting
rods.
Model EDS-70 has following options:
• Provision for mounting three point extensometers in a borehole of φ 76 mm. Diameter at mouth of
borehole is increased to 90 mm (300 mm depth for 50 mm displacement sensor or 430 mm depth
for 100 mm displacement sensor and 560 mm for 150 mm displacement sensor).

The displacement is measured electronically by using a potentiometric displacement transducer model
EDE-PXX and a readout system model EDI-53P or data acquisition system model EDAS-10.
Dimensional details of sensor
Model Displacement Overall length – L

(in closed position)
EDE-P05 50 mm 325 mm
EDE-P10 100 mm 425 mm
EDE-P15 150 mm 525 mm
The sensor shaft is fixed to female thread in connecting rod through a sensor lock nut (18), link plate (16),
sensor tightening nut (17) and a reference button (15) - refer to figures 2.1 and 2.2. The outside body of
sensor is fixed to a guide plate (7) in the flanged housing at the face of the borehole. The system is rugged
and is protected by a protecting cover (19). Flange housing (5). Nipple (22) is an integral part of flanged
housing. Through nipple (22) cable for sensors can be taken to a junction box (23) and then through a
multi-core cable to any distant location.
NOTE: Encardio-rite uses the convention that depth of anchor is calculated as the distance from the
mouth of hole to near end of anchor.
Page | 1
CAUTION: Never rotate shaft of displacement sensor in respect to the outside body. This will
permanently damage the sensor. During installation pull or push or pull shaft only axially. A
pin has been provided at the end of displacement sensor that sits flush in a groove in sensor
body. During assembly operation and while using spanners for tightening, keep sensor in
closed position with pin seated inside groove such that no torque is exerted on its shaft and
there is no rotational movement.


this manual.
the installation work. The intricacies involved in installation are such that even if a single
essential but apparently minor requirement is ignored or overlooked, the most reliable of
manuals cannot provide for each and every condition in the field, which may affect the
success. Sometimes, depending upon field conditions, the installation personnel will have to
The manual is divided into a number of sections, each section containing a specific type of information.
the subject. You will find a lot of unexpected information in the sections you feel you may skip.
For description of potentiometric borehole extensometers manufactured by Encardio-rite: See § 2.1

“Borehole extensometers”.
For layout drawings of potentiometric borehole extensometers: See figures 2.1 – 2.2.
Page | 2
2 MULTI POINT BOREHOLE EXTENSOMETER (MPBX) - ELECTRICAL
2.1 General Description

Borehole extensometer (BHE) measures extension (displacement) that takes place with time in a bored
hole or in several bored holes in a rock mass. The Encardio-rite BHE essentially consists of one or more
anchors and a reference plate. Anchor is set in same borehole or in different boreholes drilled adjacent to
first borehole. The BHE helps to accurately measure distance between various anchors with respect to
reference plate and thus monitor with passage of time their relative displacement in respect to each other.
It is usually assumed anchor is in stable ground and so any change in anchor spacing is interpreted as sag
of roof bed, movement of sidewall or slope, settlement of foundation etc.
Model EDS-70P BHE essentially is a system designed for multiple anchors which can be mounted in a
borehole and their relative displacement monitored with time using potentiometric displacement sensors.
At locations where access to mouth of borehole is easily available, mechanical measurement of
displacement by EDS-63U/D is economical and reliable, displacement readings taken by a micrometer
depth gage by measuring depth of reference button at near end of connecting rod from a reference plate.
Model EDS-70P borehole extensometer basically comprises of four major sub-assemblies:
• Reference head assembly

• Potentiometric displacement sensors
• Connecting rod assembly (fiberglass or stainless steel AISI 410)
• Anchors (reinforced bar or packer)

Refer to figures 2.1 & 2.2 for details of 1-3 point BHE reference head assembly. Reference head assembly
is supplied packed from factory as per items listed in figure 2.1. The sensor is separately supplied but it is
very convenient to assemble it at site inside the reference head assembly along with the connecting rod
ends according to instructions given in § 3.
The reference head assembly consists of a flanged housing (5) to one end of which is fixed an adaptor (6)
with help of M4 x 8 grub screws (8). A guide plate (7) is fastened to the adopter with M5x12 Allen head
screw (9). The reference plate (14) is fixed to guide plate through one stainless steel center pillar (13).
Corresponding holes of guide plate and reference plate are marked clockwise serially starting from number
‘1’, ‘2’ and ‘3’ for respective anchors. Similarly, corresponding holes of guide plate and reference plate are
marked ‘G’ and ‘V’ for the grout and vent tube. The removable cover (19) is threaded to the adopter (6).
2.1.2 Potentiometric displacement sensor

The Encardio-rite model EDE-PXX linear displacement sensor is used in model EDS-70P borehole
extensometer for transmitting the mechanical
displacement to a remote observation room. It basically
consists of a potentiometric sensor having a stroke of
50, 100 or 150 mm.
The retractable shaft of the sensor has a male thread of
M6 x 12 to which the connecting rod can be attached
through a link system. The sensor is provided with an
integral 1 m long φ 4 mm four core cable with cores in
red, black, green and white. Red and black cores are for
frequency signal while green and white are for
temperature monitoring through a thermistor.
Page | 3
Ø100
14
Wrapped in
a plastic bag 19
15,16 V G
17,18 13
1
3
24 & 2
25
B
7 9 15 17
8
6
PLAN (without cover)
16
Ø160
5 18
22
A
10 21 23
11
12b
Ø82 12a
Displacement A B 20
50 mm 248 200
100 mm 378 240
150 mm 510 300
Figure 2.1 - Three point BHE

reference head assembly
Description 3
Item
1 Anchor
4
2 Connecting rod
3 Vent tube Cable tie
4 Grout tube
5 Flanged housing
6 Adaptor
7 Guide plate 2
8 Grub screw, M4x8
9 Allen head screw, M5x12
10 Rubber bush Grout
11 Washer
1
12a Hollow bolt
12b Long hollow bolt
13 Center pillar
14 Reference plate
15 Ø76
Reference button
16 Link plate
17 Sensor tightening nut
18 Sensor lock nut
19 Cover
Figure 2.2 - Three point BHE
20 Displacement sensor
detailed assembly
21 Expandable anchor
22 Nipple with chuck nut
23 Junction box assembly
Page | 4
Ø140
14
Wrapped in
a plastic bag 19
15,16 V G 1
6
17,18 13 2
5
24 & 4 3
8.b
25
B
7 9
8.a 15 17
6 PLAN (without cover)
16
Ø188
5 18
A
22
10 21 23
11
12
Ø120
20
Displacement A B
50 mm 248 200
100 mm 378 240
150 mm 510 300
Figure 2.3 - Six point BHE
Item Description
3
1 Anchor
2 Connecting rod 4
3 Vent tube
4 Grout tube Cable tie
5 Flanged housing
6 Adaptor
7 Guide plate 2
8.a Grub screw, M4x5
8.b Grub screw, M4x8
9 Allen head screw, M5x12 Grout
10 Rubber bush
1
11 Washer
12 Hollow bolt
13 Center pillar
14 Reference plate
Ø102
15 Reference button
16 Link plate
18 Sensor lock nut Figure 2.4 - Six point
19 Cover BHE detailed assembly
22 Chuck nuts
Refer to data sheet 1084-02RP on model EDE-PXX potentiometric linear displacement transducer (20)
for detailed description and specifications.
Page | 5
2.1.4.1 Fiberglass connecting rod assembly

Fibreglass connecting rod assembly (refer figure-2.5) comprises of a fiberglass rod of specified length
protected inside an outer continuous nylon tube. The rod has two end connectors. One end connector has
a male thread and fits into anchor (1). Other end connector with a female thread is for connecting to
reference button (15). Displacement of connecting rod end is transferred through a link plate (16) to the
displacement sensor (20) with the help of a sensor-tightening nut (17) and a sensor lock nut (18).
Components 15, 16, 17 and 18 are packed inside the reference head assembly in a plastic bag.
The fibreglass assembly is illustrated below in figure 2.5
Fibre glass rod assly.

Nylon Tube (OD - 10 x 1 thk) Nylon Tube (OD - 12 x 1 thk, 125 long)
Figure 2.5 – Fiberglass connecting rod assembly

Anchor end of nylon tube is firmly sealed with anchor to prevent any grout from leaking in. Other end of
nylon tube is firmly sealed in reference head assembly with help of rubber bush (10), washer (11) and
hollow bolt (12a is used for 1,2,3 and G). Long hollow (12b) is specially used for hole marked ‘V’ for ease
of tightening. Proper sealing in reference head assembly is especially necessary for upwards to horizontally
slanting holes to prevent any grout leaking into reference head assembly during grouting.
The outer nylon tube allows free movement to fiberglass rod and reference button even after borehole is
grouted.
downward holes. This is because in vertically upward holes the connecting rod is in tension;
whereas in downward holes it is in compression, resulting in sagging or buckling. Longer the
Shorter the extensometer better is accuracy of measurement of relative displacement


connecting rods of 3 m length and one connecting rod of 1 m. On the near end of assembled connecting
rods a standard 14 cm spacer with male thread on one side and female on the other side is always
provided.
Page | 6
Displacement of connecting rod end is transferred through a link plate (16) to the displacement sensor (20)
with the help of a sensor-tightening nut (17) and a sensor lock nut (18). Components 15, 16, 17 and 18 are
packed inside the reference head assembly in a plastic bag.
The male thread of connecting rod most distant from the mouth of the borehole fits into the anchor (1).
The furthest PVC tubing from mouth of borehole is firmly sealed to the anchor to prevent any grout from
leaking in. This 3 m long PVC tubing is cut by 50 mm from the plain end to make it convenient for successive
The near end of the PVC tubing is firmly sealed in flanged housing (5) with help of rubber bush (10), washer
(11) and hollow bolt (12a and 12b). The PVC tube should be cut such that when sealed in flanged housing,
its face extends around 20 mm beyond rubber bush (10). Proper sealing in reference head assembly is
especially necessary for upwards to horizontally slanting holes for preventing any grout for leaking into
2.1.4 Anchor
Following type of anchors are available from Encardio-rite:
• Encardio-rite grout able anchors φ 20 mm x 500

mm long usually used for hard rocks. These are
lowered down or pushed in borehole along with
connecting rod of appropriate length and fixed
in position by cement grout. The connecting rod
is protected from cement grout by enclosing in
plastic tubing, thus allowing for its free movement. Groutable anchors may also be installed in
vertical boreholes or holes inclined upwards. Installation of groutable anchors in holes inclined
upwards needs special precautions to retain grout and prevent it from flowing out of borehole.
• Encardio-rite packer anchors usually used for soft rocks and soil. These are lowered down or
pushed in borehole along with connecting rod of appropriate length and fixed in position by
pumping cement grout into the packer for taking a firm grip with the surroundings. Refer to
consultant for use with fibreglass connecting rods.
NOTE: Encardio-rite uses convention that depth of anchor is calculated as distance from mouth of
2.1.4.2 Groutable anchor for fiberglass option
Figure 2.6 Groutable anchor for fiberglass connection rod
Page | 7
2.1.4.3 Groutable anchor for AISI 410 rod option (swaged end of PVC tube slides over it)
Pin
Anchor
PVC pipe (od-14x2 thk., 30 long)
Figure 2.7 Groutable anchor for SS connecting rods
Grout tube
Compression tube fitting Packer anchor
Bore hole
Figure 2.8 Packer anchor
2.2 Accessories
2.2.1 Junction box

Output cable gland
Individual cables can be extended from each
sensor to the observation room. Alternatively a Enclosure
junction box is available for termination of

individual cables from sensors and transmitting
the signal through a multi-core cable to the Output screwed
observation room. terminals
4 5 6
2.2.2 Cables
For range of cables available, refer to 1 2 3 Input screwed
terminals
‘Accessories’ in Consolidated Catalog on
http://www.encardio.com.
Chuck nuts
Nipple
Figure 2.9 – Junction box
Page | 8
3 INSTALLATION OF MULTI POSITION BOREHOLE EXTENSOMETER
NOTE: Procedure described below is for installing 1–3 point borehole extensometer with fibreglass
connecting rods for in a downward sloping hole using groutable anchors. For installation in
an upward to horizontally sloping borehole, or for using packer anchors, modify procedure
suitably.
Due to many permutations and combinations in type of BHE required by users and widely
varying conditions encountered from site to site, the procedure described is suggestive and
may be used as a guide only. The installation personnel will have to use experience in
devising the best method of installation.

3.1.1 Drill hole of 76 mm diameter to a depth of 0.8 m more than specified length of deepest anchor.
NOTE: In case borehole extensometer is to be mounted horizontally and design permits, it is

desirable to provide a downward slope of 5o or more to borehole. This facilitates grouting of
anchors as grout can easily flow in.
3.1.2 At mouth of borehole, increase diameter of drilled hole to 90 mm up to a depth of 300 mm for 50
mm displacement sensor or 430 mm for 100 mm and 560 mm for 150 mm displacement sensor.
This is for wrapping outside of housing with rags or jute cloth strips soaked in cement during
installation.
3.1.3 Insert reference head assembly centralized in the 76 mm borehole. Taking holes on flange as
3.1.4 Wash hole clean up to bottom by pumping in fresh water.
3.2 Check sensor before installation

The cable from sensor is four wired. Red and black cores are for frequency signal while green and white
are for temperature monitoring through a thermostat. Check working of sensor as follows:
3.2.1 Connect sensor to portable indicator model EDI-53P. With displacement shaft in retracted position
enter sensor constants from Test Certificate (page 11) and set reading in engineering units at zero
mm.
NOTE: Data entry of sensor constants in the EDI-53P will later on be used to set sensor in flanged
housing during installation process.
3.2.2 Using a scale, move the shaft by about 25 mm. The indicator should read around 25 mm. This
change in reading ensures proper functioning of displacement sensing system.
The sensor can now be installed in the flanged housing assembly (5) when required.
Linear displacement transducer R (+)

Ext.
Bk (-)
Gn (-)
O/P
Wh (+)
L
Figure 3.1 – Potentiometric sensor
Page | 9
3.3 Sample test certificate for potentiometric sensor
TEST CERTIFICATE
Instrument : Potentiometric displacement sensor

Model : EDE-P05
Serial number : XXXXX Date : 15.12.2016
Range : 50 mm
Input Observed value Average Calculated Error

Displacement Up1 Up2 displacement
(mm) (Volts) (Volts) (Volts) (mm) % FS
0.00 0.0550 0.0580 0.0565 0.00 0.00
7.00 0.3250 0.3260 0.3255 6.95 0.11
17.00 0.7150 0.7140 0.7145 16.99 0.01
27.00 1.0990 1.0990 1.0990 26.92 0.16
37.00 1.4870 1.4870 1.4870 36.95 0.11
48.00 1.9150 1.9150 1.9150 48.00 0.00
Max error (%FS) : 0.16
Linear gage factor (G) : 25.83 mm/Volts

Displacement "D" is calculated with the following equation:
Linear : D(mm) =G(R1-R0)
R1 = current reading & R0 is initial reading in Volts
Zero reference (initial position) in the field must be established by recording the initial reading R0 (Volts) just after
installation.
Note : Zero displacement reading given in above calibration chart is taken at around 3 mm from
1) mechanical zero.(slider fully in).
For best linearity use the displacement transducer only upto 3 mm from its mechanical displacement
2) limits (ends)

Red : Excitation '+ 5 V DC'
Black : Excitation 0 V
white : Output high (0 - 2 V DC)
Green : Output 0 V
CAUTION: Never rotate shaft of displacement sensor in respect to the outside body. This will permanently
damage the sensor. During checking pull or push shaft only axially. A pin has been provided
at end of displacement sensor that sits flush in a groove in sensor body.
Page | 10
3.4 Procedure
3.3.1 Refer to figure 2-1. Remove cover (19) and take out polythene bag that contains requisite quantity
of reference buttons (15), link plates (16), sensor tightening nut (17), locknuts (18), M6 x 100 or
125 mm or 150 mm cheese head screw (24) depending upon type of housing and locking nuts
(25).
3.3.2 Remove guide plate (7) with 4 mm Allen key and loosen hollow bolts (12a and 12b) from holes
marked 1, 2 and 3 from flanged housing (5) and place latter flat on clean ground around 1 m away
from borehole.
NOTE: If less than three points are required, plug other points on flanged housing (5) with a rubber
plug (31-09123), steel washer (11) and hollow bolts (12a). Normally, this is done at factory.
3.3.3 Cut grout and air vent tubes (12 mm od x 10 mm id supplied in coil form) to required length.
Generally, lower end of grout tube is kept at a level higher than anchor closest to borehole face.
Grout should cover anchor closest to mouth or be around 1 m from face of borehole whichever
distance is less. To determine length of grout tube, ensure that around 1.5 m is required outside
the reference plate (14) for ease in attaching it to grout pump. Air vent tube should project around
0.3 m is outside reference plate (14). Lower end of air vent tube should always be at a higher level
than lower end of grout tube. While inserting last anchor in borehole, lowest end of grout tube is
tied with a cable tie to the connecting rod.
NOTE: In upward to horizontally sloping borehole, grout tube should be about 2 m longer than
specified depth of deepest anchor and taped around 100 mm below far end of anchor. Tape
grout tube every 2 m with a PVC tape to plastic tube of connecting rod assembly to prevent it
from swinging loose.
specified depth of deepest anchor and taped around 100 mm above far end of anchor. Tape
air vent tube every 2 m with a PVC tape to the nylon tube of connecting rod assembly to
prevent it from swinging loose. Top end of air vent tube should be at a level higher than the
deepest anchor.
around 100 mm beyond rear of deepest anchor and should not get detached. This is very
necessary for the grout to fill in up to end of longest anchor.
3.3.4 Guide grout tube through hollow bolt (12a) of hole marked G at bottom of flanged housing and
corresponding holes on guide plate (7) and reference plate (14) ensuring that when flanged
housing is assembled to adaptor (6), the grout tube is around 1.5 m outside the reference plate.
Similarly, guide the air vent tube through hollow bolt (12b) of hole marked V at bottom of flanged
housing ensuring that when flanged housing is assembled to adaptor (6), the vent tube is around
0.3 m outside the reference plate (14).
3.3.5 Tighten corresponding hollow bolt (12a and 12b) with spanner size 21 mm
CAUTION: In upward to horizontally sloping borehole, be particularly careful in tightening the hollow bolts
(12a and 12b) properly as grout may leak through into the reference head assembly during
the grouting process.
3.3.6 Replace hollow bolts (12a) in holes marked 1, 2 and 3 on flanged housing (5) loosely tightening
them with hand.
3.3.7 Screw male end connector of longest connecting (fiberglass) rod assembly (2) to groutable anchor
(1). In the process, the nylon tubing will also get firmly gripped to groutable anchor. A little grease
may be used for ease in assembly.
Page | 11
3.3.8 Lower deepest groutable anchor into borehole till near end of fibreglass rod is around 1 - 1.5 m
outside face of borehole. Trim nylon sleeve such that female connector and fibreglass rod is
exposed by around 100 mm from connector end.
WARNING! Fibreglass rod is supplied in coil form using cable ties. It is very stiff material and must be
3.3.9 Guide end of fibreglass rod through hollow bolt (12a) of hole marked ‘1’ at bottom of flanged
housing (5) and corresponding holes on guide plate (7) with end protruding around 80 mm from
guide plate (7) face. To do this the fibreglass rod will have to be bent. Tighten hollow bolt on
connecting rod such that it does not slip into the borehole.
3.3.10 Repeat § 3.3.7 to 3.3.9 for second deepest anchor by guiding connecting rod end through hole
marked ‘2’ at bottom of flanged housing (5). Follow same procedure for near anchor.
24 24
To Pump To Pump
25 25
4 holes Ø18 4 holes Ø18

at 130 mm PCD. at 158 mm PCD.
Figure 3.2 – Setting arrangement for 3pt BHE Figure 3.3 – Setting arrangement for 6pt BHE
Item Description
24 M6 x 100 mm or 125 mm or 150 mm cheese head screw
25 M6 lock nuts – 3 no. per cheese head screw
NOTE: Always assemble and mount deepest anchor first. This is a good practice to follow to avoid
any confusion at a later date in identification of anchors. Holes on top of flanged housing are
marked clockwise with identification numbers 1, 2, 3, G respectively and V in middle.
As an Encardio-rite convention, serial number ‘1’ always corresponds to deepest anchor,

serial number ‘2’ corresponds to second deepest anchor and so on. Also as an Encardio-rite
convention, looking into hole, serial numbers are always in a clockwise direction
As an additional precaution, make a note in a diary of orientation of serial number ‘1’ with
geographical North.
Page | 12
NOTE: When BHE is installed on a side wall or roof,

Reference
extension is generally expected. In such a plate
case, it may be desirable to set connecting
+40
rod end as close as possible to reference
plate (14). Similarly, when BHE is installed in
a vertically down borehole settlement is
generally expected. In such cases, it may be 0
-10
desirable to set connecting rod end as close
~10
Tube face
30
as possible to guide plate (7). In other cases,
it may be necessary to set connecting rod
end in middle such that either compression or
tension can be monitored.
In other words, if only compression is

expected, set zero reading of sensor by Guide plate
extending shaft by around 10 mm. If only Downward borehole
extension is expected, set zero reading of
sensor by extending shaft by around 10 mm
less than sensor range. If required, sensor
may be set in mid position. As a precaution,
+25
never set the sensor at the very end.
0
Sensor range Setting Shaft end from
(A) range (B) guide plate top (C)
-25
~10
45
50 mm ± 25 mm 45 mm
Tube face
100 mm ± 50 mm 70 mm
150 mm ± 75 mm 95 mm
Mid position borehole
A set of 100 mm or 125 mm or 150 mm long

cheese head screws (24) and lock nuts (25) is
+10
provided for this purpose. 0
3.3.11 Assemble cheese head screw (24) and locking
nuts (25) as shown in figure 3.2. Slightly loosen
hollow bolts (12) related to holes ‘1’, ‘2’ and ‘3’. -40
60
~10
Adjust end of connecting rod in required position

Tube face
and tighten the lock nuts (24). To set connecting
rod ends, refer to table below:
For any other required range, set distance ‘C’
accordingly. For example, when installing a BHE
with 50 mm displacement in a vertically downward
borehole, settlement is expected and setting Upward borehole
range specified may be – 10/+ 40 mm. In such a
Figure 3.4 – Procedure to set
case connecting rod end distance from guide plate
displacement sensor
Page | 13
top (7) should be set at (45 – 15) i.e. 30 mm.

NOTE: If EDI-53P shows negative displacement reading, movement of structure is away from
borehole face and vice versa.
3.3.12 Re-assemble guide plate (7) with grub (8) taking care that holes marked ‘1’ ‘G’ and ‘V’ are aligned
in reference plate (14), guide plate (7) and flange housing (5).
3.3.13 Tighten hollow bolts (12a and 12b) with spanner size 21 mm to firmly grip nylon tube but not to
squeeze or hinder free movement of female end connector inside the nylon tube.
NOTE: In upward to horizontally sloping borehole, tighten hollow bolts (12a and 12b) particularly
carefully as grout may leak through into the reference head assembly during the grouting
process.
(5) to build up approximately 5-8 mm thick layer. Lift and insert housing in borehole using a to and
fro screwing motion sealing the annular space between housing and borehole.
3.3.15 Fix expandable anchors (21) in holes drilled earlier for securing flanged housing with the M16 nuts
and washers provided. Give enough time to let flanged housing set in borehole.
3.3.16 Connect grout pipe to grouting machine and pump grout till the entire cavity is filled and grout flows
out of air vent pipe. Be very careful that grout flowing out of air vent tube does not get into the
flanged housing and makes the installation messy.
3.3.17 Pump clean water through the grout tube till clear water comes out of air vent tube. This will keep
the grout tube clean for topping up the grout later on.
Give sufficient time for grout to set.
CAUTION: Clean up grout and air vent tubes with clean water after grouting operation is complete as in
§ 3.3.16 above
NOTE: Grout should cover anchor closest to the mouth or be around 1 m from the face of borehole
whichever distance is less. This can be checked by inserting a φ 3 mm wire into borehole
through vent pipe.
get into the protective nylon tubing and jam the setting rods.
3.3.18 Again pump grout into the system after setting period of grout is over to ensure that all anchors
are properly grouted. During setting, heavier grout has a tendency to settle down leaving water at
top with a possibility that anchors near face of borehole are not properly grouted. Rule this
possibility out by pumping in grout again and ensuring that any such water at the top is pumped
out through the air vent tube and replaced by grout.
CAUTION: To get correct displacement readings, ensure that all anchors are properly grouted. This
problem may be particularly faced in case of near anchors in downward boreholes and rear
anchors in upward holes where with cement in grout settling down, there may only be water
around the anchors.
Page | 14
NOTE: For very deep holes, staged grouting may be necessary. It is always best to consult grouting
engineer at site and take his advice. If this is necessary, procure BHE with provision for one
extra connecting rod hole and use this hole for an extra grout tube. As an example, for a three
position BHE, procure a six position BHE flanged housing. Use one of the extra holes for
another grout pipe and block the two other extra holes.
NOTE: Packer anchors do not require the borehole to be fully grouted. It is recommended to use a
hand grout pump for better control. It is important to pump water first to water saturate packer
geotextile sufficiently. Pump grout until pressure builds up sufficiently to around 400 to 500
kPa. Let pressure dissipate for a few minutes and then pump again till a distinct pressure is
felt. Recommend grout mixture is 1 part cement and 1 part water by weight. Kink and tape
grout tube to retain pressure and disconnect pump. Clean pump thoroughly.
3.3.19 Remove screws (24) and lock nuts (25). Remove reference plate (14) and center pillar (13) Cut
and remove grout and vent tubes. Round edges of grout and vent tube with a hand file. Clean
reference head assembly properly. Reassemble reference plate with spacers to guide plate.
3.3.20 Remove guide plate assembly from adaptor (6).
3.3.21 Insert sensor (20) in flanged housing (5) taking care that the cable is carefully routed out to be
eventually connected to the junction box (23). Secure sensor to guide plate (7) with grub screws
(8) ensuring that tube face (refer to figure 3.3) is around 10 mm extended from face of guide plate
(7).
NOTE: Mark sensor identification tag on each end of the cable for feeding gauge factor in later stage.
Pull shaft of sensor and assemble to connecting rod end with reference button (15), link plate
(16), sensor tightening nut (17) and locknut (18).
3.3.22 Screw in the sensors to respective connecting rods clearly noting position of extensometer ‘1’.
CAUTION: Never rotate shaft of displacement sensor in respect to the outside body. This will
permanently damage the sensor. During installation pull or push or pull shaft only axially. A
pin has been provided at the end of displacement sensor that sits flush in a groove in sensor
body. During assembly operation and while using spanners for tightening, keep sensor in
closed position with pin seated inside groove such that no torque is exerted on its shaft and
there is no rotational movement.
CAUTION: Do not use thread sealant on any thread while mounting the sensor as it may have to be
replaced at a later date.
3.3.23 Check displacement reading of sensor with model EDI-53P read-out. Reading would be around
specified initial reading (refer to § 3.3.11). Set reading precisely by loosening respective sensor
with grub screws (8), repositioning sensor in guide plate (7) and again tightening grub screw.
3.3.24 Reset zero reading in EDI-53P to final set position of sensor. Subsequent readings will determine
relative displacement between anchors.
3.3.25 Take initial readings with help of depth micrometer. It is recommended to note date time and
temperature
3.3.26 NOTE: A proper record of depth readings with depth micrometer should be permanently
maintained. This is very important because sometimes it becomes necessary to verify the data
from electronic sensors.
3.3.27 Pull out cables from in flanged housing (5) and attach junction box (23) and fastened through nut
and chuck nut.
3.3.28 Connect leads to respective connector pins in junction box.
Page | 15
NOTE: For transmitting signals to observation room, 4 core, 6 core, 12 core or 20 core cables are
3.3.29 Replace cover (19) over guide plate (7).
Figure 3.5 – Junction box wiring diagram
NOTE: Model EDS-70P BHE can be used as a mechanical system in case electronic measurement
is not required. In such a case, BHE is installed without the electronic sensors. Later on, in
case in some of the installations continuous monitoring is required, the electronic sensors can
be installed at a later date.

extensometer:
3.4.2 Rosin 63/37 solder wire
3.4.4 Cable jointing compound
3.4.6 Spanner 6, 8, 10, 18, 21,22,24, 30 and 38
3.4.7 Allen key 2, 4
3.4.8 Screw driver (tip size 6 x 0.8 and 3 x 0.5 mm)
3.4.9 Phillips head screw driver (tip size 2 mm)
3.4.10 Hacksaw with 150 mm blades
3.4.11 Cable cutter
3.4.12 Wire stripper
3.4.13 Insulated pliers 165 mm
3.4.14 150 mm flat file
3.4.15 Toothbrush
3.4.16 Wire brush
3.4.18 Cello tape/Insulation tape
3.4.19 Micrometer depth gage 100 mm range
3.4.20 Digital indicator model EDI-53P
Page | 16
Page | 17
USERS’ MANUAL
BOREHOLE EXTENSOMETER
SYSTEM (BHE) WITH VIBRATING
WIRE/ POTENTIOMETRIC SENSORS
MODEL EDS-71V/P
Doc. # WI 6002.99 R00 | Jun 2011

Users’ Manual EDS-71V/P Single point borehole extensometer
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Applications 1
2 BOREHOLE EXTENSOMETER (BHE) 4

2.1 General Description 4
2.1.2 Displacement sensor 4
2.1.4 Anchor 7
2.2 Accessories 8
2.2.1 Junction box 8
2.2.2 Cable 8
3 INSTALLATION OF SINGLE POINT BOREHOLE EXTENSOMETER 9

3.2 Check sensor before installation 9
3.3 Procedure 12
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite model EDS-71V single point borehole extensometer using vibrating wire sensors is a
precision instrument designed to help civil engineers and geologists in measurement of deformation of rock
mass and adjacent or surrounding soil. Together with anchor bolt load cells and tape extensometer, it is
an essential piece of equipment for investigation and monitoring of foundations, slopes & embankments
and for studying behaviour of rock around underground cavities, tunnels and mines.
NOTE: Same manual to be used for model EDS-71P single point borehole extensometer using
potentiometric sensors. Make special note of the following:
 Diameter of model EDE-PXX potentiometric sensor is 16 mm whereas diameter of Model EDE-VXX is

12.7 mm. This requires adaptor cum guide plate (6) and link plate (16) in figure 2.2 to be different in
the two assemblies.
 Manual readout unit for EDE-PXX is model EDI-53P, whereas for model EDE-VXX is model EDI-51V.
 For Sample test certificate of model EDE-PXX refer to page 3-3. Sample test certificate for model EDE-
VXX is given on page 3-2.
1.1 Applications
 To study effectiveness of the roof/wall support system of a mine, underground cavity or tunnel.
 To predict potential roof or wall falls before they actually occur. Roof or wall falls in underground cavities
are almost invariably preceded by measurable sags as the strata opens up and the movement usually
occurs at an increasing rate as fall conditions are approached. Unsuspected roof and wall falls may
result in serious accidents and may require costly patch-up and repair operations.
cavities or due to construction of heavy structures like concrete, rockfill, masonry or earth dams over
the foundation.
 Suitable for upward or downward sloping hole using fibreglass or stainless steel AISI-410 connecting
rods.
Model EDS-71V/P has following options:

 Required borehole for installation of single point extensometers is φ 50 mm. Diameter at the mouth of
borehole is increased to 63 mm (300 mm depth for 50 mm displacement sensor or 430 mm depth for
100 mm displacement sensor and 560 mm for 150 mm displacement sensor).
 The displacement is measured electronically by using a vibrating wire displacement transducer model
EDE-VXX and a readout system model EDI-51V or data acquisition system model EDAS-10. The
displacement is measured using potentiometric sensor model EDE-PXX with an indicator EDI- 53P
The displacement is measured electronically by using a vibrating wire displacement transducer model
EDE-VXX and Potentiometric displacement transducer model EDE-PXX with read out system model EDI-
51V and EDI-53P respectively or data acquisition system model EDAS-10.
Page | 1
Dimensional details of sensor
Displacement Overall length of VW sensor Overall length of Pot. sensor

(in closed position) (in closed position)
50 mm 290 mm 325 mm
100 mm 420 mm 425 mm

150 mm 550 mm 525 mm
The sensor shaft is fixed to female thread in connecting rod through a sensor lock nut (18), link plate (16),
sensor tightening nut (17) and a reference button (15) - refer to figures 2.1 and 2.2. The outside body of
sensor is fixed to a adopter cum guide plate (6) in the flanged housing at the face of the borehole. The
system is rugged and is protected by a protecting cover (19). Flange assembly (5) .Nipple is an integral
part of flanged housing (22) through which cable for sensors can be taken to a junction box (23) and then
through a multi-core cable to any distant location.
NOTE: Encardio-rite uses the convention that depth of anchor is calculated as the distance from the
mouth of hole to near end of anchor.
damage the sensor. During installation pull / push or pull shaft only axially. A pin has been
provided at the end of displacement sensor that sits flush in a groove in sensor body. During
assembly operation and while using spanners for tightening, keep sensor in closed position
with pin seated inside groove such that no torque is exerted on its shaft and there is no
rotational movement.
this manual.
manuals cannot provide for each and every condition in the field, which may affect the
Page | 2
The manual is divided into a number of sections, each section containing a specific type of information.
the subject. You will find a lot of unexpected information in the sections you feel you may skip.
For description of vibrating wire borehole extensometers manufactured by Encardio-rite: See § 2.1
“Borehole extensometers”.
For layout drawings of vibrating wire borehole extensometers: See figures 2.1 – 2.2.
For installation of single point borehole extensometers: See § 3 “Installation of single position borehole
extensometer”.
Page | 3
2 BOREHOLE EXTENSOMETER (BHE)
2.1 General Description
Borehole extensometer (BHE) measures extension (displacement) that takes place with time in a bored
hole or in several bored holes in a rock mass. The Encardio-rite BHE essentially consists of one anchor
and a reference plate. Anchor is set in same borehole or in different boreholes drilled adjacent to first
borehole. The BHE helps to accurately measure distance between anchor with respect to reference plate
and thus monitor with passage of time their relative displacement in respect to each other. It is usually
assumed anchor is in stable ground and so any change in anchor spacing is interpreted as sag of roof bed,
movement of side wall or slope, settlement of foundation etc.
Model EDS-71V/P BHE is specially designed to monitor a relative displacement of a single anchor
economically over any other borehole extensometer. At locations where access to mouth of borehole is
easily available, mechanical measurement of displacement by model EDS-64U/D is economical and
reliable. Displacement readings are taken by a micrometer depth gage by measuring depth of reference
button at near end of connecting rod from a reference plate.
Model EDS-71V/P borehole extensometer basically comprises following major sub-assemblies:

 Vibrating wire displacement sensor/ potetiometric sensor
 Connecting rod assembly (fibreglass or stainless steel AISI 410)
 Anchor (reinforced bar or packer)
 Grouting and vent tube as required

Refer to figures 2.1& 2.2 for details of single point BHE reference head assembly. Reference head
assembly is supplied packed from factory as per items listed in figure 2.1. The sensor is separately supplied
but it is very convenient to assemble it at site inside the reference head assembly along with the connecting
rod ends according to instructions given in § 3.
The reference head assembly consists of a flanged housing (5), an adaptor cum guide plate (6) is fixed to
the near end with help of M4x8 grub screws (8a). A grub screw M4x5 (8b) is provided in adopter cum guide
plate to fix the sensor. The reference plate (14) is fixed to guide plate with an allen head screw M5x12 and
one stainless steel centre pillar (13) in such a way that the holes marked (1,G.V )on reference plate is
aligned to the respective holes of guide plate. The holes 1,G,V are used for connecting rod, grout and vent
tube respectively. The removable cover (19) is threaded to the adopter cum guide plate (6) to protect the
entire assembly.
2.1.2 Displacement sensor
The Encardio-rite model EDE-VXX/PXX linear displacement sensor is used in model EDS-71V/P borehole
extensometer for transmitting the mechanical displacement to a remote observation room. It basically
consists of a vibrating wire sensor having a stroke of 50 , 100 or 150 mm.
The retractable shaft of the sensor having a male thread of M6x12 is connected to the connecting rod
through a link system. The sensor is provided with an integral 1 m long φ 4 mm four core cable with cores
in red, black, green and white. Red and black cores are for frequency signal while green and white are for
temperature monitoring through a thermistor.
Refer to data sheet 1085-03 P on model EDE-VXX vibrating wire linear displacement transducer (20) for
detailed description and specifications.
The potentiometric sensor model EDE-PXX is used in place of vibrating wire sensor if required.
Page | 4
Ø65
9
Wrapped in
a plastic bag 14
15,16
19
17,18 V
24 & 13
25 8.b 1
G
8.a
B
6
5 15 17
PLAN (without cover)
Ø130 16
10
11
7 18
12
22
Ø52
Displacement 20
A B
50 mm 248 185 21
23
100 mm 378 225
150 mm 510 285
Figure 2.1 - Single point BHE

Item Description
1 Anchor
2 Connecting rod 3, 4
3 Vent tube
4 Grout tube
5 Flanged housing 2
6 Adaptor cum guide plate
7 Long hollow bolt
8.a Grub screw, M4x8
Grout
8.b Grub screw, M4x5
9 Allen head screw, M5x12
10 Rubber bush
11 Washer
12 Hollow bolt 1
13 Center pillar
14 Reference plate Ø50
15 Reference button
16 Link plate
18 Sensor lock nut
19 Cover
Figure 2.2 - Single point BHE
detailed assembly
22 Nipple with chuck nut
Page | 5

2.1.3.1 Fibreglass connecting rod assembly
Fibreglass connecting rod assembly (2) comprises of a fibreglass rod of specified length protected inside
an outer continuous nylon tube. The rod has two end connectors. One end connector has a male thread
and fits into anchor (1). Other end connector with a female thread is for connecting to reference button
(15). Displacement of connecting rod end is transferred through a link plate (16) to the displacement sensor
(20) with the help of a sensor-tightening nut (17) and a sensor lock nut (18). Components 15, 16, 17 and
18 are packed inside the reference head assembly in a plastic bag.
The fibreglass assembly is illustrated below in figure 2.3
Fibre glass rod assly.

Nylon Tube (OD - 10 x 1 thk) Nylon Tube (OD - 12 x 1 thk)
Figure 2.3 – Fibreglass connecting rod assembly
Anchor end of nylon tube is firmly sealed with anchor to prevent any grout from leaking in. Other end of
nylon tube is firmly sealed in reference head assembly with help of rubber bush (10), washer (11) and
hollow bolt (12) and long hollow bolt
Proper sealing in reference head assembly is especially necessary for upwards to horizontally slanting
holes to prevent any grout leaking into reference head assembly during grouting.
The outer nylon tube allows free movement to fibreglass rod and reference button even after borehole is
grouted.
downward holes. This is because in vertically upward holes the connecting rod is in tension;
whereas in downward holes it is in compression, resulting in sagging or buckling. Longer the

connecting rods of 3 m length and one connecting rod of 1 m.
Page | 6
On the near end of assembled connecting rods a standard 14 cm spacer with male thread on one side and
female on the other side is always provided. The reference button (15) is threaded into the female end of
this spacer. The male thread of connecting rod most distant from the mouth of the borehole fits into the
anchor (1).

The furthest PVC tubing is firmly sealed to the anchor to prevent any leakage of grout into the PVC tube..
This 3 m long PVC tubing is cut by 50 mm from the plain end to make it convenient for successive
The near end of the PVC tubing is firmly sealed in flanged housing (5) with help of rubber bush (10), washer
(11) and hollow bolt (12). The PVC tube should be cut such that when sealed in flanged housing, its face
extends around 20 mm beyond rubber bush (10). Proper sealing in reference head assembly is especially
necessary for upwards to horizontally slanting holes for preventing any grout for leaking into reference
head assembly during grouting.
2.1.4 Anchor
2.1.4.1 Following type of anchors are available from Encardio-rite:
 Encardio-rite groutable anchors φ 20 mm x 500 mm long usually used for hard rocks. These are
lowered down or pushed in borehole along with connecting rod of appropriate length and fixed in
position by cement grout. The connecting rod is protected from cement grout by enclosing in plastic
tubing, thus allowing for its free movement. Groutable anchors may also be installed in vertical
boreholes or holes inclined upwards. Installation of groutable anchors in holes inclined upwards needs
special precautions to retain grout and prevent it from flowing out of borehole.
 Encardio-rite packer anchors usually used for soft rocks and soil. These are lowered down or pushed
in borehole along with connecting rod of appropriate length and fixed in position by pumping cement
grout into the packer for taking a firm grip with the surroundings. Refer to consultant for use with
fibreglass connecting rods.
NOTE: Encardio-rite uses convention that depth of anchor is calculated as distance from mouth of
2.1.4.2 Groutable anchor for fibreglass option
2.1.4.3 Groutable anchor for AISI 410 rod option (swaged end of PVC tube slides over it)
Figure 2.4
Pin
Anchor
PVC pipe (od-14x2 thk., 30 long)
Figure 2.5
Page | 7

To grout pump
Soil
Grout tube
PVC tube
Extension rod Hollow bolt
Washer
Tie rod
Rubber bush
Grout
Hose clamp
Figure 2-6
2.2 Accessories
2.2.1 Junction box
Cable can be extended from the sensor to the observation room. Alternatively a junction box is available
for termination of cable from sensor and transmitting the signal through a multi-core cable to the
observation room.
2.2.2 Cable
For range of cables available, refer to ‘Accessories’ in Consolidated Catalogue on
http://www.encardio.com.
PCB # 14-05004
Figure 2.7- Junction box
Page | 8
3 INSTALLATION OF SINGLE POINT BOREHOLE EXTENSOMETER
NOTE: Procedure described below is for installing single point borehole extensometer with fibreglass
connecting rods for in a downward sloping hole using groutable anchors. For installation in
an upward to horizontally sloping borehole, or for using packer anchors, modify procedure
suitably.
Due to many permutations and combinations in type of BHE required by users and widely
varying conditions encountered from site to site, the procedure described is suggestive and
may be used as a guide only. The installation personnel will have to use experience in
devising the best method of installation.
3.1.1 Drill hole of 50 mm diameter to a depth of 0.8 m more than specified length.
NOTE: In case borehole extensometer is to be mounted horizontally and design permits, it is

desirable to provide a downward slope of 5o or more to borehole. This facilitates grouting of
anchors as grout can easily flow in.
3.1.2 At mouth of borehole, increase diameter of drilled hole to 63 mm up to a depth of 300 mm for 50
mm displacement sensor or 425 mm for 100 mm and 560 mm for 150 mm displacement sensor.
This is for wrapping outside of housing with rags or jute cloth strips soaked in cement during
installation.
3.1.3 Insert reference head assembly centralised in the 63 mm borehole. Taking holes on flange as
3.1.4 Wash hole clean up to bottom by pumping in fresh water.
3.2 Check sensor before installation
The cable from Vibrating wire sensor is four wired. Red and black cores are for frequency signal while
green and white are for temperature monitoring through a thermistor. The cable from Potentiometric sensor
is also four wired. Red and black cores are for (+) and (-) excitation while green and white are for (+) and
(-) output. Check working of sensor as follows:
3.2.1 Connect sensor to portable indicator model EDI-51V (for vibrating wire sensor) and EDI 53P (for
Potentiometric sensor. With displacement shaft in retracted position enter sensor constants from
Test Certificate and set reading in engineering units at zero mm.
NOTE: Data entry of sensor constants in the EDI-51V/ EDI 53P will later on be used to set sensor in
flanged housing during installation process.
3.2.2 Using a scale, move the shaft by about 25 mm. The indicator should read around 25 mm. This
change in reading ensures proper functioning of displacement sensing system. The sensor can
now be installed in the housing assembly (5) when required.
Figure 3.1 – Displacement sensor

Displacement (mm) V W sensor – L in mm. Potentiometeric. sensor – L in mm.
50 290 325
100 420 425
150 550 525
Page | 9
TEST CERTIFICATE
Customer ABC Corporation

PO # PHP 050-05 October 28, 2005
V.W Displacement sensor for Bore hole
Instrument Extensometer
09.11.200
Serial number 05508 Date 5
Temperatur
Range 50 mm e 25°C
Input Observed value Average End Point Poly

Displacement Up1 Down Up2 Fit Fit
(mm) (Digit) (Digit) (Digit) (Digit) (mm) (mm)
0.00 2297.4 2294.0 2294.0 2296 0.00 0.00
10.00 3437.8 3432.1 3432.1 3435 10.08 10.00

20.00 4570.7 4567.8 4567.8 4569 20.12 20.01
30.00 5700.8 5695.9 5695.9 5698 30.11 30.00
40.00 6824.1 6821.4 6821.4 6823 40.05 39.99
50.00 7947.7 7947.7 7946.0 7947 50.00 50.01
Error (% fs) 0.23 0.03
Digit f ² X 10E-3
Linear gage factor (G) 8.848E-03 mm/digit
Thermal factor(K) -0.003 mm/°C
2.0061E+
Polynomial constants A=1.4276E-08 B=8.7037E-03 C=01

Linear D(mm) =G(R1-R0) - K(T1-T0)
Polynomial D(mm) = A(R1)² + B(R1) + C - K(T1-T0) -D0
R1 = current reading & R0 is initial reading in digit.
D0 = Initial reading in mm
Zero reference (initial position) in the field must be established by recording the initial reading R0 (digit)
along with temperature T0 (°C) just after installation.
Note Zero displacement reading given in above calibration chart is taken at 3 mm
from mechanical zero
Red & black Signal
Green & white Thermistor
Page | 10
TEST CERTIFICATE
Date : 15.12.2008
Customer :
P.O.no. :
Instrument : Potentiometric displacement sensor
Model : EDE-P05
Serial number : XXXXX
Range : 50 mm
Input Observed value Average Calculated Error

Displacement Up1 Up2 displacement
(mm) (Volts) (Volts) (Volts) (mm) % FS
0.00 0.0550 0.0580 0.0565 0.00 0.00

7.00 0.3250 0.3260 0.3255 6.95 0.11
17.00 0.7150 0.7140 0.7145 16.99 0.01
27.00 1.0990 1.0990 1.0990 26.92 0.16
37.00 1.4870 1.4870 1.4870 36.95 0.11
48.00 1.9150 1.9150 1.9150 48.00 0.00

Linear gage factor (G) : 25.83 mm/Volts
Linear : D(mm) =G(R1-R0)
R1 = current reading & R0 is initial reading in Volts
Zero reference (initial position) in the field must be established by recording the
initial reading R0 (Volts) just after installation.
Note : 1) Zero displacement reading given in above calibration chart is taken
at around 3 mm from mechanical zero.(slider fully in).
2) For best linearity use the displacement transducer only upto 3 mm
from its mechanical displacement limits (ends)

Red : Excitation '+ 5 V DC'
Black : Excitation 0 V
white : Output high (0 - 2 V DC)
Green : Output 0 V
Page | 11
damage the sensor. During checking pull / push shaft only axially. A pin has been provided at
end of displacement sensor that sits flush in a groove in sensor body.
3.3 Procedure
3.3.1 Refer to figure 2-1 and 2.2. Remove cover (19) and take out polythene bag that contains requisite
quantity of reference buttons (15), link plates (16), sensor tightening nut (17), locknuts (18), M6 x
100 or 125 mm or 150 mm cheese head screw (24) depending upon type of housing and locking
nuts (25).
3.3.2 Remove guide plate (6) with 2 mm Allen key and hollow bolts (12) from holes marked 1, G and V
from flanged housing (5) and place latter flat on clean ground around 1 m away from borehole.
CAUTION: Always mark a line between flanged housing (5) and adopter cum guide plate (6) before
dismantling so that it can be aligned properly while assembling the sensor (20).
3.3.3 Cut grout and air vent tubes ( Φ12 mm outside dia.x 1 mm thick supplied in coil form) to required
length. Generally, lower end of grout tube is kept at a level higher than anchor. Grout should cover
anchor to mouth or be around 1 m from face of borehole whichever distance is less. To determine
length of grout tube, ensure that around 1.5 m is required outside the reference plate (14) for ease
in attaching it to grout pump. Air vent tube should be projected around 0.3 m is outside reference
plate (14). Lower end of air vent tube should always be at a higher level than lower end of grout
tube. While inserting anchor in borehole, lowest end of grout tube is tied with a cable tie to the
connecting rod
NOTE: In upward to horizontally sloping borehole, grout tube should be about 2 m longer than
specified depth of anchor and taped around 100 mm below far end of anchor. Tape grout tube
every 2 m with a PVC tape to plastic tube of connecting rod assembly to prevent it from
swinging loose.
specified depth of anchor and taped around 100 mm above far end of anchor. Tape air vent
tube every 2 m with a PVC tape to the nylon tube of connecting rod assembly to prevent it
from swinging loose. Top end of air vent tube should be at a level higher than anchor.
around 100 mm beyond rear end of anchor and should not get detached. This is very
necessary for the grout to fill in up to end of anchor.
3.3.4 Guide grout tube through hollow bolt (12), washer (11) and rubber bush (10) of hole marked G at
bottom of flanged housing and corresponding holes on guide plate (6) and reference plate (14),
the grout tube is around 1.5 m outside the reference plate. Similarly, guide the air vent tube through
hollow bolt of hole marked V at bottom of flanged housing; the vent tube is around 0.3 m outside
the reference plate (14).
3.3.5 Tighten corresponding hollow bolt (12) with spanner size 21 mm and long hollow bolt (7) to firmly
grip nylon grout and air vent tubes but not to squeeze them.
CAUTION: Always tight hollow bolts (12) 2 nos. firstly and then long hollow bolt (7) at the end.
CAUTION: In upward to horizontally sloping borehole, be particularly careful in tightening the hollow bolts
(12) properly as grout may leak through into the reference head assembly during the grouting
Page | 12
process.
3.3.6 Screw male end connector of fibreglass rod assembly (2) to groutable anchor (1). In the process,
the nylon tubing will also get firmly gripped to groutable anchor. A little grease may be used for
ease in assembly.
3.3.7 Lower groutable anchor into borehole till near end of fibreglass rod is remaining around 1 - 1.5 m
outside face of borehole. Trim nylon sleeve such that female connector and fibreglass rod is
exposed by around 100 mm from connector end.
WARNING! Fibreglass rod is supplied in coil form using cable ties. It is very stiff material and must be
3.3.8 Guide end of fibreglass rod through hollow bolt (12), washer (11) and rubber bush (10) of hole
marked ‘1’ at bottom of flanged housing (5) and corresponding holes on guide plate (6) with end
protruding around 80 mm from guide plate (6) face. To do this the fibreglass rod will have to be
bent. Tighten hollow bolt on connecting rod such that it does not slip into the borehole.
To Pump
24
25
4 holes Ø15
at 105 PCD.
Figure 3.2 – Setting arrangement for 1 point BHE
Item Description
24 M6 x 100 mm or 125 mm or 150 mm cheese head screw cheese
25 M6 lock nuts – 3 nos. per cheese head screw
Page | 13
NOTE: Holes on top of flanged housing are marked

clockwise with identification numbers 1, G Reference
respectively and V in middle. As an Encardio-rite +40 plate
convention, serial number ‘1’ always
corresponds to anchor.
As an additional precaution, make a note in a
0
diary of orientation of serial number ‘1’ with
-10
geographical North.
~10
30
NOTE: When BHE is installed on a side wall or roof, Tube face
extension is generally expected. In such a case,
Guide plate
it may be desirable to set connecting rod end as
close as possible to reference plate (14).
Similarly, when BHE is installed in a vertically
down borehole settlement is generally expected.
In such cases, it may be desirable to set
Downward borehole
connecting rod end as close as possible to guide
plate (6). In other cases, it may be necessary to
set connecting rod end in middle such that either
compression or tension can be monitored. +25
In other words, if only compression is expected,

set zero reading of sensor by extending shaft by 0
around 10 mm. If only extension is expected, set
zero reading of sensor by extending shaft by
-25
around 10 mm less than sensor range. If
45
~10
required, sensor may be set in mid position. As Tube face

a precaution, never set the sensor at the very
end.
Sensor range Setting range Shaft end from
(A) (B) guide plate top
(C)
50 mm ± 25 mm 45 mm Mid position borehole

100 mm ± 50 mm 70 mm
150 mm ± 75 mm 95 mm
+10
A set of 100 mm or 125 mm or 150 mm long 0
cheese head screws (24) and lock nuts (25) is
provided for this purpose.
3.3.9 For any other required range, set distance ‘C’
accordingly. For example, Assemble cheese head
60
-40
screw (24) and locking nuts (25) as shown in figure
~10
Tube face
3.2. Slightly loosen hollow bolts (12) related to hole
‘1’. Adjust end of connecting rod in required position
and tighten the lock nuts (25). To set connecting rod
ends, refer to table above.
Upward borehole
Page | 14
3.3.10 When installing a BHE with 50 mm displacement in a vertically downward borehole, settlement is
expected and setting range specified may be – 10/+ 40 mm. In such a case connecting rod end
distance from guide plate top (6) should be set at (45 – 15) i.e. 30 mm.
NOTE: If readout unit shows negative displacement reading, movement of structure is away from
borehole face and vice versa.
3.3.11 Re-assemble adopter cum guide plate (6) with grub (8.a) and (8.b) taking care that holes marked
‘1’ ‘G’ and ‘V’ are aligned in reference plate (14), adopter cum guide plate (6) and flange housing
(5).
3.3.12 Tighten hollow bolts (12) with spanner size 21 mm and long hollow bolt (12) to firmly grip nylon
tube but not to squeeze or hinder free movement of female end connector inside the nylon tube.
NOTE: In upward to horizontally sloping borehole, tighten hollow bolts (12) particularly carefully as
grout may leak through into the reference head assembly during the grouting process.
(5) to build up approximately 5 mm thick layer. Lift and insert housing in borehole using a to and
fro screwing motion sealing the annular space between housing and borehole.
3.3.14 Fix expandable anchors (21) in holes drilled earlier for securing flanged housing with the M12 nuts
and washers provided. Give enough time to let flanged housing set in borehole.
3.3.15 Connect grout pipe to grouting machine or pump, grout till the entire cavity is filled and grout flows
out of air vent pipe. Be very careful that grout flowing out of air vent tube does not get into the
flanged housing and makes the installation messy.
3.3.16 Pump clean water through the grout tube till clear water comes out of air vent tube. This will keep
the grout tube clean for topping up the grout later on.
NOTE: Give sufficient time for grout to set.
CAUTION: Clean up grout and air vent tubes with clean water after grouting operation is complete as in
§ 3.3.16 above
NOTE: Grout should cover anchor closest to the mouth or be around 1 m from the face of borehole
whichever distance is less. This can be checked by inserting a φ 3 mm wire into borehole
through vent pipe.
get into the protective nylon tubing and jam the setting rods.
3.3.17 Again pump grout into the system after setting period of grout is over to ensure that all anchors
are properly grouted. During setting, heavier grout has a tendency to settle down leaving water at
top with a possibility that anchor is not properly grouted. Rule this possibility out by pumping in
grout again and ensuring that any such water at the top is pumped out through the air vent tube
and replaced by grout.
CAUTION: To get correct displacement readings, ensure that anchor is properly grouted. This problem
may be particularly faced in case of anchor in downward boreholes and in upward holes where
with cement in grout settling down, there may only be water around the anchor.
Page | 15
NOTE: For very deep hole, staged grouting may be necessary. It is always best to consult grouting
engineer at site and take his advice
NOTE: Packer anchor does not require the borehole to be fully grouted. It is recommended to use a
hand grout pump for better control. It is important to pump water first to water saturate packer
geotextile sufficiently. Pump grout until pressure builds up sufficiently to around 400 to 500
kPa. Let pressure dissipate for a few minutes and then pump again till a distinct pressure is
felt. Recommend grout mixture is 1 part cement and 1 part water by weight. Kink and tape
grout tube to retain pressure and disconnect pump. Clean pump thoroughly.
3.3.18 Remove screws (24) and lock nuts (25). Remove reference plate (14) and centre pillar (13) Cut
and remove grout and vent tubes. Round edges of grout and vent tube with a hand file. Clean
reference head assembly properly. Reassemble reference plate with centre pillar to guide plate.
3.3.19 Remove guide plate (6).
3.3.20 Insert sensor (20) in flanged housing (5) taking care that the cable is carefully routed out to be
eventually connected to the junction box (23). Secure sensor to adopter cum guide plate (6) with
grub screws (8a) ensuring that tube face (refer to figure 3.1) is around 10 mm extended from face
of adopter cum guide plate (6).
NOTE: Since only one sensor is being used therefore cable identification mark tagging is not required.
Pull shaft of sensor and assemble to connecting rod end with reference button (15), link plate
(16), sensor tightening nut (17) and locknut (18).
3.3.21 Screw in the sensor to connecting rod clearly noting position of extensometer ‘1’.
damage the sensor. During installation pull or push or pull shaft only axially. A pin has been
provided at the end of displacement sensor that sits flush in a groove in sensor body. During
assembly operation and while using spanners for tightening, keep sensor in closed position
with pin seated inside groove such that no torque is exerted on its shaft and there is no
rotational movement.
CAUTION: Do not use thread sealant on any thread while mounting the sensor as it may have to be
replaced at a later date.
3.3.22 Check displacement reading of sensor with model EDI-51V/EDI 53P read-out. Reading would be
around specified initial reading (refer to § 3.3.11). Set reading precisely by loosening respective
sensor with grub screws (8.a), repositioning sensor in adopter cum guide plate (6) and again
tightening grub screw.
3.3.23 Reset zero reading in EDI-51V/EDI 53P to final set position of sensor. Subsequent readings will
determine relative displacement between anchor and reference plate.
3.3.24 Take initial readings with help of depth micrometer. It is recommended to note date, time and
temperature while taking the initial reading.
NOTE: A proper record of depth readings with depth micrometer should be permanently maintained.
This is very important because sometimes it becomes necessary to verify the data from
electronic sensors.
3.3.25 Attach nipple (22) to socket of flanged housing and fix junction box assembly (23) with cable from
sensor routed to junction box.
3.3.26 Connect leads to respective connector pins in junction box.
NOTE: For transmitting signals to observation room, 4 core, 6 core, 12 core or 20 core cables are
Page | 16
3.3.27 Replace cover (19) over guide plate (6).
NOTE: Model EDS-71V/P BHE can be used as a mechanical system in case electronic measurement
is not required. In such a case, BHE is installed without the electronic sensor. Later on, in
case in some of the installations continuous monitoring is required, the electronic sensor can
be installed at a later date.
extensometer:
3.4.2 Rosin 63/37 solder wire
3.4.4 Cable jointing compound
3.4.6 Spanner 6, 8, 10, 18, 21,22,24, 30 and 25
3.4.7 Allen key 2, 4
3.4.8 Screw driver (tip size 6 x 0.8 and 3 x 0.5 mm)
3.4.9 Phillips head screw driver (tip size 2 mm)
3.4.10 Hacksaw with 150 mm blades
3.4.11 Cable cutter
3.4.13 Insulated pliers 165 mm
3.4.15 Toothbrush
3.4.16 Wire brush
3.4.18 Cello tape/Insulation tape
3.4.19 Micrometer depth gage 100 mm range
3.4.20 Digital indicator model EDI-51V
3.4.21 Digital multi-meter
Page | 17
USERS’ MANUAL
VERTICAL INCLINOMETER CUM

MAGNETIC SETTLEMENT SYSTEM
MODEL EDS-91
Doc. # WI 6002.114 R00 | Sep 2018

Users’ Manual EDS-91 Vertical Inclinometer cum magnetic settlement system
Contents
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION & SPECIFICATIONS 1
2.1 Preparation 2
2.2 Installation 2
3 TAKING READINGS: 5
3.1 Inclinometer readings (for details please refer to user manual) 5
3.2 Settlement readings 5
4 ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENT FOR INSTALLATION AND MONITORING PERSONNEL 6
www.encardio.com
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION & SPECIFICATIONS
The inclinometer cum magnetic settlement

Operating cable reel
system is specially designed for
measurement of lateral movement and Lockable protective cover
settlement/heave. A near vertical gage well is
made by installing the casing in a borehole or
embedding in an earth/rock fill.
Top cap
The inclinometer probe is then passed G.L.
through the entire length of the gage well from
Suspension
bottom to top, taking readings at fixed bracket
predetermined intervals. The probe senses
Cavity
the inclination of the access tube in two
500
(200 cube)
planes at right angles to each other.
Concrete
A set of initial base readings taken within the
gage well form the reference datum. All
subsequent readings are taken over a period
Ferrule
of time at identical depths, thereby indicating
rate, magnitude, and direction of lateral Coupling
deformation. This inclination is displayed in
terms of horizontal displacement on the
datalogger at the ground level with the
operator.
Provided one end of access tubing is known Bi-axial probe

to be fixed, complete profile of gage well may Spider magnet
be obtained by taking a succession of
readings. By comparing the profiles,
horizontal displacement of gage well at Inclinometer casing
different depths over a period of time is
determined.
The settlement/heave is measured by model Grout
EDS-91/2.1 magnetic settlement device.

Spider magnets positioned outside the casing
grip the surrounding soil at locations where
500
displacement is to be monitored. The probe is

Bottom cap
lowered within the access tube to sense the
position of magnets. The reed switch closes
Borehole Ø150 mm.
on entering a magnetic field and activates a
buzzer in the signal receiving instrument
(EDS-91/2.1)
Ancillary equipment
 Access tubing with couplings
 Installation accessories
 Dummy inclinometer probe
 Inclinometer probe calibration check frame
 Pull cord (2-3 mm nylon cord)
Page | 1
2.1 Preparation
1 Fix leaf spring to the magnets with self tapping screw (provided) if they are supplied separately.
2 Fix the datum magnet assembly firmly to the access tubing with the screws provided, 0.5 m above the bottom
plug. Since in most cases the bottom of inclinometer access tubing is located in solid ground (fixed), the datum
magnet becomes a benchmark. This tubing will be used as bottom most tubing. All the other magnet assembly
readings are referred to this datum magnet to get their respective absolute settlement relative to the
benchmark.
3 Position spider magnets on access tubing with waterproof sealing tape (picture 1) as per picture on the
bottom most access tubing and all other tubing. The leaf spring legs can be made close by release wire link
around them after compressing, for easier assembly. (picture 2 & 3)
Picture 1
NOTE: Ensure that all spider magnets are fixed in similar fashion on access tube. For example at
least one spider leaf is aligned on the groove of the tubing. This make releasing the spider
leaf easier and pushing the grout pipe safely.
The spider magnets are provided with two holes on the magnet housing. Ensure that at least
one of the holes of the magnet housing is aligned with the hole of other magnets fixed on
different casings. This will ensure that all release pin are aligned with each other and can be
pulled out from the release wire link easily.
2.2 Installation
1 Drill a 150 mm diameter hole, preferably within 10 to the vertical, up to a depth of around 1 m below
the planned elevation of the borehole. If necessary use steel casing to prevent the sidewall of the
borehole from collapsing. Wash the hole clean to the bottom.
2 Single looped wire release pin is used to hold the leaf springs of spider magnet in closed position
3 With this method individual pulling cord, tied in the loop of release pin are taken to the top. The cords
are marked individually taking the bottom most magnet (magnet which is just above the datum magnet)
as #1. The cords are pulled one by one starting from bottom most magnet.
This loop wire release pin is inserted into release pin as shown in figure below Picture 2 & 3.
Picture 2
Page | 2
LEAF SPRING
LOOPED WIRE RELEASE PIN
PULLING CORD
SPIDER MAGNET
PULLING CORD CORD TIED IN LOOP
Picture 3
Fixed coupling and add another tubing. Hold the tubing with clamp fixing it below the spider magnet.
Continue the method mentioned at step 3,4 and 5 to fixed the magnet assembly with release wire and
release pin.
4 The grout tube can be fixed to bottom cap. Tape it around 20 cm below the top with a safety clamp
such that it does not accidentally fall into borehole or it can be lowered after lowering down the access
tubing.
5 To counteract buoyancy, if required fill casing with water to lower it into the borehole.
6 Grout casing as directed by the project authorities. If no instructions are available, suggested grout
mixes are as follows:
 Hard and medium soils
Cement 50 kg
Bentonite 15 kg
Water 125 litre
 Soft soil
Cement 50 kg
Bentonite 20 kg
Water 325 litre
7 Flush inside of casing with water after grouting. This is to prevent any leaked in grout from sticking in
the casing and impairing the movement of the torpedo
8 Expand hole near top of casing and make a concrete platform as shown in figure 1 & 3.
9 The top of the upper most casing should be around 100 mm above the concrete platform. Fix the
protective top plug and lock it. When not taking readings, the gage well should be protected with the
top plug and locked.
Page | 3
Figure 1
10 If necessary, top cap may be kept flush with the concrete platform. If this is done, make sure during
concreting that the lock and the pin can be replaced with ease.
11 If steel casing is used to prevent side walls of the boreholes from collapsing, it will have to be gradually
withdrawn as grout is pumped into the borehole.
Page | 4
3 TAKING READINGS:
3.1 Inclinometer readings (for details please refer to user manual)

 Before taking the first reading make sure that the grout filled in the annular space between guide pipe
and access casing is sufficiently set. It is recommended taking the first reading at least one week after
the grouting.
 Keep the inclinometer probe inside the pipe for 10 min. before starting first reading every time .
 Place cable holder plate on the top of casing. Lower inclinometer probe to bottom of gage well with
uppermost torpedo wheel pointing in direction marked ‘A’. Raise probe along entire length of gage well
from bottom to top, taking readings at intervals of 0.5 m.
 Again lower probe to bottom of gage well with uppermost torpedo wheel pointing in direction ‘B’. Raise
probe along entire length of gage well from bottom to top, taking readings at intervals of 0.5 m.
 A set of initial readings taken within the gage well. The base reading is formed after taking at least
three sets of initial readings. Choose the most repeatable reading set and make it the base. All
subsequent readings are compared with this base reading thereby indicating rate, magnitude, and
direction of lateral deformation. This inclination is displayed in terms of horizontal displacement on the
datalogger at the ground level with the operator.
 Provided one end of access tubing is known to be fixed, complete profile of gage well may be obtained
by taking a succession of readings. By comparing profiles, horizontal displacement of gage well at
different depths over a period of time is determined
NOTE: Base readings should also be taken by spare system as precaution. At the time of
maintenance this system can be used.
Provided one end of the casing is known to be fixed, complete profile of gage well may be
obtained by taking a succession of readings. By comparing the profiles, horizontal
displacement of gage well at different depths over a period of time is determined.
NOTE: It is recommended practice to determine initial X, Y and Z positions of casing top by surveying
after casing is set. This reference reading may be required for verification of deflection at a
later date. The point which may be fixed for determining the initial and subsequent X, Y and
Z positions, is the pipe top surface near groove A. Top of inclinometer will be surveyed weekly.
NOTE: Cable length will be checked weekly with calibrated measuring tape.
3.2 Settlement readings
 Settlement is measured by model EDS-91/2.1magnetic settlement device. Switch in the device. Fix
the centering bush (if required) on the magnetic probe. The centering bush is used to align the magnetic
probe at the center of the inclinometer pipe.
 Lower probe into the well below the datum magnet mounted at the lowest level.
 Raise the probe gradually by pulling the flat tape. Hold the flat cable against the reference and read
the depth from the cable marking at the point where the buzzer first gives a sound. Verify this reading
as correct by slightly lowering the probe and again gradually raising it. The top of the well is usually
taken as the reference for taking readings.
 Raise the probe below the next spider magnet and take the reading as described in above paragraph.
Repeat the procedure for all the spider magnets installed in the well. During the process keep winding
the flat cable on the cable reel.
 Initial readings are important for reference. User is recommended to take three sets of initial readings
from separate passes through casing. Average the readings for each magnet.
Page | 5
4 ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENT FOR INSTALLATION AND MONITORING

PERSONNEL
Personnel involved in installation and monitoring must have a background of good installation and
monitoring practices and knowledge of the fundamentals of geotechnics. They must be professionally
trained. Persons with no prior experience may find it difficult to carry on with this work. The intricacies
involved are such that even if a single essential but apparently minor requirement is ignored or overlooked,
the most reliable of instruments and data obtained from them will be rendered useless.
This method statement does not provide for each and every condition in the field that may affect the
performance of the instrument. Also, blindly following the method statement will not guarantee success.
Sometimes, depending upon field conditions, the personnel will have to consciously depart from the written
text and use their knowledge and common sense to find the solution to a particular problem.
Users must ensure that their installation and monitoring personnel have prior training and experience in all
operations laid down in this method statement before taking up this installation and monitoring work.
Page | 6
DATASHEET
SOIL EXTENSOMETER
MODEL EDS-92
INTRODUCTION
The Encardio-rite model EDS-92 extensometer is used for monitoring displacement

between two surfaces that may shift with respect to each other with time. The soil
extensometer finds major application in the measurement of lateral strains and
settlement in or beneath earth and rock fill embankments; and in dams. It is used in
measurement of foundation movements and controlling of natural and cut slopes.
The displacement of retaining walls, bridge piers and abutments can also be
monitored by the soil extensometer. It also finds application in the measurement of
displacement across construction joints in concrete, and across joints and faults in
rock. The extensometers are usually installed in approximately 500 mm wide x 600
mm deep trenches.
 Reliable, accurate and simple to  Horizontal movement in

read. foundations and embankments.
 Suitable for remote reading of  Movement of natural and cut
displacement. slopes, quarry and mining
 Probe is robust, care being given excavations.
to protect all components and sub-  Displacement of retaining walls,
assemblies from ingress of water piers and abutments.
and corrosion.  Displacement across construction
 Range upto 100 mm of joints in concrete and fault in
displacement. rocks.
 Easy to install.
 Reasonably priced
www.encardio.com
OPERATION The frequency output can be accurately measured by any
vibrating wire readout unit. The data can also be
automatically collected at desired frequency, stored and
The soil extensometer uses a vibrating wire sensor for
transmitted to remote server by a suitable datalogger. The
monitoring displacement. The system consists of a sensor
initial reading of the sensor is taken as the base.
assembly with flanges that is mounted with adaptors,
Subsequent readings are then compared with the initial
adjustment unit, sockets and extension rods between two
reading to determine the magnitude of change in
anchors to monitor the horizontal movement of
displacement across the opening.
surrounding soil. The system is enclosed in telescopic PVC
tubing with proper ‘O’ ring seals to eliminate friction
between the rods and surrounding soil and to prevent any SPECIFICATIONS
ingress of water.
The extensometer system is supplied with different gage Sensor type Vibrating wire
lengths (gage length is the distance between two
Range (mm) 15, 25, 50, 100, specify
anchors).
± 0.2 % fs normal
A number of extensometer units can be connected in Accuracy ± 0.1 % fs optional
series to measure incremental displacements over large
distances. Movement of relative position between two Sensitivity ± 0.02 % fs
anchor channels at the ends of the soil extensometer is
representative of mass movement. The relative movement Non linearity ± 0.5 % fs
between the anchors causes change in output of the
vibrating wire sensor. The displacement sensor converts Temperature limit - 10° to 80°C
the mechanical displacement to an electrical frequency
output. YSI 44005 or equivalent
Thermistor (3 kOhms at 25°C)
Sl. # Description Qty Sl. # Description Qty

1 Sensor flange assembly 1 6 Guide bush 2
2 Socket 1 7 Telescopic protective tubing-B 1
3 Adjustment unit 1 8 Rubber boot 4
4 Extension rods 1 9 End flange assembly 1
5 Telescopic protective tubing-A 2

International: India | UAE | Qatar | Bahrain | Bhutan | Europe | USA
www.encardio.com
DATASHEET
MEASURING ANCHOR
MODEL EMA-11
INTRODUCTION
The Encardio-rite model EMA-11 measuring anchor, also known as rock bolt
extensometer, is a combination of rock bolt and extensometer. EMA-11 Measuring
anchor is used to determine the load exerted on rock bolts. It is a precision
instrument designed to help civil engineers and geologists to evaluate anchor system
forces and their distribution within the bolt and hence its safety and effectiveness.
 Easy to handle and install.  To determine the effectiveness of

 Reliable and robust. anchoring system in an
underground cavity or tunnel.
 Replaces a system anchor, thus
no extra bore hole is required.
 High accuracy.
www.encardio.com
The measurement with model EMA-11 measuring anchor An electrical head assembly consisting of four
is economical, very reliable and is preferred at locations potentiometric sensors is optionally available for electrical
where access to the mouth of the borehole is available. output. Encardio-rite model EDI-53P readout/data
logger or EDAS-10 data acquisition system are available
OVERVIEW for monitoring measuring anchor at site.
The principle function of measuring anchor is to SPECIFICATIONS

determine the depth where force is exerted on the bolt
due to loosening effects of rock. Length 3, 4, 6 m
Model EMA-11 measuring anchor consists of a steel Fixed points 4

hollow anchor/rock bolt with a precise 4-point Bore hole diameter 51 mm
extensometer integrated in it. The measuring bars inside
the hollow bolt have anchor points at each quarter of the Anchor diameter 26.7 mm nominal
total length so that the extension of the rock bolt and the Loading capacity 250 kN
corresponding forces can be determined.
Electrical measurement
MEASUREMENT METHOD Range ± 5 mm
Resolution 0.01 mm
Model EMA-11 measuring anchor has a breaking force of
up to 250 kN. The length offered ranges from 3 m to 6 m. Linearity 0.2% fs
Enclosure IP 65
The change in length due to compression or extension
between individual measuring bars are taken by
measuring the depth of the near end of the respective
measuring bars from a reference plate provided at the
mouth of the borehole. A digital caliper/micrometer depth
gage with a resolution of 0.01 mm is used to take the
readings.

www.encardio.com
USERS’
VIBRATING WIRE STRAIN GAGE

MODEL EDS-11V
Doc # WI 6002.16 R07 | Dec 2013

Users’ Manual EDS-11V Vibrating Wire Strain Gage
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Applications 2
2 MANUFACTURING RANGE AND ACCESSORIES 3

3 VIBRATING WIRE STRAIN GAGE 5

3.2 Temperature effect 5
3.2.1. Strain gage used for measurement of strain on a steel section 5
3.2.2. Strain gage used for embedment in concrete 6
3.3.1. Stainless steel body 6
3.3.2. Cable connection: 7
3.3.3. Mild steel brackets and stainless steel flanges 7
3.3.4. Spiders for strain rosettes 7
3.3.5. No stress strain container 7
3.3.6. Extender 8
5.2 Installing the strain gage in a concrete dam 11
5.2.1. Embedment procedure for separate single strain gage 11
5.2.2. Embedment procedure of strain gage in groups 12
5.3 Cable laying in concrete dams 14
6 THERMISTOR - TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE CORRELATION 17

7.1.1. Symptom: Strain sensor reading unstable 18
7.1.2. Symptom: Strain sensor fails to read 18
8 WARRANTY 19
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
The model EDS-11V strain gage is suitable for embedment in soil or concrete or for surface mounting by
welding on steel structures. It is designed to withstand the ingress of water and the hostile environment
found at large construction sites. The strain gage is ideally suited for measurement of strain in dams,
bridges, underground cavities, mines, tunnels, steel structures and other areas of application where strain
measurement is required. As an Encardio-rite convention, the positive sign indicates tensile strain and the
negative sign indicates compressive strain.
The Encardio-rite vibrating wire strain gage basically consists of a high tensile strength wire made out of a
magnetic material stretched between two cylindrical end blocks. The method of installation of the strain
gage ensures that the displacement of the end blocks is always proportionally to the variation in strain.
Any change in the strain directly affects the tension of the wire, resulting in a corresponding change in
frequency of vibration of the wire. The change in frequency of the vibrating wire can be monitored on a
data acquisition system or accurately measured by a readout unit calibrated to indicate the strain. All
vibrating wire sensors manufactured by Encardio-rite use the same readout unit irrespective of the
parameter being measured.
The Encardio-rite vibrating wire strain gage is hermetically sealed by electron beam welding and has a
vacuum of around 0.001 Torr inside it which ensures full protection against hostile environmental
conditions encountered at project sites. The sensor element is enclosed in a stainless steel body. These
features result in the Encardio-rite vibrating wire strain gages being resistant to corrosive, humid, wet and
other hostile environmental conditions.
Several strain gages embedded at the same site at different angles and places can also be used to
measure plane and three dimensional stresses. To expedite alignment, simplify and speed up the
installation procedure, Encardio-rite manufactures strain gage spiders for fixing the strain gages at the
correct angles. The use of these spiders is highly recommended for proper orientation of the strain gages.
Encardio-rite model EDS-12 five position spider and is available for accurately positioning strain gages for
installation in concrete dams. They are precision machined to set the strain gages at the required angles
during installation.
As concrete exhibits autogenous growth due to thermal effects, creep, chemical reaction and change in
moisture content etc., stress measurement by the strain gage needs to be corrected. To determine the
effect of autogenous growth, an additional strain gage is mounted near the existing ones, in the Encardio-
rite model EDS-14 hollow two walled no stress container. The container is made of a hollow casing of
copper inside and mild steel outside. This isolates the concrete specimen inside from the surrounding
concrete, keeping the specimen concrete under no stress, but under the same temperature and humidity
as those of the surrounding concrete. By deducting the value of strain obtained from the strain gage
mounted inside the no stress container from the reading obtained from any other strain gage in the same
vicinity, true stress is determined.
The same strain gage can be used for embedding in concrete or soil or for welding to steel structures.
Encardio-rite model EDS-15 mild steel brackets are available for fixing the strain gage on a steel section
to measure the surface strain. The strain gage brackets are welded in position by placing the Encardio-
rite model EDS-17 dummy strain gage in between them to maintain the correct distance and alignment.
The dummy strain gage is finally replaced by the actual strain gage. When embedding in concrete or soil,
Encardio-rite model EDS-16 stainless steel flanges are fixed in position on the strain gage.
This users manual covers description of the vibrating wire strain gage & its accessories, procedure for
installation of the sensor in concrete/masonry dams, soil or on steel structures, method of taking
observations and recording data.
Page | 1
1.1 Applications
Encardio-rite vibrating wire strain gage is the electrical strain gage of choice as its frequency output is
immune to external noise, it is able to tolerate wet wiring common in geotechnical applications and is
capable of transmission of signals to long distances. It has applications in the measurement of positive or
negative strain in soil, concrete mass or steel structures including:
 Measurement of strain in mass concrete
 Measurement of strain in concrete and rock construction.
 Determining and monitoring of stress distribution in concrete & masonry dams.
 Study of stress distribution in the supporting ribs of underground cavities and tunnels.
 Long term analysis of stress distribution in pressure shafts, enclosing concrete and the rock over
burden.
 Measurement and monitoring of strain and consequently stress in steel structures.
attention.
vibrating wire strain gages in your applications.
For type of strain gages and accessories manufactured by Encardio-rite: See § 2 ‘Manufacturing range
and accessories’.
For understanding the principle of vibrating wire strain gage: See § 3.1 ‘Operating principle’.
For essential tools and accessories: See § 4 ‘Tools and accessories required for installation”.
For complete operating procedure of Vibrating Wire readout unit EDI-54V: See Doc. # WI 6002.112’
For installation of strain gage in concrete structures: See § 5 ‘Installation procedure’.
For temperature measurement by thermistor: See § 6 ‘Thermistor - temperature resistance correlation’.
Page | 2
2 MANUFACTURING RANGE AND ACCESSORIES
ITEM MODEL CAPACITY DESCRIPTION
Strain gage EDS-11V ±1500 µ strain Gage length – 140 mm
Strain gage is suitable for embedment in concrete or

for surface mounting by welding. It is designed to
withstand ingress of water and hostile environment
at large construction sites. Gage is ideally suited for
measurement of strain in dams, bridges,
underground cavities, mines, tunnels, steel
structures and other areas of application. Negative
sign indicates compressive strain and positive sign
tensile strain.
Strain gage spider EDS-12 5 position Permits precise and accurate installation in a
concrete dam of four strain gages at angles of 0o,
45o, 90o, 135o in one plane and one strain gage at
90o to this plane.
No stress strain EDS-14 As concrete exhibits autogenous growth and

container thermal expansion etc., stress measurement by
strain gage needs to be corrected. To determine
these effects, an additional strain gage is mounted
horizontally near the existing ones, in a hollow two
walled container (400 mm φ x 600 mm height). By
deducting this value from the readings obtained
from the other strain gages, true stress is
determined.
Strain gage brackets EDS-15 For welding strain gage to steel structure to
measure the surface strain.
Strain gage flanges EDS-16 For mounting strain gage in concrete
Dummy strain gage EDS-17 The strain gage brackets are welded in position by
placing a dummy strain gage in between them to
maintain the correct distance and alignment. The
dummy strain gage is finally replaced by the actual
strain gage.
Extender EDS-18 The effective length of the model EDS-11 strain

gage is increased to 280 mm by the extender, thus
increasing the sensitivity by 100 %.
Junction box EJB-6-4- For input from six strain gages through flexible
YY cables and output to one twenty core cable.
Page | 3
The model EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator (see

figure 2.1) is a microprocessor-based read-out unit
for use with Encardio-rite’s range of vibrating wire
sensors. It can display the measured frequency in
terms of time period, frequency, frequency squared
or the value of measured parameter directly in proper
engineering units. It uses a smartphone with Android
OS as readout having a large display with a
capacitive touch screen which makes it easy to read
the VW sensor.
The EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator can store

calibration coefficients from 10,000 vibrating wire Figure 2.1: EDI-54V Vibrating wire indicator
sensors so that the value of the measured
parameter from these sensors can be shown directly in proper engineering units. For transducers with
built-in interchangeable thermistor, it can also display the temperature of the transducer directly in degree
Centigrade.
coefficients. The gage factor of the model EDS-11V group strain gage is given in the test certificate
provided with every supply of strain gages. The initial reading IR will be the actual reading in digits from
the strain gage after it is embedded and properly set in concrete.

vibrating wire indicator. A battery charger is provided to charge the internal battery which operates from
Page | 4
3 VIBRATING WIRE STRAIN GAGE
The vibrating wire strain gage basically consists of a magnetic, high tensile strength stretched wire, one
end of which is anchored and the other end is displaced proportionally to the variation in strain. Any
change in the strain, directly effects the tension of the wire, resulting in a corresponding change in
frequency of vibration of the wire.
f = [σg/ρ]1/2/ 2l Hz
Where:
σ = tension of wire in kg/cm 2
g = 980 cm/sec 2
ρ = density of wire in kg/cm3
l = length of wire in cm
The length of the wire in the model EDS- 11V strain gage is 14 cm. Consequently the formula can be
reduced to:
f14 = 12.5 [σ]1/2 Hz
The resonant frequency, with which the wire vibrates, induces an alternating current in the coil magnet.
This is read by the read out unit.
The modulus of elasticity ‘E’ of the wire used in the strain gage is 2.11 x 106 kg/cm2. As, within elastic
limits, σ/ε = E, by substituting the value of ‘E’ in the above formula, the actual strain ‘ε’ can be determined
as follows:
ε14 = 0.0031 f2 µ strain
To summarize, any variation in strain causes the strain gage to deflect. This changes the tension in the
wire thus affecting the frequency of vibration of the wire when it is vibrating at its natural frequency. The
strain is proportional to the square of the frequency and the read out unit is able to display this directly in
µ strains.
3.2 Temperature effect
The strain gage is one of the two vibrating wire sensor manufactured by Encardio-rite which is not
temperature compensated, the other sensor for obvious reasons being the temperature sensor. The
temperature sensor cannot be temperature compensated because it is variation in temperature that it is
measuring. The reason in the case of strain gage is not so obvious and needs some explanation.
3.2.1. Strain gage used for measurement of strain on a steel section
For fixing the strain gage on a steel section, Encardio-rite model EDS-15 mild steel brackets are welded
in position by placing the Encardio-rite model EDS-17 dummy strain gage in between them to maintain
the correct distance and alignment. The dummy strain gage is finally replaced by the actual strain gage
and tightened into position with the M5 screws provided (figure 3.2). The strain gage is thus rigidly fixed to
the steel section. Due to the rubberized bellows provided in the body of the strain gage (figure 3.1), its
modulus of elasticity is very low and the magnetic strain gage plucking wire in it precisely follows the
deflection of the steel section on which the strain gage is mounted. It is not affected by the material or the
Page | 5
coefficient of thermal expansion of the strain gage element or its body. No temperature compensation is
therefore provided.
NOTE: The coefficient of thermal expansion of the magnetic plucking wire used in all Encardio-rite
vibrating wire sensors is 11.0 ppm per οC.
3.2.2. Strain gage used for embedment in concrete
The strain gage magnetic plucking wire precisely follows the deflection of concrete in which it is
embedded. However as discussed in §1, concrete exhibits autogenous growth due to thermal effects,
creep, chemical reaction and change in moisture content etc. To determine the effect of autogenous
growth, an additional strain gage is mounted near the existing ones, in a two walled no stress container.
This isolates the concrete specimen inside from the surrounding concrete, keeping the specimen
concrete under no stress, but under the same temperature and humidity as those of the surrounding
concrete. By deducting the value of strain obtained from the strain gage mounted inside the no stress
container from the reading obtained from any other strain gage in the same vicinity, true stress is
determined. This nullifies any effect due to temperature changes.
It is anyway a good practice to record the temperature at the time of taking strain reading. A thermistor is
provided inside the strain gage for this purpose.
The model EDS-11V strain gage has a range of

±1500 µ strains, gage length of 14 cm and an
overall length of 19 cm. The model EDS-18
extender allows to increase sensitivity by 100 % by
increasing the effective length to 28 cm.
3.3.1. Stainless steel body
The vibrating wire and coil magnet assembly is

enclosed in a stainless steel enclosure (refer to
figure 3.1). The stainless steel enclosure is
electron beam welded to two stainless steel tubes
with integral stainless steel bellows that are
rubberized for protection. The purpose of the
bellows is to reduce the modulus of elasticity of
the strain gage such that it truly reflects the
expansion and contraction of the concrete that it is
embedded in or the steel structure to which it is
welded. The bellows are a special feature of
Encardio-rite strain gages. The ends of the
stainless tubes are electron beam welded to two
cylindrical end blocks, one of which has a ‘V’

groove around its circumference. The face of Figure 3.1 - in case temperature has to be
monitored use 4-core cable
this end block is tapped with a M6 x 12
threading. The total system is enclosed with a permanent vacuum of 1/1000 Torr inside the sensor
resulting in it becoming immune to the effect of any ingress of water. As the strain gage is of stainless
steel construction, it is not affected by normal chemical corrosion at locations in which it is used.
Page | 6
3.3.2. Cable connection:
welded to the stainless steel body of the strain gage. The two pins marked red and black on the glass to
metal seal are connected to the coil magnet. The other two pins are connected to a thermistor for
measurement of temperature. A cable joint housing and cable gland is provided for the cable connection.
For cable jointing, refer to Users Manual 6002.11.
3.3.3. Mild steel brackets and stainless steel flanges
Mild steel brackets, 40 mm x 40 mm x 10 mm wide are used

when the strain gage is used for welding applications on steel
structures or attaching to concrete structures with saddle
mounts. The brackets are mounted on the dummy strain
gage and welded in position. The dummy strain gage is
removed and replaced by the actual strain gage. One of the
brackets fits into the ‘V’ groove of the left hand end block
(refer figure 3.1). The other bracket is clamped in position on
the other end block.
The 48 mm diameter stainless steel flanges are used when

the strain gage is used for embedment in concrete. One of
the flanges fits into the ‘V’ groove of the left hand end
block of the strain gage (refer figure 3.1). Figure 3.2
The other stainless steel flange is fixed at a center distance of

140 mm from the first flange.
3.3.4. Spiders for strain rosettes
Encardio-rite manufactures spiders for five and thirteen

position strain rosettes. The spider is precision machined to
the specified angles. A five position Encardio-rite model EDS-
12 spider is illustrated in figure 3.3. The strain gages are
screwed on to 200 mm rods attached to the spider at the
correct angular positions.
The Encardio-rite model EDS-12 five position spider permits

precise and accurate installation in a concrete dam or
structure of four strain gages at angles of 0o, 45o, 90o, Figure 3.3
135o in one plane and one strain gage at right angles to
this plane.
3.3.5. No stress strain container
The strain gage is designed to respond to change in dimensions of the

concrete in which it is embedded, whether the deformation is due to
stress, creep, temperature change, moisture change or chemical growth
of the concrete. The main purpose of the strain gage, however, is to
determine stress although indirectly. Change in stress is revealed by
multiplying change in measured strain by the modulus of electricity. For
stress that develops over a long period of time, account must be taken of
changes in modules of elasticity and of deformation due to creep and to
all causes other than stress.
Figure 5.4
Page | 7
It is often desirable to measure separately the deformation due to all causes other than stress. This is
done by installing a “no stress strain gage” which is exposed to the same conditions as the surrounding
concrete except as to stress. The Encardio-rite model EDS-14 no stress strain container is a two walled
hollow cylinder with a dimension of 400 mm φ x 600 mm height. The purpose of the gap between the
walls is to prevent true stress from acting on the strain gage that is installed inside the container. This
strain gage therefore only reads deflection that takes place in the concrete due to autogenous growth of
the concrete.
3.3.6. Extender
The Encardio-rite model EDS-18 extender allows to increase the length as well as sensitivity of the model
EDS-11V strain gage. The extender has a male M6 x 10 threads that fits into the female tapping of the
strain gage end block. The effective length of the strain gage is increased to 280 mm by the extender,
thus increasing the sensitivity by 100 %.
Page | 8
The following tools and accessories are required for proper cable jointing and installation of the strain
gage (also refer user’s manual on cable jointing - 6002.11):

4.2 Rosin 63/37 solder wire RF-3C, 30 swg.
4.4 Cable jointing compound (MS 853 and hardener MSH 283 - Mahendra Engineering & Chemical
Products Ltd. or equivalent)
4.6 Spirit level
4.8 Cable Cutter
4.10 Wire Stripper
4.11 Pliers 160 mm
4.12 Screw driver 20 cm
4.13 Allen key M3, M4 & M6
4.14 600 mm width 45o set square
4.15 Plumb bob with line
4.16 Angle protractor
4.17 Pouring funnel
4.18 Stainless steel rod 5 mm  150 mm length
4.19 Spatula
4.21 Fixture for jointing upto six strain gages (refer figure 4.1)
4.22 Tooth brush
4.23 Cloth for cleaning (lintless)
4.24 Wooden cable spacer
4.25 Wooden cable rake
4.27 Model EDI-54V portable readout unit (to be ordered separately)
Figure 4.1
Page | 9
5.1.1 Remove the cable joint housing from the sensor. This gives access to the four pin terminal. The
terminals are marked with red, black, green and white colours. Clean the terminals with a
toothbrush.
NOTE: Do not use any acetone for cleaning as it may damage the glass to metal seal. Acetone
should be used for cleaning the other parts of the strain gage.
NOTE: If specifically ordered, the strain gages are supplied integral with the requested length of four
core cable attached. The cable cores are red/black (for sensor coil) and white/green (for
thermistor).
Strain gages to be mounted on a spider (EDS-12) and inside a no stress strain container
(EDS-14) for embedment in concrete structures are normally supplied integral with a 2 m
cable. The ends of these cables can be terminated in the model EJB-6-4-YY junction box
described in § 2.
 The coil resistance measured by the digital multimeter should lie between 120-150 Ohm. Determine
the resistance at the ambient temperature from the thermistor temperature resistance chart in § 6.
This resistance should be equal to that between pins marked green and white (or green and white
cores on the cable). For example, in case the room temperature is 25oC, this resistance would be
3,000 Ohm.
 Connect the sensor to the EDI-54V read-out indicator. The initial offset reading in frequency should
lie between 900 - 1100 Hz. This initial reading on the portable readout unit should be stable.
NOTE: Check sensor for proper functioning before installation. Each sensor is provided with a
test report. The zero reading given in the test report should not differ from the current
zero reading by more than 50 µ strain after due regard to corrections made for difference
in temperature, barometric pressure, height above sea level and actual cell position
(whether standing up or lying down).
 This initial reading on the portable strain indicator should be stable. A crude but a simple and very
effective method of checking whether the sensor is responding to changes in strain is as follows:
 Connect the sensor to the EDI-54V read-out unit.
 Press the two ends of the strain gage gently between the fore fingers and verify that the strain
reading on the indicator increases. Pulling the ends gently will decrease the strain reading.
 This change in reading ensures that the deformation produced by straining the strain gage is
transmitted to the vibrating wire sensing element.
5.1.3 In case the strain gages have not been supplied integral with the cables, connect the required
length of cable to the sensor as suggested in the operating manual on cable jointing - 6002.11.
5.1.4 Check the working of the sensor again following the procedure described above.
CAUTION: The strain gage is a delicate and sensitive instrument. It should be handled with care.
Twisting it or applying too much force on it may result in a zero shift or even permanently
damaging it.
Page | 10
5.1.5 Cable should be marked with permanent markers every 5 m by the use of stainless steel tags
stamped with appropriate strain gage numbers tied by stainless steel wire. Alternatively plastic
tabs are also available. Temporary identification can be done by writing the serial number of the
strain gage, its code number and the location at which it is installed, on a strip of paper, placing
the strip on the cable and covering it with a transparent plastic cello tape. Permanent
identification is necessary to prevent errors in making proper connections in the junction box and
to insure correct splicing if cable is cut or, broken.
CAUTION: The single most important factor leading to loss of worthwhile data from sensors is losing
track of identification of the cable ends. Proper identification and marking of the cables is
generally taken most casually. Care should also be taken to put an identification tag at the
point where the cable comes out of the structure such that cable identity is not lost if the
cable gets accidentally cut.
5.2 Installing the strain gage in a concrete dam
Installing of the strain gage in a concrete dam has to be done with perfection. To get proper results, great
care has to be taken during the installation.
As a first step, the stainless steel flanges are fixed to the strain gage at the correct center distance. The
flange with the one M5 screw is fixed to the grooved end block of the strain gage (refer figure 3.1). In
case of model EDS-11V strain gage, the other stainless steel flange is fixed at a center distance of 140
mm from the first flange.
CAUTION: Great care should be taken while tightening the stainless steel flanges to their respective
strain gages such that no torque is applied across the length of the strain gage. While
tightening, the strain gage should only be held with the end block to which the flange is being
fixed. It should never be held at the end block on the other side because this will generate a
torque across the length of the strain gage and damage it.
There is no ‘standard’ method of placement of the strain gages. However, schemes successfully
deployed by field and design engineers are detailed below:
5.2.1. Embedment procedure for separate single strain gage
The mounting of a single strain gage is usually done by embedding it near the top of a lift. The
embedment procedure is described below:
5.2.1.1. At any particular chainage where single strain gages have to be installed, raise the level of the
dam to around 25 cm below the requisite elevation. Mark the positions on the concreted surface
where the strain gages have to be installed. Raise the level of the concrete by around 50 cm
leaving trenches of around 1 m x 1 m at the marked positions.
5.2.1.2. Back-fill the trench to the level to provide a bed, in case the strain gage is to be mounted
horizontally. For strain gage to be installed vertically or at an inclination, back fill to the level that
the strain gage would be fully covered.
5.2.1.3. For strain gage to be installed horizontally lay it in the correct position and direction. For strain
gage to be installed vertically or diagonally, use an electric laboratory vibrator to make a hole for
the gage in the correct position and direction. Insert the strain gage in to the hole.
5.2.1.4. Check angles, direction and depth. A protractor level is most useful for this application. A plumb
line and 60 cm wide angle protractor may be alternatively used.
5.2.1.5. Vibrate around a deeply embedded gage or hand puddle around a shallow gage.
Page | 11
5.2.1.6. Continue back filling by hand and shovelling, 3

using the same concrete as the mass concrete
5 90
used in the construction and hand puddle. When °
90°
concrete is poured over the strain gage, take care
not to move the strain gage. Pour the concrete by
hand until a 10 cm cushion is built up on top of
90
each gage.
°
5.2.1.7. Finish with light shallow vibrations and protect the
area with a light board barrier. Mark with area with 2
yellow painted metal stakes so that the strain 4 Surface parallel
1 to X-axis
gage installation is not damaged before the
concrete sets in.
Surface parallel to Y-axis
5.2.1.8. The procedure for cable laying is separately dealt
in § 5.3.
5.2.2. Embedment procedure of strain gage in groups
When strain gages have to be installed in groups of up to

a maximum of 13 sensors, a more elaborate arrangement
is necessary to assure the correct installation in the limited
time available before the mass concrete begins to set in.
Therefore, the alignment of the strain gages has to be
expedited and simplified. This is done by mounting the
strain gages on a spider that correctly orients them and
keeps them in position while the concrete is filled in the
trench manually. The installation procedure is different in
details from that of mounting individual strain gages.
It is important to install the strain gages quickly such that

the concrete around the sensors is essentially the same as
that in the surrounding mass. Time is saved if the
installation begins before the lift is completed. A five
position spider assembly is illustrated in figure 5.1. It
consists of a spider base (1) fastened to the spider hub (2)
with two Allen head M8x15 bolts (4). The spider hub is
provided with holes at the correct orientation. Fully insert
the unthreaded side of 200mm X 8mm diameter spider
rods (3) inside the holes provided on the spider hub and
tighten them with the Allen head M8x15 bolts (5) provided.
S no. Item Qty

1 Spider base 1
2 Spider hub 1
3 Spider rod 5
Figure 5.1 Spider assembly
4 Allen head bolt M8x15 2
5 Allen head bolt M5x8 5
The embedment procedure is as follows:
Page | 12
5.2.2.1. At any particular chainage where the group of

Installation location mark
strain gages have to be installed, raise the level Down stream Up stream
of the dam to the requisite elevation. Mark the
positions on the concreted surface where the
Y-axis (90° to Dam axis)
strain gages have to be installed. Raise the
level of the concrete by around 75 cm leaving a
trench of around 1 m wide x 2 m long at the
marked positions to take the strain rosette and Concrete block
the no stress strain container. Level the bed X-axis (Dam axis)
using a level protractor. Apply a layer of mortar Figure 5.2
(cement: sand = 3:1) on the concrete bed to get a
smooth surface.
NOTE: If a trench cannot be provided for placing the strain gage assembly/no stress strain
container, enclose the marked installation area with the help of steel shuttering (LxB =
1x2m).
5.2.2.2. Place assembled spider on this smooth surface. Pressing down the spider assembly ensure that
the measurement axes are parallel to the X & Y axes (X refers to dam axis and Y perpendicular
to dam axis respectively). Use spirit level, 45o angle protractor, plumb line and tie wires to
properly orient the spider assembly. It is recommended that proper orientation of the spider
assembly be checked by surveying methods. Cover the spider base of spider assembly with
mortar so that it firmly sets in the concrete bed. Allow 24 hours for setting of mortar.
5.2.2.3. Screw each strain gage to the M6 x 10 threaded portion of 200 mm long spider rods already fixed
to the spider hub and again check that the assembly is properly oriented.
CAUTION: Great care should be taken while tightening the strain gages to their respective rods such
that no torque is applied across the length of the strain gage. While tightening, the strain
gage should only be held with the end block with the groove. It should never be held at the
end block on the other side because this will generate a torque across the length of the
strain gage and damage it.
NOTE: Check the angles, direction and depth of the strain gage spider and the strain gages
mounted on the spider. Check the Figure 5.3
orientation of the strain gages on the
spider with the plumb line and the 60 cm wide angle protractor provided. In case it is not all
right, correct it by slightly bending the rods with the 160 mm pliers. To maintain the correct
orientation, tie strings may be used as they make the fixing easier. Care should be taken that
in the process, the strain gages are not subjected to any stress.
5.2.2.4. Check no stress strain container for leakage. The easiest method is to fill it to the brim with water
and check for any reduction in level during the next four hours.
5.2.2.5. Place no stress strain container inside the trench and secure it to the previously laid concrete by
stay wires and anchors such that it does not lift up during the filling up of the trench with concrete.
As an Encardio-rite convention, the spider assembly is placed away from the vertical shaft and
the no stress strain container is placed closer to the vertical shaft. This helps in properly placing
the cable and also identifying it.
CAUTION: The no stress container should be checked for any leakage. This check is necessary to
prevent concrete filling in between the walls of the container and making it useless for
measurement of strain in no stress conditions.
Page | 13
5.2.2.6. Fill no stress container with mass concrete. Use an electric laboratory vibrator to make a hole for
the strain gage in the middle of the container. Insert the strain gage into the hole. Route the cable
as is described in the next section.
5.2.2.7. Back fill by hand and shovelling, using the same concrete as the mass concrete used in the
construction and hand puddle. When concrete is poured over the strain gages, take care not to
move the strain gage rosette. Pour the concrete by hand until a 10 cm cushion is built up on top
of each gage. Finish with light shallow vibrations up to the top of the lift.
CAUTION: Avoid direct shocks to the gages. Be very careful that the orientation of the strain gages is
not disturbed.
5.2.2.8. Mark the area with yellow painted metal stakes so that the strain gage installation is not damaged
before the concrete sets in. Allow no traffic in this area. Put a flag on the embedment location for
easy identification. Protect the area with a light board shuttering and finish up the lift all around
this location. The shuttering prevents dumping of the concrete into the demarcated area.
5.2.2.9. Procedure for cable laying is separately dealt in following section.
5.3 Cable laying in concrete dams
Very careful and skilled cabling is required in From strain gages

installation of strain gage as the sensor/cable
joint and a large part of the cable is A B C D E F
permanently embedded and no future access is
available for any maintenance and corrective
action.
As access galleries are available in concrete

dams, the cable from the sensors is first routed
to the gallery. These cables may be terminated
in junction boxes inside the gallery. The data
from the various sensors can then be taken or
logged from the junction boxes with the help of
a read out unit or data logger. Alternatively, if
required, the signals from the junction boxes To vertical shaft
may be carried through multi core cables to any
observation room outside the dam structure. Figure 5.4
In a concrete dam, a number of strain gages along other sensors are installed at selected elevations at
different cross sections, as illustrated in figure 5.5 on the next page. For example, three pore pressure
meters, five strain rosettes, five no stress strain containers and two temperature meters are installed at
elevation 312 m. Cables from these sensors have to be taken to junction boxes to be mounted inside one
of the cross galleries. The gallery may be above or below the elevation at which the sensors are to be
installed. As a general practice, all the cables from sensors at any particular elevation are routed to a
vertical shaft on the upstream side of the dam. The cables are then lowered or lifted through the vertical
shaft to the gallery.
At any cross section, the filling of the dam is allowed to continue to an elevation of around 75 cm higher
than where the sensors are to be mounted, leaving 1 m wide x 2.5 m long x 75 cm deep trenches at the
positions where the sensors are to be placed.
The cable from the sensors should be routed through a carefully marked channel trench ending into the
vertical shaft and running parallel to the line of the sensors (refer figure 5.4). The depth and width of the
channel trench depends upon the number of cables the trench has to carry. In case all the cables at an
elevation fit in one row, the depth of the channel can be around 10 cm. If more than one row is required to
Page | 14
lay all the cables, the depth should be increased by 10 cm per row. Before laying the cables, the channel
trench should be properly cleaned and leveled. Any sharp rocks or objects should be removed to prevent
the cable from accidentally getting damaged. The center distance between successive cables should be
kept at a distance of 25 mm with the help of the wooden cable spacer and cable rake provided. To take
care of settlement effects and temperature effects during concrete setting, the cable should be zig zagged
by providing a uniformly distributed slack of around 0.5 m in a 15 m length of each cable. After laying the
cable in any row, it should be covered with concrete by a hand shovel to a depth of around 10 cm and
allowed to set. This is necessary to prevent any accidental damage to the cables.
Precaution must be taken that the cables are properly tagged, onward from the point from which they
come out of the dam into the vertical shaft. With the best possible precautions, mistakes may still occur.
Tags may get lost due to the cable getting accidentally cut. Encardio-rite uses the convention that looking
from the vertical shaft end towards the sensor, the cable from the most distant sensor is always at the left
hand side and the offset trenches are to the right of the channel trench. In that order, the cable from the
closest sensor is at the extreme right. Moreover, when strain gage groups are mounted on a spider and a
no stress strain container is provided, the cables are placed left to right from the strain gages ‘A’ to ‘F’
looking from the vertical shaft. This is illustrated in figure 5.4.
CAUTION: All cables should be properly identified by tagging them every 5 m or closer, onwards from
the point from which they come out of the dam body into the vertical shaft. The tags should
be of a non-corrosive material like stainless steel or plastics.
Figure 5.5
0.5m in a 15m length of each cable.
It is good practice to grout the cable in the vertical shaft at 2 m distances such that the left to right
alignment is maintained.
Page | 15
Similarly, as an Encardio-rite convention, the cable from the most distant

sensor at any elevation should be connected to the extreme left socket
in the junction box. Succeeding cables from the sensors are connected
progressively towards the right in the junction box. Welding the strain
gage to a steel structure.
The mounting of the strain gage to a steel structure is a fairly simple

operation. A dummy strain gage is provided for this purpose. In case of
Encardio-rite model EDS-11V strain gage, the length of the stainless
steel dummy strain gage is 150 mm. This length is 260 mm in case of
the model EDS- 12V strain gage. Figure 5.6
Place the mounting blocks on a surface plate with the screws at the top and tighten the M5 screws with
an Allen key. The faces of the dummy strain gages should coincide with the end faces of the mounting
brackets. Take care that the bottom face of the mounting brackets sit flush with the surface plate and
there is no wobble in the mounting blocks.
Clamp the assembly to the steel structure and weld the mounting brackets to the steel structure. Remove
the dummy strain gage and insert the strain gage in position.
Route the cable properly to the location where readings have to be taken, taking care that it is suitably
protected.
CAUTION: Great care should be taken while tightening strain gage between mounting brackets such
that no torque or bending moment is applied across the length of the strain gage.
Page | 16
6 THERMISTOR - TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE CORRELATION
Thermistor type: Dale 1C3001-B3 or equivalent
T = 1/[A + B (LnR) + C (LnR)3] - 273.2 oC
A = 1.4051 x 10-3
B = 2.369 x 10-4
C = 1.019 x 10-7
Ohm T emp. o C Ohm T emp. o C Ohm T emp. o C

201.1k -50 16.60K -10 2417 +30
187.3K -49 15.72K -9 2317 31
174.5K -48 14.90K -8 2221 32
162.7K -47 14.12K -7 2130 33
151.7K -46 13.39k -6 2042 34
141.6K -45 12.70K -5 1959 35
132.2K -44 12.05K -4 1880 36
123.5K -43 11.44K -3 1805 37
115.4K -12 10.86K -2 1733 38
107.9K -41 10.31K -1 1664 39
101.0K -40 9796 0 1598 40
94.48K -39 9310 +1 1535 41
88.46K -38 8851 2 1475 42
82.87K -37 8417 3 1418 43
77.66K -36 8006 4 1363 44
72.81K -35 7618 5 1310 45
68.30K -34 7252 6 1260 46
64.09K -33 6905 7 1212 47
60.17K -32 6576 8 1167 48
56.51K -31 6265 9 1123 49
53.10K -30 5971 10 1081 50
49.91K -29 5692 11 1040 51
46.94K -28 5427 12 1002 52
44.16K -27 5177 13 965.0 53
41.56k -26 4939 14 929.6 54
39.13K -25 4714 15 895.8 55
36.86K -24 4500 16 863.3 56
34.73K -23 4297 17 832.2 57
32.74K -22 4105 18 802.3 58
30.87K -21 3922 19 773.7 59
29.13K -20 3748 20 746.3 60
27.49K -19 3583 21 719.9 61
25.95K -18 3426 22 694.7 62
24.51K -17 3277 23 670.4 63
23.16K -16 3135 24 647.1 64
21.89K -15 3000 25 624.7 65
20.70K -14 2872 26 603.3 66
19.58K -13 2750 27 582.6 67
18.52K -12 2633 28 562.8 68
17.53K -11 2523 29 525.4 70
Page | 17
Strain gage is embedded in soil or concrete or for surface mounting by welding on steel structures. Once
installed, the sensor is usually inaccessible and remedial action is limited. Maintenance and trouble
shooting is consequently confined to periodic checks of cable connection and functioning of the read-out
unit. Refer the following list of problems and possible solutions should problems arise. For any additional
help, consult the factory.
7.1.1. Symptom: Strain sensor reading unstable
 Check the insulation resistance. The resistance between any lead and the protective armour should
be > 500 M Ohm. If not, cut a meter or so from the end of cable and check again.
 Does the read-out work with another strain gage? If not, the read-out may have a low battery or be
malfunctioning. Consult the manual of the readout unit for charging or trouble shooting instructions.
 Use another read-out unit to take the reading.
 Check if there is a source of electrical noise nearby? General sources of electrical noise are motors,
generators, transformers, arc welders and antennas. If so the problem could be reduced by shielding
from the electrical noise.
7.1.2. Symptom: Strain sensor fails to read
 The cable may be cut or crushed? Check the nominal resistance between the two gage leads using
an Ohmmeter. It should be within 120 - 150 Ohm. The correct value is given in the strain gage test
certificate. Please add the cable resistance when checking. For the model CS-0601 series of cable,
the resistance is 48 Ohm/km and for the model CS-0407 series of cable, the resistance is 84
Ohm/km. In case any other cable is used, make the necessary addition in the resistance value. If
the resistance reads infinite or a very high value, a cut in the cable is suspected. If the resistance
reads very low (<100 Ohm), a short in the cable is likely.
 Does the read-out work with another strain gage? If not, the read-out may have a low battery or be
malfunctioning. Consult the manual of the readout unit for charging or trouble shooting instructions.
Page | 18
8 WARRANTY
installation. This includes fuses and batteries.
Products described in Encardio-rite’s catalogues are subject to modification and improvement as dictated
Page | 19
USERS’ MANUAL
VIBRATING WIRE SISTER BAR

MODEL EDS-12V
Doc. # WI 6002.87 R02 | June 2018

Users’ Manual Vibrating wire sister bar
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Features 1
2 VIBRATING WIRE SISTER BAR STRAIN METER 3

3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE AND TROUBLE SHOOTING 7

3.2 Installation procedure 7
3.3 Extension of cable 8
3.4 Taking initial reading 8
3.5 Care of cable 9
3.6 Lightning protection 10
Symptom: Strain gage reading unstable 10
Symptom: Strain gage fails to give a reading 11
4 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 12
4.1 Conversion of reading to strain changes 12
4.2 Stress strain relationship 12

6 WARRANTY 15
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
The Encardio-rite model EDS-12V vibrating wire sister bar strain meter is specially designed for
embedment in concrete structures. It is ideal for measurement of strain in concrete structures such as
piles, diaphragm/slurry walls, bridge abutments, tunnel lining, dams, foundations, etc.
The sister bar incorporates the latest vibrating wire technology to provide digital readout on a remote
vibrating wire indicator or data acquisition system on magnitude and distribution of compressive and
tensile strain in concrete structures and other areas of application where strain measurement is required.
As an Encardio-rite convention, the ‘+’ sign indicates tensile strain and the ‘-‘ sign indicates compressive
strain. Main purpose of the strain gage is to indirectly quantit
atively determine stress and its variation with time. Change in stress is obtained by multiplying the
measured strain by modulus of elasticity.
1.1 Features
Model EDS-12V is the electrical strain meter of choice as its frequency output is immune to external
noise, it is able to tolerate wet wiring common in geotechnical applications and is capable of transmission
of signals to long distances. It has the following features:
 Thermally aged to minimize long term drift
 Rugged and reliable
 Can be used for embedment in soil or concrete.
The advantage of the vibrating wire strain gage over more conventional electrical resistance (or
semiconductor) types lies mainly in the use of a frequency, rather than a voltage as the output signal
from the strain gage. Frequency may be transmitted over a long cable length without appreciable
degradation caused by variations in cable resistance, contact resistance, or leakage to ground.
For conditions requiring temperature measurement, a thermistor is permanently encapsulated inside the
plucking coil assembly.
This user’s manual covers description of the vibrating wire sister bar strain meter & its accessories,
procedure for embedment of sensor in a concrete structure, method of taking observations and
recording data.
NOTE: The sister bar is not suitable for measurement of dynamic strain.

WARNING! Warning messages calls attention to a procedure or practice, that if not properly followed could

vibrating wire sister bar in your applications.
Page | 1
NOTE: The installation personnel must have a background of good installation practices and knowledge
work. The intricacies involved in installation are such that even if a single essential but apparently
useless.
A lot of effort has been made in preparing this instruction manual. However the best of instruction
manuals cannot provide for each and every condition in the field, which may affect the performance of
the sensor. Also, blindly following the instruction manual will not guarantee success. Sometimes,
depending upon field conditions, the installation personnel will have to consciously depart from the
written text and use their knowledge and common sense to find the solution to a particular problem.
additions or enhancements. We also request you to please let us know of any errors, that you may find
The table of contents will guide you where to look for, in this manual if you need some specific
information.
Page | 2
2 VIBRATING WIRE SISTER BAR STRAIN METER

A sister bar is used where a load cell cannot be conveniently
interposed to measure stress in a structure for reason of
geometry, capacity or economy and where load and stress
can be worked out with reasonable accuracy from knowledge
of the relationship between stress and strain (modulus of
elasticity). In such a case, it is very convenient to have a sister
bar/strain gage, which can be embedded in the concrete
structure.
Rebar Sensor body Epoxy encapsulation 4-core cable
Strain gage Heat shrink sleeve

V W Sensor coil
1400 mm
Encardio-rite model EDS-12V vibrating wire sister bar strain meter consists of a hollow bar with vw strain
gage mounted co-axially inside. The hollow bar is extended on the two sides with 12 or 16 mm 
(nominal) reinforced bars. The reinforced extensions are long enough to ensure full transfer of the strain
within the concrete to the strain gage.
The sensor is supplied ready for embedment in concrete by tying it alongside an existing length of rebar
in the rebar cage. The strain transfer from the surrounding concrete to sister bar strain meter is uniform
and equal. Sister bars can also be installed in pairs on both the sides of neutral axis to separate bending
moments from axial load.
An in-built thermistor is provided for temperature measurement for accurate determination of effective
strain.

The vibrating wire sensor/strain gage basically consists of a magnetic, high tensile strength stretched
wire, one end of which is anchored and the other end is displaced proportionally to the variation in strain.
The stretched wire is thermally aged to minimize long-term drift and changes in calibration.
The strain gage works on the principle that if a coil/magnet assembly plucks a fixed length stretched
magnetic wire; its frequency of vibration is proportional to the tension in the wire. Any change in strain,
directly affects the tension in the wire, resulting in a corresponding change in its frequency of vibration.
The strain is proportional to the square of the frequency that can be measured and displayed directly in
 strain by Encardio-rite’s EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator.
Page | 3
The model EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator is a
microprocessor-based read-out unit for use
with Encardio-rite’s range of vibrating wire
sensors. It can display the measured frequency
in terms of time period, frequency, frequency
squared or the value of measured parameter
directly in proper engineering units. It uses a
smartphone with Android OS as readout having
a large display with a capacitive touch screen
which makes it easy to read the VW sensor.
The EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator can

store calibration coefficients from 10,000 EDI-54V Vibrating wire indicator
vibrating wire sensors so that the value of the
measured parameter from these sensors can be shown directly in proper engineering units. For
transducers with built-in interchangeable thermistor, it can also display the temperature of the transducer
directly in degree Centigrade.
coefficients. The gage factor of the model EDS-12V sister bar is given in the test certificate provided
with every supply. The initial reading IR will be the actual reading in digits from the sister bar after it is
embedded and properly set in concrete.

vibrating wire indicator. A battery charger is provided to charge the internal battery which operates from
charged. The indicator uses a smartphone as a readout that has its own internal sealed rechargeable
Li-ion maintenance battery as a power source. A separate battery charger/adapter unit for the
smartphone, operating from universal AC mains supply is supplied with each EDI-54V indicator unit.
weatherproof connectors for making connections to the vibrating wire transducer and the battery
charger.
For operating EDI-54V See: Doc. # WI 6002.112 R01.
Page | 4

The following tools and accessories are recommended for proper installation of the sister bar.
1. Temperature controlled soldering iron 25 Watt

2. 63/37 rosin core solder wire
3. Acetone (commercial)
4. Hacksaw with 150 mm blade
5. Cable cutter
6. Surgical blade with holder
7. Wire stripper
8. Pliers 160 mm
9. Digital multimeter
10. Vibrating wire indicator (EDI-54V)
Page | 5
TEST CERTIFICATE
Instrument : Sister bar strain gage Date : 25.06.2018

Model : EDS-12V Temperature : 31°C
Bar diameter : 12 mm nominal
Operating temperature : -20 to 80°C
Serial No. : xxxxxxx
Applied load Observed digit Best fit Non-linearity

(kg) Cycle # 1 Cycle # 2 Average (kg) (%FS)
100 7370.4 7372.2 7371 105.24 0.17
500 7630.1 7629.8 7630 496.90 0.10
1000 7959.1 7958.1 7959 994.55 0.18
1500 8290.4 8292.7 8292 1498.72 0.04
2000 8624.1 8625.3 8625 2003.19 0.11
2500 8956.2 8955.4 8956 2504.56 0.15
3000 9280.3 9281.5 9281 2996.84 0.11
* Regression zero (digit) = 7301.80
* The above calculation uses a linear regression method. The value of regression zero given is ideal for straight line
non-linearity calculation but is different from actual no load zero reading.
Digit : f ² /1000 (where f is frequency in Hz)

Gage factor (G) : 5.989E-01 µ-strain / digit
µ-strain is calculated using following equation:
µ-strain = G(R1 - R0)
where R1 = current reading
R0 = Initial reading in digits and must be recorded at the time of Installation.

Cable length : 10 feet/3 m; CS0702 4 core cable
Page | 6
3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE AND TROUBLE SHOOTING

The first step is to check the sensor before installation for proper functioning. This should be done in an
environmentally clean atmosphere, conducive to maintaining good quality at a location like a steel yard
or warehouse. All preliminary work on the sensor should be done at a covered location remote from the
dirt and adverse weather that may exist at the work site.
Check the working of the sensor as follows:

 Coil resistance measured by digital multimeter between red and black leads should lie between 110-
170 Ohm at 25ºC. Determine resistance at room temperature from thermistor temperature
resistance chart in § 5. This resistance should be equal to that between pins marked green and
white. For example, in case room temperature is 25ºC, this resistance would be 3,000 Ohm.
 The resistance between any lead and the protective armour should be > 500 M Ohm.
 Connect sensor to model EDI-54V portable vibrating wire indicator. Initial offset reading in frequency
should be stable and between 2300–3000 Hz.
 Press ‘TEMP’ key on vibrating wire indicator. The display will indicate the room temperature in
degree Centigrade.
CAUTION: The sister bar strain gage is a delicate and sensitive instrument. It should be handled with care.
Twisting it or applying too much force on it may result in permanently damaging it. While checking
the sister bar strain gage, do not apply too much tension as the wire may break.
3.2 Installation procedure

Driven piles, drilled shafts, diaphragm walls, rafts normally involve simple cross sections of reinforced
bars subjected to compression and some bending. Location of sister bars should be selected carefully
taking into consideration any bending involved.
For installation, soft iron wires/cable ties are usually used to attach the sister bar to reinforcing bars at
desired locations. Normally, the tie wires should be aligned perpendicular to the axis of the sister bar
such that any movement of reinforcing bars during the pouring of the concrete will not exert a pull on
the strain gage and distort or damage it. Tie wires should normally be tied near the ends of the sister bar
rod as shown in the figure.
Route the sensor cable along the reinforce bar to the junction box, tying it at every 1 m with nylon cable
ties. Do not use soft iron ties on cable as it can cut the cable.
Page | 7
While installation, remember to note the

location and serial number of all sister
bars. This is necessary for applying
correct calibration factors from respective
test certificate for readings.
Sensor cable
NOTE: Sister bars are usually installed in in PVC conduite
pairs on both the sides of neutral
axis to separate bending moments
Wire tie
from axial load.
3.3 Extension of cable Reinforcing

rebar
Very careful and skilled cabling is required
in installation of sister bar as sensor/cable
joint and a large part of cable is
permanently embedded and no future
access is available for maintenance or Sensor cable
corrective action. in flexible pipe
Sister bars are supplied with standard PU Sister bar

sheathed 4- core cable color coded as strain gage
follows.
Red/Black VW sensor
Green/White Thermistor
Wire tie
Length of cable depends on customer
requirement. It is recommended that
sensors be supplied with the complete
length of cable required.
However, in case client wants to extend different cable at site, sister bars can be supplied with standard
1 m length of cable. Cable can be extended at site using a 1:1 junction box available from Encardio-rite.
The cable joint should be made watertight by using an epoxy based splicing kit. Cable jointing compound
3M Scotch Cast Electrical Kit 2131 is stocked by Encardio-rite and is available in 100, 200 and 500 cc
packing.
After completing the cable extension, make sure to check the working of the sensor again following the
procedure described above in § 3.1.
Note: Any suitable two component cable jointing compound available in your region can be used in
place of the 3M Scotch Cast Electrical Kit 2131. If required, you can also procure the compound
from us.
3.4 Taking initial reading

1. Take one reading before concreting. While concrete sets, take daily strain gage temperature reading
(by pressing TEMP button) and frequency2/1000 (digits) reading (by pressing FREQ 2 button) of EDI-
54V read-out unit. Go on taking these reading till concrete sets properly. Initial reading ‘IR’ to be
entered in EDI-54V should be considered only after concrete sets properly and reading in digits is
almost constant. The initial reading in digits is very important because all future readings are referred
Page | 8
to this initial reading to determine any change in stress. The initial reading in digits along with the
gage factor (from individual test certificate), constitute the calibration constants required to be fed
into the EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator as set-up data for model EDS-12V.
2. Feed the calibration constants. The EDI-54V is programmed to accept this initial reading as 'IR' in
set-up data. The indicator will then prompt to enter the gage factor 'GF'. Enter the gage factor as
specified in the batch test certificate. After set-up ends restart indicator. In engineering units mode
for this channel, pressing the ‘UNITS’ key on the vibrating wire indicator will now display around ‘0.0
ue’ (micro strain). Any subsequent reading at any other time by pressing the ‘UNITS’ key will show
an increase or decrease from this reading and automatically give the microstrains developed during
the period.
NOTE: The initial frequency reading is very important because all future readings are referred to this
initial reading to determine any change in stress. Consequently a minimum of two readings taken
daily after installation should be repeatable. It is a good practice to take readings regularly during
the first few days to ensure that the data is stable and a correct initial reading is fed into the
vibrating wire indicator as a calibration constant. In case the readings are not repeatable within a
certain tolerance, the installation, strain gage or the vibrating wire indicator may be defective. The
cause must be evaluated and if there is a problem, it should be rectified.
3.5 Care of cable

1. Care should be taken that the installed sister bars (strain gage) and the cable are properly protected.
Protect cable from accidental damage by heavy equipment or flying rocks and debris. Use any
practical method to protect the cable. Conduits should not be used where flow of water along the
instrument leads must be prevented.
2. Keep the ends of the lead wires clean and dry. In case several sister bars are installed at the same
location, they may be terminated in an IP-67 junction/switch box and a multi-core cable used for
transmitting the readings to any central observation post.
3. Cable should be marked with permanent markers by the use of stainless steel or plastic tags
stamped with the appropriate sister bar serial number. The tags should be such that they do not
damage or cut the cable. Temporary identification can be done by writing the serial number of the
sister bar, its code number and the location at which it is installed, on a strip of paper, placing the
strip on the cable and covering it with a transparent plastic cello tape. Permanent identification is
necessary to prevent errors in making proper connections and to insure correct splicing if cable is
cut or, broken.
With the best possible precautions, mistakes may still occur. Tags may get lost due to the cable
getting accidentally cut. Encardio-rite uses the convention that looking from the observation post
towards the sensor, the cable from the most distant sensor is always at the left hand side. In that
order, the cable from the closest sensor is at the extreme right.
CAUTION: The single most important factor leading to loss of worthwhile data from sensors is losing track or
identification of cable ends. Proper identification and marking of cables should not be taken
casually. Care should be taken to put an identification tag at the point where the cable comes out
of the structure such that cable identity is not lost if the cable gets cut or damaged. Route the
cable properly to the location where readings have to be taken, taking care that it is suitably
protected. Lead wires must be protected from mechanical damage and their ends from water.
Page | 9
3.6 Lightning protection

Lightning during thunderstorms can induce short spikes of sufficiently high electrical energy in the wires
connecting the vibrating wire sensor to the readout instrument that can damage the coils in the sensor
assembly. Some measure of lightning protection for the vibrating wire sensor is recommended if the
sensor is mounted in the field or in open areas and connected to the readout instrument through long
wires. However, these protection schemes will not protect the sensor against direct or near direct
lightning strikes. Lightning protection is generally not required if the connecting wire is very short, say
only a few meters in length, or both the sensor and the vibrating wire indicator is used inside a shielded
structure, e.g. a building.
Model EDS-12V vw sister bar strain meter is not available with any integral lightning protection
component. If lightning protection is desired one of the following options may be used:
 Surge arrestors like Gas Discharge Tubes (GDT) or TransZorbs (registered trademark of General
Semiconductor Industries) may be fixed to the gage cable as near to the gage as possible and
epoxy potted in place. The ground conductor would have to be connected to an earthing stake or
the steel structure itself.
 If the sister bar is mounted close to a junction box or a multiplexer, the surge arrestor component
can be mounted in the junction box or the multiplexer box itself. Encardio-rite can provide junction
boxes and multiplexers with lightning protection installed as an option (specify while ordering).
 Lightning arrestor boards and enclosures are available from Encardio-rite, which can be installed at
the exit point of the structure being monitored. Consult the factory for additional information on these
or alternate lightning protection schemes.

After installation, the sister bar is usually inaccessible. Maintenance and troubleshooting of the Model
EDS- 12V vw sister bar strain meter is consequently limited to periodic checks of cable connections and
maintenance of terminals.
Symptom: Strain gage reading unstable

 Check the insulation resistance. The resistance between any lead and the protective armour
should be > 500 M Ohm.
 Check if the vibrating wire indicator works with another strain gage? If not, the vibrating wire
indicator may have a low battery or be malfunctioning. Consult the manual of the vibrating wire
indicator for charging or trouble shooting instructions.
 Use another vibrating wire indicator to take the reading.
 Check if there is a source of electrical noise nearby? General sources of electrical noise are
motors, generators, transformers, arc welders and antennas. If so, the problem could be reduced
 The reading may be outside the specified range (either compressive or tensile) of the strain gage? The
gage may have become too slack or too tight. Inspection of data collected might indicate this possibility.
Page | 10
Symptom: Strain gage fails to give a reading

 The cable may be cut or crushed? Check the nominal resistance between the two gage leads
using an Ohmmeter. It should be within 110 - 170 Ohm.
 Check if the vibrating wire indicator works with another strain gage? If not, the vibrating wire
 Use another vibrating wire indicator to take the reading. The reading may be outside the specified
range (either compressive or tensile) of the strain gage? The gage may have become too slack or
too tight. Inspection of data collected might indicate this possibility.
Page | 11
4 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
4.1 Conversion of reading to strain changes

By selecting the channel number and pressing the ‘UNITS’ key, the EDI-54V readout when connected
to Model EDS-12V vibrating wire sister bar strain meter, will display the change in strain directly in 
strain. Thus, the change in strain between the initial state (0) and any subsequent state (1) can be
directly read on the EDI- 54V vibrating wire indicator. Compressive strain is indicated by a ‘-‘sign and
tensile strain by a ‘+’ sign.
apparent =  0)
4.2 Stress strain relationship


 = E
Strain data is rarely of interest. Whereas strain gages measure strain or deformation of the structure,
the designer is more interested in the structural load or stress. This requires a conversion from the
measured strain to computed stress. In case of steel, if modulus of elasticity is known, deformation is in
elastic limits and temperature is recorded, conversion from strain to stress is straightforward.
Strain changes with time are computed from the sister bar readings taken at different intervals, and by
comparing with some initial reading taken at time zero. Selection of the initial reading depends upon the
purpose of the measurement. If actual stress in the structural member is required, the initial reading is
best taken when the structural member is under no load.
Temperatures should be recorded at the time of each reading along with notes concerning construction
activity taking place. This data might supply logical reasons for observed changes in the readings.
Page | 12

T = 1/[A + B(LnR) + C(LnR)3] - 273.2 oC
A = 1.4051 x 10-3
B = 2.369 x 10-4
C = 1.019 x 10-7
O hm T emp. o C O hm T emp. o C O hm T emp. o C
20 1 .1k - 50 16 . 60 K - 10 24 1 7 + 30
18 7 .3 K - 49 15 . 72 K -9 23 1 7 31
17 4 .5 K - 48 14 . 90 K -8 22 2 1 32
16 2 .7 K - 47 14 . 12 K -7 21 3 0 33
15 1 .7 K - 46 13 . 39k -6 20 4 2 34
14 1 .6 K - 45 12 . 70 K -5 19 5 9 35
13 2 .2 K - 44 12 . 05 K -4 18 8 0 36
12 3 .5 K - 43 11 . 44 K -3 18 0 5 37
11 5 .4 K - 12 10 . 86 K -2 17 3 3 38
10 7 .9 K - 41 10 . 31 K -1 16 6 4 39
10 1 .0 K - 40 97 9 6 0 15 9 8 40
94 . 48 K - 39 93 1 0 +1 15 3 5 41
88 . 46 K - 38 88 5 1 2 14 7 5 42
82 . 87 K - 37 84 1 7 3 14 1 8 43
77 . 66 K - 36 80 0 6 4 13 6 3 44
72 . 81 K - 35 76 1 8 5 13 1 0 45
68 . 30 K - 34 72 5 2 6 12 6 0 46
64 . 09 K - 33 69 0 5 7 12 1 2 47
60 . 17 K - 32 65 7 6 8 11 6 7 48
56 . 51 K - 31 62 6 5 9 11 2 3 49
53 . 10 K - 30 59 7 1 10 10 8 1 50
49 . 91 K - 29 56 9 2 11 10 4 0 51
46 . 94 K - 28 54 2 7 12 10 0 2 52
44 . 16 K - 27 51 7 7 13 96 5 .0 53
41 . 56k - 26 49 3 9 14 92 9 .6 54
39 . 13 K - 25 47 1 4 15 89 5 .8 55
36 . 86 K - 24 45 0 0 16 86 3 .3 56
34 . 73 K - 23 42 9 7 17 83 2 .2 57
32 . 74 K - 22 41 0 5 18 80 2 .3 58
30 . 87 K - 21 39 2 2 19 77 3 .7 59
29 . 13 K - 20 37 4 8 20 74 6 .3 60
27 . 49 K - 19 35 8 3 21 71 9 .9 61
25 . 95 K - 18 34 2 6 22 69 4 .7 62
24 . 51 K - 17 32 7 7 23 67 0 .4 63
23 . 16 K - 16 31 3 5 24 64 7 .1 64
21 . 89 K - 15 30 0 0 25 62 4 .7 65
20 . 70 K - 14 28 7 2 26 60 3 .3 66
19 . 58 K - 13 27 5 0 27 58 2 .6 67
18 . 52 K - 12 26 3 3 28 56 2 .8 68
17 . 53 K - 11 25 2 3 29 52 5 .4 70
Page | 13

The thermal coefficient of expansion of the embedment strain gage is 11.0 ppm/oC and concrete varies
from 10 – 13 ppm/oC. Correction for temperature variation is seldom required in field use. In case
correction is required for any specific application, it is best to embed a sister bar strain meter from the
same batch in a representative concrete block and conduct actual temperature tests under controlled
conditions. The difference in thermal coefficient of expansion so obtained can then be applied as a
temperature correction.
Page | 14
6 WARRANTY
specifications or other operating conditions not in control of Encardio-Rite. The warranty is limited to
free repair/replacement of the product/parts with manufacturing defects only and does not cover
If any of the products does not function or functions improperly, it should be returned freight prepaid to
the factory for our evaluation. In case it is found defective, it will be replaced/repaired free of cost.
personnel must have a background of good installation practices as intricacies involved in installation
are such that even if a single essential but apparently minor requirement is ignored or overlooked, the
most reliable of instruments will be rendered useless.
damages experienced by the user. There are no other warranties, expressed or implied, including but
not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and of fitness for a particular purpose. Encardio-
rite is not responsible for any direct, indirect, incidental, special or consequential damage or loss caused
to other equipment or people that the purchaser may experience as a result of installation or use of the
product. The buyer’s sole remedy for any breach of this agreement or any warranty by Encardio-rite
shall not exceed the purchase price paid by the purchaser to Encardio-rite. Under no circumstances will
omissions or errors that may appear nor assumes liability for any damage or loss that results from use
of Encardio-rite products in accordance with the information contained in the manuals or software.
Products described in Encardio-rite’s catalogs are subject to modification and improvement as dictated
by subsequent developments. Encardio-rite reserves the right to modify, change or improve products,
to discontinue them or to add new ones without notice.
Page | 15
USERS’ MANUAL

MODEL EDS-20V-AW ARC W ELDABLE
Doc. # WI 6002.34 R07 | June 2018

Users’ Manual Vibrating wire strain gage – arc weldable type
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Features 1
1.2 Applications 1

2.2.1 Cable 5
2.2.2 Accessories 5

3.2 Installation of arc weldable strain gage 9
3.3 Measurement of strain on a concrete surface 13
3.4 Care of cable 14
3.6.1 Symptom: Strain gage reading unstable 15
3.6.2 Symptom: Strain gage fails to give a reading 15
4.3 Positioning of weldable strain gages 16
4.3.1 Pressure shaft 17
4.3.2 Steel pile or strut 17
4.3.3 Wye section 19
4.3.4 I-beams 20
4.3.5 Strain gages mounted on flanges 21

6 WARRANTY 24
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
The Encardio-rite model EDS-20V-AW strain gage is intended primarily for long-term strain measurement
and is suitable for surface mounting by welding on steel structures such as bridges, piles, wye sections,
pressure shafts, tunnel linings and supports etc. The primary means of attachment is by conventional arc
welding, but by alteration of the end blocks it can be adapted to monitor strain changes on concrete or
rock surfaces using anchors grouted into boreholes.
For embedment in soil or concrete, Encardio-rite recommends the model EDS-11V electron beam welded
or the model EDS-20V-E embedment strain gage.
The strain gage incorporates the latest vibrating wire technology to provide digital readout on a remote
vibrating wire indicator on the magnitude and distribution of compressive and tensile strain in steel
structures and other areas of application where strain measurement is required. As an Encardio-rite
convention, the ‘+’ sign indicates tensile strain and the ‘-‘ sign indicates compressive strain. Main purpose
of the strain gage is to indirectly quantitatively determine stress and its variation with time. Change in stress is
obtained by multiplying the measured strain by the modulus of elasticity.
The gage has a very high compliance requiring less than 3 kg of force to tension the wire by 3000
µ strain. It can be fixed by welding or epoxy bonding or a pair of setscrews. All gages have the vibrating
wire pre-tensioned ready for use.
1.1 Features
 Thermally aged to minimize long term drift

 Rugged and reliable
 Can be used on concrete and rock surfaces
semiconductor) types lies mainly in the use of a frequency, rather than a voltage, as the output signal
from the strain gage. Frequency may be transmitted over a long cable length without appreciable
The thermal coefficient of expansion of the gage is the same as that of the steel surface to which it is
attached (and very similar to that of concrete). Corrections for temperature are therefore seldom required.
This users manual covers description of the vibrating wire strain gage & its accessories, procedure for
installation of the sensor on a steel structure, method of taking observations and recording data. The
model EDS-20V-AW requires a dummy strain gage and a welding jig to facilitate installation.
1.2 Applications
Encardio-rite model EDS-20V-AW is the electrical strain gage of choice as its frequency output is immune
to external noise, it is able to tolerate wet wiring common in geotechnical applications and is capable of
transmission of signals to long distances. It has applications in the measurement of positive or negative
strain on a steel structure, concrete or rock surface including:

 Testing and long-term analysis of stress distribution of Wye sections.
 Monitoring and long-term analysis of stress in pressure shafts.
 Measurement of strain in steel constructions, concrete and rock surfaces.
NOTE: The strain gage is not suitable for measurement of dynamic strains.
Page | 1
attention.
A lot of effort has been made in preparing this instruction manual. However the best of
instruction manuals cannot provide for each and every condition in the field, which may
affect the performance of the sensor. Also, blindly following the instruction manual will not
guarantee success. Sometimes, depending upon field conditions, the installation personnel
will have to consciously depart from the written text and use their knowledge and common
sense to find the solution to a particular problem.
additions or enhancements. We also request you to please let us know of any errors, which you may find
For description of the strain gage and accessories available: See § 2.2 ‘General description’.
For specifications: See § 2.3 ‘taking readings with EDI-54V’.
For complete operating procedure of EDI-54V Vibrating Wire Unit, See ‘Doc. # WI 6002.112’
For essential tools and accessories: See § 2.4 ‘Tools and accessories required for installation”.
For installation of strain gage: See § 3 ‘Installation procedure and trouble shooting’.
For applications on concrete: See § 3.2 ‘Installation of arc weldable strain gage
For applications on concrete: See § 3.3 ‘Measurement of strain on a concrete surface’.
For computing structural load or stress: See § 4.2 ‘Stress strain relationship’.
For deciding where to install strain gages: See § 4.3 ‘Positioning of weldable strain gages’.
For temperature effects: See § 5.1 ‘Temperature effects’.
Page | 2
end of which is anchored and the other end is displaced proportionally to the variation in strain. The
stretched wire is thermally aged to minimize long-term drift and changes in calibration.
micro-strain by Encardio-rite’s EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator.
The wire is plucked by a coil magnet. Proportionate to the tension, the wire resonates at a frequency ‘f’,
which can be determined as follows:
f = [σg/ρ]1/2/ 2l Hz
Where: σ = tension of wire in kg/cm2
g = 980 cm/sec2
The relationship between stress, strain and the modulus of elasticity can be expressed as σ/ε = E. The
length of the wire in the strain gage is 15 cm, the centre distance between the annular end blocks is 14.9
cm and E = 2.11 x 106 kg/cm2. Consequently, the formula can be reduced to:
ε15 = 4.051 x 10-3 f2 µ strain
µ strain.
NOTE: The value 4.051 x 10-3 µ strain/Hz2 is known as the effective gage factor of the strain gage. It
varies within limits from batch to batch. For the correct “effective gage factor” of the strain
gages supplied to you, please refer to the batch test report provided.
The modulus of elasticity of the strain gage is very low and the magnetic strain gage plucking wire in it
precisely follows the deflection of the steel section (or the concrete or rock surface) on which the strain
gage is mounted. It is not affected by the material or the coefficient of thermal expansion of the strain
gage element or its body.
vibrating wire sensors is 11.0 ppm per oC at 25oC.
A Strain gage is used where a load cell cannot be

conveniently interposed to measure stress in a steel
structure for reason of geometry, capacity or economy
and where load and stress can be worked out with
reasonable accuracy from knowledge of the
relationship between stress and strain (modulus of
elasticity). In such a case, it is very convenient to have a strain gage, which can be welded to the steel
structure.
Page | 3
The Encardio-rite vibrating wire strain gage consists of a high tensile strength wire made out of a
magnetic material stretched between two stainless steel cylindrical end blocks. The wire is sealed in a
stainless steel tube by a set of double "O" rings fixed on each end block. This largely ensures resistance
to corrosive, humid, wet and other hostile environmental conditions. The model EDS-20V-AW provides
further protection by suitably sealing the joints with heat shrinkable tubes. In addition to this, a special
water proofing compound seals the plucking coil in the sensor assembly from any ingress of water. The
sensor assembly in the model EDS-20V-AW is consequently supplied integral with the rest of the gage.
The tube is flattened in the middle to accommodate a sensor (coil/magnet assembly) in the constriction.
To mount the strain gage, two annular mounting blocks (one with one grub screw and the other with two
grub screws) are accurately positioned and aligned by a dummy gage and welded to the structure. The
dummy gage is then finally replaced by the actual strain gage and clamped in position. One of the
cylindrical end blocks has a ‘V’ groove around its circumference. The annular mounting block with one
grub screw is fixed to this cylindrical end block. Groutable reinforced bar annular mounting blocks are
available for surface mounting the strain gage to a concrete or rock surface. Refer to figure 3.5.
Ø31
164.0
Top view
10 Ø28.5
26.5
174.0 End view
Figure 2.1 - dimensional details with mounting blocks
NOTE: In 2008, mounting blocks were modified and are as shown in figure 2.1. Earlier mounting
blocks were as shown in figure 2.2. Please also refer to § 3.2 for changes made in the
mounting jig.
Figure 2.2 - dimensional details with earlier mounting blocks

For mounting on wire ropes special mounting brackets as illustrated in figure 2.3 on next page are
available.
Page | 4
Displacement of end blocks is always proportionally to the variation in strain. Any change in strain directly
affects tension of the wire, resulting in a corresponding change in frequency of vibration of the wire.
Change in frequency of the vibrating wire is accurately measured by a vibrating wire indicator calibrated to
indicate the strain. All vibrating wire sensors manufactured by Encardio-rite use the same vibrating wire
read-out unit model EDI-54V irrespective of the parameter being measured.
The model EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator, used in conjunction with the vibrating wire strain gage, will
provide necessary voltage pulses to pluck the wire and will convert the resulting frequency reading directly
into strain units by means of an internal microprocessor.
2.2.1 Cable
For strain gage clamp
Four core PVC jacketed shielded cable, CS-0406
suitable for upto 60oC standard or CS-0404 suitable
for upto 80oC on request. Color code is as follows:
Red/Black VW sensor
For wire rope
D- specify.
D
2.2.2 Accessories
U clamp
• Weldable annular mounting blocks (one
set provided with each strain gage).
• EDS-21 groutable reinforced bar annular Figure 2.3 – Mounting on wire rope
mounting blocks (instead of weldable end
blocks). Refer to figure 3.5.
• EDS-22 dummy strain gage. Refer to figure 3.1 & 3.3.
• EDS-23 mounting jig. Refer to figure 3.2
• EDS-24 cover plate with mounting jig. Refer to figure 3.4
• EJB-12-2 junction box.
• EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator.
In case a number of strain gages have to be mounted, it saves time to have several dummy strain gages.
They do not cost much and help in installing several sets of mounting brackets simultaneously on the
steel structure to be monitored. Once all the mounting brackets are welded in position, the dummy strain
gages can together be replaced with the actual strain gages.
The dummy strain gage, if required can be manufactured at site. The dimensions are given in the note
preceding § 3.2.2.
Sometimes it is easier to terminate cables from several strain gages in a junction box and carry the
signals to the observation station or multiplexer collectively through a multi core cable. Standard junction
boxes are available from Encardio-rite for this purpose. If required, lightning protection can also be
provided in the junction box. Refer to § 3.5.
The model EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator (figure 2.3 (a)) is a microprocessor-based read-out unit for
use with Encardio-rite’s range of vibrating wire sensors. It can display the measured frequency in terms of
time period, frequency, frequency squared or the value of measured parameter directly in proper engi-
neering units. It uses a smartphone with Android OS as readout having a large display with a capacitive
touch screen which makes it easy to read the VW sensor.
Page | 5
The EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator can store calibration coefficients from 10,000 vibrating wire sensors
so that the value of the measured parameter from
these sensors can be shown directly in proper engi-
neering units. For transducers with built-in inter-
changeable thermistor, it can also display the tempera-
ture of the transducer directly in degree Centigrade.
The vibrating wire indicator has an internal non-volatile

memory with sufficient capacity to store about 525,000
readings from any of the programmed sensors. Each
reading is stamped with the date and time the meas-
urement was taken.
Refer instruction manual WI-6002.112 of model EDI-

54V for entering the transducer calibration coeffi-
Fig 2.3 (a) – EDI-54V Vibrating wire indicator
cients. The gage factor of the model EDS-20V-AW arc
weldable strain gage is given in the batch test certificate provided with every supply of strain gage. The
initial reading IR will be the actual reading in digits from the strain gage after it is installed at a particular
location and properly stable.
An internal 6 V 4 Ah rechargeable sealed maintenance-free battery is used to provide power to the vibrat-
ing wire indicator. A battery charger is provided to charge the internal battery, which operates, from 90 V
to 270 V AC 50 or 60 Hz V AC mains. A fully discharged battery takes around 6 hours to get fully charged.
The indicator uses a smartphone as a readout that has its own internal sealed rechargeable Li-ion
maintenance battery as a power source. A separate battery charger/adapter unit for the smartphone, op-
erating from universal AC mains supply is supplied with each EDI-54V indicator unit.
The EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator is housed in an impact resistant plastic moulded housing with weath-
erproof connectors for making connections to the vibrating wire transducer and the battery charger.
Page | 6
Calibration certificate
Customer
Order No.
Type Arc weldable type waterproof strain gages
Model EDS-20V-AW
Range ± 1500 micro-strain
Mfg. Sl. No.
Batch Calibration Factor
Sensor supplied against the above order belongs to the batch no. mentioned below:-
Batch No. : U 07 Calibration date: 2.06.2018

Temperature: 28ºC
Calibration factor gage #1 3.960 microstrain/digit
Calibration factor gage # 2 3.974 microstrain/digit
Average calibration factor 3.967 microstrain/digit
(1 digit = Hz2/1000)
The above named instrument has been calibrated by comparison with slip gages sl. no. 0001343
(Calibration certificate no. 16/WL/9134) traceable to National Physical Laboratory, New Delhi.
Checked By Tested By
Page | 7
The following tools and accessories are recommended for proper installation of the strain gage
1. Dummy strain gage
2. Mounting jig
4. Rosin 63/37 solder wire
6. Rust preventive paint
7. Chipping hammer
8. Wire brush
9. 250 mm flat file
10. 12 mm round file
11. Spanner 18/19
13. Cable Cutter
15. Wire Stripper
16. Pliers 160 mm
17. Screw driver 20 cm
18. Allen key M6
19. Cloth for cleaning (lintless)
Page | 8
environmentally clean atmosphere, conducive to maintaining good quality at a location like a steel yard or
warehouse. All preliminary work on the sensor and if possible, also installation of the strain gage on the
steel structure should be done at a covered location remote from the dirt and adverse weather which may
exist at the work site.
 Snap the sensor on to the flattened constriction on the strain gage. In case of the model EDS-20V-
AW, the sensor is an integral part of the gage.
 The coil resistance measured by a digital multimeter between the red and black leads should lie
between 130-150 Ohm. Determine the resistance at the room temperature from thermistor
temperature resistance chart in § 5. This resistance should be equal to that between pins marked
green and white. For example, in case the room temperature is 25oC, this resistance would be 3,000
Ohm.
 The resistance between any lead and the protective armor should be > 500 m Ohm.
 Connect the sensor to the model EDI-54V portable vibrating wire indicator. The initial offset reading in
frequency should be stable. In case it is around 800 Hz, this corresponds to a tension equivalent to
around 2500 µstrain in the wire. The nominal reading range of the strain gage is 1000 to 4000 µ strain.
 A simple effective method of checking whether sensor is responding to changes in strain is as follows:
• Press the two ends of the strain gage gently between the fore fingers and verify that the
frequency reading on the vibrating wire indicator decreases. Pulling the ends gently will increase
the frequency reading. Do not apply excessive tension, as the magnetic wire could break.
• This change in reading ensures that the deformation produced by straining the strain gage is
 Press the ‘TEMP’ key on the vibrating wire indicator. The display will indicate the room temperature.
 Remove the sensor from the strain gage.
Twisting it or applying too much force on it may result in permanently damaging it. While
checking the strain gage, do not apply
too much tension as the wire may
break.
3.2 Installation of arc weldable strain gage
Wherever possible, gages should be installed

around 100 hours before the erection of the
structural member at site. This allows time for
stabilization of the strain gage before taking the
initial reading.
3.2.1 Use the dummy strain gage (figure 3.1) and

Figure 3.1 - dummy strain gage
the mounting jig (figure 3.2) to properly
position the annular mounting blocks. The
mounting blocks are supplied in pairs. The first has a single conical point Allen head grub screw;
Page | 9
the other has two oval point grub screws.

Position the two mounting blocks with the
dummy strain gage in between, over the
mounting jig and tighten the grub screws.
Take care that the inner surfaces of the
mounting blocks are flush with the jig and
they also rest flush on the base of the jig.
Excess pressure on the grub screws Dummy
should be avoided as this only damages strain gage
the dummy strain gage. (in slot)
Alternatively, place the mounting blocks

Annular mounting block
on a surface plate with the dummy strain
gage in between. Tighten the M6 grub
Figure 3.2 - mounting jig
screws with an Allen key taking care that
the faces of the dummy strain gage coincide with the end faces of the two mounting blocks.
Ensure that the bottom face of the mounting blocks sits flush with the surface plate and there is
no wobble in the mounting blocks.
The mounting blocks are now aligned and ready to be welded to the steel structure. In case a
number of strain gages have to be welded, it is advisable to procure several dummy strain gages.
NOTE: The dummy strain gage is a stainless steel rod 12.8 mm φ x 175 mm long. It has a 1 mm
deep ‘V’ groove at a distance of 8 mm from one end. In case it is not available, you may get
it manufactured at site giving a tolerance of ± 0.1 mm on the dimensions.
NOTE: In the year 2008, mounting blocks were modified and are as shown in figure 2.1. Earlier
mounting blocks were as shown in figure 2.2. For earlier models, the dummy strain gage was
a stainless steel rod 12.8 mm Φ x 165 mm long and the mounting jig was also different.
3.2.2 Using a wire brush clean the steel surface on which the strain gage is to be mounted of all scale,
rust, dirt and oil. Remove the mounting blocks and dummy strain gage assembly from the
mounting jig and place them in position on the steel surface. Press them firmly against the steel
surface using the dummy strain gage as a handle. Weld the edges of the mounting blocks in the
order as shown below:
Figure 3.3 - welding sequence
NOTE: Avoid excessive heat as it may distort the steel surface. Do not weld the flat end surfaces
of the mounting block, as this will prevent removal of the dummy strain gage.
3.2.3 Let the mounting blocks cool to room temperature, using a water soaked rag if required, before
slackening the grub screws to remove the dummy strain gage.
Page | 10
3.2.4 Use the chipping hammer and wire brush to clean away all welding slag.
3.2.5 Insert the strain gage into the holes in the mounting blocks. Take care that the grooved end of the
gage is on the side of the mounting block with the single grub screw. Tighten the grub screw hard
down into the ‘V’ groove on the strain gage.
3.2.6 Snap the sensor over the constriction in the strain gage and secure it with the cable tie. This is
not required for model EDS-20V-AW. Connect the leads from the sensor to the vibrating wire
indicator. Switch on the display. The mid range position of the gage occurs at a frequency reading
of around 800 Hz. This corresponds to a tension in the wire equivalent to around 2,500 µ strain.
The strain gage has a range of around 1,000 µ strain to 4,000 µ strain.
 If the gage will measure mainly compressive stress it should be set to a reading of around 3500
µ strain. This will correspond to around 930 Hz.
 If the gage will measure mainly tensile stress, it should be set to a reading of around 1500
µ strain. This will correspond to around 600 Hz.
 In case the strain gage is to be set at any other tension, the frequency can be calculated by
equation 2.1 in § 2.1.
3.2.7 Wire tension can be made to increase or decrease by pushing the sensor in the direction of the
free end or away from it. When the desired tension is obtained, the free end is firmly secured
inside the mounting block by tightening down hard the two grub screws.
3.2.8 To stabilize the reading, tap the mounting blocks gently after the grub screws have been
tightened. The reading may alter slightly during this operation, which is normal.
CAUTION: Great care should be taken while tightening the strain gage between the mounting blocks
such that no torque or bending moment is applied across the length of the strain gage.
NOTE: It is good practice to gently tap the mounting blocks after the grub screws are tightened. This
helps in improving the initial stability of the gage as it re-adjusts its position over the “O” ring
seals between the mounting blocks and the protective stainless steel tubing.
NOTE: In case a number of gages are to be installed, it is good practice to have more than one
dummy strain gage.
3.2.9 Apply a coat of any standard rust preventative paint on the weld joints to minimize effect of
corrosion.
3.2.10 Care should be taken that the installed strain gages and the cable are properly protected. Most
strain gages require protection from water and from mechanical damage caused by normal
construction activity, vehicular traffic and vandalism. Proper protection methods have to be
devised by the user or the designer. A typical protection by using a cover plate is illustrated in
figure 3.4 on the next page.
CAUTION: Strain gages and cables require protection from water and from mechanical damage caused
by normal construction activity, welding, vehicular traffic and vandalism. Gages usually
require protective covers, bolted, welded or epoxied to the structure. Protective covers
should not distort or stiffen the structure. Excessive force applied in tightening and welding
operations may cause deceptive or spurious strains at the location. Possible solutions are
attaching a stiff cover plate at only one end of the structure or using a rubber gasket in
between.
Page | 11
Figure 3.4 - typical protection
1. Cover plate
2. M12 x 75 long hex bolt, washer and nut
3. Strain gage
4. Sensor
5. Flexible conduit
6. Conduit clamp
CAUTION: In case a cover plate is used for protection of the strain gage, the hex head of the studs to
hold the cover plate in position should be arc welded in place before the strain gage is
clamped in position between the mounting blocks. A welding jig is required to correctly
position the studs.
CAUTION: The cover plate is manufactured from sheet metal or channel section. It is bolted over the
top of the strain gage. The retaining nuts used to hold the cover plate over the studs should
not be tightened very hard and also, the studs should not be positioned within 150 mm of the
strain gage as this may distort the underlying steel surface and give rise to spurious
readings. It is recommended to avoid welding any where near the gage as this may cause
large local distortion of the steel surface.
track of identification of cable ends. Proper identification and marking of cables is generally
taken most casually. Care should be taken to put an identification tag at point where cable
comes out of the structure such that cable identity is not lost if cable gets cut or damaged.
Route the cable properly to the location where readings have to be taken, taking care that it
is suitably protected. Gage and lead wires must be protected from mechanical damage and
from water.
3.2.11 Connect the model EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator to the strain gage and take the initial
frequency and temperature reading. The initial frequency reading is very important because all
future readings are referred to this initial reading to determine any change in stress. The initial
frequency, along with the gage factor (around 4.051 µstrain/digit), constitutes the calibration
constants required to be fed into the EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator for any Encardio-rite model
EDS-20V-AW weldable strain gage. For actual value of gage factor, refer to Test Certificate along
with your consignment.
Page | 12
NOTE: The initial frequency reading is very important because all future readings are referred to it to
determine any change in stress. Consequently, a minimum of two readings should be taken
after installation and these should be repeatable. In case the readings are not repeatable
within a certain tolerance, the installation, strain gage or the vibrating wire indicator may be
defective. The cause must be evaluated and if there is a problem, it should be rectified. It is a
good practice to take readings regularly during the first few days to ensure that the data is
stable and a correct initial reading has been fed into the vibrating wire indicator as a
calibration constant.
3.2.12 Feed the calibration constants in the model EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator and store the initial
frequency and temperature readings. Pressing the ‘UNITS’ key on the vibrating wire indicator will
now display ‘0.0 ue’ (micro strain). Any subsequent reading at any other time by pressing the
‘UNITS’ will show an increase or decrease from this reading. For example, in case tension
increases, the vibrating wire indicator may show a reading of ‘1243.0 ue’ or if the structure is
subjected to compression, a typical reading may be ‘-437.2 ue’.
NOTE: It is preferable to install the strain gage on the steel member in the unloaded condition, i.e.,
prior to its installation. The initial readings will then correspond to zero load. Otherwise the
initial reading will correspond to some unknown load level and subsequent readings will be in
comparison to this initial reading taken as zero. For further details, refer to § 4.2.
3.3 Measurement of strain on a concrete surface
Surface strains on concrete can be measured with the EDS-20V-AW vibrating wire strain gage by
attaching the strain gage to the concrete surface by any of the following two methods:
3.3.1 Position the two model EDS-21 groutable reinforced bar annular mounting blocks on the dummy
strain gage according to the procedure described in § 3.2.1. These mounting blocks are different
from those used for welding on steel structures and are illustrated in figure 3.5.
3.3.2 Drill two 16 mm φ holes 65 mm deep at a center distance of 149 mm on the concrete surface
using a template for this purpose.

154
Concrete
Stud, M8x60 long
Grout or epoxy
Ø10
164
Figure 3.5 - mounting on concrete surface
Page | 13
3.3.3 Grout the reinforced bar annular mounting blocks and dummy strain gage assembly into the
drilled holes in the concrete using either a fast setting cement or a high strength epoxy.
3.3.4 With proper care it may be possible to mount the standard annular mounting blocks to the
concrete surface with a room temperature curing epoxy. If this procedure is followed, the
concrete surface should be carefully sanded and cleaned and the plating should be removed
from the underside of the mounting blocks.
3.3.5 After the annular mounting brackets have properly set, slacken the grub screws to remove the
dummy strain gage.
3.3.6 Use a wire brush to clean away any concrete or epoxy deposited on the mounting brackets.
3.3.7 Generally follow instructions 3.2.5 to 3.2.12.
3.4 Care of cable
3.4.1 Protect the cable from accidental damage by heavy equipment or flying rocks and debris. Use
any practical method to protect the cable. The cable can be protected by routing it through a
flexible conduit. The cable may be intentionally left slack inside the conduit to accommodate local
deformation. Conduits should not be used where flow of water along the instrument leads must
be prevented. In case conduits are not used and the cable is subjected to tensile or compressive
strain, great care should be taken to prevent conductors from breaking or protruding out of the
insulation. Generally, cables should be routed through zones of least differential strain.
3.4.2 Keep the ends of the lead wires clean and dry. In case several strain gages are installed at the
same location, they may be terminated in an IP-67 terminal box.
3.4.3 Cables may be spliced to lengthen them, without affecting gage readings. The cable joint should
be made watertight by using an epoxy based splicing kit. Cable jointing compound R-pack 3M
Scotch Cast 450 resin and hardener MSH 283 is normally used in India. Any suitable two-
component cable-jointing compound available in your Country can be used in place of this
compound.
CAUTION: In case extra cable is required, it should always be removed from a spool by rotating the
spool. This will reduce chances of nicking, bending or twisting of the cable.
3.4.4 Cable should be marked with permanent markers by the use of stainless steel or plastic tags
stamped with the appropriate strain gage number. The tags should be such that they do not
the strip on the cable and covering it with a transparent plastic cello tape. Permanent identification
is necessary to prevent errors in making proper connections and to insure correct splicing if cable
is cut or, broken.
wires. However, these protection schemes will not protect the sensor against direct or near direct lightning
strikes. Lightning protection is generally not required if the connecting wire is very short, say only a few
meters in length, or both the sensor and the vibrating wire indicator is used inside a shielded structure,
e.g. a building.
Page | 14
The EDS-20V-AW vibrating wire strain gage is not available with any integral lightning protection
 Surge arrestors like Gas Discharge Tubes (GDT) or TransZorbs (registered trademark of General
Semiconductor Industries) may be fixed to the gage cable as near to the gage as possible and epoxy
potted in place. The ground conductor would have to be connected to an earthing stake or the steel
structure itself.
 If the strain gage is mounted close to a junction box or a multiplexer, the surge arrestor component
boxes and multiplexers with lightning protection installed as an option (specify while ordering).
 Lightning arrestor boards and enclosures are available from Encardio-rite, which can be installed at
or alternate lightning protection schemes.
After installation, the strain gage is usually inaccessible. Maintenance and troubleshooting of the model
EDS-20V-AW vibrating wire strain gage is consequently limited to periodic checks of cable connections
and maintenance of terminals. In case of easy accessibility, either the strain gage or the sensor or both
can be replaced, if required.
3.6.1 Symptom: Strain gage reading unstable
be > 500 m Ohm.
 Check if the vibrating wire indicator works with another strain gage? If not, the vibrating wire indicator
may have a low battery or be malfunctioning. Consult the manual of the vibrating wire indicator for
 Use another vibrating wire indicator to take the reading.
generators, transformers, arc welders and antennas. If so, the problem could be reduced by shielding
 The reading may be outside the specified range (either compressive or tensile) of the strain gage?
The gage may have become too slack or too tight. Inspection of data collected might indicate this
possibility. In such a case, if the gage is accessible, loosen the two grub screws in the mounting
blocks. The internal spring in the strain gage will restore the reading. The gage can now be set to a
new datum and the grub screws re-tightened. If the gage still does not respond, the sensor or the
strain gage or both may be replaced.
3.6.2 Symptom: Strain gage fails to give a reading
an Ohmmeter. It should be within 130 - 150 Ohm.
 Use another vibrating wire indicator to take the reading. The reading may be outside the specified
range (either compressive or tensile) of the strain gage? The gage may have become too slack or too
tight. Inspection of data collected might indicate this possibility. In such a case, if the gage is
accessible, loosen the two grub screws in the mounting blocks. The internal spring in the strain gage
will restore the reading. The gage can now be set to a new datum and the grub screws re-tightened. If
the gage still does not respond, the sensor or the strain gage or both may be replaced.
Page | 15
By selecting the channel number and pressing the ‘UNITS’ key, the EDI-54V readout when connected to
an EDS-21V-A strain gage, will display the change in strain directly in µ strain. Thus, the change in strain
between the initial state (µ0) and any subsequent state (µ1) can be directly read on the EDI-54V vibrating
wire indicator. Compressive strain is indicated by a ‘-‘ sign and tensile strain by a ‘+’ sign.
µ∈apparent = (µ1-µ0)

σ = E
ε
Strain data is rarely of interest. Whereas strain gages measure strain or deformation of the structure, the
designer is more interested in the structural load or stress. This requires a conversion from the measured
strain to computed stress. In case of steel, if modulus of elasticity is known, deformation is in elastic limits
and temperature is recorded, conversion from strain to stress is straightforward. In case of concrete, it is
not so straightforward and the same accuracy should not be expected as is in the case of steel structures.
In case of concrete, it is difficult to precisely determine the modulus of elasticity as it depends upon
several factors like composition, stress on concrete and furthermore it varies with time.
Strain changes with time are computed from strain gage readings taken at different intervals, and by
best taken when the structural member is under no load, i.e., the gages should be mounted while the
member is perhaps evenly supported on a flat surface in a steel storage yard or warehouse. However, if
the strain gage readings are to be used in determining the change in stress or load imposed on the
structural member, initial reading should be taken a fter erection of the member.
To measure actual stress, it is not always possible to take the frequency reading at zero stress and often
strain gages are installed on members which are under some existing load so that subsequent strain
changes always take off from some unknown datum. Sometimes it is possible, especially where
temporary supports are being monitored, to take the initial frequency at zero stress in the structural
member after the structure has been dismantled.
If a no load reading has been taken and the structure is eventually dismantled, it is advisable to take the
frequency reading at zero load once again. This frequency reading should agree with the initial no load
reading. Any lack of agreement would be an indication of gage zero drift although the possibility of some
permanent plastic deformation of the member should not be overlooked; particularly where measured
strain is high enough to approach the yield point.
4.3 Positioning of weldable strain gages
The location at which strain gages are to be installed is determined by the purpose of measurement,
access available and the protection required during and after installation. If stress is required to be
measured at a particular point, the gage can simply be located at that point. It is however not so simple in
most measurements. In most applications to get the true picture on stress or the loading pattern, strain
has to be monitored at a number of points.
Page | 16
Measurement of strain at one point on the surface would be sufficient if no bending was occurring in the
member; for example, near the center of a long thin member subjected to tensile load. In most
applications, bending moments are the rule rather than exception, and bending will take place about a
neutral axis.
To take care of bending effects and uneven stress, more than one strain gage is required to be mounted
at each cross section of the structural member. The number of gages is determined by the nature of
application and the accuracy of measurement required. Some suggestions are given below:
4.3.1 Pressure shaft
The steel liner is subjected to high stress at the lower end of the pressure
shaft, the water head being high. For measurement of circumferential
stress, three or four strain gages are mounted along and parallel to the
circumference of the pressure shaft. For measurement of longitudinal
stress, three or four strain gages may be mounted in the longitudinal
direction as well, but this is generally restricted to places where strength of
welded joints is to be monitored or checked. Figure 4.1 shows four strain
gages mounted on the circumference at 90o to each other and four in the
longitudinal direction at 90o to each other. The asymmetrical expansion of
the steel liner when the pressure shaft is in operation, is easily determined
by monitoring the strain from the four strain gages mounted along the Figure 4.1
circumference.
For determining the stress at any location on the pressure shaft, the strain value at that point is multiplied
by the modulus of elasticity (2x106 kg/cm2 ). The stress value so obtained should generally be lower than
the yield stress of the pressure shaft material.
For further elaboration see Encardio-rite application note AN 9604.
4.3.2 Steel pile or strut
As a loaded pile moves downward in the soil in response to load, skin

friction (shearing stress) along the soil pile interface, resists its sliding down.
The remaining support to the pile is provided by the base or tip of the pile
resting against the foundation. To determine the magnitude of tip load and
skin friction, strain gages are mounted at the tip and at various levels on the
steel pile. (For concrete piles, Encardio-rite recommends the model EDS-
11V strain gage for skin friction and model EPS-30V-I earth pressure cells
for tip load).
Figure 4.2
For steel piles, strain gages provide the basic instrumentation scheme.
Weldable vibrating wire strain gages are installed on pipe piles or H-piles.
Figure 4.2 shows three strain gages mounted axially on the outside of the
pipe pile at 120° to each other. On a circular pipe strut three gages would
suffice (four would be preferable). In case the diameter of the pipe pile is
large and/or it is a closed end pipe pile, the strain gages may be mounted
on the inside for greater safety from damage.
Figures 4.3 shows four strain gages per section mounted on the web of a
driven H-pile. It is recommended that two strain gages each be mounted
back-to-back on the web at two locations as close to the flanges as
possible. Gages at these locations can usually be protected adequately, Figure 4.3
using welded channels, angles, or corner strips.
Page | 17
Damage to gages and cable during driving must be prevented by taking all precautions. In case there is
likelihood of damage at the tip of the pile, gages should be welded above the area of potentially damage.
Gages welded to the pile should be protected with robust cover plates tapered down toward the pile tip.
Cables should be protected by steel angles or channels. An effective method involves welding channels
to the pile, with 150 mm long windows for pulling through the cable and clamping it at suitable intervals.
The cables should not be dangling and should be supported during driving. The windows are finally
closed by welding small lengths of channel to the pile. The cables must be protected beyond the point of
exit from the channel with flexible metallic conduit. During driving, the cables and metallic conduit may be
passed around a curved guide or large diameter pulley mounted near the pile head, on the pile or
hammer. A rope may be tied to the ends of the cables and held at the ground surface to prevent damage
as the pile is driven.
For sheet pile in tension two strain gages back to back on the opposite
sides of the sheet midway between the clutches is recommended.
Refer to figure 4.4. Example is sheet pile used for a cofferdam. Figure 4.4
For sheet pile walls subjected to bending, a pair of strain

gages on each of the outer portions of the Z-shape is
recommended. The strain gages are mounted along the length
Figure 4.5
of the sheet pile. Refer to figure 4.5
Page | 18
4.3.3 Wye section
Wye section may be instrumented for initial

testing, especially at the welded joints or for long
term monitoring. Stress generated due to any
imbalance in flow through the two arms can also
be studied (e.g. in case when the cross sectional
areas of the two arms are different). Relative
sharing of load between the steel liner, the
concrete layer and the surrounding rock can also
be determined and monitored.
Figure 4.6 gives locations of strain gages mounted

on the Wye section at Maneri Bhali stage ll. The
Wye section was tested for a water head of 260 m.
The data obtained gave insight to the designers for
future designs of Wye sections.
To measure stress at various points on a Wye

section, strain gages are fixed to the surface of the
Wye section with the help of mounting brackets,
which are arc welded to the body of the Wye
section.
The ends of the Wye section are sealed and water

pressure applied through one small opening left for
the purpose. It is recommended that this sealing
be done before the mounting of the strain gages
such that any damage to them because of high
current due to welding is avoided. The points of
maximum strain and consequently maximum
stress are thus determined. In case the stress at Figure 4.6
all the points is less than yield stress, the Wye
section is good and can be safely used.
If long term monitoring of the stress in the Wye section is required, the strain gages should be left at the
points where the stress is high. They should also be left at all the critical points. The balance strain gages
should be removed and can be used for other applications. In case the Wye section is concrete lined,
these can be mounted in the concrete lining or the concrete rock interface. In case, they are mounted in
the concrete lining or the concrete rock interface, it is good practice to mount them at the same section at
which the strain gages are retained on the Wye piece. Sharing of load between the steel liner, the
concrete layer and the surrounding rock can thus be studied and long term monitoring of stress can be
done, if required. In case strain gages are to be embedded in concrete, it is recommended to use the
electron beam welded Encardio-rite model EDS-11V strain gages instead of the model EDS-20V-AW strain
gages.
For further elaboration see Encardio-rite application note AN 9604 in which instrumentation of two Wye
sections in the same steel structure, feeding into three hydro turbines at Maneri Bhali stage-lI in Uttar
Pradesh, India is discussed.
Page | 19
4.3.4 I-beams
For an I-beam subjected to axial load, two strain gages may be mounted
back to back at the center of the web as illustrated in figure 4.7. The axial
stress may be determined as follows:
ε1 + ε2
Error! Bookmark not defined. σaxial = xE
2
4.3.4.1 Strain gages mounted on web
For an I-beam subjected to axial as well as bending load, four strain gages
may be mounted back to back on the web as illustrated in figure 4.8. The
Figure 4.7
axial stress may be determined as follows:
ε1 + ε2 + ε3 + ε4
4
For calculating the stress due to bending consider the difference
between pairs of gages mounted on opposite sides of the neutral axis.
The maximum stress due to bending about the xx axis is determined as
follows:
Error! Bookmark not defined. Error! Bookmark not defined.

( ε1 + ε2 ) − ( ε3 + ε4 ) a
σxx = x xE
4 c
Similarly, the maximum stress due to bending about the yy axis is
determined as follows:
Figure 4.8
( ε1 + ε3 ) − ( ε2 + ε4 ) b
σyy = x xE
4 d
The maximum stress can then be determined as follows:
Error! Bookmark not defined. σmaximum = σaxial + σxx + σyy
The total stress at any point in the cross section is the algebraic sum of the axial stress and the bending
stresses. In all the above calculations strict regard must be paid to the sign of the strain. Please note that
the stress in the outer corners of the flange will be much higher than the stress on the web and that failure
of the section can be initiated at these points.
Page | 20
4.3.5 Strain gages mounted on flanges
From the above, one leads to the conclusion that the greatest accuracy would be obtained in case the
strain gages were mounted on the outer corners of the flanges as shown in figure 4.9. Also, the accuracy
of estimating the strain in the flanges is often limited by the relative flimsiness of the web. It is therefore
usually better to install four gages on the inner faces of the flanges as far from the web as possible,
providing a good compromise between a protected location and the zone of maximum stress.
One of the problems of locating the strain gages at the outer

corners lies in the difficulty of protecting them and the cable from
accidental damage. A graver problem arises due to each of the four
gages being subjected to localized bending stress, which affects
only that gage and not the others. It is desirable and also necessary
to locate the strain gages in pairs, one on either side of the neutral
axis of the I-beam to which the gages are attached. From this point
of view, the configuration in figure 4.7 is preferable.
The user should weigh the pros and cons and take his own decision
on what is best for his application.
The same set of equations are applicable for both the configurations Figure 4.9
illustrated in figure 4.8 and 4.9.
Page | 21
Thermistor type: Dale 1C3001-B3

T = 1/[A + B(LnR) + C(LnR)3] - 273.2 oC
A = 1.4051 x 10-3
B = 2.369 x 10-4
C = 1.019 x 10-7
201.1k - 50 16.60K - 10 2417 +30
187.3K - 49 15.72K -9 2317 31
174.5K - 48 14.90K -8 2221 32
162.7K - 47 14.12K -7 2130 33
151.7K - 46 13.39k -6 2042 34
141.6K - 45 12.70K -5 1959 35
132.2K - 44 12.05K -4 1880 36
123.5K - 43 11.44K -3 1805 37
115.4K - 12 10.86K -2 1733 38
107.9K - 41 10.31K -1 1664 39
101.0K - 40 9796 0 1598 40
94.48K - 39 9310 +1 1535 41
88.46K - 38 8851 2 1475 42
82.87K - 37 8417 3 1418 43
77.66K - 36 8006 4 1363 44
72.81K - 35 7618 5 1310 45
68.30K - 34 7252 6 1260 46
64.09K - 33 6905 7 1212 47
60.17K - 32 6576 8 1167 48
56.51K - 31 6265 9 1123 49
53.10K - 30 5971 10 1081 50
49.91K - 29 5692 11 1040 51
46.94K - 28 5427 12 1002 52
44.16K - 27 5177 13 965.0 53
41.56k - 26 4939 14 929.6 54
39.13K - 25 4714 15 895.8 55
36.86K - 24 4500 16 863.3 56
34.73K - 23 4297 17 832.2 57
32.74K - 22 4105 18 802.3 58
30.87K - 21 3922 19 773.7 59
29.13K - 20 3748 20 746.3 60
27.49K - 19 3583 21 719.9 61
25.95K - 18 3426 22 694.7 62
24.51K - 17 3277 23 670.4 63
23.16K - 16 3135 24 647.1 64
21.89K - 15 3000 25 624.7 65
20.70K - 14 2872 26 603.3 66
19.58K - 13 2750 27 582.6 67
18.52K - 12 2633 28 562.8 68
17.53K - 11 2523 29 525.4 70
Page | 22
The thermal coefficient of linear expansion of structural steel is around 12 ppm per oC and concrete
varies from 10-13 ppm per oC. The thermal coefficient of linear expansion of the vibrating wire is around
11.0 ppm per oC at 25oC. These values are very close. For most applications, when the gage is attached
to steel, no temperature correction to the measured strain is really required. This is however only true if
the magnetic wire and the underlying steel structure are at the same temperature. If sunlight falls directly
on the gage, this would elevate the temperature of the magnetic wire above the surrounding steel and
cause the strain gage to show a lower value of the stress as compared to the actual. The strain gage
should therefore be shielded from direct sunlight or any radiation.
For the same reason, handling of the strain gage prior to taking a reading should be avoided. Moreover
as a rule, take the reading quickly after connecting it to the vibrating wire indicator or allow sufficient time
for the gage temperature to stabilize before taking the reading. It is also recommended to take the
temperature reading every time the strain reading is made so that any real strain effects caused by
temperature changes can be assessed later on. Each Encardio-rite strain gage has a thermistor
encapsulated in the sensor and the Encardio-rite model EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator gives the
temperature reading directly in oC if connected to the green and white leads from the sensor.
Page | 23
6 WARRANTY
Products described in Encardio-rite’s catalogs or manuals are subject to modification and improvement
as dictated by subsequent developments. Encardio-rite reserves the right to modify, change or improve
products, to discontinue them or to add new ones without notice.
Page | 24
USERS’ MANUAL

MODEL EDS-20V-E EMBEDMENT TYPE
Doc. # WI 6002.65 R08 | Dec 2018

Users’ Manual Vibrating wire strain gage – embedment type
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Features 1
1.2 Applications 1

2.3 Cable 4
2.5 Tools & accessories 5
3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7

3.3 Installation and positioning of embedment type strain gages 8
3.3.1 Piles and drilled shafts 8
3.3.2 Segmental lining for machine bored tunnels 9
3.3.3 Pre-cast model EDS-20V-E strain gage in a mould before embedment 9
3.3.4 Embedment procedure for single strain gage in mass concrete 10
4.3 Strain gages for specific applications 15

6 WARRANTY 18
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite model EDS-20V-E strain gage is intended primarily for strain measurement. It is mainly used
in pile foundations, segment lining of tunnels, rafts and concrete structures etc.
vibrating wire indicator or data acquisition system on magnitude and distribution of compressive and tensile
strain in concrete structures and other areas of application where strain measurement is required. As an
Encardio-rite convention, the ‘+’ sign indicates tensile strain and the ‘-‘ sign indicates compressive strain.
Main purpose of the strain gage is to indirectly quantitatively determine stress and its variation with time. Change
in stress is obtained by multiplying the measured strain by modulus of elasticity. It can measure strains up
to 3000 µ strain.
The gage has a very high compliance requiring less than 3 kg of force to tension the wire by 3000 µ strain.
All gages have the vibrating wire pre-tensioned ready for use. Encardio-rite has two different models also,
model EDS-11V and model EDS-21V-E (when high range strain is required).
1.1 Features
Encardio-rite model EDS-20V-E is the electrical strain gage of choice as its frequency output is immune to
external noise, it is able to tolerate wet wiring common in geotechnical applications and is capable of
transmission of signals to long distances. It has the following features:
 Can be used for embedment in soil or concrete.
semiconductor) types lies mainly in the use of a frequency, rather than a voltage as the output signal from
the strain gage. Frequency may be transmitted over a long cable length without appreciable degradation
caused by variations in cable resistance, contact resistance, or leakage to ground.
The thermal coefficient of expansion of the embedment strain gage is near about that of concrete.
Corrections for temperature variation are therefore seldom required (in field use). In case correction is
required for any specific application, it is best to embed a strain gage from the same batch in a
representative concrete block and conduct actual temperature tests under controlled conditions. The
difference in thermal coefficient of expansion so obtained can then be applied as a temperature correction.
1.2 Applications
measure plane and three dimensional stress.
moisture content etc., stress measurement by the strain gage may need to be corrected by mounting an
additional strain gage near the existing ones in no stress conditions.
This user’s manual covers description of the vibrating wire strain gage & its accessories, procedure for
embedment of sensor in a concrete structure, method of taking observations and recording data.
NOTE: The strain gage is not suitable for measurement of dynamic strain.
Page | 1


This users’ manual is intended to provide you with sufficient information for making optimum use of vibrating
wire strain gages in your applications.
cannot provide for each and every condition in the field, which may affect the performance of the sensor.
Also, blindly following the instruction manual will not guarantee success. Sometimes, depending upon field
conditions, the installation personnel will have to consciously depart from the written text and use their
For operating Vibrating wire readout unit: See ‘Doc. # WI 6002.112’
For accessories: See § 2.3 ‘Specifications’.
Page | 2

directly affects the tension in the wire, resulting in a corresponding change in its frequency of vibration. The
strain is proportional to the square of the frequency that can be measured and displayed directly in µ strain
by Encardio-rite’s EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator.
f = [σg/ρ]1/2/ 2l Hz

g = 980 cm/sec2
length of the wire in the strain gage is 15 cm, the centre distance between the annular end blocks is 14.9
cm and E = 2.11 x 106 kg/cm2. Consequently the formula can be reduced to:
ε 15 = 4.051 x 10-3 f2 µ strain

µ strain.
precisely follows the deflection of the concrete structure (or the steel section or rock surface) on which the
strain gage is mounted. It is not affected by the material or the coefficient of thermal expansion of the strain
vibrating wire sensors is 11.0 ppm per oC.

A strain gage is used where a load cell cannot be conveniently interposed to measure stress in a structure
for reason of geometry, capacity or economy and where load and stress can be worked out with reasonable
accuracy from knowledge of the relationship between stress and strain (modulus of elasticity). In such a
case, it is very convenient to have a strain gage, which can be embedded in the concrete structure.
stainless steel tube by a set of double "O" rings fixed on each end block. This to a great extent ensures
resistance to corrosive, humid, wet and other hostile environmental conditions. Further protection is
Page | 3
provided by suitably sealing the joints with heat shrinkable tubes. In addition to this, a special water proofing
compound seals the plucking coil in the sensor assembly from any ingress of water. The sensor assembly
in the model EDS-20V-E is consequently supplied integral with the rest of the gage.
The displacement of the end blocks is always proportionally to the variation in strain. Any change in the
strain directly affects the tension of the wire, resulting in a corresponding change in frequency of vibration
of the wire. The change in the frequency of the vibrating wire is accurately measured by a vibrating wire
indicator calibrated to indicate the strain. All vibrating wire sensors manufactured by Encardio-rite use the
same vibrating wire indicator irrespective of the parameter being measured.
Figure 2.1 - dimensional details
For a sectional view of the strain gage refer to figure 2.2
End plug Heat shrinkable tube Distance tube
Figure 2.2 – Sectional View

provide the necessary voltage pulses to pluck the wire and will convert the resulting frequency reading
directly into strain units by means of an internal microprocessor.
2.3 Cable
Four core PVC insulated shielded cable, CS-1303 suitable for upto 60°C standard or CS 0404 suitable for
upto 80°C on request. Colour code is as follows:
Red/Black VW sensor
Sometimes it is easier to terminate cables from several strain gages in a junction box and carry the signals
to the observation station or multiplexer collectively through a multi core cable. Standard junction boxes
are available from Encardio-rite for this purpose. If required, lightning protection can also be provided in
the junction box or even otherwise. Refer to § 3.6.
Page | 4
readout having a large display with a capacitive touch
screen which makes it easy to read the VW sensor.
The EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator can store calibra-
tion coefficients from 10,000 vibrating wire sensors so
that the value of the measured parameter from these
Fig 2.3 – EDI-54V Vibrating wire indicator
sensors can be shown directly in proper engineering
units. For transducers with built-in interchangeable
thermistor, it can also display the temperature of the transducer directly in degree Centigrade.
Refer instruction manual WI-6002.112 of model EDI-54V for entering the transducer calibration coeffi-
cients. The gage factor of the model EDS-20V-E embedment strain gage is given in the batch test certifi-
cate provided with every supply of strain gage. The initial reading IR will be the actual reading in digits
from the strain gage after it is embedded and properly set in concrete.
ing wire indicator. A battery charger is provided to charge the internal battery which operates from 90 V to
270 V AC 50 or 60 Hz V AC mains. A fully discharged battery takes around 6 hours to get fully charged.
2.5 Tools & accessories

The following tools and accessories are recommended for proper installation of the strain gage:
 Temperature controlled soldering iron 25 Watt
 63/37 rosin core solder wire
 Cable cutter, Wire stripper
 Surgical blade with holder
 Pliers 160 mm
 Digital multimeter
 Vibrating wire indicator (EDI-54V)
Page | 5
Calibration certificate
Type : Embedment type water proof strain gages
Model : EDS-20V-E
Range : ± 1500 µ-strain
Mfg. Sl. No. : From xxxxxx to xxxxxx
Batch Calibration Factor
Sensor supplied against the above order belong to the batch no. mentioned below:-
Batch No. : U 07 Calibration date : 02.07.2018

Temperature : 30°C
Calibration factor gage #1 3.960 microstrain /digit
Calibration factor gage # 2 3.974 microstrain /digit
Average calibration factor 3.967 microstrain /digit

(1 digit = Hz2/1000)
The above named instrument has been calibrated by comparison with slip gages sl. no. 0001343
(calibration certificate no.16/WL/9134) traceable to National Physical Laboratory, New Delhi.
Checked By Tested By
Page | 6
3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

warehouse. All preliminary work on the sensor should be done at a covered location remote from the dirt
and adverse weather that may exist at the work site.

 Measure the coil resistance by a digital multimeter between red and black leads. It should lie between
130-150 Ω. Determine the resistance at room temperature from thermistor temperature resistance
chart in § 5. This resistance should be equal to that between pins marked green and white. For
example, in case the room temperature is 25oC, this resistance would be 3,000 Ω.
 The resistance between any lead and the protective armour should be > 500 MΩ.
 Connect the sensor to the model EDI-54V portable vibrating wire indicator. Initial offset reading in
frequency should be stable. A frequency of 870 Hz corresponds to a tension equivalent to around
3,000 µstrain in the wire. The nominal reading range of the strain gage is 1,500 to 4,500 µ strain. Strain
gages in lower frequency range are specifically used for tension applications and in higher frequency
range for compression applications.
NOTE: The strain gage’s initial tension is set at the factory prior to the shipping depending on the
client’s requirement. It can be mid-range or suitable for tensile or compressive applications.
However, the full range shall be ±1500 µstrain.
 A simple effective method of checking whether sensor is responding to the changes in strain is as
follows:
• Press two ends of strain gage gently between the fore fingers and verify that the frequency reading
on vibrating wire indicator decreases. Pulling ends gently will increase the frequency reading. Do
not apply excessive tension, as the magnetic wire could break.
 Press the ‘TEMP’ key on the vibrating wire indicator. The display will indicate the room temperature.
CAUTION: The strain gage is a delicate and sensitive instrument. It should be handled with care. Twisting
it or applying too much force on it may result in permanently damaging it. While checking the
strain gage, do not apply too much tension as the wire may break.
3.2 Extension of cable

Very careful and skilled cabling is required in installation of strain gage as sensor/cable joint and a large
part of the cable is permanently embedded and no future access is available for maintenance or corrective
action.
Unless specifically requested, strain gage is supplied with a standard 1 m length of four core shielded
cable. Most users use their own standardized cable and have devised their own methods of cable extension
depending upon their application. Several methods of cable extension are available. One of the methods
is described in Encardio-rite doc. # WI 6002.11S - model ECS–05 cable splicing kit operating manual. After
completing the cable extension, make sure to check the working of the sensor again following the
Page | 7
3.3 Installation and positioning of embedment type strain gages

Strain gage is a very versatile sensor. There is no ‘standard’ method of placement and embedment of strain
gages. Location at which strain gages are to be installed is determined by the purpose of measurement,
access available and protection required during and after installation. If stress is required, to be measured
at a particular point, the gage can simply be located at that point. It is however not so simple in most
measurements. Generally speaking, to get the true picture on stress or the loading pattern, strain has to
be monitored at a number of points.
Measurement of strain at one point would be sufficient if no bending was occurring in the member; for
example, near a centre of long thin member subjected to a tensile load. In most applications, bending
moments are the rule rather than exception, and bending will take place about a neutral axis. To take care
of bending effects and uneven stress, more than one strain gage is required to be mounted at each cross
section of the structural member. The number of gages are determined by the nature of application and
the accuracy of measurement
A few schemes successfully deployed in the field for installation are given below:
3.3.1 Piles and drilled shafts
Piles and drilled shafts normally involve simple cross sections subjected to compression and some
bending. Location of strain gages should be selected carefully, taking into consideration any bending
involved.
For installation, soft iron wires are usually used to attach the strain gage to nearby reinforcing bars.
Normally, the tie wires/cable ties should be aligned perpendicular to the axis of the strain gage such that
any movement of reinforcing bars, during the pouring of the concrete, will not exert a pull on the strain gage
and distort or damage it.
Tie wires/cable ties should normally be tied around the protective tube and not the flanges to prevent any
loading of the flanges due to the tie wires/cable ties getting tensioned.
Figure 3.1 – Installation of embedment strain gage on rebar
Page | 8
3.3.2 Segmental lining for machine bored tunnels

Method of tunnel construction involves:
• Excavation by TBM and simultaneous erection of

segmental concrete lining that provides both support and
a final lining.
• The concrete segments are casted earlier and then
transported to site. Easy way to install the instruments in
segments (during concreting) is illustrated in the three
adjoining pictures.
• Adjoining picture shows mounting of an Encardio-rite

concrete pressure cell and a few Encardio-rite
embedment strain gages in different axis before Figure 3.2 – Strain gage installed with
pressure sensor in concrete segments
concreting. The bottom picture shows the segment being
completed.
Figure 3.3 Concrete segments with strain gages and pressure cells installed inside
3.3.3 Pre-cast model EDS-20V-E strain gage in a mould before embedment

The following pictures shows the method to be followed. The strain gages are casted separately in small
concrete blocks and then later on embedded in the mass concrete.
Figure 3.4 Strain gage casted in small concrete blocks for embedment in mass concrete
Page | 9
3.3.4 Embedment procedure for single strain gage in mass concrete

The mounting of a single strain gage is usually done by embedding it near the top of a lift. The embedment
procedure is described below:
3.3.4.1 At any particular chainage where a single strain gage is to be installed, raise the level of the
concrete structure (example – concrete dam) to around 25 cm below requisite elevation. Mark
the positions on concreted surface where strain gages have to be installed. Raise the level of
concrete by around 50 cm leaving a trench of around 1 m x 1 m at the marked positions.
3.3.4.2 Back-fill trench to the level to provide a bed, in case the strain gage is to be mounted horizontally.
For strain gage to be installed vertically or at an inclination, back fill to the level that the strain
gage would be fully covered.
3.3.4.3 For strain gage to be installed horizontally, lay it in the correct position and direction. For strain
gage to be installed vertically or diagonally, use a battery operated drill machine to make a hole
for the gage in the correct position and direction. Insert the strain gage in to the hole.
3.3.4.4 Check angles, direction and depth. A protractor level is most useful for this application. A plumb
3.3.4.5 Vibrate around a deeply embedded gage or hand puddle around a shallow gage.
3.3.4.6 Continue back filling by hand and shoveling, using the same concrete as the mass concrete used
in the construction and hand puddle. When concrete is poured over the strain gage, take care
not to move the strain gage. Pour the concrete by hand until a 10 cm cushion is built up on the
top of each gage.
3.3.4.7 Finish with light shallow vibrations and protect the area with a light board barrier. Mark with area
with yellow painted metal stakes so that the strain gage installation is not damaged before the
concrete sets in.
3.3.4.8 The procedure for cable laying is separately dealt in § 3.5.
NOTE: For embedment and long term monitoring in a concrete dam, Encardio-rite offers the model
EDS-11V strain gage. This is a very sturdy electron beam welded strain gage. Taking proper
precautions, the model EDS-20V-E can also be used for embedment in a concrete dam. For
information and instructions on how to install EDS-20V-E in a concrete dam, the user is
recommended to go through instruction manual doc. # WI 6002.16 for EDS-11V strain gage.
A special spider shown below in figure 3.5 can be ordered from factory if it is required to mount
a group of EDS-20V-E strain gages in different orientations at any given location in a concrete
dam.
CAUTION: Special precaution and care should be taken if group of EDS-20V-E strain gages are mounted
on spider and used for embedment in a concrete dam. The EDS-20V-E is not as sturdy as
EDS-11V strain gage. Please ensure that the EDS-20V-E’s are not twisted or bent during
assembly on spider or when being covered by concrete. This will result in the strain gages
becoming ineffective.
Page | 10
S no Item qty
1 Spider base 1
2 Spider 1
3 Spider bush 1
4 Spider rod 5
5 Allen head bolt, M8x15 2
7 Strain gage holder 5
8 Washer 10
PLAN
9 Ch. head screw, M3x8 10
(without spider rod)
8
7
4
3
2
5
1
ELEVATION
Figure 3.1 Strain gages installed in different orientations on spider/rosette

3.4.1 While concrete sets, take daily strain gage temperature reading (by pressing TEMP button) and
frequency2/1000 (digits) reading (by pressing FREQ2 button) of EDI-54V read-out logger. Go on
taking these reading till concrete sets properly. Initial reading ‘IR’ to be entered in EDI-54V should
be considered only after concrete sets properly and reading in digits is almost constant. The initial
reading in digits is very important because all future readings are referred to this initial reading to
determine any change in stress. The initial reading in digits along with the gage factor (around
4.051 x 10-3  strain/Hz2), constitute the calibration constants required to be fed into the EDI-54V
vibrating wire indicator as set-up data for any Encardio-rite model EDS-20V-E embedment strain
gage. The exact gage factor varies from batch to batch and is given in the batch test certificate
provided with each supply of strain gages.
3.4.2 Feed the calibration constants. The EDI-54V is programmed to accept this initial reading as 'IR' in
set-up data. The indicator will then prompt to enter the gage factor 'GF'. Enter the gage factor as
specified in the batch test certificate. After set-up ends restart indicator. In engineering units mode
for this channel, pressing the ‘UNITS’ key on the vibrating wire indicator will now display around
‘0.0 ue’ (micro strain). Any subsequent reading at any other time by pressing the ‘UNITS’ key will
show an increase or decrease from this reading and automatically give the microstrains developed
Page | 11
during the period. For example, in case tension increases, vibrating wire indicator may show a
reading of ‘1243.0 ue’ or if the structure is subjected to compression, a typical reading may be ‘-
437.2 ue’.
initial reading to determine any change in stress. Consequently a minimum of two readings
taken daily after installation should be repeatable. It is good practice to take readings regularly
during the first few days to ensure that the data is stable and a correct initial reading is fed
into the vibrating wire indicator as a calibration constant. In case the readings are not
repeatable within a certain tolerance, the installation, strain gage or the vibrating wire indicator
may be defective. The cause must be evaluated and if there is a problem, it should be rectified.
3.5 Care of cable

strain gages require protection from mechanical damage caused by normal construction activity,
vehicular traffic and vandalism. Proper protection methods have to be devised by the user or the
designer.
CAUTION: Strain gages and cables require protection from mechanical damage caused by normal
construction activity, welding, vehicular traffic and vandalism.
3.5.2 Protect cable from accidental damage by heavy equipment or flying rocks and debris. Use any
practical method to protect the cable. The cable can be protected by routing it through a flexible
conduit. The cable may be intentionally left slack inside the conduit to accommodate local
deformation. Conduits should not be used where flow of water along the instrument leads must be
prevented. In case conduits are not used and the cable is subjected to tensile or compressive
insulation. As a general rule, cables should be routed through zones of least differential strain.
same location, they may be terminated in an IP-67 terminal box and a multi-core cable used for
Scotch Cast 450 resin and hardener MSH 283 is normally used in India. Any suitable two
component cable jointing compound available in your Country can be used in place of this
compound.
is necessary to prevent errors in making proper connections and to ensure correct splicing if cable
is cut or broken.
With the best possible precautions, mistakes may still occur. Tags may get lost due to the cables getting
accidentally damaged. Encardio-rite uses the convention that looking from the observation post towards
the sensor, the cable from the most distant sensor is always at the left hand side. In that order, the cable
Page | 12
track or identification of cable ends. Proper identification and marking of cables should not be
taken casually. Care should be taken to put an identification tag at the point where the cable
comes out of the structure such that cable identity is not lost if the cable gets cut or damaged.
is suitably protected. Lead wires must be protected from mechanical damage and their ends
from water.

assembly. Some measure of lightning protection for the vibrating wire sensor is recommended if the sensor
is mounted in the field or in open areas and connected to the readout instrument through long wires.
However, these protection schemes will not protect the sensor against direct or near direct lightning strikes.
Lightning protection is generally not required if the connecting wire is very short, say only a few meters in
length, or both the sensor and the vibrating wire indicator is used inside a shielded structure, e.g. a building.
The EDS-20V-E vibrating wire strain gage is not available with any integral lightning protection component.
If lightning protection is desired one of the following options may be used:
• Surge arrestors like Gas Discharge Tubes (GDT) or TransZorbs (registered trademark of General
structure itself.
• If the strain gage is mounted close to a junction box or a multiplexer, the surge arrestor component
• Lightning arrestor boards and enclosures are available from Encardio-rite, which can be installed at

EDS-20V-E vibrating wire strain gage is consequently limited to periodic checks of cable connections and
maintenance of terminals. In case of easy accessibility, either the strain gage or the sensor or both can be
replaced, if required.
be > 500 M Ohm.
Page | 13
 Check if there is a source of electrical noise nearby. General sources of electrical noise are motors,
 The reading may be outside the specified range (either compressive or tensile) of the strain gage? The
tight. Inspection of data collected might indicate this possibility.
Page | 14

an EDS-20V-E strain gage, will display the change in strain directly in µ strain. Thus, the change in strain
between the initial state (ε0) and any subsequent state (ε1) can be directly read on the EDI-54V vibrating
wire indicator. Compressive strain is indicated by a ‘-‘ sign and tensile strain by a ‘+’ sign.
µ∈apparent = (ε1− ε0)

σ = E
ε
In case of concrete, it is difficult to precisely determine the modulus of elasticity as it depends upon several
factors like composition, stress on concrete and furthermore it also varies with time.
purpose of the measurement. If actual stress in the structural member is required, the initial reading is best
taken when the structural member is under no load, i.e., the gages should be mounted while the member
is perhaps evenly supported on a flat surface in a steel storage yard or warehouse. However, if the strain
gage readings are to be used in determining the change in stress or load imposed on the structural
member, initial reading should be taken after erection of the member.
changes always take off from some unknown datum. Sometimes it is possible, especially where temporary
supports are being monitored, to take the initial frequency at zero stress in the structural member after the
structure has been dismantled.
4.3 Strain gages for specific applications

Embedment strain gage is normally supplied in the range of ± 1500 microstrains for use in both tension
and compression applications.
If the customer is going to use the embedment strain gage in a predominantly tension application like in
pile pull test, strain gages with a range of more than 1,500 microstrains in tension should be ordered.
If the customer is going to use the embedment strain gage in a predominantly compression application like
in pile loading (compression) test, strain gages with a range of more than 1,500 microstrains in compression
should be ordered.
Page | 15

T = 1/[A + B(LnR) + C(LnR)3] - 273.2 oC
A = 1.4051 x 10-3
B = 2.369 x 10-4
C = 1.019 x 10-7

20 1 .1k - 50 16 . 60 K - 10 24 1 7 + 30
18 7 .3 K - 49 15 . 72 K -9 23 1 7 31
17 4 .5 K - 48 14 . 90 K -8 22 2 1 32
16 2 .7 K - 47 14 . 12 K -7 21 3 0 33
15 1 .7 K - 46 13 . 39k -6 20 4 2 34
14 1 .6 K - 45 12 . 70 K -5 19 5 9 35
13 2 .2 K - 44 12 . 05 K -4 18 8 0 36
12 3 .5 K - 43 11 . 44 K -3 18 0 5 37
11 5 .4 K - 12 10 . 86 K -2 17 3 3 38
10 7 .9 K - 41 10 . 31 K -1 16 6 4 39
10 1 .0 K - 40 97 9 6 0 15 9 8 40
94 . 48 K - 39 93 1 0 +1 15 3 5 41
88 . 46 K - 38 88 5 1 2 14 7 5 42
82 . 87 K - 37 84 1 7 3 14 1 8 43
77 . 66 K - 36 80 0 6 4 13 6 3 44
72 . 81 K - 35 76 1 8 5 13 1 0 45
68 . 30 K - 34 72 5 2 6 12 6 0 46
64 . 09 K - 33 69 0 5 7 12 1 2 47
60 . 17 K - 32 65 7 6 8 11 6 7 48
56 . 51 K - 31 62 6 5 9 11 2 3 49
53 . 10 K - 30 59 7 1 10 10 8 1 50
49 . 91 K - 29 56 9 2 11 10 4 0 51
46 . 94 K - 28 54 2 7 12 10 0 2 52
44 . 16 K - 27 51 7 7 13 96 5 .0 53
41 . 56k - 26 49 3 9 14 92 9 .6 54
39 . 13 K - 25 47 1 4 15 89 5 .8 55
36 . 86 K - 24 45 0 0 16 86 3 .3 56
34 . 73 K - 23 42 9 7 17 83 2 .2 57
32 . 74 K - 22 41 0 5 18 80 2 .3 58
30 . 87 K - 21 39 2 2 19 77 3 .7 59
29 . 13 K - 20 37 4 8 20 74 6 .3 60
27 . 49 K - 19 35 8 3 21 71 9 .9 61
25 . 95 K - 18 34 2 6 22 69 4 .7 62
24 . 51 K - 17 32 7 7 23 67 0 .4 63
23 . 16 K - 16 31 3 5 24 64 7 .1 64
21 . 89 K - 15 30 0 0 25 62 4 .7 65
20 . 70 K - 14 28 7 2 26 60 3 .3 66
19 . 58 K - 13 27 5 0 27 58 2 .6 67
18 . 52 K - 12 26 3 3 28 56 2 .8 68
17 . 53 K - 11 25 2 3 29 52 5 .4 70
Page | 16

The thermal coefficient of expansion of the embedment strain gage is 11.0 ppm/oC and concrete varies
from 10 – 13 ppm/oC. Correction for temperature variation is seldom required in field use. In case correction
is required for any specific application, it is best to embed a strain gage from the same batch in a
difference in thermal coefficient of expansion so obtained can then be applied as a temperature correction
Page | 17
6 WARRANTY
batteries
Page | 18
USERS’ MANUAL
VIBRATING WIRE SPOT WELDABLE

STRAIN GAGE
MODEL EDS-20V-SW
Doc. # WI 6002.36 R06 | Sept 2009

Users’ Manual EDS-20V-SW Vibrating wire spot weldable strain gage
Table of Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Features 1
1.2 Applications 1

2.2.1 Cable 5

3.1 Preparation of the sensor before installation: 10
3.2 Installation of EDS-20V-SW strain gage on steel surface by spot welding 10
3.3 Installation of EDS-20V-SW strain gage on steel surface by epoxy bonding 12
3.4 Installation of EDS-20V-SW strain gage on steel surface by epoxy bonding 13
3.5 Mechanical protection and care of cable 13
3.8 Troubleshooting 16
4.3.2 I-Beam 20
4.3.4 Pot bearing 21

6 WARRANTY 24
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite model EDS-20V-SW strain gage is intended primarily for long-term strain measurement. It is
suitable for surface mounting by spot welding on a steel structures such as a bridge, pile, tunnel lining and
support etc. or by epoxy bonding on a steel structure, concrete or rock surface.
vibrating wire indicator EDI-54V or data acquisition system ESDL-30/EDAS-10, on the magnitude and
distribution of compressive and tensile strain in areas of application where strain measurement is
required. As an Encardio-rite convention, the ‘+’ sign indicates tensile strain and the ‘-‘ sign indicates
compressive strain.
Main purpose of strain gage is to indirectly quantitatively determine stress and its variation with time.
Change in stress is obtained by multiplying the measured strain by the modulus of elasticity.
The gage has a very high compliance requiring less than 3 kg of force to tension the wire by 3000 µstrain.
The EDS-20V-SW has a gage wire length of 50.8 mm and is generally used where there are space
restrictions. As another option, Encardio-Rite model EDS-20V-AW arc weldable strain gage is also
available. This gage is much more robust than the EDS-20V-SW, has a gage wire length of 150 mm and
provides better averaging of the strain value in the structure.
For embedment in soil or concrete, Encardio-rite recommends EDS-11V electron beam welded strain
gage. Alternatively, lower cost EDS-20V-E embedment strain gage may be used for short term
applications.
1.1 Features
 Spot weldable or epoxy bondable

 Waterproof
 Reliable
Advantage of vibrating wire strain gage over more conventional electrical resistance (or semiconductor)
types lies mainly in use of a frequency, rather than a voltage, as output signal from the strain gage.
Frequency may be transmitted over a long cable length without appreciable degradation caused by
variations in cable resistance, contact resistance, or leakage to ground.
The thermal coefficient of expansion of the gage is approximately the same as that of the steel surface to
which it is attached (and very similar to that of concrete). Corrections for temperature are therefore
seldom required. For conditions requiring temperature measurement, a thermistor is permanently
encapsulated inside the sensor (plucking coil assembly).
This users’ manual covers description of the vibrating wire strain gage & its accessories, procedure for
installation of the sensor on a steel structure, method of taking observations and recording data.
1.2 Applications
Model EDS-20V-SW strain gage is suitable for spot welding or adhesive bonding applications in field or
laboratory testing requiring minimal installation time. After minimal surface preparation, spot welding is
easily accomplished with a stored-energy hand-probe spot welder. The gage is useful immediately after
welding and lead wire attachment. Environmental protection is as easily applied to or installed over a
welded gage as an adhesive bonded gage.
Page | 1
Encardio-rite model EDS-20V-SW is the electrical strain gage of choice as its frequency output is almost
immune to external noise; it is able to tolerate wet wiring conditions common in geotechnical applications
and is capable of transmission of signals to long distances. It has applications in measurement of positive
or negative strain on a steel structure, concrete or rock surface including:

 Study of stress distribution in the supporting ribs of under ground cavities and tunnels.
 Testing and stress analysis of pot bearings for bridges.
 Analysis and monitoring of stress in steel piles and struts.
NOTE: EDS-20V-SW is not suitable for measurement of dynamic strain.
attention.
NOTE: Installation personnel must have a background of good installation practices and a
knowledge of fundamentals of geotechnics. Novices may find it very difficult to carry on
installation work. Intricacies involved in installation are such that even if a single essential but
affect performance of the instrument. Also, blindly following the instruction manual will not
For installation of strain gage: See § 3.2 ‘Installation on steel surface by spot welding’.
Page | 2
For installation of strain gage: See § 3.3 ‘Installation on steel surface by epoxy bonding’.
For installation of strain gage: See § 3.4 ‘Installation on concrete surface by epoxy bonding’.
For typical applications: See § 4 ‘General considerations’.
Page | 3
The strain gage works on the principle that if a fixed length stretched magnetic wire is plucked by a coil/
magnet assembly, its frequency of vibration is proportional to the tension in the wire. Any change in strain,
µ strain by Encardio-rite’s EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator or model EDAS-10 data acquisition system.
The wire is plucked by a coil magnet. Proportionate to the tension, the wire resonates at a frequency (f).
The strain (ε) in the 5.08 cm long magnetic wire can be determined as follows:
f = [σg/ρ]1/2/ 2l Hz
where: σ = tension of wire in kg/cm 2
g = 980 cm/sec 2 (acceleration due to gravity)
The relationship between stress, strain and the modulus of elasticity can be expressed as σ/ε = E. As
length of wire in the strain gage is 5.08 cm and E = 2.11 x 106 kg/cm2, the formula can be reduced to
approximately:
ε = 3.896 x 10-4 f2 µ strain [equation 2.1]
The modulus of elasticity of strain gage is very low and the magnetic strain gage wire in it precisely
follows the deflection of the steel section (or the concrete or rock surface) on which the strain gage is
mounted. It is not affected by the material or the coefficient of thermal expansion of the strain gage
element or its body.
NOTE: The coefficient of thermal expansion of the wire used in all Encardio-rite vibrating wire
sensors is 11.0 ppm per oC at 25oC. It is almost the same as that of the steel surface to
which it is attached.
If strain gage is epoxy bonded to concrete and correction for thermal expansion is required,
the coefficient of thermal expansion of concrete must be known. It varies from around 10 to
13 ppm per oC
A strain gage is used where a load cell cannot be conveniently interposed to measure stress in a steel
structure for reason of geometry, capacity or economy and where load and stress can be worked out with
reasonable accuracy from knowledge of the relationship between stress and strain (modulus of elasticity).
In such a case, it is very convenient to have a strain gage that can be welded to the steel structure. The
strain gage option also costs less.
Page | 4
The Encardio-rite vibrating wire strain gage basically consists of a high tensile strength wire made of a
magnetic material stretched between two stainless steel cylindrical end pieces. The gage length is 62 mm
and the wire is sealed in a stainless steel tube by a set of double "O" rings fixed on each end piece. This
to a great extent ensures resistance to corrosive, humid, wet and other hostile environmental conditions.
The gage is pre tensioned by a small compression spring. Initial tension can be set during manufacture,
allowing for maximum range in tension or compression as required. A stainless steel foil tab fixed to each
end piece enables the gage to be spot-welded or fixed in place by epoxy.
The coil/magnet assembly (sensor) is encapsulated in a moulded protective cover. The sensor is
permanently fixed to the structure. On reinforced or tieback bars, the sensor is held in place by cable ties.
On flat surfaces it is secured in position by a spot-weldable strap. The gage is designed for flat surfaces.
Twisting it or applying any force on it will result in permanent damage to the strain gage. Also
installing it on an uneven surface will damage it. Ensure that surface on which strain gage is
installed is flat.
It is recommended that a few extra strain gages be always ordered to take care of any
possibility of getting damaged in transit or during installation. The sensor coil assembly is
sturdy and hardly gets damaged during installation.
Figure 2.1 – Encardio-rite model EDS-20V-SW
Displacement of end pieces is always proportional to the variation in strain. Any change in strain directly
indicate the strain. Encardio-rite manufactured vibrating wire sensors uses the Encardio-rite model EDI-
54V vibrating wire indicator irrespective of the parameter being measured.
2.2.1 Cable
Four core PVC jacketed shielded cable, CS-1303 suitable for upto 60oC standard. Colour code is as
follows:
Red/Black VW sensor
Page | 5
It is also possible to extend cable at site by using proper crimp terminals and epoxy encapsulating the
joint.
The EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator can store cali-

bration coefficients from 10,000 vibrating wire sen- Fig 2.3 – Vibrating wire indicator
sors so that the value of the measured parameter
from these sensors can be shown directly in proper engineering units. For transducers with built-in inter-
changeable thermistor, it can also display the temperature of the transducer directly in degree Centigrade.
coefficients. The gage factor of the model EDS-20V-SW spot weldable strain gage is given in the batch
test certificate provided with every supply of strain gage. The initial reading IR will be the actual reading in
digits from the strain gage after it is installed at a particular location and properly stable.

vibrating wire indicator. A battery charger is provided to charge the internal battery, which operates, from
For operating complete operating procedure please refer ‘Doc. # WI 6002.112’
Page | 6
Page | 7
Page | 8
2.5.1 Temperature controlled soldering iron 25 Watt
2.5.2 63/37 rosin core solder wire
2.5.4 Chipping hammer
2.5.5 Wire brush
2.5.6 Silicone carbide emery paper
2.5.8 12 mm round file
2.5.9 Hacksaw with 150 mm blade
2.5.10 Cable cutter
2.5.11 Surgical blade with holder
2.5.13 Pliers 160 mm
2.5.14 Screw driver 20 cm
2.5.15 Drafting tape
2.5.16 Sample metal strips (to set spot welding parameters)
2.5.18 Epoxies such as Loctite 406; Loctite 7075 activator with Loctite324 adhesive
2.5.19 Waterproofing compound such as Dow Corning RTV 3145 or 3140 GE Silicones RTV 1200
2.5.21 Vibrating wire indicator (EDI-54V)
2.5.22 Capacitive discharge spot welder - 50 Watt-second
Page | 9
3.1 Preparation of the sensor before installation:
Check sensor for proper functioning before installation. This should be done in an environmentally clean
atmosphere, conducive to maintaining good quality at location like a steel yard or warehouse.
3.1.1 Check working of sensor as follows:
 Coil resistance measured by digital multimeter between red and black leads should lie between
130-150 Ohm. Determine resistance at room temperature from thermistor temperature resistance
chart in § 5. It should be equal to measured resistance between green and white sensor leads.
For example, for room temperature of 25oC, this resistance would be 3,000 Ohm.
 Place the strain gage on a flat surface. Position the sensor coil housing on the strain gage.
 Connect sensor to model EDI-54V portable vibrating wire indicator. The initial offset reading in
frequency should be stable.
 Press ‘TEMP’ key on vibrating wire indicator. The display will indicate the room temperature.
 Remove sensor coil housing from strain gage.
3.1.2 Check epoxy, adhesive and adhesive tape for expiry date (if any).
CAUTION: The strain gage is a delicate and sensitive instrument. Handle it with care. Twisting it or
applying any force on it will result in permanent damage to the strain gage. Also installing it
on an uneven surface will damage it. Ensure that surface on which strain gage is installed is
flat.
It is recommended that a few extra strain gages be always ordered to take care of any
possibility of getting damaged in transit or during installation. The sensor coil assembly is
sturdy and hardly gets damaged during installation.
3.2 Installation of EDS-20V-SW strain gage on steel surface by spot welding
NOTE: Strain changes indicated by the strain gage mounted on a structure are relative to the initial
strain level existing in it at the time of fixing the strain gage. The strain gage has no way of
determining the initial strain existing in the structure. For this reason it is recommended that
the strain gages should be mounted on the sections in unstressed condition.
Wherever possible, gages should be installed atleast 24 hours before erection of the
structural member at site. This allows time for stabilization of strain gage before taking the
initial reading.
3.2.1 Although surface preparation for spot welding is less critical than for adhesive bonding, the
surface must be flat; free of grease, rust, scale, oxides and surface irregularities for efficient
welding.
 Degrease specimen with an appropriate solvent.

 Using a wire brush clean the flat steel surface on which the strain gage is to be mounted of all
scale, rust, dirt and oil.
 Smoothen flat surface by light grinding, abrasion with silicon-carbide paper or filing.
 Thoroughly wash with an appropriate solvent to remove all residues.
Page | 10
NOTE: Encardio-rite spot weldable gage EDS-20V-SW is suitable for installation on a flat surface
such as a strut, plate or a rectangular section. In case it is to be installed on a round bar,
ensure that the section on which it is bonded is made flat by Surface Grinding. A hand
grinder will hardly be able to give a flat surface on a round bar suitable for mounting the
EDS-20V-SW gage. Please also note the sensor coil of the gage is 87 mm L x 22 mm W x
18 mm H. For proper installation, the flat surface should therefore exceed 87 mm x 22 mm.
WARNING! Safety goggles should always be worn during all installation processes. Serious and
permanent eye injury could otherwise occur. In case of accident, secure immediate medical
attention.
NOTE: Best results are obtained with a 20 Watt-second (minimum) capacitive-discharge spot
welder, with a repetition capability of at least 15 welds per minute. It is recommended that
the welder employs a spring-type ground clamp to ensure a low-resistance connection
between the welder "common" terminal and specimen. Use a welding electrode with a
spherical tip approximately 0.8 mm in diameter. If tip sticks to foil tab, use a 400 grit sand
paper to clean and round off the tip. This may any way be done periodically.
NOTE: Sample metal strip is supplied with each gage package for test welding and determining
proper weld-energy setting and electrode force. A setting of approximately 10 watt-seconds,
with firm electrode force, will generally produce satisfactory welds. After practice weld, pull
metal strip from specimen surface. With satisfactory weld, a small slug of metal will break
away from either metal strip or specimen at the weld. In case weld-energy is less, metal strip
will pull off without any holes torn in it. In case weld energy is too much, metal strip will
discolour or get burnt.
Insufficient force applied to gun or dirt between gage and specimen may result in sparking. If
weld area unduly deforms, this may be due to higher weld energy or excessive force on gun.
3.2.2 Align gage on specimen surface with help of two short pieces of drafting tape across lower
portion of foil tabs of the gage assembly as shown in figure 3.1.
Figure 3.1
3.2.3 Tack foil tab on spring side in place with a few spot welds on each side of the gage. Remove
drafting tape on the spring side by peeling it back directly over itself, being particularly careful not
to distort the foil tab during tape removal. Complete spot welding the foil tab on the spring side
spacing the welds at approximately 1.0 mm center distances.
3.2.4 Place rectangular sensor coil on the strain gage and take a frequency reading. By gently pulling
or pushing the free end of the strain gage and retaping the foil tab, it may be possible to readjust
to some extent the initial tension in the strain gage. However, be very careful when this is done
as you may permanently distort and damage the strain gage in the process.
3.2.5 Tack the foil tab on the other side as per procedure described in 3.2.3. Tap the end pieces gently.
Page | 11
NOTE: It is good practice to tap the end pieces gently. This helps in improving the initial stability of
the gage as it re-adjusts its position over the “O” ring seals between the end pieces and the
protective stainless steel tubing.
3.2.6 Apply several drops of a low viscosity cyanoacrylate adhesive at the edge of the spot welded foil
tabs. The adhesive will wick into the small gap between the tab and the substrate. Loctite 406
with a viscosity of 20 cps is a suitable cyanoacrylate adhesive for this purpose.
NOTE: After gage is installed, it should be protected from corrosion. Even though gage is made of
stainless steel, corrosion can occur at points where it is spot welded to substrate. The
substrate may corrode. Use of Loctite 406 as detailed above is very suitable for this purpose.
Loctite 406 also improves the bond between the foil tab and the sub-substrate.
3.2.7 Apply a layer of waterproofing compound over the foil tabs and around them to further protect
gage from corrosion. Be particularly careful at the point where the foil tab is under the stainless
steel tube. Any of the following water proofing compounds may be used:
o Dow Corning RTV 3145 or RTV 3140

o GE Silicones RTV 1200
3.2.8 Paste rectangular sensor coil on the substrate over a coat of the water proofing compound. Take
care that the water proofing compound does not flow over to the area which joints the stainless
steel tube to the end piece. If this happens, it may restrict movement of the strain gage magnetic
wire inside the gage by preventing the stainless steel tube from freely sliding over the ‘O’ ring.
3.2.9 Use spot welder to weld the two clamps over the sensor coil housing, securing the housing to the
substrate. While placing the clamps over the sensor coil housing ensure that the clamps are
positioned between the pair of embossed locating points on the housing. This ensures that the
sensor coil housing cannot accidentally slip out of the clamps.
3.2.10 After fixing clamps apply water proofing compound around rectangular sensor housing on
substrate.
3.3 Installation of EDS-20V-SW strain gage on steel surface by epoxy bonding
Please carefully go through instructions given in §3.2 to augument instructions given below.
3.3.1 Smoothen and clean flat surface where strain gages are to be fixed by light grinding, wire brush-
ing and/or sanding. Degrease with a degreasing solvent.
3.3.2 Mark location where strain gages are to be fixed and direction of strain measurement with a
marker pen. The identification code giving location and tag number should be clearly written down
with a marker pen on the structure near the position where strain gages are to be fixed.
3.3.3 Apply Loctite 7075 activator to the steel surface with a brush where the first strain gage is to be
fixed. Apply Loctite324 adhesive to the underside of the two fixing pads of the strain gage ele-
ment.
3.3.4 Press the strain gage element over the activated surface and keep pressed for 2/3 minutes keep-
ing the strain gage element tube parallel to the direction of strain measurement.
3.3.5 Apply layer of waterproofing compound over and around foil tabs to protect gage from corrosion.
Be particularly careful at point where foil tab is under the stainless steel tube. Use any of following
water proofing compounds:
o Dow Corning RTV 3145 or alternatively Dow Corning RTV 3140

o GE Silicones RTV 1200
Page | 12
NOTE: Take care that water proofing compound does not flow over to area which joints stainless
steel tube to the end piece. If this happens, it may restrict movement of the strain gage
magnetic wire inside the gage by preventing the stainless steel tube from freely sliding over
the ‘O’ ring.
3.3.6 Position the sensor coil housing over the strain gage element such that the cable end is opposite
to the spring end of the strain gage (the housing will not seat properly in reverse orientation).
Mark the perimeter of the sensor coil housing using a marking pencil and remove the sensor coil
housing.
3.3.7 Apply water proofing compound as a thin layer all over the marked perimeter. Place the sensor
coil housing over the strain gage and press firmly to displace excess adhesive between the
sensor coil and substrate. cover all the joints well with the water proofing compound.
3.3.8 Apply Loctite 7075 activator to the area where the clamps of sensor coil housing will rest on the
steel surface. Apply Loctite 324 to the underside of the clamp tabs that will rest on the steel sur-
face. Position the fixing clamps over the sensor coil housing and keep the clamp tabs pressed on
either side of the sensor coil housing for 2/3 minutes. Alternatively, waterproofing compound
mentioned above could also be used for fixing the steel clamps. After fixing the clamps apply wa-
ter proofing compound to the clamps and area around the clamps on the substrate.
3.3.9 Check coil output with model EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator to ensure proper installation of
gage.
NOTE: To let adhesive bonds gain full strength, avoid unnecessary handling of the mounted
elements including the length of cable just adjacent to the strain gage for the next 24 hours.
NOTE: Avoid significant change in strain level of the strain gage mounted steel section for the next
24 hours till adhesive has properly set.
3.4 Installation of EDS-20V-SW strain gage on steel surface

by epoxy bonding
Follow instructions generally as per § 3.3. For bonding on concrete

surface or stone use Loctite cleaner 7063 to ensure surface is clean
dry and free from oil/grease. Use Loctite Metal set S3 two
component epoxy for bonding, following instructions as given by
manufacturer.
3.5 Mechanical protection and care of cable Figure 3.2 Initial thermal
protection by insulation tape
3.5.1 Avoid direct sunlight on strain gages. In case this is not
possible, use thermocole sheets or foam insulation tape in
conjugation with duct tape to provide proper protection
against direct sunlight. Refer to figures 3.2 & 3.3.
3.5.2 User or designer should ensure proper protection method

for installed strain gage and cable. Strain gages require
protection from water and mechanical damage caused by
normal construction activity, vehicular traffic and vandalism.
A typical protection by using a cover plate is illustrated in
figure 3.4 on next page.
Figure 3.3 Further thermal pro-

tection by duct tape
Page | 13
CAUTION: Ensure proper protection of sensor and cable from water and mechanical damage caused
by normal construction activity, welding, vehicular traffic and vandalism. Gages may require
protective covers, bolted, welded or epoxied to structure. Protective covers should not distort
or stiffen the structure. Excessive force applied in tightening and welding operations may
cause deceptive or spurious strains at the location. Possible solutions are attaching a stiff
cover plate at only one end of the structure or using a rubber gasket in between.
5 6 2 4 3 1
300
400
Figure 3.4 - Typical protection
1 Cover plate
2 M12 x 75 long hex bolt, washer and nut
3 Strain gage
4 Sensor
5 Flexible conduit
6 Conduit clamp
position the studs.
readings. It is recommended that welding be avoided anywhere near the gage as this may
cause large local distortion of the steel surface.
taken most casually. Care should be taken to put an identification tag at the point where
cable comes out of the structure such that cable identity is not lost if the cable gets cut or
damaged. Route the cable properly to the location where readings have to be taken, taking
Page | 14
care that it is suitably protected. Gage and lead wires must be protected from mechanical
damage and from water.
deformation. Conduits should not be used where flow of water along the instrument leads must
be prevented. In case conduits are not used and the cable is subjected to tensile or compressive
be made water tight by using an epoxy based splicing kit. Cable jointing compound MS 853 with
hardener MSH 283 (Mahendra Engineering & Chemical Products Ltd.) is stocked by Encardio-rite
and is available in 100, 200 and 500 cc packing. Crimp terminals and a crimping tool are also
spool. This will reduce chances of nicking, bending or twisting of the cable
is necessary to prevent errors in making proper connections and to insure correct splicing if cable
is cut or, broken.
3.6.1 Connect model EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator to strain gage and take the initial frequency and
temperature reading. The initial frequency reading is very important because all future readings
are referred to this initial reading to determine any change in stress. The initial frequency, along
with the gage factor (check batch certificate for actual gage factor), constitute the calibration
constants required to be fed into the EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator for any Encardio-rite model
EDS-20V-SW spot weldable strain gage.
NOTE: Initial frequency reading is very important because all future readings are referred to this
initial reading to determine any change in stress. A minimum of two readings should be
taken after installation and these should be repeatable. In case readings are not repeatable
defective. The cause must be evaluated and if there is a problem, it should be rectified. It is
good practice to take readings regularly during first few days to ensure that data is stable
and a correct initial reading has been fed into the vibrating wire indicator as a calibration
constant.
Page | 15
meters in length, or both the sensor and the vibrating wire indicator is used inside a shielded structure,
e.g. a building.
The EDS-20V-SW vibrating wire strain gage is not available with any integral lightning protection
 Surge arrestors like Gas Discharge Tubes (GDT) or TransZorbs (registered trademark of
General Semiconductor Industries) may be fixed to the gage cable as near to gage as possible
and epoxy potted in place. The ground conductor would have to be connected to an earthing
stake or the steel structure itself.
 If strain gage is mounted close to a junction box or a multiplexer, the surge arrestor component
can be mounted in junction box or the multiplexer box itself. Encardio-rite can provide junction
 Lightning arrestor boards and enclosures are available from Encardio-rite that can be installed at
the exit point of the structure being monitored. Consult the factory for additional information on
these or alternate lightning protection schemes.
3.8 Troubleshooting
EDS-20V-SW vibrating wire strain gage is consequently limited to periodic checks of cable connections
should be > 500 M Ohm.
 Check if vibrating wire indicator works with another strain gage? If not, vibrating wire indicator
motors, generators, transformers, arc welders and antennas. If so, the problem could be reduced
Page | 16
 The reading may be outside the specified range (either compressive or tensile) of the strain
gage? The gage may have become too slack or too tight. Inspection of data collected might
indicate this possibility.
 The cable may be cut or crushed? Check the nominal resistance between the two gage leads
using an Ohm meter. It should be within 130 - 150 Ohm.
 Check if the vibrating wire indicator works with another strain gage? If not, the vibrating wire
range (either compressive or tensile) of the strain gage? The gage may have become too slack or
too tight. Inspection of data collected might indicate this possibility.
Page | 17
an EDS-20V-SW strain gage, will display the change in strain directly in µ strain. Thus, the change in
strain between the initial state (ε0) and any subsequent state (ε1) can be directly read on the EDI-54V
vibrating wire indicator. Compressive strain is indicated by a ‘-‘ sign and tensile strain by a ‘+’ sign.
µ∈apparent = (ε1- ε0)

σ = E
ε
and temperature is recorded, conversion from strain to stress is straight forward. In case of concrete, it is
not so straight forward and the same accuracy should not be expected as is in the case of steel
structures. In case of concrete, it is difficult to precisely determine the modulus of elasticity as it depends
upon several factors like composition, stress on concrete and furthermore it also varies with time.
structural member, initial reading should be taken after erection of the member.
If a no load reading has been taken and the structure is eventually dismantled, it is advisable to take the
frequency reading at zero load once again. This frequency reading should agree with the initial no load
Page | 18
neutral axis.
at each cross section of the structural member. The number of gages is determined by the nature of
As a loaded pile moves downward in the soil in response to load, skin

friction (shearing stress) along the soil pile interface, resists it’s sliding down.
The remaining support to the pile is provided by the base or tip of the pile
resting against the foundation. To determine the magnitude of tip load and
skin friction, strain gages are mounted at the tip and at various levels on the
steel pile. (For concrete piles, Encardio-rite recommends the model EDS-
11V strain gage for skin friction.).
For steel piles, strain gages provide the basic instrumentation scheme.
Figure 4.1 shows three strain gages mounted axially on the outside of the
pipe pile at 120° to each other. On a circular pipe strut three gages would Figure 4.1
suffice (four would be preferable). In case the diameter of the pipe pile is
large and/or it is a closed end pipe pile, the strain gages may be mounted
on the inside for greater safety from damage.
driven H-pile. It is recommended that two strain gages each be mounted
back-to-back on the web at two locations as close to the flanges as
possible. Gages at these locations can usually be protected adequately,
using welded channels, angles, or corner strips.
Damage to gages and cable during driving must be prevented by taking all
precautions. In case there is likelihood of damage at the tip of the pile, Figure 4.2
gages should be welded above the area of potentially damage. Gages
welded to the pile should be protected with robust cover
plates tapered down toward the pile tip. Cables should
be protected by steel angles or channels. An effective
method involves welding channels to the pile, with 150
mm long windows for pulling through the cable and
Figure 4.3
clamping it at suitable intervals. The cables should not
be dangling and should be supported during driving. The windows are finally closed by welding small
lengths of channel to the pile. The cables must be
protected beyond the point of exit from the channel with
flexible metallic conduit. During driving, the cables and
metallic conduit may be passed around a curved guide
or large diameter pulley mounted near the pile head, on
the pile or hammer. A rope may be tied to the ends of
the cables and held at the ground surface to prevent
Figure 4.4
damage as the pile is driven.
Page | 19
For sheet pile in tension two strain gages back to back on the opposite sides of the sheet midway
between the clutches is recommended. Refer to figure 4.3. Example is sheet pile used for a cofferdam.
For sheet pile walls subjected to bending, a pair of strain gages on each of the outer portions of the Z-
shape is recommended. The strain gages are mounted along the length of the sheet pile. Refer to figure
4.4
4.3.2 I-Beam
For an I-beam subjected to axial load, two strain gages may be mounted back
to back at the center of the web as illustrated in figure 4.5. The axial stress
may be determined as follows:
ε1 + ε2
2
Strain gages mounted on web
may be mounted back to back on the web as illustrated in figure 4.6. The
axial stress may be determined as follows: Figure 4.5
ε1 + ε2 + ε3 + ε 4
4
For calculating the stress due to bending consider the difference b

follows: 1 2

a
( ε1 + ε2 ) − ( ε3 + ε4 )
c
a d
σxx = x xE
4 c
3 4
( ε1 + ε3 ) − ( ε2 + ε4 ) b Figure 4.6
σyy = x xE
4 d
σmaximum = σaxial + σxx + σyy
Page | 20
Error! Bookmark not defined.

1 2
The total stress at any point in the cross section is the algebraic
c
sum of the axial stress and the bending stresses. In all the above
calculations strict regard must be paid to the sign of the strain. 3 4
Please note that the stress in the outer corners of the flange will be
d
much higher than the stress on the web and that failure of the
section can be initiated at these points. Figure 4.7
One of the problems of locating the strain gages at the outer corners lies in the difficulty of protecting
them and the cable from accidental damage. A graver problem arises due to each of the four gages being
subjected to localized bending stress that affects only that gage and not the others. It is desirable and
also necessary to locate the strain gages in pairs, one on either side of the neutral axis of the I-beam to
which the gages are attached. From this point of view, the configuration in figure 4.5 is preferable.
The user should weigh the pros and cons and take his own decision on what is best for his application.
The same set of equations are applicable for both the configurations illustrated in figure 4.6 and 4.7.
4.3.4 Pot bearing
A typical scheme for stress analysis of the pot of a pot bearing (figure 4.8) is illustrated in figure 4.9.
Figure 4.8
Page | 21
File flat 74x24 to

mount strain gages
on outside of pot.
20
Figure 4.9
Page | 22
T hermist o r t yp e: Dale 1C3001-B3
T emperat ure resist ance equat ion
T = 1/[A + B(LnR) + C(LnR)3] - 273.2 oC
A = 1.4051 x 10-3
B = 2.369 x 10-4
C = 1.019 x 10-7
Ohm Temp. oC Ohm Temp. oC Ohm Temp. oC
201.1k -50 16.60K -10 2417 +30
187.3K -49 15.72K -9 2317 31
174.5K -48 14.90K -8 2221 32
162.7K -47 14.12K -7 2130 33
151.7K -46 13.39k -6 2042 34
141.6K -45 12.70K -5 1959 35
132.2K -44 12.05K -4 1880 36
123.5K -43 11.44K -3 1805 37
115.4K -12 10.86K -2 1733 38
107.9K -41 10.31K -1 1664 39
101.0K -40 9796 0 1598 40
94.48K -39 9310 +1 1535 41
88.46K -38 8851 2 1475 42
82.87K -37 8417 3 1418 43
77.66K -36 8006 4 1363 44
72.81K -35 7618 5 1310 45
68.30K -34 7252 6 1260 46
64.09K -33 6905 7 1212 47
60.17K -32 6576 8 1167 48
56.51K -31 6265 9 1123 49
53.10K -30 5971 10 1081 50
49.91K -29 5692 11 1040 51
46.94K -28 5427 12 1002 52
44.16K -27 5177 13 965.0 53
41.56k -26 4939 14 929.6 54
39.13K -25 4714 15 895.8 55
36.86K -24 4500 16 863.3 56
34.73K -23 4297 17 832.2 57
32.74K -22 4105 18 802.3 58
30.87K -21 3922 19 773.7 59
29.13K -20 3748 20 746.3 60
27.49K -19 3583 21 719.9 61
25.95K -18 3426 22 694.7 62
24.51K -17 3277 23 670.4 63
23.16K -16 3135 24 647.1 64
21.89K -15 3000 25 624.7 65
20.70K -14 2872 26 603.3 66
19.58K -13 2750 27 582.6 67
18.52K -12 2633 28 562.8 68
17.53K -11 2523 29 525.4 70
Page | 23
The thermal coefficient of linear expansion of structural steel is around 12 ppm per oC and concrete
varies from 10-13 ppm per oC. The thermal coefficient of linear expansion of the vibrating wire is around
11.0 ppm per oC at 25oC. These values are very close. For most applications, when the gage is attached
to steel, no temperature correction to the measured strain is really required. This is however only true if
the magnetic wire and the underlying steel structure are at the same temperature. If sunlight falls directly
on the gage, this would elevate the temperature of the magnetic wire above the surrounding steel and
cause the strain gage to show a lower value of the stress as compared to the actual. The strain gage
should therefore be shielded from direct sunlight or any radiation.
temperature reading directly in oC if connected to the green and white leads from the sensor.
Page | 24
6 WARRANTY
Page | 25
USERS’ MANUAL

MODEL EDS-21V-AW ARC W ELDABLE EXTENDED RANGE
Doc. # WI 6002.109. R01 | October 2018

Vibrating wire strain gage Users’ manual
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Features 1
1.2 Applications 1

2.2.1 Cable 5
2.2.2 Accessories 5

3.2 Installation of arc weldable strain gage 9
3.3 Measurement of strain on a concrete surface 13
4.3.1 Pressure shaft 18
4.3.3 Wye section 19
4.3.4 I-beams 20

6 WARRANTY 24
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
The Encardio-rite model EDS-21V-AW strain gage is intended primarily for long-term high-range strain
measurement. It is suitable for surface mounting by welding on steel structures such as bridges, piles,
wye sections, pressure shafts, tunnel linings and supports etc. It can measure strains up to 5000 µ strain.
The primary means of attachment is by conventional arc welding, but by alteration of the end blocks it can
be adapted to monitor strain changes on concrete or rock surfaces using anchors grouted into boreholes.
For embedment in soil or concrete, Encardio-rite recommends the model EDS-11V electron beam
welded, the model EDS-20V-E normal range or EDS-21V-E extended range embedment strain gage.
vibrating wire indicator on the magnitude and distribution of compressive and tensile strain in steel
structures and other areas of application where strain measurement is required. As an Encardio-rite
convention, the ‘+’ sign indicates tensile strain and the ‘-’ sign indicates compressive strain. Main purpose
of the strain gage is to indirectly quantitatively determine stress and its variation with time. Change in
stress is obtained by multiplying the measured strain by the modulus of elasticity.
The gage has a very high compliance requiring less than 4.5 kg of force to tension the wire by 5000
µ strain. It can be fixed by welding or epoxy bonding or a pair of setscrews. All gages have the vibrating
wire pre-tensioned ready for use.
1.1 Features
 Thermally aged to minimize long-term drift

 Can be used on concrete and rock surfaces
semiconductor) types lies mainly in the use of a frequency, rather than a voltage, as the output signal
from the strain gage. The frequency may be transmitted over a long cable length without appreciable
The thermal coefficient of expansion of the gage is the same as that of the steel surface to which it is
attached (and very similar to that of concrete). Corrections for temperature are therefore seldom required.
This users’ manual covers the description of the vibrating wire strain gage & its accessories, the
procedure for installation of the sensor on a steel structure, method of taking observations and recording
data. The model EDS-21V-AW requires a dummy strain gage and a welding jig to facilitate installation.
1.2 Applications
Encardio-rite model EDS-21V-AW is the electrical strain gage of choice as its frequency output is immune
to external noise, it is able to tolerate wet wiring common in geotechnical applications and is capable of
transmission of signals to long distances. It has applications in the measurement of positive or negative
strain on a steel structure, concrete or rock surface including:

 Testing and long-term analysis of the stress distribution of Wye sections.
 Monitoring and long-term analysis of stress in pressure shafts.
Page | 1
NOTE: The strain gage is not suitable for measurement of dynamic strains.
WARNING! Warning messages call attention to a procedure or practice, that if not properly followed
CAUTION: Caution messages call attention to a procedure or practice, that if not properly followed may
attention.
the installation work. The intricacies involved in the installation are such that even if a single
A lot of effort has been made in preparing this instruction manual. However, the best of
affect the performance of the sensor. Also, blindly following the instruction manual will not
For specifications: See § 2.3 ‘taking readings with EDI-51V’.
For applications on concrete: See § 3.2 ‘Installation of arc weldable strain gage
For applications on concrete: See § 3.3 ‘Measurement of strain on a concrete surface’.
For complete operating procedure of Vibrating Wire readout unit EDI-54V: See Doc. # WI 6002.
For deciding where to install strain gages: See § 4.3 ‘Positioning of weldable strain gages’.
For temperature effects: See § 5.1 ‘Temperature effects’.
Page | 2
µ strain by Encardio-rite’s EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator.
f = [σg/ρ]1/2/ 2l Hz
g = 980 cm/sec2
length of the wire in the strain gage is 16.4 cm, ρ = 7.8 x 10-3 kg/cm3 and E = 2.11 x 106 kg/cm2.
Consequently, the formula can be reduced to:
ε = 4.051 x 10-3 f2 µ strain
strain is proportional to the square of the frequency and the readout unit is able to display this directly in
µ strain.
varies from strain gage to strain gage. For the correct gage factor of the strain gages
supplied to you, please refer to its test report provided.
precisely follows the deflection of the steel section (or the concrete or rock surface) on which the strain
gage is mounted. It is not affected by the material or the coefficient of thermal expansion of the strain
vibrating wire sensors is 11.0 ppm per °C at 25°C.
A strain gage is used where a load

cell cannot be conveniently
interposed to measure stress in a
steel structure for reason of
geometry, capacity or economy
and where load and stress can be
worked out with reasonable accuracy from knowledge of the relationship between stress and strain
(modulus of elasticity). In such a case, it is very convenient to have a strain gage, which can be welded to
Page | 3
the steel structure.
resistance to corrosive, humid, wet and other hostile environmental conditions. The model EDS-21V-AW
provides further protection by suitably sealing the joints with heat shrinkable tubes. In addition to this, a
special waterproofing compound seals the plucking coil in the sensor assembly from any ingress of water.
The sensor assembly in the model EDS-21V-AW is consequently supplied integral with the rest of the
gage.
To mount the strain gage, two annular mounting blocks (one with one grub screw and the other with two
grub screws) are accurately positioned and aligned by a dummy gage and welded to the structure. The
dummy gage is then finally replaced by the actual strain gage and clamped in position. One of the
cylindrical end blocks has a ‘V’ groove around its circumference. The annular mounting block with one
grub screw is fixed to this cylindrical end block. Groutable reinforced bar annular mounting blocks are
available for surface mounting the strain gage to a concrete or rock surface. Refer to figure 3.5.
Ø31
164
Top view
Sensor coil assly. 10 Ø28.5
Adjusting nut
26.5
174 End view
Figure 2.1 - dimensional details with mounting blocks
For a sectional view of the strain gage refer to figure 2.2.
Threaded end plug Grooved end plug
Adjusting nut Heat shrink sleeve
Figure 2.2 – sectional view
Page | 4
For mounting on wire ropes special mounting brackets as illustrated in figure 2.3 are available.
Displacement of end blocks is always proportionally to the variation in strain. Any change in strain directly
indicate the strain. All vibrating wire sensors manufactured by Encardio-rite use the same vibrating wire
read-out unit model EDI-54V irrespective of the parameter being measured.
provide necessary voltage pulses to pluck the wire and will convert the resulting frequency reading directly
into strain units by means of an internal microprocessor.
2.2.1 Cable
For strain gage clamp
Four core PVC jacketed shielded cable, CS-1303
suitable for up to 60°C standard or CS-0404 suitable
for upto 80°C on request. Color code is as follows:
Red/Black VW sensor
For wire rope
D- specify.
D
2.2.2 Accessories
U clamp
 Weldable annular mounting blocks (one
set provided with each strain gage).
 EDS-21 groutable reinforced bar annular Figure 2.3 – Mounting on wire rope
mounting blocks (instead of weldable
end blocks). Refer to figure 3.5.
 EDS-22 dummy strain gage. Refer to figure 3.1 & 3.3.
 EDS-23 mounting jig. Refer to figure 3.2
 EDS-24 cover plate with mounting jig. Refer to figure 3.4
 EJB-12-2 junction box
 EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator
In case a number of strain gages have to be mounted, it saves time to have several dummy strain gages.
They do not cost much and help in installing several sets of mounting brackets simultaneously on the
steel structure to be monitored. Once all the mounting brackets are welded in position, the dummy strain
gages can together be replaced with the actual strain gages.
The dummy strain gage can, if required be manufactured at site. The dimensions are given in the note
preceding § 3.2.2.
The model EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator (figure 2.3 (a)) is a microprocessor-based read-out unit for
use with Encardio-rite’s range of vibrating wire sensors. It can display the measured frequency in terms of
time period, frequency, frequency squared or the value of measured parameter directly in proper engi-
neering units. It uses a smartphone with Android OS as readout having a large display with a capacitive
touch screen which makes it easy to read the VW sensor.
Page | 5
The EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator can store calibration coefficients from 10,000 vibrating wire sensors
so that the value of the measured parameter from these sensors can be shown directly in proper engi-
neering units. For transducers with built-in inter-
changeable thermistor, it can also display the temper-
ature of the transducer directly in degree Centigrade.
The vibrating wire indicator has an internal non-volatile

memory with sufficient capacity to store about 525,000
readings from any of the programmed sensors. Each
reading is stamped with the date and time the meas-
urement was taken.
Refer instruction manual WI-6002.112 of model EDI-

54V for entering the transducer calibration coeffi-
cients. The gage factor of the model EDS-21V-AW arc
weldable strain gage is given in the batch test certifi-
cate provided with every supply of strain gage.
Fig 2.3 (a) – Vibrating wire indicator
The initial reading IR will be the actual reading in
digits from the strain gage after it is installed at a particular location and properly fixed.
Page | 6
TEST CERTIFICATE
Model : EDS-21V-AW Date : 06/10/2018

: Arc weldable type waterproof extended range strain
Instrument gage Ambient Temp : 28 deg C
Range : 5000 µ-strain
Mfg.SI No. : A25927
Input Observed Frequency Average Average Best Fit Data Poly Fit Data
Disp. Strain Cycle 1 Cycle 2 Cycle 3 Frequency Digit Calculated Error Calculated Error
(mm) (µ strain) (Hz) (Hz) (Hz) (Hz) µ strain (%) FS µ strain (%) FS
0.000 0 693 693 695 694 481 9 0.18% 2 0.03%

0.165 1006 857 858 859 858 736 997 -0.18% 1000 -0.12%
0.330 2012 1000 999 999 999 999 2014 0.04% 2020 0.16%
0.495 3018 1120 1120 1122 1121 1256 3011 -0.15% 3014 -0.08%
0.655 3994 1229 1229 1228 1229 1510 3995 0.02% 3994 0.00%
0.820 5000 1330 1331 1331 1331 1770 5005 0.09% 5000 0.01%
where digit = frequency2/1000
Polynomial Constants Linear Constants

A3 = 3.108E-08 m= 3.874E+00
A2 = -1.308E-04 c= -1.854E+03
A1 = 4.040E+00
A0 = -1.915E+03
Strain "S" is calculated with the following equation :
Linear : S (µ strain) = m (R1) + c

Polynomial : S (µ strain) = A0 + A1 (R1) + A2 (R1)2 + A3 (R1)3
where R1 is current reading in digit.

Red & black : Signal Green & white : Thermistor
Tested By :
Page | 7
1. Dummy strain gage
2. Mounting jig
6. Rust preventive paint
7. Chipping hammer
8. Wire brush
9. 250 mm flat file
10. 12 mm round file
11. Spanner 18/19
13. Cable cutter
15. Wire stripper
16. Pliers 160 mm
17. Screw driver 20 cm
18. Allen key M6
Page | 8
environmentally clean atmosphere, conducive to maintaining good quality, at a location like a steel yard or
warehouse. All preliminary work on the sensor and if possible, also installation of the strain gage on the
steel structure should be done at a covered location remote from the dirt and adverse weather which may
exist at the work site.
 Measure the coil resistance by a digital multimeter between the red and black leads. It should lie
between 130-150 Ohm. Determine the resistance at the room temperature from thermistor
temperature resistance chart in § 5. This resistance should be equal to that between pins marked
green and white. For example, in case the room temperature is 25°C, this resistance would be 3,000
Ohm.
 The resistance between any lead and the protective armor should be > 500 m Ohm.
 Connect the sensor to the model EDI-54V portable vibrating wire indicator. The initial offset reading in
frequency should be stable. Its value should be approximately equal to the frequency value mentioned
in its test certificate for the unloaded condition.
NOTE: The strain gage’s initial tension is set at the factory prior to shipping depending on the
client’s requirement. It can be mid-range or suitable for tensile or compressive applications.
However, the full range shall be 0-5000 µ strain.
 A simple’ effective method of checking whether the sensor is responding to changes in strain is as
follows:
• Press the two ends of the strain gage gently between the forefingers and verify that the frequency
reading on the vibrating wire indicator decreases. Pulling the ends gently will increase the
frequency reading. Do not apply excessive tension, as the magnetic wire could break.
 Press the ‘TEMP’ key on the vibrating wire

indicator. The display will indicate the room
temperature.
 Remove the sensor from the strain gage.
CAUTION: The strain gage is a delicate and

sensitive instrument. It should be
handled with care. Twisting it or
applying too much force on it may
result in permanently damaging it.
While checking the strain gage, do not
apply too much tension as the wire may Figure 3.1 - dummy strain gage
break.
3.2 Installation of arc weldable strain gage
Wherever possible, gages should be installed around 100 hours before the erection of the structural
member at site. This allows time for stabilization of the strain gage before taking the initial reading.
Page | 9
The EDS-21V-AW strain gages are supplied fully sealed and pre-tensioned from the factory. Depending
on the requirement mentioned in the order, these can be supplied either set at the mid-range or set to
measure strain predominantly compressive or tensile in nature. Fine adjustment can be done by holding
the adjusting nut and rotating the end plug (figure 3.2). Connect the cable of the strain gage to vibrating
wire indicator EDI-54V and feed the linear gage factor (given in the test certificate of the strain gage) and
the initial frequency (IR) in its setup memory. Rotate the end block clockwise to decrease the initial
reading and counter-clockwise to increase the initial reading.
Figure 3.2 – fine tension adjustment
NOTE: Excessive rotation of the end block can damage the wire inside the strain gage. Limit the
rotation to less than a quarter pitch (rotation of 1 full pitch will result in a strain of
approximately 5000 µ strain).
A better method to adjust the initial reading is described in § 3.2.6.
3.2.1 Use the dummy strain gage (figure 3.1) and the mounting jig (figure 3.3) to properly position the
annular mounting blocks. The mounting blocks are supplied in pairs. The first has a single conical
point Allen head grub screw; the other has two oval point grub screws. Position the two mounting
blocks with the dummy strain gage in between, over the mounting jig and tighten the grub screws.
Take care that the inner surfaces of the mounting blocks are flush with the jig and they also rest
flush on the base of the jig. Excess
pressure on the grub screws should be
avoided as this only damages the dummy
strain gage.
Alternatively, place the mounting blocks

on a surface plate with the dummy strain
gage in between. Tighten the M6 grub
Dummy
screws with an Allen key taking care that
strain gage
the faces of the dummy strain gage (in slot)
coincide with the end faces of the two
mounting blocks. Ensure that the bottom
face of the mounting blocks sits flush with
the surface plate and there is no wobble in
the mounting blocks.
The mounting blocks are now aligned and Figure 3.3 - mounting jig
Page | 10
ready to be welded to the steel structure. In case a number of strain gages have to be welded, it
is advisable to procure several dummy strain gages.
NOTE: The dummy strain gage is a stainless steel rod 12.8 mm φ x 175 mm long. It has a 1 mm
deep ‘V’ groove at a distance of 8 mm from one end. In case it is not available, you may get
it manufactured at the site giving a tolerance of ± 0.1 mm on the dimensions.
3.2.2 Using a wire brush clean the steel surface on which the strain gage is to be mounted of all scale,
rust, dirt and oil. Remove the mounting blocks and dummy strain gage assembly from the
mounting jig and place them in position on the steel surface. Press them firmly against the steel
surface using the dummy strain gage as a handle. Weld the edges of the mounting blocks in the
order as shown below in figure 3.4.
Figure 3.4 - welding sequence
NOTE: Avoid excessive heat as it may distort the steel surface. Do not weld the flat end surfaces
of the mounting block, as this will prevent removal of the dummy strain gage.
3.2.3 Let the mounting blocks cool to room temperature, using a water soaked rag if required, before
slackening the grub screws to remove the dummy strain gage.
3.2.4 Use the chipping hammer and wire brush to clean away all welding slag.
3.2.5 Insert the strain gage into the holes in the mounting blocks. Take care that the grooved end of the
gage is on the side of the mounting block with the single grub screw. Tighten the grub screw hard
down into the ‘V’ groove on the strain gage.
3.2.6 Wire tension can be made to increase or decrease by pushing the sensor in the direction of the
free end or away from it. When the desired tension is obtained, the free end is firmly secured
inside the mounting block by tightening down hard the two grub screws.
3.2.7 To stabilize the reading, tap the mounting blocks gently after the grub screws have been
tightened. The reading may alter slightly during this operation, which is normal.
CAUTION: Great care should be taken while tightening the strain gage between the mounting blocks
such that no torque or bending moment is applied across the length of the strain gage.
NOTE: It is good practice to gently tap the mounting blocks after the grub screws are tightened. This
helps in improving the initial stability of the gage as it re-adjusts its position over the “O” ring
seals between the mounting blocks and the protective stainless steel tubing.
NOTE: In case a number of gages are to be installed, it is good practice to have more than one
dummy strain gage.
3.2.8 Apply a coat of any standard rust preventative paint on the weld joints to minimize the effect of
corrosion.
Page | 11
strain gages require protection from water and from mechanical damage caused by normal
construction activity, vehicular traffic and vandalism. Proper protection methods have to be
devised by the user or the designer. A typical protection by using a cover plate is illustrated in
figure 3.5.
CAUTION: Strain gages and cables require protection from water and from mechanical damage caused
by normal construction activity, welding, vehicular traffic and vandalism. Gages usually
require protective covers, bolted, welded or epoxied to the structure. Protective covers
should not distort or stiffen the structure. Excessive force applied in tightening and welding
operations may cause deceptive or spurious strains at the location. Possible solutions are
Figure 3.5 - typical protection
attaching a stiff cover plate at only one end of the structure or using a rubber gasket in
between.
1. Cover plate
2. M12 x 75 long hex bolt, washer and nut
3. Strain gage
4. Sensor
5. Flexible conduit
6. Conduit clamp
position the studs.
readings. It is recommended to avoid welding anywhere near the gage as this may cause
large local distortion of the steel surface.
Page | 12
taken most casually. Care should be taken to put an identification tag at point where cable
comes out of the structure such that cable identity is not lost if cable gets cut or damaged.
is suitably protected. Gage and lead wires must be protected from mechanical damage and
from water.
3.2.10 Connect the model EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator to the strain gage and take the initial
frequency and temperature reading. The initial frequency reading is very important because all
future readings are referred to this initial reading to determine any change in stress. The initial
frequency, along with the gage factor constitutes the calibration constants required to be fed into
the EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator for any Encardio-rite model EDS-21V-AW weldable strain
gage. For the actual value of gage factor refer to test certificate supplied along with the strain
gage.
NOTE: The initial frequency reading is very important because all future readings are referred to it to
determine any change in stress. Consequently, a minimum of two readings should be taken
after installation and these should be repeatable. In case the readings are not repeatable
defective. The cause must be evaluated and if there is a problem, it should be rectified. It is
good practice to take readings regularly during the first few days to ensure that the data is
stable and a correct initial reading has been fed into the vibrating wire indicator as a
calibration constant.
NOTE: It is preferable to install the strain gage on the steel member in the unloaded condition, i.e.,
prior to its installation. The initial readings will then correspond to zero load. Otherwise the
initial reading will correspond to some unknown load level and subsequent readings will be in
comparison to this initial reading taken as zero. For further details, refer to § 4.2.
3.3 Measurement of strain on a concrete surface
Surface strains on concrete can be measured with the EDS-21V-AW vibrating wire strain gage by
attaching the strain gage to the concrete surface by any of the following two methods:
3.3.1 Position the two model EDS-21 groutable reinforced bar annular mounting blocks on the dummy
strain gage according to the procedure described in § 3.2.1. These mounting blocks are different
from those used for welding on steel structures and are illustrated in figure 3.5.
Page | 13
3.3.2 Drill two 16 mm φ holes 65 mm deep at a center distance of 149 mm on the concrete surface
using a template for this purpose.

154
Concrete
Stud, M8x60 long
Grout or epoxy
Ø10
164
Figure 3.5 - mounting on concrete surface

3.3.3 Grout the reinforced bar annular mounting blocks and dummy strain gage assembly into the
drilled holes in the concrete using either a fast setting cement or a high strength epoxy.
3.3.4 With proper care it may be possible to mount the standard annular mounting blocks to the
concrete surface with a room temperature curing epoxy. If this procedure is followed, the
concrete surface should be carefully sanded and cleaned and the plating should be removed
from the underside of the mounting blocks.
3.3.5 After the annular mounting brackets have properly set, slacken the grub screws to remove the
dummy strain gage.
3.3.6 Use a wire brush to clean away any concrete or epoxy deposited on the mounting brackets.
3.3.7 Generally, follow instructions 3.2.5 to 3.2.12.
3.4 Care of cable
3.4.1 Protect the cable from accidental damage by heavy equipment or flying rocks and debris. Use
any practical method to protect the cable. The cable can be protected by routing it through a
flexible conduit. The cable may be intentionally left slack inside the conduit to accommodate local
deformation. Conduits should not be used where the flow of water along the instrument leads
must be prevented. In case conduits are not used and the cable is subjected to tensile or
compressive strain, great care should be taken to prevent conductors from breaking or protruding
out of the insulation. As a general rule, cables should be routed through zones of least differential
strain.
be made watertight by using an epoxy-based splicing kit. For cable jointing compound please
contact factory.
Page | 14
is necessary to prevent errors in making proper connections and to ensure correct splicing if the
cable is cut or, broken.
meters in length or both the sensor and the vibrating wire indicator is used inside a shielded structure,
e.g. a building.
The EDS-21V-AW vibrating wire strain gage is not available with any integral lightning protection
 Surge arrestors like Gas Discharge Tubes (GDT) or TransZorbs (registered trademark of General
structure itself.
 If the strain gage is mounted close to a junction box or a multiplexer, the surge arrestor component
 Lightning arrestor boards and enclosures are available from Encardio-rite, which can be installed at
EDS-21V-AW vibrating wire strain gage are consequently limited to periodic checks of cable connections
be > 500 M Ohm.
Page | 15
 The reading may be outside the specified range (either compressive or tensile) of the strain gage?
The gage may have become too slack or too tight. Inspection of data collected might indicate this
possibility. In such a case, if the gage is accessible, loosen the two grub screws in the mounting
blocks. The internal spring in the strain gage will restore the reading. The gage can now be set to a
new datum and the grub screws re-tightened. If the gage still does not respond, the sensor or the
strain gage or both may be replaced.
tight. Inspection of data collected might indicate this possibility. In such a case, if the gage is
accessible, loosen the two grub screws in the mounting blocks. The internal spring in the strain gage
will restore the reading. The gage can now be set to a new datum and the grub screws re-tightened. If
the gage still does not respond, the sensor or the strain gage or both may be replaced.
Page | 16
an EDS-21V-AW strain gage, will display the change in strain directly in µ strain. Thus, the change in
strain between the initial state (µ0) and any subsequent state (µ1) can be directly read on the EDI-54V
vibrating wire indicator. Compressive strain is indicated by a ‘-‘ sign and tensile strain by a ‘+’ sign.
µ∈apparent = (µ1-µ0)

σ = E
ε
strain to computed stress. In case of steel, if the modulus of elasticity is known, deformation is in elastic
limits and temperature is recorded, conversion from strain to stress is straightforward. In case of
concrete, it is not so straightforward and the same accuracy should not be expected as is in the case of
steel structures. In case of concrete, it is difficult to precisely determine the modulus of elasticity as it
depends upon several factors like composition, stress on concrete and furthermore, it also varies with
time.
structural member, initial reading should be taken after the erection of the member.
If a no-load reading has been taken and the structure is eventually dismantled, it is advisable to take the
frequency reading at zero load once again. This frequency reading should agree with the initial no-load
Page | 17
neutral axis.
at each cross-section of the structural member. The number of gages is determined by the nature of the
4.3.1 Pressure shaft
The steel liner is subjected to high stress at the lower end of the pressure
shaft, the water head being high. For measurement of circumferential
stress, three or four strain gages are mounted along and parallel to the
circumference of the pressure shaft. For measurement of longitudinal
stress, three or four strain gages may be mounted in the longitudinal
direction as well, but this is generally restricted to places where strength of
welded joints is to be monitored or checked. Figure 4.1 shows four strain
gages mounted on the circumference at 90° to each other and four in the
longitudinal direction at 90o to each other. The asymmetrical expansion of
the steel liner when the pressure shaft is in operation, is easily determined
by monitoring the strain from the four strain gages mounted along the Figure 4.1
circumference.
For determining the stress at any location on the pressure shaft, the strain value at that point is multiplied
by the modulus of elasticity (2x106 kg/cm2). The stress value so obtained should generally be lower than
the yield stress of the pressure shaft material.
For further elaboration see Encardio-rite application note AN 9604.
As a loaded pile moves downward in the soil in response to load, skin friction
(shearing stress) along the soil pile interface, resists its sliding down. The
remaining support to the pile is provided by the base or tip of the pile resting
against the foundation. To determine the magnitude of tip load and skin friction,
strain gages are mounted at the tip and at various levels on the steel pile. (For
concrete piles, Encardio-rite recommends the model EDS-11V strain gage for
skin friction and model EPS-30V-I earth pressure cells for tip load).
For steel piles, strain gages provide the basic instrumentation scheme. Figure 4.2
Figure 4.2 shows three strain gages mounted axially on the outside of the pipe
pile at 120° to each other. On a circular pipe strut three gages would suffice
(four would be preferable). In case the diameter of the pipe pile is large and/or it
is a closed end pipe pile, the strain gages may be mounted on the inside for
greater safety from damage.
driven H-pile. It is recommended that two strain gages each be mounted back-
to-back on the web at two locations as close to the flanges as possible. Gages
at these locations can usually be protected adequately, using welded channels, Figure 4.3
angles, or corner strips.
Damage to gages and cable during driving must be prevented by taking all precautions. In case there is
Page | 18
likelihood of damage at the tip of the pile, gages should be welded above the area of potentially damage.
Gages welded to the pile should be protected with robust cover plates tapered down toward the pile tip.
Cables should be protected by steel angles or channels. An effective method involves welding channels
to the pile, with 150 mm long windows for pulling through the cable and clamping it at suitable intervals.
The cables should not be dangling and should be supported during driving. The windows are finally
closed by welding small lengths of channel to the pile. The cables must be protected beyond the point of
exit from the channel with flexible metallic conduit. During driving, the cables and metallic conduit may be
passed around a curved guide or large diameter pulley mounted near the pile head, on the pile or
hammer. A rope may be tied to the ends of the cables and held at the ground surface to prevent damage
as the pile is driven.
For sheet pile in tension two strain gages back to back on the opposite
sides of the sheet midway between the clutches is recommended.
Refer to figure 4.4. Example is sheet pile used for a cofferdam. Figure 4.4
For sheet pile walls subjected to bending, a pair of strain

gages on each of the outer portions of the Z-shape is
recommended. The strain gages are mounted along the length
Figure 4.5
of the sheet pile. Refer to figure 4.5
4.3.3 Wye section
Wye section may be instrumented for initial

testing, especially at the welded joints or for long
term monitoring. Stress generated due to any
imbalance in flow through the two arms can also
be studied (e.g. in case when the cross sectional
areas of the two arms are different). Relative
sharing of load between the steel liner, the
concrete layer and the surrounding rock can also
be determined and monitored.
Figure 4.6 gives locations of strain gages mounted

on the Wye section at Maneri Bhali stage ll. The
Wye section was tested for a water head of 260 m.
The data obtained gave insight to the designers for
future designs of Wye sections.
To measure stress at various points on a Wye

section, strain gages are fixed to the surface of the
Wye section with the help of mounting brackets,
which are arc welded to the body of the Wye
section.
The ends of the Wye section are sealed and water

pressure applied through one small opening left for
the purpose. It is recommended that this sealing
be done before the mounting of the strain gages
such that any damage to them because of high
current due to welding is avoided. The points of
maximum strain and consequently maximum
stress are thus determined. In case the stress at Figure 4.6
all the points is less than yield stress, the Wye
Page | 19
section is good and can be safely used.
If long-term monitoring of the stress in the Wye section is required, the strain gages should be left at the
points where the stress is high. They should also be left at all the critical points. The balance strain gages
should be removed and can be used for other applications. In case the Wye section is concrete lined,
these can be mounted in the concrete lining or the concrete rock interface. In case, they are mounted in
the concrete lining or the concrete rock interface, it is good practice to mount them at the same section at
which the strain gages are retained on the Wye piece. Sharing of load between the steel liner, the
concrete layer and the surrounding rock can thus be studied and long-term monitoring of stress can be
done, if required. In case strain gages are to be embedded in concrete, it is recommended to use the
electron beam welded Encardio-rite model EDS-11V strain gages instead of the model EDS-21V-AW strain
gages.
For further elaboration see Encardio-rite application note AN 9604 in which instrumentation of two Wye
sections in the same steel structure, feeding into three hydro turbines at Maneri Bhali stage-lI in Uttar
Pradesh, India is discussed.
4.3.4 I-beams
For an I-beam subjected to axial load, two strain gages may be mounted
back to back at the center of the web as illustrated in figure 4.7. The axial
stress may be determined as follows:
ε1 + ε2
2
4.3.4.1 Strain gages mounted on the web
may be mounted back to back on the web as illustrated in figure 4.8. The Figure 4.7
axial stress may be determined as follows:
ε1 + ε2 + ε3 + ε4
4
For calculating the stress due to bending consider the difference
follows:

( ε1 + ε2 ) − ( ε3 + ε 4 ) a
σxx = x xE
4 c
Figure 4.8
( ε1 + ε3 ) − ( ε2 + ε4 ) b
σyy = x xE
4 d
Error! Bookmark not defined. σmaximum = σaxial + σxx + σyy
The total stress at any point in the cross section is the algebraic sum of the axial stress and the bending
stresses. In all the above calculations strict regard must be paid to the sign of the strain. Please note that
the stress in the outer corners of the flange will be much higher than the stress on the web and that failure
of the section can be initiated at these points.
Page | 20
One of the problems of locating the strain gages at the outer

corners lies in the difficulty of protecting them and the cable from
accidental damage. A graver problem arises due to each of the four
gages being subjected to localized bending stress, which affects
only that gage and not the others. It is desirable and also necessary
to locate the strain gages in pairs, one on either side of the neutral
axis of the I-beam to which the gages are attached. From this point
of view, the configuration in figure 4.7 is preferable.
The user should weigh the pros and cons and take his own decision
on what is best for his application.
The same set of equations are applicable for both the configurations Figure 4.9
illustrated in figure 4.8 and 4.9.
Page | 21

T = 1/[A + B(LnR) + C(LnR)3] - 273.2 °C
T = temperature in °C
A = 1.4051 x 10-3
B = 2.369 x 10-4
C = 1.019 x 10-7
O hm T emp. ° C Ohm T emp. ° C Ohm T emp. ° C
201.1k - 50 16.60K - 10 2417 +30
187.3K - 49 15.72K -9 2317 31
174.5K - 48 14.90K -8 2221 32
162.7K - 47 14.12K -7 2130 33
151.7K - 46 13.39k -6 2042 34
141.6K - 45 12.70K -5 1959 35
132.2K - 44 12.05K -4 1880 36
123.5K - 43 11.44K -3 1805 37
115.4K - 12 10.86K -2 1733 38
107.9K - 41 10.31K -1 1664 39
101.0K - 40 9796 0 1598 40
94.48K - 39 9310 +1 1535 41
88.46K - 38 8851 2 1475 42
82.87K - 37 8417 3 1418 43
77.66K - 36 8006 4 1363 44
72.81K - 35 7618 5 1310 45
68.30K - 34 7252 6 1260 46
64.09K - 33 6905 7 1212 47
60.17K - 32 6576 8 1167 48
56.51K - 31 6265 9 1123 49
53.10K - 30 5971 10 1081 50
49.91K - 29 5692 11 1040 51
46.94K - 28 5427 12 1002 52
44.16K - 27 5177 13 965.0 53
41.56k - 26 4939 14 929.6 54
39.13K - 25 4714 15 895.8 55
36.86K - 24 4500 16 863.3 56
34.73K - 23 4297 17 832.2 57
32.74K - 22 4105 18 802.3 58
30.87K - 21 3922 19 773.7 59
29.13K - 20 3748 20 746.3 60
27.49K - 19 3583 21 719.9 61
25.95K - 18 3426 22 694.7 62
24.51K - 17 3277 23 670.4 63
23.16K - 16 3135 24 647.1 64
21.89K - 15 3000 25 624.7 65
20.70K - 14 2872 26 603.3 66
19.58K - 13 2750 27 582.6 67
18.52K - 12 2633 28 562.8 68
17.53K - 11 2523 29 525.4 70
Page | 22
The thermal coefficient of linear expansion of structural steel is around 12 ppm per °C and concrete varies
from 10-13 ppm per °C. The thermal coefficient of linear expansion of the vibrating wire is around 11.0
ppm per °C at 25°C. These values are very close. For most applications, when the gage is attached to
steel, no temperature correction to the measured strain is really required. This is however only true if the
magnetic wire and the underlying steel structure are at the same temperature. If sunlight falls directly on
the gage, this would elevate the temperature of the magnetic wire above the surrounding steel and cause
the strain gage to show a lower value of the stress as compared to the actual. The strain gage should,
therefore be shielded from direct sunlight or any radiation.
temperature reading directly in °C if connected to the green and white leads from the sensor.
Page | 23
6 WARRANTY
software. However, best of instruction manuals and software cannot provide for each and every condition
Products described in Encardio-rite’s catalogs or manuals are subject to modification and improvement
as dictated by subsequent developments. Encardio-rite reserves the right to modify, change or improve
products, to discontinue them or to add new ones without notice.
Page | 24
USERS’ MANUAL

MODEL EDS-21V-E EMBEDMENT TYPE EXTENDED RANGE
Doc. # WI 6002.111 R01 | Jun 2019

Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Features 1
1.2 Applications 1

2.3 Cable 4
2.5 Tools & accessories 5
3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7

3.3 Installation and positioning of embedment type strain gages 8
3.3.1 Piles and drilled shafts 8
3.3.2 Segmental lining for machine bored tunnels 9
3.3.3 Pre-cast model EDS-21V-E strain gage in a mould before embedment 9
3.3.4 Embedment procedure for single strain gage in mass concrete 10
4.3 Strain gages for specific applications 15

6 WARRANTY 18
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite model EDS-21V-E strain gage is intended primarily for strain measurement. It is mainly used
in pile foundations, segment lining of tunnels, rafts and concrete structures etc. It is an extended range
strain gage and can measure strains up to 5000 µ strain.
vibrating wire indicator or data acquisition system on magnitude and distribution of compressive and tensile
strain in concrete structures and other areas of application where strain measurement is required. As an
Encardio-rite convention, the ‘+’ sign indicates tensile strain and the ‘-‘ sign indicates compressive strain.
Main purpose of the strain gage is to indirectly quantitatively determine stress and its variation with time. Change
in stress is obtained by multiplying the measured strain by modulus of elasticity.
The gage has a very high compliance requiring less than 4.5 kg of force to tension the wire by 5000 µ
strain. Encardio-rite has two different models also, model EDS-11V and model EDS-21V-E (when normal
range strain is required). All gages have the vibrating wire pre-tensioned ready for use.
1.1 Features
Encardio-rite model EDS-21V-E is the electrical strain gage of choice as its frequency output is immune to
external noise, it is able to tolerate wet wiring common in geotechnical applications and is capable of
transmission of signals to long distances. It has the following features:
 Can be used for embedment in soil or concrete.
semiconductor) types lies mainly in the use of a frequency, rather than a voltage as the output signal from
the strain gage. Frequency may be transmitted over a long cable length without appreciable degradation
caused by variations in cable resistance, contact resistance, or leakage to ground.
The thermal coefficient of expansion of the embedment strain gage is near about that of concrete.
Corrections for temperature variation are therefore seldom required (in field use). In case correction is
required for any specific application, it is best to embed a strain gage from the same batch in a
1.2 Applications
measure plane and three dimensional stress.
moisture content etc., stress measurement by the strain gage may need to be corrected by mounting an
additional strain gage near the existing ones in no stress conditions.
This user’s manual covers description of the vibrating wire strain gage & its accessories, procedure for
embedment of sensor in a concrete structure, method of taking observations and recording data.
NOTE: The strain gage is not suitable for measurement of dynamic strain.
Page | 1


wire strain gages in your applications.
cannot provide for each and every condition in the field, which may affect the performance of the sensor.
Also, blindly following the instruction manual will not guarantee success. Sometimes, depending upon field
conditions, the installation personnel will have to consciously depart from the written text and use their
For accessories: See § 2.3 ‘Specifications’.
For installation of strain gage: See § 3 ‘Installation procedure and troubleshooting’.

Page | 2

directly affects the tension in the wire, resulting in a corresponding change in its frequency of vibration. The
strain is proportional to the square of the frequency that can be measured and displayed directly in µ strain
by Encardio-rite’s EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator.
f = [σg/ρ]1/2/ 2l Hz

g = 980 cm/sec2
length of the wire in the strain gage is 17 cm, ρ = 7.8 x 10-3 kg/cm3 and E = 2.11 x 106 kg/cm2. Consequently
the formula can be reduced to:
ε 15 = 4.361 x 10-3 f2 µ strain

µ strain.
precisely follows the deflection of the concrete structure (or the steel section or rock surface) on which the
strain gage is mounted. It is not affected by the material or the coefficient of thermal expansion of the strain
vibrating wire sensors is 11.0 ppm per °C.

A strain gage is used where a load cell cannot be conveniently interposed to measure stress in a structure
for reason of geometry, capacity or economy and where load and stress can be worked out with reasonable
accuracy from knowledge of the relationship between stress and strain (modulus of elasticity). In such a
case, it is very convenient to have a strain gage, which can be embedded in the concrete structure.
resistance to corrosive, humid, wet and other hostile environmental conditions. Further protection is
Page | 3
provided by suitably sealing the joints with heat shrinkable tubes. In addition to this, a special water proofing
compound seals the plucking coil in the sensor assembly from any ingress of water. The sensor assembly
in the model EDS-21V-E is consequently supplied integral with the rest of the gage.
The displacement of the end blocks is always proportionally to the variation in strain. Any change in the
strain directly affects the tension of the wire, resulting in a corresponding change in frequency of vibration
of the wire. The change in the frequency of the vibrating wire is accurately measured by a vibrating wire
indicator calibrated to indicate the strain. All vibrating wire sensors manufactured by Encardio-rite use the
same vibrating wire indicator irrespective of the parameter being measured.
Ø22
3
170
Top view
Sensor coil assly. Ø28.5
Heat shrink sleeve
30
Side view End view
Figure 2.1 - Dimensional details
For a sectional view of the strain gage refer to figure 2.2
Threaded end plug Distance tube End plug
Adjusting nut Heat shrink sleeve
Figure 2.2 – Sectional view

2.3 Cable
Four core PVC insulated shielded cable, CS-1303 suitable for upto 60°C standard or CS 0404 suitable for
upto 80°C on request. Colour code is as follows:
Red/Black VW sensor
Sometimes it is easier to terminate cables from several strain gages in a junction box and carry the signals
to the observation station or multiplexer collectively through a multi core cable. Standard junction boxes
Page | 4
are available from Encardio-rite for this purpose. If required, lightning protection can also be provided in
the junction box or even otherwise. Refer to § 3.6.
The model EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator (figure 2.3) is a microprocessor-based read-out unit for use
units. It uses a smartphone with Android OS as readout
having a large display with capacitive touch screen
which makes it easy to read the VW sensor.

calibration coefficients from 10,000 vibrating wire
sensors so that the value of the measured parameter
from these sensors can be shown directly in proper
engineering units. For transducers with built in
interchangeable thermistor, it can also display the Figure 2.3 – EDI-54V
temperature of the transducer directly in degree
Centigrade.
Refer instruction manual WI-6002.112 of model EDI-54V for entering the transducer calibration coefficients.
The gage factor of the model EDS-21V-E embedment strain gages is given in the batch test certificate
provided with every supply of strain gage. The initial reading IR will be the actual reading in digits from the
strain gage after it is embedded and properly set in concrete.
An internal 6 V 4 Ah rechargeable sealed maintenance free battery is used to provide power to the vibrating
wire indicator. A battery charger is provided to charge the internal battery which operates from 90 V to 270
V AC 50 or 60 Hz V AC mains. A fully discharged battery takes around 6 hours to get fully charged. The
indicator uses a smartphone as a readout that has its own internal sealed rechargeable Li-ion maintenance
battery as a power source. A separate battery charger/adapter unit for the smartphone, operating from
universal AC mains supply is supplied with each EDI-54V indicator unit.
The EDI- 54V vibrating wire indicator is housed in an impact resistance plastic moulded housing with
2.5 Tools & accessories

The following tools and accessories are recommended for proper installation of the strain gage:
 Temperature controlled soldering iron 25 Watt
 63/37 rosin core solder wire
 Cable cutter, Wire stripper
 Surgical blade with holder
 Pliers 160 mm
 Digital multimeter
 Vibrating wire indicator (EDI-54V)
Page | 5
Page | 6
3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

warehouse. All preliminary work on the sensor should be done at a covered location remote from the dirt
and adverse weather that may exist at the work site.

 Measure the coil resistance by a digital multimeter between red and black leads. It should lie between
130-150 Ω. Determine the resistance at room temperature from thermistor temperature resistance
example, in case the room temperature is 25°C, this resistance would be 3,000 Ω.
 Connect the sensor to the model EDI-54V portable vibrating wire indicator. Initial offset reading in
frequency should be stable. A frequency of 870 Hz corresponds to a tension equivalent to around
3,000 µstrain in the wire. The nominal reading range of the strain gage is 1,500 to 4,500 µ strain. Strain
gages in lower frequency range are specifically used for tension applications and in higher frequency
range for compression applications.
NOTE: The strain gage’s initial tension is set at the factory prior to the shipping depending on the
client’s requirement. If not specified these are set at mid-range at the factory making it suitable
for tensile or compressive applications. However, the full range shall be 0-5000 µ strain.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to set the tension in the strain gage. Twisting it or applying too much force on
it may result in permanently damaging it. Please specify the tension to be set at the time of
ordering, depending on the application-either predominantly compressive or tensile. The
gages shall be set and dispatched accordingly.
 A simple effective method of checking whether sensor is responding to the changes in strain is as
follows:
• Press two ends of strain gage gently between the fore fingers and verify that the frequency reading
on vibrating wire indicator decreases. Pulling ends gently will increase the frequency reading. Do
not apply excessive tension, as the magnetic wire could break.
 Check the temperature of the gage on the vibrating wire indicator. The display should indicate the room
temperature.
CAUTION: The strain gage is a delicate and sensitive instrument. It should be handled with care. While
checking the strain gage, do not apply too much tension as the wire may break.
3.2 Extension of cable

Very careful and skilled cabling is required in installation of strain gage as sensor/cable joint and a large
part of the cable is permanently embedded and no future access is available for maintenance or corrective
action.
Unless specifically requested, strain gage is supplied with a standard 1 m length of four core shielded
cable. Most users use their own standardized cable and have devised their own methods of cable extension
depending upon their application. Several methods of cable extension are available. One of the methods
is described in Encardio-rite doc. # WI 6002.11S - model ECS–05 cable splicing kit operating manual. After
Page | 7
completing the cable extension, make sure to check the working of the sensor again following the
3.3 Installation and positioning of embedment type strain gages

Strain gage is a very versatile sensor. There is no ‘standard’ method of placement and embedment of strain
gages. Location at which strain gages are to be installed is determined by the purpose of measurement,
access available and protection required during and after installation. If stress is required, to be measured
at a particular point, the gage can simply be located at that point. It is however not so simple in most
measurements. Generally speaking, to get the true picture on stress or the loading pattern, strain has to
be monitored at a number of points.
Measurement of strain at one point would be sufficient if no bending was occurring in the member; for
example, near a centre of long thin member subjected to a tensile load. In most applications, bending
moments are the rule rather than exception, and bending will take place about a neutral axis. To take care
of bending effects and uneven stress, more than one strain gage is required to be mounted at each cross
section of the structural member. The number of gages are determined by the nature of application and
the accuracy of measurement
A few schemes successfully deployed in the field for installation are given below:
3.3.1 Piles and drilled shafts
Piles and drilled shafts normally involve simple cross sections subjected to compression and some
bending. Location of strain gages should be selected carefully, taking into consideration any bending
involved.
For installation, soft iron wires are usually used to attach the strain gage to nearby reinforcing bars.
Normally, the tie wires/cable ties should be aligned perpendicular to the axis of the strain gage such that
any movement of reinforcing bars, during the pouring of the concrete, will not exert a pull on the strain gage
and distort or damage it.
Tie wires/cable ties should normally be tied around the protective tube and not the flanges to prevent any
loading of the flanges due to the tie wires/cable ties getting tensioned.
Figure 3.1 – Installation of embedment strain gage on rebar
Page | 8
3.3.2 Segmental lining for machine bored tunnels

segmental concrete lining that provides both support and
a final lining.
transported to site. Easy way to install the instruments in
segments (during concreting) is illustrated in the three
adjoining pictures.

concrete pressure cell and a few Encardio-rite
embedment strain gages in different axis before
Figure 3.2 – Strain gage installed with
concreting. The bottom picture shows the segment being pressure sensor in concrete segments
completed.
Figure 3.3 Concrete segments with strain gages and pressure cells installed inside
3.3.3 Pre-cast model EDS-21V-E strain gage in a mould before embedment

The following pictures shows the method to be followed. The strain gages are casted separately in small
concrete blocks and then later on embedded in the mass concrete.
Figure 3.4 Strain gage casted in small concrete blocks for embedment in mass concrete
Page | 9
3.3.4 Embedment procedure for single strain gage in mass concrete

The mounting of a single strain gage is usually done by embedding it near the top of a lift. The embedment
procedure is described below:
3.3.4.1 At any particular chainage where a single strain gage is to be installed, raise the level of the
concrete structure (example – concrete dam) to around 25 cm below requisite elevation. Mark
the positions on concreted surface where strain gages have to be installed. Raise the level of
concrete by around 50 cm leaving a trench of around 1 m x 1 m at the marked positions.
3.3.4.2 Back-fill trench to the level to provide a bed, in case the strain gage is to be mounted horizontally.
For strain gage to be installed vertically or at an inclination, back fill to the level that the strain
gage would be fully covered.
3.3.4.3 For strain gage to be installed horizontally, lay it in the correct position and direction. For strain
gage to be installed vertically or diagonally, use a battery operated drill machine to make a hole
for the gage in the correct position and direction. Insert the strain gage in to the hole.
3.3.4.4 Check angles, direction and depth. A protractor level is most useful for this application. A plumb
3.3.4.5 Vibrate around a deeply embedded gage or hand puddle around a shallow gage.
3.3.4.6 Continue back filling by hand and shovelling, using the same concrete as the mass concrete
used in the construction and hand puddle. When concrete is poured over the strain gage, take
care not to move the strain gage. Pour the concrete by hand until a 10 cm cushion is built up on
the top of each gage.
3.3.4.7 Finish with light shallow vibrations and protect the area with a light board barrier. Mark with area
with yellow painted metal stakes so that the strain gage installation is not damaged before the
concrete sets in.
3.3.4.8 The procedure for cable laying is separately dealt in § 3.5.
NOTE: For embedment and long term monitoring in a concrete dam, Encardio-rite offers the model
EDS-11V strain gage. This is a very sturdy electron beam welded strain gage. Taking proper
precautions, the model EDS-21V-E can also be used for embedment in a concrete dam. For
information and instructions on how to install EDS-21V-E in a concrete dam, the user is
recommended to go through instruction manual doc. # WI 6002.16 for EDS-11V strain gage.
A special spider shown below in figure 3.5 can be ordered from factory if it is required to mount
a group of EDS-21V-E strain gages in different orientations at any given location in a concrete
dam.
CAUTION: Special precaution and care should be taken if group of EDS-21V-E strain gages are mounted
on spider and used for embedment in a concrete dam. The EDS-21V-E is not as sturdy as
EDS-11V strain gage. Please ensure that the EDS-21V-E’s are not twisted or bent during
assembly on spider or when being covered by concrete. This will result in the strain gages
becoming ineffective.
Page | 10
S no Item qty
1 Spider base 1
2 Spider 1
3 Spider bush 1
4 Spider rod 5
7 Strain gage holder 5
8 Washer 10
PLAN
9 Ch. head screw, M3x8 10
(without spider rod)
8
7
4
3
2
5
1
ELEVATION
Figure 3.5 Strain gages installed in different orientations on spider/rosette

3.4.1 While concrete sets, take daily strain gage temperature reading and frequency2/1000 (digits)
reading of EDI-54V read-out logger. Go on taking these reading till concrete sets properly. Initial
reading ‘IR’ to be entered in EDI-54V should be considered only after concrete sets properly and
reading in digits is almost constant. The initial reading in digits is very important because all future
readings are referred to this initial reading to determine any change in stress. The initial reading in
digits along with the gage factor (around 4.361 x 10-3 µ strain/Hz2), constitute the calibration
constants required to be fed into the EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator as set-up data for any
Encardio-rite model EDS-21V-E embedment strain gage. The exact gage factor varies from batch
to batch and is given in the batch test certificate provided with each supply of strain gages.
3.4.2 Feed the calibration constants. In EDI-54V. In engineering units the reading should be displayed
at around 0.0 micro strain. Any subsequent reading at any other time will show an increase or
decrease from this reading and automatically give the micro strains developed during the period.
For example, in case tension increases, vibrating wire indicator may show a reading of 1243.0
micro strain or if the structure is subjected to compression, a typical reading may be - 437.2 micro
strain
Page | 11
initial reading to determine any change in stress. Consequently a minimum of two readings
taken daily after installation should be repeatable. It is good practice to take readings regularly
during the first few days to ensure that the data is stable and a correct initial reading is fed
into the vibrating wire indicator as a calibration constant. In case the readings are not
repeatable within a certain tolerance, the installation, strain gage or the vibrating wire indicator
may be defective. The cause must be evaluated and if there is a problem, it should be rectified.
3.5 Care of cable

strain gages require protection from mechanical damage caused by normal construction activity,
vehicular traffic and vandalism. Proper protection methods have to be devised by the user or the
designer.
CAUTION: Strain gages and cables require protection from mechanical damage caused by normal
construction activity, welding, vehicular traffic and vandalism.
deformation. Conduits should not be used where flow of water along the instrument leads must be
prevented. In case conduits are not used and the cable is subjected to tensile or compressive
same location, they may be terminated in an IP-67 terminal box and a multi-core cable used for
Scotch Cast 450 resin and hardener MSH 283 is normally used in India. Any suitable two
component cable jointing compound available in your Country can be used in place of this
compound.
is necessary to prevent errors in making proper connections and to ensure correct splicing if cable
is cut or broken.
With the best possible precautions, mistakes may still occur. Tags may get lost due to the cables getting
accidentally damaged. Encardio-rite uses the convention that looking from the observation post towards
the sensor, the cable from the most distant sensor is always at the left hand side. In that order, the cable
track or identification of cable ends. Proper identification and marking of cables should not be
taken casually. Care should be taken to put an identification tag at the point where the cable
comes out of the structure such that cable identity is not lost if the cable gets cut or damaged.
Page | 12
is suitably protected. Lead wires must be protected from mechanical damage and their ends
from water.

assembly. Some measure of lightning protection for the vibrating wire sensor is recommended if the sensor
is mounted in the field or in open areas and connected to the readout instrument through long wires.
However, these protection schemes will not protect the sensor against direct or near direct lightning strikes.
Lightning protection is generally not required if the connecting wire is very short, say only a few meters in
length, or both the sensor and the vibrating wire indicator is used inside a shielded structure, e.g. a building.
The EDS-21V-E vibrating wire strain gage is not available with any integral lightning protection component.
If lightning protection is desired one of the following options may be used:
• Surge arrestors like Gas Discharge Tubes (GDT) or TransZorbs® (registered trademark of General
structure itself.
• If the strain gage is mounted close to a junction box or a multiplexer, the surge arrestor component
• Lightning arrestor boards and enclosures are available from Encardio-rite, which can be installed at

EDS-21V-E vibrating wire strain gage is consequently limited to periodic checks of cable connections and
maintenance of terminals. In case of easy accessibility, either the strain gage or the sensor or both can be
replaced, if required.
be > 500 M Ohm.

 Check if there is a source of electrical noise nearby. General sources of electrical noise are motors,
 The reading may be outside the specified range (either compressive or tensile) of the strain gage? The
Page | 13

tight. Inspection of data collected might indicate this possibility.
Page | 14

Change in strain directly in µ strain from EDS-21V-E strain gage can be viewed from EDI-54V readout.
Thus, the change in strain between the initial state (ε0) and any subsequent state (ε1) can be directly read
on the EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator. Compressive strain is indicated by a ‘-‘ sign and tensile strain by a
‘+’ sign.
µ∈apparent = (ε1− ε0)

σ = E
ε
In case of concrete, it is difficult to precisely determine the modulus of elasticity as it depends upon several
factors like composition, stress on concrete and furthermore it also varies with time.
purpose of the measurement. If actual stress in the structural member is required, the initial reading is best
taken when the structural member is under no load, i.e., the gages should be mounted while the member
is perhaps evenly supported on a flat surface in a steel storage yard or warehouse. However, if the strain
gage readings are to be used in determining the change in stress or load imposed on the structural
member, initial reading should be taken after erection of the member.
changes always take off from some unknown datum. Sometimes it is possible, especially where temporary
supports are being monitored, to take the initial frequency at zero stress in the structural member after the
structure has been dismantled.
4.3 Strain gages for specific applications

Embedment strain gage is normally supplied in the range of ± 2500 micro strains for use in both tension
and compression applications.
If the customer is going to use the embedment strain gage in a predominantly tension application like in
pile pull test, strain gages with a range of more than 2,500 micro strains in tension should be ordered.
If the customer is going to use the embedment strain gage in a predominantly compression application like
in pile loading (compression) test, strain gages with a range of more than 2,500 micro strains in
compression should be ordered.
Page | 15

T = 1/[A + B(LnR) + C(LnR)3] - 273.2 °C
A = 1.4051 x 10-3
B = 2.369 x 10-4
C = 1.019 x 10-7
O hm T emp. ° C Ohm T emp. ° C Ohm T emp. ° C

20 1 .1k - 50 16 . 60 K - 10 24 1 7 + 30
18 7 .3 K - 49 15 . 72 K -9 23 1 7 31
17 4 .5 K - 48 14 . 90 K -8 22 2 1 32
16 2 .7 K - 47 14 . 12 K -7 21 3 0 33
15 1 .7 K - 46 13 . 39k -6 20 4 2 34
14 1 .6 K - 45 12 . 70 K -5 19 5 9 35
13 2 .2 K - 44 12 . 05 K -4 18 8 0 36
12 3 .5 K - 43 11 . 44 K -3 18 0 5 37
11 5 .4 K - 12 10 . 86 K -2 17 3 3 38
10 7 .9 K - 41 10 . 31 K -1 16 6 4 39
10 1 .0 K - 40 97 9 6 0 15 9 8 40
94 . 48 K - 39 93 1 0 +1 15 3 5 41
88 . 46 K - 38 88 5 1 2 14 7 5 42
82 . 87 K - 37 84 1 7 3 14 1 8 43
77 . 66 K - 36 80 0 6 4 13 6 3 44
72 . 81 K - 35 76 1 8 5 13 1 0 45
68 . 30 K - 34 72 5 2 6 12 6 0 46
64 . 09 K - 33 69 0 5 7 12 1 2 47
60 . 17 K - 32 65 7 6 8 11 6 7 48
56 . 51 K - 31 62 6 5 9 11 2 3 49
53 . 10 K - 30 59 7 1 10 10 8 1 50
49 . 91 K - 29 56 9 2 11 10 4 0 51
46 . 94 K - 28 54 2 7 12 10 0 2 52
44 . 16 K - 27 51 7 7 13 96 5 .0 53
41 . 56k - 26 49 3 9 14 92 9 .6 54
39 . 13 K - 25 47 1 4 15 89 5 .8 55
36 . 86 K - 24 45 0 0 16 86 3 .3 56
34 . 73 K - 23 42 9 7 17 83 2 .2 57
32 . 74 K - 22 41 0 5 18 80 2 .3 58
30 . 87 K - 21 39 2 2 19 77 3 .7 59
29 . 13 K - 20 37 4 8 20 74 6 .3 60
27 . 49 K - 19 35 8 3 21 71 9 .9 61
25 . 95 K - 18 34 2 6 22 69 4 .7 62
24 . 51 K - 17 32 7 7 23 67 0 .4 63
23 . 16 K - 16 31 3 5 24 64 7 .1 64
21 . 89 K - 15 30 0 0 25 62 4 .7 65
20 . 70 K - 14 28 7 2 26 60 3 .3 66
19 . 58 K - 13 27 5 0 27 58 2 .6 67
18 . 52 K - 12 26 3 3 28 56 2 .8 68
17 . 53 K - 11 25 2 3 29 52 5 .4 70
Page | 16

The thermal coefficient of expansion of the embedment strain gage is 11.0 ppm/°C and concrete varies
from 10 – 13 ppm/°C. Correction for temperature variation is seldom required in field use. In case correction
is required for any specific application, it is best to embed a strain gage from the same batch in a
Page | 17
6 WARRANTY
batteries
Page | 18
USERS’ MANUAL
VIBRATING WIRE CONCRETE PRESSURE

CELL FOR MEASUREMENT OF TOTAL
PRESSURE IN CONCRETE
MODEL EPS-30/36V-C
Doc # WI 6002.29 R03 | May 2004

Users’ Manual EPS-30/36V-C VW Concrete Pressure Cell for Measurement of Total Pressure In Concrete
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Concrete pressure cell 1
2 VIBRATING WIRE CONCRETE PRESSURE CELL 3

2.1 Introduction 3
2.2.1 Flat stress capsule 3
2.2.2 Pressure sensor with stainless steel body 3
2.2.3 Pinch tube 3
2.2.4 Cable connection 4
2.3 Concrete pressure cell construction 4
2.4 Pressure sensor operating principle 5
2.5 On interpreting data 5
2.7 Sample test certificate to be used with EDI-51V 8
2.8 Sample calibration constants for EPS-30V-C to be used with EDI-54V 9
2.9 Sample calibration constants for EPS-30V-C to be used with ESDL-30 10
4.2 Installation of concrete pressure cell in concrete dam 13
4.3 Cable laying in concrete dam 15
4.4 Measurement of earth pressure below raft foundations, floor slabs, pavements and
footings etc. 17

6.2 Pressure conversion table 21
6.3.1 Symptom: pressure cell reading unstable 21
6.3.2 Symptom: pressure cell fails to read 22
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
The theology of soil/rock formations is a complicated function of soil/rock type, stress history, shear and
normal stress levels, boundary and drainage conditions and many other environmental effects. Accurate
assessment of stress in foundation soil/rock formations and changes in it caused by construction and
loading is important for good engineering design. In instrumentation schemes for geotechnical or geo-
structural study associated with large civil engineering structures like tall buildings, dams, underground
tunnels etc., measurement of stress plays a very important part.
Encardio-rite manufactures a range of instruments for measurement of stress, including sensors, readout
unit and data logger.
Study of stress fall into two basic categories:
 Measurement of total stress at a point within a soil mass/foundation rock/concrete structure.
 Measurement of contact stress against the face of a structural element.
The development of vibrating wire stress cell introduced a reliable and fast method of taking stress readings
electrically. The cable is carried from the stress cell to the read out unit or data logger and is protected
against any possible damage during construction to give all around reliable data.
Encardio-rite vibrating wire concrete pressure cell (or stress cell) is the electrical sensor of choice as
frequency output of the vibrating wire sensor is almost immune to external noise, it is able to tolerate wet
wiring conditions common in geotechnical applications and is capable of transmission of signals to long
distances.
It has applications in the measurement of stress in soil, concrete mass or foundation rock including:
 Total stress on and within liners of underground excavations as input to improve design and
construction practices.
 Magnitude, orientation and distribution of principal stresses within embankments and dams as input
to improve design and construction practices.
 Total stress for studying soil/structure interaction behaviour.
For details of vibrating wire stress cell manufactured by Encardio-rite, refer to data sheet 1090-97w.
1.1 Concrete pressure cell
The concrete pressure cell is designed to measure total pressure in concrete. Proper evaluation of total
pressure may help in:
 Verifying design assumptions that will promote safer and more economical design and construction.
 Monitoring for safety and warning of pressure in excess of those the structure is designed to withstand.
The Encardio-rite concrete pressure cell basically consists of a flexible circular flat capsule, constructed
from two stainless steel discs welded around the periphery and connected to a specially designed
Encardio-rite pressure transducer by a stainless steel tube. A pinch tube is provided to ensure positive
contact between the concrete and the circular flat discs. The whole system is fluid filled.
The vibrating wire pressure transducer incorporates the latest vibrating wire technology to provide remote
and digital readout. Total pressure cell manufactured by Encardio-rite, designated with a suffix ‘C’ is used
for measuring stress in concrete.
Page | 1
1.2 Specifications
Type Vibrating wire
Model EPS-30/31/32/33/34/35/36V-C
Range (kg/cm2) 5, 10, 20, 35, 50, 100, specify
Over range limit 150 % of range upto 200 kg/cm2; 120 % of range for > 200 kg/cm2
Enclosure Stainless steel
Thermistor Provided for temperature measurement
Read out EDI-54V
attention.

This users’ manual is intended to provide sufficient information for making optimum use of vibrating wire
stress cell in your application. This users manual covers description of the stress cell with its connected
accessories, the installation procedure and maintenance of the sensor, method of taking observations and
recording data from the sensor.
instruction manuals cannot provide for each and every condition in the field that may affect
the performance of the sensor. Also, blindly following the instruction manual will not guarantee
success. Sometimes, depending upon field conditions, installation personnel will have to
For an insight into the concrete pressure cell: See § 2 ‘Vibrating wire concrete pressure cell’.
For a typical test certificate on concrete pressure cell: See § 2.7 ‘Sample test certificate’.
For complete operating procedure of Vibrating Wire Readout Unit EDI-54V: See:’Doc. # WI 6002.112’
For installation of concrete pressure cell: See § 4 ‘Installation procedure’.
For temperature measurement by thermistor: See § 5 ‘Temperature measurement’.
For trouble shooting: See § 6.3 ‘Trouble shooting’.
Page | 2
2 VIBRATING WIRE CONCRETE PRESSURE CELL
2.1 Introduction
Encardio-rite concrete pressure cell is also called total pressure cell or total stress cell. It measures stress
when embedded in concrete structures. Cell responds not only to concrete pressure but also to pore water
pressure and therefore is termed as total pressure or total stress. A simultaneous measurement of pore
water pressure (ρ), using a piezometer, is necessary to separate the effective stress (σ) from the total
stress (σ t) as defined by Terzaghi’s principle of effective stress:
σt=σ+ρ
NOTE: The concrete pressure cell measures total stress. In case effective stress is to be measured
a pore pressure meter must be installed close by.
2.2.1 Flat stress capsule

The flat pressure capsule is 200 mm φ x 7 mm
thick. It is constructed from two stainless steel
plates electron beam welded together around the
periphery to form a diaphragm so as to leave a
narrow space between the plates. The flat
pressure capsule is connected to a standard
Encardio-rite vibrating wire pressure sensor
through a 6 mm o.d. stainless steel tube welded
on one side to pressure capsule and on other side
to pressure transducer. Enclosed space is
completely filled with de-aired fluid. De-airing
materially improves the fluid stiffness and the
performance of the cell. The concrete pressure
Figure 2.1
cell uses an all welded construction such that
space confining hydraulic fluid is entirely metal, not requiring ‘O’ rings that tend to trap air and reduce cell
stiffness.
2.2.2 Pressure sensor with stainless steel body

The pressure sensor constitutes of a vibrating wire and coil magnet assembly enclosed in a stainless steel
body which is electron beam welded to the diaphragm. This results in a vacuum of 1/1000 Torr inside the
sensor making it completely immune to the effect of any ingress of water. As the pressure sensor is of
stainless steel construction, it is not affected by normal chemical corrosion at locations in which it is used.
The pressure sensor normally employed is the Encardio-rite pore pressure meter model EPP-30/36V that
is available in several different pressure ranges (3, 5, 10, 20, 35, 50 & 100 kg/cm2). Sensors upto capacity
of 350 kg/cm2 are also available.
A tripolar plasma surge arrestor inside the transducer housing protects the vibrating wire pluck and read
A thermistor is provided to monitor temperature.
2.2.3 Pinch tube
One end of 600 mm long pinch tube filled with hydraulic fluid is welded to pressure sensor. Other end is
capped by welding. During concrete lining, temperature very often rises, causing capsule to expand in still
green concrete. On cooling, capsule contracts, which if allowed to remain as such, would prevent
transmission of pressure from concrete to cell. Purpose of pinch tube is to inflate capsule after concrete
Page | 3
around it fully cures and cools off to ambient temperature. A crimping tool is used to squeeze hydraulic
fluid in pinch tube. The fluid is forced out of tube into capsule, which expands until the gap is eliminated.
2.2.4 Cable connection
Leads from coil magnet are terminated on a glass to metal seal that is integrally electron beam welded to
stainless steel body of pressure sensor. The two pins marked red and black are connected to coil magnet.
The other two pins are connected to a thermistor for measurement of temperature. Cable joint housing and
cable gland is provided for cable connection. Cable is attached to sensor in a sealed, water-resistant
manner. For concrete pressure cell located inside a concrete block, cable may be armoured and provided
with strain relief at cell to reduce likelihood of pull-out. For cable jointing, refer to Users Manual 6002.11.
2.3 Concrete pressure cell construction
2.3.1 Dimensional details of round cell manufactured by Encardio-rite is standardized and given below.
S.S. diaphragms
Piezometer S.S. tubing

Ø6.0 x 165 long
Jelly filled cable
Pinch tube
Ø6.0 x 600 long
75.0 121.0 165.0 Ø200.0
Figure 2.2 - concrete pressure cell with circular diaphragm
2.3.2 Concrete pressure cells are also available with rectangular diaphragm in sizes of 100 mm x 200
mm, 150 mm x 250 mm and 200 x 300 mm. Standard thickness is 7 mm giving an aspect ratio
greater than 20. Dimensional details of rectangular concrete pressure cell are as follows:
Sensing plate
Piezometer S S tubing
Ø6.0 x 165 long
b
Jelly filled cable

Pinch tube
Ø6.0 x 600 long
75.0 121.0 165.0 l
Figure 2.3 - concrete pressure cell with rectangular diaphragm
Page | 4
2.4 Pressure sensor operating principle

Pressure sensor of a vibrating wire stress cell consists of a magnetic, high tensile strength stretched wire,
one end of which is anchored and the other end fixed to a circular diaphragm. The diaphragm deflects in
some proportion to applied pressure. Any change in pressure, deflects diaphragm proportionally affecting
tension in stretched wire and in turns frequency of vibration The stress is proportional to the square of the
The wire is plucked by a coil magnet. Proportionate to the tension in wire, it resonates at a frequency ‘f’’,
f = [σg/ρ]1/2/2l Hz
where,σ = tension of wire in kg/cm 2

g = 980 cm/sec2
The length of the wire in the stress cell being 5.5 cm, the formula can be reduced to:
f = 32 [σ]1/2 Hz
The resonant frequency with which the wire vibrates, induces an alternating current in the coil magnet. This
is read by the read out unit.
2.5 On interpreting data
The hydraulic type stress cell described above is a standard internationally used design and is
manufactured by most of the reputed manufacturers. Depending upon the application and how and where
it is used, it may generally give a reading upto 10 % different from the actual. Even though the stress cell
is embedded in concrete, to understand the reason for this difference in reading from the actual, the
following explanation using soil as an example is given:
2.5.1 Two flat plates are welded together at the periphery and are separated by a small gap filled with
hydraulic fluid. The concrete pressure squeezes the two plates together building up a pressure on
the fluid. The plates being thin relative to their lateral extent, are quite flexible. However, please
note that there is some supporting effect of the welded periphery at center of the plate that may
affect the reading.
2.5.2 Introduction of a flat stress cell into a mass alters stress field dependent on relative stiffness of cell
with respect to surrounding material and also with respect to aspect ratio of cell, that is ratio of
width of the cell to its thickness. A thick cell will alter stress more than a thin cell. Therefore, a thin
stiff cell is best and studies have shown an aspect ratio of at least 20 to 1 to be desirable.
2.5.3 Ideally, the cell should be as stiff (compressible) as the material in which it is embedded. In
practice, this is difficult. This is explained by the following examples in which the surrounding
material could be soil or rockfill.
2.5.4 If the cell is stiffer (less compressible) than the material in which it is embedded (like soil) then it
will over-register the pressure because a zone of material immediately around the cell is “sheltered”
by the cell and does not experience the full pressure.
2.3.3 There is a stress concentration (figure 2.4) at the rigid rim but in the center of the cell the stress is
only slightly higher than the mean stress, that is, only slightly higher than the normal stress had
the pressure cell not been there.
Page | 5
Mean
stress
0
Cell
Figure 2.4 - stress redistribution - weak surrounding material with stiff cell a
2.5.5 In a stronger surrounding material the de-stressed zone around the edge of the cell is more
extensive and hence at the center of the cell the degree of over-registration of the mean stress is
greater. This is represented schematically in Figure 2.5.
Mean
stress
0
Cell
Figure 2.5 - stress redistribution -. Strong surrounding material with stiff cell
2.5.6 In a stiff surrounding material like concrete the cell may be less stiff (more compressible), in which
case the cell will under-register the mean stress as the stress in the surrounding material tends to
“bridge” around the cell. This is represented schematically in Figure 2.6.
Mean
stress
0
Cell
Figure 2.6 - stress redistribution - stiff surrounding material with weak cell
2.5.7 The last example (figure 2.6) is more applicable to concrete. Encardio-rite concrete pressure cells
generally show a maximum degree of under-registration as 10% of the mean stress.
Page | 6
2.5.8 Any closed hydraulic system is sensitive to temperature effects. The stress cell when embedded
in concrete acts like a closed hydraulic system. Any change in temperature of the surrounding
concrete therefore gives an unauthentic or false reading, the magnitude of which depends upon
the elasticity of the surrounding concrete and the relative coefficient of expansions of the materials
in contact & the filled fluid inside the stress cell. In some cases this effect may be high enough to
cause permanent damage to the pressure transducer and should be considered in determining the
capacity of the sensor ordered. A thermistor is incorporated in each sensor to assist in determining
temperature compensation factors that may be calculated by closely observing the in-situ stress
cell performance.
The model EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator (figure 2.6
(a)) is a microprocessor-based read-out unit for use

tion coefficients from 10,000 vibrating wire sensors
so that the value of the measured parameter from Fig 2.6 (a) – Vibrating wire indicator
these sensors can be shown directly in proper engi-
neering units. For transducers with built-in interchangeable thermistor, it can also display the temperature
of the transducer directly in degree Centigrade.
cients. The gage factor of the model EPS-30V-C concrete pressure cell is given in the test certificate pro-
vided with every supply. The initial reading IR will be the actual reading in digits from the pressure cell after
it is embedded and properly set in concrete.
An internal 6 V 4 Ah rechargeable sealed maintenance-free battery is used to provide power to the vibrating
Page | 7
2.7 Sample test certificate to be used with EDI-51V
TEST CERTIFICATE
DWT Traceable to standard no. NPL /3373/05/20/2002
Customer
P.O.No.
Instrument Concrete Pressure cell Date 01.03.2004
Serial number 4346 Temperature 23°C
Capacity 35kg/cm² Atm. pressure 1.019kg/cm²
Pressure transducer calibration data

Input
pressure Observed value Average End Point
kg/cm² Up1 Down Up2 Fit
(Digit) (Digit) (Digit) (Digit) (kg/cm²)
0.0 6690.5 6687.9 6687.9 6689 0.000
7.0 6321.2 6328.7 6322.7 6322 7.140
14.0 5963.4 5969.2 5964.8 5964 14.097
21.0 5605.1 5608.4 5605.1 5605 21.078
28.0 5246.8 5249.6 5246.8 5247 28.042
35.0 4889.0 4889.0 4889.0 4889 35.000
Error (%FS) 0.40

Digit f ² X 10E-3
Pressure transducer gage factor 1.944E-02 kg/cm²/digit
Thermal factor 0.008 kg/cm²/°C
Concrete pressure cell calibration data
Cell constant (multiplier) 1.007

Linear gage factor 1.958E-02 kg/cm²/digit

Red & black Signal Green & white Thermistor
Page | 8
2.8 Sample calibration constants for EPS-30V-C to be used with EDI-54V
Page | 9
2.9 Sample calibration constants for EPS-30V-C to be used with ESDL-30
Page | 10
The following tools and accessories are required for proper cable jointing and installation of the stress cell
(also refer users manual on cable jointing - 6002.11:

3.2 Rosin 63/37 solder wire RF-3C, 30 swg
Products Ltd. or equivalent. For alternatives, refer to note on page 3-4 of Encardio-rite user’s man-
ual “cable jointing of sensors” 6002.11)
3.6 Spanner 28/32 and 38/40
3.8 Hammer
3.9 Cable Cutter
3.11 Wire Stripper
3.12 Pliers 160 mm
3.13 Pouring funnel
3.14 Stainless steel rod 2 mm φ 150 mm length
3.15 Spatula
3.17 Fixture for jointing upto six concrete pressure cells (refer figure 3.1)
3.18 Toothbrush
3.19 Cloth for cleaning (lintless)
3.20 75 mm nails - around 10 per sensor
3.21 Crimping tool
3.23 Vibrating Wire Indicator EDI-54V
NOTE: A simple wooden fixture as shown below may be fabricated at site for faster cable jointing. It
is also available from Encardio-rite.
700
70 0
0 70
Figure 3.1
Page | 11

Two of the terminals are marked with red and black colors. These are internally wired to the coil of
the magnet assembly inside the sensor. The other two terminals are utilized for measurement of
temperature using a thermistor. Clean the terminals with a toothbrush.
CAUTION: Do not use any acetone for cleaning as it may damage the glass to metal seal.
 Coil resistance measured by a digital multimeter between red and black pins, should lie between 120-
150 Ohm. Determine resistance at room temperature from thermistor temperature chart in § 5. This
resistance should be equal to that between pins marked green and white. For example, in case the
temperature is 25oC, this resistance would be 3,000 Ohm.
 Connect sensor to Encardio-rite model EDI-54V portable readout unit and switch it on. The display
will show something like:
Freq: 2629.8 Hz
2.3.4 Where the actual figure will vary depending on the transducer connected to the indicator.
2.3.5 For the stress cell, the initial reading (offset) in frequency should lie between 2,250 - 2,750 Hz.
 Check whether sensor is responding to changes in pressure. A crude but simple and very effective
method of checking whether sensor is responding to changes in pressure is as follows:
• Press diaphragm with thumb and verify that the frequency reading on the indicator decreases.
• This change in reading ensures that the deformation produced by the pressure of the thumb
on the diaphragm is transmitted to the vibrating wire sensing element.
4.1.3 Connect required length of cable to sensor as described in the operating manual on cable jointing
- 6002.11.
NOTE: The cable should always be unreeled by turning the cable drum so that the cable is laid out
on the flooring. Cables should never by unreeled by pulling on the cable itself as the internal
Under no circumstances should the cable be unwound from any one side of the drum. This can happen,
for example, when the cable drum is kept on its side and the cable is taken out without rolling
the drum.
4.1.4 Check working of the sensor again following procedure described above in § 4.1.2.
the cable jointing. For the model CS 0401 cable, the resistance is 26 Ohm/km and for the
model CS 0406 cable, the resistance is 48 Ohm/km. (multiply by 2 for both leads). In case
any other cable is used, make the necessary addition in the resistance value.
Page | 12
4.1.5 Cable should be marked with permanent markers every 5 m by use of stainless steel tags tied by
stainless steel wire stamped with appropriate concrete pressure cell number. Alternatively, plastic
tabs are also available. Temporary identification can be done by writing serial number of sensor,
its code number and location at which it is installed, on a strip of paper, placing strip on cable and
covering it with a transparent plastic cello tape. Permanent identification is necessary to prevent
errors in making proper connections in junction box and to insure correct splicing if cable is cut or
broken.
CAUTION: Single most important factor leading to loss of worthwhile data from sensors is losing track of
identification of cable ends. Proper identification and marking of cables is not to be taken
casually. Care should also be taken to put an identification tag at point where cable comes
out of structure such that cable identity is not lost if cable gets accidentally cut.
4.2 Installation of concrete pressure cell in concrete dam
Method of installation of concrete pressure cell in a concrete dam is described below. The same method
may be adopted to your particular application to be used for other installations.
Installing concrete pressure cell is a fairly simple operation. In case effective stress is to be determined, a
pore pressure meter must be installed close by. A concrete pressure cell is normally installed with the flat
surfaces horizontal to measure vertical stress. However, it can be placed at other orientations inside fill, to
measure stress in other directions i.e. a cell placed with flat surfaces vertical will measure horizontal stress
in a direction perpendicular to diaphragm of the cell.
NOTE: Concrete pressure cell measures the total stress. In case effective stress is to be measured
4.2.1 Allow for filling of dam to continue to an elevation of around 25 cm higher than where concrete
pressure cell is to be mounted, leaving a 1 m x 1 m x 25 cm deep trench at position where sensor
is to be finally placed. A larger trench may be left in case concrete pressure cell is to be installed
along with other sensors, specially strain rosette and no stress strain gage that require much more
space.
4.2.2 Prepare concrete surface of the 1 m x 1 m sensor trench by smoothing it off and flattening it as
much as possible with any available hand tool, chisel or hammer. Hammer or grout 75 mm nails
around 25 mm deep into the surface of the trench to mark the periphery around the sensing
diaphragm and the pressure transducer. Alternatively, little pieces of small diameter reinforced
bars may be grouted in bore holes drilled adjacent to the location where the cell would be located.
4.2.3 Carefully bend the pinch tube such that when the stress cell is installed, it will protrude out from
the top. It can also be wrapped in foam etc. such that it can be easily retrieved later on.
NOTE: Record initial reading and temperature with EDI-54V for permanent record, when cell is
placed in position and is about to be covered with fill material. This will form the zero reading
for the stress cell. Note the barometric pressure at time of taking the initial reading.
4.2.4 To accommodate irregularities in concrete surface, it is necessary to fill space between surface
and cell with quick setting mortar (see figure 4.1 on next page). Trowel a quick setting mortar pad
around 30 mm deep on the surface of concrete in the trench. Press down the cell onto the pad
with a little rotary motion of hands, causing the mortar to extrude sideways thus eliminating any air
bubbles or spaces between the cell and the ground. Grip the cell firmly by bending the nails or the
reinforced bars on the sides of the cell. Be careful that in doing this, the cell is not damaged. This
can be verified by comparing the zero reading with the initial offset (see § 4.1.2).
4.2.5 Using a hand shovel, cover the concrete pressure cell with the quick setting mortar and fill the 25
cm. trench with concrete. Compact with a light duty pneumatic or petrol backfill tamper, taking care
that the sensor remains well protected.
Page | 13
2.3.6 A weighted tripod can be used to hold stress cell in place until concrete hardens. The pinch tube
is arranged to protrude above the bonding layer and when concrete has hardened it is used to
pressurize cell and ensure good contact between cell and surrounding concrete.
Pinch tube
S.S. diaphragm
Sensor
Nails
Mortar pad
Concrete
Cable trench
Cable
Figure 4.1
4.2.6 Once concrete sets, cell can be inflated using pinch tube and a special crimping tool. Connect cell
to readout unit and gently squeeze pinch tube flat, using tool. Start squeezing around 25 mm from
capped end and proceed downwards towards concrete layer. In case cell diaphragm is in good
contact with concrete, pinching will immediately cause a pressure rise in the cell. Stop pinching.
However in case cell diaphragm expands inside any space that may exist, pressure rise
accompanying each pinch will be small. As soon as cell starts to fill space, pressure rise with each
pinch will become larger.
2.3.7 Graph of readings would show a pronounced “knee” where contact between cell diaphragm and
concrete is made. As soon as this “knee” is passed, squeezing of pinch tube should be immediately
stopped. Bend pinch tube out of way such that it lays flat on concrete surface.
Page | 14
CAUTION: Do not squeeze pinch tube closer

than 25 mm from end; otherwise seal
plugging end of tube could be
damaged. As tube is progressively
squeezed flat, fluid is forced out of
pinch tube into cell and pressure will
Pressure
rise. It is necessary to make a chart
showing relationship between length
of flattened pinch tube and Knee
corresponding pressure reading. Stop pinching
CAUTION: Continued pinching after the cell has

made good contact would result in the
Length of tube pinched
reduction of the useful range of the
stress cell. It can also cause the Figure 4.2
concrete around the cell to split open
which is not desirable and could lead
to erroneous readings.
4.2.7 Record new initial stress reading with EDI-54V after cell has stabilized.
NOTE: First layer of material over sensor diaphragm was around 200 mm high. Similar layers of
material should be put over this and compacted properly until at least 600 mm of material has
been placed. Rubber tired equipment can now cross this location, but no vibratory rollers
should be permitted over the sensor until a compacted thickness of at least 1 m is laid.
4.3 Cable laying in concrete dam
Very careful and skilled cabling is required in installation of the concrete pressure cell as the sensor/cable
joint and a large part of the cable is permanently embedded and no future access is available for any
maintenance and corrective action (see figure 4.4).
Procedure for laying of cables differs with individual installations. In general, however, all installations have
following common requirement:
 The cable must be protected from damage by angular and sharp particles of the material in which the
cable is embedded.
 The cable must be protected from damage by vibrators and compaction equipment.
 The cable must be protected from any possible stretching. Special care should be taken in case it has
to be routed through different blocks.
 Cables may be spliced without affecting the sensor reading; nevertheless splicing should be avoided
wherever possible. If necessary, use special cable jointing kits available from the factory.
Page | 15
EL-372
Plumb line
20 m
Stress
Strain
EL-352 No stress strain
Temperature
EL-342
Uplift
Pore
EL-332
Joint
Borehole extensometer
EL-322
Seepage measurement
EL-315
EL-310
Figure 4.3
In a concrete dam, a number of concrete pressure cells along with other sensors are installed at selected
elevations at different cross sections, as illustrated in figure 4.3 above. For example, three pore pressure
meters, five strain rosettes, five no stress strain containers, five stress cells and two temperature meters
are installed at elevation 312 m. Cables from these sensors have to be taken to junction boxes to be
mounted inside one of the cross galleries. Cable 25 mm apart
The gallery may be above or below the Cable trench
elevation at which the sensors are to be Sensor
installed. As a general practice, all cables
from sensors at any particular elevation are
To observation room
routed to a vertical shaft on the upstream

side of the dam. The cables are then
1000
lowered or lifted through the vertical shaft to

the gallery.
Refer to figure 4.4 for details of cable

trench/channel for routing the cable from Offset trench
sensors. The cable from the sensors should
be routed through a carefully marked
channel trench ending into the vertical shaft Cable trench
and running parallel to the line of sensors. 1000 400 to 800 fill with
concrete
Depth and width of channel trench depends
upon number of cables trench has to carry.
100-300
In case all cables at an elevation fit in one
row, depth of channel can be around 10 cm.
If more than one row is required to lay all Figu r e 4. 4
cables, the depth should be increased by 10
Page | 16
cm per row. The channel trench should be properly cleaned and leveled. Any sharp rocks or objects should
be removed to prevent the cable from accidentally getting damaged when it is laid.
As access galleries are available in concrete dams, the cable from the sensors is first routed to the gallery.
These cables may be terminated in junction boxes inside the gallery. The data from the various sensors
can then be taken or logged from the junction boxes with the help of a read out unit or data logger.
Alternatively, if required, the signals from the junction boxes may be carried through multi core cables to
any observation room outside the dam structure.
The center distance between successive cables in cable trench should be kept at a distance of 25 mm.
After laying the cables in any row, it should be covered with concrete by a hand shovel to a depth of around
10 cm and allowed to set. This is necessary to prevent any accidental damage to the cables.
Cables coming out of the sensors into the cable trench should be properly tagged. With the best possible
precautions, mistakes may still occur. Tags may get lost due to the cable getting accidentally cut. Encardio-
rite uses the convention that looking from the end of the trench towards the sensor, the cable from the most
distant sensor is always at the left hand side and the offset trenches are to the right of the cable trench. In
that order, the cable from the closest sensor is at the extreme right.
from which they come out of the dam body. The tags should be of a non-corrosive material
like stainless steel or plastics.
Similar precautions must be taken when the cables come out from the cable trenches into the vertical shaft.
Encardio-rite uses the convention that looking from the vertical shaft end towards the sensor, the cable
from the most distant sensor is always at the left hand side. In that order, the cable from the closest sensor
is at the extreme right. It is good practice to grout the cable in the vertical shaft at 2 m distances such that
the left to right alignment is maintained.
As an Encardio-rite convention, again, the cable from the most distant sensor at any elevation should be
connected to the extreme left socket in the junction box. Succeeding cables from the sensors are
connected progressively towards the right in the junction box.
CAUTION: Care should be exercised when installing instrument cables to keep them as far away as
possible from sources of electrical interference such as power lines, generators, motors,
transformers, arc welders, etc. Cables should never be buried or run with AC power lines.
Instrument cables will pick up 50 or 60 Hz (or other frequency) noise from the power cable
and this will likely cause a problem obtaining a stable reading. Contact the factory concerning
filtering options available for use with dataloggers and readouts should difficulties arise.
4.4 Measurement of earth pressure below raft foundations, floor slabs, pavements and footings
etc.
Great care and good designing is required to measure interface earth pressure for this application. At first
thought, one would install an interface pressure cell (model EPS-30/36-1/I) to measure the earth pressure.
Under certain conditions, this is a solution. However, the problem faced could be as follows:
 The contact stress distribution may not be uniform due to varying properties of soil and varying
degrees of its compaction. The contact stress at any location may not be typical of surrounding
locations.
 A stress cell installed in soil at the interface could result in an irregular and inconsistent zone around
the cell having different, more fine grained material under a lesser degree of compaction. This could
be due to soil around stress cell being poorly compacted to avoid damage to it.
Page | 17
This is not a problem in an earth fill as earth above simply settles

downward to fill voids and consolidate the ground. In a concrete slab
Building
immediately above interface cell this consolidation may not take place.
Under influence of vibration, rain water or other factors, space around
sensor may increase so that cell becomes loose from concrete above.
In such a situation interface cell will register a very low stress that does
not change as load increases.
Raft Foundation Concrete
A better solution is to use a concrete pressure cell with a pinch tube
and cast it inside the concrete. Press the sensor on an initial concrete
bonding layer spread over surface of the ground such that it is a little
Compacted Soil
above the interface. Cover it with concrete. A weighted tripod may be
used to hold sensor in position until concrete hardens. Use pinch tube Concrete Stress Cell
Sensor Cable
Piles
to pressurize the stress cell and ensure good contact between cell and
surrounding concrete after the concrete sets.
Figure 4.5
Page | 18
T herm i st o r t yp e: Dale 1C3001-B3 or equivalent

T = 1/[A + B(LnR) + C(LnR)3] - 273.2 oC
A = 1.4051 x 10-3
B = 2.369 x 10-4
C = 1.019 x 10-7
Ohm temp. oC Ohm temp. oC Ohm temp. oC
201.1k -50 16.60K -10 2417 +30
187.3K -49 15.72K -9 2317 31
174.5K -48 14.90K -8 2221 32
162.7K -47 14.12K -7 2130 33
151.7K -46 13.39k -6 2042 34
141.6K -45 12.70K -5 1959 35
132.2K -44 12.05K -4 1880 36
123.5K -43 11.44K -3 1805 37
115.4K -12 10.86K -2 1733 38
107.9K -41 10.31K -1 1664 39
101.0K -40 9796 0 1598 40
94.48K -39 9310 +1 1535 41
88.46K -38 8851 2 1475 42
82.87K -37 8417 3 1418 43
77.66K -36 8006 4 1363 44
72.81K -35 7618 5 1310 45
68.30K -34 7252 6 1260 46
64.09K -33 6905 7 1212 47
60.17K -32 6576 8 1167 48
56.51K -31 6265 9 1123 49
53.10K -30 5971 10 1081 50
49.91K -29 5692 11 1040 51
46.94K -28 5427 12 1002 52
44.16K -27 5177 13 965.0 53
41.56k -26 4939 14 929.6 54
39.13K -25 4714 15 895.8 55
36.86K -24 4500 16 863.3 56
34.73K -23 4297 17 832.2 57
32.74K -22 4105 18 802.3 58
30.87K -21 3922 19 773.7 59
29.13K -20 3748 20 746.3 60
27.49K -19 3583 21 719.9 61
25.95K -18 3426 22 694.7 62
24.51K -17 3277 23 670.4 63
23.16K -16 3135 24 647.1 64
21.89K -15 3000 25 624.7 65
20.70K -14 2872 26 603.3 66
19.58K -13 2750 27 582.6 67
18.52K -12 2633 28 562.8 68
17.53K -11 2523 29 525.4 70
Thermistor for temperature measurement is incorporated in the sensor. The thermistor gives a varying
resistance output related to the temperature (see § 5.1). The thermistor is connected between the green
Page | 19
and white leads. The resistance can be measured with an Ohmmeter. The cable resistance may be
subtracted from the Ohmmeter reading to get the correct thermistor resistance. However the effect is small
and is usually ignored.
The Encardio-rite model EDI-54V read-out unit gives the temperature from the thermistor reading directly
in engineering units.
A pressure-temperature variation correlation factor (k) is provided in the test certificate for the pressure
sensor of concrete pressure cell. In case correction for temperature effect is required in cell, use following
equation:
P c o r r e c t i o n = K (current temperature - initial temperature)
The temperature correction value is added to the pressure value read from the EDI-54V portable read-out.
The effect of the temperature coefficient of expansion of concrete on the stress cell is almost impossible
to determine. Temperature effect caused by mismatch between the temperature coefficient of cell and
surrounded concrete is not quantifiable and hence no correction factor for this effect is supplied. If required,
user may conduct his own tests under controlled conditions. Please once read again § 2.5.8 in this
connection.
Page | 20

The pressure transducer used in the Encardio-rite vibrating wire concrete pressure cell is evacuated and
hermetically sealed and will respond to barometric pressure fluctuation. In fact all concrete pressure cells
will respond to barometric pressure fluctuations unless they are manufactured in the gage pressure version
and a capillary tube is provided in the cable which opens into the atmosphere.
Since the magnitude of barometric pressure fluctuations is of the order of +/-0.03 kg/cm2, correction is
generally not required. If a correction for these fluctuations is required then it is necessary to record the
barometric pressure at the time of taking the reading. The initial barometric pressure corresponding to the
zero reading at the time of installation is to be considered (refer to second note in § 4.2). The correction
can be made by using the following equation:

The pressure correction value is added to the pressure value read from the EDI-54V portable read-out.
6.2 Pressure conversion table
The test certificate gives the calibration coefficients suitable for reading in kg/cm 2. To convert the output to
other engineering units, multiply the reading obtained from the model EDI-54V portable read-out unit in by
the conversion factor given below:
bar 0.981
atm. 0.968
mm Hg 735.6
“ Hg 28.96
psi 14.22
“ H2O 393.7
‘H2O 32.81
m H2O 10
Newton/cm2 9.807
kPa 98.07
mPa 0.098
Concrete pressure cell is embedded in concrete. Once installed, the cell is usually inaccessible and
remedial action is limited. Maintenance and trouble shooting is consequently confined to periodic checks
of cable connection and functioning of the read-out unit. Refer the following list of problems and possible
solutions should problems arise. For any additional help, consult the factory.
6.3.1 Symptom: pressure cell reading unstable
be > 500 m Ohm. If not, cut a meter or so from the end of cable and check again.
 Does the read-out work with another concrete pressure cell? If not, the read-out may have a low
battery or be malfunctioning. Consult the manual of the readout unit for charging or trouble shooting
instructions.
Page | 21
 Check if there a source of electrical noise nearby? General sources of electrical noise are motors,
6.3.2 Symptom: pressure cell fails to read

an Ohm meter. It should be within 120 - 150 Ohm. The correct value is given in the concrete pressure
cell test certificate. Please add the cable resistance when checking. For the model CS 0401 cable,
the resistance is 26 Ohm/km and for the model CS 0406 cable, the resistance is 48 Ohm/km. (multiply
by 2 for both leads). In case any other cable is used, make the necessary addition in the resistance
value. If the resistance reads infinite or a very high value, a cut in the cable is suspected. If the
resistance reads very low (<100 Ohm), a short in the cable is likely.
 Does the read-out work with another concrete pressure cell? If not, the read-out may have a low
battery or be malfunctioning. Consult the manual of the readout unit for charging or trouble shooting
instructions.
Page | 22
USERS’ MANUAL
JACKOUT PRESSURE CELL

VIBRATING WIRE TYPE
MODEL EPS-30V-J
Doc. # WI 6002.35 R03 | May 2019

Users’ Manual Vibrating wire jackout pressure cell
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
2 VIBRATING WIRE JACK-OUT PRESSURE CELL 3

2.1 Introduction 3
2.2.2 Pressure sensor 3
2.2.4 Support plate 4
4.2 Installation of jack-out pressure cell in a diaphragm or slurry wall 9

www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
The rheology of soil/rock formations is a complex function of soil/rock type, stress history, shear and
normal stress levels, boundary and drainage conditions and many other environmental effects. The
accurate assessment of stress in foundation soil/rock formations and their changes caused by
construction and loading is important for good engineering design. In any instrumentation scheme for
geo-technical or geo-structural study associated with large civil engineering structures like tall buildings,
dams, underground tunnels etc., measurement of stress plays a very important part. Encardio-rite
manufactures a range of instruments for the measurement of stress, including sensors, readout unit and
data logger.
The study of stress fall into two basic categories:
 Measurement of total stress at a point within a soil mass/mass concrete/foundation rock.

 Measurement of contact stress against the face of a structural element like a diaphragm wall.
The development of a range of vibrating wire pressure cells introduced a reliable and fast method of
taking stress readings electrically. The cable is carried from the pressure cell to the read out unit or data
logger and is protected against any possible damage during construction to give all around reliable data.
Encardio-rite jackout pressure cell is the electrical sensor of choice as frequency output of vibrating wire
sensor is almost immune to external noise, it is able to tolerate wet wiring conditions common in
geotechnical applications and is capable of transmission of signals to long distances. It has applications in
measurement of stresses in soil, concrete mass, soil concrete interface or foundation rock including:
 Measurement of total soil pressure on back side of a slurry or diaphragm wall.

 Magnitude, orientation and distribution of principal stresses within embankments and dams as
input to improve design and construction practices
 Total stress for studying soil/structure interaction behaviour
In this manual, the use of the jack-out pressure cell to measure the total soil pressure on the backside of
a slurry wall is described. For other applications, the user is expected to modify the installation procedure
according to his needs and requirement.
The Encardio-rite jack-out pressure cell basically consists of a flexible, circular flat capsule, constructed
from two stainless steel discs welded around the periphery and connected to a specially designed
Encardio-rite vibrating wire pressure transducer. The whole system is fluid filled. The vibrating wire
pressure transducer incorporates the latest vibrating wire technology to provide remote digital readout.
This user’s manual covers description of the vibrating wire jack-out pressure cell with its connected
accessories, the operating principle, the installation procedure, method of taking observations and
recording the data from the sensor.

attention.
Page | 1

This users’ manual is intended to provide sufficient information for making optimum use of jackout
pressure cell in your application. This users’ manual covers description of the stress cell with its
connected accessories, the installation procedure and maintenance of the sensor, method of taking
observations and recording data from the sensor.
installation work. The intricacies involved in installation are such that even if a single
the performance of the sensor. Also, blindly following the instruction manual will not
guarantee success. Sometimes, depending upon field conditions, installation personnel will
have to consciously depart from the written text and use their knowledge and common
vibrating wire stress cell in your applications.
The list given below tells you where to look for in this manual if you need some specific information.
For an insight into the jack-out pressure cell: See § 2 ‘Vibrating wire jack-out pressure cell’.
For installation of jack-out pressure cells: See § 4 ‘Installation procedure’.

www.encardio.com
2 VIBRATING WIRE JACK-OUT PRESSURE CELL
2.1 Introduction
The Encardio-rite jack-out pressure cell is also called total pressure cell or total stress cell. It measures
stress in soil or pressure of soil on structures. Cells will respond not only to soil pressure but also to
ground water pressure or to pore water pressure; hence the term total pressure or total stress. A
simultaneous measurement of pore water pressure (ρ), using a piezometer, is necessary to separate the
effective stress (σ) from the total stress (σ t) as defined by Terzaghi’s principle of effective stress:
σt=σ+ρ
These parameters coupled with the soil strength characteristics will determine soil behaviour under load.

The flat pressure capsule is 14 mm thick and has a diameter of either 200 mm or 125 mm. It is
constructed from two stainless steel plates welded together around the periphery so as to leave a narrow
space between them. This space is completely filled with de-aired fluid and connected hydraulically to a
pressure sensor. The sensor has an all welded construction such that space confining the hydraulic fluid
is entirely metal, not requiring ‘O’ rings that tend to trap air and reduce cell stiffness. The hydraulic fluid is
de-aired which materially improves fluid stiffness and performance of cell.
2.2.2 Pressure sensor

The pressure sensor constitutes of a vibrating wire Flat pressure capsule
and coil magnet assembly enclosed in a stainless
Pressure sensor
steel body which is electron beam welded to the
Ø125.0 or Ø200.0
diaphragm. This results in a vacuum of 1/1000 Torr

inside the sensor making it completely immune to the
effect of any ingress of water. As the pressure sensor
is of stainless steel construction, it is not affected by
Cable joint housing
normal chemical corrosion at locations in which it is
used. The pressure sensor normally employed is the
Encardio-rite pore pressure meter model EPP-30/36V 14.0
205.0
that is available in several different pressure ranges
(3, 5, 10, 20, 35, 50 & 100 kg/cm2). Figure 2.4 - layout
A tripolar plasma surge arrestor inside the transducer
housing protects the vibrating wire pluck and read coils from electrical transients such as may be induced
by direct or indirect lightning strikes.

Leads from coil magnet are terminated on a glass to metal seal that is integrally electron beam welded to
stainless steel body of pressure sensor. The two pins marked red and black are connected to coil
magnet. The other two pins are connected to a thermistor for measurement of temperature. Cable joint
housing and cable gland is provided for cable connection. Cable is attached to sensor in a sealed, water-
resistant manner. For concrete pressure cell located inside a concrete block, cable may be armoured and
provided with strain relief at cell to reduce likelihood of pull-out. For cable jointing, refer to Users Manual
6002.11.
www.encardio.com
2.2.4 Support plate

A support plate (figure 2.5) will normally be required for the flat pressure capsule, during installation. A
typical assembly of jack out pressure cell in a diaphragm wall is shown in figure 2.6.
Support plate
Ø150.0 or Ø225.0
Ø125.0 or Ø200.0
25.0
Figure 2.5 – jack-out pressure cell with support plate (dimensions in mm)
Sensor Cable Reaction plate

To hydraulic pump assembly
Support plate assembly Hydraulic jack Split pipe
Figure 2.6 - typical assembly of jack out pressure cell in a diaphragm wall

‘f’’, which can be determined as follows:
f = [σg/ρ]1/2/2l Hz
where, σ = tension of wire in kg/cm 2

g = 980 cm/sec 2
f = 32 [σ]1/2 Hz
www.encardio.com
The resonant frequency with which the wire vibrates, induces an alternating current in the coil magnet.

2.4.1 Jack-out pressure cell described here is of the hydraulic type. Two flat plates are electron beam
welded together at the periphery and are separated by a small gap filled with hydraulic fluid. The
soil pressure acts to squeeze the plate in contact with the soil against the second plate thus
building up a pressure on the fluid. Depending upon compressibility and stiffness of soil and
where it is used, it may generally give a reading somewhat different from the actual stress.
2.4.2 The plate in contact with soil being thin relative to its lateral extent, is quite flexible. However,
please note that there is some supporting effect of the welded periphery at center of the plate that
may affect the reading.
2.4.3 It should also be kept in mind that factors like inherent variability of soil properties give rise to
varying soil stresses at different locations and it may be difficult to get a good sample of the mean
stress from a limited number of cell locations. Also, response of cell to its immediate
surroundings depends very largely on how closely the soil mass immediately around the cell has
the same stiffness or compressibility or the same degree of compaction as the undisturbed soil
mass. Installation methods will need to pay particular attention to this detail.
2.4.4 Any closed hydraulic system is sensitive to temperature effects. The stress cell when embedded
between the soil an concrete acts like a closed hydraulic system. Any change in temperature of
the surrounding soil or concrete therefore gives an unauthentic or false reading, the magnitude of
which depends upon the elasticity of the surrounding material and the relative coefficient of
expansions of the materials in contact & the filled fluid inside the stress cell. In some cases this
effect may be high enough to cause permanent damage to the pressure transducer and should
be considered in determining the capacity of the sensor ordered. A thermistor is incorporated in
each sensor to assist in determining temperature compensation factors that may be calculated by
closely observing the in-situ stress cell performance.
2.6 (a)) is a microprocessor-based read-out unit for
use with Encardio-rite’s range of vibrating wire sen-
sors. It can display the measured frequency in terms
of time period, frequency, frequency squared or the
value of measured parameter directly in proper engi-
neering units. It uses a smartphone with Android OS
as readout having a large display with a capacitive
sensor.

bration coefficients from 10,000 vibrating wire sen- Fig 2.6 (a) – Vibrating wire indicator
sors so that the value of the measured parameter
from these sensors can be shown directly in proper engineering units. For transducers with built-in inter-
www.encardio.com
cients. The gage factor of the model EPS-30VJ Jackout Pressure Cell is given in the test certificate pro-
vided with every supply. The initial reading IR will be the actual reading in digits from the pressure cell
after it is embedded and properly set in concrete.
www.encardio.com
(also refer user’s manual on cable jointing - 6002.11):
• Soldering iron 25 watt

• Rosin 63/37 solder wire RF-3C, 30 swg
• Thread sealant (Loctite 577 or equivalent)
• Cable jointing compound (MS 853 and hardener MSH 283 - Mahendra Engineering & Chemical
Products Ltd. or equivalent). For alternatives, refer to note on page 3-4 of Encardio-rite user’s manual
“cable jointing of sensors” 6002.11)
• Acetone (commercial)
• Spanner 20/22 and 26/28
• Hacksaw with 150 mm blade
• Cable Cutter
• Wire Stripper
• Pliers 160 mm
• Pouring funnel
• Stainless steel rod 5 mm φ x 150 mm length
• Spatula
• Rotary tin cutter
• Fixture for jointing upto three jack-out pressure cells (refer figure 3.1)
• Tooth brush
• Cloth for cleaning (lintless)
• Multimeter 3½ digits
• EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator
500
70 0
0 70
Note :
All dimensions in mm.
Figure 3.1 – cable jointing fixture (all dimensions in mm
www.encardio.com

4.1.1 Remove the cable joint housing from the cable end of the sensor. This gives access to the four
pin terminal. Two of the terminals are marked with red and black colors. These are internally
wired to the coil of the magnet assembly inside the sensor. The other two terminals are internally
wired to a thermistor provided for temperature correlation/measurement. Clean the terminals with
a toothbrush.
 The coil resistance measured by a digital multimeter between the red and black pins, should
lie between 120-150 Ohm. Note the room temperature with any thermometer. Determine the
resistance of the thermistor at the room temperature from thermistor temperature chart in § 5.
This resistance should be equal to that between pins marked green and white. For example,
in case the temperature is 25oC, this resistance would be 3,000 Ohm.
 Connect the sensor to Encardio-rite model EDI-54V portable readout unit and switch it on. The
Freq: 2629.8 Hz
where the actual figure will vary depending on the transducer connected to the indicator.
For the jackout pressure cell, the initial reading (offset) in frequency should lie between 2,250 and
2,750 Hz. This initial reading on the portable readout unit should be stable.
A crude but simple and very effective method of checking whether the sensor is responding to
changes in pressure is as follows:
 Connect the sensor to the portable digital readout unit.
 Press the diaphragm with the thumb and verify that the reading on the indicator decreases.
 This change in reading ensures that the deformation produced by the pressure of the thumb on
the diaphragm is transmitted to the vibrating wire sensing element.
4.1.3 Connect the required length of cable to the sensor as described in the operating manual on cable
jointing - doc. # WI 6002.11.
Under no circumstances should the cable be unwound from any one side of the drum. This
can happen, for example, when the cable drum is kept on its side and the cable is taken out
without rolling the drum.
4.1.4 Check the working of the sensor again following the procedure described above in § 4.1.2.
NOTE: Remember to add the cable resistance when checking the resistance between the leads
after the cable jointing. For the model CS 0401 cable, the resistance is 26 Ohm/km and for
the model CS 0406 cable, the resistance is 48 Ohm/km. (multiply by 2 for both leads). In
case any other cable is used, make the necessary addition in the resistance value.
www.encardio.com
4.1.5 Cable should be marked with permanent markers every 5 m by the use of stainless steel tags tied
by stainless steel wire and stamped with appropriate earth pressure cell numbers. Alternatively,
plastic tabs may also be used. Temporary identification can be done by writing the serial number
of the sensor, its code number and the location at which it is installed, on a strip of paper, placing
the strip on the cable and covering it with a transparent plastic adhesive tape. Permanent
identification is necessary to prevent errors in making proper connections in the junction box and
to ensure correct splicing if cable is cut or broken.
taken most casually. Care should also be taken to put an identification tag at point where
cable comes out of structure such that cable identity is not lost if cable gets accidentally cut.
NOTE: Cables may be spliced without affecting the sensor reading; nevertheless splicing should be
avoided wherever possible. If necessary, use special cable jointing kits available from
Encardio-rite.
4.2 Installation of jack-out pressure cell in a diaphragm or slurry wall

Installing the jack-out pressure cell requires skill and expertise. In case effective stress is to be
determined, a pore pressure meter must be installed close by.
NOTE: The jack-out pressure cell measures the total stress. In case effective stress is to be
measured a pore pressure meter must be installed close by.
The jack-out pressure cell is designed to measure the total pressure in a cast-in-place concrete structure
such as a diaphragm or slurry wall. The cell is normally placed with the flat surfaces vertical and will
therefore measure horizontal stress in a direction perpendicular to the diaphragm of the cell. A hydraulic
jack is used to keep the cell in firm contact with the soil during the process of concreting. It is for this
reason that it is known as a jack-out pressure cell.
Hydraulic
line
Cable
Reaction
Support plate plate
Hydraulic
jack
Jack out
pressure cell
Rebar
Figure 4.1 – Jackout pressure cell installation in reinforcing cage with rigid steel support plate, double-
acting hydraulic jack and a reaction plate
www.encardio.com
Jack-out pressure cell is installed at the required location in the reinforcing cage together with a rigid steel
support plate, a double-acting hydraulic jack and a reaction plate. Refer to figure 4.1. The purpose of the
support plate is to prevent any distortion of the cell by providing a buffer between the jack and the cell.
Cable from sensor and hydraulic pressure pipe from the jack-out pressure cell are firmly secured with the
reinforced bars forming the cage. They should be adequately protected. The cage is lowered into the
diaphragm/slurry trench. Position the cell and the reaction plate in contact with the soil.
placed in position and is about to be covered with concrete. This will form the zero reading
for the stress cell. Note the barometric pressure at time of taking the initial reading.
Activate the jack and lock it. To prevent any concrete from entering between the soil and the sensitive
face of the cell, make sure that the hydraulic pressure exerted by the jack is more than the pressure head
at cell location of the poured concrete.
Fill the trench with concrete through a tremie pipe.
The above instructions for installation are only a guideline. Depending upon site conditions, the actual
installation procedure to be used should be determined by the project authorities.
www.encardio.com
TEST CERTIFICATE
DWT Traceable to standard no.: NPL /3373/05/20/2002
Customer: ………………………………
P.O.No.: ………………………………
Instrument: Jack out pressure cell Date: ………………………….
Serial number: 2539 Temperature: 31°C
Capacity: 35 kg/cm² Atm. pressure: 1.016 kg/cm²
Input
pressure Observed value Average End Point
kg/cm² Up1 Down Up2 Fit
(Digit) (Digit) (Digit) (Digit) (kg/cm²)
0.00 6683.9 6683.9 6683.9 6684 0.000
7.00 6319.3 6319.3 6319.3 6319 7.071
14.00 5957.6 5957.6 5957.6 5958 14.089
21.00 5596.7 5596.7 5596.7 5597 21.088
28.00 5236.5 5238.8 5236.5 5236 28.077
35.00 4879.5 4879.5 4879.5 4880 35.000
Error (%FS) 0.25

Digit: f ² X 10E-3
Pressure transducer gage factor: 1.940E-02 kg/cm²/digit
Thermal factor: -0.008 kg/cm²/°C
Jackout pressure cell calibration data
Cell constant (multiplier): 1.034

Linear gage factor: 2.006E-02 kg/cm²/digit

Red & black: Signal Green & white: Thermistor
www.encardio.com

Thermistor type Dale 1C3001-B3 or equivalent
T = 1/[A + B(LnR) + C(LnR)3] - 273.2 oC

A = 1.4051 x 10-3
B = 2.369 x 10-4
C = 1.019 x 10-7

201.1k - 50 16.60K - 10 2417 +30
187.3K - 49 15.72K -9 2317 31
174.5K - 48 14.90K -8 2221 32
162.7K - 47 14.12K -7 2130 33
151.7K - 46 13.39k -6 2042 34
141.6K - 45 12.70K -5 1959 35
132.2K - 44 12.05K -4 1880 36
123.5K - 43 11.44K -3 1805 37
115.4K - 12 10.86K -2 1733 38
107.9K - 41 10.31K -1 1664 39
101.0K - 40 9796 0 1598 40
94.48K - 39 9310 +1 1535 41
88.46K - 38 8851 2 1475 42
82.87K - 37 8417 3 1418 43
77.66K - 36 8006 4 1363 44
72.81K - 35 7618 5 1310 45
68.30K - 34 7252 6 1260 46
64.09K - 33 6905 7 1212 47
60.17K - 32 6576 8 1167 48
56.51K - 31 6265 9 1123 49
53.10K - 30 5971 10 1081 50
49.91K - 29 5692 11 1040 51
46.94K - 28 5427 12 1002 52
44.16K - 27 5177 13 965.0 53
41.56k - 26 4939 14 929.6 54
39.13K - 25 4714 15 895.8 55
36.86K - 24 4500 16 863.3 56
34.73K - 23 4297 17 832.2 57
32.74K - 22 4105 18 802.3 58
30.87K - 21 3922 19 773.7 59
29.13K - 20 3748 20 746.3 60
27.49K - 19 3583 21 719.9 61
25.95K - 18 3426 22 694.7 62
24.51K - 17 3277 23 670.4 63
23.16K - 16 3135 24 647.1 64
21.89K - 15 3000 25 624.7 65
20.70K - 14 2872 26 603.3 66
19.58K - 13 2750 27 582.6 67
18.52K - 12 2633 28 562.8 68
www.encardio.com
17.53K - 11 2523 29 525.4 70

subtracted from the Ohmmeter reading to get the correct thermistor resistance. However the effect is
small and is usually ignored.

sensor of jackout pressure cell. In case correction for temperature effect is required in cell, use following
equation:
The temperature correction value is added to the pressure value read from the EDI-54V read-out.
surrounded soil and concrete is not quantifiable and hence no correction factor for this effect is supplied.
If required, user may conduct his own tests under controlled conditions. Please once read again § 2.4.4 in
this connection.
www.encardio.com

The pressure transducer used in the Encardio-rite vibrating wire jackout pressure cell is evacuated and
hermetically sealed and will respond to barometric pressure fluctuation. In fact all jackout pressure cells
will respond to barometric pressure fluctuations unless they are manufactured in the gage pressure
version and a capillary tube is provided in the cable which opens into the atmosphere.
zero reading at the time of installation is to be considered (refer to second note in § 4.2). The correction
can be made by using the following equation:
The pressure correction value is added to the pressure value read from the EDI-54V read-out.

The test certificate gives the calibration coefficients suitable for reading in kg/cm2. To convert the output
to other engineering units, multiply the reading obtained from the model EDI-54V read-out unit in by the
conversion factor given below:
bar 0.981
atm. 0.968
mm Hg 735.6
“ Hg 28.96
psi 14.22
“ H2O 393.7
‘H2O 32.81
m H2O 10
Newton/cm2 9.807
kPa 98.07
mPa 0.098

Jackout pressure cell is embedded in soil and concrete. Once installed, the cell is usually inaccessible
and remedial action is limited. Maintenance and trouble shooting is consequently confined to periodic
checks of cable connection and functioning of the read-out unit. Refer the following list of problems and
possible solutions should problems arise. For any additional help, consult the factory.

should be > 500 M Ohm. If not, cut a meter or so from the end of cable and check again.
www.encardio.com
 Does the read-out work with another jackout pressure cell? If not, the read-out may have a low
battery or be malfunctioning. Consult the manual of the readout unit for charging or trouble
shooting instructions.
 Check if there a source of electrical noise nearby? General sources of electrical noise are
motors, generators, transformers, arc welders and antennas. If so the problem could be
reduced by shielding from the electrical noise.

 The cable may be cut or crushed? Check the nominal resistance between the two gage leads
using an Ohm meter. It should be within 120 - 150 Ohm. The correct value is given in the
concrete pressure cell test certificate. Please add the cable resistance when checking. For the
model CS 0401 cable, the resistance is 26 Ohm/km and for the model CS 0406 cable, the
resistance is 48 Ohm/km. (multiply by 2 for both leads). In case any other cable is used,
make the necessary addition in the resistance value. If the resistance reads infinite or a very
high value, a cut in the cable is suspected. If the resistance reads very low (<100 Ohm), a
short in the cable is likely.
 Does the read-out work with another jackout pressure cell? If not, the read-out may have a low
battery or be malfunctioning. Consult the manual of the readout unit for charging or trouble
www.encardio.com
USERS’ MANUAL
VIBRATING WIRE EARTH PRESSURE CELL

MODEL EPS-30V-S
Doc # WI 6002.15 R05 | Oct 2013

Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Earth pressure cell 1
2 VIBRATING WIRE EARTH PRESSURE CELL 3

2.1 Introduction 3
2.2.2 Pressure sensor with stainless steel body 3
2.3 Earth pressure cell construction 3
2.4 Pressure sensor operating principle 4
2.7 Sample test certificate to be used with EDI-51V Readout Unit 8
2.8 Sample calibration constants of EPS-30V-S to be used with EDI-54V 9
2.9 Sample calibration constants of EPS-30V-S to be used with ESDL-30 10
4.2 Installation of earth pressure cell in earth or rock fills and embankments 13
4.3 Cable laying 13


7 WARRANTY 19
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
The rheology of soil/rock formations is a complicated function of soil/rock type, stress history, shear and
normal stress levels, boundary and drainage conditions and many other environmental effects. The
accurate assessment of stress in foundation soil/rock formations and their changes caused by construction
and loading is important for good engineering design. In any instrumentation scheme for geo-technical or
geo-structural study associated with large civil engineering structures like tall buildings, dams, underground
tunnels etc., measurement of stress plays a very important part. Encardio-rite manufactures a range of
instruments for measurement of stress, including sensors, readout unit and data logger.
Study of stress fall into two basic categories:

 Measurement of total stress at a point within a soil mass/foundation rock
 Measurement of contact stress against the face of a structural element.

The development of vibrating wire stress cell introduced a reliable and fast method of taking stress readings
electrically. The cable is carried from the stress cell to the read out unit or data logger and is protected
against any possible damage during construction to give all around reliable data.
Encardio-rite earth pressure cell (or stress cell) is the electrical sensor of choice as the frequency output
of the vibrating wire sensor is almost immune to external noise, able to tolerate wet wiring conditions
common in geotechnical applications and is capable of transmission of signals to long distances. It has
applications in the measurement of stress in soil or foundation rock including:
 Magnitude, orientation and distribution of principal stresses within embankments and dams as input
to improve design and construction practices.
 Total stress for studying soil/structure interaction behaviour.
For details of vibrating wire stress cells manufactured by Encardio-rite, refer to data sheet 1090-97w.
1.1 Earth pressure cell
The earth pressure cell is designed to measure total pressure in earth fills and embankments. Proper
evaluation of total pressure may help in:
 Verifying design assumptions that will promote safer and more economical design and construction.
 Monitoring for safety; warning of soil pressures in excess of those the structure is designed to
withstand.
The Encardio-rite earth pressure cell basically consists of a flexible, circular flat capsule, constructed from
two stainless steel discs welded around the periphery and connected to a specially designed Encardio-rite
pressure sensor by a stainless steel tube. The whole system is fluid filled. The vibrating wire pressure cell
incorporates the latest vibrating wire technology to provide remote and digital readout. Total pressure cells
manufactured by Encardio-rite, designated with a suffix ‘S’ are used in soil, earth or rock fills.
This user’s manual covers description of the vibrating wire earth pressure cell with its connected
accessories, the installation procedure and maintenance of the sensor, method of taking observations and
recording the data from the sensor.
Page | 1
vibrating wire stress cell in your applications.
of fundamentals of geotechnics. Novices may find it very difficult to carry on the installation
For an insight into the earth pressure cell: See § 2 ‘Vibrating wire earth pressure cell’.
For installation of earth pressure cells: See § 4 ‘Installation procedure’.
For complete operating procedure ofVibrating Wire Readout Unit EDI-54V: See ‘Doc. # WI 6002.112’.
Page | 2
2 VIBRATING WIRE EARTH PRESSURE CELL
2.1 Introduction
Encardio-rite earth pressure cell is also called total pressure cell
or total stress cell. It measures stress in soil or pressure of soil on
structures. Cell responds not only to soil pressure but also to
ground water pressure/pore water pressure and therefore is
termed as total pressure or total stress. A simultaneous
measurement of pore water pressure (ρ), using a piezometer, is
necessary to separate the effective stress (σ) from the total stress
(σ t) as defined by Terzaghi’s principle of effective stress:
σt=σ+ρ
Figure 2.1
These parameters coupled with the soil strength characteristics
will determine soil behaviour under load.

Flat pressure capsule is 200 mm φ x 7 mm thick. It is constructed from two stainless steel plates electron
beam welded together around the periphery to form a diaphragm so as to leave a narrow space between
the plates. The flat pressure capsule is connected to a standard Encardio-rite vibrating wire pressure
sensor through a 6 mm o.d. stainless steel tube welded on one side to pressure capsule and on other side
to pressure sensor. Enclosed space is completely filled with de-aired fluid. De-airing materially improves
fluid stiffness and performance of cell. The stress cell uses an all welded construction such that space
confining hydraulic fluid is entirely metal, not requiring ‘O’ rings that tend to trap air and reduce cell stiffness.
2.2.2 Pressure sensor with stainless steel body
The pressure sensor constitutes of a vibrating wire and coil magnet assembly enclosed in a stainless steel
body which is electron beam welded to the diaphragm. This results in a vacuum of 1/1000 Torr inside the
sensor making it completely immune to the effect of any ingress of water. As the pressure sensor is of
stainless steel construction, it is not affected by normal chemical corrosion at locations in which it is used.
The pressure sensor normally employed is the Encardio-rite pore pressure meter model EPP-30/36V that
is available in several different pressure ranges (0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.5, 5.0 & 10.0 MPa).
Sensors upto capacity of 35 MPa are also available.

welded to the stainless steel body of the stress cell. The two pins marked red and black are connected to
the coil magnet. The other two pins are free and may be used in case a thermistor is required for
measurement of temperature. A cable joint housing and cable gland is provided for the cable connection.
The cable is attached to the transducer in a sealed, water-resistant manner. For earth pressure cells
located inside a soil mass the cable may be armoured and provided with strain relief at the cell to reduce
the likelihood of pull-out. For cable jointing, refer to Users Manual 6002.11.
2.3 Earth pressure cell construction
Encardio-rite earth pressure cell has a stainless steel diaphragm that is generally round in shape.
Dimensional details of fluid filled earth pressure cell are standardized and are as follows:
Page | 3
S S diaphragm
Piezometer
Jelly filled cable
S S tubing
Ø6 x 165 long
75 121 165 Ø200
Figure 2.2- earth pressure cell with circular diaphragm
2.4 Pressure sensor operating principle
‘f’’, which can be determined as follows:
f = [σg/ρ]1/2/2l Hz
where, σ = tension of wire in kg/cm 2
g = 980 cm/sec2
f = 32 [σ]1/2 Hz
The resonant frequency with which the wire vibrates, induces an alternating current in the coil magnet. This
is read by the read out unit.
manufactured by most reputed manufacturers. Depending upon the application and how and where it is
used, it may generally give a reading upto 10 % different from the actual. To understand the reason for this
difference in reading from the actual, the following explanation is given:
Two flat plates are welded together at periphery and are separated by a small gap filled with hydraulic fluid.
The soil pressure squeezes the two plates together building up a pressure on the fluid. The plates
being thin relative to their lateral extent, are quite flexible. However, please note that there is some
supporting effect of the welded periphery at center of the plate that may affect the reading.
Page | 4
Introduction of a flat stress cell into a mass alters stress field dependent on relative stiffness of cell with
respect to surrounding material and also with respect to aspect ratio of cell; that is ratio of width of
the cell to its thickness. A thick cell will alter stress more than a thin cell. Therefore, a thin stiff cell
is best and studies have shown an aspect ratio of at least 20 to 1 to be desirable.
Preferably, the cell should be as stiff (compressible) as the material in which it is embedded. In practice,
this is difficult. This is explained by the following examples in which the surrounding material could
be soil or rockfill.
If the cell is stiffer (less compressible) than the material in which it is embedded (like soil) then it will over-
register the pressure because a zone of material immediately around the cell is “sheltered” by the
cell and does not experience the full pressure.
There is a stress concentration (figure 2.3) at the rigid rim but in the center of the cell the stress is only
slightly higher than the mean stress, that is, only slightly higher than the normal stress had the pressure
cell not been there.
Mean
stress
0
Cell
Figure 2.3- stress redistribution - weak surrounding material with a stiff cell
In a stronger surrounding material the de-stressed zone around the edge of the cell is more extensive and
hence at the center of the cell the degree of over-registration of the mean stress is greater. This is
represented schematically in Figure 2.4.
Mean
stress
0
Cell
Figure 2.4- stress redistribution - strong surrounding material with a stiff cell
In a stiff surrounding material (like concrete) the cell may be less stiff (more compressible), in which case
the cell will under-register the mean stress as the stress in the surrounding material tends to “bridge” around
the cell. This is represented schematically in Figure 2.5.
Page | 5
Mean
stress
0
Cell
Figure 2.5 - Stress redistribution - stiff surrounding material with a weak cell
Any closed hydraulic system is sensitive to temperature effects. The stress cell when embedded in soil
acts like a closed hydraulic system. Any change in temperature of surrounding soil therefore gives an
unauthentic or false reading, magnitude of which depends upon elasticity of surrounding soil and relative
coefficient of expansions of materials in contact & filled fluid inside stress cell. A thermistor is incorporated
in each sensor to assist in determining temperature compensation factors that may be calculated by closely
observing in-situ stress cell performance.


tion coefficients from 10,000 vibrating wire sensors so
that the value of the measured parameter from
Fig 2.3 (a) – Vibrating wire indicator
these sensors can be shown directly in proper en-
gineering units. For transducers with built-in inter-
cients. The gage factor of the model EPS-30V-S earth pressure cell is given in the test certificate provided
with every supply. The initial reading IR will be the actual reading in digits from the pressure cell after it is
embedded and properly set in concrete.
An internal 6 V 4 Ah rechargeable sealed maintenance-free battery is used to provide power to the vibrating
Page | 6
Page | 7
2.7 Sample test certificate to be used with EDI-51V Readout Unit
TE S T C ER TIFI C AT E
DWT Traceable to standard no. : G010601 RED 090 TC
Customer
P.O. No.
Instrument Earth pressure cell Date 02.02.2008
Serial number 7241 Temperature 16°C
Capacity 10 MPa Atm. pressure 0.100 MPa
Input Observed value Average End Point

pressure Up1 Down Up2 Fit
(MPa) (Digit) (Digit) (Digit) (Digit) (MPa)
0.000 6561.3 6561.3 6561.3 6561 0.000

2.000 6258.5 6261.0 6258.5 6259 2.015
4.000 5958.0 5963.4 5958.0 5958 4.014
6.000 5657.3 5662.5 5657.3 5657 6.015
8.000 5356.4 5361.5 5356.4 5356 8.017
10.000 5057.1 5057.1 5059.8 5058 10.000
Error (%FS) 0.17

Digit f ² /1000
Pressure transducer gage factor 6.654E-03 MPa/digit
Thermal factor -0.001 MPa/°C
Earth pressure cell calibration data

Cell constant (multiplier) 1.0270
Linear gage factor 6.834E-03 MPa/digit
(Use gage factor with minus sign with our read out unit Model: EDI-51V)

Red & black: Signal Green & white: Thermistor
Page | 8
2.8 Sample calibration constants of EPS-30V-S to be used with EDI-54V
Page | 9
2.9 Sample calibration constants of EPS-30V-S to be used with ESDL-30
Page | 10
(also refer users manual on cable jointing - 6002.11):
Temperature controlled soldering iron 25 watt

Rosin 63/37 solder wire RF-3C, 30 swg
Thread sealant (Loctite 577 or equivalent)
Cable jointing compound (MS 853 and hardener MSH 283 - Mahendra Engineering & Chemical Products
Ltd. or equivalent. For alternatives, refer to note on page 3-4 of Encardio-rite user’s manual “cable
jointing of sensors” 6002.11)
Acetone (commercial)
Spanner 28/32 and 38/40
Hacksaw with 150 mm blade
Hammer
Cable Cutter
Surgical blade with holder
Wire Stripper
Pliers 160 mm
Pouring funnel
Stainless steel rod 2 mm  150 mm length
Spatula
Rotary tin cutter
Fixture for jointing upto six earth pressure cells (refer figure 3.1)
Toothbrush
Cloth for cleaning (lintless)
Digital multimeter
Vibrating wire Indicator EDI-54V
700
70 0
0 70
Figure 3.1
Page | 11

Remove cable joint housing from cable end of sensor. This gives access to the four pin terminal. Two of
the terminals are marked with red and black colors. These are internally wired to coil of magnet
assembly inside sensor. The other two terminals are utilized for measurement of temperature using
a thermistor. Clean the terminals with a toothbrush.
Check working of sensor as follows:
 The coil resistance measured by a digital multimeter between the red and black pins, should lie
between 120-150 Ohm. Determine resistance at the room temperature from thermistor temperature
example, in case the temperature is 25oC, this resistance would be 3,000 Ohm.
 Connect the sensor to the Encardio-rite model EDI-54V portable readout unit and switch it on. The
Freq: 2629.8 Hz
For the stress cell, the initial reading (offset) in frequency as read on the portable readout unit should be
stable.
 Check whether sensor is responding to changes in pressure. A crude but simple and effective method
of checking whether the sensor is responding to changes in pressure is as follows:
 Press the diaphragm with the thumb and verify that the frequency reading on the indicator decreases.
 This change in reading ensures that the deformation produced by the pressure of the thumb on the
diaphragm is transmitted to the vibrating wire sensing element.
Connect required length of cable to sensor as described in cable jointing manual - 6002.11.
flooring. Cables should never by unreeled by pulling on cable itself as the internal conductors
can get damaged from excessive strain. Under no circumstances should the cable be
unwound from any one side of the drum. This can happen, for example, when the cable drum
is kept on its side and the cable is taken out without rolling the drum.
Check the working of the sensor again following the procedure described above in § 4.1.2.
the cable jointing. For the model CS 0601 cable, the nominal resistance is 48 Ohm/km and
for CS 0406 cable, the resistance is 48 Ohm/km. In case any other cable is used, make the
necessary addition in the resistance value.
Cable should be marked with permanent markers every 5 m by use of stainless steel tags tied by stainless
steel wire stamped with appropriate concrete pressure cell number. Alternatively, plastic tabs are
also available. Temporary identification is done by writing serial number of sensor, its code number
and location at which it is installed on a strip of paper, placing strip on cable and covering it with a
transparent cello tape. Permanent identification is necessary to prevent error in making proper
connections in junction box and to insure correct splicing if cable is cut or broken.
CAUTION: Single most important factor leading to loss of worthwhile data from sensors is losing track of
Page | 12
identification of cable ends. Proper identification and marking of cables is necessary. Care
should also be taken to put an identification tag at point where cable comes out of structure
such that cable identity is not lost if cable gets accidentally cut.
4.2 Installation of earth pressure cell in earth or rock fills and embankments
Installing the earth pressure cell is a fairly simple operation. In case effective stress is to be determined, a
pore pressure meter must be installed close by. An earth pressure cell is normally installed with flat surfaces
horizontal to measure vertical stress. However, it can be placed at other orientations, inside the fill, to
measure stress in other directions i.e. a cell placed with the flat surfaces vertical will measure horizontal
stress in a direction perpendicular to the diaphragms of the cell.
NOTE: The earth pressure cell measures the total stress. In case effective stress is to be measured
At any cross section, the filling of the dam is allowed to continue to an elevation of around 0.5 to 1 m higher
than where the earth pressure cell is to be mounted. The position where the earth pressure cell is to be
mounted is carefully marked. Offset trenches (around 1 m x 1 m) to reach the correct required elevation
are dug at these positions.
NOTE: Earth pressure cells may be installed single or in clusters either in a trench below lift, or in a
ramp above the lift. In a dam, for example, it is usually convenient to install in a trench in the
impervious rolled fill core and in a ramp in the filter zones and compacted rockfill shell zones.
In an earth embankment it is convenient to install in a trench. By doing so, adequate degrees
of compaction of the backfill can be more easily obtained without damage to the cell clusters
or the cable trench. As the cells are being covered and compacted, repeated readings should
be taken to ensure that the cells are continuing to function properly.
The earth pressure cell should be enclosed by the material of the fill rather than another material (e.g.
sand) because if the compaction is performed properly, the stiffness will conform better to the rest of the
fill. When installing the cell, it is important to avoid direct contact with large or sharp rocks. Such contact
may locally deform the two diaphragm plates pinching them together such that the external pressure is no
longer transmitted entirely to the interior fluid. It is recommended that all chunks larger than 10 mm should
be removed from the material immediately surrounding the cell.
NOTE: Record initial reading and temperature with EDI-54V for permanent record, when cell is placed
in position and is about to be covered with fill material. This will form the zero reading for the
pressure cell. Also note the barometric pressure with the initial reading.
At locations where there is an appreciable amount of coarse material, it is recommended to have a layer
of fine material from the same fill in contact with the diaphragms of the sensor. This should be enclosed in
transitional layers of successively coarser material in order to establish an outward graduation to the
maximum size material.
The material around sensor should be placed by hand shovel and compacted with a light duty pneumatic
or petrol backfill tamper. The first layer of material over sensor should be 250 mm high and compacted
properly. Similar layers of material should be put over this and compacted properly until at least 500 mm
of material has been placed. Rubber tired equipment can now cross this location, but no vibratory rollers
should be permitted over sensor until a compacted thickness of at least 1 m is laid.
4.3 Cable laying

Very careful and skilled cabling is required in installation of stress cell as sensor/cable joint and a large
part of cable is permanently embedded and no future access is available for any maintenance and
corrective action.
Page | 13
Procedure for laying of cables differs with individual installations. In general, however, all installations have
the following common requirement:
 The cable must be protected from damage by angular and sharp particles of the material in which the
cable is embedded.
 The cable must be protected from damage by compaction equipment.

 In earth and rock embankments and backfill, the cable must be protected from stretching as a result
of differential compaction of the embankment,
In an earth and rock fill dam, earth pressure cells and a number of other sensors are installed at selected
elevations at different cross sections, as illustrated in figure 4.1. For example, three stress cells and nine
pore pressure meters are installed in offset trenches, at elevation 438 m.
Soil Pressure
Pore Pressure
EL-461
Under ground settlement & tilt
Seepage measurement EL-447
EL-438
Ground line
Grout EL-422
Assumed rock line
hole
F ig u r e 4. 1
A cable trench around 400 - 800 mm wide and upto 500 mm deep is Cable 25 mm apart
Cable trench
dug along the offset trenches, as shown in figure 4.2 on next page. The Sensor
depth and width depends upon the number of cables the trench has to
carry. Based upon the cable layout designed, the trench runs into the
To observation room
1000
abutment and then along the abutment to the downstream side or

directly to the downstream side towards the observation room. These
cable trenches carry the individual cables from the earth pressure cells Offset trench
to the observation room.
Before laying cables, trench should be properly cleaned and leveled 1000 400 to 800 Cable trench
with 100 mm of fine sand or properly compacted fill material at bottom

Compacted
of trench along the path. Any sharp rocks should be removed to prevent earth fill
500 >
_
cable from accidentally getting damaged. Center distance between

successive cables should be kept at a distance of 25 mm with help of a
Selected fine material
wooden cable spacer. A distance of 100 mm must be left free from the
sides of the trench.
Cables coming out of the dam should be properly tagged. With the best Figure 4.2
possible precautions, mistakes may still occur. Tags may get lost due
to the cable getting accidentally cut. Encardio-rite uses the convention that looking from the end of the
trench towards the sensor, the cable from the most distant sensor is always at the left hand side and the
offset trenches are to the right of the cable trench. In that order, the cable from the closest sensor is at the
extreme right.
Page | 14
from which they come out of the dam body. The tags should be of a non-corrosive material
like stainless steel or plastics.
NOTE: In embankments, cables may be embedded in a protective covering of sand or selected fine
embankment materials. A typical installation might, for example comprise the positioning of a
series of cables on a prepared layer consisting of not less than 100 mm of compacted selected
fine material. In order to establish an acceptable grade without undue interference with
construction operations, the prepared layer may be located either in a trench or on an exposed
ramp. In rockfill dams with earth fill cores, for example, it is frequently convenient to install
cable in trenches in the core and fine filter zones and in ramps in the coarse filter and
compacted rock fill shell zones. In instances in which more than one layer of cables must be
placed in a given array, the cables should be separated from each other by a vertical interval
of not less than 100 mm of hand compacted sand or selected fine embankment material.
During backfill of trenches in earth dams, a plug approximately 0.5 m in width, made of a mixture of 5%
bentonite (by volume) exhibiting a free swell factor of approximately 500 % and 95 % embankment material,
can be placed in trench at intervals of not greater than 20 m. Purpose of bentonite plugs is to reduce the
possibility of water seepage through the embankment core along the back filled trenches.
Instrument cables will pick up 50 or 60 Hz (or other frequency) noise from the power cable
and this will likely cause a problem obtaining a stable reading. Contact factory concerning
filtering options available for use with dataloggers and readouts should difficulties arise.
Page | 15
Thermistor type: Dale 1C3001-B3 or equivalent

T = 1/[A + B(LnR) + C(LnR)3] - 273.2 oC
A = 1.4051 x 10-3
B = 2.369 x 10-4
C = 1.019 x 10-7
Ohm temp. oC Ohm temp. oC Ohm temp. oC
201.1k -50 16.60K -10 2417 +30
187.3K -49 15.72K -9 2317 31
174.5K -48 14.90K -8 2221 32
162.7K -47 14.12K -7 2130 33
151.7K -46 13.39k -6 2042 34
141.6K -45 12.70K -5 1959 35
132.2K -44 12.05K -4 1880 36
123.5K -43 11.44K -3 1805 37
115.4K -12 10.86K -2 1733 38
107.9K -41 10.31K -1 1664 39
101.0K -40 9796 0 1598 40
94.48K -39 9310 +1 1535 41
88.46K -38 8851 2 1475 42
82.87K -37 8417 3 1418 43
77.66K -36 8006 4 1363 44
72.81K -35 7618 5 1310 45
68.30K -34 7252 6 1260 46
64.09K -33 6905 7 1212 47
60.17K -32 6576 8 1167 48
56.51K -31 6265 9 1123 49
53.10K -30 5971 10 1081 50
49.91K -29 5692 11 1040 51
46.94K -28 5427 12 1002 52
44.16K -27 5177 13 965.0 53
41.56k -26 4939 14 929.6 54
39.13K -25 4714 15 895.8 55
36.86K -24 4500 16 863.3 56
34.73K -23 4297 17 832.2 57
32.74K -22 4105 18 802.3 58
30.87K -21 3922 19 773.7 59
29.13K -20 3748 20 746.3 60
27.49K -19 3583 21 719.9 61
25.95K -18 3426 22 694.7 62
24.51K -17 3277 23 670.4 63
23.16K -16 3135 24 647.1 64
21.89K -15 3000 25 624.7 65
20.70K -14 2872 26 603.3 66
19.58K -13 2750 27 582.6 67
18.52K -12 2633 28 562.8 68
17.53K -11 2523 29 525.4 70

resistance output related to the temperature). The thermistor is connected between the green and white
leads. The resistance can be measured with an Ohmmeter. The cable resistance may be subtracted from
Page | 16
the Ohmmeter reading to get the correct thermistor resistance. However the effect is small and is usually
ignored.

sensor of the earth pressure cell. In case correction for temperature effect is required in cell, use following
equation:
The effect of the temperature coefficient of expansion of soil on stress cell is almost impossible to
determine. Temperature effect caused by mismatch between the temperature coefficient of cell and
surrounded soil is not quantifiable and hence no correction factor for this effect is supplied. If required, user
may conduct his own tests under controlled conditions. Please once read again § 2.5.7 in this connection.
Page | 17

The pressure transducer used in the Encardio-rite vibrating wire earth pressure cell is evacuated and
hermetically sealed and will respond to barometric pressure fluctuation. In fact all earth pressure cells will
respond to barometric pressure fluctuations unless they are manufactured in the gage pressure version
and a capillary tube is provided in the cable which opens into the atmosphere.
zero reading at the time of installation is to be considered (refer to third note in § 4.2). The correction can
be made by using the following equation:

Earth pressure cell is embedded in soil. Once installed, the cell is usually inaccessible and remedial action
is limited. Maintenance and trouble shooting is consequently confined to periodic checks of cable
connection and functioning of the read-out unit. Refer the following list of problems and possible solutions
should problems arise. For any additional help, consult the factory.
be > 500 M Ohm. If not, cut a meter or so from the end of cable and check again.
 Does read-out work with another earth pressure cell? If not, read-out may have a low battery or be
malfunctioning. Consult manual of readout unit for charging or trouble shooting instructions.
 Check if there a source of electrical noise nearby? General sources of electrical noise are motors,
an Ohm meter. It should be within 120 - 150 Ohm. The correct value is given in the concrete pressure
cell test certificate. For the model CS 0601 cable, the nominal resistance is 48 Ohm/km and for the
model CS 0406 cable, the resistance is 48 Ohm/km. In case any other cable is used, make the
necessary addition in the resistance value. If the resistance reads infinite or a very high value, a cut
in the cable is suspected. If the resistance reads very low (<100 Ohm), a short in the cable is likely.
 Does the read-out work with another earth pressure cell? If not, the read-out may have a low battery
or be malfunctioning. Consult the manual of the readout unit for charging or trouble shooting
instructions.
Page | 18
7 WARRANTY
batteries
Page | 19
USERS’ MANUAL
STRESS CELL
VIBRATING WIRE SHOTCRETE - CONCRETE
MODEL ESC-30V
Doc. # WI 6002.31 R08 | Jan 2019

Users’ Manual Vibrating wire shotcrete-concrete stress cell
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Applications 1
2 VIBRATING WIRE SHOTCRETE-CONCRETE STRESS CELL 3

2.1 Theory of operation 3
2.2 Description of sensor 3
2.2.1 Fluid filled stress capsule 3
2.2.2 Vibrating wire pressure sensor 4
2.2.3 Pinch tube 4
2.2.5 Dimensions 4
2.3 Pressure transducer operating principle 5
2.4 Interpreting data 5
2.6 Sample test certificate to be used with EDI-51V 8
2.7 Sample calibration constants for ESC-30V to be used with EDI-54V 9
2.8 Sample calibration constants for ESC-30V to be used with ESDL-30 10
4.2 Installation in shotcrete lining for NATM tunnel 14
4.2.1 Tangential stress cell 14
4.2.2 Radial stress cell 15
4.2.3 Pinch tube 16
4.3 Cable laying 17
4.4 Installation in segmental lining for machine bored tunnels 18

6.3 Troubleshooting 21
6.3.1 Symptom: shotcrete concrete stress cell reading unstable 21
6.3.2 Symptom: shotcrete concrete stress cell fails to read 22
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
In the ‘New Austrian Tunnelling Method’ (or NATM), the

tunnel is supported by rapid application of shotcrete to freshly
exposed excavated surface. NATM is particularly suitable for
weaker grounds. In this method, the inherent strength of the
ground is preserved to a greater extent to make it almost self-
supporting, thus requiring much less artificial support in the
form of concrete or steel.
1.1 Applications
Model ESC-30V Shotcrete-concrete stress cell (or stress cell)
is designed for measurement of radial and tangential stress in
shotcrete tunnel lining. They are often used in conjunction
with borehole extensometer.
Proper evaluation of total stress in the lining may help in:

 Determining adequacy of shotcrete lining, indicating need
for more or less shotcrete to maintain stability.
 Verifying design assumptions that will promote safer and

Figure 1.1: Shotcrete Pressure Cell
more economical design and construction.
Encardio-rite manufactures a range of instruments for

measurement of stress, including sensors, readout unit and data logger.
Stress cells are installed after excavating the tunnel, but before applying shotcrete. Radial stress cells are
placed at the smoothened interface between the excavated ground surface and the shotcrete lining.
Tangential stress cells may be mounted using short pieces of steel rebars grouted inside short bore holes
on the excavated surface.
The development of vibrating wire shotcrete-concrete stress cell introduced a reliable and fast method of
taking stress readings electrically. The cable is carried from the stress cell to the read out unit or the data
logger preferably through a junction box and is protected against any possible damage during
construction to give all around reliable data.
Encardio-rite vibrating wire stress cell is the electrical sensor of choice, as the frequency output of the
vibrating wire transducer is almost immune to external noise, able to tolerate wet wiring conditions
common in geotechnical applications and is capable of transmission of signals to long distances. The
stress cell basically consists of a flat rectangular capsule and a vibrating wire pressure transducer
connected to each other by a 6 mm φ × 165 mm long stainless steel tube.

CAUTION: Caution messages calls attention to a procedure or practice, that if not properly followed, it
may result in loss of data or damage to equipment.
attention.
Page |1

This users’ manual is intended to provide sufficient information for making optimum use of vibrating wire
stress cell in your application. This user’s manual covers description of the stress cell with its connected
accessories, the installation procedure and maintenance of the sensor, method of taking observations
and recording data from the sensor.
installation work. The intricacies involved in installation are such that even if a single
the performance of the sensor. Also, blindly following the instruction manual will not
guarantee success. Sometimes, depending upon field conditions, installation personnel will
have to consciously depart from the written text and use their knowledge and common
The list given below tells you where to look for in this manual if you need some specific information.
For specifications of the shotcrete concrete stress cell: See § 1.2 ‘Specifications’.
For an insight into N.A.T.M.: See § 2.1 ‘Theory of operation’.
For description of the shotcrete concrete stress cell: See § 2.2 ‘Description of sensor’.
For a typical test certificate on shotcrete concrete stress cell: See § 2.6-2.8 ‘Sample test certificate’.
For complete operating Vibrating Wire readout unit EDI-54V: See Doc. # WI 6002.112
For installation of concrete pressure cell: See § 4 ‘Installation procedure’.
For temperature measurement by thermistor: See § 5 ‘Temperature measurement’.
For barometric pressure correction: See § 6.1 ‘Barometric pressure correction’.
For trouble shooting: See § 6.3 ‘Trouble shooting’
Page |2
2 VIBRATING WIRE SHOTCRETE-CONCRETE STRESS CELL
2.1 Theory of operation

In ‘New Austrian Tunnelling Method’ (or NATM), the tunnel is supported by rapid application of shotcrete
to the freshly exposed surface. The method takes maximum advantage of capacity of the excavated
surface to support itself. As excavation is made, forces in overburden readjust themselves. They are
managed carefully and deliberately through an appropriate support mechanism. Requirement of support
is minimum when excavated surface has reached a point where loosening of rock is about to take place.
To be aware of such a situation beforehand, Instrumentation plays an important role.
NATM is particularly suitable for weaker grounds. In this method of tunnel excavation, the inherent
strength of the ground is preserved to make it almost self-supporting, thus requiring much less artificial
support in the form of concrete or steel.
The excavated surface is prevented from breaking up and collapsing by rapidly applying a layer of
shotcrete, thus preserving the inherent cohesion of the ground. A thick shotcrete lining will allow only a
small amount of deformation of excavated surface and thus be costlier. A thin shotcrete lining, on the
other hand will allow too much deformation of the excavated surface allowing it to weaken and ultimately
fail.
The purpose of stress cells is to monitor radial as well as tangential stress in the lining and optimize its
thickness. This results in significant reduction in cost of tunnel support. For such an analysis, a tape
extensometer is very useful to correlate tunnel closure with developed stresses. Along with borehole
extensometers, it helps in determining the adequacy of the shotcrete lining, indicating necessity for more
or less shotcrete to maintain stability. In case it is necessary to separate water pressure from effective
loading of the overburden, piezometers may be installed near the shotcrete concrete stress cells.
2.2 Description of sensor

2.2.1 Fluid filled stress capsule
The Encardio-rite model ESC-30V NATM style shotcrete concrete stress cell basically consists of a flat
rectangular capsule and a pressure transducer connected to each other by a 6 mm φ × 165 mm long
stainless steel tube. The whole system is fluid filled. The rigidity of the cell exceeds 50,000 MPa and
ensures that it will respond immediately to the onset of increasing concrete stress.
Lugs are provided at the corners of the rectangular plates to facilitate holding the cell in place while the
shotcrete is applied.
Encardio-rite stress cell uses an all welded construction such that space confining the hydraulic fluid is
entirely metal, not requiring ‘O’ rings that tend to trap air and reduce the cell stiffness.
Figure 2.1
Page |3
2.2.2 Vibrating wire pressure sensor
The pressure sensor constitutes of a vibrating wire and coil magnet assembly enclosed in a stainless
steel body which is electron beam welded to the diaphragm.
This results in a vacuum of 1/1000 Torr inside the sensor making it completely immune to the effect of
any ingress of water. As the pressure sensor is of stainless steel construction, it is not affected by normal
chemical corrosion at locations in which it is used. The pressure sensor normally employed is the
Encardio-rite pore pressure sensor (piezometer) model EPP-30V that is available in several different
pressure ranges (1, 2, 3.5, 5, & 10 MPa). Sensors upto capacity of 35 MPa are also available.
coils from electrical transients such that it may be induced by direct or indirect lightning strikes.
A thermistor is provided to monitor the temperature.
2.2.3 Pinch tube

One end of a 600 mm long pinch tube filled with hydraulic fluid is welded to the pressure transducer (refer
to figure 2.2). The other end is capped by welding. During concrete lining, the temperature very often
rises and causes the capsule to expand in the still green concrete. On cooling, the capsule contracts,
which if allowed to remain as such, would prevent the transmission of pressure from the concrete to the
cell. The purpose of the pinch tube is to inflate the capsule after the concrete is complete. We need to
wait for the area around the pressure cell is fully cured and has cooled off to the ambient temperature. A
crimping tool is used to squeeze the hydraulic fluid in the pinch tube. The fluid is forced out of the tube into
the capsule, which expands until the gap is eliminated.
Leads from coil magnet is terminated on a glass to metal seal that is integrally electron beam welded to
stainless steel body of pressure sensor. The two pins marked red and black are connected to the coil
magnet. The other two pins are connected to a thermistor for measurement of temperature. Cable joint
housing and cable gland is provided for a cable connection. Cable is attached to the sensor in a sealed,
water-resistant manner. For concrete pressure cell located inside a concrete block, cable may be
armoured and provided with strain relief at cell to reduce likelihood of pull-out. For cable jointing, refer to
User’s Manual 6002.11.
2.2.5 Dimensions
The standard size of the rectangular model ESC-30V shotcrete concrete stress cell is 150 mm x 250 mm.
Standard thickness is 7 mm giving an aspect ratio greater than 20. Dimensional details are as follows:
Sensing plate
Piezometer S S tubing
Ø6.0 x 165 long
b
Jelly filled cable

Pinch tube
Ø6.0 x 600 long
75.0 121.0 165.0 l
Figure 2.2: Shotcrete concrete stress cell with rectangular diaphragm
Page |4
NOTE: The rectangular diaphragm (sensing plate) is available in three different sizes (l x b) that are
100 mm x 200 mm, 150 mm x 250 mm and 200 x 300 mm. Other sizes are also available if
specifically requested by the customer. Refer to data sheet 1091-13 for further details on the
range of shotcrete concrete stress cells manufactured by Encardio-rite.
2.3 Pressure transducer operating principle

Pressure sensor of a vibrating wire stress cell basically consists of a magnetic, high tensile strength
stretched wire, one end of which is anchored and the other end fixed to a diaphragm that deflects in
some proportion to applied pressure. Any change in pressure, deflects the diaphragm proportionally and
this in turn affects the tension in the stretched wire. Thus any change in stress, directly affects the tension
in the wire.
f = [σg/ρ] 1/2/ 2l Hz
l = length of wire
stress is proportional to the square of the frequency and the Encardio-rite model EDI-54V readout logger
is able to display this directly in engineering units.
2.4 Interpreting data

manufactured by most of the reputed manufacturers. Depending upon the application and how and
where it is used, it may generally give a reading upto 10 % different from the actual. Even though the
stress cell is embedded in concrete, to understand the reason for this difference in reading from the
actual, the following explanation using soil as an example is given:
2.4.1 Two flat rectangular plates are welded together at the periphery and are separated by a small
gap filled with hydraulic fluid. The concrete pressure squeezes the two plates together building
up a pressure on the fluid. The plates being thin relative to their lateral extent, are quite flexible.
However, please note that there is some supporting effect of the welded periphery at the centre
of plate that may affect the reading.
2.4.2 The introduction of a flat stress cell into a mass alters the stress field in a way dependent on the
relative stiffness of the cell with respect to the surrounding material and also with respect to the
aspect ratio of the stress cell, i.e. the ratio of the width of the stress cell to its thickness. A thick
stress cell will alter the stress more than a thin cell. Therefore, a thin stiff stress cell is best and
studies have shown an aspect ratio of at least 20:1 to be desirable.
2.4.3 Ideally, the stress cell should be as stiff (compressible) as the material in which it is embedded.
In practice, this is difficult. This is explained by the following examples in which the surrounding
material could be soil, rock fill or concrete.
2.4.4 If the stress cell is stiffer (less compressible) than the material in which it is embedded (like soil)
then it will over-register the pressure because a zone of material immediately around the cell is
“sheltered” by the cell and does not experience the full pressure.
Page |5
There is a stress concentration (figure 2.3) at the rigid rim but in the centre of the stress cell, the
stress is only slightly higher than the mean stress, i.e only slightly higher than the normal stress
had the stress cell not been there.
Mean
stress
0
Cell
Figure 2.3 - Stress redistribution - weak surrounding material with stiff cell
2.4.5 In a stronger surrounding material the de-stressed zone around the edge of the stress cell is
more extensive and hence at the centre of the stress cell the degree of over-registration of the
mean stress is greater. This is represented schematically in Figure 2.4.
Mean
stress
0
Cell
Figure 2.4 - Stress redistribution - strong surrounding material with stiff cell
2.4.6 In a stiff surrounding material like concrete the stress cell may be less stiff (more compressible),
in which case the stress cell will under-register the mean stress as the stress in the surrounding
material tends to “bridge” around the cell. This is represented schematically in Figure 2.5.
Mean
stress
0
Cell
Figure 2.5 - stress redistribution - stiff surrounding material with weak cell
2.4.7 The last example (figure 2.5) is more applicable to concrete. Encardio-rite stress cell generally
shows a degree of under-registration upto 10% of the mean stress.
Page |6
2.4.8 Any closed hydraulic system is sensitive to temperature effects. Stress cell when embedded in
concrete acts like a closed hydraulic system. Any change in temperature of surrounding concrete
therefore gives an unauthentic or false reading, magnitude of which depends upon elasticity of
surrounding concrete and relative coefficient of expansions of materials in contact & filled fluid
inside the stress cell. In some cases this effect may be high enough to cause permanent damage
to the pressure transducer and should be considered in determining capacity of sensor ordered.
A thermistor is incorporated in each sensor to assist in determining temperature compensation
factors that may be calculated by closely observing the in-situ stress cell performance.
readout having a large display with a capacitive
sensor.
bration coefficients from 10,000 vibrating wire

sensors so that the value of the measured param- Fig 2.5 (a) – Vibrating wire indicator
eter from these sensors can be shown directly in

proper engineering units. For transducers with built-in interchangeable thermistor, it can also display the
temperature of the transducer directly in degree Centigrade.
cients. The gage factor of the model ESC-30V shotcrete pressure cell is given in the test certificate pro-
vided with every supply. The initial reading IR will be the actual reading in digits from the shotcrete pres-
sure cell after it is embedded and properly set in concrete.
Page |7
2.6 Sample test certificate to be used with EDI-51V
TEST CERTIFICATE
DWT Traceable to certificate no. : P122301 875 TC
Instrument : Shotcrete concrete stress cell Date : 27.11.2018

Serial number : xxxxxx Temperature: 20°C
Capacity : 20 MPa Atm. pressure: 0.100 MPa
Cable Length : xx meter
Input Observed value Average End Point

pressure Up1 Down Up2 Fit
(MPa) (Digit) (Digit) (Digit) (Digit) (MPa)
0.000 6753.9 6754.1 6754.1 6754.0 0.000

4.000 6500.1 6506.0 6500.2 6500.2 4.060
8.000 6251.0 6258.2 6251.6 6251.3 8.041
12.000 6001.6 6008.2 6002.4 6002.0 12.029
16.000 5751.2 5755.4 5751.6 5751.4 16.036
20.000 5503.4 5503.4 5503.9 5503.6 20.000
Error (%FS) 0.30
Digit: f ²/1000
Pressure transducer gage
1.5995E-02 MPa/digit
factor:
Thermal factor: 0.000 MPa/°C
Shotcrete concrete stress cell calibration data
Cell size: 100 X 200 mm

Cell constant (multiplier): 1.0485
Linear gage factor: 1.6771E-02 MPa/digit
(Use gage factor with minus sign with our read out unit model EDI-51V)

Tested By:
Page |8
2.7 Sample calibration constants for ESC-30V to be used with EDI-54V
Page |9
2.8 Sample calibration constants for ESC-30V to be used with ESDL-30
P a g e | 10
Following tools and accessories are required for proper cable jointing and installation of the shotcrete
concrete stress cell (also refer user’s manual on cable jointing - 6002.11):
1. Soldering iron 25 watt

3. Thread sealant (Loctite 577 or equivalent)
4. Cable jointing compound (Please refer to Encardio-rite user’s manual “cable jointing of sensors”
6002.11 and WI-6002.11E for options that can be used)
6. Spanner 28/32 and 38/40
8. Hammer
9. Cable Cutter
11. Wire Stripper
12. Pliers 160 mm
13. Pouring funnel
14. Stainless steel rod 2 mm φ 150 mm length
15. Spatula
16. Rotary tin cutter
17. Fixture for jointing upto six concrete pressure cells (refer figure 3.1)
18. Toothbrush
20. 75 mm nails - around 10 per sensor
21. Crimping tool
700
70 0
0 70
Figure 3.1
P a g e | 11
P a g e | 12

4.1.1 Remove the cable joint housing from the cable end of the stress cell. This gives access to the
four pin terminal. Two of the terminals are marked with red and black colours. These are
internally wired to the coil of the magnet assembly inside the sensor. The other two terminals are
utilized for measurement of temperature using a thermistor. Clean the terminals with a
toothbrush.
4.1.2 Check the working of the pressure transducer as follows:
 The coil resistance measured by a digital multimeter between the red and black pins, should lie
between 120-150 Ω. Determine resistance at the room temperature from thermistor temperature
example, in case the temperature is 25oC, this resistance would be 3,000 Ω.
 Connect the sensor to the Encardio-rite model EDI-54V portable readout unit and switch it on.
The display will show (for e.g):
Freq: 2629.8 Hz
For the stress cell, the initial reading (offset) in frequency should lie between 2,250 - 2,750 c/s.
The initial reading on the portable readout unit should be stable.
 Check whether sensor is responding to changes in pressure. A crude, but simple and very
effective method of checking whether the sensor is responding to changes in pressure is as
follows:
 Press the diaphragm with the thumb and verify that the frequency reading on the indicator
decreases.
 This change in reading ensures that the deformation produced by the pressure of the thumb
on the diaphragm is transmitted to the vibrating wire sensing element.
4.1.3 Connect required length of cable to sensor as per operating manual on cable jointing - 6002.11.
can happen, for e.g., when the cable drum is kept on its side and the cable is taken out
4.1.4 Check the working of the sensor again following the procedure described above in § 4.1.2.
NOTE: Remember to add the cable resistance when checking the resistance between the leads
after the cable jointing. For the model CS 0401 cable, the resistance is around 26 Ohm/km
and for the model CS 0406 cable, the resistance is around 48 Ohm/km. (multiply by 2 for
both leads). In case any other cable is used, make the necessary addition in the resistance
value.
P a g e | 13
4.1.5 In case cable is routed to a distant location it should be marked with permanent markers every 5
m by the use of stainless steel tags tied by stainless steel wire stamped with appropriate
concrete pressure cell numbers. Alternatively, plastic tabs are also available. Temporary
identification can be done by writing serial number of sensor, its code number and location at
which it is installed, on a strip of paper, placing the strip on the cable and covering it with a
transparent plastic cello tape.
Permanent identification is necessary to prevent errors in making proper connections in the

junction box and to ensure correct splicing if cable is cut or broken.
CAUTION: Single most important factor leading to loss of worthwhile data from sensors is losing track
of identification of cable ends. Proper identification and marking of the cables is generally
taken most casually. Care should also be taken to put an identification tag at point where
cable comes out of structure such that cable identity is not lost if cable gets accidentally cut.
4.2 Installation in shotcrete lining for NATM tunnel

Installing stress cell requires a lot of expertise and
experience. It should not be taken casually.
The stress cell is mounted inside tunnel lining to measure

tangential and radial stress. The designer of the
instrumentation scheme and the site conditions will
determine installation procedure.
The installation engineer may have to make some site

corrections or modifications to the defined procedure.
However a typical installation is shown in figure 4.1.
4.2.1 Tangential stress cell

A method of installation is shown in figure 4.2. Short pieces
of steel rebars are grouted into holes drilled axially on
excavated surface of the tunnel. Holes are drilled at a
distance of around 50 mm more than the length of the flat
rectangular capsule. The reinforced bars protrude out of the
excavated surface to a distance where the cell is to be Figure 4.1
positioned.
Rebar Rebar
Sensing Tie wire Cable Junction box

diaphargm Pinch tube Pressure transducer
Figure 4.2
P a g e | 14
The flat rectangular capsule is firmly tied to the rebars by soft iron wire/cable ties using the four lugs
provided. In case a reinforcing mesh is used, the flat rectangular capsule may be tied to this mesh. The
cable is firmly fixed to another reinforced bar or reinforcing mesh and generally routed to a close by
junction box. It is terminated here or later on joint to take the signal to a distant location.
Carefully bend the pinch tube such that when the shotcrete concrete stress cell is installed, it will protrude
out from the shotcrete lining. It can also be wrapped in a foam etc. such that it can be easily retrieved
(later on). When the concrete hardens, the pinch tube is used to pressurize the cell and ensure good
contact between the cell and the surrounding concrete.
NOTE: Record initial reading and the temperature with EDI-54V for permanent record, when cell is
placed in position and is about to be covered with the fill material. This will form the zero
reading for the stress cell. Note the barometric pressure at the time of taking initial reading.
4.2.2 Radial stress cell
A method of installation is shown in figure 4.3.
Prepare the rock surface of the excavated tunnel where the cell is to be mounted by smoothing it off and
flattening it as much as possible with any available hand tool, chisel or hammer. Hammer or grout 75 mm
long nails to a depth of around 25 mm deep into the smoothened surface of the excavated tunnel to mark
the periphery around the rectangular diaphragm and the pressure transducer. Alternatively, little pieces of
small diameter reinforced bars may be grouted in boreholes drilled adjacent to the location where the cell
would be located.
Carefully bend the pinch tube such that when the shotcrete concrete stress cell is installed, it will
protruded out from the shotcrete lining. It can also be wrapped in foam etc. such that it can easily be
retrieved (later on).
Mortar
Nails
Shotcrete
lining
Pinch tube
Sensing
diaphragm
Cable
Junction box
Figure 4.3
P a g e | 15
placed in a position and is about to be covered with the fill material. This will form the zero
reading for the stress cell. Note the barometric pressure at time of taking the initial reading.
To accommodate irregularities in the excavated surface, it is necessary to fill the space between the
surface and the cell with quick setting mortar (refer to figure 4.3). Trowel a quick setting mortar pad
around 30 mm deep on the surface of the excavated tunnel. Press down the cell onto the pad with a little
rotary or to and fro motion of the hands, causing the mortar to extrude sideways thus eliminating any air
bubbles or spaces between the cell and the ground. Grip the cell firmly by bending the nails or the
reinforced bars on the sides of the cell. Be careful that in doing so, the cell is not damaged. This can be
verified by comparing the zero reading with the initial offset (see § 4.1.1).
4.2.3 Pinch tube

Once concrete is set and returns to ambient temperature, the cell can be inflated using pinch tube and a
crimping tool. Connect cell to readout unit and gently squeeze pinch tube flat, using the pinch tube
crimping tool. Start squeezing around 25 mm from the capped end and proceed downwards towards the
concrete layer. In case the cell diaphragm is in good contact with the concrete, the pinching will
immediately cause a pressure rise in the cell. Stop the pinching immediately. However in case the cell
diaphragm expands inside any space that may exist, the pressure rise accompanying each pinch will be
small. As soon as the cell starts to fill the space, the pressure rise with each pinch will become larger.
Pressure
Knee
Stop pinching
Length of tube pinched
Figure 4.4
A graph of the readings would show a pronounced “knee” where contact between the cell diaphragm and
concrete is made (see figure 4.4). As soon as this “knee” is passed, the squeezing of the pinch tube
should immediately be stopped. Bend the pinch tube out of the way such that it lays flat on the concrete
surface.
CAUTION: Do not pinch the pinch tube closer than 25 mm from the end; otherwise the sealed plugging
end of tube could be damaged. As the tube is progressively squeezed flat, the fluid is forced
out of the pinch tube into the cell and pressure will rise. It is necessary to make a chart
showing the relationship between the length of flattened pinch tube and the corresponding
pressure reading.
CAUTION: Continued pinching after the cell has made good contact would result in the reduction of the
useful range of the shotcrete concrete stress cell. It can also cause the concrete around the
cell to split open which is not desirable and could lead to erroneous readings.
Record new initial stress reading after the cell has stabilized in the field book.
P a g e | 16
4.3 Cable laying

Very careful and skilled cabling is required in installation of the stress cell as the sensor/cable joint and a
part of the cable is permanently embedded and no future access is available for any maintenance and
corrective action. Take precautions that the cable does not get damaged during shotcreting or movement
of heavy equipment.
Procedure for laying of cables differs with individual installations. In general, however, all installations
have the following requirement:
 Cable must be protected from damage by angular and sharp particles of the material in which the
cable is embedded.
wherever possible. If necessary, use special cable jointing kits available from the factory or use
junction boxes.
Cable coming out of the junction box for remote monitoring should be properly tagged. It is preferable to
use a multi core cable from the junction box. With the best possible precautions, mistakes may still occur.
Tags may get lost due to the cable getting accidentally cut. In case individual cables are used, Encardio-
rite uses the convention that looking from the cable end towards the sensor, the cable from the most
distant sensor is always at the left hand side. In that order, the cable from the closest sensor is at the
extreme right.
NOTE: A simple code for remembering this is “LL-SR”. Longer (cable) left, shorter (cable) right
when viewing the sensors from the observation room.
CAUTION: All cables should be properly identified by tagging them. The tags should be of a non-
corrosive material like stainless steel or plastics.
The instrument cables will pick up the 50 or 60 Hz (or other frequency) noise from the power
cable and this will likely cause a problem obtaining a stable reading. Contact the factory
concerning filtering options available for use with dataloggers and readouts should
difficulties arise.
P a g e | 17
4.4 Installation in segmental lining for machine bored tunnels


segmental concrete lining that provides both support
and a final lining.

transported to site. Easy way to install the instruments
in segments (during concreting) is illustrated in the three
adjoining pictures.

shotcrete-concrete pressure cell and a few Encardio-rite
embedment strain gages in different axis before
concreting. The bottom picture shows the segment Figure 4.5: Stress cell installed with
being completed. strain gages in concrete segments
Figure 4.6: Concrete segments with stress cells and strain gages installed inside
P a g e | 18
T herm i st o r t yp e: Dale 1C3001-B3

T empe r at u r e re s ist an ce equ at i on
T = 1/ [A + B (LnR) + C (LnR) 3] - 273.2 oC
A = 1.4051 x 10-3
B = 2.369 x 10-4
C = 1.019 x 10-7
20 1 .1k - 50 16 . 60 K - 10 24 1 7 + 30
18 7 .3 K - 49 15 . 72 K -9 23 1 7 31
17 4 .5 K - 48 14 . 90 K -8 22 2 1 32
16 2 .7 K - 47 14 . 12 K -7 21 3 0 33
15 1 .7 K - 46 13 . 39k -6 20 4 2 34
14 1 .6 K - 45 12 . 70 K -5 19 5 9 35
13 2 .2 K - 44 12 . 05 K -4 18 8 0 36
12 3 .5 K - 43 11 . 44 K -3 18 0 5 37
11 5 .4 K - 12 10 . 86 K -2 17 3 3 38
10 7 .9 K - 41 10 . 31 K -1 16 6 4 39
10 1 .0 K - 40 97 9 6 0 15 9 8 40
94 . 48 K - 39 93 1 0 +1 15 3 5 41
88 . 46 K - 38 88 5 1 2 14 7 5 42
82 . 87 K - 37 84 1 7 3 14 1 8 43
77 . 66 K - 36 80 0 6 4 13 6 3 44
72 . 81 K - 35 76 1 8 5 13 1 0 45
68 . 30 K - 34 72 5 2 6 12 6 0 46
64 . 09 K - 33 69 0 5 7 12 1 2 47
60 . 17 K - 32 65 7 6 8 11 6 7 48
56 . 51 K - 31 62 6 5 9 11 2 3 49
53 . 10 K - 30 59 7 1 10 10 8 1 50
49 . 91 K - 29 56 9 2 11 10 4 0 51
46 . 94 K - 28 54 2 7 12 10 0 2 52
44 . 16 K - 27 51 7 7 13 96 5 .0 53
41 . 56k - 26 49 3 9 14 92 9 .6 54
39 . 13 K - 25 47 1 4 15 89 5 .8 55
36 . 86 K - 24 45 0 0 16 86 3 .3 56
34 . 73 K - 23 42 9 7 17 83 2 .2 57
32 . 74 K - 22 41 0 5 18 80 2 .3 58
30 . 87 K - 21 39 2 2 19 77 3 .7 59
29 . 13 K - 20 37 4 8 20 74 6 .3 60
27 . 49 K - 19 35 8 3 21 71 9 .9 61
25 . 95 K - 18 34 2 6 22 69 4 .7 62
24 . 51 K - 17 32 7 7 23 67 0 .4 63
23 . 16 K - 16 31 3 5 24 64 7 .1 64
21 . 89 K - 15 30 0 0 25 62 4 .7 65
20 . 70 K - 14 28 7 2 26 60 3 .3 66
19 . 58 K - 13 27 5 0 27 58 2 .6 67
18 . 52 K - 12 26 3 3 28 56 2 .8 68
17 . 53 K - 11 25 2 3 29 52 5 .4 70
P a g e | 19

subtracted from the Ohmmeter reading to get the correct thermistor resistance. However the effect is
small and is usually ignored.

sensor of the shotcrete concrete pressure cell. In case correction for temperature effect is required in cell,
use following equation:
surrounded concrete is not quantifiable and hence no correction factor for this effect is supplied. If
required, user may conduct his own tests under controlled conditions.
P a g e | 20

The pressure transducer used in the Encardio-rite vibrating wire shotcrete concrete stress cell is
evacuated and hermetically sealed and will respond to barometric pressure fluctuation. In fact all the
shotcrete concrete stress cell will respond to barometric pressure fluctuations unless they are
manufactured in the gage pressure version and a capillary tube is provided in the cable that opens into
the atmosphere.
Since the magnitude of barometric pressure fluctuations is of the order of ± 0.03 kg/cm2, correction is
barometric pressure at the time of taking the reading. The initial barometric pressure at the time of
installation must be recorded. The correction can be made by using the following equation:

The test certificate gives the calibration coefficients suitable for reading in kg/cm2. To convert the output
to other engineering units, multiply the reading obtained from the model EDI-54V read-out unit in by the
conversion factor given below:
bar 0.981
atm. 0.968
mm Hg 735.6
“ Hg 28.96
psi 14.22
“ H2O 393.7
‘H2O 32.81
m H2O 10
Newton/cm2 9.807
kPa 98.07
MPa 0.098
6.3 Troubleshooting
The shotcrete concrete stress cell is embedded in concrete. Once installed, the cell is usually
inaccessible and remedial action is limited. Maintenance and troubleshooting is consequently confined to
periodic checks of cable connection and functioning of the read-out unit. Refer to the following list of
problems and possible solutions should problems arise. For any additional help, consult the factory.
6.3.1 Symptom: shotcrete concrete stress cell reading unstable
be > 500 MΩ. If not, cut a meter or so from the end of cable and check again.
 Does the read-out work with another shotcrete concrete stress cell? If not, the read-out may have a
low battery or be malfunctioning. Consult the manual of the readout unit for charging or
troubleshooting instructions.
P a g e | 21
6.3.2 Symptom: shotcrete concrete stress cell fails to read

an Ohmmeter. It should be within 120 - 150 Ω. The correct value is given in the shotcrete concrete
stress cell test certificate. Please add the cable resistance when checking. For the model CS 0401
cable, the resistance is 26 Ω/km and for the model CS 0406 cable, the resistance is 48 Ω/km.
(multiply by 2 for both leads). In case any other cable is used, make the necessary addition in the
resistance value. If the resistance reads infinite or a very high value, a cut in the cable is suspected.
If the resistance reads very low (<100 Ω), a short in the cable is likely.
 Does the read-out work with another shotcrete concrete stress cell? If not, the read-out may have a
low battery or be malfunctioning. Consult the manual of the readout unit for charging or trouble
P a g e | 22
USERS’ MANUAL
STRAIN GAGE TYPE CENTRE HOLE

LOAD CELL
MODEL ELC-30S-H
Doc # WI 6002.77 R00 | Jun 2006

Users’ Manual ELC-30S-H Strain gage type centre hole load cell
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.2 Handling of load cell 2
2 STRAIN GAGE TYPE CENTRE HOLE LOAD CELL 3

2.1.1 Bearing /load distribution plates 3
3.2 Mounting load cell 5
3.3 Cable laying 6
3.3.1 General precautions in laying cable 6
3.4.1 Symptom: Load cell reading unstable 7
3.4.2 Symptom: Load cell fails to read 7
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite model ELC-30S-H centre hole load cell is precision engineered & specially designed for civil
engineering applications. It may be used to measure tensile force in a ground anchor, rock bolt, cable or tie
back. It can also be applied to the measurement of compressive load between structural members, i.e.
tunnel supports or at the junction between a beam and the top of a pile strut.
Collapse of roof or falling of sidewall in underground cavities is a factor of prime importance to geologists,
design engineers and construction companies. Slope failures and land slides have been recognized as
one of the several forms of natural disaster and can happen anywhere in the world without any
discrimination. Whether it is giving away of roof of a mine or buckling of sidewall of an underground
powerhouse cavity or a landslide or a slope failure, the disaster may cause mammoth loss of life, property,
wealth and time. A number of methods are available for taking preventive and corrective action. One
method is anchoring. Use of pre-stressed grouted anchors provides an active support system.
ELC-30S-H load cell comprises of a high strength martensitic stainless steel load-sensing element.
Eight/sixteen strain gages mounted at 45o to each other to minimize effect of uneven and eccentric loading
are connected in a Wheatstone bridge circuit. Load cells are available in standard capacities ranging from
3500 kN to 10000 kN or specify. Load cells having internal diameter different from our standard range are
available on request.
ELC-30S-H load cell is designed for use in environments normally associated with construction activity.
Advantage of a conventional strain gage load cell over a vibrating wire load cell lies mainly in ease of taking
the reading. Load can be directly read on a suitable indicator. In contrast, the vibrating wire load cell has
three (or six) separate elements. These have to be separately read and the average taken to get the correct
load. Data logging also in case of vibrating wire load cells requires three (or six) channels. The main
advantage of vibrating wire load cell over strain gage load cell is that the former uses a frequency rather
than a voltage as output signal. Frequency may be transmitted over long cable lengths of upto 2 km without
appreciable degradation caused by variations in cable resistance arising from water penetration,
temperature fluctuation, contact resistance or leakage to ground etc.
1.1 Specifications
Capacity (kN)/ID (mm) 3500/132,3500/185, 5000/164,5000/202
6500/227,10000/210 or specify
Safe Overload 120 % fs
Rated Output 1.5 mV/V ± 20 %
Zero Balance < ± 0.1 mV/V
Excitation Voltage
Nominal 10 VDC
Maximum 20 VDC
Terminal Resistance
Input 770, 1540 Ohm ± 5 %
Output 700, 1400 Ohm ± 1 %
Insulation Resistance >500 M Ohm at 12V
Temperature Range -10° to 55° C
Total Error 1 % fs (0.5% on request)
Creep 30 min. 0.03 % fs
Temp. Effect
Zero % fs /° C ± 0.01
Span % fs/° C ± 0.005
Cable connection 5 meter four core cable
Enclosure Electron beam welding & IP54
Page | 1
1.2 Handling of load cell

The load cell should be handled very carefully during transportation and installation. It should not be
dropped under any circumstances. In case, it is dropped, the impact generated will almost certainly result
in a shift of zero reading. Refer to Encardio-rite application note AN-1 (data sheet 1147-96) for an
appreciation of the magnitude of damage caused to a load cell by impact load.
CAUTION: The load cell should not be dropped under any circumstances because this may lead to its
permanent damage.

This users’ manual is intended to provide you with sufficient information for making optimum use of the
strain gage type centre hole load cell in your application.
instruction manuals cannot provide for each and every condition in the field, which may affect
while going through the manual.
For general description and dimensions: See § 2.1 ‘General description’.
For dimensions of load distribution & bearing plates: See § 2.1.1 ‘Bearing & load distribution plates’.
For wiring diagram: See § 2.1.2 ‘Cable connection’.
For essential tools and accessories: See § 2.1.3 ‘Tools and accessories required for installation’.
For installation of strain gage type centre hole load cells: See § 3 ‘Installation procedure’.
Page | 2
2 STRAIN GAGE TYPE CENTRE HOLE LOAD CELL

The strain gages are mounted on a stainless steel columnar element. A protective cover is electron beam
welded to the element to protect the basic element resulting in a vacuum of 1/1000 Torr inside the sensor.
All this helps in sensor becoming immune to atmospheric corrosion and effect of ingress of water. The
sectional area of the columnar element is varied in the different capacity load cells to give approximately
the same mV/V output for a variation of zero to full load.
ØD2
Capacity Dimensions
kN D1 mm D2mm D3mm H mm
3500 132 183 218 90
90
3500 185 217 260 90
5000 164 224 260 90
5000 202 276.5 293 150
6500 227 298.5 315 150 ØD1
10000 210 298.5 315 150
ØD3 100 (approx)
ØD2
Bearing /load distribution plates
Centre hole load cells are very susceptible to eccentric

loading. Providing a load distribution plate of proper
150
dimensions at the top reduces the effect. In some

applications, a load bearing plate may also be used at
the bottom of the load cell. Standard plates stocked by
Encardio-rite have the following dimensions:
ØD1
ØD3 100 (approx)
Capacity Bearing/Load distribution plate

kN T mm O.D. mm I.D mm Wt. kg
3500 60 215 132 10.7
3500 60 250 185 10.5
5000 70 245 164 14.5
5000 70 295 202 20.0
6500 70 315 227 20.7
10000 80 315 210 27.0
Cable connection
Leads from the Wheatstone bridge circuit are terminated on a six pin glass to metal seal (2 pins blank)
which is integrally electron beam welded to the stainless steel body of the centre hole load cell. A cable is
coming out from cable holder and cable gland.
Page | 3
The following tools / accessories are required for proper cable jointing and installation of the load cell:
2.2.1 Soldering iron 25 watt, temperature controlled
2.2.2 Rosin 63/37 solder wire RF-3C, 30 SWG
2.2.3 Thread sealant (Loctite 577)
2.2.4 Cable jointing compound (MS 853 and hardener MSH 283 - Mahendra Engineering & Chemical
2.2.5 Accessories for cable jointing compound i.e. rotary tin cutter, stainless steel rod 2 mm  150 mm
length for stirring, spatula & pouring funnel
2.2.7 Toothbrush
2.2.9 Wire stripper and cable cutter

2.2.11 Encardio-rite model EDI-53L digital indicator/logger
Page | 4

 Resistance measured by a digital multi-meter between red/black terminals should be 770/1540
Ohm ± 5 %(for capacities 3500 to 5000/5000 to10000 kN respectively) and between green/white
terminals should be 700/1400 Ohm ± 1 %(for capacities 3500 to 5000/5000 to10000 kN
respectively). Resistance between any lead and outer casing should be > 500 M Ohm.
 Using portable digital indicator measure zero balance of load cell. It should be between ± 0.1 mV/V.
3.1.2 Check cable visually for any cuts, damaged sheath etc. Cut appropriate length of cable (add 1 m
extra length for cable jointing). Always determine correct length of cable required. Cable to cable
jointing should as far as possible be avoided.
3.2 Mounting load cell

3.1.3 Load cell assembly should always be mounted on a
Load distribution plate
machined seating pad of thickness greater than flat Load cell assembly
bearing plate. Seating pad should be grouted Bearing plate
perpendicular to axis of anchor and its top surface Seating pad
should preferably be ground. Centre hole load cell
should be installed between flat bearing and load
distribution plates. These plates should be parallel to
each other and normal to axis of load cell. The anchor
can be centralized by carefully positioning load cell
over it. Alternatively, a suitable bush can be used in the
annular space between load cell and anchor to
centralize it taking care that bush does not interfere
with the loading pattern of load cell. In case surface of
the flat bearing and load distribution plates cannot be
maintained parallel, spherical settings or wedges or
compensation washers made of copper/high density
plastic material should be used. Anchor Grout Rock
NOTE: Eccentric loading and uneven or warped bearing and load distribution plates have a profound
effect on the load cell reading. Having thicker top and bottom plates reduces the effect
Careful mounting is required to reduce effect of eccentric loading. The load cell should be
mounted between flat bearing top and bottom plates of proper thickness depending upon the
load cell capacity. The bearing and load distribution plates are ground flat for improved
performance. The load should be centralized with respect to load cell axis. In case the
surfaces are not parallel, spherical settings or wedges should be employed. Compensation
washers made of copper, high density plastic or any similar deformable material may also be
used.
3.1.4 Pre-tension load cell as specified in design specifications. This can be done by connecting the
Encardio-rite model EDI-53L portable digital indicator to load cell and monitoring load while
tensioning anchor bolt or the cable anchor.
NOTE: As already explained, an uneven bearing or load distribution plate can affect accuracy of
reading. So can bending or distortion of plates. It is essential to use bearing/load distribution
plates of correct thickness and finish. The hole in load distribution plate should match the
internal diameter of centre hole load cell.
Page | 5
The effect of bearing/load distribution plates bending is illustrated by an experiment performed

on an Encardio-rite 50 tf centre hole load cell, loaded on a universal testing machine to full
capacity. For purpose of the experiment a flat plate was placed on the load cell and load
applied through bushes of different diameters. The result is displayed below.
It will be noticed that if the bush is smaller or larger, the load cell reading is different from the
actual reading. The effect is reduced in case the plate in-between is thicker. It is therefore
advisable to use thick bearing and load distribution plates.
Load cell response to applied load (50 tf)
23 mm thick plate 35 mm thick plate
Smaller bush 105 % 101%
Load cell
Same size bush 100 % 100 %
Load cell
Larger bush 96 % 99 %
load cell
3.3 Cable laying
General precautions in laying cable
Careful and skilled cabling is required in the installation of a centre hole load cell. The load cell/cable joint
and a large part of the cable may be exposed to blasting and construction work. They should be suitably
protected. Part of the cable may be permanently embedded and no future access may be available for any
maintenance and corrective action.
 The cable must be protected from damage by angular and sharp particles of material in which cable
is embedded.
 Cables may be spliced without affecting sensor reading; nevertheless splicing should be avoided
Precaution must be taken that the cables are properly tagged, onward from the point from which they come
out of the load cell. With the best possible precautions, mistakes may still occur. Tags may get lost due to
the cable getting accidentally cut. Encardio-rite uses the convention that looking from the junction box or
the observation room towards the sensor, the cable from the most distant sensor is always at the left hand
side. In that order, the cable from the closest sensor is at the extreme right.
from which they come out of the load cell. The tags should be of a non-corrosive material like
Page | 6
stainless steel or plastics.

CAUTION: Follow the Encardio-rite convention that looking from the junction box or the observation room
towards the sensor, the cable from the most distant sensor is always at the left hand side and
the cable from the closest sensor is at the extreme right.
Similarly, as an Encardio-rite convention, the cable from the most distant sensor should be
connected to the extreme left socket in the junction box. Succeeding cables from the sensors
are connected progressively towards the right in the junction box.
Care should be taken that the wiring is neat and professional. If necessary all cables should be passed
through MS/Copper/PVC solid or flexible tubing that should be clamped to the main frame at suitable
intervals. The guiding principle should be to protect cable from any damage.

Once installed, remedial action is limited. Maintenance and trouble shooting is consequently confined to
periodic checks of cable connection and functioning of the read-out unit. Refer to following list of problems
and possible solutions should problems arise. For any additional help, consult factory.
Symptom: Load cell reading unstable
 Check insulation resistance. Resistance between any lead and outside casing should be > 500 M
Ohm. If not, cut a meter or so from end of cable and check again.
 Check if portable digital indicator works with another load cell? If not, the indicator may be
malfunctioning. Consult manual of strain indicator for trouble shooting instructions.
 Use another portable digital indicator to take the reading.
generators, transformers, arc welders and antennas. If so shielding from electrical noise could reduce
problem.
Symptom: Load cell fails to read
 Cable may be cut or crushed? Check resistance between leads by a digital multi-meter. It should be
770/1540 Ohm ± 5 % between the red/black leads and 700/1400 Ohm ± 1 % between the green/white
leads. If the cables are long, please add cable resistance when checking resistance (multiply by 2 for
both leads). If resistance reads infinite or a very high value, a cut in the cable is suspected. If
resistance reads very low (< 100 Ohm), a short in cable is likely.
 Use another portable digital strain indicator to take the reading.
Page | 7
USERS’ MANUAL
RESISTANCE STRAIN GAGE TYPE

CENTRE HOLE LOAD CELL
MODEL ELC-30S
Doc. # WI 6002.39 R04 | Jan 2019

International: UAE | Qatar | Bahrain | Bhutan | Greece | Denmark | USA
Users’ Manual ELC-30S Resistance strain gage type centre hole load cell
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Application areas 1
1.2 Advantage of resistive strain gage type load cells 1
2 STRAIN GAGE TYPE CENTRE HOLE LOAD CELL 3

2.1.1 Bearing and load distribution plates 3
3.3 Cable laying 9
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite model ELC-30S centre hole load

cell is precision engineered & specially
designed for civil engineering applications. It
comprises of a high strength martensitic
stainless steel cylinder. Eight strain gages
mounted at 45o to each other to minimize
effect of uneven and eccentric loading are
connected in a Wheatstone bridge circuit.
Load cells are available in standard capacities
ranging from 200-2000 kN. Load cells having
internal diameter different from our standard
range are available on request.
1.1 Application areas

It may be used to measure tensile force in a ground anchor, rock bolt, cable or tie back. It can also be
applied to the measurement of compressive load between structural members, i.e. tunnel supports or at
the junction between a beam and the top of a pile strut.
Collapse of roof or falling of side wall in underground cavities is a factor of prime importance to geologists,
design engineers and construction companies. Slope failures and landslides have been recognized as one
of the several forms of natural disaster and can happen anywhere in the world without any discrimination.
Whether it is giving away of roof of a mine or buckling of side wall of an underground power house cavity
or a landslide or a slope failure, the disaster may cause mammoth loss of life, property, wealth and time. A
number of methods are available for taking preventive and corrective action. One method is anchoring.
Use of pre-stressed grouted anchors provides an active support system.
1.2 Advantage of resistive strain gage type load cells
ELC-30S load cell is designed for use in environment normally associated with construction activity.
load. Data logging also in case of vibrating wire load cells requires three (or six) channels.
Model ELC-30S resistive strain gage type centre hole/anchor bolt load cell is hermetically sealed by
electron beam welding with a vacuum of 1/1000 Torr inside it, making it immune to ingress of water and to
most corrosive environments.

permanent damage.
Page |1


strain gage type centre hole load cell in your application.
For essential tools and accessories: See § 2.3 ‘Tools and accessories required for installation’.
Page |2
2 STRAIN GAGE TYPE CENTRE HOLE LOAD CELL

The strain gages are mounted in a groove at the base of a stainless steel columnar element. A stainless
steel diaphragm is electron beam welded to the element to cover the groove resulting in a vacuum of
around 1/1000 Torr inside the sensor. All this helps in sensor becoming immune to atmospheric corrosion
and effect of ingress of water. The sectional area of the columnar element and the depth of the groove in
it is varied in different capacity load cells to give approximately the same mV/V output for a variation of
zero to full load.
Item Description Qty

1 Load cell 1
2 Cable joint housing 1
3 Cable gland - PG 9 1
Capacity Centre Hole Load Cell

kN D1 mm D2 mm D3 mm H mm
200 40 60 155 40
500 52 78 155 40
1000 78 116 200 40
1000 105 138 225 40
1500 85 130 225 55
1500 130 165 260 55
2000 105 160 260 55

2000 155 192 260 55
2.1.1 Bearing and load distribution plates

Centre hole load cells are very susceptible to eccentric loading. The effect is reduced by providing a load
distribution plate of proper dimensions at the top. In some applications, a load bearing plate may also be
used at the bottom of the load cell. Standard plates stocked by Encardio-rite have the following dimensions:
Capacity Bearing plate Load distribution plate

kN T mm OD mm ID mm Wt. kg OD mm ID mm Wt. kg
200 23 155 116 2 75 40 1
500 35 155 116 2.5 98 52 1.5
1000 45 200 150 5 135 78 3.5
1000 45 225 172 6 155 105 4
Page |3
Capacity Bearing plate Load distribution plate

1500 55 225 165 8 150 85 5.5
1500 55 260 200 9.5 180 130 5.5
2000 65 260 195 12 180 105 9
2000 65 260 226 7 210 155 8.5
Leads from the Wheatstone bridge circuit are terminated on a six pin glass to metal seal (2 pins blank)
which is integrally electron beam welded to the stainless steel body of the centre hole load cell. A cable
joint housing and cable gland is provided for cable connection.
Page |4
TEST CERTIFICATE
Date:
Temp.
Customer:
P.O. No.
Instrument: Model: ELC-30S strain gage type center hole load cell
Capacity 1500 kN
Mfg. Sr. No. 0307518
Dimension details
I.D.(mm) O.D.(mm) Height(mm)
Load cell 130 260 55
Load distribution plate 130 180 55
Bearing plate 200 260 55
General details
Input resistance 771 Ohm

Output rsistance 701 Ohm
Insulation resistance >1000 Mega Ohm
Test data Excitation Voltage 10.000 V
Input Load Output (mV/V)

kN
Cycle 1 Cycle 2
0 0.000 0.000
300 0.402 0.402
600 0.793 0.794
900 1.198 1.199
1200 1.601 1.602
1500 2.025 2.024
Max. non linearity 0.89 % fs

Rated output 2.025 mV/V @ 1500 kN
Linear gauge factor 1) 74.074 kN/mV ( To be used to convert the mV o/p of load cell in
engineering units when observations are taken in mV with Voltmeter or
other read out units with customer)
2) 1481.48 (To be used to read the o/p in engineering unit when Encardio-rite
readout unit EDI-53L is used for observations. Refer to attached
annexure-1)
Wiring configuration
Colour Signal
Red + Excitaion
Black - Excitation
Green + Output
White - Output
Cable Length 10 meter
Page |5

1. Soldering iron 25 watt, temperature controlled
2. Rosin 63/37 solder wire RF-3C, 30 swg.
3. Thread sealant (Loctite 577 or equivalent)

4. Cable jointing compound (MS 853 and hardener MSH 283 - Mahendra Engineering & Chemical
Products Ltd. or equivalent. For alternatives, refer to note on page 3-3 of Encardio-rite user’s manual
5. Accessories for cable jointing compound i.e. rotary tin cutter, stainless steel rod 2 mm φ, 150 mm
7. Tooth brush
8. Cloth for cleaning (lint less)
9. Wire stripper and cable cutter

10. Pliers 160 mm
11. Spanner 18/19
12. Fixture for jointing up to five load cells
13. Digital multi-meter
14. Encardio-rite model EDI-53L digital indicator/logger
Page |6

3.1.1 Remove cable joint housing from cable end of sensor. This
gives access to six pin terminals. Only four terminals are
used. The active terminals are marked with red, black,
white and green colour dots. Clean terminals with a tooth
brush.
NOTE: Do not use any acetone for cleaning terminals as it
may damage the glass to metal seal. Acetone should
be used to clean other portions of the sensor.
 Resistance measured by a digital multi-meter between

red/black terminals should be 770 Ohm ± 5 % and between
green/white terminals should be 700 Ohm ± 1 %
 Resistance between any lead and outer casing should be > 500
M Ohm.
 Using portable digital indicator measure zero balance of load

Centre hole load cell installed on
cell. It should be between ± 0.2 mV/V.
anchored sheet pile
NOTE: Check sensor for proper functioning before
installation.
extra length for cable jointing). Always determine correct length of cable required. Cable to cable
jointing should as far as possible be avoided.
CAUTION: Cable should always be removed from a spool

by rotating the spool. This will reduce chances
of nicking, bending or twisting of the cable.
3.1.4 Connect required length of cable to sensor as

described in operating manual on cable jointing #
WI-6002.11E.
3.1.5 Check working of the sensor again following the

procedure described in § 3.1.2.
NOTE: Add cable resistance when checking
resistance between leads after cable jointing.
For EC-0107 cable (7 x 0.25 conductor)
resistance is around 49 Ohm/km (multiply by
2 for both leads). In case any other cable is
used, make necessary addition in resistance
value.

3.2.1 Load cell assembly should always be mounted on
a machined seating pad of thickness greater than
flat bearing plate. Seating pad should be grouted
perpendicular to axis of anchor and its top surface Typical Mounting of load cell
Page |7
should preferably be ground. Centre hole load cell should be installed between flat bearing and
load distribution plates. These plates should be parallel to each other and normal to axis of load
cell. The anchor can be centralized by carefully positioning load cell over it. Alternatively, a suitable
bush can be used in the annular space between load cell and anchor to centralize it taking care
that bush does not interfere with the loading pattern of load cell. In case surface of the flat bearing
and load distribution plates cannot be maintained parallel, spherical settings or wedges or
compensation washers made of copper/high density plastic material should be used.
effect on the load cell reading. Having thicker top and bottom plates reduces the effect. In
case this problem is encountered, to start with as a rule of the thumb, use 23, 35, 45, 55, and
65 mm thick top and bottom plates for the 200, 500, 1000, 1500, and 2000 kN load cells
respectively.
Careful mounting is required to reduce effect of eccentric loading. The load cell should be
mounted between flat bearing top and bottom plates of proper thickness depending upon the
load cell capacity. The bearing and load distribution plates are ground flat for improved
performance. The load should be centralized with respect to load cell axis. In case the
surfaces are not parallel, spherical settings or wedges should be employed. Compensation
washers made of copper, high density plastic or any similar deformable material may also be
used.
3.2.2 Pre-tension load cell as specified in design specifications. This can be done by connecting the
Encardio-rite model EDI-53L portable digital indicator to load cell and monitoring load while
tensioning anchor bolt or the cable anchor.
Load cell response to applied load (500 kN)
load cell
load cell
load cell
reading, so can bending or distortion of plates. It is essential to use bearing/load distribution
plates of correct thickness and finish. The hole in load distribution plate should match the
internal diameter of centre hole load cell.
The effect of bearing/load distribution plates bending is illustrated by an experiment performed

on an Encardio-rite 500 kN centre hole load cell, loaded on an universal testing machine to
full capacity. For purpose of the experiment a flat plate was placed on the load cell and load
applied through bushes of different diameters. The result is displayed below.
Page |8
It will be noticed that if the bush is smaller or larger, the load cell reading is different from the
actual reading. The effect is reduced in case the plate in-between is thicker. It is therefore
3.3 Cable laying
3.3.1 General precautions in laying cable

Careful and skilled cabling is required in the installation of a centre hole load cell. The load cell/cable joint
and a large part of the cable may be exposed to blasting and construction work. They should be suitably
protected. Part of the cable may be permanently embedded and no future access may be available for any
 The cable must be protected from damage by angular and sharp particles of material in which
cable is embedded.
from which they come out of the load cell. The tags should be of a non-corrosive material like

Page |9
3.4.1 Symptom: Load cell reading unstable

motors, generators, transformers, arc welders and antennas. If so problem could be reduced by
shielding from electrical noise.
3.4.2 Symptom: Load cell fails to read

 Cable may be cut or crushed? Check resistance between leads by a digital multi-meter. It should
be 770 Ohm ± 5 % between the red/black leads and 700 Ohm ± 1 % between the green/white
leads. If the cables are long, please add cable resistance when checking resistance (multiply by 2
for both leads). If resistance reads infinite or a very high value, a cut in the cable is suspected. If
P a g e | 10
USERS’ MANUAL
VIBRATING WIRE CENTER HOLE

LOAD CELL
MODEL ELC-31V
Doc. # WI 6002.91 R01 | Jun 2012

Users’ Manual ELC-31V Vibrating wire center hole load cell
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Handling and installation of load cell 1
2 VIBRATING WIRE LOAD CELL 3

4.2 Installation on anchor bolt or cable anchor 8
4.3 Installation on struts 9
4.4 General precautions in the mounting of load cell 10
4.5 General precautions in the mounting of the cable 10

www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
The Encardio-rite model ELC-31V is a precision engineered

vibrating wire hydraulic center hole load cell, specially designed for
use in severe environments associated with civil engineering
applications and construction activity.
The advantage of vibrating wire load cell over a more conventional

electrical strain gage or semiconductor type load cell lies mainly in
the use of a frequency, rather than a voltage, as the output signal.
Frequency may be transmitted over long cable lengths of up to 1
km without appreciable degradation caused by variation in cable resistance that may result from water
penetration, temperature fluctuations, contact resistance or leakage to ground. The load cell is often used
in series with a hydraulic jack for applying load. Consequently, it verifies load as applied by the hydraulic
jack.
or a land slide or a slope failure, the disaster may cause mammoth loss of life, property, wealth and time.
A large number of methods are available for taking preventive and corrective action. One of the methods
is anchoring.
Anchoring has emerged as a powerful preventive method. Use of pre-stressed grouted anchors provides
an active support system in all the above cases. In any optimum, safe and economic use of anchoring,
anchor spacing and anchor load have to be determined. This is done by use of centre hole load cell and a
suitable read out unit. At locations where several sensors are installed, a data logger may be used for ease
in analysis and for studying cumulative effects.
1.1 Handling and installation of load cell
Load cell should be handled very carefully during transportation and installation. It should never be dropped
as impact generated will almost certainly result in a shift of zero reading.
permanent damage.
Direct sunlight should never fall on the load cell. This results in uneven temperature distribution across the
load cell and will certainly give erroneous results. Load cell should be well covered with an insulating
protective shield to reduce effect of sunlight and environment changes like those induced due to rain or
wind.
NOTE: Protect load cell from direct sunlight or environmental changes like those induced by rain or
wind. The load cell is a fluid filled system in which effect of eccentric loads is less than in our
other types of load cells but effect of temperature variations is more because of unequal
expansion of filled fluid in comparison to the enclosing steel pads. It is not possible to quantify
both these effects as they depend upon field conditions and user is advised to conduct his
own field tests to monitor any variations.
Page | 1
vibrating wire center hole load cells in your application. To make this manual more useful we invite your
valuable comments and suggestions regarding any additions or enhancements. We also request you to
please let us know of any errors that you may find while going through this manual.
The users’ manual is intended to provide sufficient information for making optimum use of vibrating wire
load cell in different applications. To make the manual more useful we invite valuable comments and
suggestions regarding any additions or enhancements. We also request to please let us know of any errors
that are found while going through the manual.
useless.
particular problem.
Installation of a load cells requires expertise. It is recommended that potential users

and also may give an early warning of potential danger or problems.
For general description: See § 2.1 ‘General description’.
For understanding principle of vibrating wire centre hole load cell: See § 2.2 ‘Operating principle’.
For test certificate: See § 3.1 ‘Sample test certificate’.
For installation of centre hole load cells: See § 4 ‘Installation procedure’.

For evaluating thermistor data: See § 5 ‘Thermistor - temperature resistance correlation’.
Page | 2
2 VIBRATING WIRE LOAD CELL
The model ELC-31V vibrating wire load cell is fluid filled and is constructed from stainless steel. It is
available in capacities ranging from 500 kN to 2000 kN. Load cells having an internal diameter different
from the standard specified range are available upon request. In addition to the above, a 2500 kN load cell
without center hole is also available.
Figure 2.1
The model ELC-31V vibrating wire center hole load cell is made of a sensitive pressure pad which is formed
by welding together two stiff steel discs at their periphery. The space inside the cell is filled with de-aired
fluid. When load is applied to cell, pressure on the fluid changes. This change in fluid pressure is used to
monitor the variation in load being applied to the cell. The load is distributed equally over the loading area
of the cell by a thick, load distribution plate (L D plate).
Capacity kN ELC-31V vibrating wire centre hole load cell

T1 mm D1 mm D2 mm D3 mm Weight kg
500 28 52 144 160 4.5
750 28 78 180 196 6
1000 28 105 219 235 8
1500 28 105 249 265 11
2000 30 130 265 281 12
2500 30 0 260 281 15
Capacity kN Load distribution/bearing plate

OD mm ID mm T2 mm Wt. kg
500 144 52 33 4
750 180 78 33 6
1000 219 105 38 9
1500 249 105 38 12
2000 260 130 48 16
2500 260 -- 48 20
Page | 3
The fluid pressure inside the load cell is measured by a vibrating wire pressure transducer. The vibrating
wire pressure transducer is of stainless steel construction and incorporates the latest vibrating wire
technology to provide electrical read-out. A glass to metal seal is provided for easy cable connection. A
thermistor is incorporated in the pressure sensor for monitoring temperature.
Tri-polar plasma surge arrestor inside pressure transducer housing protects the vibrating wire pluck and
read coils from electrical transients such as may be induced by direct or indirect lightning strikes.
Leads from the coil magnet are terminated on a glass to metal seal which is integrally electron beam welded
to stainless steel body of the pressure sensor. Two pins marked red and black are connected to the coil
magnet. The other two pins are connected to a thermistor. A cable joint housing and cable gland is provided
for the cable connection. For cable jointing, refer to Users Manual 6002.11.
Normally, load cell is supplied without any cable attached to it. Cable jointing with required length of
appropriate cable can be easily done at site. However, if specifically requested, the load cell is supplied
with the requisite length of cable attached.
Data from load cell can be read by Encardio-rite model EDI-51V vibrating wire read-out unit/data logger or
remotely monitored by Encardio-rite model EDAS-10 automatic data acquisition system.
Load distribution plates can be used both above and below the load cell to ensure an even distribution of
load on the sensor. Bottom load distribution plate is generally not required if an adequate bearing plate has
been incorporated into the proposed installation arrangement.
Vibrating wire pressure cell of load cell basically consists of a magnetic, high tensile strength stretched
wire, one end of which is anchored and other end fixed to a diaphragm that deflects in proportion to applied
pressure. Any change in pressure, deflects the diaphragm proportionally and this in turn affects tension in
the stretched wire. Thus any change in load, directly affects the tension in the wire.
f = [σg/ρ]1/2/ 2l Hz
where σ = tension of wire in kg/cm 2
g = 980 cm/sec 2
load is proportional to the square of the frequency and the readout unit is able to display this directly in
engineering units.
The model EDI-51V is a microprocessor based readout unit for use with Encardio-rite’s range of vibrating
wire transducers. It can display the measured frequency in terms of time period, frequency, frequency
squared or the value of the measured parameter directly in proper engineering units.
The EDI-51V indicator can store calibration coefficients of up to 500 vibrating wire sensors so that value of
measured parameter from these sensors can be shown directly in proper engineering units. The indicator
has an internal non-volatile memory with sufficient capacity to store about 4,500 readings from any, some
or all of the 500 programmed transducers in any combination. Each reading is stamped with date and time
of taking measurement.
Calibration coefficients are given in the individual ‘Test Certificate’ provided with each transducer. Refer
to model EDI-51V instruction manual WI-6002.26 for entering the transducer calibration coefficients. The
Page | 4
gage factor given in the test certificate and the zero reading in frequency2 (digits) at the time of installation
are used for setting up the transducer coefficients in the readout unit.
For transducers with a built-in interchangeable thermistor, the model EDI-51V can also display and record
the temperature of the transducer directly in degree Centigrade. Any Encardio-rite vibrating wire sensor
with the exception of the temperature sensor has a thermistor incorporated in it for temperature
measurement, unless not required specifically by the customer.
The stored readings can either be uploaded to a host computer using a serial interface or can be printed
out on any text printer equipped with a RS-232C serial communications interface. The set-up information
The readout indicator is powered by an internal 6 V rechargeable sealed maintenance free battery. A fully
charged new battery provides nearly 60 hours of operation on a single charge. A separate battery charger
is provided with the EDI-51V indicator to charge the internal battery from 230 V AC mains.
The EDI-51V indicator is housed in a splash proof resin moulded enclosure with weatherproof connectors
for making connections to the vibrating wire transducer and the battery charger.
Page | 5
TEST CERTIFICATE
Customer: Date: 21.03.2009

P.O. No. Temp. 36 o C
Instrument: Model: ELC-31V vibrating wire type anchor bolt load cell
Capacity: 750 kN
Mfg. Sr. No. 1087
Dimension details
I.D.(mm) O.D.(mm) Height (mm)
Load cell 78 196 28
L.D. plate 78 180 40
Test data:
End point
Input Load Observed Values Average fit Non-linearity
(kN) (Digits) (Digits) (kN) (% fs)
Cycle 1 Cycle 2
0 6731.9 6732.6 6732.3 0.00 0.0
150 6581.5 6580.4 6581.0 151.03 0.1
300 6428.7 6432.0 6430.4 301.36 0.2
450 6275.4 6275.9 6275.7 455.78 0.8
600 6130.8 6139.9 6135.4 595.83 0.6
750 5982.5 5979.3 5980.9 750.00 0.0

Linear Gage Fac-
tor -0.998 kN/digit (digit = f 2/1000)
Wiring Configuration:
Colour Description
Black- Red Sensor
Green- White Thermistor
Cable Length: NIL
Page | 6
The following tools and accessories are required for proper cable jointing and installation of the load cell:
3.1 Soldering iron 25 watt, temperature controlled

3.1 Rosin 63/37 solder wire RF-3C, 30 swg.
Products Ltd. or equivalent. For alternatives, refer to note on page 3-3 of Encardio-rite user’s manual
3.1 Accessories for cable jointing compound i.e. rotary tin cutter, stainless steel rod 2 mm φ, 150 mm length
for stirring, spatula & pouring funnel
3.1 Spanner 20/22 and 26/28

3.1 Wire stripper and Cable Cutter
3.1 Pliers 160 mm
3.1 Locking nut spanner
3.1 Toothbrush
3.1 Cloth for cleaning (lint less)
3.1 EDI-51V portable readout unit/Data logger
Page | 7
Remove cable joint housing from cable end of sensor. This gives access to the four pin terminal. Two of
the terminals are marked with red and black colours. These are internally wired to the coil of the magnet
assembly inside the sensor. The other two terminals are utilized for measurement of temperature using a
thermistor. Clean the terminals with a toothbrush.

The coil resistance measured by a digital multimeter between the red and black pins, should lie
between 120-150 Ohm. Determine resistance at room temperature from thermistor temperature
resistance chart in § 5. This resistance should be approximately equal to that between pins
marked green and white. For example, if room temperature were 25oC, the resistance would be
3,000 Ohm.
The resistance between any lead and the protective armour should be > 500 M Ohm.
Connect sensor to Encardio-rite model EDI-51V portable readout unit and switch it on. The
Freq: 2629.8 Hz
4.1.2 Connect required length of cable to the sensor as described in operating manual on cable jointing
WI-6002.11.
flooring. Cables should never by unreeled by pulling on cable itself as the internal conductors
can get damaged from excessive strain.
can happen, for example, when the cable drum is kept on its side and the cable is taken out
4.1.3 Check working of the sensor again following the procedure described above.
NOTE: Add cable resistance when checking resistance between the leads after the cable jointing.
For the model CS 0401 cable, the resistance is 26 Ohm/km and for the model CS 0406 cable,
the resistance is 48 Ohm/km. (multiply by 2 for both leads). In case any other cable is used,
make necessary addition in resistance value.
4.1.4 After extension of the cable, check working of sensor again following procedure described above.
the cable jointing. For the model CS 0406 cable, the resistance is 48 Ohm/km. (multiply by
2 for both leads). In case any other cable is used, make the necessary addition in the
resistance value.
4.2 Installation on anchor bolt or cable anchor

4.2.1 Before installation of load cell take temperature and initial zero reading of the load cell.
Subsequent readings will be compared against this initial zero reading to get the correct load.
This data is used to feed the initial reading in the model EDI-51V.
Page | 8
4.2.2 Carefully grout seating pad Load distribution plate

perpendicular and concentric with Load cell assembly
anchor bolt/cable anchor. Inserting
a suitable bush between anchor
bolt/ cable anchor and bored hole
can do this. The bush should be
subsequently removed.
V W pressure
4.2.3 Install center hole load cell sensor
between flat seating pad and load
distribution plates. These plates
should be parallel to each other
and normal to axis of load cell.
Anchor can be centralized by Rock
carefully positioning load cell over Seating pad
Anchor
it. Alternatively, a suitable bush
can be used in annular space Figure 4.1
between load cell and anchor to
centralize it. If a bush is used, take care that it does not interfere with loading pattern of load cell.
In case surface of flat seating pad and load distribution plates cannot be maintained parallel, use
spherical settings or wedges or compensation washers made of copper/high density plastic
material.
4.3 Installation on struts
Installation of load cells for measurement of axial load should be carefully designed. It varies from
installation to installation and also depends upon type of struts used. A typical installation is illustrated
below:
Fixing plate
V W type load cell
Load cell mounting plate
Support plate (not in E-R scope)
X
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX X
X XX X
XX XX
XX
XXXXXXXXXXXX
XX
XX
XX X
XX X
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
Strut Base plate X XX

XX
XX
XX
Runner beam XX
XX
Tie rod/bar/angle
King post
Figure 4.2
Page | 9
4.4 General precautions in the mounting of load cell
permanent damage.
Direct sunlight should never fall on the load cell. This results in uneven temperature distribution across the
load cell and will certainly give erroneous results. Load cell should be well covered with an insulating
protective shield to reduce effect of sunlight and environment changes like those induced due to rain or
wind.
NOTE: Protect load cell from direct sunlight or environmental changes like those induced by rain or
wind. The load cell is a fluid filled system in which effect of eccentric loads is less than in our
other types of load cells but effect of temperature variations is more because of unequal
expansion of filled fluid in comparison to the enclosing steel pads. It is not possible to quantify
both these effects as they depend upon field conditions and user is advised to conduct his
own field tests to monitor any variations.
4.5 General precautions in the mounting of the cable
Careful and skilled cabling is required in installation of a load cell. The load cell/cable joint and a large part
of cable may be exposed to blasting and construction work. Part of the cable may be permanently
embedded and no future access may be available for any maintenance and corrective action. In general,
take following precautions:
 Protect cable from damage by angular/sharp particles of material in which it is embedded.
wherever possible. If necessary, use special cable jointing kits available from factory.
Take precaution that cables are properly tagged all along. With best possible precautions, mistakes may
still occur. Tags may get lost due to cable getting accidentally cut. Encardio-rite uses convention that
looking from junction box or observation room towards sensor, cable from most distant sensor is always at
the left hand side. In that order, cable from closest sensor is at extreme right.
Similarly, cable from most distant sensor should be connected to extreme left socket in junction box.
Succeeding cables from sensors are connected progressively towards right in junction box.
 Check insulation resistance. Resistance between any lead and the protective armour should be > 500
m Ohm. If not, cut a meter or so from the end of cable and check again.
 Does read-out work with another load cell? If not, read-out may be malfunctioning or have a low battery.
Consult manual of readout unit for charging or trouble shooting instructions.
 Use another read-out unit to take reading.

generators, transformers, arc welders and antennas. If so problem could be reduced by shielding from
Page | 10
the electrical noise.

 Cable may be cut or crushed? Check nominal resistance between the gage leads using an Ohmmeter.
It should be within 120 - 150 Ohm. The correct value is given in test certificate. Please add cable
resistance when checking. For model CS 0401 cable, the resistance is 26 Ohm/km and for the model
CS-406 cable, the resistance is 48 Ohm/km. (multiply by 2 for both leads). In case any other cable is
used, make the necessary addition in the resistance value. If the resistance reads infinite or a very
high value, a cut in the cable is suspected. If the resistance reads very low (<100 Ohm), a short in the
cable is likely.
 Does read-out work with another load cell? If not, read-out is malfunctioning or may have low battery.
Page | 11
T herm i st o r t yp e Dale 1C3001-B3
T empe r at u r e re s ist an ce equ at i on

T = 1/[A + B(LnR) + C(LnR)3] - 273.2 oC
A = 1.4051 x 10-3
B = 2.369 x 10-4
C = 1.019 x 10-7
Ohm Temp. oC Ohm Temp. oC Ohm Temp. oC
201.1k -50 16.60K -10 2417 +30
187.3K -49 15.72K -9 2317 31
174.5K -48 14.90K -8 2221 32
162.7K -47 14.12K -7 2130 33
151.7K -46 13.39k -6 2042 34
141.6K -45 12.70K -5 1959 35
132.2K -44 12.05K -4 1880 36
123.5K -43 11.44K -3 1805 37
115.4K -12 10.86K -2 1733 38
107.9K -41 10.31K -1 1664 39
101.0K -40 9796 0 1598 40
94.48K -39 9310 +1 1535 41
88.46K -38 8851 2 1475 42
82.87K -37 8417 3 1418 43
77.66K -36 8006 4 1363 44
72.81K -35 7618 5 1310 45
68.30K -34 7252 6 1260 46
64.09K -33 6905 7 1212 47
60.17K -32 6576 8 1167 48
56.51K -31 6265 9 1123 49
53.10K -30 5971 10 1081 50
49.91K -29 5692 11 1040 51
46.94K -28 5427 12 1002 52
44.16K -27 5177 13 965.0 53
41.56k -26 4939 14 929.6 54
39.13K -25 4714 15 895.8 55
36.86K -24 4500 16 863.3 56
34.73K -23 4297 17 832.2 57
32.74K -22 4105 18 802.3 58
30.87K -21 3922 19 773.7 59
29.13K -20 3748 20 746.3 60
27.49K -19 3583 21 719.9 61
25.95K -18 3426 22 694.7 62
24.51K -17 3277 23 670.4 63
23.16K -16 3135 24 647.1 64
21.89K -15 3000 25 624.7 65
20.70K -14 2872 26 603.3 66
19.58K -13 2750 27 582.6 67
18.52K -12 2633 28 562.8 68
17.53K -11 2523 29 525.4 70
Page | 12
Thermistor for temperature measurement is provided in all Encardio-rite vibrating wire load cells. The
thermistor gives a varying resistance output related to the temperature (see § 5). The thermistor is
connected between the green and white leads. The resistance can be measured with an Ohmmeter. The
cable resistance may be subtracted from the Ohmmeter reading to get the correct thermistor resistance.
However the effect is small and is usually ignored.
Page | 13
USERS’ MANUAL
VIBRATING WIRE LOAD CELL

MODEL ELC-32V
Doc. # WI 6002.78 R03 | Dec 2019

International: UAE | Qatar | Bahrain | Bhutan | Europe | UK | USA
Users’ Manual ELC-32V Vibrating wire load cell
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 General Considerations 1
1.1.1 Off-centre loading 1
1.1.2 End effects 1
1.1.3 Uneven bearing plates and their warping 2
2 VIBRATING WIRE LOAD CELL 3

2.1.1 Stainless steel element 3
3 SAMPLE TEST CERTIFICATE 5
4.1 Preparation of three/six elements sensor before installation 6
4.2 Installation on anchor bolt or cable anchor 7
4.3 Installation on struts 8
4.4 Pile load testing 9
4.5 Cable laying 9
4.5.1 General precautions in the mounting of the cable 9

www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
The Encardio-rite model ELC-32V vibrating wire load cell is precision engineered and specially designed
for use in severe environments associated with civil engineering applications and construction activity. The
advantage of vibrating wire load cell over a more conventional electrical strain gage or semiconductor type
load cell lies mainly in the use of a frequency, rather than a voltage, as the output signal. Frequency may
be transmitted over long cable lengths of up to 2 km without appreciable degradation caused by variation
in cable resistance that may result from water penetration, temperature fluctuations, contact resistance or
leakage to ground.
The load cell is often used in series with a hydraulic jack for applying load. Consequently, it verifies load
as applied by the hydraulic jack.
Encardio-rite model ELC-32V load cell is made in two configurations:

A Hollow with center hole - primarily used to load test an end anchored rock bolt or tie back or for
monitoring their long term performance. It is also used in monitoring temporary or permanent loads in
pre-stressing or other cables.
B Solid construction without center hole – used for measurement of compressive load between
structural members like struts, tunnel supports or at junction between a beam and top of a pile strut.
or a land slide or a slope failure, the disaster may cause mammoth loss of life, property, wealth and time.
A large number of methods are available for taking preventive and corrective action. One of the methods
is anchoring.
Anchoring has emerged as a powerful preventive method. Use of pre-stressed grouted anchors provides
an active support system in all the above cases. In any optimum, safe and economic use of anchoring,
anchor spacing and anchor load have to be determined. This is done by use of center hole load cell and a
suitable read out unit. At locations where several sensors are installed, a datalogger may be used for ease
in analysis and for studying cumulative effects.
1.1 General Considerations
Major source of error in data obtained from these load cells is due to off-centre loading, end effects and
uneven bearing plates and their warping. These effects can result in a cumulative error of as much as ± 20
%, unless special precautions are taken.
1.1.1 Off-centre loading
Most compressive load cells have a solid central raised button such that load is uniformly distributed. In
these load cells, load may be greater on one side than the other. Effect of eccentric loading can be
minimised by using spherical bearing washers or soft washers. This however is rarely done as it is
cumbersome and expensive. Effect of eccentric loading can be reduced by gaging the load cell at several
places along the periphery. In vibrating wire load cells, normally three strain gage elements are used at
120o along the periphery. For larger center hole load cells six strain gage elements are recommended.
However, this makes taking of readings and averaging them more cumbersome.
1.1.2 End effects
Large height to diameter ratio is required in a columnar load cell to have uniform distribution of stress in
the gaged area. A load cell that has a height of more than four times the wall thickness of the loaded
columnar section is generally regarded as good. However, to make it easier to use, normally the height is
somewhat reduced.
Page | 1
1.1.3 Uneven bearing plates and their warping

An uneven bearing or load distribution plate can affect the accuracy of the reading. So can the bending or
distortion of the plates. It is essential to have bearing/load distribution plates of the correct thickness and
finish. In case of a center hole load cell, hole in plates should match that of load cell.
When a center hole load cell is used in conjunction with a hydraulic jack, warping of bearing plates is
caused primarily by a size mismatch between the hydraulic jack and the load cell. In case the jack is larger
than the load cell bearing plates, it tends to wrap around them causing the vertical column of the load cell
to distort inwards causing the load cell to give a different reading from the actual. The vice versa is true in
case the hydraulic jack is smaller than the load cell bearing plates.
The effect is reduced by using thicker bearing plates. Refer to § 2.1.2 for recommended bearing plate
sizes. Bearing plates should be flat and smooth. It is always better to have them machined or ground.
wire center hole load cells in your application. To make this manual more useful we invite your valuable
comments and suggestions regarding any additions or enhancements. We also request you to please let
us know of any errors that you may find while going through this manual.
permanent damage.
For general description: See § 2.1 ‘General description’.
For understanding principle of vibrating wire center hole load cell: See § 2.2 ‘Operating principle’.
For test certificate: See § 3 ‘Sample test certificate’.
For installation of center hole and solid load cells: See § 4 ‘Installation procedure’.
For evaluating thermistor data: See § 5 ‘Thermistor - temperature resistance correlation’.
Page | 2
2 VIBRATING WIRE LOAD CELL

Each load cell is provided with three vibrating wire strain gage elements
on the periphery at 120° to each other. Load cells with six elements are
available when specifically ordered. A thermistor is incorporated in each
vibrating wire load cell for monitoring temperature.
2.1.1 Stainless steel element
The vibrating wire and coil magnet assembly are mounted on periphery
of a stainless steel columnar element.
Vibrating wire load cells with a center hole are very susceptible to
eccentric loading. The effect is reduced by providing bearing and load Figure 2.1
distribution plates of proper dimensions. The internal diameter of these plates is ALWAYS equal to the
internal diameter of the load cell. The dimensions are as follows:
Capacity D2 mm D1 mm H mm Weight
kN kg
250 58 27 75 1.5
500 88 52 85 3.0
1,000 127 78 115 7.5
1,500 160 102 120 12.0
2,000 190 127 130 16.5
2,000 210 152 130 17.5
3,500 275 202 140 31.0
1,000 – 3,500 kN capacity load cells are also available with no center hole and consequently reduced
outside diameter
Capacity Bearing/load distribution plate

kN O.D. mm I.D. mm T mm Wt. kg
250 60 27 23 0.5
500 95 52 30 1.2
1,000 130 78 35 2.5
1,500 165 102 42 4.5
2,000 195 127 48 6.7
2,000 215 152 48 7.0
3,500 280 202 60 14.3
Tri-polar plasma surge arrestors inside the transducer housing protects the vibrating wire pluck and read
Leads from the coil magnets of all gauges are terminated on a PCB inside the load cell housing. Six
core/nine core 5 m cable is connected to PCB inside housing. The green and white leads of cable are used
to connect the thermistor for measurement of temperature, black lead is common for one end of all coils
and other lead colours are for other ends of coils of strain gauges.
Page | 3
The vibrating wire load cell basically consists of a hollow cylindrical columnar section on which are
longitudinally mounted vibrating wire strain gages at equal angle to each other. Each strain gage consists
of a magnetic, high tensile strength stretched wire, the ends of which are anchored to the columnar section
that deflects in some proportion to the applied load. Any change in load, deflects the columnar section and
this in turn affects the tension in the stretched wire. Thus, any change in the load, directly affects the tension
in the wire.
The resonant frequency, with which the wire vibrates, induces an alternating current in the coil magnet.
In other words, any variation in the load on the load cell causes the columnar section to deflect. This changes
the tension in the wires of the elements thus affecting the frequency of vibration. The load on each element
is proportional to the square of the frequency and the read out unit is able to display this directly in engineering
units. The sum of the load on the elements gives the average load on the center hole load cell.
The model EDI-54V vibrating wire indicator is a
microprocessor-based read-out unit for use with
Encardio-rite’s range of vibrating wire sensors. It
can display the measured frequency in terms of
time period, frequency, frequency squared or the
value of measured parameter directly in proper
engineering units. It uses a smartphone with
Android OS as readout having a large display with
a capacitive touch screen which makes it easy to
read the VW sensor.

calibration coefficients from 10,000 vibrating wire
sensors so that the value of the measured
parameter from these sensors can be shown directly in proper engineering units. Please note that the each
vibrating wire load cell has 3-6 elements.
For transducers with built-in interchangeable thermistor, it can also display the temperature of the
transducer directly in degree Centigrade.
Refer instruction manual WI-6002.112 of model EDI-54V for entering the transducer calibration coefficients.
The gage factor of the model ELC-32V vibrating wire load cell is given in the individual test certificate
provided with every supply of load cell. The gage factor and the factory zero reading (frequency) can
directly be taken from the test certificate for setting up transducer coefficients in the read-out unit. The test
certificate also gives the factory zero reading in frequency 2 for use with transducers provided with
polynomial linearity correction.
Page | 4
3 SAMPLE TEST CERTIFICATE
Test Certificate
Customer Date
PO No. Temp. 29°C
Instrument VW Center hole Load Cell Model ELC-32V
Serial No 0510192
Capacity 500 kN
Test Data:
Average End point

Load Applied Observed Values(digit) (digit) fit Non-linearity
kN Element-1 Element-2 Element-3 kN (%fs)
0 7088.9 7042.0 7692.0 7274.3 0.00 0.00
100 6787.8 6623.3 7469.9 6960.3 102.4 0.48
200 6482.1 6237.0 7247.3 6655.5 201.8 0.37
300 6167.0 5857.0 7010.0 6344.7 303.2 0.64
400 5866.9 5488.8 6782.2 6046.0 400.6 0.13
500 5559.8 5124.3 6540.0 5741.4 500.0 0.00
Maximum Non Linearity 0.64 % fs

Linear Gage Factor -3.262E-01 kN/digit (applicable for all the three elements)
Where 1 digit = frequency2/1000
Wiring Configuration
Description
Colour
Black- Red Element-1
Black- Brown Element-2
Black- Blue Element-3
Green- White Thermistor
Cable Length: 5m
Dimensional details:
ID(mm) OD(mm) Height(mm)

Load Cell 27 58 75
Load distribution plate 27 60 23
Bearing plate 27 60 23
Note: Format for six element load cell or with polynomial correction is different
Page | 5
4.1 Preparation of three/six elements sensor before installation

The procedure described is for a three element load cell. For a six element load cell, please make the
necessary modifications in the procedure.

▪ Coil resistance measured by a digital multimeter between red/black, brown/black, and blue/black leads,
should lie between 130-170 Ohm. Determine resistance at room temperature from thermistor
temperature resistance chart in § 5. This resistance should be equal to that between green and white
leads. For example, in case room temperature is 25°C, this resistance would be 3,000 Ohm.
▪ The resistance between any lead and the protective armour should be > 300 M Ohm.
▪ Connect the red/black leads from the sensor to the Encardio-rite model EDI-54V portable readout unit
and switch it on. The display will show something like:
Freq: 2629.8 Hz
Where, the actual figure will vary from transducer to transducer and will also depend upon the
element connected to the indicator.
▪ Shift the read-out unit display to the frequency2 mode. Each sensor is provided with a test certificate
giving relationship between load and output.
NOTE: Check sensor for proper functioning before installation. Each load cell is provided with a test
certificate giving relationship between applied load and output. The gage factor given is the
average value as determined for the three/six vibrating wire elements.
4.1.2 Extend cable if required by using a suitable cable jointing kit. Alternatively, you can procure a
junction box from Encardio-rite for this purpose. For long term outside usage seal junction box with
a suitable cable jointing compound.
CAUTION: In case cable is used for extension, it should always be removed from a spool by rotating the
NOTE: For cable jointing compound, details are given below:
• For PVC cable: R-pack 3M Scotch Cast 450 resin and hardener MSH 283
• For PU cable: 3M Scotch Cast Electrical Kit 2131
Any suitable two component cable jointing compound available in your Country can be used
in place of the above mentioned compounds used by us in India. The above two jointing
compounds are included in the supplies made in India.
WARNING! Avoid skin and eye contact with the jointing compound. The compound is harmful if
swallowed. Hands should be thoroughly washed with soap and water immediately after use.
Use of latex gloves is recommended especially if a large number of joints are to be made.
Empty jointing compound containers should be destroyed after pouring and should not be
used for storing any other material.
4.1.3 After extension of the cable, check working of sensor again following procedure described above.
the cable jointing. For the model CS 0401 cable, the resistance is 84 Ohm/km (multiply by 2
for both leads). In case any other cable is used, make the necessary addition in the resistance
value.
Page | 6
4.2 Installation on anchor bolt or cable anchor
4.2.1 Before installation of load cell take temperature and

initial zero reading of all three/six elements in load
cell. Subsequent readings will be compared against
this initial zero reading to get the correct load. This
data is used to feed the initial reading for the
individual elements in the model EDI-54V.
4.2.2 Carefully grout seating pad perpendicular and

concentric with anchor bolt/cable anchor. Inserting
a suitable bush between the anchor bolt/cable
anchor and the bored hole can do this. The bush
should be subsequently removed.
4.2.3 Install center hole load cell between flat bearing and
load distribution plates. These plates should be
parallel to each other and normal to the of load cell.
The anchor can be centralized by carefully
Figure 4.1
positioning the load cell over it. Alternatively, a
suitable bush can be used in the annular space
between the load cell and the anchor to centralize
it. If a bush is used, care should be taken that it does not interfere with loading pattern of load cell.
In case surface of flat bearing and load distribution plates cannot be maintained parallel, spherical
settings or wedges or compensation washers made of copper/high density plastic material should
be used.
NOTE: Effect of eccentric loading and uneven or warped bearing and load distribution plates has a
profound effect on load cell reading. Having thicker plates reduces this effect. For
recommended sizes of plates, refer to § 2.1.2. Careful mounting is required to reduce effect
of eccentric loading. Load cell should be mounted between flat bearing and load distribution
plates of proper thickness depending upon load cell capacity. Load should be centralized with
respect to load cell axis. In case surfaces are not parallel, spherical settings or wedges should
be employed.
NOTE: An uneven bearing or load distribution plate can affect accuracy of reading. So can the
bending or distortion of plates. It is essential to have bearing/load distribution plates of correct
thickness and finish. Hole in these plates should match internal diameter of center hole load
cell. Effect of bearing/load distribution plates bending is illustrated by an experiment
performed on an Encardio-rite 1,000 kN anchor bolt load cell, loaded on an universal testing
machine to full capacity. For purpose of the experiment a flat plate was placed on the load
cell and the load was applied through bushes of different diameters. The result is displayed
below.
It will be noticed that if bush is smaller, load cell over registers. Vice versa is also true. The
effect is reduced in case the plate in-between is thicker. Theoretically also, this is how it should
be, because the vibrating wire strain gages are mounted at the center of the hollow cylindrical
columnar stress element.
Page | 7
Load cell response to applied load (1,000 kN)

Load cell

Load cell
load cell
4.3 Installation on struts
Installation of load cells (solid) for measurement of axial load should be carefully designed. It varies from
installation to installation and also depends upon type of struts used. A typical installation is illustrated
below.
1. Encardio-rite model ELC-32V

load cell (solid type).
2. Stay rod for restrain in vertical

direction (with required brackets
etc.) - 2 no.
3. Stay rod for restrain in horizontal

direction (with required brackets
etc.) - 2 no.
4. Teflon pad – 2 no.
Figure 4.2
Page | 8
4.4 Pile load testing

Installation of load cells (solid type) for pile load testing should be carefully designed. A typical installation
is shown in Figure 4.3 below:
Figure 4.3 Pile load testing
4.5 Cable laying

4.5.1 General precautions in the mounting of the cable
Careful and skilled cabling is required in installation of a load cell. The load cell/cable joint and a large part
of cable may be exposed to blasting and construction work. Part of the cable may be permanently
embedded and no future access may be available for any maintenance and corrective action. In general,
take following precautions:
▪ Protect cable from damage by angular/sharp particles of material in which it is embedded.
▪ Cables may be spliced without affecting sensor reading; nevertheless, splicing should be avoided
wherever possible. If necessary, use special cable jointing kits available from factory.
Take precaution that cables are properly tagged all along. With best possible precautions, mistakes may
still occur. Tags may get lost due to cable getting accidentally cut. Encardio-rite uses convention that
looking from junction box or observation room towards sensor, cable from most distant sensor is always at
the left hand side. In that order, cable from closest sensor is at extreme right.
Similarly, cable from most distant sensor should be connected to extreme left socket in junction box.
Succeeding cables from sensors are connected progressively towards right in junction box.

▪ Check insulation resistance. Resistance between any lead and the protective armor should be > 500
m Ohm. If not, cut a meter or so from the end of cable and check again.
▪ Does read-out work with another load cell? If not, read-out may be malfunctioning or have a low battery.
Page | 9
▪ Use another read-out unit to take reading.

▪ Check if there is a source of electrical noise nearby? General sources of electrical noise are motors,
the electrical noise.
▪ Cable may be cut or crushed? Check nominal resistance between the gage leads using an Ohmmeter.
It should be within 130 - 170 Ohm. The correct value is given in test certificate. Please add cable
resistance when checking. For model CS 0401 cable, the resistance is 26 Ohm/km and for the model
ERC-12-15 cable, the resistance is 84 Ohm/km. (multiply by 2 for both leads). In case any other cable
is used, make the necessary addition in the resistance value. If the resistance reads infinite or a very
high value, a cut in the cable is suspected. If the resistance reads very low (<100 Ohm), a short in the
cable is likely.
▪ Does read-out work with another load cell? If not, read-out is malfunctioning or may have low battery.
▪ Use another read-out unit to take the reading
Page | 10
The rm i sto r t yp e Dale 1C3001-B3

T = 1/[A + B(LnR) + C(LnR)3] - 273.2 °C
A = 1.4051 x 10-3
B = 2.369 x 10-4
C = 1.019 x 10-7
Ohm Temp. °C Ohm Temp. °C Ohm Temp.°C

201.1k -50 16.60K -10 2417 +30
187.3K -49 15.72K -9 2317 31
174.5K -48 14.90K -8 2221 32
162.7K -47 14.12K -7 2130 33
151.7K -46 13.39k -6 2042 34
141.6K -45 12.70K -5 1959 35
132.2K -44 12.05K -4 1880 36
123.5K -43 11.44K -3 1805 37
115.4K -12 10.86K -2 1733 38
107.9K -41 10.31K -1 1664 39
101.0K -40 9796 0 1598 40
94.48K -39 9310 +1 1535 41
88.46K -38 8851 2 1475 42
82.87K -37 8417 3 1418 43
77.66K -36 8006 4 1363 44
72.81K -35 7618 5 1310 45
68.30K -34 7252 6 1260 46
64.09K -33 6905 7 1212 47
60.17K -32 6576 8 1167 48
56.51K -31 6265 9 1123 49
53.10K -30 5971 10 1081 50
49.91K -29 5692 11 1040 51
46.94K -28 5427 12 1002 52
44.16K -27 5177 13 965.0 53
41.56k -26 4939 14 929.6 54
39.13K -25 4714 15 895.8 55
36.86K -24 4500 16 863.3 56
34.73K -23 4297 17 832.2 57
32.74K -22 4105 18 802.3 58
30.87K -21 3922 19 773.7 59
29.13K -20 3748 20 746.3 60
27.49K -19 3583 21 719.9 61
25.95K -18 3426 22 694.7 62
24.51K -17 3277 23 670.4 63
23.16K -16 3135 24 647.1 64
21.89K -15 3000 25 624.7 65
20.70K -14 2872 26 603.3 66
19.58K -13 2750 27 582.6 67
18.52K -12 2633 28 562.8 68
17.53K -11 2523 29 525.4 70
Page | 11
Thermistor for temperature measurement is provided in all Encardio-rite vibrating wire load cells. The
thermistor is connected between the green and white leads and gives a varying resistance output related
to the temperature (see § 5). The resistance can be measured with an Ohmmeter. The cable resistance
may be subtracted from the Ohmmeter reading to get the correct thermistor resistance. However, the effect
is small and is usually ignored.
The Encardio-rite model EDI-54V vibrating wire read-out unit gives the temperature from the thermistor
reading directly in engineering units.
Page | 12
USERS’ MANUAL
STRAIN GAGE TYPE LOAD CELL

MODEL ELC-150S-H
Doc # WI 6002.101 R00 | Jun 2006

www.encardio.com
Users’ Manual ELC-150S-H Strain gage type load cell
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
2 STRAIN GAGE TYPE LOAD CELL 4

4 INSTALLATION METHOD FOR THE MEASUREMENT OF LOAD IN STRUTS 9

4.1 General 9
4.2 Installation and taking readings 9
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
The Encardio-rite model ELC-150S-H is a very heavy duty, high capacity, and precision load cell to
measure the compressive loads. The load cell is being increasingly used in several applications due to the
following features.
Features
 Specially designed to suit stringent harsh industrial environments.

 Ideally suited for use with data acquisition systems.
 Having no moving parts and mechanical linkages, hence the system is stable.
 Load cells are temperature compensated within controlled limits, reducing the effect of temperature
variation.
 It can also be applied to the measurement of compressive load between structural members, i.e.
tunnel supports or at the junction between a beam and the top of a pile strut.
Model ELC-150S-H series load cells has been
specially designed to meet the increasing demand in
load measurement with a high degree of accuracy and
reliability. The load cell is ideally suited for
150
measurement of compressive loads or forces.
Model ELC-150S-H series load cell finds extensive

use in experimental research, pile testing and
measurement of thrust of rocks. 100 (approx)
ØD
ELC-150S-H load cell comprises of a high strength
Cap. (kN.) ØD
martensitic stainless steel sensor element. The sensor
utilizes precision sixteen bonded foil strain gages 5000 217
mounted at 45o to each other to minimize effect of 6000 217
uneven and eccentric loading. These are connected in 7500 248
a simple Wheatstone bridge circuit. The output is
10000 278
derived from imbalances in bridge circuit as the sensor
12500 293
senses load. Typically the bridge circuit is excited by
10 VDC to give a full scale output of around 1.5 mV/V. 15000 318
ELC-150S-H load cell is designed for use in environments normally associated with construction activity.
load. Data logging also in case of vibrating wire load cells requires three (or six) channels. The main
advantage of vibrating wire load cell over strain gage load cell is that the former uses a frequency rather
than a voltage as output signal. Frequency may be transmitted over long cable lengths of upto 2 km without
appreciable degradation caused by variations in cable resistance arising from water penetration,
temperature fluctuation, contact resistance or leakage to ground etc.
Load cells are available in standard capacities ranging from 5000, 6000, 7500, 10000 and 12500 kN.
Page | 1
1.1 Specifications
Capacity (kN) 5000,6000,7500,10000,

12500,15000
Safe Overload 120 % fs
Rated Output 1.5 mV/V ± 10 %
Zero Balance < ± 0.1 % fs
Excitation Voltage
Nominal 10 VDC
Maximum 20 VDC
Terminal Resistance
Input 1540 Ohm ± 5 %
Output 1400 Ohm ± 1 %
Insulation Resistance >500 M Ohm at 12V
Temperature Range -10° to 70° C
Total Error 1 % fs
Creep 30 min. 0.03 % fs
Temp. Effect
Zero % fs /° C ± 0.05
Span % fs/° C ± 0.03
Enclosure IP-54
permanent damage.

strain gage type load cell in your application.
Page | 2

For essential tools and accessories: See § 2.1.3 ‘Tools and accessories required for installation’.
For troubleshooting: See § 3.4 ‘Trouble shooting’.
Page | 3
2 STRAIN GAGE TYPE LOAD CELL

The strain gages are mounted on a stainless steel columnar element The sectional area of the columnar
element is varied in the different capacity load cells to give approximately the same mV/V output for a
variation of zero to full load. A cover protects the columnar element by providing o-ring seal.

The load cells are very susceptible to eccentric loading. Providing a load distribution plate of proper
dimensions at the top reduces the effect. In some applications, a load bearing plate may also be used at
the bottom of the load cell. Standard plates stocked by Encardio-rite have the following dimensions:
Capacity T mm Load distribution/Bearing plate
kN Size Wt. kg
5000 32 200X200 10.05
6000 32 do 10.05
7500 32 250X250 15.70
10000 50 Φ285 25.03
12500 50 Φ300 27.73
Leads from the Wheatstone bridge circuit are terminated on a small printed circuit board (PCB), through a
six-pin glass to metal seal in the cable holder assembly. No load output balancing, temperature
compensation and full scale output balancing is being done on the PCB. A suitable four core shielded
cable is terminated through a cable joint housing and cable gland.
2.2.2 Rosin 63/37 solder wire RF-3C, 30 SWG
2.2.3 Thread sealant (Loctite 577)

2.2.4 Cable jointing compound (MS 853 and hardener MSH 283 - Mahendra Engineering & Chemical
2.2.5 Accessories for cable jointing compound i.e. rotary tin cutter, stainless steel rod 2 mm φ, 150 mm
2.2.7 Toothbrush
Page | 4

2.2.10 Pliers 160 mm
2.2.11 Spanner 18/19
2.2.13 Encardio-rite model EDI-53L digital indicator/logger
Page | 5
Encardio-rite Electronics Pvt. Ltd.

A-7 Industrial Estate, Talkatora Road, Lucknow, UP-226011 India
E-mail: geotech@encardio.com, lko@encardio.com; Website: www.encardio.com
Tel. +91 (522) 2661039/40/41/42 Fax +91 (522) 2662403
TEST CERTIFICATE
Date: 11.03.2011
Temp. 20 o C
Customer:
P.O. No.
Instrument: Model: ELC-150S-H strain gage type compression load cell
Capacity 5000 kN
Mfg. Sr. No.
Dimension details
I.D.(mm) O.D.(mm) Height(mm)
Load cell NA 220 150
Length(mm) Width (mm) Height (mm)

Top plate 200 200 32
Bottom plate 200 200 32
Bottom fixing plate 200 200 15
General details

Input Load Output (mV/V)

kN
Cycle 1 Cycle 2
0 0.000 0.000
1000 0.323 0.322
2000 0.630 0.631
3000 0.951 0.950
4000 1.262 1.261
5000 1.580 1.580

annexure-1)
Colour Signal
Red + Excitaion
Black - Excitation
Green + Output
White - Output
Cable Length 5 meter
Page | 6
3.1.1 Clean four wires of the load cell.

 Resistance measured by a digital multi-meter between red/black terminals should be 1540 Ohms
± 5 % and between green/white terminals should be 1400 Ohm ± 1 %
 Resistance between any lead and outer casing should be > 500 M Ohm.
NOTE: Check sensor for proper functioning before installation.

extra length for cable jointing). Always determine correct length of cable required. CAUTION:
Cable should always be removed from a spool by rotating the spool. This will reduce chances of
nicking, bending or twisting of the cable.
3.1.4 Connect required length of cable to sensor as described in operating manual on cable jointing #
WI-6002.11E.
3.1.5 Check working of the sensor again following the procedure described in § 3.1.2.
NOTE: Add cable resistance when checking resistance between leads after cable jointing if required.
For EC-0107 cable (7 x 0.25 conductor) resistance is around 49 Ohm/km (multiply by 2 for
both leads). In case any other cable is used, make necessary addition in resistance value.
3.2.1. Load cell assembly should always be mounted on a machined seating pad of thickness greater
than flat bearing plate. Seating pad should be grouted perpendicular to axis of load application.
The load cell should be installed between flat bearing and load distribution plates. These plates
should be parallel to each other and normal to axis of load cell. In case surface of the flat bearing
and load distribution plates cannot be maintained parallel, spherical settings or wedges or
compensation washers made of copper/high density plastic material should be used.
effect on the load cell reading. Having thicker top and bottom plates reduces the effect.
Careful mounting is required to reduce effect of eccentric loading. The load cell should be mounted
between flat bearing top and bottom plates of proper thickness depending upon the load cell
capacity. The load should be centralized with respect to load cell axis. In case the surfaces are not
parallel, spherical settings or wedges should be employed. Compensation washers made of
copper, high density plastic or any similar deformable material may also be used.
reading. So can bending or distortion of plates. It is essential to use bearing/load distribution
plates of correct thickness and finish.
Reading. The effect is reduced in case the plate in-between is thicker. It is therefore The effect of
bearing/load distribution plates bending is illustrated by an experiment performed on an Encardio-
rite 50 tf centre hole load cell, loaded on an universal testing machine to full capacity. For purpose
of the experiment a flat plate was placed on the load cell and load applied through bushes of
different diameters. The result is displayed below.
It will be noticed that if the bush is smaller or larger, the load cell reading is different from the actual
Page | 7
Load cell response to applied load (50 tf)
Load cell
Load cell
Load cell
Page | 8
4 INSTALLATION METHOD FOR THE MEASUREMENT OF LOAD IN STRUTS
4.1 General
The Encardio-rite model ELC-150S-H series load cell is a heavy duty, high capacity, precision load cell
and is ideally suited for measurement of load in struts. Because of no moving parts and mechanical
linkages the load measurement system using the load cell is stable. The load cells are temperature
compensated reducing the effect of temperature variation. Besides load cell, the measurement system
inludes stay rods, top and bottom mounting plates, junction box, cable, switch box and a readout unit. A
typical mounting scheme for struts is shown in figure 1. Dimensional details of the load cell assembly are
provided in figure 2. For wiring details, refer to figure 3.
Bottom fixing plate

Bottom plate
Top plate
XX
**A
XX
XX
XX X
XX
XX
XX
XX
Support plate
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Load cell
X
XX
XX
XX
XX X
XX X
XX
XX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XX
XX
XX
XXX
XX
XX
Strut XX
XX
XX
XX
Base plate XX
XXX
XX
XX
** Refer figure 2 Runner beam XX

XX
Tie rod/bar/angle
King post
Figure 1
4.2 Installation and taking readings
4.2.1 Struts contractor to prepare struts for mounting the load cells. Weld two base plates around 500
mm x 300 mm x 25 mm on runner beam as shown in figure 1. These will support the struts over
the runner beam at the location where the load cells have to be mounted. The faces of the struts
have to be provided with support plates for mounting of load cells.
Page | 9
4.2.2 Mount the dummy load cell (1) on bottom fixing plate (2) by hex bolts M10X45 (5). Place top plate
(3) on the dummy load cell and fix the retaining plates (4) by hex bolts M8X25 (6) as shown in the
figure. With struts in position, lift the dummy load cell assembly by suitable means and position it
between flanges at specified location and position it at the centre of the strut to minimize the effect
of eccentric loading. Weld the top plate and bottom fixing plate to the strut flanges as shown in
figure 2. Repeat procedure for other locations also.
Remove the retaining plates (4) by unscrewing the bolts M8X25 (6). Remove the dummy load cell from
bottom fixing plate by unscrewing the bolts M10X45 (5). Place the load cell ELC-150 S-H 5000 kN with
bottom plate (refer figure 3) on the bottom fixing plate (pre-welded with the strut) and fix the whole assembly
by the hex bolts M10X45 to the bottom fixing plate. Mount the retaining plates on top plate (pre-welded
with the strut) and bottom fixing plate to align the whole assembly if required.
Plan (without strut)
Strut 3
4
229 ±1
Strut 200 x 200
220
Figure 2
Page | 10
Load cell assembly
Bottom plate
Allen bolt, M16x40
Figure 3
Figure 4
CAUTION: Take care that heating during welding to the support plates does not damage load cells. Rags
soaked in water must be wrapped around the load cells to avoid unnecessary increase in
temperature during welding. Use a dummy load cell assembly as shown in figure: 2 to avoid
such type of damages.
NOTE: Preparing struts suitably for purpose of mounting load cells and providing appropriate tie rods,
base plates and support plates are in scope of struts contractor. Tie rods can be of round, flat
bars or angle iron.
To install the load cells, it may be necessary to make some structural modifications, which
can be discussed with Encardio-rite prior to implementation.
The work in § 2.2 is to be executed by the struts contractor under supervision of Installation
personnel.
4.2.3 Remove the two retaining plates once the load cell system is installed. Preload the system to the
specified value.
4.2.4 Check the load cell reading. Take corrective action in case the reading is not within the specified
Page | 11
limits.
4.2.5 Anchor the signal cable from the load cells to the steel surface using adhesive lined or blind riveted
cable clamps as appropriate. Route the cable to the local junction box. To let the adhesive bonds
gain full strength, avoid unnecessary handling of the cable for the next 24 hours.
4.2.6 Mount a junction cum switch box at a suitable location where the load cell readings can be taken
conveniently. It is recommended to mount the switch box on an angle iron framework by making
four 13 mm holes at a spacing of 118 mm x 405 mm. Fix switch box with four M12 x 50 mm hex
bolts, washers, spring washers and nuts. Protect junction box from rain, wind and sunlight etc. by
fixing a protective cover over it.
4.2.7 Terminate the load cells cable coming from local junction box into the switch box. The switch box
has ten input cable glands. The ones not in use should be kept blocked. A four-pin connector has
been provided to assist in taking readings with the EDI-53L read-out unit.
NOTE: Sensors, cables and switch boxes should be properly identified with proper tags. Writing
serial/code number and location on a strip of paper, placing strip near the item and covering it with
a transparent plastic cello tape, can do temporary identification. Use paint for permanent
identification, which is necessary to prevent errors in the long run and ease in operation.
CAUTION: Care should be taken that installed load cell, junction box, cable and switch box are properly
protected against direct sunlight, wind effects, water and mechanical damage caused by
Re-check the load cell readings with the EDI-53L read-out unit or with other read-out unit.
Cable laying
4.2.1 General precautions in laying cable
Careful and skilled cabling is required in the installation of a load cell. The load cell/cable joint and a large
part of the cable may be exposed to blasting and construction work. They should be suitably protected.
Part of the cable may be permanently embedded and no future access may be available for any
 The cable must be protected from damage by angular and sharp particles of material in which
cable is embedded.
CAUTION: Tagging them every 5 m, onwards from the point from which they come out of the load
cell, should properly identify all cables. The tags should be of a non-corrosive material like
Page | 12


 Check insulation resistance. Resistance between any lead and outside casing should be > 500 M Ohm.
If not, cut a meter or so from end of cable and check again.
malfunctioning. Consult manual of indicator for trouble shooting instructions.
generators, transformers, arc welders and antennas. If so shielding from electrical noise could reduce
problem.
 Cable may be cut or crushed? Check resistance between leads by a digital multi-meter. It should
be 1540 Ohm ± 5 % between the red/black leads and 1400 Ohm ± 1 % between the green/white
leads. If the cables are long, please add cable resistance when checking resistance (multiply by 2
for both leads). If resistance reads infinite or a very high value, a cut in the cable is suspected. If
Page | 13
USERS’ MANUAL
RESISTANCE STRAIN GAGE TYPE

COMPRESSION LOAD CELL
MODEL ELC-210S
Doc # WI-6002.105 R00 | Feb 2012

Users’ Manual ELC-210S Resistance strain gage type compression load cell
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1
2 STRAIN GAGE TYPE COMPRESSION LOAD CELL 2

2.3 Test certificate 3
3.1 General 4
3.3 Typical Installation method for the measurement of load in Struts 4
www.encardio.com
1 INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite model ELC-210S is a heavy duty, precision load cell used to measure compressive loads in
several applications due to the following features:
 Specially designed to suit stringent harsh industrial environments.
 Ideally suited for use with data acquisition systems.
 Having no moving parts & mechanical linkages, hence the system is stable.
 Load cells are temperature compensated within controlled limits, reducing the effect of temperature
variation.
Model ELC-210 series load cell is ideally suited for measurement of
compressive loads or forces and is extensively used in load
measurement in struts. The electron beam welded sensor utilizes
precision bonded foil strain gages connected in a simple Wheatstone
bridge circuit. The output is derived from imbalances in the bridge circuit
as load is sensed by the sensor. Typically the bridge circuit is excited
by 10 V DC to give a full scale output of around 1.5 mV/V. Load applied
to the cell can be measured by using any standard digital read-out unit
suitable for resistance strain gage applications.
1.1 Specifications
Please refer data sheet.
permanent damage.

strain gage type load cell in your application.
For installation of strain gage type compression load cells: See § 3 ‘Installation procedure’.
Page | 1
2 STRAIN GAGE TYPE COMPRESSION LOAD CELL

The internal construction of the load cell is Load button Top plate
columnar. The element of the load cell is made of
B
martensitic stainless steel. The element is
hardened to give better linearity and hysteresis.
Load cell
The strain gage used are of foil type and are
Retaining plate
bonded to the elements using special epoxy
A
cements which are very reliable. The sectional area Hex bolts
of the columnar element is varied in the different Bottom plate
capacity load cells to give approximately the same
mV/V output for a variation of zero to full load. A
B
15
cover with glass to metal seal is welded to the
element by electron beam welding machine to
150x150
make the load cell hermetically sealed. Bottom
200x200 fixing plate
The load cells are very susceptible to eccentric
loading. Providing a top plate of proper dimensions
at the top reduces the effect. In some applications, Figure-1 MOUNTING IN STRUT APPLICATIONS
a bottom plate may also be used at the bottom of
the load cell.
Capacity kN Mounting A mm Plate 200 Sq. mm B

thickness
1000/1500 4 holes dia 13 at 150 234 32

Sq. mm
2000/2500/3500 260 45
Leads from the Wheatstone bridge circuit are terminated on a small printed circuit board (PCB), through a
six-pin glass to metal seal in the cable holder assembly. No load output balancing, temperature
compensation and full scale output balancing is done on the PCB. A suitable four core shielded cable is
terminated through a cable joint housing and cable gland

The following tools / accessories are required for installation of the load cell:
2.2.1 Soldering iron 25 watt, temperature controlled
2.2.2 Rosin 63/37 solder wire RF-3C, 30 swg.
2.2.4 Pliers 160 mm
2.2.5 Spanner set

Page | 2
2.3 Test certificate
TEST CERTIFICATE
Date:
Temp. oC
Customer:
P.O. No.
Instrument: Model: ELC-210S compression type load cell
Capacity 1500 kN
Mfg. Sr. No.
Next calibration due on :
Dimension details
Length(mm) Width (mm) Height (mm)

Top plate with load button 200 200 32
Bottom plate 200 200 32
Bottom fixing plate 200 200 15
General details

Input Load kN Output (mV/V)

Cycle 1 Cycle 2
0 0.000 0.000
300 0.311 0.312
600 0.613 0.614
900 0.908 0.909
1200 1.213 1.212
1500 1.506 1.506
annexure-1)
Colour Signal
Red + Excitaion
Black - Excitation
Green + Output
White - Output
Cable Length 2 meter cable ( CS-0406- 4core )
Page | 3
3.1 General
The Encardio-rite model ELC-210S series load cell is a heavy duty, precision load cell and is ideally suited
for measurement of compressive load measurement between structural members. Because of no moving
parts and mechanical linkages the load measurement system using the load cell is stable. The load cells
are temperature compensated reducing the effect of temperature variation. Besides load cell, the
measurement system inludes top and bottom mounting plates, junction box, cable, switch box and a
readout unit. A typical mounting arrangement scheme for strut applications is shown in figure 2
3.2.1 Check working of the Load cell as follows:
 Resistance measured by a digital multi-meter between red/black terminals should be 770 Ohms ± 5
% and between green/white terminals should be 700 Ohm ± 1 %
 Resistance between any lead and outer casing should be > 500 M Ohm.
3.3 Typical Installation method for the measurement of load in Struts
3.3.1 Structural contractor to prepare site/struts for mounting the load cells. Weld two base plates around
500 mm x 300 mm x 25 mm on runner beam. These will support the struts over the runner beam
at the location where the load cells have to be mounted. The faces of the struts have to be provided
with support plates for mounting of load cells. With struts in position, lift load cell assembly by
suitable means and position it between flanges at specified location. Weld the top plate and bottom
fixing plate to the strut flanges.
CAUTION: Take care that load cells are not damaged by heating during welding to the support plates.
Rags soaked in water must be wrapped around the load cells to avoid unnecessary increase
in temperature during welding. Also ensure that there is no direct path for current to pass
through the load cell during any welding operation. This may permanently damage the strain
gages in the load cell.
NOTE: Preparing struts suitably for purpose of mounting load cells and providing appropriate tie rods,
base plates and support plates is in scope of struts contractor. Tie rods can be of round, flat
bars or angle iron. Installation procedures could be suitably modified according to the final
load cell mounting schemes and site conditions as decided by ER installation personnel.
3.3.2 Strutting subcontractor to install load cells in struts under supervision. This includes making
necessary changes in strutting system, providing shim plates for filling any gaps etc. such that load
transfer to load cell is ensured. This can be discussed prior to implementation.
3.3.3 Remove the two retaining plates once the load cell system is installed. Preload the system to the
specified value and check the load cell readings. Take corrective action in case the reading is not
within the specified limits.
3.3.4 Anchor the signal cable from the load cells to the steel surface using adhesive lined or blind riveted
cable clamps as appropriate. Route the cable to the local junction box. To let the adhesive bonds
gain full strength, avoid unnecessary handling of the cable for the next 24 hours.
3.3.5 Mount a junction cum switch box at a suitable location where the load cell readings can be taken
conveniently. Protect junction box from rain, wind & sunlight etc. by fixing a protective cover over
it.
3.3.6 Terminate the load cells cable coming from local junction box into the switch box. The switch box
Page | 4
has ten input cable glands. The ones not in use should be kept blocked. A four-pin connector has
been provided to assist in taking readings with the EDI-53L read-out unit.
3.3.7 Re-check the load cell readings with the EDI-53L read-out unit or with other read-out unit.
Bottom fixing plate

Bottom plate
Top plate
XX
XX
A XX
XX
XX X
XX
XX
XX
Support plate
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Load cell
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX X
XX
XX
XX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
X
XX
XX
XX
X XX
X XX
Strut XX
XX
XX
XX
Base plate XX
XX
XX
X XX
Runner beam XX
XX
Tie rod/bar/angle
Figure-2 LOAD CELL MOUNTING IN STRUTS

APPLICATION King post
NOTE: Sensors, cables and switch boxes should be properly identified with proper tags. Writing
serial/code number and location on a strip of paper, placing strip near the item and covering
it with a transparent plastic cello tape, can do temporary identification. Use paint for
permanent identification, which is necessary to prevent errors in the long run and ease in
operation.
CAUTION: Care should be taken that installed load cell, junction box, cable and switch box are properly
protected against direct sunlight, wind effects, water and mechanical damage caused by
3.4 Taking readings

The load cell readings are taken by EDI-53L portable readout unit and are stored in its internal memory
together with date and time the reading was taken.
3.4.1 Connect the load cell to the readout unit as per table given below.
EDI-53L TERMINAL LOAD CELL WIRING
Red lead with red clip (Exc.+ ) Red (Exc. + )
Black lead with black clip (Exc. - ) Black (Exc. - )
Red lead with yellow clip (I/P + ) Green (O/P + )
Black lead with yellow clip (I/P - ) White (O /P - )
3.4.2 Switch on the readout unit on and note the initial reading of load cell (I/P) in V
Page | 5
3.4.3 Restart the readout unit in SETUP mode & select the desired channel by entering ch-no. (0 to 250).
3.4.4 Select the desired measuring unit (kN) and enter the same.
3.4.5 Enter the initial reading noted above
3.4.6 Enter the gage factor as given in the individual test certificate of each load cell
3.4.7 Press the ENTER key when readout unit asks for X2.
3.4.8 Enter the desired decimal point (DP).
3.4.9 Press Esc to save and exit the SETUP.
3.4.10 Select the same channel (in which the gage factor, initial reading etc, has been entered) by
pressing the ch. no. key to have the output data in engineering unit.

 Check if portable digital indicator works with another load cell If not, the indicator may be
electrical noise.
 Cable may be cut or crushed. Check resistance between leads by a digital multi-meter. It should be
770 Ohm ± 5 % between the red/black leads and 700 Ohm ± 1 % between the green/white leads. If
the cables are long, please add cable resistance when checking resistance (multiply by 2 for both
leads). If resistance reads infinite or a very high value, a cut in the cable is suspected. If resistance
reads very low (< 100 Ohm), a short in cable is likely.
Page | 6
DATASHEET
BUILDING/PAVEMENT
SETTLEMENT POINTS
MODEL EBS-16/EPS-12
OVERVIEW
Encardio-rite model EBS-16 Series building settlement points are used extensively
for measurement of vertical settlement of any concrete/rock structure or building
affected by nearby excavation and construction activities.
Encardio-rite model EPS-12 settlement point is used to monitor vertical settlement

of a pavement or road. It is suitable for applications where the top layer of the road
is asphalt.
 Rugged & low cost  Measurement of vertical

 Compact construction settlement of a structure, building,
pavement or road.
 Ease in installation and removal
www.encardio.com
DESCRIPTION Extra packing and freight cost is applicable on
transportation of epoxy by air. The epoxy may therefore
be directly procured at user’s end from any local supplier.
EBS-16 building settlement point
EPS-12 pavement settlement point
Model EBS-16 consists of a spherical reference locator
with threaded bolt. The reference locater is fixed on a
Model EPS-12 pavement settlement point consists of a
vertical wall or a structure to monitor settlement of
plastic tapered disc and a special retaining nail. It is
structure/building.
suitable for use on a concrete surface, tiles or asphalt
road.
The settlement point is pushed inside the epoxy (Hilti
HY50/HY150 or equivalent) filled hole, using a rotary
Initial settlement reading for EBS-16 or EPS-12 is taken
action, till it is around 54 mm outside the wall surface (see
with a digital tilt meter and leveling staff.
adjacent figure). A slot has been provided on the
threaded portion of the reference locator to prevent it
To determine settlement, subsequent readings are
from being screwed out.
compared with initial reading as reference.

www.encardio.com
DATASHEET
GROUND SETTLEMENT POINT

(SOIL)
MODEL ESMP-10
INTRODUCTION
Encardio-rite model ESMP-10 settlement points are used for

monitoring vertical settlement on the surface of embankments &
soil mass etc. It comprises of an AISI-304 stainless steel
survey pin 16 mm dia, having a hemi-spherical top with a red
colored cross mark; MS extension rod approx. 0.5 m long 16
mm dia.; an outer protective PVC pipe having 48 mm o.d., 37
mm i.d and a MS grouting plate of 150 mm dia, 5 mm thickness.
A lockable protective heavy duty cover is available to protect the
top of installation (to be ordered separately). A schematic
installation diagram is given below.

www.encardio.com
DATASHEET
AUTOMATED TOTAL STATION

WITH CONTROL BOX (TCB)
FOR 3D DEFORMATION MONITORING
INTRODUCTION
Project safety requires 24x7, high frequency and accurate monitoring systems. If
used judiciously with geotechnical instrumentation, geodetic monitoring provides
valuable information which is critical and is extensively used in civil construction
and structural monitoring.
Encardio-rite offers an automatic three-dimensional (3D) deformation monitoring
system with the highest accuracies achievable in the industry presently.
Displacement data is measured from the prism targets by a high precision automatic
total station (ATS) with a dedicated in-house developed control box (TCB) that
includes a computer running advanced software.
• User friendly interface with one click access • Tunnels - metro, rail, road, sewage
to all data. • Dams
• Automatic report generation
• Bridges
• User customizable combined graphs for
• High rise buildings
selected arrays or areas
• Notifications via email (including full • Historical monuments
log)/SMS • Deep excavations, foundations
• Resection solution with least squares
solution for instrument position check
www.encardio.com
AUTOMATED TOTAL STATION (ATS) MONITORING • Configuring and starting the measurement and
SYSTEM recording procedure at predefined frequency
• Regular transmission of the results to a dedicated
The automated 3D deformation monitoring system
central computer or server placed either at site or at
typically consists of optical targets, robotic total station
a remote location
and dedicated control box with advance software that
• Automated database feeding; presentation of the
controls total station. It is capable of measuring any
results in time & distortion graphs designed by
optical target/prism position absolutely as a vector of
database software
combined X, Y and Z movement when the barometric and
temperature corrections have been applied. • Access to view data and results remotely can be given
to all the concerned authorities related to the
The total station and control box, once configured, project’s monitoring.
measures all the targets at predefined frequency and
• Database administrator prepares reports on regular
transmits data continuously at regular intervals to the
basis and submit to project authorities
monitoring database at central server at site or on cloud.
The system can monitor prisms at distance of 100 m Robotic total station
around the total station location for maximum accuracy.
Automated 3D deformation monitoring system supports
The system can be controlled remotely by dedicated robotic total station of almost all the leading brands like
surveyors of the project-for maintenance, changing Leica, Sokia, Topcon and Geomax. Total stations used
frequency, making corrections, turning off/on or reset are preferably with angle H, V measurement accuracy ±
control box, etc. This makes the system very efficient, 1’’ and distance accuracy ± 1 mm + 1.5 ppm).
prompt, user friendly and economic ensuring minimal
The total stations have ability of Auto Target Recognition
time lag between measurements and its evaluation.
(ATR) i.e. all the targets can be aimed automatically
The system ensures valuable and timely monitoring of the (accuracy ± 1 mm) without any human interference. In
displacements, providing high measurements density, case a target is not temporarily visible, the system
simultaneous wireless transmission and automatic entry automatically tries to aim it again before the end of the
of the real time data in the monitoring database at measurements cycle.
central server or cloud.
Total station Control Box (TCB)
METHODOLOGY
The total station control box (TCB) is a combination of
• Installation of optical targets at locations to be hardware and software to have a fully automated solution
monitored for real time 24x7 measurements. It manages total
• Installation of total station and control box at a station, performing following activities:
proper and safe place – having required number of • schedule frequency of measurements
optical targets in line of sight • addition or subtraction of monitor benchmarks
• Wired or wireless connection of the total station with • applying filters of acceptance or repetition of each
a dedicated control box, with suitable power supply measurement
arrangement for total station • calculating and repositioning of the total station, etc.
• Establishment of trigonometric micro-movement • applying temperature and barometric correction
network outside the project's zone of influence factors automatically
www.encardio.com
The control box can store all data internally and can DATABASE SOFTWARE
communicate with the main database server sending the
real time data automatically to the central database. It To suit different requirements of projects and
has provision for 2 sim cards to ensure a steady internet applications, Encardio Group offers different options of
connection. Still, if the connection to database is lost, database software like DRISHTI and TERRAWEB. These
control box can send all the unsent data once it are SQL based database system that supports small or
reconnects to the database. large area projects for 3D points (x,y,z}, level points (only
z) and tunnel points. The soiftware covers alignment,
points, measurements, point groups, monitoring arrays,
tunnels sections, deformation groups and work areas.
Main features
• Filters raw data through moving average or by using
least square filter equations removing the noise from
measurements
• Supports different levels of alarms and alerts
• Combines work progress with instrument data (on
right axes)
• Provides section and plan view diagrams of tunnel
sections.
• Provides tunnel convergence monitoring data
The control box has the provision of 12 V power supply
presentation with displacements vectors of target
and can provide power direct to the supported total points in8jvstalled in a tunnel section
station to save time consumed in replacement of
batteries. It also includes a high capacity UPS which • Can provide deformation contour graphs which helps
enables the system to work even without electric power in understanding the movement between the points
supply for up to 5 hours. The system has additional according to the DZ axis
option to work with solar panel. In Terraweb, point groups and tunnel section groups
The control box is a portable device with easy installation can be created. In Tunnel section, there are 7 charts i.e.
and comes in rugged weather proof box that is IP67, classic five (DXTH, DDCL, DX, DY, DZ) plus two more
with IP-67 rated connectors. (section view and plan view).
Robotic total station installed at Doha Metro-Gold Line, with

control box and solar panel. Moving average filter applied
www.encardio.com
Special 3D software - TunnelCAD
TunnelCAD is a complete solution for graphic and
numerical comparison of design vs. measured cross
sections in tunnels.
Main features
• Automatic creation of 3D visualization from any
measured line.
• Profile evaluation with graphic and/or numeric data
analysis
• All project data in one screen
• 3D display of any measured line; real time display
distance of points from a template line
• Layer thickness analysis (shotcrete, concrete).
• Section prints using custom or integrated layouts
• Interface to handle sections, alignment, template
sections together
• Provides as built documentation
• Standalone drawing environment compatible with
DWG/DXF/DGN
• Compact project that can be saved in one file.
Alert/Alarm
limit levels
Underground cavern or tunnel convergence monitoring

methods with displacements vectors of target points with
Terraweb
A deformation contour with zero points and with triangles Real time display of distance of points from a template line with
among points with Terraweb TunnelCAD
www.encardio.com
HIGHLIGHTS OF WEB BASED DATA MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM (WDMS)
• Comprehensive data management system that can • Live monitoring display of all the incoming
store data from different sources measurements, updated in near real time
• Easy access to meaningful instrumentation data. Data • Create diagrams from any combination of parameters
is presented in graphical as well as numerical format & time period.
• Results are accessible on tablets and smartphones • Multiple authorized users at different locations can
• Access to different sensors on one screen simultaneously interact with the software through a
• Instant alerts via SMS or email to authorized web-browser to view any real time data/changes,
personnel graphs or reports from any site
• Combined charts in one report (mix water level, • Low operational cost
pumped water quantity) • User friendly for day-to-day operations
Right axes with

Alert/Alarm work progress
limit levels
Work progress
Terraweb Chart with: i) limits, ii) work progress, iii) points data
All specifications are subject to change without prior notice DATASHEET | 1808-20 R01

www.encardio.com
DATASHEET
REFLECTIVE TARGETS
MODEL ERT-10/20 Series
OVERVIEW
Encardio-rite reflective targets are designed to suit a wide variety of surveying

applications. They are used extensively for measurement of deformation during
tunneling and subway construction, for monitoring bridges, dams, slopes and
building structures.
 Precise, rugged, interchangeable  Measurement of deformation in

and low cost tunnel
 Compact construction  Measurement of deformation in
 Easy installation subway construction
 Robust frame and bolts with firm  Monitoring of dams, bridges and
grip slopes
 Precise surveying application  Monitoring of building structures
where total stations are used.  Surveying works.
www.encardio.com
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
Model ERT-10B Bireflex target
ERT-10B Bireflex target (Part # 11-05150)
Model ERT-10B bireflex target consists of Measuring range Approximately 12 m to 140 m
reflector mounted on a robust frame. The
target has reflectors on both the sides Manufacturing
and is mounted on a universal joint such accuracy ± 0.1 mm
that it can be oriented in any direction as
required. The target has a small centre Reflector support is plastic,
mounted on universal joints with
hole to allow precise targeting.
Material reflective foil on both sides
The bireflex target is made of high ERT-10P2 Prism target (Part # 11-06032)
performance materials and precise manufacturing
Measuring range Approximately 0.3 m to 600 m
processes. The target is thus, interchangeable.
Manufacturing accuracy ± 0.1 mm
Model ERT-10P Prism target
Addition Constant +17.5 mm
Model ERT-10P prism target consist of Prism support is plastic,

a mini prism mounted on a robust Material mounted on universal joints
frame. This is also mounted on a Protective cap (Part # 11-10053)
universal joint such that it can be
oriented in any direction as required. Material Red polyvinyl chloride
The target is interchangeable.
Break-off point 12 mm (Part # 11-05133)
Optional components Material Plastic - Acetal
Break-off point 8 mm (Part # 11-13024)

The optional components which can be ordered separately
with both model ERT-10B and ERT-10P include Material Plastic - Acetal
convergence bolts with protective cap and adaptor with
ERT-20P2-M1 Mini prism target (Part # 11-06035)
reference break-off point. The break-off point adaptor is
required to mount the target on the convergence bolts. Measuring range Approximately 0.3 m to 600 m
Addition constant +17.5 mm

Convergence bolts 12 mm dia (Part # 11-10052)
Galvanised steel rebar 12 mm
with stainless steel threaded
Model ERT-20P2-M1 Mini prism target Material stud
Length 170 mm standard

Model ERT-20P-M1
mini prism consists of a Convergence bolts 8 mm dia (Part # 11-13025)
prism mounted on a
swivel bracket. This Galvanised steel rebar 8 mm
with stainless steel threaded
target is not
Material stud
interchangeable.
Length 170 mm standard

www.encardio.com

Encardio Combined Manuals

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Encardio Combined Manuals

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ONE STOP MONITORING SOLUTIONS | HYDROLOGY | GEOTECHNICAL | STRUCTURAL | GEODETIC

Over 50 years of excellence through ingenuity

DIGITAL INCLINOMETER SYSTEM

Doc. # WI 6002.104 R02 | Nov 2018

ENCARDIO-RITE ELECTRONICS PVT. LTD.

4 TOOLS & ACCESSORIES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION 9

5.5.5 Top protection 23

6 PREPARATION FOR AND OBTAINING READINGS 25

 Earth movement in landslide zone.

 Measuring stability during construction.

 Deflection of diaphragm/retaining walls and piles under load.

1.1 Displacement measurement

1.2 Casing storage

 Do not apply too much load or force on casing.

 Do not warp or bend during storage.

1.3 Conventions used in this manual

1.5 How to use this manual

For principle of operation: See § 2.1 ‘Operating principle’.

For inclinometer system manufactured by Encardio-rite: See § 2.2 ‘General description’.

For installation of PVC casing: See § 5 ‘Installation of casing’.

2.1 Operating principle

2.2 General description - EAN-26 digital inclinometer system

The EAN-26 digital inclinometer system basically consists of:

 Access casing and fittings

 Interconnecting cable with reel and cable holder

 Mobile phone datalogger

2.2.1.2 EAN-FC70 ABS fixed coupling (70 mm)

Figure 2.3 ABS casing with fixed coupling

2.2.1.3 EAN-TC70 ABS telescopic coupling (70 mm)

Figure 2.4 ABS casing with telescopic coupling

2.2.1.7 Pop rivet gun

A four pin connector is provided for connecting read-out to probe.

It has GPRS/3G which enables user to access internet

3.2 Cable reel

Outer sheath Polyurethane Polyurethane

3.3 Mobile phone datalogger (minimum requirements)

Display 4.0 inches, LCD touch screen, 480x800 pixels

Bluetooth v2.1 with A2DP

Mobile Network 2G Network: GSM850/900/1800/190

3.4 Accessories (to be ordered separately)

 Casing and fittings

 Probe calibration check frame

4 TOOLS & ACCESSORIES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION

2 50 mm wide water proof sealing tape

7 Flat file 150 mm

8 Safety line or tension cable in case hole is very deep

9 Clean water supply to clean casing

11 Casing collar protection if required

12 Grout tube - requisite length

14 Aluminium pop rivets - four per joint plus some extra

15 Pop rivet gun

16 Drill with a 3.15 mm spare drill bit.

17 Casing clamps - 2 sets

18 Plumb bob with 5 m chord

Following general instructions for installing ABS casing are typical

Inspect casing to ensure that damage in transit or storage has not

NOTE: Pre-assembly and storage of inclinometer

b. Push bottom end cap over casing. Fix it to

c. Seal joint between bottom cap and casing with

160 mm Fixed coupling

400 mm Telescopic Coupling

Figure 5.4 Do not over tighten screw

Figure 5.5 For settlement monitoring 2.5 mm holes

Figure 5.6 Installation positions of casing ends & Casing